Osn 6800 PDF

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01
Hardware Description
Issue Date 01 2011-07-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
Product Name OptiX OSN 8800 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 iManager U2000 iManager U2000 Web LCT Version V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R006C01 V100R005C00 V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the hardware feature of a cabinet and each subrack, in addition to application, working principle, front panel, and specifications of each board. This document is intended for: l l l l l l l Network Planning Engineer Hardware Installation Engineer Installation and Commissioning Engineer Field Maintenance Engineer Network Monitoring Engineer Data Configuration Engineer System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
About This Document
Symbol
Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
WARNING
CAUTION
TIP
NOTE
Diagram Conventions
The Diagram conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Description Indicates the flow of optical signals. Indicates the flow of electrical signals. Indicates an optical module.
Indicates an electrical module.
All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
iii
About This Document
Convention Boldface >
Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update Whole manual Description l Added descriptions of the TN11LOA, TN55TQX, TN53TDX, TN13OAU1, TN53NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2, TN55NPO2E, TN12M40, TN12M40V, TN12D40, TN16SCC, TNK4SXH, TNK4SXM, TNK4XCT, N3EAS2, TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards. l Updated the descriptions of cabinets. Cabinets are described by the cabinet model instead of device model. In addition, descriptions of typical cabinet configurations and fiber management frames are added. l Added the mappings between the board and equipment to the "Version Description" section. 14 Optical Transponder Unit 15 Tributary Unit and Line Unit 16 PID Unit 15.9 TOA l Added service mapping paths from FC400 and 3G-SDI to ODUflex. l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages. l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features" table.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv
l Described service configuration in two separate sections: "Physical and Logical Ports" and "Configuration of Cross-Connection". l Added the mappings between boards and optical modules to sections that list board specifications, for example, "Specifications of the ND2".
About This Document
Update 15.8 THA
Description l Added the descriptions of configuring service packages. l Added the IEEE 1588v2 function to the "Functions and Features" table. Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.
15.11 TOM
Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update Whole manual Description l Added descriptions of the TN54TOA, TN54THA, TN53TQX, TN12OBU1P1, and TNK2SXH boards. l Deleted descriptions of the TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12ELQX, and TN12PTQX boards descriptions.

This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update Whole manual Description l Added descriptions of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. l Added descriptions of the TN11DAS1, TN11LSQ, and TN11WSMD9 boards l Added the "Optical-layer ASON" and "Electrical-layer ASON" rows to the "Functions and Features" table. 14.13 LOM 16.6 NPO2 21.5 XCM Added a description of the TN12LOM board's capability to support 3GSDI services. Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2 board. Added descriptions of the TN52XCM02.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
About This Document

This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. Compared with the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates. Update 14.20 LSXL C Quick Reference Table of the Units 14 Optical Transponder Unit 15 Tributary Unit and Line Unit 16 PID Unit 21.3 TN52XCH Added information about the TN52XCH02. Added information about the LPT function and protocol or standard compliance in Functions and Features. Description Deleted information about the TN13LSXL.

This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04, and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual. Update Whole manual Description l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any difference between the products is described in the manual. l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64. l The descriptions of the following boards are added: TN11LEM24, TN11LEX4, TN13LSXL,TN54NS3, TN53TSXL, TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, TN11SFIU, TN11RMU902, TN12WSMD4, TN11ST2, TN11OPM8, TNL1STI, N4BPA 30 Optical Attenuator30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Introduction to fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators is added.
vi
About This Document
Update 31 Filler Panels
Description Introduction to filler panels is added.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
vii
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 N63B Cabinet..................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Appearance.........................................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Configuration......................................................................................................................................................3 1.3 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................4
2 N66B Cabinet..................................................................................................................................6
2.1 Appearance.........................................................................................................................................................7 2.2 Configuration......................................................................................................................................................8 2.3 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................9
3 Fiber Management Frame..........................................................................................................11 4 DC PDU.........................................................................................................................................16

4.1 TN16PDU.........................................................................................................................................................17 4.2 TN11PDU.........................................................................................................................................................18
5 UPM................................................................................................................................................22 6 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack...........................................................................................................29

6.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.........................................................................................................................30 6.1.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................30 6.1.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................32 6.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)...........................................................................................33 6.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.........................................................................................................................38 6.2.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................38 6.2.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................42 6.2.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)...........................................................................................44 6.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.........................................................................................................................48 6.3.1 Structure...................................................................................................................................................48 6.3.2 Slot Description.......................................................................................................................................51 6.3.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)...........................................................................................52 6.4 PIU....................................................................................................................................................................57 6.4.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................57 6.4.2 Application..............................................................................................................................................57 6.4.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................58 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii
Contents
6.4.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................58 6.4.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................59 6.4.6 Specifications of the PIU.........................................................................................................................60 6.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces........................................................................60 6.5.1 ATE.........................................................................................................................................................63 6.5.2 EFI...........................................................................................................................................................70 6.5.3 EFI1.........................................................................................................................................................79 6.5.4 EFI2.........................................................................................................................................................83 6.5.5 STI...........................................................................................................................................................90
7 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category..............................................................................................95 8 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.........................................................................................................106

8.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................107 8.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................................110 8.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)..................................................................................................111 8.4 PIU..................................................................................................................................................................116 8.4.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................116 8.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................................116 8.4.3 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................117 8.4.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................118 8.4.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................118 8.4.6 Specifications of the PIU.......................................................................................................................119 8.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces......................................................................119 8.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area..............................................................................................................120 8.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board..................................................................................123 8.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces................................................................................................................124
9 OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category............................................................................................134 10 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis........................................................................................................140

10.1 Chassis Structure..........................................................................................................................................141 10.2 Slot Description............................................................................................................................................143 10.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan)................................................................................................144 10.4 PIU................................................................................................................................................................148 10.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................148 10.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................148 10.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................148 10.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................148 10.4.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................149 10.4.6 Specifications of the PIU.....................................................................................................................149 10.5 APIU.............................................................................................................................................................150 10.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................150 10.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................150 10.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................150 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
10.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................151 10.5.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................152 10.5.6 Specifications of the APIU..................................................................................................................152 10.6 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces....................................................................153 10.6.1 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board................................................................................153 10.6.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces..............................................................................................................154
11 OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category..........................................................................................160 12 Frame..........................................................................................................................................164

12.1 DCM Frame..................................................................................................................................................165 12.2 CRPC Frame.................................................................................................................................................168 12.3 Digital Video O-E Converter........................................................................................................................169 12.4 Fiber Spooling Frame...................................................................................................................................172
13 Overview of Boards.................................................................................................................174
13.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions.............................................................................................................175 13.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions...............................................................................................................175 13.1.2 Laser Hazard Level Label....................................................................................................................177 13.2 Bar Code for Boards.....................................................................................................................................178 13.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................178 13.2.2 Characteristic Code..............................................................................................................................181
14 Optical Transponder Unit......................................................................................................182

14.1 ECOM...........................................................................................................................................................184 14.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................184 14.1.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................184 14.1.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................186 14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................187 14.1.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................191 14.1.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................192 14.1.7 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................192 14.1.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................194 14.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................195 14.1.10 Specifications of the ECOM..............................................................................................................196 14.2 L4G...............................................................................................................................................................200 14.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................200 14.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................201 14.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................201 14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................203 14.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................206 14.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................208 14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G..........................................................................................................208 14.2.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................208 14.2.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................210 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x
Contents
14.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................211 14.2.11 Specifications of the L4G..................................................................................................................213 14.3 LDGD...........................................................................................................................................................218 14.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................218 14.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................218 14.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................219 14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................221 14.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................224 14.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................225 14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD......................................................................................................226 14.3.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................226 14.3.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................227 14.3.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................229 14.3.11 Specifications of the LDGD..............................................................................................................231 14.4 LDGS............................................................................................................................................................236 14.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................237 14.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................237 14.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................237 14.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................240 14.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................243 14.4.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................244 14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.......................................................................................................245 14.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................245 14.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................246 14.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................247 14.4.11 Specifications of the LDGS...............................................................................................................249 14.5 LDM.............................................................................................................................................................256 14.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................256 14.5.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................256 14.5.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................257 14.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................261 14.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................264 14.5.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................265 14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM........................................................................................................266 14.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................266 14.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................266 14.5.10 Specifications of the LDM................................................................................................................269 14.6 LDMD..........................................................................................................................................................278 14.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................278 14.6.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................278 14.6.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................279 14.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................282 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
14.6.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................285 14.6.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................286 14.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD.....................................................................................................287 14.6.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................287 14.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................288 14.6.10 Specifications of the LDMD..............................................................................................................291 14.7 LDMS...........................................................................................................................................................298 14.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................298 14.7.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................299 14.7.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................299 14.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................303 14.7.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................306 14.7.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................307 14.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS......................................................................................................308 14.7.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................308 14.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS........................................................................................308 14.7.10 Specifications of the LDMS..............................................................................................................311 14.8 LDX..............................................................................................................................................................319 14.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................319 14.8.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................319 14.8.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................320 14.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................322 14.8.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................325 14.8.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................327 14.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX.........................................................................................................327 14.8.8 Board Service Configuration...............................................................................................................327 14.8.9 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................328 14.8.10 LDX Loopbacks................................................................................................................................328 14.8.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................330 14.8.12 Specifications of the LDX.................................................................................................................333 14.9 LEM24..........................................................................................................................................................339 14.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................339 14.9.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................340 14.9.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................340 14.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................344 14.9.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................348 14.9.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................350 14.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24 ....................................................................................................351 14.9.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................351 14.9.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................353 14.9.10 Board Function Configuration...........................................................................................................354 14.9.11 LEM24 loopback...............................................................................................................................354 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii
Contents
14.9.12 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................360 14.9.13 Specifications of the LEM24.............................................................................................................363 14.10 LEX4..........................................................................................................................................................370 14.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................370 14.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................................370 14.10.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................371 14.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................374 14.10.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................378 14.10.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................379 14.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4 ....................................................................................................380 14.10.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................380 14.10.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................381 14.10.10 Board Function Configuration.........................................................................................................382 14.10.11 LEX4 loopback................................................................................................................................382 14.10.12 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................385 14.10.13 Specifications of the LEX4 .............................................................................................................388 14.11 LOA............................................................................................................................................................393 14.11.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................393 14.11.2 Application........................................................................................................................................394 14.11.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................396 14.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................401 14.11.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................404 14.11.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................406 14.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LOA.......................................................................................................407 14.11.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................407 14.11.9 Configuring Cross-Connections........................................................................................................412 14.11.10 LOA Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................414 14.11.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................424 14.11.12 Specifications of the LOA...............................................................................................................429 14.12 LOG............................................................................................................................................................442 14.12.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................442 14.12.2 Application........................................................................................................................................443 14.12.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................444 14.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................446 14.12.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................450 14.12.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................452 14.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG.......................................................................................................453 14.12.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................453 14.12.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................454 14.12.10 LOG Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................456 14.12.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................457 14.12.12 Specifications of the LOG...............................................................................................................460 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Contents
14.13 LOM...........................................................................................................................................................470 14.13.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................470 14.13.2 Application........................................................................................................................................472 14.13.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................472 14.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................476 14.13.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................481 14.13.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................485 14.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM......................................................................................................485 14.13.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................486 14.13.9 LOM loopback...................................................................................................................................487 14.13.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................489 14.13.11 Specifications of the LOM..............................................................................................................493 14.14 LQG............................................................................................................................................................503 14.14.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................503 14.14.2 Application........................................................................................................................................504 14.14.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................504 14.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................506 14.14.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................509 14.14.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................510 14.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG.......................................................................................................511 14.14.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................511 14.14.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................512 14.14.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................513 14.14.11 Specifications of the LQG...............................................................................................................516 14.15 LQM...........................................................................................................................................................522 14.15.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................522 14.15.2 Application........................................................................................................................................523 14.15.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................524 14.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................528 14.15.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................532 14.15.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................534 14.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM......................................................................................................534 14.15.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................535 14.15.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................537 14.15.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................538 14.15.11 Specifications of the LQM..............................................................................................................541 14.16 LQMD........................................................................................................................................................550 14.16.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................550 14.16.2 Application........................................................................................................................................551 14.16.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................551 14.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................556 14.16.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................560 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv
Contents
14.16.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................562 14.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD...................................................................................................563 14.16.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................563 14.16.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................565 14.16.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................567 14.16.11 Specifications of the LQMD............................................................................................................570 14.17 LQMS.........................................................................................................................................................580 14.17.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................580 14.17.2 Application........................................................................................................................................581 14.17.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................582 14.17.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................588 14.17.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................593 14.17.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................595 14.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS....................................................................................................596 14.17.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................596 14.17.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................598 14.17.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................601 14.17.11 Specifications of the LQMS............................................................................................................604 14.18 LSQ.............................................................................................................................................................614 14.18.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................614 14.18.2 Application........................................................................................................................................615 14.18.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................615 14.18.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................617 14.18.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................620 14.18.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................621 14.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LSQ.......................................................................................................622 14.18.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................622 14.18.9 LSQ Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................622 14.18.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................625 14.18.11 Specifications of the LSQ................................................................................................................628 14.19 LSX.............................................................................................................................................................631 14.19.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................631 14.19.2 Application........................................................................................................................................633 14.19.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................633 14.19.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................636 14.19.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................640 14.19.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................642 14.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX.......................................................................................................643 14.19.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................643 14.19.9 LSX Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................643 14.19.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................646 14.19.11 Specifications of the LSX................................................................................................................649 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv
Contents
14.20 LSXL..........................................................................................................................................................659 14.20.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................659 14.20.2 Application........................................................................................................................................660 14.20.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................661 14.20.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................663 14.20.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................667 14.20.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................670 14.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL.....................................................................................................671 14.20.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................671 14.20.9 LSXL Loopbacks...............................................................................................................................672 14.20.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................675 14.20.11 Specifications of the LSXL.............................................................................................................678 14.21 LSXLR........................................................................................................................................................682 14.21.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................682 14.21.2 Application........................................................................................................................................682 14.21.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................683 14.21.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................685 14.21.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................687 14.21.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................690 14.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR..................................................................................................691 14.21.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................691 14.21.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................692 14.21.10 Specifications of the LSXLR...........................................................................................................694 14.22 LSXR..........................................................................................................................................................696 14.22.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................697 14.22.2 Application........................................................................................................................................697 14.22.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................697 14.22.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................699 14.22.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................701 14.22.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................703 14.22.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR.....................................................................................................704 14.22.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................704 14.22.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................704 14.22.10 Specifications of the LSXR.............................................................................................................706 14.23 LWX2.........................................................................................................................................................710 14.23.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................710 14.23.2 Application........................................................................................................................................710 14.23.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................711 14.23.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................714 14.23.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................716 14.23.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................717 14.23.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2....................................................................................................718 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi
Contents
14.23.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................718 14.23.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................719 14.23.10 Specifications of the LWX2............................................................................................................721 14.24 LWXD........................................................................................................................................................728 14.24.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................728 14.24.2 Application........................................................................................................................................729 14.24.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................729 14.24.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................733 14.24.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................735 14.24.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................736 14.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD...................................................................................................736 14.24.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................737 14.24.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................737 14.24.10 Specifications of the LWXD...........................................................................................................739 14.25 LWXS.........................................................................................................................................................747 14.25.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................747 14.25.2 Application........................................................................................................................................748 14.25.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................748 14.25.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................752 14.25.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................754 14.25.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................756 14.25.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS....................................................................................................757 14.25.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................757 14.25.9 LWXS loopback................................................................................................................................757 14.25.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................759 14.25.11 Specifications of the LWXS............................................................................................................762 14.26 TMX...........................................................................................................................................................769 14.26.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................769 14.26.2 Application........................................................................................................................................771 14.26.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................771 14.26.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................773 14.26.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................776 14.26.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................777 14.26.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX......................................................................................................778 14.26.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................778 14.26.9 TMX Loopbacks................................................................................................................................779 14.26.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................781 14.26.11 Specifications of the TMX..............................................................................................................783
15 Tributary Unit and Line Unit................................................................................................796

15.1 ND2..............................................................................................................................................................798 15.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................798 15.1.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................799 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii
Contents
15.1.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................803 15.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................809 15.1.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................817 15.1.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................819 15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2.........................................................................................................820 15.1.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................820 15.1.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................825 15.1.10 ND2 loopbacks..................................................................................................................................838 15.1.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................849 15.1.12 Specifications of the ND2..................................................................................................................853 15.2 NQ2..............................................................................................................................................................860 15.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................860 15.2.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................861 15.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................864 15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................870 15.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................879 15.2.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................881 15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2.........................................................................................................882 15.2.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................882 15.2.9 Configuration of Cross-connection.....................................................................................................889 15.2.10 NQ2 Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................902 15.2.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................919 15.2.12 Specifications of the NQ2..................................................................................................................922 15.3 NS2...............................................................................................................................................................928 15.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................928 15.3.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................929 15.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................931 15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................938 15.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................947 15.3.6 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................948 15.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2..........................................................................................................949 15.3.8 Physical and Logical Ports..................................................................................................................949 15.3.9 Configuring Cross-Connections..........................................................................................................955 15.3.10 NS2 Loopbacks..................................................................................................................................966 15.3.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................978 15.3.12 Specifications of the NS2..................................................................................................................982 15.4 NS3...............................................................................................................................................................989 15.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................990 15.4.2 Application..........................................................................................................................................991 15.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................993 15.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1000 15.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1007 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xviii
Contents
15.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1009 15.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NS3........................................................................................................1010 15.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1011 15.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1015 15.4.10 NS3 Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1021 15.4.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1047 15.4.12 Specifications of the NS3................................................................................................................1052 15.5 TBE.............................................................................................................................................................1055 15.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1055 15.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1056 15.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1056 15.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1059 15.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1062 15.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1064 15.5.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1064 15.5.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1066 15.5.9 TBE Loopbacks.................................................................................................................................1067 15.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1072 15.5.11 Specifications of the TBE................................................................................................................1072 15.6 TDG............................................................................................................................................................1078 15.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1078 15.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1079 15.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1079 15.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1081 15.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1083 15.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1085 15.6.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1085 15.6.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1087 15.6.9 TDG Parameters................................................................................................................................1089 15.6.10 Specifications of the TDG...............................................................................................................1090 15.7 TDX............................................................................................................................................................1093 15.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1094 15.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1095 15.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1096 15.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1099 15.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1104 15.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1107 15.7.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1108 15.7.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1110 15.7.9 TDX Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1113 15.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1117 15.7.11 Specifications of the TDX...............................................................................................................1121 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix
Contents
15.8 THA............................................................................................................................................................1125 15.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1125 15.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1125 15.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1128 15.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1131 15.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1134 15.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1135 15.8.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1136 15.8.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1140 15.8.9 THA Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1145 15.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1155 15.8.11 Specifications of the THA...............................................................................................................1159 15.9 TOA............................................................................................................................................................1161 15.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1161 15.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1162 15.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1165 15.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1169 15.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1171 15.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1173 15.9.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1173 15.9.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1178 15.9.9 TOA Loopbacks................................................................................................................................1183 15.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1194 15.9.11 Specifications of the TOA...............................................................................................................1198 15.10 TOG..........................................................................................................................................................1205 15.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1205 15.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1206 15.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1206 15.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1208 15.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1211 15.10.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1213 15.10.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1213 15.10.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1215 15.10.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1216 15.10.10 Specifications of the TOG.............................................................................................................1218 15.11 TOM.........................................................................................................................................................1221 15.11.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1221 15.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1222 15.11.3 Function and Feature.......................................................................................................................1236 15.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1243 15.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1272 15.11.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1273 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xx
Contents
15.11.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1274 15.11.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1286 15.11.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1308 15.11.10 Specifications of the TOM............................................................................................................1313 15.12 TQM.........................................................................................................................................................1323 15.12.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1323 15.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1324 15.12.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1325 15.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1329 15.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1332 15.12.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1333 15.12.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1334 15.12.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1336 15.12.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1338 15.12.10 Specifications of the TQM............................................................................................................1340 15.13 TQS...........................................................................................................................................................1347 15.13.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1347 15.13.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1348 15.13.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1348 15.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1350 15.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1353 15.13.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1354 15.13.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1354 15.13.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1356 15.13.9 TQS Loopbacks...............................................................................................................................1357 15.13.10 TQS Parameters.............................................................................................................................1358 15.13.11 Specifications of the TQS..............................................................................................................1360 15.14 TQX..........................................................................................................................................................1364 15.14.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1364 15.14.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1366 15.14.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1367 15.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1369 15.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1374 15.14.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1376 15.14.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1377 15.14.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1378 15.14.9 TQX Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................1380 15.14.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................1382 15.14.11 Specifications of the TQX.............................................................................................................1386 15.15 TSXL........................................................................................................................................................1390 15.15.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................1390 15.15.2 Application......................................................................................................................................1391 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi
Contents
15.15.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................1392 15.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................1394 15.15.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................1397 15.15.6 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................1400 15.15.7 Physical and Logical Ports..............................................................................................................1400 15.15.8 Configuration of Cross-connection.................................................................................................1402 15.15.9 TSXL Loopbacks.............................................................................................................................1403 15.15.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................1406 15.15.11 Specifications of the TSXL...........................................................................................................1408
16 PID Unit...................................................................................................................................1410
16.1 BMD4.........................................................................................................................................................1411 16.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1411 16.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1411 16.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1412 16.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1413 16.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1414 16.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1416 16.1.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4.....................................................................................................1417 16.1.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4........................................................................................................1417 16.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1418 16.1.10 Specifications of the BMD4............................................................................................................1419 16.2 BMD8.........................................................................................................................................................1420 16.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1421 16.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1421 16.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1422 16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1422 16.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1424 16.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1426 16.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8.....................................................................................................1427 16.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8........................................................................................................1427 16.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1430 16.2.10 Specifications of the BMD8............................................................................................................1431 16.3 ELQX..........................................................................................................................................................1433 16.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1433 16.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1433 16.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1434 16.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1436 16.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1439 16.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1440 16.3.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1440 16.3.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1442 16.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1445 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxii
Contents
16.3.10 Specifications of the ELQX.............................................................................................................1448 16.4 PTQX..........................................................................................................................................................1452 16.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1452 16.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1454 16.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1455 16.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1457 16.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1460 16.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1462 16.4.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX......................................................................................................1462 16.4.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1463 16.4.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1465 16.4.10 PTQX Parameters............................................................................................................................1468 16.4.11 Specifications of the PTQX.............................................................................................................1471 16.5 NPO2E........................................................................................................................................................1476 16.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1476 16.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1479 16.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1481 16.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1484 16.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1487 16.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1489 16.5.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E....................................................................................................1490 16.5.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1490 16.5.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1493 16.5.10 NPO2E Loopbacks..........................................................................................................................1497 16.5.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1503 16.5.12 Specifications of the NPO2E...........................................................................................................1505 16.6 NPO2..........................................................................................................................................................1507 16.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1507 16.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1511 16.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1514 16.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1517 16.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1521 16.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1523 16.6.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2......................................................................................................1523 16.6.8 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1524 16.6.9 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1527 16.6.10 NPO2 Loopbacks.............................................................................................................................1537 16.6.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1546 16.6.12 Specifications of the NPO2.............................................................................................................1549 16.7 ENQ2..........................................................................................................................................................1551 16.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1551 16.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1552 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii
Contents
16.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1553 16.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1557 16.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1559 16.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1560 16.7.7 Physical and Logical Ports................................................................................................................1561 16.7.8 Configuration of Cross-connection...................................................................................................1564 16.7.9 ENQ2 Loopbacks..............................................................................................................................1570 16.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1579 16.7.11 Specifications of the ENQ2.............................................................................................................1581
17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Unit................................................................1582

17.1 M40.............................................................................................................................................................1583 17.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1583 17.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1584 17.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1584 17.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1585 17.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1586 17.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1591 17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40.......................................................................................................1592 17.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1592 17.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1592 17.1.10 Specifications of the M40................................................................................................................1593 17.2 M40V..........................................................................................................................................................1594 17.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1594 17.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1595 17.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1596 17.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1596 17.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1598 17.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1602 17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V.....................................................................................................1603 17.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1603 17.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1603 17.2.10 Specifications of the M40V.............................................................................................................1604 17.3 D40.............................................................................................................................................................1606 17.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1606 17.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1607 17.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1607 17.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1608 17.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1609 17.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1614 17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40........................................................................................................1615 17.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1615 17.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1615 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiv
Contents
17.3.10 Specifications of the D40................................................................................................................1616 17.4 D40V..........................................................................................................................................................1617 17.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1617 17.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1618 17.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1618 17.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1619 17.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1621 17.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1624 17.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V.....................................................................................................1625 17.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1625 17.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1626 17.4.10 Specifications of the D40V..............................................................................................................1627 17.5 DFIU...........................................................................................................................................................1628 17.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1628 17.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1628 17.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1629 17.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1629 17.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1631 17.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1632 17.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU......................................................................................................1632 17.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1633 17.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1633 17.5.10 Specifications of the DFIU..............................................................................................................1634 17.6 FIU..............................................................................................................................................................1635 17.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1635 17.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1637 17.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1638 17.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1638 17.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1641 17.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1646 17.6.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU.........................................................................................................1647 17.6.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1648 17.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1648 17.6.10 Specifications of the FIU.................................................................................................................1650 17.7 ITL..............................................................................................................................................................1651 17.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1651 17.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1652 17.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1653 17.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1653 17.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1655 17.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1658 17.7.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL.........................................................................................................1659 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv
Contents
17.7.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1659 17.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1660 17.7.10 Specifications of the ITL.................................................................................................................1660 17.8 SFIU............................................................................................................................................................1663 17.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1663 17.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1663 17.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1664 17.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1664 17.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1666 17.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1667 17.8.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU......................................................................................................1668 17.8.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1668 17.8.9 SFIU Parameters................................................................................................................................1668 17.8.10 Specifications of the SFIU...............................................................................................................1670
18 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit........................................................................1672

18.1 CMR1.........................................................................................................................................................1673 18.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1673 18.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1673 18.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1673 18.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1674 18.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1675 18.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1677 18.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1....................................................................................................1677 18.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1677 18.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1678 18.1.10 Specifications of the CMR1............................................................................................................1678 18.2 CMR2.........................................................................................................................................................1679 18.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1679 18.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1680 18.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1680 18.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1681 18.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1682 18.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1685 18.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2....................................................................................................1685 18.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1686 18.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1686 18.2.10 Specifications of the CMR2............................................................................................................1687 18.3 CMR4.........................................................................................................................................................1688 18.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1689 18.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1689 18.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1690 18.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1690 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvi
Contents
18.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1692 18.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1694 18.3.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4....................................................................................................1694 18.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1695 18.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1696 18.3.10 Specifications of the CMR4............................................................................................................1696 18.4 DMR1.........................................................................................................................................................1698 18.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1698 18.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1699 18.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1699 18.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1700 18.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1701 18.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1704 18.4.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1....................................................................................................1704 18.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1705 18.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1705 18.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1............................................................................................................1706 18.5 MR2............................................................................................................................................................1707 18.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1707 18.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1708 18.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1708 18.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1709 18.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1710 18.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1713 18.5.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2.......................................................................................................1713 18.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1714 18.5.9 MR2 Parameters................................................................................................................................1714 18.5.10 Specifications of the MR2...............................................................................................................1715 18.6 MR4............................................................................................................................................................1716 18.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1716 18.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1717 18.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1718 18.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1718 18.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1720 18.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1722 18.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR4.......................................................................................................1722 18.6.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1723 18.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1724 18.6.10 Specifications of the MR4...............................................................................................................1724 18.7 MR8............................................................................................................................................................1727 18.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1727 18.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1727 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvii
Contents
18.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1727 18.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1728 18.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1729 18.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1731 18.7.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8.......................................................................................................1731 18.7.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1732 18.7.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1733 18.7.10 Specifications of the MR8...............................................................................................................1733 18.8 MR8V.........................................................................................................................................................1736 18.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1736 18.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1736 18.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1737 18.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1737 18.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1739 18.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1741 18.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V....................................................................................................1742 18.8.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1742 18.8.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1743 18.8.10 Specifications of the MR8V............................................................................................................1744 18.9 SBM2..........................................................................................................................................................1747 18.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1747 18.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1748 18.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1748 18.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1748 18.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1750 18.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1751 18.9.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1752 18.9.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1752 18.9.9 Specifications of the SBM2...............................................................................................................1753
19 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit..........................................1754

19.1 RDU9..........................................................................................................................................................1755 19.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1755 19.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1755 19.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1756 19.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1757 19.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1758 19.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1760 19.1.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1761 19.1.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1761 19.1.9 Specifications of the RDU9...............................................................................................................1762 19.2 RMU9.........................................................................................................................................................1763 19.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1763 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxviii
Contents
19.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1764 19.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1764 19.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1765 19.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1767 19.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1769 19.2.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1770 19.2.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1770 19.2.9 Specifications of the RMU9..............................................................................................................1772 19.3 ROAM........................................................................................................................................................1773 19.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1773 19.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1774 19.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1774 19.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1775 19.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1777 19.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1780 19.3.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1781 19.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1781 19.3.9 Specifications of the ROAM.............................................................................................................1782 19.4 WSD9.........................................................................................................................................................1783 19.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1783 19.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1784 19.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1785 19.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1786 19.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1788 19.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1790 19.4.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1791 19.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1792 19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9..............................................................................................................1793 19.5 WSM9.........................................................................................................................................................1795 19.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1795 19.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1796 19.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1797 19.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1798 19.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1799 19.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1801 19.5.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1802 19.5.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1803 19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9..............................................................................................................1804 19.6 WSMD2......................................................................................................................................................1806 19.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1806 19.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1806 19.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1807 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxix
Contents
19.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1808 19.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1809 19.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1811 19.6.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1812 19.6.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1812 19.6.9 Specifications of the WSMD2...........................................................................................................1814 19.7 WSMD4......................................................................................................................................................1815 19.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1815 19.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1816 19.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1817 19.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1818 19.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1819 19.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1821 19.7.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1822 19.7.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1823 19.7.9 Specifications of the WSMD4...........................................................................................................1824 19.8 WSMD9......................................................................................................................................................1826 19.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1826 19.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1826 19.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1827 19.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1828 19.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1829 19.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1831 19.8.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1832 19.8.8 WSMD9 Parameters..........................................................................................................................1832 19.8.9 Specifications of the WSMD9...........................................................................................................1834
20 Optical Amplifier Unit.........................................................................................................1836

20.1 CRPC..........................................................................................................................................................1837 20.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1837 20.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1837 20.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1838 20.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1839 20.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1841 20.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1843 20.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper......................................................................................................................1843 20.1.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC.....................................................................................................1845 20.1.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1845 20.1.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................1845 20.1.11 Specifications of the CRPC.............................................................................................................1847 20.2 DAS1..........................................................................................................................................................1848 20.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1848 20.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1848 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxx
Contents
20.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1849 20.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1851 20.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1854 20.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1856 20.2.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1856 20.2.8 DAS1 Parameters..............................................................................................................................1857 20.2.9 Specifications of the DAS1...............................................................................................................1861 20.3 HBA............................................................................................................................................................1863 20.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1863 20.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1863 20.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1864 20.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1864 20.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1866 20.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1868 20.3.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA.......................................................................................................1869 20.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1869 20.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1870 20.3.10 Specifications of the HBA...............................................................................................................1872 20.4 OAU1..........................................................................................................................................................1873 20.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1873 20.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1875 20.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1875 20.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1876 20.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1879 20.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1883 20.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1....................................................................................................1885 20.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1885 20.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1886 20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1.............................................................................................................1889 20.5 OBU1..........................................................................................................................................................1896 20.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1896 20.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1898 20.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1898 20.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1899 20.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1902 20.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1905 20.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1.....................................................................................................1906 20.5.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1906 20.5.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1907 20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1.............................................................................................................1910 20.6 OBU2..........................................................................................................................................................1912 20.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1912 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxi
Contents
20.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1913 20.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1914 20.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1915 20.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1917 20.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1920 20.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2.....................................................................................................1921 20.6.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1922 20.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................1922 20.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2.............................................................................................................1925
21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.........................................1928

21.1 SXM............................................................................................................................................................1929 21.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1929 21.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1929 21.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1930 21.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1931 21.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1932 21.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1934 21.1.7 Specifications of the SXM.................................................................................................................1934 21.2 SXH............................................................................................................................................................1935 21.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1935 21.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1936 21.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1936 21.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1937 21.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1938 21.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1940 21.2.7 Specifications of the SXH.................................................................................................................1940 21.3 TN52XCH..................................................................................................................................................1941 21.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1941 21.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1941 21.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1942 21.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1942 21.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1944 21.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1945 21.3.7 Specifications of the XCH.................................................................................................................1945 21.4 TN16XCH..................................................................................................................................................1946 21.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1946 21.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1946 21.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1946 21.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1948 21.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1949 21.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1951 21.4.7 Jumper...............................................................................................................................................1951 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxii
Contents
21.4.8 Specifications of the TN16XCH........................................................................................................1952 21.5 XCM...........................................................................................................................................................1952 21.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1952 21.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1953 21.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1953 21.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1954 21.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1955 21.5.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1957 21.5.7 Specifications of the XCM................................................................................................................1957 21.6 XCS............................................................................................................................................................1957 21.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1957 21.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1958 21.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1959 21.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1959 21.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1960 21.6.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1961 21.6.7 Specifications of the XCS..................................................................................................................1962 21.7 XCT............................................................................................................................................................1962 21.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1962 21.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1963 21.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1963 21.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1964 21.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1965 21.7.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1967 21.7.7 Specifications of the XCT.................................................................................................................1967 21.8 SCC.............................................................................................................................................................1968 21.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1968 21.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1970 21.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1970 21.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1973 21.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1974 21.8.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1980 21.8.7 Jumper...............................................................................................................................................1981 21.8.8 Specifications of the SCC..................................................................................................................1984 21.9 AUX............................................................................................................................................................1985 21.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................1985 21.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................1987 21.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................1987 21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................1989 21.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................1991 21.9.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................1996 21.9.7 Jumper...............................................................................................................................................1997 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxiii
Contents
21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX.................................................................................................................2000
22 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit.....................................................................................2002

22.1 HSC1..........................................................................................................................................................2003 22.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2003 22.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2003 22.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2004 22.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2004 22.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2007 22.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2009 22.1.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1.....................................................................................................2009 22.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2010 22.1.9 HSC1 Parameters...............................................................................................................................2010 22.1.10 Specifications of the HSC1..............................................................................................................2011 22.2 SC1.............................................................................................................................................................2012 22.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2012 22.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2013 22.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2013 22.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2014 22.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2017 22.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2019 22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1........................................................................................................2019 22.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2020 22.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2020 22.2.10 Specifications of the SC1................................................................................................................2021 22.3 SC2.............................................................................................................................................................2022 22.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2022 22.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2023 22.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2023 22.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2024 22.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2027 22.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2029 22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2........................................................................................................2029 22.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2030 22.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2030 22.3.10 Specifications of the SC2................................................................................................................2031 22.4 ST2..............................................................................................................................................................2032 22.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2032 22.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2032 22.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2034 22.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2035 22.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2036 22.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2038 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxiv
Contents
22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2........................................................................................................2038 22.4.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2039 22.4.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2039 22.4.10 Specifications of the ST2.................................................................................................................2040
23 Optical Protection Unit.........................................................................................................2042

23.1 DCP............................................................................................................................................................2043 23.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2043 23.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2044 23.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2045 23.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2046 23.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2048 23.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2051 23.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP.......................................................................................................2052 23.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2052 23.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2053 23.1.10 Specifications of the DCP................................................................................................................2054 23.2 OLP.............................................................................................................................................................2056 23.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2056 23.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2058 23.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2059 23.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2060 23.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2061 23.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2063 23.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP.......................................................................................................2064 23.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2064 23.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2065 23.2.10 Specifications of the OLP................................................................................................................2066 23.3 SCS.............................................................................................................................................................2068 23.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2068 23.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2069 23.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2070 23.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2070 23.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2072 23.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2074 23.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS........................................................................................................2074 23.3.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2075 23.3.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2075 23.3.10 Specifications of the SCS................................................................................................................2076
24 Spectrum Analyzer Unit.......................................................................................................2078

24.1 MCA4.........................................................................................................................................................2079 24.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2079 24.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2079 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxv
Contents
24.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2080 24.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2080 24.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2082 24.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2083 24.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4....................................................................................................2084 24.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2084 24.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2084 24.1.10 Specifications of the MCA4............................................................................................................2086 24.2 MCA8.........................................................................................................................................................2087 24.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2087 24.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2087 24.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2088 24.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2089 24.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2090 24.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2092 24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8....................................................................................................2092 24.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2093 24.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2093 24.2.10 Specifications of the MCA8............................................................................................................2094 24.3 OPM8..........................................................................................................................................................2095 24.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2095 24.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2096 24.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2096 24.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2097 24.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2098 24.3.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2100 24.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8....................................................................................................2100 24.3.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2101 24.3.9 Specifications of the OPM8...............................................................................................................2102 24.4 WMU..........................................................................................................................................................2102 24.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2103 24.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2103 24.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2104 24.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2104 24.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2106 24.4.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2107 24.4.7 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2107 24.4.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2108 24.4.9 Specifications of the WMU...............................................................................................................2108
25 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit.......................................................................................2110

25.1 VA1............................................................................................................................................................2111 25.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2111 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxvi
Contents
25.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2111 25.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2112 25.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2113 25.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2114 25.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2115 25.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1.......................................................................................................2116 25.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2116 25.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2117 25.1.10 Specifications of the VA1................................................................................................................2118 25.2 VA4............................................................................................................................................................2119 25.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2119 25.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2120 25.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2120 25.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2121 25.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2123 25.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2124 25.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4.......................................................................................................2125 25.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2125 25.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2126 25.2.10 Specifications of the VA4................................................................................................................2127
26 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit..............................................................2129

26.1 DCU............................................................................................................................................................2130 26.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2130 26.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2130 26.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2131 26.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2131 26.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2133 26.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2134 26.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU.......................................................................................................2134 26.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2135 26.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2135 26.1.10 Specifications of the DCU...............................................................................................................2135 26.2 TDC............................................................................................................................................................2137 26.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2137 26.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2138 26.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2138 26.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2139 26.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2140 26.2.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2142 26.2.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC.......................................................................................................2142 26.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2143 26.2.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS......................................................................................2143 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxvii
Contents
26.2.10 Specifications of the TDC...............................................................................................................2144
27 Clock Unit...............................................................................................................................2146
27.1 STG.............................................................................................................................................................2147 27.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2147 27.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2147 27.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2149 27.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2149 27.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2151 27.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2153 27.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG.......................................................................................................2154 27.1.8 Specifications of the STG..................................................................................................................2154
28 OCS System Unit...................................................................................................................2155

28.1 BPA............................................................................................................................................................2156 28.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2156 28.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2156 28.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2156 28.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2157 28.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2158 28.1.6 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2160 28.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA.......................................................................................................2160 28.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2160 28.1.9 Specifications of the BPA..................................................................................................................2161 28.2 EAS2...........................................................................................................................................................2162 28.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2162 28.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2162 28.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2163 28.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2168 28.2.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2169 28.2.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2171 28.2.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2171 28.2.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2171 28.2.9 Configuring the Board Functions......................................................................................................2171 28.2.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2172 28.2.11 Specifications of the EAS2..............................................................................................................2180 28.3 EGSH..........................................................................................................................................................2183 28.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2183 28.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2183 28.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2184 28.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2188 28.3.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2190 28.3.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers.......................................................................................................2192 28.3.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2192 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxviii
Contents
28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH.....................................................................................................2193 28.3.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2193 28.3.10 Board Protection..............................................................................................................................2194 28.3.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2196 28.3.12 Specifications of the EGSH.............................................................................................................2204 28.4 SF64............................................................................................................................................................2206 28.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2206 28.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2206 28.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2206 28.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2208 28.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2210 28.4.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2212 28.4.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2212 28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64.......................................................................................................2212 28.4.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2212 28.4.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2213 28.4.11 Specifications of the SF64...............................................................................................................2214 28.5 SF64A.........................................................................................................................................................2217 28.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2217 28.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2217 28.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2218 28.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2220 28.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2222 28.5.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2224 28.5.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2224 28.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A....................................................................................................2224 28.5.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2224 28.5.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2225 28.5.11 Specifications of the SF64A............................................................................................................2226 28.6 SFD64.........................................................................................................................................................2228 28.6.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2228 28.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2228 28.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2229 28.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2231 28.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2233 28.6.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2234 28.6.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2234 28.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64....................................................................................................2234 28.6.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2235 28.6.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2235 28.6.11 Specifications of the SFD64............................................................................................................2236 28.7 SL64............................................................................................................................................................2239 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxix
Contents
28.7.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2239 28.7.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2239 28.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2240 28.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2242 28.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2244 28.7.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2246 28.7.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2246 28.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64......................................................................................................2246 28.7.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2246 28.7.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2247 28.7.11 Specifications of the SL64...............................................................................................................2248 28.8 SLD64.........................................................................................................................................................2250 28.8.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2250 28.8.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2250 28.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2251 28.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2253 28.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2255 28.8.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2257 28.8.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2257 28.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64...................................................................................................2257 28.8.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2257 28.8.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2258 28.8.11 Specifications of the SLD64............................................................................................................2259 28.9 SLH41.........................................................................................................................................................2260 28.9.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................................2260 28.9.2 Application........................................................................................................................................2260 28.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................................2261 28.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow..................................................................................................2263 28.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................2265 28.9.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches................................................................................................................2268 28.9.7 Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................................2268 28.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41...................................................................................................2268 28.9.9 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................2268 28.9.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS....................................................................................2269 28.9.11 Specifications of the SLH41............................................................................................................2270 28.10 SLO16.......................................................................................................................................................2272 28.10.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2272 28.10.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2272 28.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2273 28.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2275 28.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2277 28.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2279 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xl
Contents
28.10.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2279 28.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16.................................................................................................2279 28.10.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2279 28.10.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................2280 28.10.11 Specifications of the SLO16..........................................................................................................2281 28.11 SLQ16.......................................................................................................................................................2282 28.11.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2282 28.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2282 28.11.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2283 28.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2285 28.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2287 28.11.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2289 28.11.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2289 28.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16.................................................................................................2289 28.11.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2289 28.11.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................2290 28.11.11 Specifications of the SLQ16..........................................................................................................2291 28.12 SLQ64.......................................................................................................................................................2292 28.12.1 Version Description.........................................................................................................................2292 28.12.2 Application......................................................................................................................................2292 28.12.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................2293 28.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow................................................................................................2295 28.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................2297 28.12.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches..............................................................................................................2298 28.12.7 Valid Slots.......................................................................................................................................2298 28.12.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64.................................................................................................2298 28.12.9 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................2299 28.12.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS..................................................................................2299 28.12.11 Specifications of the SLQ64..........................................................................................................2300
29 Cables.......................................................................................................................................2302
29.1 Power Cables and Ground Cables..............................................................................................................2303 29.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables.....................................................................................2303 29.1.2 Subrack Power Cables.......................................................................................................................2307 29.2 Optical Fibers.............................................................................................................................................2309 29.2.1 Classification.....................................................................................................................................2309 29.2.2 Connectors.........................................................................................................................................2310 29.3 Ground Cables............................................................................................................................................2314 29.3.1 Cabinet Door Ground Cables............................................................................................................2314 29.3.2 PDU Ground Cable............................................................................................................................2315 29.4 Alarm Cables..............................................................................................................................................2316 29.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable.....................................................................................................................2316 29.4.2 Alarm Output Interface Cable...........................................................................................................2318 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xli
Contents
29.4.3 Alarm Input Interface Cable..............................................................................................................2319 29.5 Management Cables...................................................................................................................................2321 29.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable......................................................................................................................2321 29.5.2 AUX Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................2322 29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable......................................................................................................2327 29.6 Clock/Time Cable.......................................................................................................................................2328 29.6.1 Cables for other equipment Connections...........................................................................................2328 29.6.2 Cables for Internal Connections........................................................................................................2333 29.6.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections.......................................................................................2335
30 Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................2339
30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator ...........................................................................................................................2340 30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................... 2340
31 Filler Panels............................................................................................................................2341
31.1 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................................2342 31.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................2342 31.3 Valid Slots..................................................................................................................................................2343 31.4 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................2344
A Indicators..................................................................................................................................2346
A.1 Cabinet Indicators........................................................................................................................................ 2347 A.2 Subrack Indicator.........................................................................................................................................2347 A.3 Chassis Indicators........................................................................................................................................2348 A.4 Board Indicators...........................................................................................................................................2348 A.5 Fan Indicator................................................................................................................................................ 2352 A.6 PIU Indicator...............................................................................................................................................2352
B Bar Code for Boards................................................................................................................2353

B.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................2355 B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.....................................................................................................................2358 B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs..............................................................................................2358 B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs............................................................2360 B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs...............................................................................................2361 B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit..............................................................................................................2362 B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM.............................................................................................................2362 B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1.....................................................................................................2362 B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR2.....................................................................................................2362 B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the CMR4.....................................................................................................2363 B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.....................................................................................................2364 B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2........................................................................................................2364 B.4.6 Characteristic Code for the MR4........................................................................................................2364 B.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8........................................................................................................2365 B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V.....................................................................................................2366 B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA...................................................................................................................2366 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xlii
Contents
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................2367 B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8.....................................................................................................2367 B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU...................................................................................................................2367 B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA........................................................................................................2367 B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................................2368 B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1......................................................................................................2369 B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2......................................................................................................2369 B.6.5 Characteristic Code for the CRPC......................................................................................................2370 B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit................................................................................2370 B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40.........................................................................................................2370 B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................................2371 B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU.......................................................................................................2371 B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................................2372 B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL..........................................................................................................2372 B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................................2372 B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V......................................................................................................2373 B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit.....................................................................................................2374 B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP.........................................................................................................2374 B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP.........................................................................................................2374 B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS.........................................................................................................2374 B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA.....................................................................................................................2375 B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................2375 B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................2375 B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit............................................................................................................2376 B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU......................................................................................................2376 B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................2376 B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC......................................................................................................2377
C Quick Reference Table of the Units....................................................................................2378

C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification.............................................................................2379 C.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side............................................................2379 C.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side...................................................................2405 C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification........................................................................................................2419 C.3 Other Unit Specification..............................................................................................................................2420 C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio..............................................................................................................2424 C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ...................................................................2425 C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..............................................................2429 C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ..................................................................2431 C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..................................................2433
D Parameter Reference..............................................................................................................2438
D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)............................................................................................2441 D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................................2442 D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold....................................................................................................2444 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xliii
Contents
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface).........................................................................................................2446 D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................2446 D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................................2447 D.7 Default VLAN ID .......................................................................................................................................2448 D.8 Enabled/Disabled ........................................................................................................................................2448 D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression .....................................................................................................2449 D.10 Enabling LCAS..........................................................................................................................................2450 D.11 Entry Detection .........................................................................................................................................2451 D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)...............................................................................................2451 D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface).................................................................................................2452 D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................2453 D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................2454 D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................2454 D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................................2455 D.18 Hardware REG Enabled............................................................................................................................2456 D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)................2457 D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................2458 D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m)..............................................................................................................2459 D.22 Laser-in-Position Status.............................................................................................................................2460 D.23 LCAS Mode...............................................................................................................................................2461 D.24 Line Rate....................................................................................................................................................2461 D.25 Loop Detection..........................................................................................................................................2464 D.26 Loop Port Shutdown..................................................................................................................................2464 D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2465 D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface).................................................................................................................2467 D.29 MAC Loopback ........................................................................................................................................2468 D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface).........................................................................................2469 D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)................................................................2469 D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................2470 D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2471 D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface).................................................................2471 D.35 Min. Members-Transmit Direction............................................................................................................2472 D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface).................................................................................................2472 D.37 MSP Sharing..............................................................................................................................................2473 D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................2474 D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................2475 D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................2476 D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ...............................................................................................2476 D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)......................................................................2477 D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface)........................................................................................................2478 D.44 PHY Loopback .........................................................................................................................................2479 D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................2480 Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xliv
Contents
D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)...............................2480 D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................2482 D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................................2484 D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................2485 D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................2485 D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................2486 D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface).............................................................................2488 D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)...................................................................................2489 D.54 TSD............................................................................................................................................................2489 D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)....................2490 D.56 VLAN Priority ..........................................................................................................................................2491
E Glossary....................................................................................................................................2492
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
xlv
1 N63B Cabinet
1
About This Chapter
N63B Cabinet
1.1 Appearance The N63B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 300 mm depth, complying with the ETS 300-119 standard. 1.2 Configuration Typical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model. 1.3 Technical Specifications Technical specifications of the N63B cabinet include dimensions, weight, and voltage.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1 N63B Cabinet
1.1 Appearance
The N63B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 300 mm depth, complying with the ETS 300-119 standard. The following subracks can be installed on the N63B cabinet: OptiX OSN 8800 T32, OptiX OSN 8800 T16 and OptiX OSN 6800. The N63B cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), open-close type front door, rear panel fixed by screws, and side panels at the left and right sides. Cabinet doors and side panels can be disassembled. The front door and side panels have grounding points. Keys to the front door of all N63B cabinets are the same. Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the N63B cabinet. Figure 1-1 N63B cabinet appearance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1 N63B Cabinet
1.2 Configuration
Typical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model. Table 1-1 lists the typical configurations of the N63B cabinet.
NOTE
There are two types of ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinets: T63B and N63B. These two types of cabinets differ in color and door. You can perform an expansion installation on the T63B cabinet based on the typical configurations of the N63B cabinet.
Table 1-1 Typical configurations of the N63B cabinet Typ ical Con figu rati on 1 Number of Subracks and Frames PDU Model Circuit Breaker a Maximum Power Consumpti on of Integrated Equipment
b
Power Consumpti on for the Typical Configurati on < 4000 W
2 x OptiX OSN 8800 T32 + 1 x DCM frame 1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T32 + 2 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x DCM frame 1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T32 + 2 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16 + 1 x DCM frame 4 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16 + 1 x DCM frame 3 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16+1 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x DCM frame 2 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16+ 2 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x DCM frame
TN16
Eight 63 A circuit breakers Four 63 A and four 32 A circuit breakers Eight 63 A circuit breakers
5400 W
TN16
5400 W
< 4000 W
TN16
5000 W
< 4000 W
TN16
Eight 63 A circuit breakers Six 63 A and two 32 A circuit breakers Four 63 A and four 32 A circuit breakers
5000 W
< 4000 W
TN16
5000 W
< 4000 W
TN16
5000 W
< 4000 W
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1 N63B Cabinet
Typ ical Con figu rati on 7
Number of Subracks and Frames
PDU Model
Circuit Breaker a
Maximum Power Consumpti on of Integrated Equipment

b
Power Consumpti on for the Typical Configurati on < 4000 W
1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16+ 3 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x DCM frame 4 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 1 x DCM frame 3 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 2 x CRPC frame + 3 x DCM frame
TN16
Two 63 A and six 32 A circuit breakers Four 63 A circuit breakers Four 63 A circuit breakers
5000 W
TN11
4800 W
< 4000 W
TN11
4800 W
< 4000 W
a: This column lists the number of circuit breakers required on the PDF. b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment can not exceed the maximum power consumption.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh). Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the device under extreme conditions.
1.3 Technical Specifications

Technical specifications of the N63B cabinet include dimensions, weight, and voltage. Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of the N63B cabinet. A 400 mm enclosure frame can be put in the upper part of the N63B cabinet, which increases the height of the cabinet to 2600 mm. With the added enclosure frame, the cabinet weighs 66 kg. Figure 1-2 shows the appearance of the 400 mm enclosure frame. Table 1-2 Technical specifications Item Dimensions
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Specification 600 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 300 mm (H)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4
1 N63B Cabinet
Item Weight (kg) Standard working voltage Working voltage range
Specification 60 kg -48 V DC or -60 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC
Figure 1-2 Enclosure frame appearance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 N66B Cabinet
2
About This Chapter
N66B Cabinet
2.1 Appearance The N66B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 600 mm depth, complying with the ETS 300-119 standard. 2.2 Configuration TTypical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model. 2.3 Technical Specifications Technical specifications of the N66B cabinet include dimensions, weight, and voltage.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 N66B Cabinet
2.1 Appearance
The N66B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 600 mm depth, complying with the ETS 300-119 standard. The following subracks can be installed on the N66B cabinet: OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX OSN 8800 T32, OptiX OSN 8800 T16, and OptiX OSN 6800. The N66B cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), open-close type front and rear doors, and side panels at the left and right sides. Cabinet doors and side panels can be disassembled. The front door and side panels have grounding points. Keys to the front and rear doors of all N63B cabinets are the same. Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the N66B cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 N66B Cabinet
Figure 2-1 N66B cabinet appearance
2.2 Configuration
TTypical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model. Table 2-1 lists the typical configurations of the N66B cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2 N66B Cabinet
Table 2-1 Typical configurations of the N66B cabinet Typic al Confi gurat ion 1 Number of Subracks and Frames PDU Mode Circuit Breaker a Maximum Power Consumptio n of Integrated Equipment b 10800 W Power Consumptio n for the Typical Configuratio n < 6000 W
1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T64 + 2 x OptiX OSN 8800 T32 + 2 x DCM frame 1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T64 + 4 x OptiX OSN 6800 + 4 x DCM frame 1 x OptiX OSN 8800 T64 + 4 x OptiX OSN 8800 T16 + 2 x DCM frame
TN16
Sixteen 63 A circuit breakers
TN16
Eight 63 A and eight 32 A circuit breakers Sixteen 63 A circuit breakers
10800 W
< 6000 W
TN16
10000 W
< 6000 W
a: This column lists the number of circuit breakers required on the PDF. b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment do not exceed the maximum power consumption.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh). Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the device under extreme conditions.

Technical specifications of the N66B cabinet include dimensions, weight, and voltage. Table 2-2 lists the technical specifications of the N66B cabinet. Table 2-2 Technical specifications Item Dimensions
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Specification 600 mm (W) x 600 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H)

2 N66B Cabinet
Item Weight (kg) Standard working voltage Working voltage range
Specification 85 kg -48 V DC or -60 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
10
3 Fiber Management Frame
3
Appearance
Fiber Management Frame
Used with an N63B or N66B cabinet, a fiber management frame can enhance the fiber capacity of the N63B or N66B cabinet and make fiber installation and routing more flexible.
There are two types of fiber management frames: left-side fiber management frame and rightside fiber management frame. Fiber management frames are used together with N63B and N66B cabinets, as shown in Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
11
Figure 3-1 Fiber management frames used with the N63B cabinet
3 1 2
1. Left-side fiber management frame
2. Right-side fiber management frame
3. Fiber spool unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
12
Figure 3-2 Fiber management frames used with the N66B cabinet
2 1
1,3. Left-side fiber management frame
2,4. Right-side fiber management frame
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
13
Functions and features

Table 3-1 lists the functions and features of a fiber management frame. Table 3-1 Functions and features Item Structure feature Description l Fiber spool units in a fiber management frame can be adjusted based on device position in the cabinet. l A fiber management frame can protect fibers and meet the requirement for a minimum of 30 mm bending radius. l A fiber management frame makes fiber spooling more flexible. Fiber capacity Internal fiber capacity a Without a fiber management frame b: 320 PCS With a fiber management frame C: 640 PCS External fiber capacity a Without a fiber management frame b: 720 PCS With a fiber management frame C: 1408 PCS a: A fiber with a diameter of 2 mm is used as an example to calculate how many internal and external fibers that can be configured at most. An internal fiber is a fiber used inside a subrack or between subracks, and an external fiber is a fiber connecting one equipment cabinet to other equipment. b: Fibers in Overhead Cabling Mode can be configured at most. c: An N63B cabinet configured with left-side and right-side fiber management frames is used as an example to calculate how many internal and external fibers can be configured at most. Two routing fiber cabinets can be installed on the left and right sides of one N66B cabinet. In this configuration, a maximum of 1280 internal and 2816 external fibers can configured.
Configuration Principle
Left-side and right-side fiber management frames are installed to the left and right of a cabinet respectively. Fiber management frames can be used with N63B or N66B cabinet only. You can determine whether to configure a fiber management frame based on the required fiber capacity. Observe the following rules when configuring an 80-channel system (fibers with 2 mm diameters are used as an example): l l When N63B cabinets are used, fiber management frames must be used for overhead cabling if more than 320 internal fibers and 720 external fibers are required. When N66B cabinets are used, fiber management frames must be used for overhead cabling if more than 640 internal fibers and 1440 external fibers are required.
In addition, observe the following rules when configuring fiber management frames:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
14
For new network deployment or network expansion, or during network maintenance, fiber management frames can be configured if the free space on the two sides of a cabinet is large enough for users to flexibly and freely install and route fibers. For underfloor cabling, fiber management frames must be used to manage external fibers because there is not much space left inside the cabinet after the external power cables are arranged in the cabinet.
NOTE
l Left-side and right-side fiber management frames must be configured at the same time. l During cabinet expansion, spool internal cascading fibers and external fibers in the fiber management frames.
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of a fiber management frame are as follows: l l Outline dimensions: 150 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H). Weight: 23 kg
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
15
4 DC PDU
4
About This Chapter
l l l
DC PDU
There are three types of power distribution units (PDUs): TN16, TN51 and TN11. The availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. The TN51PDU and TN16PDU use the same front panel and provide the same functions, but they are different in height. The two boards apply to the same scenarios. This manual uses the TN16PDU board as an example for illustration. The TN16PDU is used for a cabinet housing only OptiX OSN 8800 subracks or a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 subracks. The TN11PDU is used only for a cabinet housing OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.
4.1 TN16PDU The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet. 4.2 TN11PDU The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16
4 DC PDU
4.1 TN16PDU
The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet.
NOTE
The TN51PDU and TN16PDU have the same functions but differ in height. The TN51PDU is 133.4 mm high. When two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks are installed on a cabinet, one more DCM frame can be configured if the TN16PDU is used, compared with the TN51PDU. TN51PDU can be substituted by the TN16PDU.This topic describes the TN16PDU.
The TN16PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive four -48V/-60V power supplies and output four power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Whether short-circuiting copper bars are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room: l l When eight 63 A power supplies are provided, no short-circuiting copper bar is required. When four 125 A power supplies are provided, short-circuiting copper bars are required for dividing one 125 A power supply into two 63 A power supplies. For more information about short-circuiting copper bars, see Short-Circuiting Copper Bar. Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU. Figure 4-1 Front panel of the TN16PDU
Power supply Power supply output area switch area Power supply input area Power supply Power supply switch area output area
+
1
+
2
+
3
+
4
+
1
+
2
+
3
+
4
A
1. Output cable terminal block 2. Input cable terminal block
B
3. Power switch
l l l
Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 100 mm (H) Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks. Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four input cable terminal blocks and receive four -48V/-60V DC power supplies, eight -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total. Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output power switches to control power supplies for subracks inside the cabinet and provide overcurrent protection for each other.
Figure 4-2 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN16PDU.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17
4 DC PDU
Figure 4-2 TN16PDU internal pin assignments
OUTPUT A
-
OUTPUT B
1
+ ON ON ON ON
2
+
3
+
4
+
1
+
2
+
3
+
4
+ ON ON ON ON
INPUT A
INPUT B
OUTPUT A
+ + + + OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OUTPUT B
+ + + +
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
INPUT A
INPUT B
Short-Circuit Copper Bar

If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies in total. In this case, short-circuit copper bars are required for both A and B. Figure 4-3 shows the appearance of the short-circuiting copper bar. Figure 4-3 Appearance
Copper Plate
4.2 TN11PDU
The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the cabinet.
DC PDU
The TN11PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive two -48V/-60V power supplies and output six power supplies for subracks in the cabinet. Whether junction boxes are required is determined by the current of power supplied by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room:
4 DC PDU
l l
If a power supply is 63 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies in total. In this case, no junction box is required. If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for dividing one 125 A current into four 32 A currents. For more information about junction boxes, see Junction Box.
Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the TN11PDU. Figure 4-4 Front panel of the TN11PDU
1 2 3 3 2 1
1. Output cable terminal block
2. Ground screw
3. Input cable terminal block
4. Power switch
l l l l
Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 131 mm (H) Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six output cable terminal blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks. Ground screw: used to connect (protection ground) PGND cables. Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have two input cable terminal blocks and receive two -48V/-60V DC power supplies, four -48V/-60V DC power supplies in total. Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have six power output switches (corresponding to the six output cable terminal blocks) to control power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 6800, both A and B only use power switches SW2, SW3, SW4, and SW5 to control power supplies for four subracks from bottom to top.
Figure 4-5 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN11PDU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
19
4 DC PDU
Figure 4-5 TN11PDU internal pin assignments

OUTPUT
+- +
OUTPUT
+- +
ON OFF
+- +- +
ON OFF
+- +- +
+
INPUT
+
INPUT
Junction Box
If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive one power supply, two power supplies in total. In this case, junction boxes are required for both A and B. Figure 4-6 shows the junction box structure and Figure 4-7 shows the installation position of the junction box. Figure 4-6 Structure
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
20
4 DC PDU
Figure 4-7 Installation position
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
21
5 UPM
5
Application
Figure 5-1 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800. Figure 5-1 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800
OptiX OSN equipment 110V/220V -48V PIU Board A Backplane
UPM
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/ 220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires batteries.
UPM
-48V PIU -48V Board B
Appearance
The UPM is a special power supply system and EPS75-4815AF is one type of the UPM. The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 2000 W. The EPS75-4815AF power system is 3U high. Figure 5-2 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
22
5 UPM
Figure 5-2 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Functions and Features

UPM can work with storage batteries . When the external AC power system supplies power normally, the batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To supply power to the OptiX OSN 8800 T16/ 6800 equipment, only one power system is required to be connected to the batteries. The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five rectifier modules and one monitoring module.
NOTE
The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately. If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment cabinet is reserved for the batteries.
Table 5-1 provides the functions and features of the UPM. Table 5-1 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system Function and Feature Hot-swappable function EPS75-4815AF The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is improved. The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah. The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.
Storage battery protection function
Loading capacity
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
23
5 UPM
Function and Feature Lightning-proof function
EPS75-4815AF The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector. The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from damaging the rectifier module.
Working Principle and Signal Flow

The UPM is fed by one 220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts the input power into 48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch. When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop, and load loop. In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the poweroff protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment. As a result, the batteries are automatically protected. When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
Interfaces and Indicators

Figure 5-3 shows the rear view of the GIE4805S power system (subject to the UPM on site).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
24
5 UPM
Figure 5-3 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system
1. Control miniature circuit breaker (MCB) of the AC input (30 A) 4. Control MCB of load 2 (30 A) 7. AC phase line terminal
2. Control MCB of the battery 3. Control MCB of load 1 (10 A) branch (80 A) 5. Control MCB of load 3 (40 6. Control MCB of load 4 (40 A) A) 8. AC zero line terminal 9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery branch 12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load branch 15. Communication interface (COM)
10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load 11. Positive 48 V terminal of branch the battery branch 13. Connecting terminal of the protection grounding cable 16. Communication test interface (TEST) 14. DB44 signal interface
Interfaces The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 5-2 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF. Table 5-2 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system Interface Power input interface Type of Interface Power interface Usage "7" and "8" indicate the AC mains input terminals, which access 110 V/ 220 V AC power.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
25
5 UPM
Interface Power output interface
Type of Interface Power interface
Usage The power output interfaces are in the lower left corner on the front panel of the UPM. The terminals indicated by "9" and "11" constitute a battery interface, through which the power system is connected to the battery input socket at the back of the storage battery box through a battery cable. "10" and "12" indicate the output interfaces of four loads. The output interfaces can supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment by using power cables. The UPM is grounded through the cabinet.
Connectin g terminal of the protection grounding cable DB44 signal interface
Power interface
DB44
The backplane of the subrack can be connected to the sensor transfer box (an optional device) through the DB44 signal interface and to the monitoring module through the 96-pin DIN connector. In addition, the sensor transfer box can be connected to multiple sensors. As a result, the monitoring function is extended. It is used for communication with the PC. The COM interface can adopt the RS-485 communication mode or RS-232 communication mode. Three baud rates are available, namely, 4800 kbit/s, 9600 kbit/s, and 19200 kbit/s. The baud rate can be adjusted and the default baud rate is 9600 kbit/s. It is used for internal test.
Communi cation interface (COM)
RJ-45
Communi cation test interface (TEST)
RJ-45
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
26
5 UPM
Interface Switch button
Type of Interface Button
Usage The switch buttons are on the left of the UPM, as shown in Figure 5-3. "1" indicates the control MCB of the AC input (30 A), which enables and disables the input of the AC mains supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate the load control switches, which enable and disable the load output.
Indicators The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators: l l l Running status indicator (RUN) one color (green) Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) one color (yellow) Faulty state indicator (FAULT) one color (red)
The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators: l l Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red) Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Valid Slots
The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.
Technical Specifications
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W. Table 5-3 lists the power parameters of the UPM. Table 5-3 Power parameters of the UPM Parameter Voltage range of the AC input AC input Rated input current Output nominal voltage Value 90-290 V AC One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz 28 A 53.50.5 V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
27
5 UPM
Parameter Rated output current
Value DC output branches Load MCB 1: 10 A Load MCB 2: 30 A Load MCB 3: 40 A Load MCB 4: 40 A Battery MCB: 80 A Total output DC current 37.53 A to 753 A
Regulated voltage precision Non-balance of load sharing Rated efficiency of the integrated equipment Power factor Peak-to-peak noise voltage Electrical network adjustment rate Lightning protection performance
1%
5% (50%-100% load) 89%
0.99 (nominal input or output) 200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz) 0.1%
When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning surge current whose waveform is 8/20s and amplitude is 5 kA for five times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally. The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.
Cooling method
The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows: l l Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0 in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H)) Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
28
6 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack
6
About This Chapter
6.4 PIU PIU: power interface unit
OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack
6.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack 6.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack 6.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
6.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
29
6.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

6.1.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 6-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack. Figure 6-1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack structure
5 3 4
1. Board area 4. Air filter
2. Fiber cabling area 5. Fiber spool
3. Fan tray assembly 6. Mounting ear
l l l
Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 6.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
30
l l l
Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack. Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
Table 6-1 describes the technical specifications of the 8800 T64 subrack.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh). Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum power consumption indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in the extreme environment.
Table 6-1 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack Item Dimensions Weight (empty subracka) Maximum subrack power consumptionb Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OTN) Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OCS) Rated working current Nominal working voltage Working voltage range Specification 498 mm (W) 580 mm (D) 900 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) 22.8 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H)) 65 kg (143 lb.) 9600 W less than 4000 W less than 3200 W 200 A (four 50 A switched-mode power supplies) -48V DC/-60V DC -40V DC to -72V DC
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed. b: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of the subracks. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration.
Table 6-2 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the 8800 T64.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
31
Table 6-2 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Unit Name Typical Power Consumptio n at 25C (77 F) (W)a 1804.6 Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55C (131F) (W)a 3135.9 Remarks
Subrack
OTU subrack
It is the power consumed after you install thirty-two LDXes, one SCC, eight PIUs, two AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray assemblies in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two XCTs, two SXMs, twenty NQ2s, one SCC, eight PIUs, five TOAs, five TQXes, two AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray assemblies in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OAU1, one OBU1, twelve LDXes, one SCC, one SC2, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray assemblies in an OTM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two SXMs, twenty SLD64s, eight SLO16s, four SLQ16s, four SLH41s, four EGSHes, two STGs, one STI, two SCCs, eight PIUs, two AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray assemblies in an OCS system.
OTU subrack
1839.1
3084.7
OTM subrack
963.78
2168.28
OCS System
2169.9
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
6.1.2 Slot Description

The board area and the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provides 93 slots. Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack are shown in Figure 6-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
32
Figure 6-2 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

Front
IU91 A U X IU 72 SCC IU74 STG IU75 EF I1 IU 76 A U X IU 83
Back
IU93 SCC IU85 STG IU86 ATE IU87 PIU IU88 PIU IU89
PIU IU69
PIU IU70
EFI2 IU71
IU 73
IU 77
PIU IU78
PIU IU79
PIU IU80
PIU IU81
STI IU82
IU 84
IU 19
IU 20
IU 21
IU 22
IU 23
IU 24
IU 25
IU 26
IU 27
IU 28
IU 29
IU 30
IU 31
IU 32
IU 33
IU 34
IU 53
IU 54
IU 55
IU 56
IU 57
IU 58
IU 59
IU 60
IU 61
IU 62
IU 63
IU 64
IU 65
IU 66
IU 67
IU 68
XCT IU 9
SXM IU 10
XCT IU 43
SXM IU 44
IU 1
IU 2
IU 3
IU 4
IU 5
IU 6
IU 7
IU 8
IU 11
IU 12
IU 13
IU 14
IU 15
IU 16
IU 17
IU 18
IU 35
IU 36
IU 37
IU 38
IU 39
IU 40
IU 41
IU 42
IU 45
IU 46
IU 47
IU 48
IU 49
IU 50
IU 51
IU 52
IU90
IU92
l l l l l l l l l l l l l
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, and IU45-IU68 are reserved for service boards. IU71 is reserved for the EFI2. IU76 is reserved for the EFI1. IU87 is reserved for the ATE. IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, IU88, and IU89 are reserved for the PIU. IU72 and IU83 are reserved for the AUX. IU73, IU77 and IU84 are reserved for future use. IU75 and IU86 are reserved for the STG. IU82 is reserved for the STI. IU74 and IU85 are reserved for the SCC. IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the XCT. IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the SXM or SXH. IU90-IU93 are reserved for the fans.
6.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan areas. In each subrack, the lower fan area consists of the fan tray assembly and the air filter, and the upper fan area consists of one fan tray assembly. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.

Table 6-3 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Table 6-3 Functions Function Basic function Description Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range. l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. Partitioned heat dissipation Hot swapping Alarming Status checking Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly. Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information. Checks and reports on the fan status.
Commissioning control
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to operate normally within the designated temperature range. The lower fan tray assembly blows air up. The fan tray assembly located on the upper part of the subrack uses a pulling mechanism. The two fan tray assemblies form an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 6-3 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 6-3 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Fan tray assembly
Board Area Optical fiber laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
34
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 6-4. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default. Table 6-4 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l If the ambient temperature is lower than 25C (77F), the fans run at low speed. l If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (113F), the fans run at high speed. l If the ambient temperature is from 25C to 45C (77F to 113 F), the fans adjust the rotating speed to help ensure that the heat dissipation of each board continues to be stable. This automatic adjustment also helps ensure that the equipment runs quietly and consumes less energy than the manually adjustable fan mode. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed. Adjustable Speed Mode Six fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has two sides. Each side has three partitions. See Figure 6-4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
35
Figure 6-4 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
IU91
Front
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN1
Back
FAN2 FAN3
IU93
IU69
IU70
IU71
IU72
IU73
IU74
IU75
IU76
IU77
IU78
IU79
IU80
IU81
IU82
IU83
IU84
IU85
IU86
IU87
IU88
IU89
IU19 IU20
IU21
IU22 IU23
IU24
IU25 IU26
IU27
IU28 IU29
IU30
IU31
IU32 IU33
IU34
IU53 IU54
IU55
IU56 IU57
IU58
IU59 IU60
IU61
IU62 IU63
IU64
IU65
IU66 IU67
IU68
IU9
IU10
IU43 IU44
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
IU8
IU11
IU12
IU13 IU14
IU15
IU16 IU17
IU18
IU35 IU36
IU37 IU38
IU39 IU40
IU41 IU42
IU45
IU46
IU47 IU48
IU49
IU50 IU51
IU52
IU50 FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 FAN4
IU50 FAN5 FAN6
IU90
IU92
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, a cabinet has two sides (front and back). The fan tray assemblies IU90 and IU91 are on the front and the fan tray assemblies IU92 and IU93 are on the back. The fans in the four fan tray assemblies dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. FAN1 and FAN4 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU1-IU6, IU19IU24, and IU69-IU71. FAN2 and FAN5 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU7IU12, IU25-IU28, and IU72-IU75. FAN3 and FAN6 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU13-IU18, IU29-IU34, and IU76-IU79. FAN7 and FAN10 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU35-IU40, IU53-IU58, and IU80-IU82. FAN8 and FAN11 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU41-IU46, IU59-IU62, and IU83-IU86. FAN9 and FAN12 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU47-IU52, IU63-IU68, and IU87-IU89.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies. One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.
The fan tray assembly consists of three fans and one fan control unit. Figure 6-5 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
36
Figure 6-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly

Status signal Speed adjusting signal Fan control unit Status signal Speed adjusting signal FAN
External power External power supply 1 supply 2
l l
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly. Fan control board: Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals. Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed. Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 6-6 shows a fan tray assembly. Figure 6-6 Fan tray assembly
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter
NOTE
2. Operating status indicators
3. Fans (three in total)
Only the lower fan tray assembly has the air filter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
37
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90 IU91, IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly

Table 6-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Weight Power Consumptiona Specification 493.7 mm (W) x 280.5 mm (D) x 64.0 mm (H) (19.4 in. (W) x 11.0 in. (D) x 2.5 in. (H)) 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.) l 70 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 95 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed l 150 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 225 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed l 347 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 347 W.

6.2.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 6-7 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
38
Figure 6-7 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack structure diagram
1
5
3 4
l l l
Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 50 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 6.2.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan).
l l l
Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack. Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
Table 6-6 describes the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh). Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum power consumption indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in the extreme environment.
Table 6-6 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack Item Dimensions Weight (empty subracka) Maximum subrack power consumptionb Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OTN) Recommended typical configuration power consumption (OCS) Rated working current Nominal working voltage Working voltage range Specification 498 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 900 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H)) 35 kg (77.1 lb.) 4800 W less than 3000 W less than 2400 W 100 A (two 50 A switched-mode power supplies) -48V DC/-60V DC -40V DC to -72V DC
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed. b: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration.
Table 6-7 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the 8800 T32.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
40
Table 6-7 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Unit Name Typical Power Consumptio n at 25C (77 F) (W)a 1633.4 Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55C (131F) (W)a 2408.6 Remarks
Subrack
OTU subrack
It is the power consumed after you install thirty-two LDXes, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two XCHes, twenty NQ2s, one SCC, four PIUs, five TQXes, five TOAs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OTU electrical crossconnection subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OAU1, one OBU1, twelve LDXes, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OTM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install four OBU1s, four VA1s, one SC2, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OLA subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two OAU1s, two MR8Vs, sixteen LDXes, one SC2, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OADM subrack.
OTU electrical crossconnect subrack
1641.6
2320.5
OTM subrack
792.5
1441.1
OLA subrack
290.3
860
OADM subrack
974
1651.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
41
Unit Name
Typical Power Consumptio n at 25C (77 F) (W)a 378.2
Maximum Power Consumptio n at 55C (131F) (W)a 965
Remarks
It is the power consumed after you install two M40Vs, two D40s, two FIUs, one SC2, two RMU9s, two WSM9s, two OAU1s, two OBU1s, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two M40s, two D40s, two WSMD9s, two DAS1s, one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two XCMs, ten SLQ64s, eight SLO16s, two SLH41s, two EGSHes, two STGs, one STI, two SCCs, four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray assemblies in an OCS system.
373.1
460.6
OCS System
1507.4

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
42

IU51
AUX EFI2 IU37 EFI1 IU38 PIU IU39 PIU IU40
STG
STG PIU PIU IU46 STI IU47 ATE IU48 IU45
IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44
OTU OTU OTU
OTU OTU OTU OTU
OTU
SCC OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
IU20 IU21
IU22
IU23 IU24
IU25
IU26 IU27
IU28 IU29
IU30 IU31
IU32
IU33
IU34 IU35
IU36
XCH/ XCH/ XCM XCM IU9 IU10
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
SCC OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
IU8
IU11 IU12
IU13
IU14 IU15
IU16
IU17 IU18
IU19
IU50
l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 are reserved for service boards. IU37 is reserved for the EFI2. IU38 is reserved for the EFI1. IU48 is reserved for the ATE. IU47 is reserved for the STI. IU39, IU40, IU45 and IU46 are reserved for the PIU. IU41 is reserved for the AUX. IU42 and IU44 are reserved for the STG. IU43 is reserved for future use. IU28 is reserved for the active SCC. IU11 is available for the standby SCC or the other boards. IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the XCH/XCM. IU50 and IU51 are reserved for the fans.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan areas. In each subrack, the lower fan area consists of the fan tray assembly and the air filter, and the upper fan area consists of one fan tray assembly. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
Version Description

Table 6-8 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 6-8 Functions Function Basic function Description Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range. l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. Partitioned heat dissipation Hot swapping Alarming Status checking Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly. Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information. Checks and reports on the fan status.
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to operate normally within the designated temperature range. The lower fan tray assembly blows air up. The fan tray assembly located on the upper part of the subrack uses a pulling mechanism. The two fan tray assemblies form an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 6-9 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
44
Figure 6-9 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Air outlet
Fan tray assembly
Board Area Optical fiber laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 6-9. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default. Table 6-9 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l If the ambient temperature is lower than 25C (77F), the fans run at low speed. l If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (113F), the fans run at high speed. l If the ambient temperature is from 25C to 45C (77F to 113 F), the fans adjust the rotating speed to help ensure that the heat dissipation of each board continues to be stable. This automatic adjustment also helps ensure that the equipment runs quietly and consumes less energy than the manually adjustable fan mode. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed. Adjustable Speed Mode Six fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
45
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 6-10. Figure 6-10 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 IU51
IU37
IU38
IU39
IU40
IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44
IU45
IU46
IU47
IU48
IU20 IU21
IU22
IU23 IU24
IU25
IU26 IU27
IU28 IU29
IU30 IU31
IU32
IU33
IU34 IU35
IU36
IU9
IU10
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
IU8
IU11 IU12
IU13
IU14 IU15
IU16
IU17 IU18
IU19
IU50 FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 IU50
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, the fans on the two fan tray assemblies in slots IU50 and IU51 dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. FAN1 and FAN4 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU-IU6, IU20-IU25, and IU37-IU40. FAN2 and FAN5 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU7-IU12, IU26-IU29, and IU41-IU45. FAN3 and FAN6 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU13-IU19, IU30-IU36, and IU46-IU49.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations: l l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies. One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at the same speed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
46
The fan tray assembly consists of three fans and one fan control unit. Figure 6-11 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 6-11 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
l l
Appearance
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter
NOTE
3. Fans (three in total)
Only the lower fan tray assembly has the air filter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
47
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

NOTE
Table 6-10 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Weight Power Consumptiona Specification 493.7 mm (W) x 280.5 mm (D) x 64.0 mm (H) (19.4 in. (W) x 11.0 in. (D) x 2.5 in. (H)) 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.) l 70 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 95 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed l 150 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 225 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed l 347 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 347 W.

6.3.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. Each subrack has independent power supply. Figure 6-13 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
48
Figure 6-13 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack structure diagram
5 2 3 4
l l l
Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 24 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and related information. Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack. Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
l l l
Table 6-11 describes the technical specifications of the 8800 T16 subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
49
Table 6-11 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack Item Dimensions Weight (empty subracka) Maximum subrack power consumptionb Recommended typical configuration power consumption Rated working current Nominal working voltage Working voltage range Specification 498 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 450 mm (H) (19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 17.7 in. (H)) 18 kg (39.6 lb.) 1800 W 700 W 37.5 A -48V DC/-60V DC -40V DC to -72V DC
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed. b: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration.
Table 6-12 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the 8800 T16. Table 6-12 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Unit Name Typical Power Consumpt ion at 25C (77F) (W)a 509.2 Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (131F) (W)
a
Remarks
Subrack
OTU subrack
615.6
It is the power consumed after you install eight 10G OTUs (LDXes), one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install five NQ2s, two XCHes, two PIUs, one TQX, two TOAs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OTN electrical cross-connect subrack.
OTN electrical cross-connect subrack
501
808
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
50
Unit Name
Typical Power Consumpt ion at 25C (77F) (W)a 468.7
Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (131F) (W)

a
Remarks
OTM subrack
569.7
It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OAU1, one OBU1, six LDXes, one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OTM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install four OBU1s, four VA1s, one SC2, two FIUs, one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OLA subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two OAU1s, two MR8vs, two FIUs, eight LSXes, one SC2, one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40, one D40, one WSMD9, one DAS1, one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and one fan tray assembly in an OADM subrack.
OLA subrack
228.1
294.3
OADM subrack
449.5
561.5
221
269.2

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
51
IU19 EFI
IU20 PIU
IU21 AUX
IU22 AUX
IU23 PIU
IU24 ATE
IU9 IU 1 IU 2 IU 3 IU 4 IU 5 IU 6 IU 7 IU 8
IU10 IU
11
IU
12
IU
13
IU
14
IU 15
IU
16
IU 17
IU 18
IU25
FAN
l l
IU1-IU8, and IU11-IU18 are reserved for service boards. IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the XCH/SCC or for the other service boards.
NOTE
Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house other service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions as a slave subrack. Each of slots IU9 and IU10 must be filled with a filler panel when they are used to house service boards.
l l l l l
IU19 is reserved for the EFI. IU20 and IU23 are reserved for the PIU. IU21 and IU22 are reserved for the AUX. IU24 is reserved for the ATE. IU25 is reserved for the fans.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan area. The fan area consists of the fan tray assembly and the air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
Version Description

Table 6-13 Functions Function Basic function Description Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range. l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. Partitioned heat dissipation Hot swapping Alarming Status checking Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly. Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information. Checks and reports on the fan status.
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to operate normally within the designated temperature range. The fan tray assembly is installed in the lower part of the subrack and blows air up, creating an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 6-15 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. Figure 6-15 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Board area
Optical fiber laying area Fan tray assembly Air inlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 6-14. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.
Table 6-14 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l If the ambient temperature is lower than 25C (77F), the fans run at low speed. l If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (113F), the fans run at high speed. l If the ambient temperature is from 25C to 45C (77F to 113 F), the fans adjust the rotating speed to help ensure that the heat dissipation of each board continues to be stable. This automatic adjustment also helps ensure that the equipment runs quietly and consumes less energy than the manually adjustable fan mode. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed. Adjustable Speed Mode Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
IU19 EFI IU20 PIU IU21 AUX IU22 AUX IU23 PIU IU24 ATE
IU9 IU 1 IU 2 IU 3 IU 4 IU 5 IU 6 IU 7 IU 8
IU10 IU
11
IU
12
IU
13
IU
14
IU 15
IU
16
IU 17
IU 18
Fan tray assembly
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
54
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
The fan tray assembly consists of three fans and one fan control unit. Figure 6-17 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 6-17 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
l l
Appearance
Figure 6-18 shows a fan tray assembly.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
55
Figure 6-18 Fan tray assembly
SYSTEM
1 1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (ten in total)
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

NOTE
Table 6-15 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Weight Power Consumptiona Specification 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H)) 3.6 kg (7.9) l 42.7 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 74.8 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed l 106.8 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 165.5 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed l 256.3 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 256.3 W.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
56
6.4 PIU
PIU: power interface unit
6.4.1 Version Description

The functional versions of the PIU board are TN16 and TN51. Table 6-16 lists the version description of the PIU board. Table 6-16 Version description of the PIU board Item Functional version Description The available functional versions of the PIU board are TN16 and TN51. This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. l Function: Only the TN16PIU supports the intelligent ammeter function. For details, see 6.4.3 Functions and Features. l Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see PIU Specification. Replacement Table 6-17 lists the substitution rules for the PIU board.
Difference
Table 6-17 Substitution rules of the PIU board Original Board TN51PIU Substitute Board TN16PIU Substitution Rules The TN16PIU can be created as TN51PIU on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN16PIU functions as the TN51PIU.
TN16PIU
None
6.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 is configured with eight PIU boards. The eight boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is configured with four PIU boards. The four boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
57
6.4.3 Functions and Features

The PIU board accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering functions. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 6-18. Table 6-18 Functions and features of the PIU board Function and Feature Basic function Description Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. Unlike the TN51PIU, the TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and report the power consumption to the system control unit.
NOTE
The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.
6.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the PIU board.
Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 6-19 shows the front panel of the TN51PIU board. Figure 6-20 shows the front panel of the TN16PIU board. Figure 6-19 Front panel of the TN51PIU board
PIU
RTN PWR -48V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
58
Figure 6-20 Front panel of the TN16PIU board

PIU
RTN(+) PWR NEG(-)
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Power indicator (PWR) - green
Interface
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to access the DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V.
6.4.5 Valid Slots

One slot houses one PIU board. Table 6-19 and Table 6-20 shows the valid slots for the PIU board. Table 6-19 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89 IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46
Table 6-20 Valid slots for the TN16PIU board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89 IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46 IU20 and IU23
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
59
6.4.6 Specifications of the PIU

Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Performance Specifications
Table 6-21 Performance specifications of the PIU board Item Number of DC input power supplies Input DC power voltage range Input DC power current Unit V DC A Value 1 -40 to -72 60
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.) TN16PIU: 0.65 (1.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 1.8 3 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 1.8 3.6
TN51PIU TN16PIU
6.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces

The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance. These OptiX OSN 8800 T64 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure 6-21.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
60
Figure 6-21 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

EFI2 EFI1
NM_ETH2
PIU
RTN
53A PWR
STI
-48V
ATE
PIU
RTN
53A PWR
-48V
ALMI2
ALMI1 ALMO1
LAMP1 LAMP2
These OptiX OSN 8800 T32 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure 6-22.
ETH1 ETH2 ETH3
CLK2 TOD2
CLK1 TOD1
ALMO3
SERIAL
ALMO4
ALMO2
NM_ETH1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
61
Figure 6-22 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack

EFI2 EFI1
NM_ETH2
PIU
RTN
STI
53A PWR -48V
ATE
LAMP1 LAMP2
ALMI2
ALMI1 ALMO1
These OptiX OSN 8800 T16 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI, and ATE, as shown in Figure 6-23. Figure 6-23 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
PIU EFI RTN(+) PWR NEG(-) ATE
ETH1 ETH2 ETH3

ETH1 SERIAL NM_ETH2 ETH2 ETH3
CLK2 TOD2
CLK1 TOD1
ALMO3
SERIAL
NM_ETH1
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
ALMO4
ALMO2
ALMI1 ALMO1 CLK1 TOD1
ALMI2
CLK2 TOD2
ALMO3 ALMO4
ALMO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
62
6.5.1 ATE
ATE: Interface Board of Alarm & Timing & Expanding
Version Description
The functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51. Table 6-22 lists the version description of the ATE board. Table 6-22 Version description of the ATE board Item Functional version Description The available functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51. This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. l Appearance: The number of interfaces varies according to the board version. For details, see Front Panel. l Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see ATE Specification. Replacement The TN16ATE and TN51ATE cannot replace each other.
Difference
Application
The ATE provides alarm output/concatenation interface and alarm input interface. The TN16ATE provides interfaces for inputting and outputting clock signals. Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the ATE board.

Figure 6-24 shows the front panel of the TN51ATE board. Figure 6-25 shows the front panel of the TN16ATE board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
63
Figure 6-24 Front panel of the TN51ATE board

ATE
ALMI2
Figure 6-25 Front panel of the TN16ATE board

ATE
ALMI2 ALMI1
ALMI1 ALMO1 ALMO2
ALMO3 ALMO4
CLK2 TOD2
ALMO1 ALMO2 CLK1 TOD1
ALMO3 ALMO4
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the TN51ATE board and there are ten interfaces on the front panel of the TN16ATE board. Table 6-23 lists the types and functions of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
64
Table 6-23 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ATE board Interface ALMO1 ALMO4 Type RJ-45 Function l Alarm signals can be output either to an alarm cabinet or an external device through ALMO1 ALMO4. At the alarm cabinet or external device, all alarms are displayed. l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. The definitions for the pins of the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. For example, if ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded. ALMI1 ALMI2 RJ-45 The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight alarm inputs. The name of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms. CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input and output signals at the same time. TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or output time signals.
CLK1/CLK2
RJ-45
TOD1/TOD2
RJ-45
Pin assignment of the RJ-45 Connector

Figure 6-26 shows the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector. Figure 6-26 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
65
Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 6-24. Table 6-24 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N Function Outputs the critical alarm signal positive Outputs the critical alarm signal negative Outputs the major alarm signal positive Outputs the minor alarm signal positive Outputs the minor alarm signal negative Outputs the major alarm signal negative Alarm signal output 1 positive Alarm signal output 1 negative

For the pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces, refer to Table 6-25. Table 6-25 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Signal ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N Function Alarm signal output 2 positive Alarm signal output 2 negative Alarm signal output 3 positive Alarm signal output 4 positive Alarm signal output 4 negative
66
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 6 7 8
Signal ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N ALM_SWITCH_OUT6P ALM_SWITCH_OUT6N
Function Alarm signal output 3 negative Alarm signal output 5 positive Alarm signal output 5 negative
Pin Assignment of the ALMI1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 6-26. Table 6-26 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal SWITCHI_IN1 GND SWITCHI_IN2 SWITCHI_IN3 GND GND SWITCHI_IN4 GND Function Alarm input 1 Ground Alarm input 2 Alarm input 3 Ground Ground Alarm input 4 Ground

For the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface, refer to Table 6-27. Table 6-27 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Signal SWITCHI_IN5 GND SWITCHI_IN6 SWITCHI_IN7 GND Function Alarm input 5 Ground Alarm input 6 Alarm input 7 Ground
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
67
Pin 6 7 8
Signal GND SWITCHI_IN8 GND
Function Ground Alarm input 8 Ground
Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 6-28. Table 6-28 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal RJ0_E1_RX_N RJ0_E1_RX_P NC RJ0_E1_TX_N RJ0_E1_TX_P NC NC NC Function 2MHz/2Mbit input negative 2MHz/2Mbit input positive Not connected 2MHz/2Mbit output negative 2MHz/2Mbit output positive Not connected Not connected Not connected
Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 6-29. Table 6-29 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Signal GND GND DCLS_IN0_N GND GND DCLS_IN0_P DCLS_OUT0_N

Function Ground Ground DCLS/1PPS input negative Ground Ground DCLS/1PPS input positive DCLS/1PPS output negative
68
Pin 8
Signal DCLS_OUT0_P
Function DCLS/1PPS output positive
Valid Slots
One slot houses one ATE board. Table 6-30 shows the valid slots for the TN51ATE board. Table 6-30 Valid slots for the TN51ATE board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU87 IU48
Table 6-31 shows the valid slots for the TN16ATE board. Table 6-31 Valid slots for the TN16ATE board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU24
Specifications of the ATE

Specifications include dimensions, weight and power consumption.
l Dimensions of front panel: TN51ATE: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) TN16ATE: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) l Weight: TN51ATE: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb.) TN16ATE: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
69
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.3 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3 0.3
TN51ATE TN16ATE
6.5.2 EFI
EFI: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI board is available, that is, TN16.
Application
The EFI provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface, subrack communication interface and OAM interfaces.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board.

Figure 6-27 shows the front panel of the EFI board. Figure 6-27 Front panel of the EFI board
EFI
LAMP1 ETH1 SERIAL NM_ETH2
LAMP2
ETH2 ETH3
NM_ETH1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
70
CAUTION
The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be damaged.
Interfaces
There are eight interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board. Table 6-32 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 6-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI board Interface LAMP1 LAMP2 ETH1ETH3 Type RJ-45 RJ-45 Function Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack. l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.
NOTE When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication between the master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board. NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 RJ-45 l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. SERIAL DB9 The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25 protocol.

Figure 6-28 shows the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
71
Figure 6-28 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector

Figure 6-29 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector. Figure 6-29 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 6-33. Table 6-33 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH1_TXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication
72
ETH1_TXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 3
Signal ETH1_RXP
Function Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH1_CRIT_TXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXN
ETH1_RXN
ETH1_CRIT_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_RXN

For the pin assignment of the ETH2 interface, refer to Table 6-34. Table 6-34 Pin assignment of the ETH2 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH2_TXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH2_TXN
ETH2_RXP
ETH2_CRIT_TXP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
73
Pin 5
Signal ETH2_CRIT_TXN
Function Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH2_RXN
ETH2_CRIT_RXP
ETH2_CRIT_RXN

For the pin assignment of the ETH3 interface, refer to Table 6-35. Table 6-35 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH3_TXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication
ETH3_TXN
ETH3_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXN
ETH3_RXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
74
Pin 7
Signal ETH3_CRIT_RXP
Function Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH3_CRIT_RXN
Pin Assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 6-36. Table 6-36 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal CRIT_ALMP CRIT_ALMN MAJ_ALMP RUNP RUNN MAJ_ALMN MIN_ALMP MIN_ALMN Function Positive pole for critical alarm signals Negative pole for critical alarm signals Positive pole for major alarm signals Positive pole for power indicating signals Negative pole for power indicating signals Negative pole for major alarm signals Positive pole for minor alarm signals Negative pole for minor alarm signals
Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface, refer to Table 6-37.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
75
Table 6-37 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal NM_ETNTXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM Negative pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM Positive pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM Not connected Not connected Negative pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM Not connected Not connected
NM_ETNTXN
NM_ETNRXP
4 5 6
NC NC NM_ETNRXN
7 8
NC NC

For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface, refer to Table 6-38. Table 6-38 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface Pin 1 Signal NMJL_ETNTXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with a network management system (NM) Negative pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with an NM Positive pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM Not connected Not connected
NMJL_ETNTXN
NMJL_ETNRXP
4 5
NC NC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
76
Pin 6
Signal NMJL_ETNRXN
Function Negative pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM Not connected Not connected
7 8
NC NC
Pin Assignment of the SERIAL Interface

For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 6-39. Table 6-39 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal N.C RXD TXD DTR GND GND N.C Function Not defined Receive end Transmit end Data terminal equipment ready Ground Reserved Reserved Ground Not defined
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI board. Table 6-40 shows the valid slots for the EFI board. Table 6-40 Valid slots for the EFI board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU19
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI board.
The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the EFI. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. ID7 and ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID6ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. The value is 000000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 6-30 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI board. l l l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the T1. When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. As shown in Figure 6-30, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 0000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Figure 6-30 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board
U8 SERIAL T1
SW1
SW1
SW2
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Specifications of the EFI

l l Dimensions of front panel: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: 1.1 lb. (0.5 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
SW2
(ID6) (ID5) (ID4) (ID3) (ID2) (ID1) ON ON ON ON ON ON
NM_ETH2
(ID8) ON
(ID7) ON
78
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 2.5
EFI
6.5.3 EFI1
EFI1: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI1 board is available, that is, TN51.
Application
The EFI1 provides network management and OAM interfaces.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board.

Figure 6-31 shows the front panel of the EFI1 board. Figure 6-31 Front panel of the EFI1 board
EFI1
NM_ETH2 SERIAL
Interfaces
There are two interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board. Table 6-41 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 6-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI1 board Interface NM_ETH2 Type RJ-45 Function l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function. SERIAL DB9 The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25 protocol.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

Figure 6-33 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector. Figure 6-33 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
80

For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface, refer to Table 6-42. Table 6-42 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface Pin 1 Signal NMJL_ETNTXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with a network management system (NM) Negative pole for transmitting the concatenated data for communication with an NM Positive pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM Not connected Not connected Negative pole for receiving the concatenated data for communication with an NM Not connected Not connected
NMJL_ETNTXN
NMJL_ETNRXP
4 5 6
NC NC NMJL_ETNRXN
7 8
NC NC

For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 6-43. Table 6-43 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin 1 2 3 4 Signal N.C RXD TXD DTR Function Not defined Receive end Transmit end Data terminal equipment ready
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
81
Pin 5 6 7 8 9
Signal GND GND N.C
Function Ground Reserved Reserved Ground Not defined
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI1 board. Table 6-44 provides the valid slots for the EFI1 board. Table 6-44 Valid slots for the EFI1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU76 IU38
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board. The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. ID7 and ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID6ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. The value is 000000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 6-34 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board. l l l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the CPLD. When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. As shown in Figure 6-34, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 0000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
82
Figure 6-34 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
NM_ETH2
CPLD SERIAL
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
SW1
SW2
Specifications of the EFI1

l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 7
EFI1
6.5.4 EFI2
EFI2: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI2 board is available, that is, TN51.
Application
The EFI2 provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface and subrack communication interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
83
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board.

Figure 6-35 shows the front panel of the EFI2 board. Figure 6-35 Front panel of the EFI2 board
EFI2
LAMP1
ETH1 ETH2 ETH3
CAUTION
LAMP2 NM_ETH1
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board. Table 6-45 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 6-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI2 board Interface LAMP1 LAMP2 Type RJ-45 Function Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
84
Interface NM_ETH1
Type RJ-45
Function l Connects the network interface on the equipment through a network cable to that on an NM server so that the NM can manage the equipment. l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.
ETH1ETH3
RJ-45
l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 6-46.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
85
Table 6-46 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH1_TXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH1_TXN
ETH1_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXN
ETH1_RXN
ETH1_CRIT_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_RXN

For the pin assignment of the ETH2 interface, refer to Table 6-47. Table 6-47 Pin assignment of the ETH2 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH2_TXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication
86
ETH2_TXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 3
Signal ETH2_RXP
Function Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH2_CRIT_TXP
ETH2_CRIT_TXN
ETH2_RXN
ETH2_CRIT_RXP
ETH2_CRIT_RXN

For the pin assignment of the ETH3 interface, refer to Table 6-48. Table 6-48 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH3_TXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Negative pole for transmitting the data for ordinary inter-subrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for transmitting the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH3_TXN
ETH3_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
87
Pin 5
Signal ETH3_CRIT_TXN
Function Negative pole for transmitting the data for emergent inter-subrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for ordinary intersubrack communication Positive pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication Negative pole for receiving the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH3_RXN
ETH3_CRIT_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_RXN

For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 6-49. Table 6-49 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal CRIT_ALMP CRIT_ALMN MAJ_ALMP RUNP RUNN MAJ_ALMN MIN_ALMP MIN_ALMN Function Positive pole for critical alarm signals Negative pole for critical alarm signals Positive pole for major alarm signals Positive pole for power indicating signals Negative pole for power indicating signals Negative pole for major alarm signals Positive pole for minor alarm signals Negative pole for minor alarm signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
88

For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface, refer to Table 6-50. Table 6-50 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal NM_ETNTXP Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM Negative pole for transmitting the data for communication with the NM Positive pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM Not connected Not connected Negative pole for receiving the data for communication with the NM Not connected Not connected
NM_ETNTXN
NM_ETNRXP
4 5 6
NC NC NM_ETNRXN
7 8
NC NC
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI2 board. Table 6-51 shows the valid slots for the EFI2 board. Table 6-51 Valid slots for the EFI2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU71 IU37
Specifications of the EFI2

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
89
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb)
Power Consumption
EFI2
6.5.5 STI
STI: Synchronous Timing Interface Board
Version Description
The functional versions of the STI board are TN52 and TNL1. In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version must be TN52.
Application
The STI, a clock interface unit, provides interfaces for input and output of clock signals.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the STI board.

Figure 6-37 and Figure 6-38 show the front panel of the STI board. Figure 6-37 Front panel of the TN52STI board
STI
CLK2 TOD2
CLK1 TOD1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
90
Figure 6-38 TNL1STI front panel

STI
In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version must be TN52.
CLK2 TOD2 PHONE
CLK1 TOD1 F1
NOTE
Interfaces
The STI board functions as an interface board of the system for STG. The TNL1STI can provide an orderwire phone interface and F1 interface. Table 6-52 provides descriptions of the interfaces on the STI board. Table 6-52 Interface description of the STI Interfa ce CLK1/ CLK2 TOD1/ TOD2 PHONE F1 Silkscreen CLK1/ CLK2 TOD1/ TOD2 PHON E F1 Connector RJ-45 Function CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input and output signals at the same time. TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or output time signals. Orderwire phone interface F1 interface
RJ-45
RJ-45 RJ-45

Figure 6-39 describes the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
91
Figure 6-39 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 6-53. Table 6-53 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal RJ0_E1_RX_N RJ0_E1_RX_P NC RJ0_E1_TX_N RJ0_E1_TX_P NC NC NC Function 2MHz/2Mbit input negative 2MHz/2Mbit input positive Not connected 2MHz/2Mbit output negative 2MHz/2Mbit output positive Not connected Not connected Not connected
Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 6-54. Table 6-54 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface Pin 1 2 3 4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Signal GND GND DCLS_IN0_N GND

Function Ground Ground DCLS/1PPS input negative Ground

92
Pin 5 6 7 8
Signal GND DCLS_IN0_P DCLS_OUT0_N DCLS_OUT0_P
Function Ground DCLS/1PPS input positive DCLS/1PPS output negative DCLS/1PPS output positive
Pin Assignment of the PHONE Interface

For the pin assignment of the PHONE interface, refer to Table 6-55. Table 6-55 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal NC NC NC RING TIP NC NC NC Function Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal 1 Signal 2 Not connected Not connected Not connected
Pin Assignment of the F1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the F1 interface, refer to Table 6-56. Table 6-56 Pin assignment of the F1 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Signal TX_P TX_N RX_P NC NC RX_N

Function Transmitting (+) Transmitting (-) Receiving (+) Not connected Not connected Receiving (-)
93
Pin 7 8
Signal NC NC
Function Not connected Not connected
Valid Slots
One slot houses one STI board. Table 6-57 shows the valid slots for the STI board. Table 6-57 Valid slots for the STI board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU82 IU47
Specifications of the STI

l l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) Weight of TN52STI: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Weight of TNL1STI: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 1.5 3 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 1.5 3
TN52STI TNL1STI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
94
7 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category
7
Board Categor y Optical transpon der unit
OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category
The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 7-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800. Table 7-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 Board Name Board Description Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed
TN12L DM TN11L DMD TN11L DMS TN12L DX TN11LE M24 TN11LE X4 TN11L OA TN11L OG
2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 22GE + 210GE and 2OTU2 Ethernet switch board 410GE and 2OTU2 Ethernet switch board 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
95
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN12L OG TN11L OM TN12L OM TN13L QM TN12L QMD TN12L QMS TN11LS Q TN12LS X TN13LS X TN12LS XL TN12LS XLR TN11LS XR TN12L WXS 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/ s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
96
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN11T MX TN12T MX Tributar y unit TN52T DX TN53T DX TN52T OG TN52T OM TN52T QX TN53T QX TN55T QX TN53TS XL TN54T HA TN54T OA Line unit TN52N D2 TN53N D2 TN52N Q2 TN53N Q2
4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
2 x 10G tributary service processing board
Suppo rted Suppo rted
8 x GE service processing board 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 2 x 10G line service processing board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
97
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed
TN54N Q2 TN52N S2 TN53N S2 TN52N S3 TN54N S3 PID unit TN54E NQ2 TN54N PO2 TN55N PO2 TN55N PO2E Crossconnect unit and system and commun ication unit TN16X CH TNK2S XM TNK4S XM TN52X CH TN52X CM OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross) 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended High Cross-connection, System Control and Clock Processing Board OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 12 x OTU2 PID Board 40G line service processing board 10G Line Service Processing Board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Not suppor ted Suppo rted Suppo rted Not suppor ted Not suppor ted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
98
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
TNK2X CT TNK4X CT TN16SC C TN51SC C TN52SC C TNK2S CC TN16A UX TN51A UX TNK2S XH TNK4S XH Optical multiple xer and demultip lexer unit TN11M 40 TN12M 40 TN11D4 0
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
system control and communication unit
Not suppor ted Not suppor ted Not suppor ted Suppo rted
system auxiliary interface unit
Not suppor ted Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
40-channel multiplexing unit
40-channel demultiplexing unit
Suppo rted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
99
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN12D4 0 TN11M 40V TN12M 40V TN11D4 0V TN12FI U TN13FI U TN11IT L TN12IT L TN11SF IU Optical add and drop multiple xing unit TN11C MR2 TN11C MR4 TN11D MR1 TN11M R2 TN11M R4 TN11M R8 TN11M R8V fiber interface unit for sync timing CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA interleaver board 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA fiber interface unit 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
100
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
101
TN11SB M2 Reconfig urable optical add and drop multiple xing unit TN11R DU9 TN11R MU9a TN11R OAM TN12W SD9 TN13W SD9 TN12W SM9 TN13W SM9 TN11W SMD2 TN11W SMD4 TN12W SMD4 TN11W SMD9 Optical amplifier unit TN11C RPC TN11D AS1 TN11H BA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board 9-port ROADM multiplexing board reconfigurable optical adding board
9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band optical amplifier unit high-power booster amplifier board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN11O AU1 TN12O AU1 TN13O AU1 TN11O BU1 TN12O BU1 TN11O BU2 TN12O BU2 Optical supervis ory channel unit TN11H SC1 TN12SC 1 TN12SC 2 TN11ST 2 Optical protectio n unit TN11D CP TN12D CP TN11O LP TN12O LP
optical amplifier unit
optical booster unit
High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel board unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit 2-channel optical path protection unit
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
optical line protection unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
102
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
TN11SC S Spectru m analyzer unit TN11M CA4 TN11M CA8 TN11O PM8 TN11W MU Variable optical attenuato r unit Optical power and dispersio n equalizin g unit Clock unit TN12V A1 TN12V A4 TN11D CU TN11T DC
sync optical channel separator unit 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel optical power monitoring board wavelength monitoring unit 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit dispersion compensation board single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
TN52ST G TNK2S TG
centralized clock board
Not suppor ted Suppo rted
Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed
OCS system unit
SSN4BP A SSN3E AS2 SSN1E GSH
optical booster and pre-amplifier board 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board 16 x GE Ethernet switching and processing board
Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
103
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
Opti X OSN 8800 T64 Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Not suppor ted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Not suppor ted
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Not support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
SSN4SF 64 SSN1SF 64A SSN4SF D64 SSN4SL 64 SSN4SL D64 SSN3SL H41 SSN4SL O16 SSN4SL Q16 SSN4SL Q64 ROPA subsyste m unitb TN11G FU TN11R GU TN11R OP Interface area unitc TN16A TE
1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 1 x STM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 1 x STM-64 optical interface board
2 x STM-64 optical interface board
16 x STM-4/STM-1 optical interface board 8 x STM-16 optical interface board
4xSTM-16 optical interface board
4 x STM-64 line interface board
gain flatness unit ROPA gain unit ROPA pumping unit interface board of alarm & timing & expanding
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
104
Board Categor y
Board Name
Board Description
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Support ed Not support ed Support ed Support ed support ed Support ed Support ed Support ed
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Not support ed Support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Not support ed Support ed
TN51A TE TN16EF I TN51EF I1 TN51EF I2 TNL1S TI TN52ST I TN51PI U TN16PI U power interface unit EMI filter interface board
Not suppor ted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted Suppo rted
EMI filter interface board
EMI filter interface board
synchronous timing interface board
a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902. b: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide. c: For details of the interface area unit refer to 6 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
105
8
About This Chapter
OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack
8.1 Structure Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has an independent power supply. 8.2 Slot Description The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right. 8.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan) In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray assembly and air filter. The air filter can be removed, cleaned and replaced. 8.4 PIU PIU: power interface unit 8.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
106
8.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has an independent power supply. Figure 8-1 shows the structure of the subrack. Figure 8-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram
1
3 6
4 5
1. Indicator 4. Fan tray assembly 7. Mounting ear
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.
l l l
Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack. Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 21 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical VOA is also installed in this area. Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack. Air filter: The air filter protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack. Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet. Interface area: The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.
l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Table 8-1 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered as the same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 8-1 Technical specifications of the subrack Item Dimensions Weight (empty subracka) Maximum Power Consumption Rated working current Nominal working voltage Working voltage range Specification 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 400 mm (H) 13 kg (28.6 lb.) 1200 W 25 A (-48 V) -48 V DC/-60 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly or air filter is installed.
Table 8-2 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 8-2 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 6800 Unit Name Typical Power Consumpti on at 25C (77F)a 566 Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55C (131F)a 722.2 Remarks
Su bra ck
OTU subrack
It is the power consumed after you install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTU subrack. It is the power consumed after you install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OAU101, one OBU103, one FIU, one SC1, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTM subrack.
108
OT M subr ack
Subrack 1
566
722.2
Subrack 2
168.7
281.6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit Name
Typical Power Consumpti on at 25C (77F)a 144.9
Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55C (131F)a 253.9
Remarks
OLA subrack
It is the power consumed after you install two OAU101s, two FIUs, one SC2, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OLA subrack. It is the power consumed after you install two OAU101s, two VA4s, two OBU103s, two MR4s, four 10G OTUs (LSXes), two FIUs, one SC2, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an FOADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40, one D40, two WSMD2s, two DAS1s, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one WSMD4, one DAS1, one M40, one D40, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one WSMD4, one DAS1, one M40, one D40, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one WSMD4, one DAS1, one M40, one D40, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack.
FOADM subrack
292.3
418.3
RO AD M subr ack (two dime nsio ns)
Subrack 1
87.4
96.4
Subrack 2
566
722.2
RO AD M subr ack (four dime nsio ns)b
Subrack 1
160
268.8
Subrack 2
160
268.8
Subrack 3
160
268.8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
109
Unit Name
Typical Power Consumpti on at 25C (77F)a Subrack 4 160
Maximum Power Consumpti on at 55C (131F)a 268.8
Remarks
It is the power consumed after you install one WSMD4, one DAS1, one M40, one D40, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an ROADM subrack. It is the power consumed after you install one M40V, one D40, one OBU103, one OAU101, one SC1, one FIU, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTN subrack. It is the power consumed after you install ten ND2s, two TQXes, two TOAs, two XCSes, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OTN subrack. It is the power consumption when the cabinet is installed with two OTU subracks, oneand one OTM subrack 2 in an OTM cabinet.
OTN subr ack
Optical subrack
168.7
281.6
Electrica l subrack
557
723.8
Ca bin et
OTM cabinet (40x10 Gbit/s)
1422.2
1951.1
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module. b: Subrack 1 and subrack 2 are used as subracks in the line dimensions at a four-dimension RADOM station; subrack 3 and subrack 4 are used as subracks for adding/dropping local services. Service boards can be configured in another subrack.
8.2 Slot Description

The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right. Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 8-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
110
Figure 8-2 Slots of the subrack
Board area
X C I I I I I I I I S U U U U U U U U / 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I U 9
X C S / I U 1 0
5
I U 1 1
I U 1 2
I U 1 3
I U 1 4
I U 1 5
I U 1 6
S C C / I U 1 7
P I S U C C P / I I U U 1 A 8 U X
IU19
IU20
IU21
VOA area
l l l l l l l
IU1-IU17 are reserved for service boards. IU21 is reserved for the AUX. IU19 and IU20 are reserved for the PIU. IU18 is reserved for the active SCC. IU17 is available for the standby SCC or the other service boards. IU9 and IU10 are available for the XCS or for the other service boards. IU15 and IU16 are available for the STG.
Mapping of Pair Slots

Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. For the two boards in the paired slots, the inter-board cross-connection can be directly configured, and the cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the cross-connect board. The OptiX OSN 6800 supports seven paired slots, which are IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. The paired slots support distributed grooming.
8.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)

In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray assembly and air filter. The air filter can be removed, cleaned and replaced.
Version Description

Table 8-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function Basic function Commissioning control Description Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature range. l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed. Partitioned heat dissipation Hot swapping Alarming Status checking Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly. Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information. Checks and reports on the fan status.
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to operate normally within the designated temperature range. The fan tray assembly is installed in the lower part of the subrack and blows air up, creating an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 8-3 and Figure 8-4 show the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 8-3 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Board area
Optical fiber laying area Fan tray assembly Air inlet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
112
Figure 8-4 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Airduct frame
Air outlet
Board area
Fan tray assembly
Optical fiber laying area
Air inlet
NOTE
If multiple subracks are used, an air duct frame is required to help in heat dissipation.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 8-4. The partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode. Table 8-4 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed. l If the temperature of a partition is lower than 45C (113F), the fans run at low speed. l If the temperature of a partition is higher than 65C (149F), the fans run at high speed. l If the ambient temperature is from 45C to 65C (113F to 149F), the fans in this partition run with linear stepless speed. Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal. If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed. Adjustable Speed Mode Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
113
Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
I U 1 9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I U 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VOA
Fan Tray Assembly
There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
l l
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if: Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 8-6 shows the functional blocks of the fan tray assembly. Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
114
l l
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly. Fan control board: Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case, the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at full speed. Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
1. Air filter
3. Fans (ten in total)
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU22.

Table 8-5 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 fan tray assembly.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
115
Table 8-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Specification 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H)) 3.6 kg l 40 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 60 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 120 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 120 W.
Weight Power Consumptiona
8.4 PIU
PIU: power interface unit

Only one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is, TN11.
Type
Table 8-6 lists the types of the TN11PIU. Table 8-6 Type description of the PIU Unit TN11PIU Type 02 Description Provides the subrack with a -48 V DC or -60 V DC power through the backplane, and provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power.
8.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
116
Figure 8-8 Reference diagram for the application of the PIU board
Backplane -48V PIU A
-48V
PIU B
Board A
Board B -48V -48V
The system accesses two power supplies through PIU A and PIU B. The power distribution parts of the backplane are connected to different external power supplies. The power supplies provided by PIU A and PIU B are converged and converted into the -48 V power supply at the service board. In this manner, the PIU boards provide the -48 V power to each service board. The two PIU boards are of mutual hot backup. There is no active/standby relation between the two PIU boards. Thus, the subrack can work normally as long as any PIU board works normally. The total power provided by the two PIU boards is equal to the power consumption of the subrack. When the input voltage of the two PIU boards is different from each other, the two PIU boards provide uneven current. The PIU board with higher voltage provides most of the current. When the power output of one PIU board is abnormal or one PIU board is offline, the system reports alarms on the related boards. During the removal of the faulty board and the insertion of a new board, the system works normally. In this way, the maintenance is easier.

As a power interface unit, the PIU board accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering functions. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-7. Table 8-7 Functions and features of the PIU board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. l Provides the subrack with a -48 V DC or -60 V DC power through the backplane, and provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
117
Function and Feature Fault detection
Description The SCC board detects the overvoltage or undervoltage of the input voltage on each PIU board. The SCC board reports alarms to the NMS after it detects overvoltage or undervoltage. In this case, the system does not shut down the PIU board. The maintenance personnel should check for the cause according to the alarms.
8.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the PIU board.

Figure 8-9 shows the front panels of the PIU boards. Figure 8-9 Front panel of the PIU
PIU
RUN
NEG(-) RTN(+)
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Running status indicator (RUN) - green
Interface
There is one power interface on the front panel. The interface is used to access DC power from in a range from -40 V to -72 V.
8.4.5 Valid Slots

One slot houses one PIU board. Table 8-8 shows the valid slots for the TN11PIU board.
Table 8-8 Valid slots for the TN11PIU board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU19 and IU20

Specifications include performance indexes, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Table 8-9 Performance specifications of the PIU board Item Number of DC input power supplies Input DC power voltage range Input DC power current Unit V DC A Value 1 -40 to -72 30
l l Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 2.6 in. (H)) Weight: 1.10 lb. (0.5 kg)
Power Consumption
Board TN11PIU Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 24 W Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 38 W

The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance. These interfaces are located in the interface area of the subrack and on the front panel of the AUX, as shown in Figure 8-10.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
119
Figure 8-10 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack

COM ETH3 ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04 SERIAL ALMI1 ALMI2 LAMP1 ALMP2
xcs
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SCC
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC
PIU
RUN
NEG(-) RTN(+)
SubRACK_ID
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1 ETH2
Fan
RESET STAT PROG LAMP TEST
AUX
ALM CUT
xcs
SCC
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.
8.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area

The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface. The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Figure 8-11 shows the front panel. Figure 8-11 Interfaces in the interface area
COM ETH3 ALM 01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM 04 SERIAL ALM I1 ALM I2 LAM P1 LAM P2
Description of interfaces in the interface area is list in Table 8-10.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
120
CAUTION
Table 8-10 Description of interfaces in the interface area Interface Commissioning interface Inter-subrack communication interface Silk-screen COM ETH3 Connector RJ-45 RJ-45 Function It is for the commissioning. l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
121
Interface Alarm output and cascading interface
Silk-screen ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMO3 ALMO4
Connector RJ-45
Function l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display of alarms. l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/ cascading, respectively. The definitions for the pins of the ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. For example, if ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2 can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack. l The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded.
OAM interface
SERIAL
DB9
The OAM interface is a serial NM interface, providing functions of serial NM and supporting X.25 protocol. External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm inputs. The name of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to implement remote monitoring of external alarms. This interface drives the running indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.
Alarm input interface
ALMI1 ALMI2
RJ-45
Subrack alarm output and cascading interface
LAMP1 LAMP2
RJ-45
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
122
8.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board

The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and emergent communication interface. Figure 8-12 shows the front panel of the AUX. Slot IU21 houses the AUX board. Figure 8-12 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX
STAT PROG
AUX
Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 8-11. Table 8-11 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board Interface NE management interface Silk-screen NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 Connector RJ-45 Function l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the U2000 server to achieve the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. l Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
123
Interface Inter-subrack communication interface
Silk-screen ETH1/ETH2
Connector RJ-45
Function l Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP board.
8.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces

The interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 used for data communication and equipment maintenance use the RJ-45 and the DB9 connectors. The pin assignment figures and the functions of the pins are given in this section.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

Figure 8-14 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
124
Figure 8-14 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
Pin Assignment of the COM Interface

For the pin assignment of the COM interface, refer to Table 8-12. Table 8-12 Pin assignment of the COM interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal ETNTX_P_1 ETNTX_N_1 ETNRX_P_1 NC NC ETNRX_N_1 NC NC Function Transmits the data positive Transmits the data negative Receives the data positive Not connected Not connected Receives data negative Not connected Not connected

For the pin assignment of the ETH3 interface, refer to Table 8-13. Table 8-13 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH3_TXP Function Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications
125
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 2
Signal ETH3_TXN
Function Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications
ETH3_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXP
ETH3_CRIT_TXN
ETH3_RXN
ETH3_CRIT_RXP
ETH3_CRIT_RXN

For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 8-14. Table 8-14 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Signal CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N Function Outputs the critical alarm signal positive Outputs the critical alarm signal negative Outputs the major alarm signal positive Outputs the minor alarm signal positive Outputs the minor alarm signal negative
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
126
Pin 6 7 8
Signal MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N
Function Outputs the major alarm signal negative Alarm signal output 1 positive Alarm signal output 1 negative

For the pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces, refer to Table 8-15. Table 8-15 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N ALM_SWITCH_OUT6P ALM_SWITCH_OUT6N Function Alarm signal output 2 positive Alarm signal output 2 negative Alarm signal output 3 positive Alarm signal output 4 positive Alarm signal output 4 negative Alarm signal output 3 negative Alarm signal output 5 positive Alarm signal output 5 negative

For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 8-16. Table 8-16 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Signal N.C
Function Not defined

127
Pin 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal RXD TXD DTR GND GND 5VOADM
Function Receive end of data Transmit end of data Data terminal equipment ready Ground Reserved Reserved GND Power supply for OADM

For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 8-17. Table 8-17 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal SWITCHI_IN1 GND SWITCHI_IN2 SWITCHI_IN3 GND GND SWITCHI_IN4 GND Function Alarm input 1 Ground Alarm input 2 Alarm input 3 Ground Ground Alarm input 4 Ground

For the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface, refer to Table 8-18. Table 8-18 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 Pin 1 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Signal SWITCHI_IN5 GND

Function Alarm input 5 Ground

128
Pin 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal SWITCHI_IN6 SWITCHI_IN7 GND GND SWITCHI_IN8 GND
Function Alarm input 6 Alarm input 7 Ground Ground Alarm input 8 Ground

For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 8-19. Table 8-19 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal CRIT_ALMP CRIT_ALMN MAJ_ALMP RUNP RUNN MAJ_ALMN MIN_ALMP MIN_ALMN Function Critical alarm signal positive Critical alarm signal negative Major alarm signal positive Power indicating signal positive Power indicating signal negative Major alarm signal positive Minor alarm signal positive Minor alarm signal negative
Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface, refer to Table 8-20. Table 8-20 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface Pin 1 2 Signal NM_ETNTXP NM_ETNTXN Function NM communications, transmits the data positive NM communications, transmits the data negative
129
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 3 4 5 6 7 8
Signal NM_ETNRXP NC NC NM_ETNRXN NC NC
Function NM communications, receives the data positive Not connected. Not connected. NM communications, receives the data negative Not connected. Not connected.
Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface, refer to Table 8-21. Table 8-21 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface Pin 1 Signal NMJL_ETNTXP Function Transmits the concatenated data positive for NM communications Transmits the concatenated data negative for NM communications Receives the concatenated data positive for NM communications Not connected Not connected Receives the concatenated data negative for NM communications Not connected Not connected
NMJL_ETNTXN
NMJL_ETNRXP
4 5 6
NC NC NMJL_ETNRXN
7 8
NC NC

For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 8-22.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
130
Table 8-22 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH1_TXP Function Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications
ETH1_TXN
ETH1_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXP
ETH1_CRIT_TXN
ETH1_RXN
ETH1_CRIT_RXP
ETH1_CRIT_RXN

For the pin assignment of the ETH2 interface, refer to Table 8-23. Table 8-23 Pin assignment of the ETH2 interface Pin 1 Signal ETH2_TXP Function Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications
ETH2_TXN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
131
Pin 3
Signal ETH2_RXP
Function Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications
ETH2_CRIT_TXP
ETH2_CRIT_TXN
ETH2_RXN
ETH2_CRIT_RXP
ETH2_CRIT_RXN
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board. The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. ID7 and ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID6ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. The value is 000000 by default. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 8-15 shows the position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board. l l l The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the CPLD. When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0. As shown in Figure 8-15, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 0000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
132
Figure 8-15 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
NM_ETH2
CPLD SERIAL
(ID5) (ID6) (ID7) (ID8)
ON ON ON ON
(ID1) (ID2) (ID3) (ID4)
ON ON ON ON
SW1
SW2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
133
9
Board Category Optical transponder unit
The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 9-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 6800. Table 9-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 6800 Board Name TN11ECOM TN11L4G TN11LDGS TN11LDGD TN12LDM TN11LDMD TN11LDMS TN12LDX TN11LEM24 TN11LEX4 TN11LOA TN11LOG TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board Description Enhanced communication interface unit Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 22GE + 210GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board 410GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
134
Board Category
Board Name TN11LQG TN13LQM TN11LQMD TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS TN11LSQ TN11LSX TN12LSX TN13LSX TN11LSXL TN12LSXL TN11LSXLR TN12LSXLR TN11LSXR TN11LWX2 TN11LWXD TN11LWXS TN12LWXS TN11TMX TN12TMX
Board Description 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board 2 x GE tributary service processing board 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
Tributary unit
TN11TBE TN11TDG TN11TDX TN12TDX TN52TDX TN53TDX TN52TOG
8 x GE service processing board

135
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board Category
Board Name TN11TOM TN52TOM TN11TQM TN12TQM TN11TQS TN11TQX TN52TQX TN55TQX TN11TSXL
Board Description 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 2 x 10G line service processing board
Line unit
TN11ND2 TN12ND2 TN52ND2 TN53ND2 TN51NQ2 TN52NQ2 TN53NQ2 TN11NS2 TN12NS2 TN52NS2 TN53NS2 TN11NS3 TN52NS3 TN54NS3
4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
10G Line Service Processing Board
40G line service processing board
PID unit
TN11BMD4 TN11BMD8 TN12ELQX TN12PTQX
PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz 4Electrical OTU2 with 410G Tributary Board 12 OTU2 PID board with 410G Tributary centralized cross connect board
Cross-connect unit and system and

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN11XCS TN12XCS
136
Board Category communicatio n unit
Board Name TN11SCC TN51SCC TN52SCC TN11AUX
Board Description system control and communication unit
system auxiliary interface unit 40-channel multiplexing unit
Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit
TN11M40 TN12M40 TN11D40 TN12D40 TN11M40V TN12M40V TN11D40V TN11FIU TN12FIU TN13FIU TN11ITL TN12ITL TN11SFIU
40-channel demultiplexing unit
40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA fiber interface unit
interleaver board
fiber interface unit for sync timing CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board 9-port ROADM multiplexing board reconfigurable optical adding board
Optical add and drop multiplexing unit
TN11CMR2 TN11CMR4 TN11DMR1 TN11MR2 TN11MR4 TN11MR8 TN11MR8V TN11SBM2
Reconfigurabl e optical add and drop multiplexing unit
TN11RDU9 TN11RMU9 TN11ROAM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
137
Board Category
Board Name TN11WSD9 TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9 TN11WSM9 TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9 TN11WSMD2 TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4 TN11WSMD9
Board Description 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band optical amplifier unit high-power booster amplifier board optical amplifier unit
Optical amplifier unit
TN11CRPC TN11DAS1 TN11HBA TN11OAU1 TN12OAU1 TN13OAU1 TN11OBU1 TN12OBU1 TN11OBU2 TN12OBU2
Optical supervisory channel unit
TN11HSC1 TN11SC1 TN12SC1 TN11SC2 TN12SC2 TN11ST2
High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel board unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
138
Board Category Optical protection unit
Board Name TN11DCP TN12DCP TN11OLP TN12OLP TN11SCS
Board Description 2-channel optical path protection unit
sync optical channel separator unit 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel optical power monitoring board wavelength monitoring unit 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Spectrum analyzer unit
TN11MCA4 TN11MCA8 TN11OPM8 TN11WMU
Variable optical attenuator unit
TN11VA1 TN12VA1 TN11VA4 TN12VA4
4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Optical power and dispersion equalizing unit Clock unit ROPA subsystem unita Interface area unitb
TN11DCU TN11TDC TN11STG TN11GFU TN11RGU TN11ROP TN11EFI TN11PIU
dispersion compensation board single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board centralized clock board gain flatness unit ROPA gain unit ROPA pumping unit EMI filter interface board power interface unit
a: For the details of the ROPA subsystem unit, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide. b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 8 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
139
10 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis
10
About This Chapter
OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis
10.1 Chassis Structure The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short). 10.2 Slot Description The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right. 10.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan) Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis is equipped with a fan tray assembly. 10.4 PIU PIU: Power Interface Unit 10.5 APIU APIU: AC Power Interface Unit 10.6 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces The OptiX OSN 3800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
140
10.1 Chassis Structure

The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short). The chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with an independent DC or AC power supply and can be installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet, a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet, or a 19 and 23-inch open rack. Figure 10-1 shows an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Figure 10-1 OptiX OSN 3800 chassis
5 1 4 2
1. Grounding connector
2. Fiber frame
3. Board area
4. Antistatic jack
5. Fan indicator
l l l l l
Ground connector: Access the ground cables. Fiber frame: Fiber jumpers in the service board area are routed through the fiber frame. Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. In total, 11 slots are available. Antistatic jack: The ESD strap is in this area. Fan indicator: The fan indicator indicates the status of the fans.
Table 10-1 list the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis. Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the chassis Item Dimensions Specification 436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134 mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in. (D) x 5.28 in. (H) 6 kg (13.23 lb) 350 W -48 V DC/-60 V DC 220 V AC
141
Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane) Maximum Power Consumption Nominal working voltage Direct current Alternative current
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Working voltage range Direct current Alternative current
Specification -40 V DC to -72 V DC 90 V AC to 285 V AC
Table 10-2 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 3800. Table 10-2 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 3800 Unit Name Typical Power Consum ption at 25C (77 F) Chassis 1 99.4 Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (131F) 135.3 Remarks
Chassi s
OADM chassis (Using the DPIU)
It is the power consumed after you install two TN21MR2s, four 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs, one SCC, two DPIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OADM chassis. It is the power consumed after you install one DFIU, one SC2, two OAU101s, one SCC, two DPIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OADM chassis. It is the power consumed after you install two TN21MR2s, four 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs, one SCC, two APIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OADM chassis. It is the power consumed after you install one DFIU, one SC2, two OAU101s, one SCC, two APIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OADM chassis. It is the power consumed after you install one DFIU, one SC2, two OBU103s, one SCC, two DPIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OLA chassis.
Chassis 2
77.7
111.5
OADM chassis (Using the APIU)
Chassis 1
162.2
207.5
Chassis 2
117.7
154.5
OLA chassis (Using the DPIU)
79.7
113.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
142
Unit Name
Typical Power Consum ption at 25C (77 F) 119.7
Maximum Power Consumpt ion at 55C (131F) 156.7
Remarks
OLA chassis (Using the APIU)
It is the power consumed after you install one DFIU, one SC2, two OBU103s, one SCC, two APIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly in an OLA chassis.
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated based on the power consumption of each module.
10.2 Slot Description

The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right. Slots of the chassis are shown in Figure 10-2. Figure 10-2 Slots of the chassis
IU1 IU2 FAN IU3 IU4 IU5 IU11 IU6/PIU IU7/PIU IU8/SCC IU9/SCC IU10/AUX
l l l
IU1 and IU11 can hold two OADM boards each, or hold one service board such as IU11. IU2 to IU5 are reserved for the service boards. IU10 is reserved for the AUX.
The OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with AC and DC power supplies. The arrangement of boards in IU6, IU7, IU8, and IU9 is different for the two power supply modes. In DC mode l l IU6 and IU7 are reserved for the PIU. IU8 and IU9 are reserved for the SCC. IU9 is reserved for the active SCC. IU8 is available for either the standby SCC or the OADM board.
In AC mode: IU6, IU7, IU8 are reserved for two APIU boards. The IU9 is reserved for the SCC. The IU8 is occupied and is not available for the standby SCC.
Mapping of Mesh Group

A mesh group refers to a group of slots housing the boards whose overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplane. The OptiX OSN 3800 supports a four-slot mesh group: IU2, IU3, IU4, and IU5. Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two paired slots: IU2 and IU3, IU4 and IU5. Figure 10-3 Mesh group of the chassis
IU1 Paired slots IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 Mesh group IU11
Paired slots
10.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan)

Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis is equipped with a fan tray assembly.
Version Description

Table 10-3 shows the functions of a fan tray assembly. Table 10-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly Function Basic function Description Dissipates heat generated by the equipment so that the equipment can operate normally within the designated temperature range. l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed regulation, depending on the subrack temperature. l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan speed.
NOTE Only when the chassis accesses DC power, Auto Speed Mode is available.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
144
Function Hot swapping Alarming Status checking
Description Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly. Reports alarms of the fans and reports the inservice information. Checks the fan status.
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly is located on the left hand of the chassis. The fan blows air up, which creates an air duct from left to right. Other boards in the chassis are installed horizontally and are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation. Figure 10-4 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 3800. Figure 10-4 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air inlet FAN Board Area
Air outlet
The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 10-4. It is recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.
NOTE
Auto Speed Mode is only available when the chassis operates with DC power.
Table 10-4 FAN speed mode FAN Speed Mode Auto Speed Mode Description The fan speed depends on the temperature. l If the temperature is lower than 45C (113F), the fans run at low speed. l If the temperature is higher than 65C (149F), the fans run at high speed. l If the temperature ranges from 45C (113F) to 65C (149F), the fans run at medium speed. The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
145
FAN Speed Mode Adjustable Speed Mode
Description Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
NOTE
l l
If any one of the six fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if: Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly.
The fan tray assembly consists of six fans and one fan control unit. Figure 10-5 shows the functional block of the fan tray assembly. Figure 10-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
l l
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the chassis. FAN is the core of the fan tray assembly. Fan control board: Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals. Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan tray assembly. Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 10-6 shows a fan tray assembly.
Figure 10-6 Fan tray assembly

1
1. Fans (6 in total)
2. Operating status indicator
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU12.

Table 10-5 list the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly for the OptiX OSN 3800 system.
NOTE
Table 10-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly Item Dimensions Weight Power Consumptiona Specification 41.0 mm (W) x 262.6 mm (D) x 126.5 mm (H) (1.61 in. (W) x 10.34 in. (D) x 4.98 in. (H)) 0.81 kg (1.79 lb) l 9 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed l 17 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed l 32.7 W when the fans rotate at High Speed a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured, rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
147
10.4 PIU
PIU: Power Interface Unit

Only one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is, TN21.
10.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two PIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1+1 hot backup.

The PIU is a power interface unit, which accesses power and provides protection and filtering functions. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-6. Table 10-6 Functions and features of the PIU Function and Feature Basic function Description l Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. l Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions. l Provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power after voltage reduction.
10.4.4 Front Panel

There is one indicator and one interface on the front panel of the PIU board.

Figure 10-7 shows the front panel of the PIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
148
Figure 10-7 Front panel of the PIU board
RUN
DO not hot plug this unit

S1
S6 AUX
S5 SCC
S4 SCC
S2 PIU
S11 PIU
NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU
Indicator
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Running status indicator (RUN) - green
Interface
There is one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to access the DC power in the range of -40 V to -72 V.
10.4.5 Valid Slots

Valid slots for the PIU board are IU6 and IU7.

Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 10-7 Performance specifications of the PIU Item Number of DC input power supplies Input DC power voltage range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit V DC
Value 1 -38.4 to -72

149
Item Input DC power current
Unit A
Value 7
l l Dimensions of front panel: 218.50 mm (H) x 107.76 in. (W) or 8.6 in. (H) x 4.2 in. (W) Weight: 1.0 lb. (0.5 kg)
Power Consumption
TN21PIU
10.5 APIU
APIU: AC Power Interface Unit

Only one functional version of the APIU board is available, that is, TN21.
10.5.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two APIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1 +1 hot backup.

The TN21APIU is a power interface unit, which accesses AC power and provides protection and filtering functions. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 10-8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
150
Table 10-8 Functions and features of the APIU Function and Feature Basic function Description l Accesses AC power in a range from 90 V to 285 V, and provides -48 V DC power. l Provides lightning protection, filtering and power factor adjustment functions for the accessed power. l Supplies power to the fan tray assembly.
10.5.4 Front Panel

There is one indicator and one interface on the front panel of the APIU board.

Figure 10-8 shows the front panel of the APIU board. Figure 10-8 Front panel of the APIU board
APIU
RUN
OFF ~100-240V
ON
S1 S11 APIU S2 S3 APIU S4 SCC S5 AUX
Indicator
There is one indicator on the front panel of the APIU board.
Running status indicator (RUN) - green
Interfaces
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the APIU board. The interface is used to access the AC power in the range of 90 V to 285 V.
10.5.5 Valid Slots

IU6, IU7 and IU8 together house two APIU boards. That is, each APIU requires 1.5 slots.
10.5.6 Specifications of the APIU

Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, and weight.
Table 10-9 Performance specifications of the APIU Item Input power voltage range Input frequency Input power current Output rated voltage Output rated current Output power Unit V AC Hz A AC V DC A DC W Value 90 to 285 50 4 -48 6.3 300
l l Dimensions of front panel: 37.5 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) or 1.5 in. (H) x 3.9 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) Weight: 1.8lb. (0.8 kg)
Power Consumption
TN21APIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
152

The OptiX OSN 3800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.
10.6.1 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board

The AUX board provides NM interfaces and extended auxiliary interfaces. Figure 10-9 shows the front panel of the AUX board. The AUX board is housed in slot IU10. Figure 10-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board
STAT PROG
Table 10-10 describes the functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board.
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 EXT
AUX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
153
Table 10-10 Functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board Interface NM interface Silk-Screen NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 Connector RJ-45 Function l Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 3800 through a network cable to that on the U2000 server so that the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 3800. l Connects the NM_ETH1/ NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs. Extended auxiliary interfaces EXT DB9, RJ-45 Accesses and outputs each kind of external signals.
NOTE
EXT interfaces include ALMO, LAMP1, LAMP2, ETH, SERIAL, ALMI1, and ALMI2.
10.6.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces

The OptiX OSN 3800 provides RJ-45 and the DB9 ports to enable data communication and equipment maintenance. This section shows the pin assignments of the RJ-45 and DB9 connectors and describes the pins of each connector.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

Figure 10-11 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.
Figure 10-11 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5
Pin Assignment of the ETH Interface

For the pin assignment of the ETH interface, refer to Table 10-11. Table 10-11 Pin assignment of the ETH interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal ETNTX_P_1 ETNTX_N_1 ETNRX_P_1 NC NC ETNRX_N_1 NC NC Function Positive pole for transmitting the data Negative pole for transmitting the data Positive pole for receiving the data Not defined Not defined Negative pole for receiving the data Not defined Not defined
Pin Assignment of the ALMO Interface

For the pin assignment of the ALMO interface, refer to Table 10-12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
155
Table 10-12 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal SWCRIT_OUT1+ SWCRIT_OUT1SWCRIT_OUT2+ SWCRIT_OUT1+ SWCRIT_OUT1SWCRIT_OUT2SWCRIT_OUT2+ SWCRIT_OUT2Function Alarm output signal 1 positive Alarm output signal 1 negative Alarm output signal 2 positive Cascaded alarm output signal 1 positive Cascaded alarm output signal 1 negative Alarm output signal 2 negative Cascaded alarm output signal 2 positive Cascaded alarm output signal 2 negative

For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 10-13. Table 10-13 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal N.C RXD TXD DTR GND GND V5_OADM Function Not defined Receive end Transmit end Data terminal equipment ready Ground Reserved Reserved Ground Power supply for OADM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
156

For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 10-14. Table 10-14 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal SW_IN1P GND SW_IN2P SW_IN3P GND GND SW_IN4P GND Function Alarm input signal 1 Ground Alarm input signal 2 Alarm input signal 3 Ground Ground Alarm input signal 4 Ground

For the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface, refer to Table 10-15. Table 10-15 Pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal SW_IN5P GND SW_IN6P NC NC GND NC NC Function Alarm input signal 5 Ground Alarm input signal 6 Not defined Not defined Ground Not defined Not defined

For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 10-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
157
Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal RED+ REDYELLOW+ GREEN+ GND YELLOWORG+ ORGFunction Positive pole for critical alarm signals Negative pole for critical alarm signals Positive pole for major alarm signals Positive pole for power indicating signals Negative pole for power indicating signals Negative pole for major alarm signals Positive pole for minor alarm signals Negative pole for minor alarm signals
Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface, refer to Table 10-17. Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces Pin 1 Signal ETNTX12P Function Positive pole for transmitting the data for communication with an NM Negative pole for transmitting the data for communication with an NM Positive pole for receiving the data for communication with an NM Not defined Not defined Negative pole for receiving the data for communication with an NM
158
ETNTX12N
ETNRX12P
4 5 6
NC NC ETNRX12N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Pin 7 8
Signal NC NC
Function Not defined Not defined
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
159
11
Board Category Optical transponder unit
The following types of boards are available for the system. Table 11-1 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 3800. Table 11-1 Boards for the OptiX OSN 3800 Board Name TN11ECOM TN11L4G TN11LDGS TN11LDGD TN12LDM TN11LDMD TN11LDMS TN12LDX TN11LOA TN11LOG TN12LOG TN11LOM TN12LOM TN11LQG 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board Board Description Enhanced communication interface unit Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet line capacity 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
160
Board Category
Board Name TN13LQM TN11LQMD TN12LQMD TN11LQMS TN12LQMS TN11LSX TN12LSX TN13LSX TN11LSXR TN11LWX2 TN11LWXD TN11LWXS TN12LWXS TN11TMX TN12TMX
Board Description 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board 2 x GE tributary service processing board 2 x 10G tributary service processing board 8 x GE service processing board 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
Tributary unit
TN11TBE TN11TDG TN11TDX TN52TOG TN11TOM TN52TOM TN11TQM TN12TQM TN11TQS
4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board 10G Line Service Processing Board
Line unit
TN11NS2 TN12NS2 TN52NS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
161
Board Category
Board Name TN53NS2
Board Description
Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit Optical add and drop multiplexing unit
TN21DFIU TN13FIUa TN21FIU TN21CMR1 TN11CMR2 TN21CMR2 TN11CMR4 TN21CMR4 TN11DMR1 TN21DMR1 TN11MR2 TN21MR2 TN11MR4 TN21MR4 TN11SBM2
bidirectional fiber interface board fiber interface unit
CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop board optical amplifier unit optical amplifier unit
Optical amplifier unit
TN11DAS1 TN11OAU1 TN12OAU1 TN13OAU1 TN11OBU1 TN12OBU1 TN11OBU2 TN12OBU2
Cross-connect unit and system and communicatio n unit
TN21SCC TN22SCC TN21AUX TN22AUX
system control and communication unit
system auxiliary interface unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
162
Board Category Optical supervisory channel unit
Board Name TN11HSC1 TN11SC1 TN12SC1 TN11SC2 TN12SC2 TN11ST2
Board Description High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel board unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit 2-channel optical path protection unit
Optical protection unit
TN11DCP TN12DCP TN11OLP TN12OLP TN11SCS
sync optical channel separator unit 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 8-channel optical power monitoring board 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Spectrum analyzer unit
TN11MCA4 TN11MCA8 TN11OPM8
Variable optical attenuator unit
TN11VA1 TN12VA1 TN11VA4 TN12VA4
4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Optical power and dispersion equalizing unit Interface area unitb
TN11DCU
dispersion compensation board
TN21PIU TN21APIU
power interface unit AC Power Interface Unit
a: For TN13FIU: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01. b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 10 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
163
12 Frame
12
About This Chapter
Frame
12.1 DCM Frame The DCM frame is used to hold DCM modules. DCM modules compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber, to help maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. 12.2 CRPC Frame The CRPC frame is used to hold the CRPC board, fan tray assembly, and power distribution box. The frame is installed into the open rack. 12.3 Digital Video O-E Converter The digital video O-E converter performs O-E conversion of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI services. 12.4 Fiber Spooling Frame The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil. It can accommodate 4 x 10 m fiber jumpers and hold eight fixed or tunable attenuators.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
164
12 Frame
12.1 DCM Frame

The DCM frame is used to hold DCM modules. DCM modules compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber, to help maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is expanded because of accumulation of the positive dispersion. An expanded pulse has a negative impact on system transmission performance. A DCM module is a passive device that compensates for dispersion. The DCM module uses the inherent negative dispersion of a dispersion compensation fiber to offset the positive dispersion of a transmission fiber to prevent pulse expansion. The system provides two types of DCM: the DCM based on dispersion compensation fiber (DCF) and the DCM based on Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG). The DCF-based DCM and the FBG-based DCM have similar compensation features. The differences are as follows: l l The insertion loss of the DCF-based DCM increases with the distance in km. The insertion loss of the FBG-based DCM is always 4 dB regardless of the distance in km.
The DCM modules are available in different compensation distance specifications: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1 mi.). Each DCM frame holds two DCM modules. The DCM frame is installed on the columns of a cabinet with mounting airs and screws, as shown in Figure 12-1. Figure 12-1 DCM frame
1. DCM frame
2. DCMs
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
165
12 Frame
Table 12-1 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G. 652 fiber) Item Type Distance (mi./km) Max. Inserti on Loss (dB) 2.3 2.8 3.3 4.7 6.4 8 9 9.8 4 4 4 8 8 8 DSC R PMD (ps) PD L (dB ) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.4 Max. Allow Powera (dBm) 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 23 23 23 23 23 23 Operatio n Wavelen gth (nm) 1528 to 1568
DCM(S) DCM(T) DCM(A) DCM(B) DCM(C) DCM(D) DCM(E) DCM(F) FBG-DCM (80) FBG-DCM (100) FBG-DCM (120) FBG-DCM (160) FBG-DCM (200) FBG-DCM (240)
3.1/5 6.2/10 12.4/20 24.8/40 37.3/60 49.7/80 62.1/100 74.5/120 49.7/80 62.1/100 74.5/120 99.4/160 124.2/200 149.1/240
90% to 110%
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.6 1.6 1.6
a: The Max. Allow Power refers to the maximum input optical power that does not damage the optical module.
Table 12-2 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G. 655 LEAF fiber) Item Type Distance (mi./km) Max. Inserti on Loss (dB) 4 5 DSC R PMD (ps) PD L (dB ) 0.3 0.3 Max. Allow Powera (dBm) 20 20 Operatio n Wavelen gth (nm) 1528 to 1568
DCM(A) DCM(B)
12.4/20 24.8/40
90% to 110%
0.4 0.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
166
12 Frame
Item Type
Distance (mi./km)
Max. Inserti on Loss (dB) 5.9 6.9 7.8 8.8 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
DSC R
PMD (ps)
PD L (dB ) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
Max. Allow Powera (dBm) 20 20 20 20 23 23 23 23
Operatio n Wavelen gth (nm)
DCM(C) DCM(D) DCM(E) DCM(F) FBG-DCM (120) FBG-DCM (160) FBG-DCM (200) FBG-DCM (240)
37.3/60 49.7/80 62.1/100 74.5/120 74.5/120 99.4/160 124.2/200 149.1/240
0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Table 12-3 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G. 653 fiber) Item Type Distance (mi./km) Max. Insert ion Loss (dB) 2 3 5 DSC R PMD (ps) PDL (dB) Max. Allow Powera (dBm) 20 20 20 Opera tion Wavel ength (nm) 1528 to 1568
DCM(S) DCM(T) DCM(A)
3.1/5 6.2/10 12.4/20
90% to 110%
0.2 0.3 0.5
0.1 0.1 0.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
167
12 Frame
Table 12-4 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (TWRS fiber) Item Type Distance (mi./km) Max. Insert ion Loss (dB) 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.2 4.7 DSC R PMD (ps) PDL (dB) Max. Allow Powera (dBm) 20 20 20 20 20 20 Opera tion Wavel ength (nm) 1528 to 1568
DCM(A) DCM(B) DCM(C) DCM(D) DCM(E) DCM(F)
12.4/20 24.8/40 37.3/60 49.7/80 62.1/100 74.5/120
90% to 110%
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Table 12-5 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame Item Dimensions Weight Specification 48 mm (H) x 484 mm (W) x 270.5 mm (D) (1.9 in. (H) x 19.1 in. (W) x 10.6 in. (D) ) 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
H = Height, W = Width, D = Depth
12.2 CRPC Frame

The CRPC frame is used to hold the CRPC board, fan tray assembly, and power distribution box. The frame is installed into the open rack. Figure 12-2 shows the appearance of a CRPC frame. In the middle of the frame, the one with the front panel is the CRPC board. The fan tray assembly is at the left of the board. At the right are two power supplies as mutual backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
168
12 Frame
Figure 12-2 CRPC frame
2 1
1: Fan tray assembly
2: CRPC board
3: Power distribution box
Table 12-6 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame Item Mechanical specifications Weight Value 535 mm (W) x 257 mm (D) x 86 mm (H) or 21.1 in. (W) x 10.1 in. (D) x 3.4 in. (H) 3 kg (6.6 lb)
12.3 Digital Video O-E Converter

The digital video O-E converter performs O-E conversion of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI services. Figure 12-3 and Figure 12-4 show the appearance of the digital video O-E converter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
169
12 Frame
Figure 12-3 Front view of the digital video O-E converter
Figure 12-4 Rear view of the digital video O-E converter
Table 12-7 Mechanical specifications Item Weight Maximum Power Value 1.58 kg (3.5 lb.) 40 W (fully-loaded frame with all accessories) Note - power consumption dependent on the SFP type 482.6 mm (W) x 105.66 mm (D) x 45.72 mm (H) (19 in.(W) x 4.16 in.(D) x 1.8 in.(H))
Dimensions
Table 12-8 Electrical specifications Item Impedance Connector Reclocked Standard Value 75 BNC per IEC 61169-8 Annex A SMPTE 424M (3Gb/s), SMPTE 292M, (1.5Gb/s), SMPTE 259M (270Mb/s), DVB-ASI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
170
12 Frame
Item Equalization
Value Automatic to 80m @ 3Gb/s, 100m@1.5Gb/s, 250m @ 270Mb/s
Table 12-9 Optical specifications Item Optical Output: Number of Outputs Connector Optical Power Operating Wavelength Optical Input: Number of Inputs Connector Operating Wavelength Maximum Input Power Up to 2 per SFP LC 1310nm -1dBm Up to 2 per SFP LC -1dBm 1dBm 1310nm Value
Power Box of the Digital Video O-E Converter

The SDI board has a separate power box. Figure 12-5 and Figure 12-6 show the appearance of the power box. Figure 12-5 Front view of the power box
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
171
12 Frame
Figure 12-6 Rear view of the power box
Table 12-10 Technical specifications of the power box Item Number of Inputs Input Voltage Frequency Power Number of Outputs Output Voltage Output Current Dimensions Environmental Temperature Value 2 Auto ranging, 100-240V AC 50/60Hz 250W max per input 6 Primary + 6 Secondary 12V DC 3.5 A 482.6 mm (W) x 119.38 mm (D) x 45.72 mm (H) (19 in.(W) x 4.7 in.(D) x 1.8 in.(H)) -20C to +70C (-4 F to 158 F)
12.4 Fiber Spooling Frame

The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil. It can accommodate 4 x 10 m fiber jumpers and hold eight fixed or tunable attenuators. The fiber spool box is installed at the bottom of the cabinet, more than 50 mm away from the chassis. Figure 12-7 and Figure 12-8 show a fiber spooling frame.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
172
12 Frame
Figure 12-7 Fiber spooling frame
1 2
1: Captive screw
4
2: Fiber holder 3: Fiber spool 4: Attenuator holder
Figure 12-8 Drawing out the tray
1 2 3
1: Box
4
3: Cable hole 4: Tray
2: Mounting ear
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
173
13 Overview of Boards
13
About This Chapter
Overview of Boards
13.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser hazard level label. 13.2 Bar Code for Boards There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, which indicates the basic information about the board, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
174
13.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions

The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser hazard level label.
13.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions

This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.
CAUTION
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is properly grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board. Table 13-1 shows the board appearance and dimensions. Table 13-1 Board appearance and dimensions Board Appearance Board Name Number of Slots for Each Board 1 Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm)
TN11L4G
264.6
25.4
220.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
175
Board Appearance
Board Name
Number of Slots for Each Board 2
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
Depth (mm)
TN11OA U1
264.6
50.8
220.0
TN11M40
264.6
76.2
220.0
TN11AU X
107.6
25.4
220.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
176
Board Appearance
Board Name
Number of Slots for Each Board 4
Height (mm)
Width (mm)
Depth (mm)
TN12LSX L
264.6
101.6
220.0
TN21MR4
118.9
25.4
220.0
13.1.2 Laser Hazard Level Label

Lasers are of two hazard levels according to the value of the output power.
WARNING
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface during the installation and maintenance of the fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes. Table 13-2 shows the laser hazard levels of the unit. Table 13-2 Hazard levels Hazard Level HAZARD LEVEL 1 Label Reference Power Range <10.00 dBm (<10.00 mW)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
177
Hazard Level HAZARD LEVEL 1M
Label
Reference Power Range 10.00 dBm - 21.3 dBm (10.00 mW - 136 mW)
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CAUTION
13.2 Bar Code for Boards

There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, which indicates the basic information about the board, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code.
13.2.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. The information about a bar code can be queried on the U2000, for details refer to Supporting Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from that on the bar code.
Figure 13-1 and Figure 13-2 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules. Figure 13-3 and Figure 13-4 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules. Figure 13-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
Delivery information Board version (TN12) Board model number
2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG

BOM Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board name Characteristic code
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
178
Figure 13-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)

2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT

BOM Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board Tunable Characteristic name code

Delivery information Board version Board name (TN12)
2103070768107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01

BOM Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board model number
First four numbers of the BOM
Delivery information
Board version Board name (TN12)
03OHFY 108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01

Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board model number
The complete BOM should be 0303OHFY. "03" are taken out in the BOM above.
The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical module. Table 13-3 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.
Table 13-3 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards Board Configuration First Four Numbers in the board BOM 0303 Description First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module 3406 or 0303 (client side)
Board not installed with optical modules
The board is installed with a wavelength tunable optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected as required for the board. The board is not installed with any optical module. WDMand client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is installed with a fixed optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is not installed with any optical module. WDMand client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. Optical modules are installed on the client and WDM sides of the board.
0303
3406 or 0303 (client side and WDM side)
0307
3406 or 0303 (client side)
0302
Board installed with optical modules
0231
NA
Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows: l l For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the board is delivered with optical modules installed. For the SSN3SLH41 board,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
180
The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the board are 3406. When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0305. Table 13-4 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS boards. Table 13-4 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41) Board Configuration First Four Numbers in the board BOM 0302 Description First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module 3406
The board is not installed with any optical module. Optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is installed optical modules.
0305
NA
13.2.2 Characteristic Code

The board characteristic code indicates information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the board characteristic code, refer to B Bar Code for Boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
181
14 Optical Transponder Unit
14
About This Chapter
Optical Transponder Unit
14.1 ECOM ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit 14.2 L4G L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity 14.3 LDGD LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving 14.4 LDGS LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving 14.5 LDM LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board 14.6 LDMD LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving 14.7 LDMS LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving 14.8 LDX LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit 14.9 LEM24 LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE + 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board 14.10 LEX4 LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board 14.11 LOA LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board. 14.12 LOG LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
14.13 LOM LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board 14.14 LQG LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board 14.15 LQM LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board 14.16 LQMD LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving 14.17 LQMS LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving 14.18 LSQ LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 14.19 LSX LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 14.20 LSXL LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board 14.21 LSXLR LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board 14.22 LSXR LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board 14.23 LWX2 LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board 14.24 LWXD LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit) 14.25 LWXS LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit) 14.26 TMX TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
183
14.1 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit

The available functional version of the ECOM board is TN11.
Mappings Between the Board and Equipment

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 ECO M OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.1.2 Application
The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.
Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A
The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 separates the signal received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed by the OTU board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port and then is transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane. For the position of the ECOM in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and OptiX OSN 900A, see Figure 14-1 and Figure 14-2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
184
Figure 14-1 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A
OptiX OSN 900A Service signal F I Management signal U OTU
ECOM
ETH
OptiX OSN 6800 SCC
OptiX OSN 900A
Management signal F I Service signal U
OTU
NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Figure 14-2 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 900A
OptiX OSN 900A Service signal F I Management signal U OTU
ECOM
ETH
OptiX OSN 3800 SCC
OptiX OSN 900A
Management signal F I Service signal U
OTU
NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 3800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Application Scenario 2: Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service

When used for convergence or deconvergence, the ECOM board can be used only in the CWDM system. For the position of the ECOM in the WDM system, see Figure 14-3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
185
Figure 14-3 Position of the ECOM board in the WDM system

GE
1 GE
MUX ECOM
DMUX ECOM
FE 8
FE
8
DMUX
GE
MUX
GE
Client side
Client side
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the MUX and DMUX boards shown in the figure are the OADM boards used in the CWDM system.

The ECOM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and loopback on the client side. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-1. Table 14-1 Functions and features of the ECOM board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Achieves the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A. l Converges/deconverges 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service. Client-side service type WDM specification Cross-connect capabilities FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s Supports the CWDM specifications. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the transmission of one GE signal each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of one GE signal to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one GE signal from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Tunable wavelength function PRBS function Protection scheme Not Supported
Not Supported Not Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
186
Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electrical-layer ASON eSFP
Description l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Not Supported Supported Supported
Client side
Inloop Outloop
14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-4 and Figure 14-5 show the functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
187
Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board
FE Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8 Backplane(management signal transmission)
WDM side O/E E/O

Client-side optical module
E/O L2 switching module Cross-connect module O/E

WDM-side optical module
OUT
IN
Control Memory CPU Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC
DC power supply from a backplane
Signal Flow (Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A)
The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals. In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the SCC board, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of FE signals (management signals) from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module, and groomed by the backplane to the SCC board through the ETH interface. l Receive direction The L2 switching module receives FE signals from the SCC board, and then sends them to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the FE electrical signals, and then outputs the optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
188
Figure 14-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM

GE Client side
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8
Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side
O/E E/O
E/O L2 switching module Cross-connect module O/E

OUT
IN
Signal Flow (Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service)

The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals. In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the WDM side of the ECOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as converging eight channels of FE signals into one channel of GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals to the cross-connect module. The cross-connect module performs operations such as service cross-connection of the GE signals. The GE signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths GE optical signals through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant GE optical signals at CWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the GE signals are sent to the cross-connect module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals. The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends a maximum of eight channels of FE signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of FE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of internal electrical signals to FE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the ECOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board.

Figure 14-6 shows the front panel of the ECOM board. Figure 14-6 Front panel of the ECOM board
ECOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 OUT IN
ECOM
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
l l l l
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board. Table 14-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ECOM board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
14.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one ECOM board. Table 14-3 shows the valid slots for the ECOM board. Table 14-3 Valid slots for ECOM board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
14.1.7 Physical and Logical Ports

This section describes the logical ports displayed on the NMS and the physical ports of the board.
Display of Physical Ports

Table 14-4lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-4 Mapping between the physical ports on the ECOM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, AP1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-7 shows the application model of the ECOM board. Table 14-5 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-7 Port diagram of the ECOM board
Client side
PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8 PORT9 PORT10
WDM side
VCTRUNK1
101( AP1/AP1)-1
1(IN/OUT)-1
L2 switching module
Cross-connect WDM-side optical module module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
193
Table 14-5 Meaning of NM port of the ECOM board Port Name PORT3-PORT10 VCTRUNK1 AP1 IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1RX8/TX8. Internal virtual port. Internal convergence port. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
14.1.8 Configuration of Cross-connection

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the ECOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Service Mode and HUB Mode.
NOTE
If the HUB mode need be configured, there must be one-to-one connection between ports, which need not be set on the U2000.
If the service mode need be configured, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the eight channels of FE optical signals and one channel of GE electrical signals accessed from the client-side ports is implemented through the L2 switching module. Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and AP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client in Figure side of other boards for the inter-board services deconvergence), as shown 14-8. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for the inter-board services convergence), as shown 14-8. l in Figure
l l
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of GE level between the AP port and the IN/OUT port of the ECOM, realizing the cross-connect grooming of GE services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
194
Figure 14-8 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM

Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4
WDM side
Client side
1 101(AP1/AP1)-1 2
WDM side ECOM
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to theWDM side of other boards
1 2
14.1.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of ECOM, refer to Table 14-6. Table 14-6 ECOM parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
195
Optical Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field Laser Status
Value Off, On Default: On
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to configure the working mode of the board.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Board Mode
HUB Mode, Service Mode Default: HUB Mode
14.1.10 Specifications of the ECOM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
196
Bo ard TN 11E CO M
Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 100 BASE-FX-10 km 100 BASE-FX-40 km 100 BASE-FX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Table 14-7 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 100 BASEFX-10 km NRZ 10 100 BASEFX-40 km NRZ 40 100 BASEFX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range dBm dBm dB nm -3 -11.5 9 1270 to 1355 0 -4.5 9 1270 to 1355 5 -2 9 1500 to 1580
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
197
Item Optical Module Type Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 100 BASEFX-10 km 100 BASEFX-40 km 100 BASEFX-80 km
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (EOL) Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm
-19
-20
-22
dBm
-3
-3
-3
Table 14-8 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width dBm dBm dB nm nm nm 5 0 9 1471 to 1611 6.5 1.0 5 0 8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
198
Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 30
dB -
30 IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Table 14-9 Specifications of CWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Line code format Target distance
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation nm dBm dBm dB nm 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
199
Item Optical Module Type
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 1 30
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
nm dB -
1 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 19.6 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 21.6
TN11ECOM
14.2 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity

The available functional version of the L4G board is TN11.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
200

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 L4G OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.2.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the L4G board implements the conversion between six channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the L4G board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-9. Figure 14-9 Position of the L4G board in the WDM system
1 GE 6 Client side WDM side L4G G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 L4G 6 Client side 1 GE
NOTE
The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

The L4G is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-10. Table 14-10 Functions and features of the L4G board Function and Feature Basic function Description Converges up to six non-full bandwidth GE service signals into four GE service signals and multiplexes these four signals into an OTU 5G/FEC 5G signal. Converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and Feature Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities
Description GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU5G interface on WDM-side. l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU5G and ODU5G. l Supports TCM function for ODU5G.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function LPT function
Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Supported
NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN and Sink CVLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported
Test frame
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
202
Function and Feature Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Description Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports VLAN SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Inloop Client side MAC PHY Supported Supported Supported Supported IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, and PPP MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, and IGRP Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IGMP STP RSTP
Protocol or standard compliance
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply

The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board.
Figure 14-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board
GE
Client side RX1 RX2 RX6 TX1 TX2 TX6 E/O O/E
6GE 4GE
Backplane(service cross-connection)
WDM side E/O
L2 switching module
4GE
GE CrossOTN encapsulation connect processing and mapping module module module
OUT
O/E IN WDM-side optical module
Client-side optical 6GE module
Signal processing module
Control Memory CPU Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication
SCC
Backplane (controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the L4G board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the L4G board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the L4G to the WDM side of the L4G, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives a maximum of six channels of flat-rate GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of four channels of GE signals to the signal processing module. The signal processing module performs operations such as the service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals. The OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU 5G/FEC 5G framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends six channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of six channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from six channels of internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the L4G and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU 5G/ FEC 5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, processes overheads in OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board.

Figure 14-11 shows the front panel of the L4G board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
206
Figure 14-11 Front panel of the L4G board
L4G
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 OUT IN
L4G
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board. Table 14-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the L4G board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX6 RX1-RX6
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one L4G board. Table 14-12 shows the valid slots for the L4G board. Table 14-12 Valid slots for the L4G board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
14.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G

The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

This section describes how the physical ports of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
208

Table 14-13 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. . Table 14-13 Mapping between the physical ports on the L4G board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-12 describes the application model of the L4G board. Table 14-14 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-12 Port diagram of the L4G board
Client side PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8
VCTRUNK1 101(AP1/AP1)-1 VCTRUNK2 102(AP2/AP2)-1 VCTRUNK3 103(AP3/AP3)-1 VCTRUNK4 104(AP4/AP4)-1 L2 swithing module
WDM side 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1
Cross-connect Service processing WDM-side optical module module module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
209
Table 14-14 Meaning of NM port of the L4G board Port Name PORT3-PORT8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6 respectively. Internal virtual ports. Internal convergence ports. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4 AP1-AP4 LP IN/OUT

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the L4G board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the six channels of GE optical signals and the four channels of GE electrical signals accessed from the clientside ports is realized through the L2 switching module.
NOTE
One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 1.25 Gbit/s.
l l
There are one-to-one port connections between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module. These connections do not need to be set on the U2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created: Create the cross-connection between the internal AP and LP ports of the L4G board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 14-13. Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the AP port or RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the L4G board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
210
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other board, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-13. (This cross-connection enables the passing-through of the broadcast services.)
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the AP port of other boards, as shown by 6 in Figure 14-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence.)
The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. This connection does not need to be configured on the U2000.
Figure 14-13 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G board

Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1/3(RX1/TX1)-1 4 102(AP2/AP2)-1/4(RX2/TX2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1/5(RX3/TX3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1/6(RX4/TX4)-1 6 5 3 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1
WDM side
Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1 2 1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4
WDM side
L4G
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G board The WDM side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDMside of other boards The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the c lient side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5 6
Other board
TN11L4G/TN11LDGD/TN11LDGS/TN11LOG/TN12LOG/TN11LQG/TN13LQM/ TN11LQMD/TN12LQMD/TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS/ TN11TBE/TN11TDG/TN11TOM/ TN11TQM/TN12TQM

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of L4G, refer to Table 14-15.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
211
Table 14-15 L4G parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Used, Unused Default: Used
Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off
Laser Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Mode
OTN, SDH Default: OTN
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled
FEC Working State
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
212
Field Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Value -
Description Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDMside optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
l C: 1/1529.16/196 .050 to 80/1560.61/19 2.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/20 8.170 to 18/1611.00/18 8.780 Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
SD Trigger Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DE G Default: None
14.2.11 Specifications of the L4G

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
213
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
TN 11L 4G
3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD
NOTE

Table 14-16 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ 0.5 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
214
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 9 1000 BASELX-40 km 9 1000 BASEZX-80 km 9
dB
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Table 14-17 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km km NRZ 40 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm dBm dBm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
215
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
nm nm dB -
6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant

Table 14-18 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD NRZ 3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD NRZ
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power dBm dBm 2 -2 2 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
216
Unit
Value 3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 10
Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm
10 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.3 35 3400
0.3 35 3400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -25 -9 -27 -25 -9 -27 APD
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25 C ( 77F ) (W) 50.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55 C ( 131F ) (W) 55.0
TN11L4 G
3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
217
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power Consumption at 25 C ( 77F ) (W) 53.0
Maximum Power Consumption at 55 C ( 131F ) (W) 58.0
3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD
14.3 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

The available functional version of the LDGD board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LDG D OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.3.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGD board implements the conversion between two channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendation, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LDGD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-14. Figure 14-14 Position of the LDGD board in the WDM system
MUX
1 GE 2 LDGD G.694.1/ G.694.2
DMUX
1
DMUX MUX DMUX
MUX DMUX MUX
G.694.1/ LDGD G.694.2 2
GE
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
218

The LDGD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-19. Table 14-19 Functions and features of the LDGD board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one OTU1/STM-16 signal and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. Client-side service type Cross-connect capabilities GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. OTN function l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU1. WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function LPT function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported. Supported
Function and Feature FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
Description Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electrical-layer ASON Protection scheme
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Inloop Client side Inloop Inloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
IEEE 802.3z
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
220
Function and Feature
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2

The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-15 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
221
Figure 14-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board
Backplane (service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
GE WDM side
O/E
GE CrossOTN encapsulation and mapping Processing connect module module module
E/O
Splitter
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2
E/O
Client side Optical module
O/E
WDM side Optical module
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGD board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGD to the WDM side of the LDGD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the LDGD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board.

Figure 14-16 shows the front panel of the LDGD board. Figure 14-16 Front panel of the LDGD board
LDGD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
LDGD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
224
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board. Table 14-20 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGD board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDGD board. Table 14-21 shows the valid slots for the LDGD board. Table 14-21 Valid slots for LDGD board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
225
14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD

The characteristic code for the LDGD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 14-22. Table 14-22 Characteristic code for the LDGD board Code First four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.
Last four digits
The frequency of forth optical signal
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGD board is 92109210. l "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side both are 192.10 THz.


Table 14-23 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. . Table 14-23 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Port Number on the NMS 1 2 3 4
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
226
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-17 shows the application model of the LDGD board. Table 14-24 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-17 Port diagram of the LDGD board
3 (RX1/T X1)-1 4 (RX2/T X2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2 /OUT2)-1
Cross-connect mo dule
Servi ce p rocessing module
WDM-si de opti cal modu le
Table 14-24 Meaning of NM port of the LDGD board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 LP IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LDGD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGD board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and in Figure 14-18. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGD board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGD board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
3
in Figure 14-18.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGD board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
NOTE
4
in Figure 14-18.
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGD board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGD board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown
5
in Figure 14-18.
The two paths of the LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Figure 14-18 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD board

Client side Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4 4(RX2/TX2)-1 3 5 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-1
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 2 4(RX2/TX2)-1 1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-1
WDM side
LDGD
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board The WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
Other board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
228

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LDGD, refer to Table 14-25. Table 14-25 LDGD parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off
Service Mode
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
229
Field FEC Working State
Value Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDMside optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
l C: 1/1529.16/196. 050 to 80/1560.61/192 .100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208 .170 to 18/1611.00/188 .780 Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Ethernet Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 1000M FullDuplex Default: AutoNegotiation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
230
Field SD Trigger Condition
Value B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
14.3.11 Specifications of the LDGD

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
TN 11L DG D
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZAPD
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
231

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
232
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 -27 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
233

Table 14-28 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels Tunable) NRZ
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB -4 -8 10 -4 -8 10 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 0.2 35 0.5 30 0.5 30 0.2 35 0.5 35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 -28 -18 -28 -28 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
234
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels Tunable) -9 -27
Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
dBm dB
0 -27
-9 -27
0 -27
-9 -27
-9 -27
Table 14-29 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD NRZ
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 2 0.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
235
Unit
Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD
Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27
Power Consumption
Bo ard WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 34.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 37.4
TN 11L DG D
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
38.0
41.8
14.4 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
236

The available functional version of the LDGS board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LDG S OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.4.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGS implements the conversion between two channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDGS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-19. Figure 14-19 Position of the LDGS board in the WDM system
1 GE 2
Client side WDM side
MUX LDGS G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX
DMUX G.694.1/ LDGS G.694.2 MUX

WDM side
1 GE 2
Client side

The LDGS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-30.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
237
Table 14-30 Functions and features of the LDGS board Function and Feature Basic function Description
Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one 2.5 Gbit/s OTU1/STM-16 signal and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G. 694.2. The reverse process is similar. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities
OTN function
l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding PRBS function LPT function Alarms and performance events monitoring
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. Not supported Supported l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
238
Function and Feature ALS function
Description
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Test frame Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
IEEE 802.3z
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
239
Description
Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2

The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
240
Figure 14-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board
Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
GE WDM side
O/E
GE CrossOTN encapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module
E/O
OUT
E/O
O/E
IN
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGS board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LDGS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGS to the WDM side of the LDGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals between the LDGS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
14.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGS board.

Figure 14-21 shows the front panel of the LDGS board. Figure 14-21 Front panel of the LDGS board
LDGS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT IN
LDGS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
243
Indicators
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on front panel of the LDGS board. Table 14-31 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-31 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGS board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDGS board. Table 14-32 shows the valid slots for the LDGS board. Table 14-32 Valid slots for LDGS board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
244
14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS



Table 14-33 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-33 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDGS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-22 shows the application model of the LDGS board. Table 14-34 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-22 Port diagram of the LDGS board
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 Service processing module 1(IN/OUT)-1 WDM side
Cross-connect module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
245
Table 14-34 Meaning of NM port of the LDGS board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 LP IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

his section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LDGS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGS board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and in Figure 14-23. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGS board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
3
in Figure 14-23.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LDGS board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
NOTE
4
in Figure 14-23.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGS board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGS board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown
5
in Figure 14-23.
The two paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/ OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
246
Figure 14-23 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS board
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4 4(RX2/TX2)-1 3 5
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 2 4(RX2/TX2)-1 1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-1
WDM side
LDGS
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board The WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
Other board

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LDGS, refer to Table 14-35. Table 14-35 LDGS parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Set and query the optical interface name.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
247
Field Channel Use Status
Value Used, Unused Default: Used
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off
Laser Status
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Service Mode
LPT Enabled
FEC Working State
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type
Queries the band type.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
248
Field Tunable Wavelength Range Max. Packet Length
Value -
Description Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDMside optical interface of a board. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196 .050 to 80/1560.61/19 2.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/20 8.170 to 18/1611.00/18 8.780 Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
AutoNegotiation, 1000M FullDuplex Default: AutoNegotiation
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
14.4.11 Specifications of the LDGS

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
249
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate
TN 11L DG S
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZ1000 BASE-LX-10 PIN km 12800 ps/nm-C Band1000 BASE-LX-40 Fixed Wavelength-NRZAPD km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed Wavelength-NRZkm PIN 1.25 Gbit/s 3200 ps/nm-C BandMultirate (eSFP Fixed Wavelength-NRZCWDM)-40 km APD 2.67 Gbit/s 12800 ps/nm-C BandMultirate (eSFP Tunable WavelengthCWDM)-80 km NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD
NOTE

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
250
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
251
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
252

Table 14-38 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable) NRZ
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz -1 -5 10 -1 -5 10 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 10 3 -2 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
253
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable) -28 -9
Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
dBm dBm
-18 0
-28 -9
-18 0
-28 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Table 14-39 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm 5 2.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
254
Unit
Value 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27
Power Consumption
Bo ard TN 11L DG S WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 32.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 35.2
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable)
36.0
39.6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
255
14.5 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board

Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is, TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN12 LDM OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Type
The system provides two types of the LDM board: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 14-40 lists the types of the LDM board. Table 14-40 Type description of the LDM board Board LDM Type One type is the single transmitting and single receiving board. Other type is the dual-fed selectively receiving board. Description The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1. The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.
NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of LDM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
14.5.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDM board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDM board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-24 and Figure 14-25.
Figure 14-24 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
1 MUX 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDM G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX 2 Client side WDM side WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1/ LDM G.694.2
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
2 Client side
Figure 14-25 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/ G.694.2 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDM DMUX MUX 2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side MUX DMUX 2 LDM DMUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

The LDM board is mainly used to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-41.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
257
Table 14-41 Functions and features of the LDM board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application scenario. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s OTN function l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU1. WDM specification ESC function PRBS function Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
258
Function and Feature LPT function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
Description The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported Supported Supported
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
259
Function and Feature Protocol or standard compliance
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
260

The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
261
Figure 14-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
WDM side O/E Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module E/O
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2
E/O
O/E
Control Memory CPU Communication Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Backplane ( controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.5.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LDM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDM to the WDM side of the LDM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
optical signals. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
14.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board.

Figure 14-27 shows the front panel of the LDM board. Figure 14-27 Front panel of the LDM board
LDM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
264
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board. Table 14-42 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN12LDM board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDM board. Table 14-43 shows the valid slots for the LDM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
265
Table 14-43 Valid slots for the LDM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM

The board characteristic code indicates information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Table 14-44 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-44 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Port Number on the NMS 1 2 3 4
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LDM, refer to Table 14-45.
Table 14-45 LDM parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: Non-Loopback
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE, GE (GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None
Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)
100 - 2200 Default: 0
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
267
Field Automatic Laser Shutdown
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
LPT Enabled
FEC Working State
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
268
Field Max. Packet Length
Value 1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Description The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services.
OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission
Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
PRBS Test Status
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NULL Mapping Status
14.5.10 Specifications of the LDM

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
269
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
WDM-Side WDM-Side Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Module N/A 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
TN 12L DM
NOTE

NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 14-46 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
270
Item Optical Module Type Target distance
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
km
15
40
80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
271
Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
dBm
-3
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module, or 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
272
Unit
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVBASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
273
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
274
Table 14-49 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
275

Table 14-50 Specifications of CWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating wavelength range Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB 5 0 8.2 1471 to 1611 6.5 1 30 G.959.1 - compliant
Table 14-51 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
276
Unit
Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
km
120
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz nm nm dB ps/nm 3 0 8.5 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD NA -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
277
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 22.6 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 24.8
TN12LDM
14.6 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving

Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is, TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LDM D OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.6.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMD converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LDMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-28. Figure 14-28 Position of the LDMD board in the WDM system
G.694.1 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDMD DMUX MUX 2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side MUX DMUX 2 LDMD DMUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
278
NOTE

The LDMD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-52. Table 14-52 Functions and features of the LDMD board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s OTN function l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
Client-side service type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
279
Function and Feature WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function
Description Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
LPT function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme eSFP Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
280
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
281

The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
282
Figure 14-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
Splitter
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2
E/O
O/E
Control Memory CPU

Control and communication module
Communication
Power supply module Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LDMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMD to the WDM side of the LDMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals
into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board.

Figure 14-30 shows the front panel of the LDMD board. Figure 14-30 Front panel of the LDMD board
LDMD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LDMD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
285
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board. Table 14-53 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-53 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMD board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDMD board. Table 14-54 shows the valid slots for the LDMD board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
286
Table 14-54 Valid slots for the LDMD board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
14.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD

The characteristic code for the LDMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 14-55. Table 14-55 Characteristic code for the LDMD board Code First four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.
Last four digits
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDMD board is 92109210. l "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side both are 192.10 THz.


Table 14-56 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS..
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
287
Table 14-56 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Port Number on the NMS 1 2 3 4
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LDMD, refer to Table 14-57. Table 14-57 LDMD Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. Click D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. Click D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
288
Field Service Type
Value None, Any, FE, GE, GE (GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None
Description The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/ s)
100 - 2200 Default: 0
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. Click D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. Click D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Click D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). Click D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. Click D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Laser Status
LPT Enabled
FEC Working State
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
289
Field Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Value -
Description Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. Click D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. Click D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. Click D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Click D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
290
Field PRBS Test Status
Value Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled
Description The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. Click D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NULL Mapping Status
14.6.10 Specifications of the LDMD

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
TN 11L DM D
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
291

NOTE
Table 14-58 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
292
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1280 to 1335 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASELX-40 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASEZX-80 km 1500 to 1580
nm
830 to 860
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVBASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
294
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
295

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm APD NA -28 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
296
Item Optical Module Type Maximum reflectance
Unit
dB
-27

Table 14-62 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) NRZ
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm -4 -8 10 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 0.2 35 12800 0.5 35 6400 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2
G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type APD APD APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
297
Unit
Value 12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27
Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27
Power Consumption
TN11LDMD
14.7 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and single receiving

Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is, TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office.
Boar d TN11 LDM S
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.7.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMS board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDMS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-31. Figure 14-31 Position of the LDMS board in the WDM system
1 MUX 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LDMS G.694.1 DMUX 2 Client side WDM side WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LDMS
2 Client side
NOTE

The LDMS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-63. Table 14-63 Functions and features of the LDMS board Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/ s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and Feature Client-side service type
Description FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
OTN function
l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
LPT function FEC encoding
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
300
Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring
Description l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
301
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
302

The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
303
Figure 14-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
OUT
E/O
O/E
IN
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LDMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMS to the WDM side of the LDMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

14.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board.

Figure 14-33 shows the front panel of the LDMS board. Figure 14-33 Front panel of the LDMS board
LDMS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 OUT IN
LDMS
Indicators
l l l l
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board. Table 14-64 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-64 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMS board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.7.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDMS board. Table 14-65 shows the valid slots for the LDMS board. Table 14-65 Valid slots for the LDMS board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36

307
Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
14.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS



Table 14-66 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. . Table 14-66 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDMS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LDMS, refer to Table 14-67.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
308
Table 14-67 LDMS Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. Click D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. Click D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE, GE (GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None
100 - 2200 Default: 0
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. Click D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. Click D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
309
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Click D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). Click D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. Click D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. Click D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. Click D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
FEC Working State
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
310
Value 1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Description The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. Click D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Click D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. Click D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
14.7.10 Specifications of the LDMS

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
311
Bo ard
TN 11L DM DS
NOTE

NOTE
NRZ MLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
312
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
km
15
40
80
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
313
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
dBm
-3
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
314
Unit
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVBASI.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
315
Unit
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
316
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
317

Table 14-72 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/nmC Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nmC BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) NRZ
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm -1 -5 10 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 0.2 35 12800 0.5 35 6400 3 -2 10 3 -2 8.2
G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
318
Power Consumption
TN11LDMS
14.8 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

Only one functional version of the LDX board is available, that is, TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN12 LDX OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.8.2 Application
The LDX board is an optical transponder unit that converts two channels of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and WDM signals that comply with the ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-34. Figure 14-34 Position of the LDX board in the WDM system
10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e Client side MUX LDX G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1 LDX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
319

The LDX board provides OTN interfaces and electrical supervisory channels (ESCs). For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-73. Table 14-73 Functions and features of the LDX board Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Description
Maps two channels of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s
NOTE The 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service are processed identically. For the 10GE WAN service, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing to comply with the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the mapping of 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 into OTU2 signals, and the transparent mapping of 10GE LAN/OTU2e into OTU2e signals. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
WDM specification ESC function PRBS function
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
320
Function and Feature FEC encoding
Description
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Test frame Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection
XFP
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
321
Description
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1

The LDX board consists of a client-side optical module, a WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, a control and communication module, and a power supply module. Figure 14-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
322
Figure 14-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board
Client side
RX 1 SDH/ SONET encapsulation and mapping module
WDM side E/O OTN processing module

OUT 1
O/E
Client-side OTN processing module 10 TX1
E/O
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
IN1
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module RX 2
O/E
Client - side OTN processing module 10
E/O OTN processing module
OUT 2
TX2
E/O
Clientside optical module 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
WDMside optical module
IN2
SCC
Backplane (controlled by SCC )
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals
OTU2e optical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LDX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDX to the WDM side of the LDX. The receive direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the LDX to the client side of the LDX. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX optical interface and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2 or OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Finally, the module outputs two channels of OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 or OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 or OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/ AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, orOTU2e electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, orOTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 or OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 or OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
14.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board.

Figure 14-36 shows the front panel of the LDX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
325
Figure 14-36 Front panel of the LDX board
LDX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LDX
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board. Table 14-74 describes the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-74 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDX board Interface IN1-IN2 OUT1-OUT2 TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2 Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives a wavelength from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits a wavelength to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

14.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDX board. Table 14-75 shows the valid slots for the LDX board. Table 14-75 Valid slots for the LDX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
14.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX

The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.
14.8.8 Board Service Configuration

This section describes the interface information on the U2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 14-76. Table 14-76 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDX board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 Interface on the NM 1 3 5 6
NOTE


Table 14-77 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-77 Mapping between the physical ports on the LDX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 5 6
NOTE
14.8.10 LDX Loopbacks

Table 14-78 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LDX boards.
Table 14-78 Loopbacks supported by LDX boards Board TN12LDX Loopback Type Client-side inloop WDM-side outloop WDM-side inloop Client-side outloop When 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services are received, see Figure 14-38. When OTU2/OTU2e services are received, see Figure 14-39. Description See Figure 14-37.
The implementation of client-side inloops is similar to the implementation of WDM-side outloops. The implementation of client-side outloops is similar to the implementation of WDMside inloops. l Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-37, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 14-37 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN12LDX board
RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/10GE ODU2/ WAN/STM-64/OCODU2e 192/OTU2/OTU2e 10GE LAN/10GE ODU2/ WAN/STM-64/OCODU2e 192/OTU2/OTU2e OTU2/ OTU2e IN1/OUT1
RX2/TX2 Client-side
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN2/OUT2 WDM-side
Pass-through services Loopbacked services
WDM-side inloop and client-side outloop Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 service is received on the client side. As shown in Figure 14-38, one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side at the client-side port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
329
Figure 14-38 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LDX board (1)
RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
RX2/TX2 Client-side
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2 WDM-side
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when one OTU2/OTU2e service is received on the client side. As shown in Figure 14-39, one OTU2/OTU2e service received on the client side is demapped into one ODU2/ODU2e service after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. The OTU2/OTU2e service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2/ ODU2e loopback point. Figure 14-39 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LDX board (2)
RX1/TX1 OTU2/ OTU2e ODU2/ ODU2e OTU2/ OTU2e IN1/OUT1
RX2/TX2 Client-side
OTU2/ OTU2e
ODU2/ ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN2/OUT2 WDM-side

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of the LDX, refer to Table 14-79. Table 14-79 LDX Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
330
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field Optical Interface Loopback
Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
Description The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN,FC-1200, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2v, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
331
Value -
Description Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0 Default: /
Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
NOTE Only support C band.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
332
Field OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission
Value Enabled, Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Default: Disabled
Description Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
14.8.12 Specifications of the LDX

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
333
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
TN 12L DX
NOTE

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 40 km, and 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 80 km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2 signals. The following specifications completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, or 10GE WAN signals. The 10Gbit/s single rate -0.3km module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals. The specifications listed following completely apply to 10GE LAN signals.
Table 14-80 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10 Gbit/s rate services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ SLM 80 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km NRZ MLM 0.3

Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 1530 to 1565 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 1530 to 1565 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 840 to 860
nm
1290 to 1330
dBm
-1
-1.3
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
335
Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -1 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km -7 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -1
dBm
0.5
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Table 14-81 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP NRZ
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
336
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27

Table 14-82 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP NRZ
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant 0.3 35 800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
337
Unit
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Table 14-83 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP NRZ
Line code format
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
338
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Power Consumption
Bo ard LD X WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25 C (77F) (W) 44.5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55 C (131F) (W) 51.2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
45.5
52.2
14.9 LEM24
LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE + 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board

The available functional version of the LEM24 board is TN11.

Boar d TN11 LEM 24
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 N
14.9.2 Application
The LEM24 board is an optical transponder unit. As an OTU, the LEM24 board converts 22 channels of GE/FE services or two channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEM24 board also performs the reverse process. The LEM24 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. Further, the board supports transparent transmission of 16 channels of GE or two channels of 10GE services. Figure 14-40 shows the application of the LEM24 board in a WDM system. Figure 14-40 Application of the TN11LEM24 board in a WDM system
G.694.1
5 GE FE LEM24 10GE LAN 10GE WAN 28
G.694.1 MUX DMUX LEM24 DMUX MUX WDM side

5
GE FE 10GE LAN 28 10GE WAN
Client side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports and are capable of processing 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports and are capable of processing GE and FE services.

The LEM24 board supports electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function. Table 14-84 lists the functions and features of the LEM24 board.
NOTE
The 10GE cross-connections are supported only by OptiX OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
340
Table 14-84 Functions and features of the LEM24 board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Converts 22 channels of GE/FE services or two channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process. l Converges multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s
NOTE l The LEM24 board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical signal. l It is recommended to change RX21/TX21, RX22/TX22 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Cross-connect capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE electrical signals between the LEM24 board and the cross-connect board. l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side. l Supports mapping of 10GE signals into OTU2 signals. l Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) at the OTU2 and ODU2 layers. l Supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) at the ODU2 layer.
OTN function
WDM specification LPT function
Supports DWDM specifications. Supported

Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Supports remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
341
Description The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported in the WDM side. Supported in the Client side and WDM side. Supports stacking VLAN. Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). Supports IEEE802.1p. Supports DSCP.
IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock QinQ QoS (Quality of Service)
ETH OAM LAG (Link Aggregation Group)
Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah. l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and trunk ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.
VLAN multicast Port CVLAN group L2 layer switching
Supports VLAN-based multicast. Supports a group of CVLANs being used as one VLAN. Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. Supports MAC address learning and aging. Supports IGMP snooping. Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP. Supports 32K MAC addresses.
Flow control Maximum transmission unit (MTU) Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination. Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.
Provides point-to-point EPLs. Provides point-to-multipoint EVPLs and supports VLAN-based switching.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
342
Function and Feature Port working mode
Description 10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN GE optical port: 1000MFUL, auto-negotiation GE electrical port: auto-negotiation FE optical port: 100MFULL FE electrical port: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation
PRBS function Optical-layer ASON Electrical-layer ASON SFP+/XFP
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side Supported Not supported Supports enhanced SFP+ optical modules on the client side. Supports 10 Gbit/s tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
10GE optical interface
MAC
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
PHY
Inloop Outloop
GE optical interface
MAC
Inloop Outloop
PHY
Inloop Outloop
GE electric interface
MAC
Inloop Outloop
PHY
Inloop Outloop
FE optical interface
MAC
Inloop Outloop
PHY
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
343
Description FE electric interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop WDM side optical interface Inloop Outloop Supported Supported IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc. Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS Supported Not supported Supported Supported

The LEM24 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 switching module, signal processing module, 1588 module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-41 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board in the OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 14-42 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
344
Figure 14-41 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side RX5 RX6 RX28 TX5 TX6 TX28
WDM side
10GE O/E L2 switching module 10GE OTN processing Module
E/O
OUT3 OUT4
E/O
O/E
IN3 IN4
1588
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
345
Figure 14-42 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
10GE
WDM side
E/O
OUT3 OUT4
E/O
O/E
IN3 IN4
1588
SCC
Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEM24 board. The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LEM24 board. The transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the LEM24 to the WDM side of the LEM24. The receive direction is from the WDM side of the LEM24 to the client side of the LEM24. l Transmit direction The RX5 to RX28 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module. The signal processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT3 and OUT4 optical ports. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN3-IN4 optical interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. After performing the operation, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service cross-connection. The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends 24 channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 24 channels of electrical signals, and then outputs 24 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX5-TX28 optical interfaces.
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that can process GE and FE services.
The LEM24 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. Client-side receiver: Performs E/O conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Performs convergence/deconvergence of service signals. l OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come
from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board.

Figure 14-43 shows the front panel of the LEM24 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
348
Figure 14-43 Front panel of the LEM24 board
LEM24
STAT ACT PROG SRV
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4 5 ~ 6: 10 GE 7 ~ 28: GE TX RX TX
RX TX RX OUT OUT
IN
IN
13 5
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 20 3
LEM24
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 4
Indicators
Interfaces
There are fifty-two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board. Table 14-85 describes the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-85 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEM24 board Interface RX5-RX28a TX5-TX28a IN3-IN4 Type LC LC LC Function Receives service signals from the client-side equipment. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT3-OUT4
LC
a: The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that can process GE and FE services.
Laser Hazard Level

14.9.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11LEM24 board. Table 14-86 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEM24 board. Table 14-86 Valid slots for the LEM24 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU15
The rear connector of the LEM24 board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. The slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if you install the LEM24 board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
14.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24

The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For detailed descriptions of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.

This section describes how the physical interfaces of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board.

Table 14-87 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-87 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEM24 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN3/OUT3 IN4/OUT4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 TX9/RX9 TX10/RX10 TX11/RX11 TX12/RX12 TX13/RX13 TX14/RX14 TX15/RX15 TX16/RX16 TX17/RX17 TX18/RX18 TX19/RX19 TX20/RX20
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
351
Physical Port TX21/RX21 TX22/RX22 TX23/RX23 TX24/RX24 TX25/RX25 TX26/RX26 TX27/RX27 TX28/RX28
Port Number on the NMS 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-44 shows the application model of the LEM24 board. Table 14-88 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-44 Port diagram of the LEM24 board
Client side PORT5 PORT6
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK3
WDM side 101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1 Cross-connect module Backplane Service processing module WDM side optical module 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
3(IN3/OUT3)-1 4(IN4/OUT4)-1
PORT28
VCTRUNK4
L2 sw itching module
Table 14-88 Definition of NM port of the LEM24 board Port Name PORT5 - PORT28 VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4 AP1 - AP4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Definition Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical interfaces: RX5/TX5 - RX28/TX28. Internal virtual ports. Internal convergence ports.
Port Name ClientLP1 - ClientLP2 ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2 IN3/OUT3 - IN4/OUT4
Definition Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 Internal logical ports. Corresponds to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LEM24 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports, or converge optical signals received by the clientside optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals.
NOTE
l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
One-to-one port connections are between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module. You are not required to set one-to-one port connections on the U2000. Create a cross-connection between the AP port of the LEM24 board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 14-45.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.
The ClientLP port connects to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port connects to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration of these connections on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
353
Figure 14-45 Cross-connection diagram of the LEM24 board

Client side WDM side Other board
104(AP4/AP4)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
Client side
103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1
WDM side LEM24
Other board
TN11LEM24/TN11LEX4
14.9.10 Board Function Configuration

The LEM24 board provides multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, LAG, and QoS. You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the LEM24 by using the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l VLAN SNCP Protection DBPS Protection QoS (OTN) Ethernet Ring Protection Switching MPLS Tunnel MSTP STP and RSTP LAG RMON IGMP Snooping ETH-OAM
14.9.11 LEM24 loopback

Table 14-89 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LEM24 boards. Table 14-89 Loopbacks supported by LEM boards Boa rd TN1 1LE M24
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Service Type Clien t-side 10GE optical port
Loopback Type PHY outloop
Description See Figure 14-46.
354
Boa rd
Service Type
Loopback Type MAC outloop MAC/PHY inloop
Description See Figure 14-47. See Figure 14-48. See Figure 14-49.
GE/FE optical port GE/FE electrical port
MAC/PHY inloop PHY outloop MAC/PHY inloop inloop outloop
See Figure 14-50. See Figure 14-51. See Figure 14-52. See Figure 14-53.
WDM-side
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of 10GE Services on the LEM24 Board

l PHY outloop As shown in Figure 14-46, two 10GE services are received on the client side. Any of the two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point. Figure 14-46 PHY outloop of one 10GE service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 10GE PHY 10GE PHY GE/FE PHY 10GE MAC 10GE MAC GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK1 ODU2 OTU2 IN3/OUT3
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
RX28/TX28 GE/FE PHY Client-side
VCTRUNK3 GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services L2 switching module
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
MAC outloop
As shown in Figure 14-47, two 10GE services are received on the client side. Any of the two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the MAC loopback point. Figure 14-47 MAC outloop of one 10GE service on the LEM24 board
VCTRUNK2 ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
MAC/PHY inloop As shown in Figure 14-48, two OTU2 services from the WDM side are converted into two 10GE services, or two 10GE services from the backplane are received by the L2 switching module. Any of the two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 14-48 MAC/PHY inloop of one 10GE service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 10GE PHY 10GE PHY GE/FE PHY 10GE MAC 10GE MAC GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 ODU2 OTU2 IN4/OUT4 ODU2 OTU2 IN3/OUT3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
356
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of GE/FE (Optical Port) Services on the LEM24 Board
l MAC/PHY inloop As shown in Figure 14-49, two OTU2 services from the WDM side are converted into two 10GE services. The two 10GE services are then deconverged by the L2 switching module into two 10GE services and twentytwo GE/FE services. Any N of the GE/FE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point. Figure 14-49 MAC/PHY inloop of one GE/FE (optical port) service on the LEM24 board
VCTRUNK2 ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of GE/FE (Electrical Port) Services on the LEM24 Board
l PHY outloop As shown in Figure 14-50, twenty-two GE/FE services are received on the client side. Any N of the GE/FE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
357
Figure 14-50 PHY outloop of one GE/FE (electrical port) service on the LEM24 board
RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 10GE PHY 10GE PHY GE/FE PHY 10GE MAC 10GE MAC GE/FE MAC VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 ODU2 OTU2 IN4/OUT4 ODU2 OTU2 IN3/OUT3
MAC/PHY inloop As shown in Figure 14-51, two OTU2 services from the WDM side are converted into two 10GE services. The two 10GE services are then deconverged by the L2 switching module into two 10GE services and twentytwo GE/FE services. Any N of the GE/FE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 14-51 MAC/PHY inloop of one GE/FE (electrical port) service on the LEM24 board
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
358
WDM-side Loopbacks on the LEM24 Board

l WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-52, twenty-four services received on the client side are mapped into two ODU2 service. Any of the two ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 14-52 WDM-side inloop on the LEM24 board
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4

NOTE
The LEM24 board supports both GE/FE electrical signals and GE/FE optical signals. The figure only demonstrates how GE/FE optical signals are received.
WDM-side outloop As shown inFigure 14-53, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. The ODU2 service is then mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
359
Figure 14-53 WDM-side outloop on the LEM24 board

VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN4/OUT4

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LEM24, refer to Table 14-90. Table 14-90 LEM24 Parameters Field Optical Interface/Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
360
Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: Non-Loopback
Description The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Enabled, Disabled Default: l WDM side: Enabled l Client side: Disabled
LPT Enabled
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
361
Field FEC Mode
Value FEC, AFEC Default: FEC
Description The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE only support FEC.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
362
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
Synchronous Clock Enabled
14.9.13 Specifications of the LEM24

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
363
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 1000BASE-SX, I-850LC 1000BASE-LX, I-1310LC 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10GBASE-ER/EW (SFP+)
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km
TN 11L EM 24
NOTE

Table 14-91 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 1000BASE-SX, I-850-LC NRZ MLM 0.5 1000BASE-LX, I-1310-LC NRZ SLM 10
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm dBm dBm 830 to 860 -2.5 -9.5 1270 to 1355 -3 -9.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
364
Unit
Value 1000BASE-SX, I-850-LC 1000BASE-LX, I-1310-LC 9
dB -
IEEE802.3z compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm PIN 770 to 860 -17 0 PIN 1260 to 1620 -20 -3
NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.
Table 14-92 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10GE services Item Optical Module Type Optical interface service rate Optical source type Line code format Target distance Gbit/s Unit Value 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10.3125 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10.3125 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) 10.3125
km
MLM NRZ 0.3
SLM NRZ 10
SLM NRZ 40
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
1530 to 1565
dBm dBm
-1 -7.3
0.5 -8.2
4 -4.7
365
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Output optical power in case of laser shutdown Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 3.5 -30 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) 3 -30
dB dBm
3 -30
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 840 to 860 PIN 1260 to 1355 PIN 1530 to 1565
dBm dBm
-11.1 -1
-14.4 0.5
-14.1 -1
dB
-12
-12
-26

Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
dBm dBm dB
2 -3 9
366
Unit
Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
THz GHz nm dB ps/nm
192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant 0.3 35 800
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range dBm dBm dB THz 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
367
Unit
Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
GHz nm dB ps/nm
5 0.3 35 800
Table 14-95 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
dBm
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
368
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -1 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 0
dBm
-6
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
369
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25 C (77F) 81 Maximum Power Consumption at 55 C (131F) 83
TN11 LEM2 4
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
82
84
14.10 LEX4
LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board

The available functional version of the LEX4 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LEX4 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
14.10.2 Application
The LEX4 board is an optical transponder unit. The LEX4 board converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane, into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEX4 board also performs the reverse process. The LEX4 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. The board also supports transparent transmission of two channels of 10GE services. Figure 14-54 shows the application of the LEX4 board in a WDM system.
Figure 14-54 Application of the TN11LEX4 board in a WDM system

G.694.1
1 10GE LAN 10GE WAN 4
G.694.1 MUX DMUX LEX4 DMUX MUX WDM side

4 1 10GE LAN 10GE WAN
LEX4
Client side
WDM side
Client side

The LEX4 board provides electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function. Table 14-96 lists the functions and features of the LEX4 board.
NOTE
The 10GE cross-connections are only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 14-96 Functions and features of the LEX4 board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services crossconnected from the backplane, into two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process. l Converges multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. Client-side service type Cross-connect capabilities 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE electrical signals between the LEX4 board and the cross-connect board. l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side. l Supports mapping of 10GE signals into OTU2 signals. l Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) at the OTU2 and ODU2 layers. l Supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) at the ODU2 layer. WDM specification Supports DWDM specifications.
OTN function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
371
Function and Feature LPT function
Description Supported
Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Supports remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services. l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported in the WDM side. Supported in the Client side and WDM side. Supports stacking VLAN. Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS). Supports IEEE802.1p. Supports DSCP.
IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock QinQ QoS (Quality of Service)
ETH OAM LAG (Link Aggregation Group)
Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah. l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and trunk ports. l Supports manual and static LAGs. l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.
VLAN multicast Port CVLAN group L2 layer switching
Supports VLAN-based multicast. Supports a CVLAN group that is being used as one VLAN. Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D. Supports MAC address learning and aging. Supports IGMP snooping. Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP. Supports 32K MAC addresses.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
372
Function and Feature Flow control Maximum transmission unit (MTU) Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) Port working mode PRBS function Optical-layer ASON Electrical-layer ASON Protection scheme
Description Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination. Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.
Provides point-to-point EPLs.
Provides point-to-multipoint EVPLs and supports VLAN-based switching.
10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side Supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports VLAN SNCP. l Supports DBPS protection. l Supports ERPS protection
SFP+/XFP
Supports enhanced SFP+ optical modules on the client side. Supports 10 Gbit/s tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
10GE optical interface
MAC
Inloop Outloop
PHY
Inloop Outloop
WDM side optical interface
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
373
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc. Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS

The LEX4 board consists of a client-side optical module, a WDM-side optical module, a L2 switching module, a signal processing module, a 1588 module, a control and communication module, and a power supply module. Figure 14-55 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 14-56 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
374
Figure 14-55 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side
E/O
OUT1 OUT2
E/O
O/E
IN1 IN2
1588
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
375
Figure 14-56 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
10GE
WDM side
E/O
OUT1 OUT2
E/O
O/E
IN1 IN2
1588
SCC
Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEX4 board. In the signal flow of the LEX4 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LEX4 to the WDM side of the LEX4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The RX1 to RX4 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client equipment and perform O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module. The signal processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical ports. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service crossconnection. The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends four channels of the signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. The LEX4 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. Client-side receiver: Performs E/O conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board.

Figure 14-57 shows the front panel of the LEX4 board. Figure 14-57 Front panel of the LEX4 board
LEX4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
LEX4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
378
Indicators
Interfaces
There are twelve optical interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board. Table 14-97 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-97 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEX4 board Interface RX1-RX4 TX1-TX4 IN1-IN2 Type LC LC LC Function Receives service signals from the client-side equipment. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.10.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TN11LEX4 board. Table 14-98 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEX4 board. Table 14-98 Valid slots for the LEX4 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
379
14.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4



Table 14-99 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-99 Mapping between the physical ports on the LEX4 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODU2LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-58 shows the application model of the LEX4 board. Table 14-100 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
380
Figure 14-58 Port diagram of the LEX4 board

Client side PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4
WDM side 101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1 103(AP3/AP3)-1 104(AP4/AP4)-1 Cross-connect module Backplane Service processing module WDM side optical module 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1
L2 sw itching module
Table 14-100 Meaning of NM port of the LEX4 board Port Name PORT5 - PORT8 VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4 AP1 - AP4 ClientLP1 - ClientLP2 ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2 IN1/OUT1 - IN2/OUT2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces: RX1/TX1 - RX4/TX4. Internal virtual ports. Internal convergence ports. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 Internal logical ports. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LEX4 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports or converge the optical signals received by the client-side optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals.
NOTE
l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports. l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
l l
Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000. Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the LEX4 board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 14-59.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
381
The ClientLP port is connected to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Figure 14-59 Cross-connection diagram of the LEX4 board

Client side WDM side Other board
104(AP4/AP4)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
Client side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
WDM side LEX4

104(AP4/AP4)-1
Other board
TN11LEM24/TN11LEX4
14.10.10 Board Function Configuration

The LEX4 board supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, LAG, and QoS. Configure the functions according to actual requirements. You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the LEX4 by using the U2000: l l l l l l l l l l l VLAN SNCP Protection DBPS Protection QoS (OTN) Ethernet Ring Protection Switching MPLS Tunnel MSTP STP and RSTP LAG RMON IGMP Snooping ETH-OAM
14.10.11 LEX4 loopback

Table 14-101 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LEX4 boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
382
Table 14-101 Loopbacks supported by LEX4 boards Board TN11L EX4 Loopback Type 10GE PHY outloop 10GE MAC outloop 10GE MAC/ PHY inloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop Description See Figure 14-60. See Figure 14-61. See Figure 14-62. See Figure 14-63. See Figure 14-64.
10GE services PHY outloop As shown in Figure 14-60, four 10GE services are received on the client side. Any N of the 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Figure 14-60 PHY outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11LEX4 board
10GE RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 PHY PHY PHY PHY L2 switching module Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services MAC MAC VCTRUNK1 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
Backplane WDM-side
10GE services MAC outloop As shown in Figure 14-61, four 10GE services are received on the client side. Any N of the 10GE services can be loopbacked to the client side at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
383
Figure 14-61 MAC outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11LEX4 board
10GE RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 PHY PHY PHY PHY L2 switching module Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4 Backplane WDM-side MAC MAC VCTRUNK1 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
10GE services MAC/PHY inloop As shown in Figure 14-62, two OTU2 services from the WDM side are converted into two 10GE services, or two 10GE services from the backplane are received by the L2 switching module. Any of the two 10GE services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the MAC loopback point.
Figure 14-62 MAC/PHY inloop of one 10GE service on the TN11LEX4 board
VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-63, four services received on the client side are mapped into two ODU2 service. Any of the two ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
384
Figure 14-63 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LEX4 board

VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side outloop As shown inFigure 14-64, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. The ODU2 service is then mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side.
Figure 14-64 WDM-side outloop on the TN11LEX4 board

VCTRUNK2
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LEX4, refer to Table 14-102.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
385
Table 14-102 LEX4 Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
LPT Enabled
FEC Working State
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
386
Field FEC Mode
Description The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE only support FEC.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
PRBS Test Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
387
Field Synchronous Clock Enabled
Description Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
NULL Mapping Status
Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
14.10.13 Specifications of the LEX4

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10GBASE-ER/EW (SFP+) WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km
TN 11L EX 4
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
388

Table 14-103 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10GE services Item Optical Module Type Optical interface service rate Optical source type Line code format Target distance Gbit/s Unit Value 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10.3125 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10.3125 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) 10.3125
km
MLM NRZ 0.3
SLM NRZ 10
SLM NRZ 40
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Output optical power in case of laser shutdown Eye pattern mask nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565
dBm dBm dB dBm
-1 -7.3 3 -30
0.5 -8.2 3.5 -30
4 -4.7 3 -30
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 840 to 860 PIN 1260 to 1355 PIN 1530 to 1565
dBm dBm
-11.1 -1
-14.4 0.5
-14.1 -1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
389
Unit
Value 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) -12 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) -26
dB
-12

Line code format
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm dBm
PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0
390
Unit
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
391
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
392
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -27 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km -27
dB
-27
Power Consumption
Boar d WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) 64 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 67
TN11 LEX4
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
65
68
14.11 LOA
LOA: 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 wavelength conversion board.

The available functional version of the LOA board is TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
393
Boar d TN11 LOA
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.11.2 Application
The LOA board converges a maximum of 8 x Any service signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/s or 1 x FC800 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Ports on the LOA board can work in any of the following modes: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2), and ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2). Ports on the LOA board support the service package configuration, that is, 8xGE ODU0 configuration. After this configuration is applied, all client-side ports on the LOA board always work in ODU0 non-convergence mode with mapping path Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, and GE (GFP-T) services are supported on the client side of the LOA board accordingly.
Application Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 8 * Any service signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 14-65 shows the details. Figure 14-65 Application of the LOA board in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
1 125Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 8 Client Side WDM Side LOA G.694.1 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 LOA 8 WDM Side Client Side 1 125Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s
NOTE
In this scenario, the client-side services are FE, GE, STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI, SDI, DVB-ASI services. Application of the LOA board in 8 * GE ODU0 configuration is the same as that of the ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
394
Application Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 4 x Any service signals at a rate ranging from 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 14-66 shows the details. Figure 14-66 Application of the LOA board in ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2)
1 1.49 Gbit/s 2.67 Gbit/s 4 Client Side WDM Side LOA G.694.1 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 LOA 4 WDM Side Client Side 1 1.49 Gbit/s 2.67 Gbit/s
NOTE
In this scenario, the client-side services are HD-SDI, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, STM-16, and OC-48 services. In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit services.
Application Scenario 3: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 4 x OTU1 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 14-67 shows the details. Figure 14-67 Application of the LOA board in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0 [->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)
1 OTU1 4 Client Side WDM Side LOA G.694.1 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 LOA 4 WDM Side Client Side 1 OTU1
NOTE
In this scenario, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive and transmit services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
395
Application Scenario 4: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 2 x 3G-SDI, 2 x FC400, or 1 x FC800 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 14-68 shows the details. Figure 14-68 Application of the LOA board in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
1 3G-SDI, FC400, and FC800 2 Client Side WDM Side LOA G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM Side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LOA 2 Client Side 1
3G-SDI, FC400, and FC800
NOTE
In this scenario, any two of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports receive and transmit 3G-SDI or FC400 services, and the RX1/TX1 port receives and transmits FC800 services.
Application Scenario 5: ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)

The LOA board converges a maximum of 1 x FC800 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse process. Figure 14-69 shows the details. Figure 14-69 Application of the LOA board in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2)
MUX FC800 1 LOA G.694.1 DMUX Client Side WDM Side MUX WDM Side Client Side DMUX G.694.1 LOA 1 FC800
NOTE
In this scenario, client-side port RX1/TX1 receives and transmits FC800 services.

The LOA board supports functions and features such as wavelength tunable, OTN functions, and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-107.
Table 14-107 Functions and features of the LOA board Function and Feature Basic function Description l The LOA board converges a maximum of eight channels of Any service signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/s or 1 x FC800 service signals into 1 x OTU2 optical signals, and then converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The LOA board also performs the reverse convergence and conversion. l The LOA board's ports can work in any of five modes: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2), and ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2). l Ports on the LOA board support the batch port configuration, that is, 8 * GE ODU0 configuration. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s
NOTE The LOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
397
Function and Feature OTN function
Description l Maps Any signals into OTU2 signals. It encapsulates and maps signals in compliance with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions specific to the OTU1 and OTU2 layers. l Supports PM functions specific to the ODU0 layers. l Supports PM and TCM functions specific to the ODU1 and ODU2 layers. l Supports the non-intrusive monitoring function at the TCM and PM specific to the ODU1 and ODU2 layers. l Supports the non-intrusive monitoring function at the PM specific to the ODUflex layer.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function FEC encoding
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. This function is supported only when the LOA board receives GE/FE services on its client side. l Supports PRBS tests on client-side signals: STM1-1, STM1-4, STM1-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, AND OTU1. l Supports PRBS tests on WDM-side OTU2 signals.
LPT function PRBS function
Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
398
Function and Feature Test frame Protection scheme XFP/eSFP/ SFP+
Description This function is supported only when the LOA board receives GE/FE services on its client side. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength). Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. The client-side ports RX1/TX1 on the LOA board support pluggable SFP+ modules.
Loopback
Channel Loopback
Inloop Outloop
Supported
NOTE For FC800 services, Inloop is not supported only in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Not supported Supported

NOTE It is supported only in FC800 services in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
NOTE It is not supported in FC800 services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
399
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
400
Protocols or standards (performanc e monitoring) for processing services

The LOA board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-70 shows the block diagram of the functions of the LOA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
401
Figure 14-70 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOA board
Client side
O/E
GE encapsulation and mapping module FC encapsulation and mapping module

OTN processing module
WDM side E/O

OUT
E/O
FICON encapsulation and mapping module
O/E
IN
Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC
Signal flow
The LOA board can receive Any optical signals on the client side (signals at a rate ranging from 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gibt/s or FC800 signals).
NOTE
The LOA board supports hybrid transmission of signals at a rate of 4.25 Gibt/s or lower, but does not support hybrid transmission of FC800 signals and low-rate signals. The total rate of signals received at the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. For details on the signal types, see 14.11.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOA to the WDM side of the LOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 ports, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
402
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical port. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical port. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical ports.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of service encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module. Service encapsulation and mapping module The module encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps them into OTU2 payload. It also performs the reversion operations. The module also monitors performance of Any signals. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
14.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOA board.

Figure 14-71 shows the front panel of the LOA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
404
Figure 14-71 Front panel of the LOA board
LOA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LOA
Indicators
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
405
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOA board. Table 14-108 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-108 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOA board Interface INa Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUTa
LC
TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8
LC LC
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface.
NOTE
All of the eight pairs of ports on the client side can be used to receive and transmit the supported services except FC800, which must be received and transmitted by the RX1 and TX1 ports. The total bandwidth for the eight pairs of ports on the client side cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
Laser Hazard Level

14.11.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LOA board. Table 14-109 shows the valid slots for the LOA board. Table 14-109 Valid slots for the LOA board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid slots IU1IU8, IU11IU42, IU45IU68 IU1IU8, IU12IU27, IU29IU36 IU1IU8, IU11IU18 IU1IU8, IU11IU16 IU2IU5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
406
14.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LOA


This section describes the logical ports displayed on the NMS and the physical ports of the LOA board.
Display of Optical Ports

The serial numbers of the optical ports on the front panel of the board displayed on the NMS are listed in Table 14-110. Table 14-110 Serial numbers of the ports of the LOA board displayed on the NMS Port on the Panel IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Port on the NMS 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOTE
Logical Ports
l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) When the LOA board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 14-72 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 14-73 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. For details about ODU timeslot configuration modes, see 14.11.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.
Figure 14-72 Port diagram 1 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 ODU0:2 WDM Side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1 to 8) ODU0:1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
. . .
10(RX8/TX8)-1
. . .
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
. . .
ODU0:8
ODU2:1
OCH:1
IN/OUT
Figure 14-73 Port diagram 2 of the LOA board in the ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1/ 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/ 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP/ ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-2 WDM Side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4)-ODU0:(1 to 2) ODU0:1 ODU1:1 ODU0:2
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
ODU2:1 207(ClientLP7/ ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)-2 ODU0:2
OCH:1
IN/OUT
9(RX7/TX7)-1
ODU0:1 ODU1:4
10(RX8/TX8)-1
NOTE
8*GE ODU0 configuration: all client-side ports on the LOA board always work in ODU0 nonconvergence mode with mapping path Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2, and GE(GFP-T) services are supported on the client side of the LOA board accordingly. Figure 14-72 show the port diagram. When the LOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the LOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the LOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the LOA board.
ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) Figure 14-74 shows the port diagram when the LOA board works in ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
408
Figure 14-74 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
WDM Side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1 to 4) ODU1:1 ODU1:2 IN/OUT
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1
ODU1:3 ODU1:4
NOTE
In this mode, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive services.
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) When the LOA board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), two port models are available. The mapping paths for the two port models vary according to the ODU timeslot configuration mode. Figure 14-75 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Figure 14-73 shows the port diagram when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. For details about ODU timeslot configuration modes, see 14.11.11 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS.
Figure 14-75 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU2->OTU2)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~ IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0(1~8) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 ODU0:1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-2 ODU0:2 ODU0:3 ODU2:1 ODU0:4 OCH:1 IN/OUT
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
208(ClientLP8 /ClientLP8)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ClientLP8 /ClientLP8)-2
ODU0:7 ODU0:8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
409
Figure 14-76 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)~ IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1(1~4)-ODU0(1~2) 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 ODU0:1 ODU1:1 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 ODU0:2 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-2 ODU0:1 ODU1:2 ODU0:2 ODU2:1 OCH:1
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
IN/OUT
208(ClientLP8 /ClientLP8)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1 208(ClientLP8 /ClientLP8)-2
ODU0:1 ODU1:4 ODU0:2
NOTE
In this mode, any four of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive services.
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2) Figure 14-77 shows the port diagram when the LOA board works in ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2).
Figure 14-77 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP2/ClientLP8) 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 WDM Side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1 to 2)
3(RX1/TX1)-1
ODUflex:1
ODU2:1 OCH:1 IN/OUT
10(RX8/TX8)-1
208(ClientLP8/ ClientLP8)-1
ODUflex:2
NOTE
Only the RX1/TX1 port can receive FC800 services. Any two of the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports can receive 3G-SDI/FC400 services as shown in the figure (the RX1/TX1 ports are used as an example).
ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) Figure 14-78 shows the port diagram when the LOA board works in ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
410
Figure 14-78 Port diagram of the LOA board in the ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2)
Client Side WDM Side IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
IN/OUT
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.
Service processing module
Table 14-111 Meanings of the LOA board's ports on the NMS (port modes) Logical Port Name 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8) Channel Name IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU0:(1 to 8) Meaning Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2) Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2) Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2). Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU2->OTU2). Indicates mapping path when the board works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2).
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU1:(1 to 4)ODU0: (1 to 2)
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU1:(1 to 8)
201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1/201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-2 to 208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1/208 (ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU0:(1 to 8)
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU1:(1 to 4)ODU0:(1 to 2)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
411
Logical Port Name 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) to 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)
Channel Name IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODUflex:(1 to 2)
Meaning Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2). Indicates the mapping path when the board works in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2).
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1
14.11.9 Configuring Cross-Connections

The section describes how to configure service cross-connections of the LOA board on the NMS. To transmit services using the LOA board, you need to perform the following configurations on the U2000: l Choose Configuration > Working Mode and set Port Working Mode or Service Package. The LOA board's ports can work in any of five modes: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2>OTU2), and ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2). Specify required services types for the board. On the U2000, create cross-connections and select optical channels specific to working modes. Figure 14-79 is used as an example. The ClientLP1 port works in ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2). Then, logical port is 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1 in Figure 14-79. ODU2:1. For details, see The ClientLP2 port works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random for IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, optical port is RX4/TX4 and logical port is 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1. For cross-connection 2, logical port is 202(ClientLP2/ ClientLP2)-1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:3. For details, see and
3
l l
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP3 port works in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive for IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, optical port is RX5/TX5 and logical port is 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1. For cross-connection 2, logical port is 203(ClientLP3/ ClientLP3)-1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1. For details, see
4
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP4 port works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random for IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, logical port is 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:5. For cross-connection 2, logical port is
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:6. For details, see

6
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP5 port works in ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign consecutive for IN/OUT port. For cross-connection 1, logical port is 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4ODU0:1. For cross-connection 2, logical port is 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 and channel is IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 ODU1:4ODU0:2. For details, see
8
and
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP6 port works in ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2>OTU2). Then, logical port is 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)1 and channel is IN/OUT OCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:3. For details, see
10
in Figure 14-79.
The ClientLP7 port works in ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2). ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is set to Assign random for IN/OUT port. Then, logical port is 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)1 and channel is IN/ OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:1. For details, see
NOTE
11
in Figure 14-79.
When configuring a cross-connection, set ODUflex Timeslot to 3 if the client service type is 3G-SDI, and set it to 4 if the client service type is FC400, and set it to 7 if the client service type is FC800.
NOTE
If all the eight clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can configure the 8*GE->ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2) and the service type to GE(GFP-T) for the eight ports. The mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU2->OTU2. The total rate of client-side services cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
Figure 14-79 Cross-connections of the LOA board

Client side WDM side
2
1 3 5 6 7 8 9
IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:3 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:1ODU0:1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:5 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU0:6 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4ODU0:1 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:4ODU0:2 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODU1:3 IN/OUTOCH:1ODU2:1ODUflex:2
RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
4
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2
10
206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 Cross-connect module
11
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
413
14.11.10 LOA Loopbacks

Table 14-112 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LOA boards. Table 14-112 Loopbacks supported by LOA boards B oa rd T N 11 L O A Port Working Mode Loopback Type Description
ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2) ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2)
Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel inloop Channel outloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel inloop Channel outloop
See Figure 14-80. See Figure 14-81. See Figure 14-82. See Figure 14-83 See Figure 14-84. See Figure 14-85. See Figure 14-86 See Figure 14-87. See Figure 14-88. See Figure 14-89 See Figure 14-90. See Figure 14-91. See Figure 14-92 See Figure 14-93. See Figure 14-94. See Figure 14-95. See Figure 14-96. See Figure 14-97.
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2)
Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel inloop Channel outloop
ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2)
Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel inloop Channel outloop
ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2)
Client-side outloop WDM-side outloop
NOTE
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the mapping path is ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 ; When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2.
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Client-side outloop
As shown in Figure 14-80, eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services are received on the client side. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 14-80 Client-side outloop
RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services ODU0
RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 WDM-side ODU2 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-81, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
415
Figure 14-81 Client-side inloop

RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
IN/OUT
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 14-82, eight 125 Mbit/s-1.25 Gbit/s services received on the client side are mapped into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Figure 14-82 Channel inloop

RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side sercices 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side sercices 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side sercices 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side sercices 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side sercices 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side sercices 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side sercices 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side sercices Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
416
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 14-83, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side, The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Figure 14-83 Channel outloop

RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU0
RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client side
ODU0
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-84, four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services are received on the client side. Any N of the four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 14-84 Client-side outloop
1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU1
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 (Any four of the eight ports)
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side OTU2 IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
417
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-85, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services. Any N of the four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.

Channel inloop As shown in Figure 14-86, four 1.49 Gbit/s-2.67 Gbit/s services received on the client side are mapped into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.

Channel outloop As shown in Figure 14-87, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side, The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
418

ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-88, four OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped into four ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. Figure 14-88 Client-side outloop
OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 OTU1 Client-side ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 WDM-side ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 OTU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
OTU1
ODU1
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-89, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
419

OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 OTU1 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 WDM-side ODU1 ODU2 OTU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
OTU1
ODU1
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 14-90, four OTU1 services received on the client side are mapped into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.

OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 OTU1 Clientside Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 WDM-side ODU1 ODU2 OTU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
OTU1
ODU1
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 14-91, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side, The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
420

OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 OTU1 Client-side ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 WDM-side ODU1 ODU2 OTU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 (Any four of the eight ports )
OTU1
ODU1
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-92, two 3G-SDI/FC400 services are received on the client side, or one FC800 service is received on the client side. Any N of client side services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 14-92 Client-side outloop
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 (Any two of the eight ports) 3G-SDI/ FC400 3G-SDI/ FC400 ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex OTU2 IN/OUT
a: Client-side service type is 3G-SDI/FC400
RX1/TX1
FC800
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
b: Client-side service type is FC800 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services
WDM-side
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-93, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into two 3G-SDI/FC400 services. Any N of the two 3G-SDI/ FC400 services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
421

NOTE
Client-side inloop is not supported in FC800 services.

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 (Any two of the eight ports) 3G-SDI/ FC400 3G-SDI/ FC400 ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
Client-side
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 14-94, two 3G-SDI/FC400 services received on the client side are mapped into two ODUflex services. Any N of the two ODUflex services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODUflex services can be passed through.
NOTE
Channel inloop is not supported in FC800 services.

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 (Any two of the eight ports) 3G-SDI/ FC400 3G-SDI/ FC400 ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
Client-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 14-95, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into a maximum of two ODUflex services. Any N of the two ODUflex services can be looped back to the WDM side. The remaining ODUflex services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
422

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 (Any two of the eight ports) 3G-SDI/ FC400 3G-SDI/ FC400 ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex OTU2 IN/OUT
a: Client-side services type is 3G-SDI/FC400
RX1/TX1
FC800
ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
b:Client-side services type is FC800 Client side Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM side
ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-96, one FC800 service is received on the client side, the FC800 service can be looped back to the client side. Figure 14-96 Client-side outloop
RX1/TX1 Client-side
FC800
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-97, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into one ODU2 service, the ODU2 service can be looped back to the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
423
Figure 14-97 WDM-side outloop
RX1/TX1 Client-side
FC800
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LOA, refer to Table 14-113. Table 14-113 LOA parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Query or set the Channel Loopback.
Channel Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
424
Field Service Type
Value None, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, SDI, GE(TTT-AGMP), GE (GFP-T), HDSDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, 3GSDI Default: None
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTAGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTAGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-AGMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format. NOTE The LOA board's ports may work in any of five working modes and the type of the clientside services received by the ports varies with the working modes. l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2): Supports FE, GE, STM-1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-12, FC100, ESCON, FICON, FDDI, SDI, and DVB-ASI services. l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1->ODU2->OTU2): Supports HD-SDI, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, STM-16, and OC-48 services. l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]->ODU2->OTU2): Supports OTU1 service. l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex->ODU2->OTU2): Supports 3G-SDI, FC400, FC800 services. l ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU2->OTU2): Supports FC800 service.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
425
Field Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
Value 0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s
Description Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.
Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Turn-On
0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s
Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.
LPT Enabled
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN Mode Default: Client Mode
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
426
Field Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Value -
Description Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Packet Length 1518 - 9600 Default: 9600 The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Default: 1000M FullDuplex
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
427
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. When the ODU timeslot configuration mode is Assign consecutive, the internal ODU0 mapping path is: ODU0 >ODU1>ODU2. When the mode is set to Assign random, the internal ODU0 mapping path is: ODU0>ODU2.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode
Assign random, Assign consecutive Default: Assign random
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
428
Field Port Working Mode
Value ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2), ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0[->ODU1]>ODU2->OTU2), ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex>ODU2->OTU2), and ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2). Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]->ODU2>OTU2)
Description This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.
14.11.12 Specifications of the LOA

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
429
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km Multirate (SFP+) 1600-M5E-SN-I (SFP+) 1600-SM-LC-L (SFP+) 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
TN 11L OA
NOTE

NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
430
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN APD APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
431
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
432
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASELX-40 km 1270 to 1355 1000 BASEZX-80 km 1500 to 1580
nm
830 to 860
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
433
Table 14-116 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDI services Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km km Gbit/s NRZ 10 3
Line code format Target distance Service rate
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm dBm dBm dB nm 1290 to 1330 0 -7 5 3.0
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1260 to 1620 -16 0 -27
Table 14-117 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC400 services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance Service rate km Gbit/s Unit Value Multirate (SFP+) NRZ 0.3 4.25
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
434
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width
Unit
Value Multirate (SFP+)
dBm dBm dB nm
0 -7 5 3.0
Table 14-118 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC800 services Item Optical Module Type Optical interface service rate Optical source type Line code format Target distance Gbit/s km Unit Value 1600-M5E-SN-I (SFP+) 8.5 MLM NRZ 0.3 1600-SM-LC-L (SFP+) 8.5 SLM NRZ 10
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm dBm dBm dB 840 to 860 -1 -7 3 1290 to 1330 -1 -6 6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
435
Unit
Value 1600-M5E-SN-I (SFP+) 1600-SM-LC-L (SFP+)
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance dBm dBm dB PIN -7.5 -1 -12 PIN -14.4 0.5 -27
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, or DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm dBm dB
1471 to 1611 5 0 9
1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2

436
Unit
nm nm dB -
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
437
Item Optical Module Type Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm -
192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
438

Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
439
Line code format
Table 14-123 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
440
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 40
km
10
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm dB 1290 to 1330 -1 -6 6 NA 30 G.959.1-compliant 1530 to 1565 2 -1 8.2 NA 30
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1260 to 1565 -11 -1 -27 PIN 1260 to 1605 -14 -1 -27
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.19 kg (2.64b.)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
441
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 32.8 37 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 31.8 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 36
TN11LOA
14.12 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit

The available functional versions of the LOG board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LOG TN12 LOG OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y
Differences Between Versions

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function:
The TN11LOG supports AFEC, and the TN12LOG supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 14.12.3 Functions and Features. The TN12LOG supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal, while the TN11LOG supports only the GE optical signal. For details, see 14.12.3 Functions and Features. The TN12LOG board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, whereas the TN11LOG does not. For details, see 14.12.3 Functions and Features. l Specification: For the power consumption and specification of each version, see 14.12.12 Specifications of the LOG.
Substitution Relationship
Original Board TN11LOG Substitute Board TN12LOG Substitution Rules The TN12LOG can be created as TN11LOG on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOG functions as the TN11LOG.
NOTE l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply. l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
TN12LOG
None
14.12.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOG board implements conversion between eight channels of GE optical signals and OTU2 optical signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-98. Figure 14-98 Position of the LOG board in the WDM system
1 GE 8 Client side WDM side LOG G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LOG 8 Client side 1 GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
443

The LOG board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelengths, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-124. Table 14-124 Functions and features of the LOG board Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes eight channels of GE service signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a DWDM standard that complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1 or a CWDM standard wavelength that complies with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s
NOTE The TN12LOG board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Client-side service type Cross-connect capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of eight channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of eight GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU2 signals. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function
Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and Feature PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding
Description Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Supported TN11LOG: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN12LOG: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and performance events monitoring
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Supported by the TN12LOG Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 only supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
445
Function and Feature eSFP/XFP
Description Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. TN12LOG: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services
IEEE 802.3z

The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
446
Figure 14-99 and Figure 14-100 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board. Figure 14-99 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
GE WDM side
O/E
GE OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module
E/O
OUT
E/O
O/E
IN
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
447
Figure 14-100 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side O/E

GE encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module
E/O
OUT
E/O
O/E
IN
Signal Flow
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals on the TN12LOG. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.
The client side of the LOG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LOG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board.

Figure 14-101 shows the front panel of the LOG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
450
Figure 14-101 Font panel of the LOG board
LOG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LOG
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board. Table 14-125 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-125 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOG board Interface INa Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUTa
LC
TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8
LC LC
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOG.
Laser Hazard Level

14.12.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LOG board. Table 14-126 shows the valid slots for the TN11LOG board. Table 14-126 Valid slots for TN11LOG board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Table 14-127 shows the valid slots for the TN12LOG board. Table 14-127 Valid slots for TN12LOG board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
452
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
14.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG



Table 14-128 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-128 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
453
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-102 shows the application model of the LOG board. Table 14-129 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-102 Port diagram of the LOG board
Client side
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8) 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1
WDM-side opticalmodule
Table 14-129 Meaning of NM port of the LOG board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 LP IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections between LOG boards and other boards on the NMS. If the LOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LOG board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 14-103.
3
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
in Figure 14-103. (The GE services accessed from the

454
client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LOG board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-103. (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port. There should be no more than eight cross-connections between the RX/TX ports of the local board or other boards and the LP port of the local board.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LOG board and the LP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-103. (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
The eight paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by
and
in Figure 14-103.
Figure 14-103 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG board

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Other board
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8
WDM side
Client side
5 3 4 2 1
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 201(LP/LP)-5 201(LP/LP)-6 201(LP/LP)-7 201(LP/LP)-8
WDM side
LOG
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board The WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
Other board TN11L4G/TN11LDGD/TN11LDGS/TN11LOG/TN12LOG/TN11LQG/TN13LQM/ TN11LQMD/TN12LQMD/TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS/ TN11TBE/TN11TDG/TN11TOM/ TN11TQM/TN12TQM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
455
14.12.10 LOG Loopbacks

Table 14-130 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LOG boards. Table 14-130 Loopbacks supported by LOG boards Board TN11LO G/ TN12LO G Loopback Type Client-side outloop Client-side inloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop Description See Figure 14-104. See Figure 14-105. See Figure 14-106. See Figure 14-107.
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-104, eight GE services are received on the client side. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked to the client side and the other seven GE services are passed through. Figure 14-104 Client-side outloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-105, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight GE services. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked to the WDM side and the other seven GE services are passed through. Figure 14-105 Client-side inloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
456
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-106, eight GE services received on the client side are mapped into one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 14-106 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side Loopbacked services GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-107, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked at the ODU2 loopback point, mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side. Figure 14-107 WDM-side outloop on the TN11LOG/TN12LOG board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side Loopbacked services GE GE GE GE GE GE GE GE
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LOG, refer to Table 14-131. Table 14-131 LOG Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
457
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
GE, GE(GFP-T) Default: GE
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
FEC Working State
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
458
Field FEC Mode
Description The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
459
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only TN12LOG supports this parameter.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
14.12.12 Specifications of the LOG

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
460
Bo ard
TN 11L OG
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
TN 12L OG
N/A
800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment in the Hardware Description.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
461

NOTE
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1270 to 1355 PIN 1500 to 1580
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
462
Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km -3 1000 BASEZX-80 km -3
dBm
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
PIN 1270 to 1620
APD 1270 to 1620
463
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km -28 -9 -27
dBm dBm dB
-19 -3 -27

Table 14-134 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN NRZ 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
Line code format
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
464
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
dBm dBm dB
-16 0 -27
-16 0 -27
Table 14-135 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN NRZ 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD NRZ 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD ODB 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN DRZ 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN NRZ
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width dBm 2 2 2 2 2
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
465
Unit
Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD 35 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD 35 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN 35 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN 35
Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
dB
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD APD PIN PIN
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Line code format

Unit
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm
2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant 0.3 35 800
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
467
Unit
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
468
Item Optical Module Type Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 1530 to 1565 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 1530 to 1565
nm
1290 to 1330
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight:
TN11LOG: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN12LOG: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LO G WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 40 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 45
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD
43
48
43.5 55.0 37.0
48.5 60.5 41.44
TN1 2LO G
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
38.0 41.61 43.04
42.44 46.6 48.0
14.13 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board

The available functional versions of the LOM board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LOM TN12 LOM OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y

l Function: The TN11LOM supports AFEC, and the TN12LOM supports AFEC-2. Boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other. For details, see 14.13.3 Functions and Features. Only the TN12LOM supports 3G-SDI, InfiniBand 2.5G and InfiniBand 5G. For details, see 14.13.3 Functions and Features. l Appearance: The TN11LOM and TN12LOM versions use different front panels. For details, see 14.13.5 Front Panel. l Specification: For the specification of each version, see 14.13.11 Specifications of the LOM.
Original Board TN11LOM Substitute Board TN12LOM Substitution Rules The TN12LOM can be created as TN11LOM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOM functions as the TN11LOM.
TN12LOM
None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
471
14.13.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOM board multiplexes a maximum of eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G, or two 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G signals into one channel of OTU2 signals. It also implements conversion between these signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. The LOM board also supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. For the position of the LOM board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-108 and Figure 14-109. Figure 14-108 Position of the TN11LOM board in the WDM system
ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ 1 GE/ FC100/ FC200/ FC400/ FICON/ 8 FICON Express/ FICON4G Client side MUX LOM G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side ISC 1G/ ISC 2G/ GE/ 1 FC100/ FC200/ FC400/ FICON/ 8 FICON Express/ FICON4G Client side
DMUX G.694.1 LOM
Figure 14-109 Position of the TN12LOM board in the WDM system

GE ISC 1G ISC 2G FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON FICON4G FICON Express InfiniBand 2.5G InfiniBand 5G 3G-SDI
1 LOM 8 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX G.694.1 LO M
DMUX
MUX
GE ISC 1G ISC 2G FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON FICON4G FICON Express InfiniBand 2.5G InfiniBand 5G 3G-SDI
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available. For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

The LOM board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-139.
Table 14-139 Functions and features of the LOM board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Multiplexes eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G services, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G services, or two 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G services into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a DWDM standard wavelength that complies with ITU-T Recommendation G. 694.1. It can also perform the reverse process. l Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should be equal to or less than 5 Gbit/s, respectively. l The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the data width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For FC100/FC200/FC400 services, the maximum transmission distance of the WDM side is 3000 km. Client-side service type GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s ISC 1G: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s ISC 2G: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s InfiniBand 2.5G: SAN service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s InfiniBand 5G: SAN service at a rate of 5 Gbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s
NOTE The LOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. Only the TN12LOM supports InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G and 3G-SDI.
OTN function
l Supports the mapping of up to eight channels of client-side signals into OTU2/OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU2. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
473
Function and Feature ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is GE. TN11LOM: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN12LOM: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Supported by the TN12LOM Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
474
Function and Feature XFP/eSFP
Description TN11LOM/TN12LOM: Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. TN12LOM: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
IEEE 802.3z NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol IBM Private Protocol
NOTE Only the TN12LOM supports IBM Private Protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
475

The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-110 and Figure 14-111 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
476
Figure 14-110 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LOM board
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Client side
O/E
FC encapsulation and mapping module FICON encapsulation and mapping module
E/O
WDM side
OUT
E/O
O/E
IN
ISC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
477
Figure 14-111 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LOM board
GE encapsulation and mapping module
Client side
FC encapsulation and mapping module
WDM side
O/E
FICON encapsulation and mapping module ISC encapsulation and mapping module InfiniBand encapsulation and mapping module
E/O
OUT
E/O
O/E
IN
Any encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module
Control Memory
CPU
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse
Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LOM board can access the following signals: l l l l l l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
GE optical signals GE electrical signals ISC 1G optical signals ISC 2G optical signals FC100 optical signals FC200 optical signals FC400 optical signals FICON optical signals FICON Express optical signals FICON4G optical signals
l l l
InfiniBand 2.5G optical signals InfiniBand 5G optical signals 3G-SDI optical signals
NOTE
Only the TN12LOM supports 3G-SDI, InfiniBand 2.5G, and InfiniBand 5G service.
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express,ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available. For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.
In the signal flow of the LOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOM to the WDM side of the LOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels (GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G /InfiniBand 2.5GI service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service signals) of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs eight channels (GE/ FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/ InfiniBand 2.5G service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service signals) of the electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels (GE/FC100/ FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (InfiniBand 2.5G/FC200/FICON Express/ ISC 2G service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service signals) of the electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ ISC 1G optical signals or four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G /InfiniBand 2.5G optical signals or two channels of 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight or four or two channels of the internal electrical signals to the corresponding optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the GE encapsulation and mapping module, ISC encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, FICON encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. ISC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of ISC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors ISC performance. FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FC performance. FICON encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FICON signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FICON performance. OTN processing module
Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board.

Figure 14-112 and Figure 14-113 show the front panel of the LOM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
481
Figure 14-112 Front panel of the TN11LOM board
LOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK/ACT1 LINK/ACT2 LINK/ACT3 LINK/ACT4 LINK/ACT5 LINK/ACT6 LINK/ACT7 LINK/ACT8
LOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
482
Figure 14-113 Front panel of the TN12LOM board

LOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LOM
Indicators
There are twelve indicators on the front panel. l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn) - green
NOTE
Only the TN11LOM board has the data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
483
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board. Table 14-140 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-140 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOM board Interface INa Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used. RX1-RX8 LC Receives service signals from the client-side equipment. Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used. a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOM.
OUTa
LC
TX1-TX8
LC
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all available. For FICON Express,ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G, Any(622M-4G) and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/ RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available. For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available. The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s. It is recommended to RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
484
14.13.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11LOM board. One slot houses one TN12LOM board. Table 14-141 and Table 14-142 show the valid slots for the LOM board. Table 14-141 Valid slots for the TN11LOM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35 IU1-IU16 IU3-IU5
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11LOM board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 3800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two occupied slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the TN11LOM board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU3.
Table 14-142 Valid slots for TN12LOM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
14.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM



Table 14-143 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-143 Mapping between the physical ports on the LOM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOTE
Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FC100 FC200 FC400 FICON FICON4G FICON Express Number of Timeslots 1 1 2 4 1 4 2
486
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Service Type ISC 1G ISC 2G 3G-SDI InfiniBand 2.5G InfiniBand 5G
Number of Timeslots 1 2 4 2 4
14.13.9 LOM loopback

Table 14-144 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LOM boards. Table 14-144 Loopbacks supported by LOM boards Board TN11L OM/ TN12L OM Loopbac k Type Client-side outloop Client-side inloop WDMside inloop WDMside outloop Description See Figure 14-114. See Figure 14-115. See Figure 14-116. See Figure 14-117.
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-114, eight services are received on the client side. Any N of the services can be loopbacked to the client side while the remaining services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
487
Figure 14-114 Client-side outloop on the TN11LOM/TN12LOM board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side
ANY ANY ANY ANY ANY ANY ANY ANY
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-115, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight services. Any N of the services can be loopbacked to the WDM side while the remaining services can be directly passed through.
Figure 14-115 Client-side inloop on the TN11LOM/TN12LOM board
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-116, eight services received on the client side are mapped into one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
488
Figure 14-116 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LOM/TN12LOM board
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
WDM-side Loopbacked services
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-117, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked at the ODU2 loopback point, mapped into one OTU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is regenerated, and then transmitted back to the WDM side.
Figure 14-117 WDM-side outloop on the TN11LOM/TN12LOM board
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LOM, refer to Table 14-145.
Table 14-145 LOM Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
l TN11LOM: None, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, FICON4G, GE, GE (GFP-T), ISC 1G, ISC 2G l TN12LOM: None, Any, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FICON, FICON Express, FICON4G, GE, GE (GFP-T), ISC 1G, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G, 3G-SDI Default: None
622 - 5000 Default: 622
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12LOM.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
490
Field Laser Status
Value Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. In different internal working mode, the board can work with the FC storage equipment of different vendors. l Normal mode: In this mode, the board can work with the mainstream FC switch storage equipment (such as the Brocade switch). Such equipment inserts the 10B_ERR alarm after detecting a link failure. l Special mode: In this mode, the board can work with the switch storage equipment (such as the McData switch) that uses special processing standard. Such equipment inserts the NOS alarm after detecting a link failure.
LPT Enabled
FC Internal Working Mode
Normal Mode, Special Mode Default: Normal Mode
OFC Enabled
The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.
NOTE l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled after the OFC function is enabled. l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection. l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G. Only TN11LOM supports this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
491
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Mode
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
492
Field FC Distance Extension
Description A flow control mechanism is applied between FC service client-side equipment and between two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching function of FC services, which ensures that the bandwidth does not decrease during long haul transmission of FC services. See D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board.
NOTE Only TN11LOM supports this parameter.
PRBS Test Status
See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. NULL Mapping Status Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning
NOTE Only TN12LOM supports this parameter.
14.13.11 Specifications of the LOM

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
493
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km FC400/FICON4G Module (Multimode) FC400/FICON4G Module (Single mode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module (Multimode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module (Single mode) 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
TN 11L OM
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN
TN 12L OM
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
NOTE
NOTE

NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
494
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
495
Table 14-147 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC services Item Optical Module Type Unit Value FC400/ FICON4G Module (Multimode ) FC400/ FICON4G Module (Single mode) FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module (Multimode) NRZ 0.5 FC100/ FC200/ FICON/ FICON Express Module (Single mode) NRZ 2
km
NRZ 0.3
NRZ 10
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Eye pattern mask nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 830 to 860 1266 to 1360
dBm
-1
-2
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9
-8
-9.5
-10
Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2) parameter template
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1260 to 1600 PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1580
dBm dBm
-14 0
-16 0
-17 0
-18 0
dB
-12
-12
-12
-27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
496
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
497

Line code format
NRZ
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27 -16 0 -27 PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
498
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm 2 2 2 2 2
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
dB
35
35
35
35
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD APD PIN PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
499
Unit
Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavele ngthNRZAPD -26 4800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthODBAPD -26 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-DRZPIN -16 800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZPIN -16
dBm
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27

Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz 2 -3 9 192.10 to 196.05 10 G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
500
Unit
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Operating frequency range Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
501
Unit
dB ps/nm
35 800
TN11LOM: l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
TN12LOM: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.1 kg (2.42 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LO M WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 92.7 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 101.7
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
502
Boar d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 92.9
Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 101.9
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD TN1 2LO M 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
93.4 98.2 61.8
102.7 108.0 69.2
62.8 64.8 66.7
70.2 72.6 75.0
NOTE When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases by another 2 W.
14.14 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board

The available functional version of the LQG board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LQG OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
503
14.14.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQG board implements the conversion between four channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LQG board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-118. Figure 14-118 Position of the LQG board in the WDM system
1 GE 4 Client side WDMside LQG G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LQG 4 Client side 1 GE

The LQG board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connect at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-153. Table 14-153 Functions and features of the LQG board Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes four channels of GE service optical signals into one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals and converts them to a DWDM standard wavelength that complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane, and supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
504
Description l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side service signals into OTU5G signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU5G. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU5G.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Supported Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
505
Function and Feature eSFP
Description Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
IEEE 802.3z

The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-119 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
506
Figure 14-119 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board
Backplane (service corss-connection) Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
GE WDM side
O/E
GE OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module
E/O
OUT
E/O
Client-side
O/E WDM-side optical module
IN
optical module
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the LQG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQG to the WDM side of the LQG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G signals. The OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU5G/FEC5G framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of GE signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU5G/ FEC5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU5G/FEC5G signals, processes overheads in OTU5G/FEC5G signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.14.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board.

Figure 14-120 shows the front panel of the LQG board. Figure 14-120 Front panel of the LQG board
LQG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 OUT IN
LQG
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
509
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board. Table 14-154 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-154 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQG board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.14.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LQG board.
Valid Slots
Table 14-155 shows the valid slots for the LQG board. Table 14-155 Valid slots for the LQG board Product OptiX OSN 6800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

510
Product OptiX OSN 3800
Valid Slots IU2-IU5
14.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG



Table 14-156 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-156 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4 5 6
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, LP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-121 shows the application model of the LQG board. Table 14-157 describes the meaning of each port.
Figure 14-121 Port diagram of the LQG board

Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2 201(LP/LP)-3 201(LP/LP)-4 Cross-connect module 201(LP/LP)-1 1(IN/OUT)-1 WDM side
Table 14-157 Meaning of NM port of the LQG board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 LP IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LQG board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and in Figure 14-122. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
3
in Figure 14-122.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the LQG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
4
in Figure 14-122.
512

NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LQG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LQG board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown
5
in Figure 14-122.
The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Figure 14-122 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG board

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1
Other board
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 3
5 4 2 1
WDM side
LQG
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board The WDM side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of LQG, refer to Table 14-158.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
513
Table 14-158 LQG Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. Click D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. Click D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
GE, GE(GFP-T) Default: GE
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. Click D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. Click D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. Click D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
514
Field LPT Enabled
Description The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). Click D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. Click D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to query the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. Click D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. Click D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. Click D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.
FEC Working State
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
515
Field Ethernet Working Mode
Value Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Default: 1000M FullDuplex
Description The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. Click D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Click D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. Click D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
14.14.11 Specifications of the LQG

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
516
Bo ard
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km
TN 11L QG
3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD
NOTE

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
517
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km -11.5 1000 BASELX-40 km -4.5 1000 BASEZX-80 km -2
dBm
-9.5
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm dBm 1471 to 1611 5 1471 to 1611 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
518
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
dBm dB nm nm dB -
0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant

Table 14-161 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD NRZ 3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD NRZ
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
519
Unit
Value 3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 2 -3 10
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
2 -2 10 192.10 to 196.00 10 0.3 35 3400
0.3 35 3400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 1200 to 1650 -25 -9 -27 -25 -9 -27 APD

Table 14-162 Specifications of CWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km NRZ 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km NRZ
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
520
Unit
Value 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km 70
Target distance
km
50
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB ps/nm 1471 to 1611 5 2 5 6.5 1.0 30 1000 1471 to 1611 5 2 5 6.5 1.0 30 1400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1450 to 1620 -18 0 -27 APD 1450 to 1620 -28 -9 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
521
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module 3400 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 3400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 28.4 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 32
TN11LQG
31.0
34.4
23.18
26
14.15 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board

The available functional version of the LQM board is TN13.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN13 LQM OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Type
The system provides two types of the LQM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 14-163 lists the types of the LQM.
Table 14-163 LQM type description Board LQM Type Single transmitting and single receiving board Dual-fed selective receiving board Description The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1. The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/ OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.
NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of the LQM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
14.15.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM converts between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the LQM in the WDM system, see Figure 14-123 and Figure 14-124. Figure 14-123 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
1 MUX 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LQM G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX 4 Client side WDM side WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1/ LQM G.694.2
4 Client side
Figure 14-124 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/ G.694.2 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s LQM DMUX MUX 4 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side MUX DMUX 4 LQM DMUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
523
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

The main functions and features supported by the LQM are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-164. Table 14-164 Functions and features of the LQM Function and Feature Basic function Description l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. l With this board, many services, such as data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application scenario. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
524
Function and Feature Crossconnect capabilities
Description OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU1. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU1.
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
525
Function and Feature Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Description Supported Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
eSFP
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
526
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
527

The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-126 and Figure 14-125 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
528
Figure 14-125 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side O/E

Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module
E/O
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2
E/O
O/E
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
529
Figure 14-126 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
Client side
100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s WDM side
O/E
Service encapsulation and mapping module CrossOTN processing connect module module
E/O
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2
E/O
O/E
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.15.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single receiving function on the WDM side.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the electrical signals between the LQM and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The signaling module
also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.15.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board.

Figure 14-127 shows the front panel of the LQM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
532
Figure 14-127 Front panel of the LQM board
LQM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LQM
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board. Table 14-165 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
533
Table 14-165 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.15.6 Valid Slots

The LQM occupies one slot. Table 14-166 shows the valid slots for the LQM board. Table 14-166 Valid slots for the LQM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
14.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.
For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.


Table 14-167 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-167 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Port Number on the NMS 1 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-128 shows the application model of the LQM board. Table 14-168 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-128 Port diagram of the LQM
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 WDM-side optical module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
535
Table 14-168 Meaning of NM port of the LQM Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Configuration Principle of Timeslots : l l l l l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. For each LQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1 and HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQM board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12
536
Service Type HD-SDI DVB-ASI SDI ESCON FDDI
Number of Timeslots 11 2 3 2 1

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQM board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 14-129. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-129. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQM board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-129. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-129. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
l l
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 14.15.8 Physical and Logical Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
537
Figure 14-129 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM

Client side
Other board
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4
WDM side
Client side
5 4 2 1
WDM side
LQM
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQM board The WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 14-129.

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For the parameters of the LQM, refer to Table 14-169. Table 14-169 LQM Parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
538
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE, GE(GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON Express, HD-SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI Default: None
Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) Laser Status
100 - 2200 Default: 0
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to set the service mode of the board.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
539
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to query the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
540
Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
14.15.11 Specifications of the LQM

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
541
Bo ard
WDM-Side WDM-Side Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Module N/A 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
TN 13L QM
NOTE

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NRZ MLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
NRZ SLM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
542
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
km
15
40
80
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
543
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
dBm
-3
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
544
Unit
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
545
Unit
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
546
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
547

Table 14-175 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
548
Unit
km
120
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
549
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 32.6 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 35.9
TN13LQM
14.16 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving

The available functional versions of the LQMD board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LQM D TN12 LQM D OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y

l Function: The TN12LQMD board supports access OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services, whereas the TN11LQMD board does not support. For details, see 14.16.3 Functions and Features. The TN11LQMD board supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications, whereas the TN12LQMD board supports DWDM specifications. For details, see 14.16.3 Functions and Features. The TN11LQMD supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. The TN12LQMD supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. For details, see 14.16.3 Functions and Features. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 14.16.11 Specifications of the LQMD.
Original Board TN11LQM D Substitute Board TN12LQM D Substitution Rules The TN12LQMD can be created as TN11LQMD on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMD functions as the TN11LQMD.
NOTE A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power are different.
TN12LQM D
None
14.16.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMD board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LQMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-130. Figure 14-130 Position of the LQMD board in the WDM system
MUX DMUX
1 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s 4
DMUX MUX DMUX MUX
1 LQMD G.694.1/ G.694.2 G.694.1/ LQMD G.694.2 DMUX 4 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s
MUX
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE

The LQMD board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-176.
Table 14-176 Functions and features of the LQMD board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports OTU1, HD-SDI, SDI and FDDI services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
552
Description OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/ protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side service signals into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU1. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU1.
TN11LQMD: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. TN12LQMD: Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. TN11LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. TN12LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
553
Description The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. TN11LQMD: not supported TN12LQMD: supported
Test frame
Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
554
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
555

The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-132 and Figure 14-131 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
556
Figure 14-131 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side O/E

E/O
Splitter
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2
E/O
O/E
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
557
Figure 14-132 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 6800/ OptiX OSN 3800)
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s WDM side
O/E
Service encapsulation and mapping module OTN Crossprocessing connect module module
E/O
Splitter
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2
E/O
O/E
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LQMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMD to the WDM side of the LQMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, cross-connection and service decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 8800: not applicable. OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.16.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board.

Figure 14-133 shows the front panel of the LQMD board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
560
Figure 14-133 Front panel of the LQMD board
LQMD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LQMD
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board. Table 14-177 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-177 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMD board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.16.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LQMD board. Table 14-178 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMD board. Table 14-178 Valid slots for TN11LQMD board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Table 14-179 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMD board. Table 14-179 Valid slots for TN12LQMD board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

562
14.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD

The characteristic code for the LQMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 14-180. Table 14-180 Characteristic code for the LQMD board Code First four digits Meaning Frequency of the forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.
Last four digits
Frequency of the forth optical signal
For example, the characteristic code for the LQMD board is 92109210. "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz.


Table 14-181 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-181 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Number on the NMS 1 2
563
Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4
Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-134 shows the application model of the LQMD board. Table 14-182 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 14-134 Port diagram of the LQMD board
Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 WDM-side optical module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 WDM side 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 2(IN2/OUT2)-1
NOTE
TN11LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.
Table 14-182 Meaning of NM port of the LQMD board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
564
Configuration Principle of Timeslots : l l l l l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end. For each LQMD board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMD board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HD-SDI DVB-ASI SDI ESCON FDDI Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQMD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000:
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMD board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 14-135. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-135. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMD board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-135. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMD board and the ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services), as shown by
5
in Figure 14-135.
l l
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/ OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 14.16.8 Physical and Logical Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
566
Figure 14-135 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD board

Client side
Other board
WDM side
Client side
5 4 2 1
WDM side
LQMD
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMD board The WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by
and
in Figure 14-135.

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LQMD, refer to Table 14-183. Table 14-183 LQMD parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
567
NOTE Only the TN12LQMD supports Any, SDI, FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
None, Any, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None
100 - 2200 Default: 0
NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off Automatic Laser Shutdown Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
568
Field Service Mode
Value Client Mode, OTN Mode Default: Client Mode
Description The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. FEC Working State Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
l C: 1/1529.16/196.05 0 to 80/1560.61/192.1 00 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.1 70 to 18/1611.00/188.7 80 Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
569
Field Ethernet Working Mode
Value Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Default: 1000M FullDuplex
Description The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
14.16.11 Specifications of the LQMD

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
570
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
TN 11L QM D
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
TN 12L QM D
N/A
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
N/A
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
571

NOTE

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
572
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
dB
NA
30
30
30
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
NOTE
Table 14-185 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ
NRZ
573
Unit
km
0.5
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
574

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm PIN 1270 to 1620 -19 -3 APD 1270 to 1620 -28 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
575
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km -27
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
576
Unit

Table 14-188 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels Tunable) NRZ
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation dBm dBm dB THz GHz -4 -8 10 -4 -8 10 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
577
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels Tunable) 0.5 35
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
nm dB
0.2 35
0.2 35
0.5 30
0.5 30
0.2 35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -18 0 -27 -28 -9 -27 -28 -9 -27 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -27
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
578
Unit
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm -
2 0.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
579
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 57.1 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 65.7
TN11 LQM D
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
61.1
67.2
TN12 LQM D
31.1
34.3
14.17 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

The available functional versions of the LQMS board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LQM S
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 Y
580
Boar d TN12 LQM S
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 Y

l Function: The TN11LQMS board does not support access OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services, whereas the TN12LQMS board supports. For details, see 14.17.3 Functions and Features. The TN11LQMS board supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications, whereas the TN12LQMS board supports DWDM specifications. For details, see 14.17.3 Functions and Features. The TN12LQMS supports the grooming of ODU1 signal, whereas the TN11LQMS does not support. l Specification: For the specification of each version, see 14.17.11 Specifications of the LQMS.
Original Board TN11LQM S Substitute Board TN12LQM S Substitution Rules The TN12LQMS can be created as TN11LQMS on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMS functions as the TN11LQMS.
TN12LQM S
None
14.17.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMS board converts between signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations or between ODU1 signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
581
Application Scenario 1 for the TN11LQMS and TN12LQMS: Conversion Between Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T RecommendationCompliant WDM Signals
Figure 14-136 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (LQM Mode)
1 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s 4 Client side WDM side LQMS G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1/ LQMS G.694.2 4 WDM side Client side 1 100Mbit/s -2.5Gbit/s
NOTE
Application Scenario 2 for the TN12LQMS: Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals
Figure 14-137 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (NS1 Mode)
MUX TOM LQMS G.694.1 DMUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 LQMS TOM
NOTE
Scenario 2 is supported on the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800.

The LQMS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-190.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
582
Table 14-190 Functions and features of the LQMS board Function and Feature Basic function Description
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength. l Maps ODU1 signal into OTU1 optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
583
Description
OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11LQMS: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. l TN12LQMS: Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800 l TN11LQMS: Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN12LQMS: Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side service signals into one channel of OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM functions for OTU1. l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU1.
TN11LQMS: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications. TN12LQMS: Supports the DWDM specification. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
584
Function and Feature ESC function PRBS function
Description
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. TN11LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. TN12LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. TN11LQMS: not supported TN12LQMS: supported
Test frame
Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Not supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. l Supports the tributary SNCP protection (NS1 Mode). l Supports the ODUk SNCP (NS1 Mode).
NOTE OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
585
Description
Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
586
Description
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
587
Description
ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.694.1 ITU-T G.694.2

The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-138, Figure 14-139 and Figure 14-140 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
588
Figure 14-138 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side O/E

E/O
OUT
E/O
O/E
IN
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
589
Figure 14-139 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LQMS and TN12 LQMS board (LQM mode) (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s WDM side
O/E
Service OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module
E/O
OUT
E/O
O/E
IN
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.17.3 Functions and Features. TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications only.
In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the WDM side of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation
and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces. Figure 14-140 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 mode)(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
ODU1 Backplane(service cross-connection) WDM side E/O Crossconnect module OTN processing module OUT
IN
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
591
Signal Flow (NS1 Mode)

In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the backplane of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 8800: NA. OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.17.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board.

Figure 14-141 shows the front panel of the LQMS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
593
Figure 14-141 Front panel of the LQMS board
LQMS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LQMS
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board. Table 14-191 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-191 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMS board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

14.17.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LQMS board. Table 14-192 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMS board. Table 14-192 Valid slots for TN11LQMS board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Table 14-193 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMS board. Table 14-193 Valid slots for TN12LQMS board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

595
14.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS



Table 14-194 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-194 Mapping between the physical ports on the LQMS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4 5 6
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as source or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 14-142 and Figure 14-143 show the application model of the LQMS board. Table 14-195 describes the meaning of each port.
Figure 14-142 Port diagram of the TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS board (LQM Mode)

Client side 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-2 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-3 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4 Cross-connect module Service processing module WDM-side optical module 201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-1 WDM side
NOTE
TN11LQMS: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12LQMS (LQM Mode): The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-4.
Figure 14-143 Port diagram of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 Mode)

WDM side 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
Table 14-195 Meaning of NM port of the LQMS board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP ODU1LP IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical port. These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Configuration Principle of Timeslots : l l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l l l
For each LQMS board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMS board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HD-SDI DVB-ASI SDI ESCON FDDI Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the LQMS board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are LQM Mode and NS1 Mode.
NOTE
The TN11LQMS board does not require the configuration of the board mode. The electrical cross-connect services of the TN11LQMS are created in the same way as the electrical cross-connect services of the TN12LQMS in the LQM mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
598
LQM Mode: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQMS board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 14-144. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 14-144. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the LQMS board, as shown by 4 in Figure 14-144. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 5 in Figure 14-144. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
l l
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000. According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots. For details, see 14.17.8 Physical and Logical Ports.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
599
Figure 14-144 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board

Client side
Other board
WDM side
Client side
5 4 2 1
WDM side
LQMS
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQMS board The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards 1 2 3 4 5
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by
and
in Figure 14-144.
NS1 Mode (Supported only by the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800): l l Create the cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP port of other boards shown in Figure 14-145. The four paths of the ODU1LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
600
Figure 14-145 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board

Client side
Other board
WDM side
WDM side
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
LQMS
The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LQMS, refer to Table 14-196. Table 14-196 LQMS parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
601
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field Service Type
Value None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None
NOTE Only the TN12LQMS supports Any, SDI, FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
100 - 2200 Default: 0
NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off Automatic Laser Shutdown Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
602
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
603
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.
NOTE This parameter is only available for TN12LQMS.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
Board Mode
LQM Mode, NS1 Mode Default: LQM Mode
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
14.17.11 Specifications of the LQMS

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
604
Bo ard
TN 11L QM S
TN 12L QM S
N/A
N/A
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
605

NOTE

NOTE
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
606
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
dB
NA
30
30
30
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
NOTE
Table 14-198 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ
NRZ
607
Unit
km
0.5
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
608

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
609
Unit
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
610
Unit

Table 14-201 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable) NRZ
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation dBm dBm dB THz GHz -1 -5 10 -1 -5 10 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 10 3 -2 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
611
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable) 0.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1200 to 1650 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -18 0 -28 -9 -28 -9 -28 -9
dBm dBm
-18 0
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
612
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
dBm dBm dB nm nm nm dB ps/nm -
5 2.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1 30 1600 G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
613
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LQ MS WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 56.3 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 64.5
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
60.4
66.4
TN1 2LQ MS
29
33.3
14.18 LSQ
LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

Only one functional version of the LSQ board is available, that is, TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LSQ OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
614
14.18.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSQ board converts between one channel of STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations. For the position of the LSQ board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-146. Figure 14-146 Position of the LSQ board in the WDM system
MUX STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3 LSQ G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LSQ STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3
Client side
WDM side
Client side

The LSQ board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-203. Table 14-203 Functions and features of the LSQ board Function and Feature Basic function Description Maps one STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signal into one OTU3 optical signal and converts the signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM wavelength. It also performs the reverse process and compensates for the dispersion in the signals accessed on the WDM side. STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Maps a maximum of one channel of client-side service signals into OTU3 signals. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3. WDM specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Client-side service type OTN function
Supports DWDM specifications.
615
Function and Feature Tunable wavelength function
Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function PRBS function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function of LSQ on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.
Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Loopback
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
616
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic

The LSQ board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-147 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
617
Figure 14-147 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ board
Client side
RX SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
WDM side E/O

OTN processing module OUT
O/E
TX
E/O
Client-side OTN processing module Signal processing module
O/E
IN

SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSQ board can access the following optical signals: l l l STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals OTU3 optical signals
In the signal flow of the LSQ board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSQ to the WDM side of the LSQ, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3 electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
618
The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU3 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU3 signals, processes overheads in OTU3 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.18.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board.

Figure 14-148 shows the front panel of the LSQ board. Figure 14-148 Front panel of the LSQ board
LSQ
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX OUT IN
LSQ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
620
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board. Table 14-204 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-204 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSQ board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX RX
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.18.6 Valid Slots

Two slots houses one LSQ board. Table 14-205 shows the valid slots for the LSQ board. Table 14-205 Valid slots for the LSQ board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30IU36
621
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
The rear connector of the LSQ is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the LSQ board, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is IU2.
14.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LSQ



Table 14-206 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-206 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSQ board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX/RX Port Number on the NMS 1 3
NOTE
14.18.9 LSQ Loopbacks

Table 14-207 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LSQ boards.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
622
Table 14-207 Loopbacks supported by LSQ boards Board Type of Received Service STM-256 or OC-768 Loopback Type Description
TN11LS Q
Client-side outloop Client-side inloop WDM-side outloop WDM-side inloop
See Figure 14-149. See Figure 14-150.
OTU3
Client-side outloop WDM-side inloop Client-side inloop WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-153.
Loopbacks on the TN11LSQ Board

When the TN11LSQ board receives STM-256 or OC-768 services, client-side inloop are similar to WDM-side outloop. l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-149, one STM-256 or OC-768 service received on the client side is looped back to the client side directly. Figure 14-149 Client-side outloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
Client-side Loopbacked service
WDM-side
Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop As shown inFigure 14-150, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
623
Figure 14-150 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
WDM-side inloop As shown inFigure 14-151, one STM-256/OC-768 service received on the client side is converted into one ODU3 service, and then is looped back to the client side.
Figure 14-151 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
When the TN11LSQ board receives OTU3 services, the client-side outloop are similar to the WDM-side inloop and the client-side inloop are similar to the WDM-side outloop. l Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-152, one OTU3 service received on the client side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the client side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
624
Figure 14-152 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-153, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 loopback point. Figure 14-153 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN11LSQ board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSQ, refer to Table 14-208. Table 14-208 LSQ parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
625
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Type
None, OC-768, OTU-3, STM-256 Default: STM-256
Laser Status
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC Default: AFEC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
626
Field Receive Wavelength
Value l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /
Description Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows: l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only support C band.
Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
627
Field Planned Band Type
Value C, CWDM Default: C
Description The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
14.18.11 Specifications of the LSQ

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
628
Bo ard
Client-Side Fixed Optical Module
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
TN 11L SQ
40G Transponder
800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN
NOTE

Table 14-209 Specifications of client-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Line code format Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1290 to 1570 -6 3 -27 nm dBm dBm dB dB ps/nm 1530 to 1565 3 0 8.2 35 40 Unit Value 40G Transponder NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
629

Table 14-210 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN ODB 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN DQPSK
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 8.2 2.5 0.6 NA 35 -800 to 800 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 -800 to 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27 PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
630
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 75.0 82.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 82.0 89.0
TN11LS Q
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN
14.19 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

The available functional versions of the LSX board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LSX TN12 LSX TN13 LSX OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y Y

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function:
The TN11LSX/TN12LSX supports AFEC, and the TN13LSX supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features. The TN12LSX board and the TN13LSX board support access FC1200 service, whereas the TN11LSX board does not. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features. The TN13LSX board supports the OTU2e service, whereas the TN11LSX and TN12LSX board does not. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features. The TN12LSX board and the TN13LSX board support the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side, whereas the TN11LSX board does not. The TN13LSX board supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the WDM side, whereas the TN11LSX board and the TN12LSX board do not. For details, see 14.19.3 Functions and Features. When client-side services are 10GE LAN services: TN11LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G). TN12LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G). TN13LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G) or MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G). For more information, see 14.19.10 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS. l Specification: For the specification of each version, see 14.19.11 Specifications of the LSX.
Original Board TN11LSX Substitute Board TN12LSX Substitution Rules The TN12LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LSX functions as the TN11LSX.
TN13LSX
The TN13LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN11LSX.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
632
Original Board TN12LSX
Substitute Board TN13LSX
Substitution Rules The TN13LSX can be created as TN12LSX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the TN12LSX.
TN13LSX
None
14.19.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSX board maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LSX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-154. Figure 14-154 Position of the LSX board in the WDM system
10GE LAN / MUX 10GE WAN / STM-64/ LSX G.694.1 OC-192/ OTU2/ DMUX OTU2e/ FC1200 Client side WDM side DMUX 10GE LAN / 10GE WAN / STM-64/ G.694.1 LSX OC-192/ OTU2/ MUX OTU2e/ FC1200 WDM side Client side

The LSX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-211.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
633
Table 14-211 Functions and features of the LSX board Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Description
Maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s
NOTE The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64/OC-192 service is the same. Therefore, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64/OC-192 service on the U2000. The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX and TN13LSX. When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the TN13LSX board does not support FC1200. The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the mapping of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e into OTU2/OTU2e signals, and the transparence mapping of 10GE LAN into OTU2e signals. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is only supported when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
634
Function and Feature LPT function FEC encoding
Description
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. TN11LSX/TN12LSX: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN13LSX: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported by the TN12LSX and TN13LSX Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Test frame Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
XFP
TN12LSX/TN13LSX: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side. TN13LSX: Supports 10 Gbit/s tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
635
Description
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH)

The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 14-155 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX. Figure 14-156 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX. Figure 14-155 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX board
Client side
RX O/E SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN processing module TX E/O Client-side optical module
WDM side
E/O
OUT
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module
IN
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
637
Figure 14-156 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX board
Client side
WDM side E/O OTN processing module

OUT
O/E
Client-side OTN processing module 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
TX
E/O
O/E
IN
FC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSX board can access the following optical signals: TN11LSX: l l l l l l l l l l l OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals FC1200 optical signals
TN12LSX:
TN13LSX:
l l l l l l l
OC-192 optical signals STM-64 optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals FC1200 optical signals
In the signal flow of the LSX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSX to the WDM side of the LSX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX optical interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/ OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2/ OTU2e electrical signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/ O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/ OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.19.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the LSX front panel.

Figure 14-157 shows the LSX front panel.
Figure 14-157 Front panel of the LSX board
LSX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX OUT IN
LSX
Indicators
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the LSX front panel. Table 14-212 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-212 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSX board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX RX
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.19.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LSX board.
Valid Slots
Table 14-213 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSX board. Table 14-213 Valid slots for the TN11LSX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 14-214 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSX board. Table 14-214 Valid slots for the TN12LSX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
642
Table 14-215 shows the valid slots for the TN13LSX board. Table 14-215 Valid slots for the TN13LSX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
14.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX



Table 14-216 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-216 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX/RX Port Number on the NMS 1 3
NOTE
14.19.9 LSX Loopbacks

Table 14-217 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LSX boards.
Table 14-217 Loopbacks supported by LSX boards Board TN11LSX/ TN12LSX Loopback Type Client-side outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop Client-side inloop TN13LSX Client-side inloop WDM-side outloop Client-side outloop WDM-side inloop When non-OTN services are received, see Figure 14-161. When OTN services are received, see Figure 14-162. See Figure 14-160. See Figure 14-159. Description See Figure 14-158.
Loopbacks on the TN11LSX/TN12LSX Board

The implementation of client-side outloops is similar to the implementation of WDM-side inloops. The implementation of WDM-side outloops is similar to the implementation of clientside inloops. l Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-158, one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ FC1200 service received on the client side is converted into one ODU2 service, and then is loopbacked to the client side. Figure 14-158 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN11LSX/TN12LSX board
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/OTU2/FC1200
RX/TX
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
Client-side Loopbacked services
WDM-side
NOTE
Only the TN12LSX board supports FC1200 services.
WDM-side outloop and client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-159, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
644
Figure 14-159 WDM-side outloop and client-side inloop on the TN11LSX/TN12LSX board
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/OTU2/FC1200
RX/TX Client-side
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
NOTE
Only the TN12LSX board supports FC1200 services.
Loopbacks on the TN13LSX Board

The implementation of client-side inloops is similar to the implementation of WDM-side outloops. The implementation of client-side outloops is similar to the implementation of WDMside inloops. l Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-160, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 14-160 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN13LSX board
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC- ODU2 192/OTU2/FC1200
RX/TX Client-side
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when non-OTN services are received on the client side As shown in Figure 14-161, one 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC1200 service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side at the client-side port. Figure 14-161 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN13LSX board (1)
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/FC1200
RX/TX Client-side
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop when OTN services are received on the client side As shown in Figure 14-162, one OTU2/OTU2e service received on the client side is demapped into one ODU2/ODU2e service after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. The OTU2/OTU2e service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2/ ODU2e loopback point.
Figure 14-162 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN13LSX board (2)
OTU2/ OTU2e ODU2/ ODU2e OTU2/ OTU2e
RX/TX Client-side
IN/OUT WDM-side
Loopbacked services

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSX, refer to Table 14-218. Table 14-218 LSX parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE Only TN12LSX and TN13LSX support the FC-1200 service. Only TN 13LSX support the OTU-2v service.
Service Type
None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN,FC-1200, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2v, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
646
Field Port Mapping
Value l TN11LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l TN12LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G) l TN13LSX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Description The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
647
Value -
Description Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
PRBS Test Status
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
648
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field NULL Mapping Status
Description Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only TN13LSX supports this parameter.
14.19.11 Specifications of the LSX

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard ClientSide Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module
TN 11L SX
10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
N/A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
649
Bo ard
ClientSide Fixed Optical Module N/A
TN 12L SX
10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
N/A
TN 13L SX
N/A
10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
650

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2 signals. The specifications following completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192, STM-64, FC1200, 10GE LAN, or 10GE WAN signals. The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals. The specifications below apply to 10GE LAN signal. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed FC1200 signal.
dBm
-1
-1.3
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
651
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 30 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 30 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 30
dB
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
652
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
653

Line code format
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
654
Line code format
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
dB
35
35
35
35
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
655
Unit
dBm
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27

Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
656
Unit
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
657
Unit
dB ps/nm
35 800
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11LSX: 2.9 lb (1.3 kg) TN12LSX: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg) TN13LSX: 2.4 lb (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LS X WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 47.7 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 50.1
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD
47.9
50.9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
658
Boar d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 49.7 52.7 30.5
Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 52.7 55.7 36.6
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD TN1 2LS X 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD TN1 3LS X 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
30.7
36.8
32.5 35.5 29.4 29.5 27
39 42.6 32.8 33.9 30.4
28
31.4
14.20 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

The available functional versions of the LSXL board are TN11, TN12, .

Boar d TN11 LSXL TN12 LSXL
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N
OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y
OptiX OSN 3800 N N

l Function: The TN11LSXL board does not support the function of accessing OTU3 services, whereas the TN12LSXL board supports. For details, see 14.20.3 Functions and Features. l Appearance: The LSXL boards of TN11, TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 14.20.5 Front Panel. l Specification: For the specification of each version, see 14.20.11 Specifications of the LSXL.
The LSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.20.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations. For the position of the LSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-163. Figure 14-163 Position of the LSXL board in the WDM system
MUX STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3 LSXL G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 LSXL STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3
Client side
NOTE
WDM side
Client side
l Client-side service types of the TN11LSXL board are STM-256 and OC-768. l Client-side service types of the TN12LSXL board are STM-256, OC-768, and OTU3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
660

The LSXL board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-225. Table 14-225 Functions and features of the LSXL board Function and Feature Basic function Description Maps one STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signal into one OTU3 optical signal and converts the signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM wavelength. It also performs the reverse process and compensates for the dispersion in the signals accessed on the WDM side. STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s
NOTE Only TN12LSXL supports OTU3 services.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Maps a maximum of one channel of client-side service signals into OTU3 signals. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3.
Supports DWDM specifications. TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL:
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. TN11LSXL: not supported TN12LSXL: supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function of TN12LSXL on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.
LPT function
Not supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
661
Function and Feature FEC encoding
Description TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported by the TN12LSXL. Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
NOTE Only the TN12LSXL supports intra-board 1+1 protection.
TN11LSXL: Loopback
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Not supported
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
TN12LSXL: Loopback
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
662
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic

The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-164 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL. Figure 14-165 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
663
Figure 14-164 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL board
Client side
RX
WDM side O/E

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
E/O
OUT
TX
E/O
O/E
IN

SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
664
Figure 14-165 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL board
Client side
WDM side E/O

OTN processing module OUT
O/E
TX
E/O
Client-side OTN processing module Signal processing module
O/E
IN

SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSXL board can access the following optical signals: TN11LSXL: l l l l l STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals OTU3 optical signals
TN12LSXL:
In the signal flow of the LSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSXL to the WDM side of the LSXL, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU3 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for
encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/ AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3 electrical signals. The OTU3 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU3 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU3 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU3 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU3 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. OTN processing module
Frames OTU3 signals, processes overheads in OTU3 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.20.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board.

Figure 14-166, Figure 14-167 show the front panel of the LSXL board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
667
Figure 14-166 Front panel of the TN11LSXL board
LSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX
OUT IN
LSXL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
668
Figure 14-167 Front panel of the TN12LSXL board
LSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT
TX RX
IN
LSXL
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board. Table 14-226 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-226 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXL board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX RX
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.20.6 Valid Slots

Four slots house one TN11LSXL board. Three slots house one TN12LSXLboard. Table 14-227 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXL board. Table 14-227 Valid slots for the TN11LSXL board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU14
The rear connector of the TN11LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXL board, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 14-228 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXL board. Table 14-228 Valid slots for the TN12LSXL board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU3-IU8, IU13-IU18, IU21-IU26, IU29IU34, IU37-IU42, IU47-IU52, IU55-IU60, IU63-IU68
670
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU3-IU8, IU14-IU19, IU22-IU27, IU31IU36 IU3-IU17
The rear connector of the TN12LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN12LSXL board, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU3. The rear connector of the TN15LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN15LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the middle one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN15LSXL board, the slot number of the TN15LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU2.
14.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL



Table 14-229 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-229 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXL board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX/RX Port Number on the NMS 1 3
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
671
14.20.9 LSXL Loopbacks

Table 14-230 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LSXL boards. Table 14-230 Loopbacks supported by LSXL boards Board Type of Received Service STM-256 or OC-768 STM-256 or OC-768 Loopback Type Description
TN11LS XL TN12LS XL
WDM-side inloopterminal loopback WDM-side outloopfacility loopback Client-side inloop Client-side outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-168. See Figure 14-169. See Figure 14-170. See Figure 14-171.
See Figure 14-172. See Figure 14-173. See Figure 14-174.
OTU3
Client-side inloop Client-side outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop
See Figure 14-175.
Loopbacks on the TN11LSXL Board

The TN11LSXL board supports only STM-256 and OC-768 services and WDM-side inloop and WDM-side outloop. It does not support Client-side inloop or Client-side outloop. l WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-168, one STM-256 or OC-768 service received on the client side is converted into one ODU3 service, which is then mapped into one OTU3 service. The OTU3 service is looped back to the client side at the OTU3 loopback point. Figure 14-168 WDM-side inloop on the TN11LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
672
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-169, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is looped back to the WDM side directly.
Figure 14-169 WDM-side outloop on the TN11LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Loopbacks on the TN12LSXL Board

The TN12LSXL board supports STM-256, OC-768, and OTU3 services. The Client-side outloop are similar to the WDM-side inloop. l STM-256 or OC-768 Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-170, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is converted into one STM-256 or OC-768 service, which is then looped back to the WDM side. Figure 14-170 Client-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-171, one STM-256 or OC-768 service received on the client side is looped back to the client side directly.
Figure 14-171 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-172, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is looped back to the WDM side directly. Figure 14-172 WDM-side outloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
OTU3 Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-173, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is mapped into one OTU3 service, which is then looped back to the WDM side. Figure 14-173 Client-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
674
Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-174, one OTU3 service received on the client side is looped back to the client side directly. Figure 14-174 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-175, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is looped back to the WDM side directly. Figure 14-175 WDM-side outloop on the TN12LSXL board
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LSXL, refer to Table 14-231. Table 14-231 LSXL parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value -
Description Displays the position of the optical interface.

675
Field Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status
Description Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE Only the TN12LSXL supports the OTU-3 services.
Service Type
None, OC-768, OTU-3, STM-256 Default: STM-256
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
676
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
677
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE Only TN12LSXL supports this parameter.
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board.
NOTE Only TN12LSXL supports this parameter.
PRBS Test Status
See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. NULL Mapping Status Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Queries the PMD threshold of the board.
PMD Threshold(ps)
14.20.11 Specifications of the LSXL

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
678
Bo ard
Client-Side Fixed Optical Module 40G Transponder
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
TN 11L SX L
500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN 400 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-DRZPIN
TN 12L SX L
40G Transponder
N/A
500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN
N/A
NOTE
NOTE

Table 14-232 Specifications of client-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Line code format Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Receiver parameter specifications at point R nm dBm dBm dB dB ps/nm 1530 to 1565 3 0 8.2 35 40 Unit Value 40G Transponder NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
679
Item Optical Module Type Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
Value 40G Transponder
nm dBm dBm dB
PIN 1290 to 1570 -6 3 -27

Table 14-233 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN DQPSK 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-PIN ODB 400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN DRZ
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 500 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 8.2 2.5 0.6 NA 35 500 192.10 to 196.00 0 -5 8.2 5 1 NA 35 400

Unit
Value 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-PIN PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27 400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27
Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance
nm dBm dBm dB
PIN 1529 to 1561 -16 0 -27
TN11LSXL l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 11.0 lb. (5.0 kg) Dimensions of front panel: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 9.1 lb. (4.1 kg)
TN12LSXL
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 103.0 98.0 74 84 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 110.0 101.0 81 94
TN11LS XL
400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN
TN12LS XL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
681
14.21 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board

The available functional version of the LSXLR board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Board TN11L SXLR TN12L SXLR OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 N N

l Function: The TN12LSXLR board supports access OTU3e services, whereas the TN11LSXLR board does not support. For details, see 14.21.3 Functions and Features. l Appearance: The TN11LSXLR and TN12LSXLR versions use different front panels. For details, see 14.21.5 Front Panel. l Specification: For the specification of each version, see 14.21.10 Specifications of the LSXLR.
The LSXLR boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.21.2 Application
The LSXLR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. For the position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-176.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
682
Figure 14-176 Position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system

WDM side DMUX G.694.1 MUX LSXLR LSXLR G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX

The LSXLR board is used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-234. Table 14-234 Functions and features of the LSXLR board Function and Feature Basic function Regenerati ng rate Description
Implements the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals and compensates for the dispersion in the service signals. This board is used at an electrical REG station in a system. OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s OTU3e: OTN service at a rate of 44.57 Gbit/s
NOTE Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e service.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by complying with the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3.
WDM specificati on Tunable wavelengt h function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
683
Function and Feature ESC function PRBS function LPT function Test frame FEC encoding
Description
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITUT G.975.1.
Alarms and performan ce events monitorin g ALS function Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback Protocol or standard complianc e
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
Not supported Supported by the TN12LSXLR
Not supported
Not supported Not supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
684
Description

The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-177 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
685
Figure 14-177 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board
WDM side IN O/E Optical receiving module
Decoding module
Overhead module
Encoding module
WDM side E/O Optical transmitting module OUT
SCC
Signal Flow
The LSXLR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module. Decoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services. Encoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals. Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.
14.21.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board.

Figure 14-178 and Figure 14-179 show the front panel of the LSXLR board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
687
Figure 14-178 Front panel of the TN11LSXLR board
LSXLR
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
LSXLR
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
688
Figure 14-179 Front panel of the TN12LSXLR board
LSXLR
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
LSXLR
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board. Table 14-235 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-235 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXLR board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.21.6 Valid Slots

Four slots house one TN11LSXLR board. Two slots house one TN12LSXLR board. Table 14-236 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board. Table 14-236 Valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU14
The rear connector of the TN11LSXLR is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXLR board, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU1. The TN11LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU5, IU9 and IU13. Table 14-237 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board. Table 14-237 Valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU13-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30IU36
690
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU2-IU17
The rear connector of the TN12LSXLR board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12LSXLR board, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU2. l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24 and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, or IU66 and IU68. OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25 and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36. OptiX OSN 6800: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU10 and IU12, or IU14 and IU16.
14.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR


This section describes how the physical interfaces of the board are displayed on the NMS and the logical ports of the board.

Table 14-238 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-238 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXLR board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT Port Number on the NMS 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
691

NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LSXLR, refer to Table 14-239. Table 14-239 LSXLR parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.
NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.
Laser Status
Enable AutoSensing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
692
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows: l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected.
FEC Mode
Receive Wavelength
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
693
Field Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Description The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. PMD Threshold (ps) Board Mode Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Electrical Relay Mode Queries the PMD threshold of the board. The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
14.21.10 Specifications of the LSXLR

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN11LS XLR WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODBPIN 400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZPIN TN12LS XLR 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODBPIN N/A WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
694

NOTE
NOTE

Table 14-240 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN DQPSK 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-PIN ODB 400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN DRZ
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 500 192.10 to 196.05 0 -5 8.2 2.5 0.6 NA 35 500 192.10 to 196.00 0 -5 8.2 5 1 NA 35 400
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 1529 to 1561 PIN 1529 to 1561 PIN 1529 to 1561
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
695
Unit
Value 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-PIN -16 0 -27 400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN -16 0 -27
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance
dBm dBm dB
-16 0 -27
TN11LSXLR l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 6.7 lb. (3.1 kg) Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 5.5 lb.(2.5 kg)
TN12LSXLR
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 87.0 82.0 62 67.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 90.0 85.0 68.2 70.0
TN11 LSXL R
400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN
TN12 LSXL R
14.22 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
696

The available functional version of the LSXR board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN1L SXR OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.22.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. For the position of the LSXR board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-180. Figure 14-180 Position of the LSXR board in the WDM system
WDM side DMUX G.694.1 MUX LSXR WDM side MUX G.694.1 DMUX
LSXR

The LSXR is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-241.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
697
Table 14-241 Functions and features of the LSXR board Function and Feature Basic function Regenerati ng rate OTN function Description
The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
WDM specificati on Tunable wavelengt h function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function PRBS function LPT function Test frame FEC encoding
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITUT G.975.1.
Alarms and performan ce events monitorin g
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
698
Function and Feature ALS function Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback Protocol or standard complianc e
Description
Not supported Supported
Not supported
Not supported Not supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services -

The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-181 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
699
Figure 14-181 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board
WDM side
IN
O/E Optical receiving module
Decoding module
Overhead module
Encoding module
WDM side E/O Optical transmitting module

OUT
SCC
Signal Flow
The LSXR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals. The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
The signal processing module The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module. Decoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services. Encoding module Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Overhead module Performs overhead processing of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance of WDM-side services.
14.22.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR.

Figure 14-182 shows the front panel of the LSXR.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
701
Figure 14-182 Front panel of the LSXR
LSXR
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
LSXR
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR board. Table 14-242 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-242 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXR board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.22.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LSXR board. Table 14-243 shows the valid slots for the LSXR board. Table 14-243 Valid slots for LSXR board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68. OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22 and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
703
OptiX OSN 6800: The LSXR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.
14.22.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR



Table 14-244 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-244 Mapping between the physical ports on the LSXR board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT Port Number on the NMS 1
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LSXR, refer to Table 14-245. Table 14-245 LSXR parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
704
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.
NOTE In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
Enable AutoSensing
FEC Working State
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled
FEC Mode
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
705
Field Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Value -
Description Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Line Rate
Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default: Standard Mode
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled
See D.24 Line Rate for more information. Board Mode Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Electrical Relay Mode The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
14.22.10 Specifications of the LSXR

Board TN11L SXR
WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
NOTE

Line code format
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation dBm dBm dB THz GHz 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
707
Unit
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
0.3 35 800
Table 14-247 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZPIN NRZ 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZAPD NRZ 4800 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelengt h-ODBAPD ODB 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
Line code format
DRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency dBm dBm dB THz 2 -3 10 2 -3 10 2 -3 NAa 2 -3 10
192.10 to 196.05
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
708
Unit
Value 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZPIN 1200 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelengt h-NRZAPD 5 0.3 35 4800 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelengt h-ODBAPD 5 0.3 35 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
GHz nm dB
5 0.3 35
5 0.3 35
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 -26 -26 -16 APD APD PIN
dBm dB
0 -27
-9 -27
-9 -27
0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
709
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1LS XR WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 34.8 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 37.8
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD
35.0
38.0
36.8 39.8
39.8 42.8
14.23 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is, TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LWX 2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
14.23.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWX2 board implements the conversion between two channels of optical signals at the rate in the range of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-183. Figure 14-183 Position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system
G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 16Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s LWX2 D M U X WDM side M U X D M U X M U X WDM side G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 LWX2 16Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s
2 Client side
2 Client side

The LWX2 is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and provide ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-248. Table 14-248 Functions and features of the LWX2 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Receives two channels of optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/ s and converts them into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelengths compliant with the ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s WDM specification Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
711
Function and Feature Tunable wavelength function
Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. In the case of configuring four-wavelength tunable optical module, configure every four continuous wavelengths (first group started with the 1st wavelength) in the C band with 100 GHz channel spacing as one group. In this way, the optical signal output on the WDM side are tunable within the four wavelengths of every group. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. The optical modules on the WDM side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the WDM side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the client side.
ESC function PRBS function LPT function Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function
Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
712
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM) Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
713

The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-184 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board. Figure 14-184 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
WDM side O/E Service processing module E/O

OUT1 OUT2
E/O
O/E
IN1 IN2
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWX2 board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 14.23.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LWX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX2 to the WDM side of the LWX2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any
signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT1-OTU2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Service processing module Regenerates Any signals in two directions. Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

14.23.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board.

Figure 14-185 shows the front panel of the LWX2 board. Figure 14-185 Front panel of the LWX2 board
LWX2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LWX2
NOTE
The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
716
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board. Table 14-249 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-249 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWX2 board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.23.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWX2 board. Table 14-250 shows the valid slots for the LWX2 board. Table 14-250 Valid slots for the LWX2 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
717
14.23.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2

The characteristic code for the LWX2 board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 14-251. Table 14-251 Characteristic code for the LWX2 board Code First four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.
Last four digits
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 board is 92109220. l l "9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz. "9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.


Table 14-252 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-252 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWX2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 5 6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
718

NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LWX2, refer to Table 14-253 Table 14-253 LWX2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: Any
16 - 2500 Default: 2500
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
719
Value Disabled, Enabled Default: l WDM side: Disabled l Client side: Enabled
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. parameter provides an option to query the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate. See D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Current Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
720
14.23.10 Specifications of the LWX2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
TN 11L WX 2
12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-APD 6400 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE

NOTE
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
721
Table 14-254 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ MLM 0.5 I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 80
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
NA
dB
NA
NA
30
30
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN PIN APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
722
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-18 -3
-18 0
-28 -9
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
723
Unit
dBm dB nm nm dB -
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation THz GHz 192.10 to 196.00 12.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
724
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm -
3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
725

Table 14-257 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PINa 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-APDa 6500 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PIN 6400 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelength -NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) NRZ
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz -1 -5 10 -1 -5 10 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 8.2 3 -2 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
nm dB
0.2 35
0.2 35
0.5 30
0.5 30
0.5 35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 -28 -18 -26 APD PIN APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28
Operating nm wavelength range Receiver sensitivity dBm
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
726
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PINa 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-APDa 6500 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nmC BandFixed Wavelength -NRZ-PIN 6400 ps/nmC BandTunable Wavelength -NRZ-APD (Four ChannelsTunable) -9 -27
dBm dB
0 -27
-9 -27
0 -27
-10 -27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
APD
727
Unit
nm dBm dBm dB
1200 to 1650 -28 -9 -27
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 38.5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131 F) (W) 42.4
LWX2
14.24 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is, TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 LWX D OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
728
14.24.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXD board implements the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side. For the position of the LWXD board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-186. Figure 14-186 Position of the LWXD board in the WDM system
MUX DMUX MUX DMUX Client side WDM side DMUX MUX DMUX MUX WDM side Client side G.694.1/ LWXD G.694.2 16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s
16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s
G.694.1/ LWXD G.694.2

The LWXD board is used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-259. Table 14-259 Functions and features of the LWXD board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Receives a signal at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G. 694.2. The reverse process is similar. l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
729
Description FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function LPT function Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. The optical modules on the WDM side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the WDM side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the client side.
Test frame Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Not supported Not supported Not supported
730
Function and Feature Protection scheme
Description l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
731
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM) Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
732

The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-187 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board. Figure 14-187 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board
Client side
RX

Splitter
OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN2
TX
E/O
O/E
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LWXD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXD to the WDM side of the LWXD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module.
After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Service processing module Regenerates Any signals in two directions. Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.24.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board.

Figure 14-188 shows the front panel of the LWXD board. Figure 14-188 Front panel of the LWXD board
LWXD
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
LWXD
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
l l
Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board. Table 14-260 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-260 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXD board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
TX RX
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.24.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWXD board. Table 14-261 shows the valid slots for the LWXD board. Table 14-261 Valid slots for the LWXD board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
14.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD

The characteristic code for the LWXD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 14-262.
Table 14-262 Characteristic code for the LWXD board Code First four digits Meaning The frequency of forth optical signal Description The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.
Last four digits
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWXD is 92109210. l "92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side both are 192.10 THz.


Table 14-263 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-263 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXD board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 TX/RX Port Number on the NMS 1 2 3
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of LWXD, refer to Table 14-264
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
737
Table 14-264 LWXD parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: Any
16 - 2500 Default: 2500
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Disabled, Enabled Default: l WDM side: Disabled l Client side: Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
738
Field Current Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)
Value -
Description parameter provides an option to query the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate. See D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
14.24.10 Specifications of the LWXD

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
739
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
TN 11L WX D
NOTE

NOTE
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
740
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 80
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
NA
dB
NA
NA
30
30
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN PIN PIN APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
741
Unit
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-18 -3
-18 0
-28 -9
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
742
Unit
dBm dB nm nm dB -
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation THz GHz 192.10 to 196.00 12.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
743
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm -
3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
744

Table 14-268 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPINa 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPDa 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable) NRZ
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB -4 -8 10 -4 -8 10 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 8.2 0 -5 10 0 -5 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10 0.2 35 0.2 35 0.5 30 0.5 30 0.2 35 0.5 35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity nm dBm PIN 1200 to 1650 -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 APD PIN APD APD APD 1300 to 1575 -28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
745
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPINa 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPDa 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gthNRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD (Four Channels -Tunable) -9 -27
dBm dB
0 -27
-9 -27
0 -27
-10 -27
-9 -27
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
746
Unit
Power Consumption
LWXD
14.25 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

The available functional versions of the LWXS board are TN11 and TN12.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
747
Boar d TN11 LWX S TN12 LWX S
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 Y

l Functions: The TN11LWXS board does not support access ETR/CLO services, whereas the TN12LWXS board supports, see 14.25.11 Specifications of the LWXS.
The LWXS boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
14.25.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXS board implements the conversion between the optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the LWXS board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-189. Figure 14-189 Position of the LWXS board rate in the WDM system
MUX 16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s LWXS G.694.1/ G.694.2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1/ LWXS G.694.2 16Mbit/s -2.7Gbit/s
Client side

The LWXS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-270.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
748
Table 14-270 Functions and features of the LWXS board Function and Feature Basic function Description Receives a channel of signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G. 694.2. The reverse process is similar. FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s ETR: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s CLO: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s
NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports ETR and CLO services.
WDM specification Tunable wavelength function ESC function PRBS function LPT function Alarms and performance events monitoring
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported Not supported l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
749
Description The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. The optical modules on the WDM side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the WDM side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the client side.
Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
750
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM) IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol
NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
751
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services -

The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 14-190 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board. Figure 14-190 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board
Client side
RX

OUT
TX
E/O
O/E
IN
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s).

NOTE
In the signal flow of the LWXS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXS to the WDM side of the LWXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out Any optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of Any optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of Any electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Service processing module Regenerates Any signals in two directions.
Monitors the performance of SDH/SONET and GE signals in two directions. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
14.25.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board.

Figure 14-191 shows the front panel of the LWXS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
754
Figure 14-191 Front panel of the LWXS board
LWXS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 OUT IN
LWXS
Indicators
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board. Table 14-271 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 14-271 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXS board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX RX
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.25.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWXS board. Table 14-272 shows the valid slots for the TN11LWXS board. Table 14-272 Valid slots for theTN11LWXS board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 14-273 shows the valid slots for the TN12LWXS board. Table 14-273 Valid slots for theTN12LWXS board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
756
14.25.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS



Table 14-274 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-274 Mapping between the physical ports on the LWXS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX/RX Port Number on the NMS 1 3
NOTE
14.25.9 LWXS loopback

Table 14-275 lists the types of loopbacks supported by LWXS boards. Table 14-275 Loopbacks supported by LWXS boards Board TN11L WXS/ TN12L WXS Loopback Type Client-side outloop WDM-side inloop Client-side inloop WDM-side outloop See Figure 14-193. Description See Figure 14-192.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
757
The implementation of client-side outloop supported by LWXS boards is similar to the implementation of WDM-side inloop. The implementation of WDM-side outloop supported by LWXS boards is similar to the implementation of client-side inloop. l Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-192, one service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side through the Any service processing module. Figure 14-192 Client-side outloop and WDM-side inloop on the TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS board
RX/TX
ANY
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
Client-side
Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-193, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is regenerated by the Any service processing module and then loopbacked to the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
758
Figure 14-193 Client-side inloop and WDM-side outloop on the TN11LWXS/ TN12LWXS board
RX/TX
ANY
ODU2
OTU2
IN/OUT
Client-side

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the LWXS, refer to Table 14-276 Table 14-276 LWXS parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
759
Field Service Type
Value None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, ETR, CLO Default: Any
NOTE Only TN12LWXS supports ETR, and CLO services.
16 - 2500 Default: 2500
sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. parameter provides an option to query the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate. See D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Disabled, Enabled Default: l WDM side: Disabled l Client side: Enabled
Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
760
Field OFC Enabled
Description The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.
NOTE l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled after the OFC function is enabled. l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection. l Only the TN12LWXS supports this parameter. l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
761
14.25.11 Specifications of the LWXS

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
TN 11L WX S TN 12L WX S
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
762

NOTE

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
763
Item Optical Module Type Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
nm
NA
NA
dB
NA
NA
30
30
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm PIN 770 to 860 PIN 1270 to 1580 PIN 1270 to 1580 APD 1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-17 0
-18 -3
-18 0
-28 -9
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
764
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
765
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
766

Table 14-280 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPINa 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPDa 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four ChannelsTunable) NRZ
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
dBm dB THz GHz
-5 10
-5 10
-2 8.2
-2 8.2
-2 10
-2 8.2
192.10 to 196.00 10
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
ps/nm -
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type PIN APD PIN APD APD APD
767
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZPINa 12800 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPDa 6500 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Wavelen gth-NRZPIN 3200 ps/ nm-C BandFixed Waveleng th-NRZAPD 12800 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Wavelen gth-NRZAPD 6400 ps/ nm-C BandTunable Waveleng th-NRZAPD (Four ChannelsTunable) 1300 to 1575 -28 -9 -18 0 -26 -10 -28 -9 -28 -9
Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm dBm
-18 0
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
dBm dBm dB nm nm nm
5 2.5 8.2 1271 to 1611 6.5 1
768
Item Optical Module Type Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
dB ps/nm -
30 1600 G.959.1-compliant
Power Consumption
LWXS
14.26 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion board.

The available functional versions of the TMX board are TN11 and TN12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
769

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TMX TN12 TMX OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y

l Function: TN11TMX supports AFEC, and the TN12TMX supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 14.26.3 Functions and Features. l Specification: The TN11TMX board supports fixed optical module and tunable optical module on the WDM side. The TN12TMX board supports fixed optical module, tunable optical module, XFP module and gray optical module on the WDM side. For specifications of each version, see 14.26.11 Specifications of the TMX.
Original Board TN11TMX Substitute Board TN12TMX Substitution Rules The TN12TMX can be created as TN11TMX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TMX functions as the TN11TMX.
TN12TMX
None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
770
14.26.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the TMX board multiplexes four channels of STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 service signals into one channel of OTU2 signals, and implements conversion between these service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the TMX board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-194. Figure 14-194 Position of the TMX board in the WDM system
1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 4 Client side TMX G.694.1 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 TMX 4 WDM side 1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1
WDM side
Client side

The TMX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-282. Table 14-282 Functions and features of the TMX board Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 service optical signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a DWDM standard wavelength that complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1 or a standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. It can also perform the reverse process. STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s l Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports 4ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. l Supports SM functions for OTU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.
Client-side service type OTN function
Function and Feature WDM specification Tunable wavelength function
Description Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side. Not supported TN11TMX: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN12TMX: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the WDM side. Not supported Supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
772
Function and Feature XFP/eSFP
Description TN11TMX/TN12TMX: Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. TN12TMX: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Client side
Inloop Outloop
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic

The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 14-195 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board. Figure 14-195 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board
Client side
WDM side O/E

SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN processing module
E/O OTN processing module
OUT
E/O
O/E
IN
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TMX board can access the following optical signals: l l l STM-16 optical signals OC-48 optical signals OTU1 (without FEC) optical signals
In the signal flow of the TMX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU1 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 electrical signals.
The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 electrical signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiples channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Monitors OTN performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/ AFEC encoding and decoding. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

14.26.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board.

Figure 14-196 shows the front panel of the TMX board. Figure 14-196 Front panel of the TMX board
TMX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TMX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
776
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board. Table 14-283 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 14-283 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TMX board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
OUT
LC
TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

14.26.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TMX board. Table 14-284 shows the valid slots for the TN11TMX board. Table 14-284 Valid slots for TN11TMX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

777
Table 14-285 shows the valid slots for the TN12TMX board. Table 14-285 Valid slots for TN12TMX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
14.26.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX



Table 14-286 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 14-286 Mapping between the physical ports on the TMX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4
778
Physical Port TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4
NOTE
14.26.9 TMX Loopbacks

Table 14-287 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TMX boards. Table 14-287 Loopbacks supported by TMX boards Board TN11TMX/ TN12TMX Loopback Type Client-side outloop Client-side inloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop Description See Figure 14-197. See Figure 14-198. See Figure 14-199. See Figure 14-200.
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-197, four STM-16/OC-48 services are received on the client side. One STM-16/OC-48 service is loopbacked to the client side and the other three services are passed through. Figure 14-197 Client-side outloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side OTU2 IN1/OUT1
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-198, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
779
deconverged into four ODU1 services. The four ODU1 services are converted into four STM-16/OC-48 services. One of the four STM-16/OC-48 services is loopbacked to the WDM side and the other three STM-16/OC-48 services are passed through. Figure 14-198 Client-side inloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side OTU2 IN1/OUT1
NOTE
When OTU1 services are received on the client side of the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board, OTU1 services must be converted into ODU1 services before being loopbacked.
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 14-199, four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services received on the client side are mapped into four ODU1 services and then converged into one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the client side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 14-199 WDM-side inloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board
RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 Client-side Loopbacked services STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side OTU2 IN/OUT
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 14-200, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
780
Figure 14-200 WDM-side outloop on the TN11TMX/TN12TMX board

RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 Client-side Loopbacked services STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side OTU2 IN/OUT

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TMX, refer to Table 14-288. Table 14-288 TMX parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Type
None, OTU-1, OC-48, STM-16 Default: OTU-1
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
781
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
782
Description The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides.
NOTE Only TN11TMX supports this parameter.
See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only TN12TMX supports this parameter.
PRBS Test Status
NOTE Only TN12TMX supports the parameter.
NULL Mapping Status
14.26.11 Specifications of the TMX

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
783
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
TN 11T MX
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C BandFixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthNRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
TN 12T MX
N/A
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
784

NOTE
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
785
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
Table 14-290 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm dBm dB
1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2

786
Item Optical Module Type Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
nm nm dB -
6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant
NOTE
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power THz GHz dBm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
787
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask
Unit
dBm dB nm dB ps/nm -
0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)

Line code format
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
788
Unit
Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
789
Line code format
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
dB
35
35
35
35
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
790
Unit
dBm
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27

Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
791
Unit
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
792
Unit
dB ps/nm
35 800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB
8.2
793
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NA 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NA
nm
NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11TMX: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg) TN12TMX: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
794
Power Consumption
Boar d TN1 1TM X WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 40.3 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 44.3
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD
42.1
46.4
44.5 48.4 31.4
51.2 55.7 36.1
TN1 2TM X
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
32.4 41 39
37.1 45.5 43.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
795
15 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
15
About This Chapter
Tributary Unit and Line Unit
15.1 ND2 ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board 15.2 NQ2 NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board 15.3 NS2 NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board 15.4 NS3 NS3: 40G line service processing board 15.5 TBE TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board 15.6 TDG TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board 15.7 TDX TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board 15.8 THA THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 15.9 TOA TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board 15.10 TOG TOG: 8 x GE service processing board 15.11 TOM TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board 15.12 TQM TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board 15.13 TQS TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
15.14 TQX TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board 15.15 TSXL TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
797
15.1 ND2
ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board

The available functional versions of the ND2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, TN53.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 ND2 TN12 ND2 TN52 ND2 TN53 ND2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N Y Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 N N N N

Function: l l The TN11ND2 supports AFEC. The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. The TN12ND2/TN53ND2 board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, the TN53ND2 board supports tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side. The TN11ND2 or TN52ND2 board does not support that function. Only the TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2 supports IEEE 1588v2 function. The TN11ND2 board does not support that function. The TN12ND2, TN52ND2, TN53ND2 board regenerates OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. The TN11ND2 board cannot regenerate OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. The TN11ND2 and TN12ND2 support the cross-connections at the ODU1 and ODU2 level. The TN52ND2 supports the cross-connections at the ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2 level. The TN53ND2 supports the cross-connections at the ODU0, ODU1, ODUFlex and ODU2 level.
l l l
For details, see 15.1.3 Functions and Features. Specification:

The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 15.1.12 Specifications of the ND2.
Original Board TN11ND2 Substitute Board TN12ND2 Substitution Rules The TN12ND2 can be created as TN11ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12ND2 functions as the TN11ND2.
NOTE When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not apply.
TN12ND2
TN53ND2
The TN53ND2 can be created as TN12ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53ND2 functions as the TN12ND2.
NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN12ND2 in relay mode.
TN52ND2
TN53ND2
The TN53ND2 can be created as TN52ND2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53ND2 functions as the TN52ND2. -
TN53ND2
None
15.1.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the ND2 board implements conversion between 16 crossconnect ODU0 signals or eight cross-connect ODU1 signals or four cross-connect ODUflex signals or two cross-connect ODU2 signals and two ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. The ND2 board also converts between two cross-connect ODU2e signals and two ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service, ODUflex service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
799
Application scenario 1 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between eight channels of ODU1 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 15-1 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1 TOM 8 4 1 G.694.1 MUX ND2 DMUX 1 TOM 8 4 1 WDM side WDM side 4 MUX 1 TOM 8 1 DMUX ND2 G.694.1 4 1 TOM 8 1
Client
side
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
G.694.1 MUX TDX ND2 DMUX MUX DMUX ND2 TDX G.694.1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
800

NOTE
In the application scenario with the TN11TDX board, the ND2 board receives eight channels of ODU1 signals. In the application scenario with the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53ND2 board, the ND2 board receives two channels of ODU2 signals. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 3 of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: Implements the regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
WDM side DMUX IN1 G.694.1 MUX OUT2
WDM side OUT1 ND2 G.694.1 IN2 MUX
DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. The input and output wavelengths can be different. Only the TN12ND2 board equipped with an 800 ps/nm DRZ tunable optical module supports regeneration of 11.3 Gbit/s OTU2e.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
801
Application scenario 4 of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU0 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
1 TOM 8 8 1 G.694.1 MUX ND2 DMUX 1 TOM 8 8 1 WDM side WDM side 8 MUX 1 TOM 8 1 DMUX ND2 G.694.1 8 1 TOM 8 1
Client side
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode. The TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Application scenario 5 of the TN53ND2: conversion between four channels of ODUflex signals and two channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
G.694.1 1 TQX 4 4 1 ND2
DMUX MUX MUX DMUX
G.694.1 1 ND2 4 TQX 4 1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53ND2 board must be set to Line Mode. In this application scenario, only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex.

The ND2 board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-1 and Table 15-2.
NOTE
ODU1 and ODU2 is only supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 in OptiX OSN 6800. The relay mode is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Table 15-1 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Line Mode) Function and feature Basic function Description Maps 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODUflex signals or double channels of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into two channels of OTU2 signals, or maps double channels of ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into two channels of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signal, ODU1 signal , ODUflex signals and the ODU2/ODU2e signal. l TN11ND2/TN12ND2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU1 signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board. l TN52ND2: Supports the cross-connection of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board. l TN53ND2: Supports the cross-connection of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODUflex signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board.
Crossconnect capabilities
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
803
Function and feature OTN function
Description l Supports 16 x ODU0 multiplexing into two OTU2. l Supports 4 x ODUflex multiplexing into two OTU2. l Supports 4 x ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2. l Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l TN52ND2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l TN53ND2 supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l TN53ND2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex.
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
NOTE If the TN53ND2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN53ND2 board and the connected line board when the following condition is met: ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured on the TN53ND2 board, or the TN53ND2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.
Not supported TN11ND2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
804
Function and feature Alarm and performance event monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock
Description l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2 clock signals. The TN12ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU1 signals are crossconnected from the backplane. The TN52ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. The TN53ND2 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex signals are cross-connected from the backplane.
Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON XFP
Supported Supported by the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 TN12ND2/TN53ND2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53ND2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Protection scheme
l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported Not supported Supported
Client side Channel Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
805
Function and feature Protocol or standard compliance
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
806
Function and feature
Description Protocols or standards (performanc e monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1
Table 15-2 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature Basic function Regeneratin g rate Description The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3Gbit/s
NOTE The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.
OTN function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
WDM specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
807
Function and feature Tunable wavelength function
Description Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
ESC function PRBS function FEC encoding
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarm and performance event monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme XFP
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Not supported TN12ND2/TN53ND2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53ND2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
808
Function and feature Loopback Protocol or standard compliance
Description Not supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services -

The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, 1588 module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ND2. Figure 15-7 and Figure 15-8 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2. Figure 15-7, Figure 15-9 and Figure 15-10 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2. Figure 15-7, Figure 15-9, Figure 15-10, Figure 15-11 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53ND2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
809
Figure 15-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ND2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
810
Figure 15-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 (Line Mode)(OptiX OSN 6800)
8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
811
Figure 15-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2 (Relay Mode)(OptiX OSN 6800)
WDM side
IN1
WDM side O/E OTN processing module E/O

OUT1
OUT2
E/O
O/E
IN2
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
812
Figure 15-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800)
16 X ODU0/ 8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e Backplane ( service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2
1588
IN1 IN2
DC power supply from a backplne
SCC
Backplane ( controlled by SCC )
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
813
Figure 15-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 (Relay Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800/6800)
WDM side
IN1

OUT1
OUT2
E/O
O/E
IN2
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
814
Figure 15-11 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53ND2 (Line Mode)(OptiX OSN 8800)
16 X ODU0/ 8 X ODU1/4XODUFlex/ 2 X ODU2(e) Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2
IN1 IN2
DC power supply from a backplne
SCC
Signal Flow (Line Mode)

The signal processing module of the ND2 board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l ODU0 electrical signals ODU1 electrical signals ODUflex electrical signals ODU2 electrical signals ODU2e electrical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the ND2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the ND2 to the WDM side of the ND2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals or eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals or four ODUflex electrical signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC/AFEC. After processing, the module outputs two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/ O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC/AFEC. In the final step, the module sends out 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals or eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals or four ODUflex electrical signals or double channels of ODU2 electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection. The TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.
Signal Flow (Relay Mode)

The ND2 board regenerates two channels of optical signals. The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing, and signal encoding. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l OTN processing module The OTN processing module frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/ OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1588 module
The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
NOTE
The IEEE 1588v2 function is not supported if the working mode of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/ TN53ND2 board is Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode.
15.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board.

Figure 15-12 shows the front panel of the ND2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
817
Figure 15-12 Front panel of the ND2 board
ND2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
ND2
NOTE
You must insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
818
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board. Table 15-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ND2 board Interface IN1-IN2 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
Laser Hazard Level

15.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one ND2 board. Table 15-4 shows the valid slots for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board. Table 15-4 Valid slots for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-5 shows the valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board. Table 15-5 Valid slots for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
819
15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2

The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type, wavelength, and so on. For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit.


Table 15-6 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-6 Mapping between the physical ports on the ND2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 Port Number on the NMS 1 2
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The ND2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. l l Figure 15-13 and Figure 15-14 show the port diagrams for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/ TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board in compatible mode. Table 15-7 lists the port descriptions. Figure 15-15 shows the port diagram for the TN53ND2 board in standard mode. Table 15-8 lists the port descriptions.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
820

NOTE
For the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are only supported when D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode. For the TN52ND2/TN53ND2: The OptiX OSN 6800 only supports signal grooming at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
NOTE
When the ND2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
Figure 15-13 Port diagram for the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (compatible mode)
Other tributary/ line/PID board Other tributary/ line/PID board Other tributary/ line/PID board
Backplane
16 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 8 x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 2 x ODU2/ODU2e
164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 165 (ODU0LP5/ODU0LP5)-1 165 (ODU0LP5/ODU0LP5)-2
71 ODU2 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
52 ODU1 (ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 72 ODU2 (ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 2 (IN2/OUT2)-1
168 (ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168 (ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
52 ODU1 (ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
Crossconnect module Multiplexin g module
ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
821


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
ODU0 mapping path
Figure 15-14 Port diagram for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board (compatible mode)
Other tributary/line/PID board Other tributary/line/PID board
Backplane
8 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 2 x ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
52 (ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 72 (ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 2 (IN2/OUT2)-1
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing module
ODU2 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
822


Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1 signals are required, users only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU1LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 15-7 Descriptions of the ports on the ND2 board (compatible mode) Port Name ODU0LP1-ODU0LP8 Description Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channels 1 and 2. Internal logical ports. Each of the port provides optical channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channel 1. WDM-side optical ports. Automatic CrossConnection Automatic crossconnections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP ports. Automatic crossconnections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP ports. Automatic crossconnections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT ports. -
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP2
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP2
1(IN1/OUT1) 2(IN2/OUT2)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
823
Figure 15-15 TN53ND2 board model (standard Mode)

Baclplane
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1 ODU2:1 ODUflex:2 4XODUflex ODUflex:1 ODUflex:2 ODU2:1 OCH:1
OCH:1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1
ODU2:1 2 xODU2/ 2xODU 2e ODU2:1 OCH :1 OCH :1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1
Other tributary/line/PID board
ODU 2: 1 ODU1:4 ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1 ODU1:4
OCH :1
8xODU1
OCH :1 1(N1/OUT1)
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 16 xODU0 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1 ODU 1:4 OCH :1
2(N2/OUT2)
ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1 ODU1:4 OCH :1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
ODU0:1 ODU2:1 16 xODU0 ODU0: 8 ODU0:1 ODU0: 8 OCH :1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Service processing module ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU1 >ODU2) ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU2)
ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
ODUflex mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
824
NOTE
When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. When ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, the service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping paths are ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 and ODU1->ODU2.
Table 15-8 Descriptions of the ports on the TN53ND2 board (standard Mode) Port Name 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0: (1-2) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0: (1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 1(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1) 2(IN2/OUT2) WDM-side optical ports Mapping path for ODU2 signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODU1 signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU2) Description Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. l l The side. The cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
825

NOTE
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. The ND2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
ODU0 Cross-Connections
Figure 15-16, Figure 15-17, and Figure 15-18 show the created ODU0 cross-connections. Figure 15-16 TN52ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
1 Cross-connect module
Other board a
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2 Cross-connect module
ND2 (compatible mode)
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Other board b (compatible mode)
Other board c (standard mode)

The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2
Other board a
TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
826

Other board b Other board c
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
827
Figure 15-17 TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 2
compatible mode
ND2
168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
standard mode
WDM side
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
Other board c (standard mode) Other board d (standard mode)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
828

NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a Other board b Other board c Other board d TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
829
Figure 15-18 TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1
ND2 (standard mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Other board b (standard mode)
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2 Cross-connect module
Other board d (compatible mode)
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a Other board b Other board c Other board d TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
830
Figure 15-19 and Figure 15-20 show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
831
Figure 15-19 TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-2 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Other board a TN11ND2/TN12ND2: TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS TN52ND2:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
832
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS/ TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) TN52ND2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN11ND2/TN12ND2: TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2 TN52ND2: TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
833
Figure 15-20 TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level)

Client side 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Other board a
Cross-connect module WDM side
ND2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
compatible mode
standard mode
Cross-connect module WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 Cross-connect module
Other board a
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS/TN54THA/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
834

TN54TOA Other board b
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Other board c
Figure 15-21 and Figure 15-22 show the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 15-21 TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level)
Client side
1
Other board a
WDM side

WDM side
2
Other board b
(compatible mode)
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
Other board a Other board b
TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/ TN53TQX TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
835
Figure 15-22 TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level)

Client side
1
Other board a
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
ND2
72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1
compatible mode
standard mode
2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1
TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/ TN53TQX TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Other board c
ODUflex Cross-Connections
Figure 15-23 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
836
Figure 15-23 TN53ND2 board cross-connections (ODUflex level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
ND2
WDM side Other boardb

2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ND2 board The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a Other board b TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
Cross-Connection Example
Figure 15-24 shows an example of service cross-connections on the ND2 board. l l l The same IN/OUT port can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals. The same board can transmit a mixture of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODUflex signals. Different IN/OUT ports can work in different service modes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
837
Figure 15-24 Example of service cross-connections on the ND2 board

ODU0 TOM TOM ODU0 ND2 ODU1 IN1/OUT1
ND2 NS2 ODUflex
TDX/ ODU2 ND2
IN2/OUT2
15.1.10 ND2 loopbacks

Table 15-9 lists the types of loopbacks supported by ND2 boards. Table 15-9 Loopbacks supported by ND2 boards Cros sCon nect Leve l ODU 0 (avail able only for Opti X OSN 8800) Board Loopback Type Description
TN52ND2
Channel inloop
For channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-25. For channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-29.
Channel outloop
For channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-27. For channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-30.
WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop TN53ND2 Channel inloop
See Figure 15-31. See Figure 15-32. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 >OTU2, See Figure 15-25. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2>OTU2, See Figure 15-26.
Channel outloop
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1>ODU2 >OTU2, See Figure 15-29. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2>OTU2, See Figure 15-28.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
838
Cros sCon nect Leve l ODU 1
Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN11ND2/ TN12ND2/ TN52ND2
Channel inloop Channel outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-33. See Figure 15-34. See Figure 15-35. See Figure 15-36. See Figure 15-33. See Figure 15-34. See Figure 15-37. See Figure 15-38. See Figure 15-39. See Figure 15-40.
TN53ND2
Channel inloop Channel outloop
ODU 2/ ODU 2e ODU flex
TN11ND2/ TN12ND2/ TN52ND2/ TN53ND2 TN53ND2
WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop Channel inloop Channel outloop
Loopbacks Supported by TN52ND2/TN53ND2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU0

l Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-25 and Figure 15-26, 16 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
839
Figure 15-25 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN2/OUT2
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Figure 15-26 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53ND2 board (ODU0>ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
ODU2
WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked-services
Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-27, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The two ODU2 services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
840
are deconverged into four ODU1 services, each ODU1 service being deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services are looped back to the WDM side at ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. Figure 15-27 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services
WDM-side
As shown in Figure 15-28, two OTU2 service received from the WDM side is demapped into two ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
841
Figure 15-28 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53ND2 board (ODU0>ODU2->OTU2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU2
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
ODU2
WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked-services
Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-29, 16 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into eight ODU1 services. Any N of the eight ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback point and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. Figure 15-29 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52ND2board
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
842
Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-30, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The two ODU2 services are deconverged into eight ODU1 services. Any N of the eight ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback point and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. Figure 15-30 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52ND2 board
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-31, 16 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into eight ODU1 services. Then, the eight ODU1 services are converged into two ODU2 services. Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
843
Figure 15-31 WDM-side inloops on the TN52ND2 board

ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN2/OUT2
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-32, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through. Figure 15-32 WDM-side outloops on the TN52ND2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
844
Loopbacks Supported by TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 /TN53ND2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU1

l Channel inloops As shown in Figure 15-33, eight ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the eight ODU1 services from the backplane can be looped back to the backplane at ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. Figure 15-33 Channel inloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU2 OTU2 IN2/OUT2 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-34, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The two ODU2 services are deconverged into eight ODU1 services. Any N of the eight ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
845
Figure 15-34 Channel outloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board

ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 IN2/OUT2 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
OTU2
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-35, eight ODU1 services from the backplane are converged into two ODU2 services. Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through. Figure 15-35 WDM-side inloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked services WDM-side Pass-through services ODU2 OTU2 IN2/OUT2 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-36, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
846
Figure 15-36 WDM-side outloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board

ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU2 OTU2 IN2/OUT2 ODU2 OTU2 IN1/OUT1
Loopbacks Supported by TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloops and WDM-side outloops can be performed at ODU2/ODU2e loopback points. l WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-37, Any of the two ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e service can be passed through. Figure 15-37 WDM-side inloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN2/OUT2
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
847
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-38, two OTU2/OTU2e services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any of the two ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2/ ODU2e loopback point and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e service is passed through. Figure 15-38 WDM-side outloops on the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN2/OUT2
Backplane
Loopbacks Supported by TN53ND2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODUflex

For ODUflex services from the backplane, Channel inloops and Channel outloops can be performed at ODUflex loopback points. l Channel inloops As shown in Figure 15-39, Any N of the four ODUflex services from the backplane can be looped back to the backplane at the ODUflex loopback point and the remaining ODUflex services can be passed through. Figure 15-39 Channel inloops at ODUflex loopback points on the TN53ND2 board
ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex OTU2 IN1/OUT1
ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked-services WDM-side OTU2 IN2/OUT2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
848
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-40, two OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into two ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The two ODU2 services are deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODUflex services can be looped back to the WDM side at ODUflex loopback points and the remaining ODUflex services can be passed through. Figure 15-40 Channel outloops at ODUflex loopback points on the TN53ND2 board
ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex OTU2 IN1/OUT1
ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked-services WDM-side OTU2 IN2/OUT2

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the ND2, refer to Table 15-10. Table 15-10 ND2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
849
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field Channel Loopback
Description Sets the channel loopback.
Service Mode
l TN11ND2: ODU1, ODU2 Default: ODU1 l TN12ND2: Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN52ND2/ TN53ND2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic
The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.

NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN53ND2 only in the compatible mode.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.
NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Relay Mode. This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2 /TN52ND2/TN53ND2. In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.
Enable Auto-Sensing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
850
Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled
Description The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Mode
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
NOTE CBAND is the only band now supported.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
851
Field Line Rate
Value Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default: Standard Mode
Description The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode of the board. Assign random: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex->ODU2. Assign consecutive: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU1 >ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2.
NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN53ND2 in the standard mode.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
852
Field Board Mode
Value Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Line Mode
Description The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2.
15.1.12 Specifications of the ND2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN11ND 2 WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN12ND 2 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN52ND 2 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN53ND 2 N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km N/A WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
853

NOTE
NOTE

Table 15-11 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN NRZ
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 10 0.3 35 800
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -16 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
854
Table 15-12 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZPIN NRZ 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN DRZ
Line code format
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 2 -3 10 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35 800 5 0.3 35 800 2 -3 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
855

Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
856
Line code format
Table 15-15 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
857
Item Optical Module Type Optical source type Target distance
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km SLM 80
km
SLM 10
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
858
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb. ) TN52ND2: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN53ND2: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar d WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 61.1 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 68.4
TN1 1ND 2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN
62.7 68.4 57.2 62 46
70.2 76.6 64 69 52
TN1 2ND 2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
48 70.5 67.8 25
54 77.5 74.6 28
TN5 2ND 2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthDRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
TN5 3ND 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
859
Boar d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 27
Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 30
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
15.2 NQ2
NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

The available functional version(s) of the NQ2 board are TN51, TN52 , TN53, and TN54.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN51 NQ2 TN52 NQ2 TN53 NQ2 TN54 NQ2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N Y Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y Y N OptiX OSN 3800 N N N N

l Function: The TN51NQ2 board supports FEC. The TN52NQ2/TN53/TN54NQ2 board supports FEC and AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC codes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 15.2.3 Functions and Features. The TN51NQ2 board supports the cross-connections at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels. The TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports the cross-connections of at the ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2 levels.The TN53NQ2 board supports ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODUflex cross-connections.
For details, see 15.2.3 Functions and Features. Only the TN54NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 function. For details, see 15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. Only the TN54NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can realize the regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e signals. For details, see 15.2.2 Application. l Specification: The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 15.2.12 Specifications of the NQ2.
Original Board TN51NQ2 Substitute Board TN52NQ2/ TN53NQ2 Substitution Rules The TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN51NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN51NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 only provides the functions of the TN51NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded.
TN52NQ2
TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2
The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 can be created as TN52NQ2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 functions as the TN52NQ2.
NOTE Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports the TN54NQ2.
TN54NQ2
TN53NQ2
The TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN54NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN54NQ2 board. In this scenario, the TN53NQ2 board only provides the functions of the TN54NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded. -
TN53NQ2
None
15.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NQ2 board implements conversion between 32 crossconnect ODU0 signals or 16 cross-connect ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or four cross-connect ODU2 signals and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. The NQ2 board also converts between four cross-connect ODU2e signals and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals. The board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODUflex, ODU1 service and the ODU2/ODU2e service.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
861
Application scenario 1 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU1 and four channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 15-41 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1 TOM 8 Client side 1 TOM 8 4 4 4 NQ2 DMUX MUX
4
1 G.694.1
4
1 G.694.1 MUX DMUX

4
1 TOM
4 NQ2 4
8 Client side 1 TOM
WDM side
WDM side 4
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e and four channels of OTU2/ OTU2e signals
G.694.1 1 TQX 4 4 NQ2
4 4
G.694.1 MUX DMUX

4
1 NQ2 TQX 4
DMUX
MUX
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
862
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between 32 channels of ODU0 signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
1 TOM 8 Client side 1 TOM 8 8 4 8 NQ2 DMUX MUX 1 G.694.1
4
1 G.694.1 MUX DMUX

4
1 TOM
8 NQ2 4
8 Client side 1 TOM
WDM side
WDM side 8
NOTE
Application scenario 4 of the TN53NQ2 board: conversion between eight channels of ODUflex signals and four channels of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
1 TQX 4 Client side 1 TQX 4 4 1 4 NQ2 DMUX MUX
4
1 G.694.1
4
1 G.694.1 MUX DMUX

4
1 TQX
4 NQ2
4 Client side
1 TQX 4
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
863

NOTE
In this application scenario, Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex. The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 5 of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: implements the electrical regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
WDM side
IN1 DMUX
WDM side
OUT1 MUX
G.694.1
MUX OUT2
G.694.1
IN2 DMUX
NQ2
IN3 DMUX OUT3 MUX
G.694.1
MUX OUT4
G.694.1
IN4 DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.

The NQ2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-16 and Table 15-17.
NOTE
ODU0 is supported only by the TN52NQ2 , TN53NQ2 and TN54NQ2 in the OptiX OSN 8800. Only the TN53NQ2 board used in the OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODUflex. The relay mode is supported only by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. For an optical-layer ASON system, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
864
Table 15-16 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Line Mode) Function and feature Basic function Description Maps 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals 8 channels of ODUflex signals or four channels of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into four channels of OTU2 signals, or maps four channels of ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into four channels of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall bandwidth must be equal to or less than 40 Gbit/s. Crossconnect capabilities OTN function Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or eight channels of ODUflex signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NQ2 board and the cross-connect board. l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l The TN53NQ2 board supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODUflex. l The TN53NQ2 board supports TCM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. WDM specification ESC function PRBS function Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
NOTE If the TN53NQ2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN53NQ2 board and the connected line board when the following condition is met: ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured on the TN53NQ2 board, or the TN53NQ2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.
LPT function
Not supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
865
Function and feature FEC encoding
Description TN51NQ2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
NOTE The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports four channels of IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
Supported only when the TN53NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals cross-connected from the backplane Supported only when the TN54NQ2 board receives ODU0/ODU1 signals cross-connected from the backplane
Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON XFP
Supported Supported by the TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53NQ2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Protection scheme
l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
NOTE The ODUk SPRing protection is supported by the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
866
Function and feature Loopback
Description WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Channel Loopback Supported Supported Not supported Supported
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
867
Table 15-17 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature Basic function Regeneratin g rate WDM specification OTN function Description The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s Supports DWDM specifications. l Provides the OTU2 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports TCM function for ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. Tunable wavelength function Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
868
Function and feature ESC function PRBS function FEC encoding
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame PTP clock (1588 V2) Physical clock XFP
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53NQ2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback Protocol or standard compliance
Supported Not supported Not supported Not Supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
869

The NQ2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-46 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN51NQ2 board. Figure 15-47 and Figure 15-49 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NQ2 board. Figure 15-48, Figure 15-50 and Figure 15-52 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NQ2 board. Figure 15-51 and Figure 15-52 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
870
Figure 15-46 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51NQ2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
16XODU1/4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O Cross-connect module OTN processing module
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Backplane SCC (controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
871
16XODU1/4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O Cross-connect module OTN processing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
872
16XODU1//4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 Crossconnect module OTN processing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
873
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/ 4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O Cross-connect module OTN processing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
874
Figure 15-50 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NQ2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800)
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 8XODUflex/4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 Crossconnect module OTN processing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
875
Figure 15-51 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800)
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/ 4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O 1588 Crossconnect module OTN processing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
876
Figure 15-52 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 (Relay Mode)
WDM side
IN1 IN3 OUT2 OUT4

OUT1 OUT3 IN2 IN4
E/O
O/E
SCC

The signal processing module of the NQ2 board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l ODU0 electrical signals ODU1 electrical signals ODU2 electrical signals ODUflex electrical signals ODU2e electrical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NQ2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NQ2 to the WDM side of the NQ2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The signal processing module can receive 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, 8 channels of ODUflex electrical signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs 4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN4 optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module sends out 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, 8 channels of ODUflex electrical signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for service cross-connection. The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.

The NQ2 board regenerates four channels of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN4 optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they are decoded. After performing E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a cross-connect module and an OTN processing module. Cross-connect module
Grooms electrical signals between the NQ2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1//ODUflexODU2/ODU2e signals. OTN processing module Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
15.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board.

Figure 15-53 shows the front panel of the NQ2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
879
Figure 15-53 Front panel of the NQ2 board
NQ2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
NQ2
NOTE
You must insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN4/OUT4 interfaces in ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
880
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board. Table 15-18 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NQ2 board Interface IN1-IN4 Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT4
LC
Laser Hazard Level

15.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one NQ2 board. For the OptiX OSN 6800: If slot IU1, IU4, IU11, or IU14 houses the NQ2 board, the NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s. If any of the other slots house the NQ2 board, the NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 20 Gbit/s. For the OptiX OSN 8800: The NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in any slot. Table 15-19 shows the valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board. Table 15-19 Valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-20 shows the valid slots for the TN52NQ2 board. Table 15-20 Valid slots for the TN52NQ2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

881
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-21 shows the valid slots for the TN53NQ2 board. Table 15-21 Valid slots for the TN53NQ2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, U11-IU16
Table 15-22 shows the valid slots for the TN54NQ2 board. Table 15-22 Valid slots for the TN54NQ2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2



Table 15-23 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS.
Table 15-23 Mapping between the physical ports on the NQ2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 IN3/OUT3 IN4/OUT4 Port Number on the NMS 1 2 3 4
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board can work in compatible mode. The TN53NQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. l l l l Figure 15-55 shows the port diagrams of the TN51NQ2 board in compatible mode. Figure 15-54 shows the port diagrams of the TN52NQ2 board in compatible mode. Figure 15-54 shows the port diagrams of the TN53NQ2 board in compatible mode and Figure 15-56 shows the port diagrams of the board in standard mode. Figure 15-54 shows the port diagrams of the TN54NQ2 board in compatible mode.
NOTE
For the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode. For the TN52NQ2: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
NOTE
When the NQ2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
883
Figure 15-54 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2(compatible mode)/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2

Backplane
32 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 16x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 4 x ODU2/ODU2e
71 ODU2 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
54 ODU1 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 74 ODU2 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 4 (IN4/OUT4)-1
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Service processing module
ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
ODU0 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
884
Figure 15-55 Port diagram of the TN51NQ2

Other tributary/ line/PID board Other tributary/ line/PID board
Backplane
16 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 4 x ODU2/ODU2e
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
4 (IN4/OUT4)-1
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module
ODU2 mapping path
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1 signals are required, users only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU1LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Service processing module ODU1 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
885
Table 15-24 Meaning of NM port of the TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN51NQ2 (compatible mode)board Port Name ODU0LP1ODU0LP16 ODU1LP1ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1ODU2LP4 IN1/OUT1-IN4/ OUT4 Meaning Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces. Automatic CrossConnection Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU1LP port Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU2LP port Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/ OUT port -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
886
Figure 15-56 Port diagram of the TN53NQ2 (standard mode)

Backplane
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
ODUflex:1 ODU2:1 ODUflex:2 8xODUflex ODUflex:1 ODUflex:2 OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1
ODU2:1 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e OCH :1 OCH :1
ODU2:1
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)
ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1 ODU1:4 16xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU 2: 1 ODU1:4 OCH :1 1(N1/OUT1) 4(IN4/OUT4) OCH :1
IN(1-2)/OUT(1-2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)
ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU1:1 ODU 2:1 ODU 1:4 OCH :1
32xODU0
ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2 ODU0:1 ODU 0:2
ODU 1:1 ODU 2:1 ODU1:4 OCH :1
IN(1-4)/OUT(1-4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
ODU0:1 ODU2:1 ODU0: 8 32xODU0 ODU0:1 ODU0: 8 OCH :1
ODU2:1
OCH:1
Crossconnect module Multiplexing module Service processing module

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
887
ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU1 >ODU2) ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU2)
NOTE
Table 15-25 Meaning of ports on the TN53NQ2 (standard mode) Port Name 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2) Indicates the mapping path for the ODUflex signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU1 signals that are received through the backplane. Meaning Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. (ODU0->ODU1>ODU2) Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. (ODU0->ODU2)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
888
Port Name 1(IN1/OUT1) 2(IN2/OUT2) 3(IN3/OUT3) 4(IN4/OUT4)
Meaning Indicates the WDM-side port.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. l l The side. The
NOTE
cross-connection is used to locally add services to or drop services from the WDM cross-connection is used to locally pass through services on the WDM side.
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. The NQ2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
Figure 15-57, Figure 15-58, and Figure 15-59 show the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
889
Figure 15-57 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU0 level)

Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
1
Other board a
WDM side
NQ2 board
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 2

Compatible mode
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2-ODU0:1
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Other board a Other board b Other board c
TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/ TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
890
Figure 15-58 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2)

Client side
1
Other board a
Cross-connect module WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
Compatible mode
NQ2 board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:2-ODU1:2-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:4-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:4-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
Standard mode
Cross-connect module WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2

4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
Other board d (standard mode)
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
891

NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Other board a Other board b Other board c Other board d TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/ TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
892
Figure 15-59 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2)

Client side
1
Other board a
NQ2 board
standard mode
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
893

NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Other board a Other board b Other board c Other board d TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/ TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
894
Figure 15-60 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NQ2
Compatible mode
WDM side

Other board a
TN51NQ2: TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS TN52NQ2: TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN54NQ2: TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
895

Other board b TN51NQ2:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) TN52NQ2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN54NQ2: TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
896
Figure 15-61 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
Compatible mode
NQ2 board
Standard mode
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
Other board a
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
897

Other board b

TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Other board c
Figure 15-62 and Figure 15-63 show the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 15-62 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2(compatible mode)/TN52NQ2 (compatible mode)/TN54NQ2(compatible mode) (ODU2 level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NQ2 board
Compatible mode
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1 Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
Other board a
TN51NQ2: TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL TN52NQ2: TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/ TN53TQX TN54NQ2: TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
898

Other board b TN51NQ2:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52NQ2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN54NQ2: TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
899
Figure 15-63 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2 (ODU2 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1 Cross-connect module
compatible mode
NQ2 board
standard mode
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 2 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1 Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NQ2
TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/ TN53TQX TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Other board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
900
Figure 15-64 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections. Figure 15-64 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53NQ2(standard mode ) (ODUflex level)
Client side
Other boarda
WDM side
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
NQ2 board
WDM side
2
IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN3/OUT3-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN4/OUT4-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
Other boardb
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a Other board b TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Example of Service Cross-Connections

Figure 15-65 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NQ2 board. l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
One IN/OUT can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex signals. One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODUflex signals.
The Service Mode parameters of different IN/OUT ports are independent of each other.
Figure 15-65 Example of service cross-connections on the NQ2 board
ODU0 TOM TOM NS2 ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 NQ2 ODUflex TDX ODUflex ODU2 ND2 ODU2 IN4/OUT4 IN2/OUT2 IN1/OUT1
IN3/OUT3
15.2.10 NQ2 Loopbacks

Table 15-26 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NQ2 boards. Table 15-26 Loopbacks supported by NQ2 boards Cross-Connect Level ODU0 (available only for OptiX OSN 8800) Board TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2 Loopback Type Channel inloop Description For channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-66. For channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-70. Channel outloop For channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-68. For channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-71.
WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop TN53NQ2 Channel inloop
See Figure 15-72. See Figure 15-73. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-66. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure 15-67.
Channel outloop
Mapping path: ODU0>ODU1->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-68. Mapping path: ODU0>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure 15-69.
ODU1
TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2 TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2 TN53NQ2
Channel inloop WDM-side outloop Channel outloop WDM-side inloop Channel inloop Channel outloop
ODU2/ODU2e
TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2// TN53NQ2 TN54NQ2 TN53NQ2
WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop Channel inloop Channel outloop
ODUflex
Loopbacks Supported by TN52NQ2/TNM53NQ2/TN54NQ2 When the CrossConnect Level Is ODU0

For ODU0 services from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed at ODU0 and ODU1 loopback points and WDM-side inloops and WDM-side outloops can be performed at ODU2 loopback points. l Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-66, 32 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
903
Figure 15-66 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TNM53NQ2/ TN54NQ2 board(ODU0ODU1-ODU2)
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
904
Figure 15-67 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NQ2 board(ODU0 ODU2)
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 IN4/OUT4
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
ODU2
OTU2
Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-68, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The four ODU2 services are deconverged into 16 ODU1 services, each ODU1 service being deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services are loopbacked to the WDM side at ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services are passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
905
Figure 15-68 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TNM53NQ2/ TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
906
Figure 15-69 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NQ2 board(ODU0 ODU2)
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 IN4/OUT4
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
ODU2
OTU2
Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-70, 32 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
907
Figure 15-70 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-71, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The four ODU2 services are deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
908
Figure 15-71 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-72, 32 ODU0 services from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services. Then, the ODU1 services are converged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 service can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
909
Figure 15-72 WDM-side inloops on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-73, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
910
Figure 15-73 WDM-side outloops on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ODU1
ODU2
ODU1 ODU1
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
Loopbacks Supported by TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2//TNM53NQ2TN54NQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU1

When ODU1 services are cross-connected from the backplane, the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points and WDM-side outloops at ODU2 loopback points, but the TN51NQ2 board supports only channel inloops and WDM-side outloops. l Channel inloops As shown in Figure 15-74, 16 ODU1 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
911
Figure 15-74 Channel inloops on the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2//TNM53NQ2TN54NQ2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN4/OUT4
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-75, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
912
Figure 15-75 WDM-side outloops on the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-76, four OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The four ODU2 services are deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
913
Figure 15-76 Channel outloops on the TN52NQ2//TNM53NQ2TN54NQ2 board
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-77, 16 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
914
Figure 15-77 WDM-side inloops on the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
Loopbacks Supported by TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2//TNM53NQ2TN54NQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloops and WDM-side outloops can be performed at ODU2/ODU2e loopback points. l WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-78, any N of the four ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane can be loopbacked at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
915
Figure 15-78 WDM-side inloops on the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-79, four OTU2/OTU2e services received on the WDM side are demapped into four ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2/ODU2e services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
916
Figure 15-79 WDM-side outloops on the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN1/OUT1
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
Loopbacks Supported by TN53NQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODUflex

For ODUflex services cross-connected from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed at ODUflex loopback points. l Channel inloops As shown in Figure 15-80, any N of the eight ODUflex services cross-connected from the backplane can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODUflex loopback point while the remaining ODUflex services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
917
Figure 15-80 Channel inloops on the TN53NQ2 board
ODUflex ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-81, four OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into four ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Each ODU2 service is deconverged into two ODUflex services. Any N of the eight ODUflex services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODUflex loopback point while the remaining ODUflex services can directly be passed through.
Figure 15-81 Channel outloops on the TN53NQ2 board
ODUflex ODUflex
ODU2
OTU2
IN1/OUT1
ODUflex ODU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services

Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OTU2
IN4/OUT4
WDM-side
918

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NQ2, refer to Table 15-27. Table 15-27 NQ2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the path loopback.
Channel Loopback
Service Mode
l TN51NQ2: ODU1, ODU2 Default: ODU1 l TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN53NQ2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN53NQ2 only in the compatible mode.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
919
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field Enable Auto-Sensing
Description Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, FEC Type and Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.
NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Relay Mode. This parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2. For ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.
FEC Working State
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
NOTE Only TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports AFEC.
FEC Mode
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
920
Field Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz)
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Line Rate Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default: Standard Mode OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Used to configure the line rate of OTN. See D.24 Line Rate for more information.
Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by TN52NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
921
Field ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode
Value Assign random, Assign consecutive Default: Assign random
Description Sets ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode of the board. Assign random: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex>ODU2. Assign consecutive: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU1 >ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2.
NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN53NQ2 in the standard mode.
NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2.
Board Mode
Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Line Mode
The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario. See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE This parameter is only supported by the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2.
15.2.12 Specifications of the NQ2

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
922
Board TN51NQ 2
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km
TN52NQ 2
N/A
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PINXFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
TN53NQ 2
N/A
TN54NQ 2
N/A
NOTE
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
923

Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
924
Line code format
Table 15-30 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
925
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km SLM 40 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km SLM 80
km
SLM 10
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
dB nm
6 NA
8.2 NA
9 NA
dB
30
30
30
G.959.1-compliant
dBm dBm
-11 -1
-14 -1
-24 -7
dB
-27
-27
-27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
926
l l l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN51NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN52NQ2: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.) TN53NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN54NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar d TN51 NQ2 WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 88 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 95
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
92 88
99 97
TN52 NQ2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
92 45
101 50
TN53 NQ2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
49 53
54 58.3
TN54 NQ2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
927
Boar d
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 57
Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 62.3
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
15.3 NS2
NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board

The available functional versions of the NS2 board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 NS2 TN12 NS2 TN52 NS2 TN53 NS2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y Y Y

Function: l The TN11NS2/TN12NS2 supports AFEC, and the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 15.3.3 Functions and Features. TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals. TN12NS2 supports the crossconnection of ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals. TN52NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals. TN53NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex, ODU2 and ODU2e signals. OptiX OSN 6800: The TN11NS2 supports cross-connection of paired slots while the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 does not.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OptiX OSN 3800: The TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any slots of the four-slot mesh group. The TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals between any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group. The TN12NS2/TN53NS2 board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM side, the TN53NS2 board supports tunable and pluggable optical modules on the WDM side. The TN11NS2 or TN52NS2 board does not support that function.
For details, see15.3.3 Functions and Features. Specification: l The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.3.12 Specifications of the NS2.
Table 15-31 Substitution rules of the NS2 board Origin al Board TN11N S2 TN12N S2 Substi tute Board None TN53 NS2 Substitution Rules
The TN53NS2 can be created as TN12NS2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NS2 functions as the TN12NS2.
TN52N S2 TN53N S2
TN53 NS2 None
The TN53NS2 can be created as TN52NS2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NS2 functions as the TN52NS2. -
15.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NS2 board implements conversion between eight crossconnect ODU0 signals or two cross-connect ODUflex signals or four cross-connect ODU1 signals or one cross-connect ODU2 signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals. The NS2 board also converts between one cross-connect ODU2e signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals.
Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between four channels of ODU1 and one channel of OTU2 signals
Figure 15-82 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1 Client side 8 TOM 4 WDM side 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 4 1 TOM 8 1 Client side
Application scenario 2 of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between one channel of ODU2/ODU2e and one channel of OTU2/OTU2e signals
G.694.1 G.694.1
NS2
MUX
DMUX
NS2 TDX
Client side
TDX NS2
Client side
DMUX WDM side
MUX WDM side
NS2
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2: conversion between eight channels of ODU0 and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
1 Client side 8 TOM 8 WDM side 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 8 1 TOM 8 1 Client side
NOTE
The TN52NS2/TN53NS2 boards support this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
930
Application scenario 4 of the TN53NS2: conversion between two channels of ODUflex and one channel of OTU2 signals (Only for OpitiX OSN 8800)
MUX Client side TDX NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1 NS2 TDX Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, only the TN53NS2/TN53TDX boards support ODUflex signals. The total bandwidth of two channels of ODUflex signals corresponding to one channel of OTU2 signals cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.

The NS2 board is used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-32.
NOTE
The ODUflex is only supported by the TN52NS2 in the OptiX OSN 8800. The ODU0 is only supported by the TN52NS2 and TN53NS2 in the OptiX OSN 8800. Only the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 support ODU2/ODU2e.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
931
Table 15-32 Functions and features of the NS2 board Function and feature Basic function Description OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Maps eight channels of ODU0 signals or four channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODUflex signals or one channel of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU2 signals, or maps one channel of ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals and ODU1 signals. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from the crossconnect board into one channel of OTU2 signals. The board converts the OTU2 signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G. 694.1. The reverse process is similar. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2 signals sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU2 signals, or maps one channel of ODU2e signals into one channel of OTU2e signals. The board converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from the other three boards in the four-slot mesh group into one channel of OTU2 signals, and converts the OTU2 signals into a standard DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group into one channel of OTU2 signals, and converts the OTU2/OTU2e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
932
Function and feature Crossconnect capabilities
Description OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODUflex signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11NS2: Supports the grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2: Supports grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals to any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports an ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
933
Description TN11NS2: l Supports the OTU2 interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. TN12NS2: l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. TN52NS2/TN53NS2: l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU0. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l TN53NS2 supports TCM functions and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. l TN53NS2 supports PM functions for ODUflex.
ESC function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
934
Function and feature PRBS function
Description Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.

NOTE If the TN53NS2 board interconnects with another line board, PRBS must be enabled for the TN53NS2 board and the connected line board when the following condition is met: ODU0, ODU1, or ODUflex cross-connections are configured on the TN53NS2 board, or the TN53NS2 board works in compatible mode but no cross-connection is configured for it.
Not supported TN11NS2/TN12NS2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN52NS2/TN53NS2: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Supported by the TN53NS2
NOTE The TN53NS2 board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
Supported only when the TN53NS2 board receives ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex signals cross-connected from the backplane Supported Supported by the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
935
Function and feature XFP
Description TN12NS2/TN53NS2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Fixed Wavelength). TN53NS2: Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side (Tunable Wavelength).
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
936
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
937

The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, 1588 module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-86 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2 board. Figure 15-87 and Figure 15-90 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2 board. Figure 15-88, Figure 15-89 and Figure 15-90 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board. Figure 15-90, Figure 15-91 and Figure 15-92 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NS2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
938
Figure 15-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800)
ODU1 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O Cross-connect module OTN processing module OUT
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
939
Figure 15-87 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
940
Figure 15-88 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
8XODU0/4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
941
Figure 15-89 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
942
Figure 15-90 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (OptiX OSN 3800)
4XODU1 Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
943
Figure 15-91 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NS2 board(OptiX OSN 6800)
4 X ODU1/ 1 X ODU2/1 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection)
WDM side E/O

1588
OTN processing module Signal processing module
OUT
O/E
IN
Required voltage
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
944
Figure 15-92 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53NS2 board(OptiX OSN 8800)
8 X ODU0/4 X ODU1/ 2 X ODUflex/ 1 X ODU2/1 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection)
WDM side E/O

1588
OUT
OTN processing module Signal processing module
IN
Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The signal processing module of the NS2 board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l ODU0 electrical signals ODU1 electrical signals ODUflex electrical signals ODU2 electrical signals ODU2e electrical signals
NOTE
ODU0 is supported by TN52NS2/TN53NS2 in OptiX OSN 8800. ODUflex is supported by TN53NS2 in OptiX OSN 8800. ODU2/ODU2e is supported in OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
945
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS2 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the NS2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The signal processing module receives eight channels of ODU0 signals, or four channels of ODU1 signals, or two channels of ODUflex signals, or one channel of ODU2 signals, or one channel of ODU2e signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 from the WDM side through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals, or four channels of ODU1 signals, or two channels of ODUflex signals, or one channel of ODU2 signals, or one channel of ODU2e signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a cross-connect module and an OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Grooms electrical signals between the NS2 and the other board through the backplane. The groomed service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex/ODU2/ODU2e signals.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12NS2 does not contain a cross-connect unit. This board, however, is always connected to the cross-connect board.
OTN processing module Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
15.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board.

Figure 15-93 shows the front panel of the NS2 board. Figure 15-93 Front panel of the NS2 board
NS2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
NS2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
947
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board. Table 15-33 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS2 board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
Laser Hazard Level

15.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one NS2 board. Table 15-34 shows the valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board. Table 15-34 Valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Table 15-35 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS2 board.
Table 15-35 Valid slots for the TN52NS2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Table 15-36 shows the valid slots for the TN53NS2 board. Table 15-36 Valid slots for the TN53NS2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
15.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2



Table 15-37 lists the mapping between the logical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-37 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS2 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Number on the NMS 1
949
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The NS2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. l Figure 15-94, Figure 15-95 and Figure 15-96 show the port diagrams for the TN52NS2/ TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN11NS2 board in the compatible mode. Table 15-38 lists the port descriptions. Figure 15-97 shows the port diagram for the TN53NS2 board in standard mode. Table 15-39 lists the port descriptions.
NOTE
When used in OptiX OSN 6800, the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 and ODU2 signals from the backplane. When used in OptiX OSN 3800, the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board can only crossconnect ODU1 signals from the backplane. When used in OptiX OSN 3800, the TN12NS2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 signals from the backplane. When used in OptiX OSN 6800, the TN52ND2 board can only cross-connect ODU1 and ODU2 signals from the backplane. The cross-connect granularity supported by the board is determined by that supported by the cross-connect board in the same subrack. For information about cross-connect boards, see 21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
NOTE
When the NS2 board works in compatible mode, or when the board works in standard mode and ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive, observe the following points: l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
950
Figure 15-94 Port diagram of the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (compatible mode)

8 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
4 x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
1 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 ODU2
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
Crossconnect module Multiplexin g module Service processing module
ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
ODU0 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
951
Figure 15-95 Port diagram of the TN12NS2 board (compatible mode)

Other tributary/ line/PID board Other tributary/ line/PID board
4 x ODU1 51 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
1 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 ODU2
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU2 mapping path
Service processing module ODU1 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
952
Figure 15-96 Port diagram of the TN11NS2 board (compatible mode)

Other tributary/ line/PID board
4 x ODU1
Backplane
1(IN/OUT)-1 1 (IN1/OUT1)-1 1(IN/OUT)-4
Crossconnect module Multiplexin g module Service processing module
ODU1 mapping path
Table 15-38 Meaning of NM port of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (compatible mode) Port Name ODU0LP1ODU0LP4 ODU1LP1 Meaning Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channels 1 and 2. Internal logical ports. Each of the port provides optical channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. Internal logical ports of the board. Each of the ports provides optical channel 1. Internal logical ports. Each of the port provides optical channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. WDM-side optical ports. Automatic Cross-Connection Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU1LP port. Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the ODU2LP port Automatic cross-connections are established between these ports and the IN/OUT port -
ODU2LP1
IN/OUTa
IN/OUT
a: The port is available only on the TN11NS2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
953
Figure 15-97 Port diagram of the TN53NS2 (standard mode)

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1 2XODUflex ODUflex:2 ODU2:1 OCH:1
IN/OUT-OCH:1
1 xODU2/ 1xODU 2e
OCH :1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
ODU1:1 4 xODU1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH : 1 IN/OUT
ODU0:1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
ODU1:1 ODU2:1 OCH :1
ODU0:2 8 xODU0 ODU 0:1 ODU 0:2
ODU 1:4
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
ODU0:1 8 xODU0 ODU2:1 ODU0: 8 OCH :1
Backplane
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Service processing module ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU1 >ODU2) ODU0 mapping path (ODU0 >ODU2)
ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
954

NOTE
Table 15-39 Meaning of NM port of the TN53NS2 board (standard mode) Port Name IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) Definition Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2) Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the backplane (ODU0->ODU2) Mapping path for ODU1 signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e signals received from the backplane Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the backplane WDM-side optical ports
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1-8)
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) IN/OUT-OCH:1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1-2)
IN/OUT
15.3.9 Configuring Cross-Connections

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site.
Cross-Connection Configuration of Services

l l The side. The
NOTE
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. The NS2 board can work in the standard or compatible mode. For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
955
Figure 15-98, Figure 15-99 and Figure 15-100 show the created ODU0 cross-connections. Figure 15-98 TN52NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level)
Client side
Other board a Cross-connect module
WDM side
NS2
2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS2 board The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
956
Figure 15-99 TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
compatible mode
NS2
standard mode
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:7 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
Other board d (standard mode)
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
957
Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 Other board d TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2
Figure 15-100 TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU0 level: ODU0->ODU2)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2
NS2
2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:7 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8
Standard mode
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:7 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:8 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
Other board c (standard IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 mode)

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
958

NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. The IN/OUT optical port supports ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 mapping when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign consecutive. Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 Other board d TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Figure 15-101, Figure 15-102 and Figure 15-103 show the created ODU1 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
959
Figure 15-101 TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level)

Client side
WDM side
NS2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Other board c
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 (standard mode)
Other board a TN12NS2: TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS TN52NS2: TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN12NS2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) TN52NS2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
960
Figure 15-102 TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODU1 level)

Client side
WDM side
NS2
2

IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
compatible mode
standard mode
WDM side
Other board a TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
961
Client side
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-1
NS2
2
1(IN/OUT)-2 1(IN/OUT)-3 1(IN/OUT)-4
WDM side
Other board b Cross-connect module
Other board a TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/ TN11TQS/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
962
Figure 15-104 TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board cross-connections (ODU2 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS2
2 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
WDM side
Other board b
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 (compatible mode)

IN/OUT-OCH:1
Other board a TN12NS2: TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL TN52NS2: TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/ TN53TQX Other board b TN12NS2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52NS2: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/ TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
963

Client side
WDM side
NS2
2
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 compatible mode
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
standard mode
WDM side
Other board b (compatible mode) Other board c (standard mode)
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1
Other board a TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/ TN53TQX Other board b TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/ TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Figure 15-106 shows the created ODUflex cross-connections..
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
964
Figure 15-106 TN53NS2 board cross-connections (ODUflex level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
NS2
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
WDM side
Other board b Cross-connect module
IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
NOTE
The IN/OUT optical port supports ODUflex when ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode is Assign random. Other board a TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2

Figure 15-107 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NS2 board. l l As shown in (1) of Figure 15-107, signals at the ODU0 , ODUflex and ODU1 levels are transmitted together. As shown in (2) of Figure 15-107, signals at the ODU2 level are processed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
965
Figure 15-107 Example of service cross-connections on the NS2 board

ODU0 TOM TDX ND2 ODU0 ODUflex ODU1 ODU1 IN/OUT NS2
TDX/ ODU2 NS2 ND2
IN/OUT
(1)
(2)
15.3.10 NS2 Loopbacks

Table 15-40 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NS2 boards. Table 15-40 Loopbacks supported by NS2 boards Cros sCon nect Leve l ODU 0 Board Loopback Type Description
TN52NS2
Channel inloop
For channel inloop at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-108. For channel inloop at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-112.
Channel outloop
For channel outloop at ODU0 loopback points, see Figure 15-110. For channel outloop at ODU1 loopback points, see Figure 15-113.
WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
966
Cros sCon nect Leve l
Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN53NS2
Channel inloop
Mapping path: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure 15-108. Mapping path: ODU0->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-109.
Channel outloop
Mapping path: ODU0->ODU1>ODU2->OTU2, see Figure 15-110. Mapping path: ODU0->ODU2>OTU2, see Figure 15-111.
ODU 1
TN11NS2/TN12NS2/ TN52NS2
TN53NS2
ODU 2/ ODU 2e ODU flex
TN12NS2/TN52NS2/ TN53NS2
WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop
TN53NS2
NOTE
Only the TN52NS2 and TN53NS2 boards used in the OptiX OSN 8800 support ODU0.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
967
Loopbacks Supported by TN52NS2/TN53NS2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU0

For ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed at ODU0 and ODU1 loopback points, and WDM-side inloops and WDM-side outloops can be performed at ODU2 loopback points. l Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-108, any N of the eight ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane can be loopbacked to the backplane at ODU0 loopback points while the remaining ODU0 services can directly be passed through. Figure 15-108 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
968
Figure 15-109 Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NS2 board(ODU0>ODU2)
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side
Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-110, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services, each ODU1 service being deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at ODU0 loopback points while the remaining ODU0 services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
969
Figure 15-110 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
Backplane
As shown in Figure 15-111, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into eight ODU0 services. Any N of the eight ODU0 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at ODU0 loopback points while the remaining ODU0 services can directly be passed through. Figure 15-111 Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points on the TN53NS2 board(ODU0>ODU2)
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
WDM-side
Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-112, eight ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can directly be passed through.
Figure 15-112 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points As shown in Figure 15-113, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
971
Figure 15-113 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points on the TN52NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services
WDM-side
WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-114, eight ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into four ODU1 services. Then, the four ODU1 services are converged into one ODU2 services. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point.
Figure 15-114 WDM-side inloops on the TN52NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
WDM-side outloops
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
972
As shown in Figure 15-115, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 15-115 WDM-side outloops on the TN52NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 WDM-side Loopbacked services OTU2 IN/OUT
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Loopbacks Supported by TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU1

For ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed at ODU1 loopback points, and WDM-side inloops and WDM-side outloops can be performed at ODU2 loopback points. l Channel inloops As shown in Figure 15-116, any N of the four ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
973
Figure 15-116 Channel inloops on the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-117, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the four ODU1 services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback point while the remaining ODU1 services can directly be passed through.
Figure 15-117 Channel outloops on the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
WDM-side inloops
As shown in Figure 15-118, four ODU1 services from the backplane are converged into one ODU2 service. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback point. Figure 15-118 WDM-side inloops on the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-119, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback point.
Figure 15-119 WDM-side outloops on the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked services WDM-side ODU2 OTU2 IN/OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
975
Loopbacks Supported by TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

For ODU2/ODU2e services cross-connected from the backplane, WDM-side inloops and WDM-side outloops can be performed at ODU2/ODU2e loopback points. l WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 15-120, one ODU2/ODU2e service from the backplane is loopbacked at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point. Figure 15-120 WDM-side inloops on the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN/OUT
Backplane Loopbacked services
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 15-121, one OTU2/OTU2e service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2/ODU2e service after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. The ODU2/ODU2e service is loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODU2/ODU2e loopback point.
Figure 15-121 WDM-side outloops on the TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN53NS2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/ OTU2e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
976
Loopbacks Supported by TN53NS2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODUflex

For ODUflex services cross-connected from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed at ODUflex loopback points. l Channel inloops As shown in Figure 15-122, any of the two ODUflex services cross-connected from the backplane can be loopbacked to the backplane at the ODUflex loopback point while the remaining ODUflex service can directly be passed through. Figure 15-122 Channel inloops on the TN53NS2 board
ODUflex ODU2 OTU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side IN/OUT
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 15-123, one OTU2 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into two ODUflex services. Any of the two ODUflex services can be loopbacked to the WDM side at the ODUflex loopback point while the remaining ODUflex service can directly be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
977
Figure 15-123 Channel outloops on the TN53NS2 board
ODUflex ODU2 OTU2 ODUflex Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side IN/OUT

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of NS2, refer to Table 15-41. Table 15-41 NS2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
978
Field Channel Loopback
Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, OutloopS Default: NonLoopback
Description Sets the path loopback.
Service Mode
l TN11NS2: NA l TN12NS2: ODU1, ODU2 Default: ODU1 l TN52NS2: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN53NS2: Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic

NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN53NS2 only in the compatible mode.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
979
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2 /TN52NS2/TN53NS2.
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN11NS2 board.
Line Rate
Used to configure the line rate of OTN.

NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2/TN52NS2//TN53NS2.
See D.24 Line Rate for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
980
Description The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE This parameter is only supported by the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN53NS2. The parameter is supported by the TN53NS2 only in the standard mode.
NULL Mapping Status
NOTE The parameter is only supported by the TN53NS2.
The ODU Timeslot Configuration Mode parameter sets and queries the timeslot configuration mode of a board. Assign random: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, or ODUflex and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU2, ODU1>ODU2, and ODUflex>ODU2. Assign consecutive: The service rate can be ODU0, ODU1, or ODU2 and the mapping path is ODU0>ODU1 >ODU2, or ODU1->ODU2.
NOTE The parameter is supported only by the TN53NS2 in the standard mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
981
15.3.12 Specifications of the NS2

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN11NS 2 WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN TN12NS 2 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN52NS 2 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN53NS 2 N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
982

NOTE
NOTE

Line code format
NRZ
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
983
Line code format
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB THz GHz
10
10
NAa
10
10
192.10 to 196.05 5 5 5 5 5
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
dB
35
35
35
35
35
ps/ nm
1200
1200
4800
800
800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
984
Unit
dBm
-16
dBm
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27

Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
985
Unit
nm dB ps/nm
0.3 35 800
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
986
Unit
dB ps/nm
35 800
Table 15-46 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km NRZ SLM 10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km NRZ SLM 40
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm dBm dBm dB nm 1290 to 1330 -1 -6 6 NA 1530 to 1565 2 -1 8.2 NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
987
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 30
dB -
30 G.959.1-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1260 to 1565 -11 -1 -27 PIN 1260 to 1605 -14 -1 -27
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11NS2/TN12NS2: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb) TN52NS2: 1.3 kg (2.86 lb.) TN53NS2: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 38.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 41.8
TN11NS 2
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD
39.0
42.9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
988
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 41.0 44.0 39.5
Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 45.1 48.4 43.45
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD TN12NS 2 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN TN52NS 2 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN TN53NS 2 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
40.5
44.55
42.5 45.5 25.35
46.75 50.05 28.39
30.32 46.5 47 20
34 51.1 51.7 24
21
25
15.4 NS3
NS3: 40G line service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
989

The available functional versions of the NS3 board are TN11, TN52, and TN54.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 NS3 TN52 NS3 TN54 NS3 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 N N N

l The TN11NS3/TN52NS3 supports AFEC, and the TN54NS3 supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other. For details, see 15.4.3 Functions and Features. Function: The TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board support the cross-connections of ODU0/ODU1 level, and only the TN54NS3 board supports the cross-connections of ODU3 level. For details, see 15.4.3 Functions and Features and 15.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. Only the TN54NS3 board supports IEEE 1588v2 function. For details, see 15.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. The TN54NS3 board can implement the electrical regeneration of OTU3/OTU3e signals. For details, see 15.4.2 Application. l Appearance: The TN11NS3 board and the TN52NS3 board use the same front panel. The TN54NS3 board uses a different front panel from the preceding boards. For details, see 15.4.5 Front Panel and 15.4.12 Specifications of the NS3. l Specification: The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.4.12 Specifications of the NS3.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
990
Table 15-47 Substitution rules of the NS3 board Original Board TN11NS3 Substitute Board TN52NS3 Substitution Rules The TN52NS3 can be created as TN11NS3 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN52NS3 functions as the TN11NS3. -
TN52NS3 TN54NS3
None None
15.4.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NS3 board implements conversion between 32 crossconnect ODU0 signals or 16 cross-connect ODU1 signals or four cross-connect ODU2 signals or one cross-connect ODU3 signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU3 signals. The NS3 board also converts between four cross-connect ODU2e signals or one crossconnect ODU3e signals and one ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU3e signals. In addition, the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services.
Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals
1 TQX 4 Client side 4 MUX NS3 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side DMUX G.694.1 NS3 4 1 TQX 4 Client side 1
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
991
Application scenario 2 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between sixteen channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
1 TOM 8 Client side 1 TOM 8 4 4 4 NS3 G.694.1 DMUX 1 WDM side WDM side 4 DMUX 1 TOM 8 MUX MUX G.694.1 NS3 4 4 1 1 TOM 8 Client side 1 1
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between thirty-two channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
1 TOM 8 Client side 1 TOM 8 8 4 8 NS3 G.694.1 DMUX 1 WDM side WDM side 8 MUX 1 TOM 8 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS3 8 4 1 1 TOM 8 Client side 1 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
992

NOTE
The TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800. In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line Mode.
Application scenario 4 of the TN54NS3 board: conversion between one channel of ODU3/ODU3e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals
G.694.1 MUX TSXL NS3 DMUX MUX DMUX NS3 TSXL G.694.1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line Mode and the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.
Application scenario 5 of the TN54NS3 board: implement the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signal
WDM side DMUX IN
NS3
WDM side OUT MUX
G.694.1 MUX OUT

NS3
G.694.1 IN DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode. The TN54NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports this application scenario.

The NS3 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-48 and Table 15-49.
NOTE
ODU0 is only supported by the TN52NS3 /TN54NS3 in the OptiX OSN 8800. ODU3/ODU3e is only supported by the TN54NS3 in the OptiX OSN 8800. The relay mode is only supported by the TN54NS3. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode. The TN54NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports relay mode.
Table 15-48 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Line Mode) Function and feature Basic function Description Maps 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, or four channels of ODU2 signals or one channel of ODU3 signals sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU3 signals, or maps four channels of ODU2e signals or one channel of ODU3e signals sent from the crossconnect board into one channel of OTU3e signals. The board converts the OTU3/OTU3e signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar, and in this process, dispersion compensation can be performed for signals received on the WDM side. Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals and the ODU2/ODU2e signals. Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e signals between the NS3 and the cross-connect board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
994
Description TN11NS3: l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU3 and ODU2. l Supports SM functions for OTU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2. TN52NS3: l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU3, ODU2, ODU1, and ODU0. l Supports SM functions for OTU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3, ODU2 and ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0. TN54NS3: l Supports the OTU3/OTU3e interface on the WDM side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU0, ODU1, ODU3, and ODU3. l Supports SM functions for OTU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU1, ODU2 and ODU3. l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3. l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3.
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
995
Function and feature LPT function FEC encoding
Description Not supported TN11NS3/TN52NS3: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.1. TN54NS3: l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Supported by TN54NS3. The TN54NS3 board supports this feature only when ODU0, ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e signals are cross-connected from the backplane. Supported Supported by the TN52NS3 and TN54NS3 l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SPRing protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
996
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
997
Table 15-49 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Relay Mode) Function and feature Basic function Regeneratin g rate OTN function Description The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals. OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s OTU3e: OTN service at a rate of 44.57 Gbit/s l Provides the OTU3 interface on WDM-side. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. l Supports TCM function for ODU3. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU3. WDM specification Tunable wavelength function Supports DWDM specifications. Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of: l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz l 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
998
Function and feature ESC function PRBS function FEC encoding
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback Protocol or standard compliance
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported Not supported Not Supported Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
999

The NS3 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-129 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS3 board. Figure 15-130 and Figure 15-131 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS3 board. Figure 15-132 and Figure 15-133 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NS3 board.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports the ODU0 and ODU3/ODU3e signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1000
Figure 15-129 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 6800
4 X ODU2/4 X ODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1001
16XODU1/4XODU2/4XODU2e Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module
OUT
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1002
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/4XODU2e
Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O OTN processing module

OUT
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1003
Figure 15-132 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 8800 (Line Mode)
32 X ODU0/16 X ODU1/4 X ODU2/ 4 X ODU2e/1XODU3/1XODU3e
Backplane (service corss-connection) WDM side E/O

OUT
1588
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1004
Figure 15-133 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 (Relay Mode)
WDM side O/E
IN
WDM side OTN processing module E/O

OUT
SCC
Backplane ( controlled by SCC)

The signal processing module of the NS3 board accesses ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ ODU3e electrical signals. The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS3 board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS3 to the WDM side of the NS3, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The OTN processing module receives thirty-two channels of ODU0 or sixteen channels of ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals. The OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/ O conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU3/OTU3e framing and decoding of FEC/ AFEC. Then, the module sends out thirty-two channels of ODU0 or sixteen channels of
ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e electrical signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
NOTE
Only the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 support ODU0 signals. Only the TN54NS3 supports ODU3/ODU3e signals.
The TN54NS3 board processes clock signals in two directions. l l Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock processing board through the communication module. Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the downstream NE through a service board.

The NS3 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths that carry OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical interface, and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l OTN processing module Frames OTU3/OTU3e signals, processes overheads in OTU3/OTU3e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations.
15.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NS3 board.

Figure 15-134 and Figure 15-135 show the front panel of the NS3 board. Figure 15-134 Front panel of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board
NS3
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
NS3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1007
Figure 15-135 Front panel of the TN54NS3 board
NS3
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
NS3
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NS3 board. Table 15-50 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 15-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS3 board Interface IN Type LC Function Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
Laser Hazard Level

15.4.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11NS3 board, TN52NS3 board, and one slot houses one TN54NS3 board. Table 15-51 shows the valid slots for the TN11NS3 board. Table 15-51 Valid slots for the TN11NS3 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16
NOTE
The online signal bus on the TN11NS3 board connects to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. The slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 15-52 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS3 board. Table 15-52 Valid slots for the TN52NS3 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28-IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU13-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30-IU36 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1009

NOTE
The online signal bus on the TN52NS3 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN52NS3 board, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 15-53 shows the valid slots for the TN54NS3 board. Table 15-53 Valid slots for the TN54NS3 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
When the TN54NS3 board needs to be used as a regeneration board, observe the following principles for selecting a valid slot: l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16, IU17 and IU18, IU19 and IU20, IU21 and IU22, IU23 and IU24, IU25 and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52, IU53 and IU54, IU55 and IU56, IU57 and IU58, IU59 and IU60, IU61 and IU62, IU63 and IU64, IU65 and IU66, or IU67 and IU68. OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in slots IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13, IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22 and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26 and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36. OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. OptiX OSN 6800: The TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU9 and IU10, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, or IU15 and IU16.
15.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NS3



Table 15-54 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-54 Mapping between the physical ports on the NS3 board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NMS 1
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The NS3 board can work in compatible mode. Figure 15-136, Figure 15-137 and Figure 15-138 show the logical Ports of the NS3 board. Table 15-55 describes the meaning of each port.
NOTE
For TN54NS3: l l ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode. When used with a TN53TSXL board, Line Rate must be set to Standard Mode for the board.
For TN52NS3: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels only from the backplane. The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see 21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1011
Figure 15-136 Port diagram of the TN54NS3 board

Other Other tributary/line/ tributary/line/ PID board PID board Other tributary/line/ PID board Other tributary/line/ PID board
Backplane
4xODU2/ ODU2e 32 x ODU0 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ ODU0LP4)-2 173(ODU0LP13/ ODU0LP13)-1 173(ODU0LP13/ ODU0LP13)-2 176(ODU0LP16/ ODU0LP16)-1 176(ODU0LP16/ ODU0LP16)-2 16 x ODU1 ODU3/ODU3e
71(ODU2LP1/O ODU1 DU2LP1)-1001
71(ODU2LP1/O ODU1 DU2LP1)-1013 ODU3
81(ODU3LP1/ ODU3LP1)-1
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU2 mapping path
ODU3 mapping path
ODU0 mapping path ODU1 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1012

NOTE
The ODU1 and ODU2 ports in each of the following combinations cannot be used to configure cross-connections at the same time because they share the same ODU2 timeslot: l l l l 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1001 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1004 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 ODU2 port 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1005 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1008 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-2 ODU2 port 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1009 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1012 ODU1 ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-3 ODU2 port 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1013 to 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1016 ODU ports and 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4 ODU2 port

Other tributary/line/ PID board Other tributary/line/ PID board Other tributary/line/ PID board Backplane
32 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164 (ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
173 (ODU0LP13/ODU0LP13)-1 173 (ODU0LP13/ODU0LP13)-2 176 (ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-1 176 (ODU0LP16/ODU0LP16)-2
16 x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
Other tributary/line/ PID board

ODU2
71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2LP1)-1
1 (IN1/OUT1)-1 54 ODU1 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 ODU2 54 ODU1(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4 71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2LP1)-4
ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing module
ODU2 mapping path
ODU0 mapping path
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU1 signals are required, users only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU1LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a cross-connection for transmitting the multiplexed signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1013

Backplane 4 x ODU2/ODU2e 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-2 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-3 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU2 mapping path
Multiplexing module
Table 15-55 Meaning of NM port of the NS3 board Port Name ODU0LP1ODU0LP16 ODU1LP1ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1 Meaning Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1-2. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1-4. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1001-1016.
NOTE This port is used for crossconnections at the ODU1 level.
Automatic Cross-Connection Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU1LP port Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU2LP port Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the ODU2LP port
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1-4.
TN11NS3/TN52NS3: Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/OUT port TN54NS3: Automatic crossconnections between the ports and the ODU3LP port
ODU3LP1
Internal logical port. The optical path is numbered 1.
Automatic cross-connections between the ports and the IN/OUT port
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1014
Port Name IN/OUT
Meaning Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Automatic Cross-Connection -

NOTE
When the system uses electrical-layer ASON, the boards in standard mode cannot interconnect with those in compatible mode on the WDM side. In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1015
Figure 15-139 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU0 level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 2
NS3 (compatible mode)
WDM side 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2

Other board c
(standard mode)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
board a board b board c
TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1016
Figure 15-140 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3 board (ODU1 level)
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 1
Other board a
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-2 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-3 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
board a borad b
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS/TN54THA/ TN54TOA TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/ TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
board c
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1017

Client side
WDM side
WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 52(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
board a board b board c
TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1018
Figure 15-142 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU2 level)
Client side
WDM side
NS3 (compatible mode) Cross-connect module

2
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1
board a
TN11NS3: TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL TN52NS3: TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL/TN53TQX TN54NS3: TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1019

board b TN11NS3:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52NS3: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/ TN54ENQ2 TN54NS3: TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Client side
1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
Other board a
WDM side NS3

(compatible mode) Cross-connect module
WDM side
Other board b
2 81(ODU3LP1/ODU3LP1)-1
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NS3
board a board b
TN53TSXL TN54NS3

Figure 15-144 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NS3 board. l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
As shown in (1) of Figure 15-144, signals at the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2 levels are transmitted together. As shown in (2) of Figure 15-144, signals at the ODU3 level are processed.
Figure 15-144 Example of service cross-connections on the NS3 board

ODU0 TOM ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ND2 ODU2 ODU2 TDX ODU2 IN1/OUT1 ODU3 IN1/OUT1
TOM
NS3
TSXL
NS3
(1)
(2)
15.4.10 NS3 Loopbacks

Table 15-56 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NS3 boards. Table 15-56 Loopbacks supported by NS3 boards Cros sCon nect Leve l ODU 0 (avail able only for Opti X OSN 8800) Board Loopback Type Description
TN52 NS3
See Figure 15-145. See Figure 15-146. See Figure 15-147. See Figure 15-148. See Figure 15-149. See Figure 15-150. See Figure 15-151. See Figure 15-152. See Figure 15-153. See Figure 15-154. See Figure 15-155. See Figure 15-156.
TN54 NS3
ODU 1
TN52 NS3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1021
Cros sCon nect Leve l
Board
Loopback Type
Description
TN54 NS3
See Figure 15-157. See Figure 15-158. See Figure 15-159. See Figure 15-160. See Figure 15-161. See Figure 15-162.
ODU 2/ ODU 2e
TN11 NS3/ TN52 NS3/ TN54 NS3 TN11 NS3/ TN52 NS3 TN11 NS3 TN52 NS3 TN54 NS3
WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-163.
WDM-side inloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop
See Figure 15-164. See Figure 15-165. See Figure 15-166. See Figure 15-167. See Figure 15-168. See Figure 15-169.
ODU 3/ ODU 3e (avail able only for Opti X OSN 8800)
TN54 NS3
Loopbacks Supported by TN52NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU0

For ODU0 services from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed at ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2 loopback points, WDM-side inloops can be performed at ODU2 loopback points and WDM-side outloops can be performed at OTU3 loopback point.

NOTE
If channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU2 loopback points, neither inloops nor outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels. Similarly, if channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU1 loopback points, neither inloops nor outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU0 channels.
Channel inloop Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown inFigure 15-145 , 32 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-145 , 32 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane and are converged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. , 32 ODU0 Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-145 services are cross-connected from the backplane. The ODU0 services are converged into 16 ODU1 services and then into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points. The remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Figure 15-145 Channel inloops on the TN52NS3 board

32 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OTU3
IN/OUT
WDM-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services Pass-through services Loopbacked services

1023
Channel outloop Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-146 , one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into four ODU2 services, each of which is then deconverged into four ODU1 services. After that, each ODU1 service is further deconverged into two OD0 services. Any N of the ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. , one OTU3 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-146 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into four ODU2 services, each of which is then deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. , one OTU3 Channel outloops at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-146 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is then deconverged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback points and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1024

32 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services Pass-through services Loopbacked services Pass-through services Loopbacked services ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 OTU3 IN/OUT 4
WDM-side
WDM-side inloop
NOTE
WDM-side inloops and Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points are similar except for the number of services looped back.
As shown in Figure 15-147, 32 ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services, which are then converged into four ODU2 services. The four ODU2 services are looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1025

32 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 Backplane Loopbacked services ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 OTU3 IN/OUT 4
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-148, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is directly looped back to the WDM side at the OTU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1026
Figure 15-148 WDM-side outloop on the TN52NS3 board

32 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 Backplane Loopbacked service ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 OTU3 IN/OUT 4
WDM-side

For ODU0 services from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed at ODU0 and ODU1 loopback points, WDM-side inloop and WDM-side outloop can be performed at ODU3 loopback point.
NOTE
If channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU1 loopback points, neither inloops nor outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU0 channels.
Channel inloop Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-149 , 32 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. , 32 ODU0 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-149 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1027
32 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0
16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 OTU3 IN/OUT
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1
Channel outloop Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-150 , one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 services after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into 16 ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. , one OTU3 Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-150 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is then deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1028
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-151, 32 ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services, which are then converged into one ODU3 service. The ODU3 service is looped back to the backplane at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1029
Figure 15-151 WDM-side inloop on the TN54NS3 board
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1
WDM-side Loopbacked service
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-152, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1030
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1
WDM-side Loopbacked service

For ODU1 services from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed at ODU1 and ODU2 loopback points, WDM-side inloops can be performed at ODU2 loopback points and WDM-side outloop can be performed at OTU3 loopback point.
NOTE
If channel inloops and channel outloops are configured at ODU2 loopback points, neither inloops nor outloops can be configured on the corresponding ODU1 channels.
Channel inloop , 16 ODU1 Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-153 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. , 16 ODU1 Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points: As shown in Figure 15-153 services are cross-connected from the backplane and are converged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points. The remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1031

16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side OTU3 IN/OUT 4
Channel outloop Channel outloops at ODU1 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-154 , one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is deconverged into four ODU2 services, each of which is then deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 service can be passed through. , one OTU3 Channel outloops at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 15-154 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 services is then deconverged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback points and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1032

16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side OTU3 IN/OUT 4
WDM-side inloops
NOTE
WDM-side inloops and Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points are similar except for the number of services looped back.
As shown in Figure 15-155, 16 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into four ODU2 services, which are looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1033

16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked services Backplane OTU3 IN/OUT 4
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-156, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is direclty looped back to the WDM side at the OTU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1034

16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked service WDM-side OTU3 IN/OUT 4

For ODU1 services from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops can be performed at ODU1 loopback points, WDM-side inloop and WDM-side outloop can be performed at ODU3 loopback point. l Channel inloop As shown in Figure 15-157, 16 ODU1 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU1 loopback points. The remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1035
16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services WDM-side OTU3 IN/OUT
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 15-158, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is then deconverged into 16 ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1036
16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services Backplane OTU3 IN/OUT
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-159, 16 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into one ODU3 service, which is looped back to the backplane at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1037
16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked service WDM-side OTU3 IN/OUT
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-160, one OTU3 service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated. The ODU3 service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1038
16 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU3 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Loopbacked service WDM-side OTU3 IN/OUT
Channel Loopbacks Supported by TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 When the CrossConnect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, channel inloops and channel outloops supported by TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 can be performed at ODU2/ODU2e loopback points. l Channel inloop As shown in Figure 15-161, four ODU2 or ODU2e services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the four ODU2 or ODU2e services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 loopback points. The remaining ODU2 or ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1039
Figure 15-161 Channel inloops on the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e ODU3/ODU3e ODU2/ODU2e OTU3/OTU3e IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 15-162, one OTU3 or OTU3e service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 or ODU3e service after the OTU3 or OTU3e overhead is terminated. The ODU3 or ODU3e service is then deconverged into four ODU2 or ODU2e services. Any N of the ODU2 or ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU2 loopback points and the remaining ODU2 or ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1040
Figure 15-162 Channel outloops on TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
WDM-side Outloops Supported by TN11NS3/TN52NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side outloops supported by TN11NS3/ TN52NS3 can be performed at OTU3/OTU3e loopback point. l WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-163, one OTU3 or OTU3e service received on the WDM side is directly looped back to the WDM side at the OTU3 or OTU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1041
Figure 15-163 WDM-side outloops on the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane Loopbacked service
WDM-side
WDM-side Inloop Supported by TN11NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloops can be performed at OTU3/ OTU3e loopback point. l WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-164, four ODU2 or ODU2e services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into one ODU3 or ODU3e service, which is mapped into one OTU3 or OTU3e service after being added with the OTU3 overhead. The OTU3 or OTU3e service is looped back to the backplane at the OTU3 or OTU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1042
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
WDM-side Inloops Supported by TN52NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloops can be performed at ODU2/ ODU2e loopback points. l WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-165, four ODU2 or ODU2e services cross-connected from the backplane are looped back to the backplane at the ODU2 or ODU2e loopback points.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1043
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
WDM-side Loopbacks Supported by TN54NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

For ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloop and WDM-side outloop can be performed at ODU3/ODU3e loopback point. l WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-166, four ODU2 or ODU2e services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into one ODU3 or ODU3e service, which is looped back to the backplane at the ODU3 or ODU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1044
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-167, one OTU3 or OTU3e service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 or ODU3e service after the OTU3 or OTU3e overhead is terminated. The ODU3 or ODU3e service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 or ODU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1045
ODU2/ODU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
WDM-side
Loopbacks Supported by TN54NS3 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU3/ ODU3e

For ODU3/ODU3e services from the backplane, WDM-side inloop and WDM-side outloop can be performed at ODU3/ODU3e loopback point. l WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-168, one ODU3 or ODU3e service cross-connected from the backplane are looped back to the backplane at the ODU3 or ODU3e loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1046
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-169, one OTU3 or OTU3e service received on the WDM side is demapped into one ODU3 or ODU3e service after the OTU3 or OTU3e overhead is terminated. The ODU3 or ODU3e service is looped back to the WDM side at the ODU3 or ODU3e loopback point.
ODU3/ODU3e
OTU3/OTU3e
IN/OUT
WDM-side

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS.
For parameters of the NS3, refer to Table 15-57. Table 15-57 NS3 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Query or set the path Loopback.
Channel Loopback
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Service Mode
l TN11NS3: not supported l TN52NS3: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic l TN54NS3: Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, Mix Default: Automatic
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1048
Field Enable Auto-Sensing
Description Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of the board to Enabled or Disabled. l When it is set to Enabled, the board supports Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required. l When it is set to Disabled, Line Rate of the board must be set manually and the values of the previous two parameters must be the same as that of the received signals. Otherwise, the services are unavailable.
NOTE This parameter is only valid when the Board Mode is set to Relay Mode. This parameter is supported only by the TN54NS3. In the case of ASON services, this parameter must be set to Enabled.
FEC Working State
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1049
NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. CBAND is the only band now supported.
Receive Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Sets Receive Band Type of a board.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1050
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. Line Rate Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default: l ODU2LP channel: Standard Mode l ODU2LP channel: Speedup Mode OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE Only TN52NS3/TN54NS3 supports this parameter.
Used to configure the line rate of OTN. See D.24 Line Rate for more information.
PRBS Test Status
NOTE Only TN52NS3/54NS3 supports this parameter.
NULL Mapping Status
PMD Threshold(ps) Board Mode
Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default: Electrical Relay Mode
Queries the PMD threshold of the board. The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.
NOTE Only the TN54NS3 supports this parameter.
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1051
15.4.12 Specifications of the NS3

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN11NS 3 WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN TN52NS 3 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN TN54NS 3 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN N/A N/A WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
NOTE
NOTE

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
THz dBm dBm
192.10 to 196.05 0 -5
192.10 to 196.05 0 -5
1052
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
Unit
Value 500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN 500 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 -500 to 500
dB GHz nm nm dB ps/nm
8.2 2.5 0.6 NA 35 -500 to 500
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
THz dBm
192.10 to 196.05 0
192.10 to 196.05 0
1053
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Maximum -3 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthODB-PIN 800 ps/nm-C BandTunable WavelengthDQPSK-PIN -5 NA 2.5 NA 0.3 35 -800 to 800
dBm dB GHz nm nm dB ps/nm
-5 8.2 2.5 0.6 NA 35 -800 to 800
TN11NS3: l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.) Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.4 kg (5.2 lb.)
TN52NS3:
TN54NS3:
l l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.8 kg (3.96 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boa rd TN1 1NS 3 WDM-Side Module Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 76.8 67 118 110 71 60 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131C) (W) 86 75 130 118 78 66
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN
TN5 2NS 3
TN5 4NS 3
15.5 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board

The available functional version of the TBE board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TBE OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1055
15.5.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TBE board converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services, converges multiple flatrate GE services into one full-rate GE service, and implements transparent transmission of GEGE services.
Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Service
For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-170. Figure 15-170 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system
8GE Local
client side Local client side
8GE
10GE TBE 4 GE 4 L4G 4 L4G
G.694.1 MUX
G.694.1 DMUX L4G 4 TBE 4 GE
10GE
DMUX
MUX
L4G 4
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Application Scenario 2: Transparent Transmission of GE-GE Services

For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-171. Figure 15-171 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system
GE 1 1 GE 8 4 Client side GE WDM side WDM side TBE 4 1 L4G DMUX MUX L4G 4 GE Client side L4G MUX DMUX L4G 4 1 8 TBE G.694.1 G.694.1 GE 1 1 GE

The TBE board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-60.
Table 15-60 Functions and features of the TBE board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services. l Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service. l Implements transparent transmission of GE-GE services. The reverse process is similar. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s
NOTE The TBE board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical signal.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals to the central working/protection cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the FE, GE, 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. supported Supports CAR (Committed Access Rate) and CoS (Class of Service). Supports IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah-compliant ETH OAM protocol. l Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from IP port to Trunk port. l Supports manual and static link aggregation. l Supports payload equalization and non-payload equalization
QinQ QoS (Quality of Service) ETH OAM LAG (Link Aggregation Group)
VLAN broadcast CVLAN group port
Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast. Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1057
Function and Feature Layer 2 switching Flow control EPL (Ethernet Private Line) EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line) Port working mode
Description Supports the MAC address learning and aging. Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination. Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line. Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLANbased switching. 10GE optical interface: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN GE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation GE electric interface: auto-negotiation FE optical interface: 100MFULL FE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation
Test frame PRBS function LPT function
Not supported Not supported Supported

NOTE The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source CVLAN and Sink C-VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
Electrical-layer ASON Loopback
Not supported 10GE optical interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop GE optical interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop GE electric interface MAC Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1058
Description PHY Inloop Outloop FE optical interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop FE electric interface MAC Inloop Outloop PHY Inloop Outloop Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported
IEEE 802.1q VLAN All L2 protocols including xSTP, LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc. MPLS protocols All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc.
IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1p priority IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1ag OAM IEEE 802.3ah OAM IEEE IGMP STP, RSTP, MSTP R-APS

The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module, L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-172 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1059
Figure 15-172 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board
RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8 RX TX
GE
16
O/E 8 E/O
Client-side GE optical module
16
L2 switching module 16
O/E E/O
Client-side 10GE optical module
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TBE board accesses the following signals: l l l l l l GE optical signals 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals FE optical signals FE electrical signals GE electrical signals
NOTE
l The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. l It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. l The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.
Convergence of Multiple GE Services into 10GE Services

Positive process: The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The eight channels of GE electrical signals are converged with a maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-connect module into one channel of 10GE electrical signals. The 10GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side 10GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out 10GE optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Negative process: The client-side 10GE optical module receives 10GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, 10GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. This module deconverges the one channel of 10GE electrical signals into multiple channels of GE electrical signals. A maximum of eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side GE optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out GE optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. A maximum of 16 channels of GE electrical signals are sent to other boards by the crossconnect module through the backplane.
Convergence or Transparent Transmission of GE-to-GE Services l Positive process: The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. Based on the service requirement, the L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or converges the received multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals into one channel of GE signals. The GE signals are sent to other boards by the cross-connect module through the backplane. l Negative process: The cross-connect module receives the GE electrical signals groomed from other boards through the backplane. GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module either transparently transmits the received GE signals or deconverges the received GE signals into multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals. The client-side GE optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE/10GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to GE/10GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l L2 switching module Forwards service signals. Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals. l Cross-connect module Implements cross-connecting 16 GE signals to the other boards through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals to the central working/protection cross-connect board. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
15.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board.

Figure 15-173 shows the front panel of the TBE board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1062
Figure 15-173 Front panel of the TBE board
TBE
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 TX RX
TBE
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eighteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board. Table 15-61 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 15-61 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TBE board Interface TX1-TX8 Type LC Function Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used. TX RX1-RX8 LC LC Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used. RX LC Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side equipment.
NOTE
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level

15.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TBE board. Table 15-62 shows the valid slots for the TBE board. Table 15-62 Valid slots for the TBE board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5


Table 15-63 Mapping between the physical ports on the TBE board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX/RX TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-174 describes the application model of the TBE board. Table 15-64 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-174 Port diagram of the TBE board
Backplane
16 x GE
PORT3 PORT4
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
101(AP1/AP1)-1 102(AP2/AP2)-1
PORT11 Client side
VCTRUNK16 116(AP16/AP16)-1 L2 switching model Cross-connect model
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1065
Table 15-64 Meaning of NM port of the TBE board Port Name PORT3 PORT4-PORT11 VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16 AP1-AP16 Meaning The port corresponds to the client side optical interface RX/ TX. These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8. Internal virtual ports. Internal convergence ports.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TBE board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The deconvergence of the 10GE services that are accessed from the client-side PORT3 port is implemented through the L2 switching module. Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which do not need to be set on the U2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the AP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 15-175. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board by are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service deconvergence.) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the LP port of other boards, as shown in Figure 15-175. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board by are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1066
Figure 15-175 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE board

Client side
Other board
WDM side
Client side
1 2
TBE
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
1 2
15.5.9 TBE Loopbacks

Table 15-65 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TN11TBE board. Table 15-65 Loopbacks supported by TN11TBE board Service Type 10GE Loopback Type PHY outloop PHY inloop MAC outloop MAC inloop FE/GE electrical port PHY outloop PHY inloop MAC inloop FE/GE optical port PHY inloop MAC inloop Description See Figure 15-176. See Figure 15-177. See Figure 15-178. See Figure 15-179. See Figure 15-180. See Figure 15-181. See Figure 15-182. See Figure 15-183. See Figure 15-184.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1067
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of 10GE Services on the TN11TBE Board

l PHY outloop As shown in Figure 15-176, one 10GE service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point. Figure 15-176 PHY outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
RX1/TX1 PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
RX8/TX8 RX/TX 10GE
PHY PHY
MAC MAC VCTRUNK16 Backplane
L2 switching module Client-side TBE board Pass-through services Loopbacked services
PHY inloop As shown in Figure 15-177, a maximum of 16 GE services from the backplane and eight GE services (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8) received on the L2 switch module are converged into one 10GE service and is loopbacked at the PHY loopback point. Figure 15-177 PHY inloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
PHY MAC VCTRUNK1
Crossconnect module
RX1/TX1
RX8/TX8 RX/TX 10GE
PHY PHY
MAC outloop As shown in Figure 15-178, one 10GE service received on the client side is loopbacked to the client side at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1068
Figure 15-178 MAC outloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
Crossconnect module
RX8/TX8 RX/TX 10GE
PHY PHY
MAC inloop As shown in Figure 15-179, a maximum of 16 GE services from the backplane and eight GE services (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8) received on the L2 switch module are converged into one 10GE service and is loopbacked at the MAC loopback point. Figure 15-179 MAC inloop of one 10GE service on the TN11TBE board
Crossconnect module
RX8/TX8 10GE RX/TX Client-side
PHY PHY
L2 switching module TBE board Pass-through services Loopbacked services
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of FE/GE (Electrical Port) Services on the TN11TBE Board
l PHY outloop As shown in Figure 15-180, eight FE/GE services are received on the client side. One of the eight FE/GE services is loopbacked to the client side at the PHY loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1069
Figure 15-180 PHY outloop of one FE/GE (electrical port) service on the TN11TBE board
Crossconnect module
RX8/TX8 10GE RX/TX
PHY PHY
L2 switching module Client-side TBE Board Pass-through services Loopbacked services
PHY inloop As shown in Figure 15-181, one 10GE service received on the client side of the L2 switch module is deconverged into eight GE services or eight GE services are cross-connected from the backplane of a cross-connect module. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked at the PHY loopback point. Figure 15-181 PHY inloop of one FE/GE (electrical port) service on the TN11TBE board
Crossconnect module
RX8/TX8 RX/TX 10GE
PHY PHY
MAC MAC VCTRUNK16
L2 switching module Client-side TBE board Pass-through services Loopbacked services Backplane
MAC inloop As shown in Figure 15-182, one 10GE service received on the client side of the L2 switch module is deconverged into eight GE services or eight GE services are cross-connected from the backplane of a cross-connect module. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1070
Figure 15-182 MAC inloop of one FE/GE (electrical port) service on the TN11TBE board
Crossconnect module
RX8/TX8 10GE RX/TX Client-side
PHY PHY
L2 switching module TBE board Pass-through services Loopbacked services
PHY and MAC Loopbacks of FE/GE (Optical Port) Services on the TN11TBE Board
l PHY inloop As shown in Figure 15-183, one 10GE service received on the client side of the L2 switch module is deconverged into eight GE services. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked at the PHY loopback point. Figure 15-183 PHY inloop of one FE/GE (optical port) service on the TN11TBE board
Crossconnect module
RX8/TX8 RX/TX 10GE
PHY PHY
MAC inloop As shown in Figure 15-184, one 10GE service received on the client side of the L2 switch module is deconverged into eight GE services. One of the eight GE services is loopbacked at the MAC loopback point.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1071
Figure 15-184 MAC inloop of one FE/GE (optical port) service on the TN11TBE board
Crossconnect module
RX8/TX8 RX/TX 10GE
PHY PHY

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TBE, refer to Table 15-66. Table 15-66 TBE parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Laser Status Value Off, On Default: Off Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
15.5.11 Specifications of the TBE

Board TN11TB E
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 100 BASE-FX-10 km 100 BASE-FX-80 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km
NOTE

Table 15-67 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 100 BASE-FX-10 km NRZ 10 100 BASE-FX-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency dBm dBm dB nm -3 -11.5 9 1310 5 -2 9 1550
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1073
Unit
Value 100 BASE-FX-10 km 100 BASE-FX-80 km IEEE802.3zcompliant
IEEE802.3zcompliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity (EOL) Minimum receiver overload dBm dBm PIN -19 -3 PIN -22 -3
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1074
Unit
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation nm dBm dBm dB nm 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1075
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant
Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
nm dB -
1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1076
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 4 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -1.3
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1077
Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance
Unit
dBm
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Power Consumption
TN11TBE
15.6 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board

Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is, TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TDG OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1078
15.6.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDG board implements conversion between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TDG board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-185. Figure 15-185 Position of the TDG board in the WDM system
G.694.1 MUX GE TDG NS2 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side DMUX NS2 TDG GE G.694.1

The TDG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-71. Table 15-71 Functions and features of the TDG board Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities Description Converts between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through the crossconnect board or with the board in the paired slot. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of an ODU1 signal and two GE signals between the TDG and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot through the backplane. l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one ODU1 signal and two GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1079
Function and Feature PRBS function LPT function Test frame Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Description Not supported Supported Supported Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection.
eSFP Loopback
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
IEEE 802.3z
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1080

The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-186 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1081
Figure 15-186 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board
Backplane (service corss-connection)
Client side
RX1 RX2
2 X GE/ 1 X ODU1
O/E
TX1 TX2
E/O Client-side optical module
GE Encapsulation and mapping module
Crossconnect module
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TDG board accesses GE optical signals. In the signal flow of the TDG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDG to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then, If the signals are GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1082
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TDG and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals. GE encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE performance. OTN processing module Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
15.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board.

Figure 15-187 shows the front panel of the TDG board. Figure 15-187 Front panel of the TDG board
TDG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
TDG
Indicators
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1084
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board. Table 15-72 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-72 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDG board Interface TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TDG board. Table 15-73 shows the valid slots for the TDG board. Table 15-73 Valid slots for the TDG board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. IU2-IU5


Table 15-74 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-74 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1085
Physical Port TX2/RX2
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-188 describes the application model of the TDG board. Table 15-75 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-188 Port diagram of the TDG board
Other line/ OTU board Other tributary/ PID board
Backplane 2 x GE ODU1
3 (RX1/TX1)-1 4 (RX2/TX2)-1
201 (LP/LP)-1 201 (LP/LP)-2
201 (LP/LP)-1
Client Side
Table 15-75 Meaning of NM port of the TDG board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1086
Port Name LP
Meaning Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1and 2.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TDG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports to implement the cross-connect grooming of GE services. The following three cross-connections can be created. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the TDG board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown and in Figure 15-189. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TDG board and the LP port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
3
in Figure 15-189.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port of the TDG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TDG board for protection and the inter-board service convergence), as shown
NOTE
4
in Figure 15-189.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1087
Figure 15-189 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board

Client side Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1 3 4(RX2/TX2)-1
4 201(LP/LP)-1 2 1 201(LP/LP)-2
TDG
The straight-through of the TDGboard The internal cross-connection of the TDG board The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TDG board 1 2 3 4
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the LP port and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 15-190.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1088
Figure 15-190 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board

WDM side
Other board a (compatible mode)
201(LP/LP)-1 201(LP/LP)-2
TDG
Client side
The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
15.6.9 TDG Parameters

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TDG, refer to Table 15-76. Table 15-76 TDG parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
1089
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field Laser Status
Value Off, On Default: Off
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Default: AutoNegotiation
15.6.10 Specifications of the TDG

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1090
Board TN11TD G
NOTE
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1091
Unit
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm dBm dBm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1092
Unit
nm nm dB -
Power Consumption
TN11TDG
15.7 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1093

The available functional versions of the TDX board are TN11, TN12, TN52, and TN53.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TDX TN12 TDX TN52 TDX TN53 TDX OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N N Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N Y Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y N N N

Function: l The TN11TDX board supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU1 electrical signals. The TN12TDX board supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN52TDX board supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN53TDX board supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex electrical signals. Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board supports the OTU2/OTU2e service on the client side. Only the TN53TDX board supports the FC800 and FC1200 services on the client side. Only the TN53TDX board supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2 function. Only the TN53TDX board supports two channels of the physical clock function.
l l l l
For details, see 15.7.3 Functions and Features. Specification: l The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 15.7.11 Specifications of the TDX.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1094
Table 15-79 Substitution rules of the TDX board Original Board TN11TDX TN12TDX Substitute Board None TN53TDX Substitution Rules The TN53TDX can be created as TN12TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN12TDX. The TN53TDX can be created as TN52TDX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the TN52TDX. -
TN52TDX
TN53TDX
TN53TDX
None
15.7.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDX board implements conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and eight channels of ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals or two ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex electrical signals using cross-connections. For the position of the TDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-191, Figure 15-192 and Figure 15-193. Figure 15-191 Position of the TN11TDX board in the WDM system
G.694.1 4 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 TDX 4 NS2 DMUX MUX NS2 4 NS2 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 4 TDX 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Figure 15-192 Position of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board in the WDM system

G.694.1 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e MUX TDX ND2 DMUX MUX DMUX ND2 TDX G.694.1 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1095
Figure 15-193 Position of the TN53TDX board in the WDM system

G.694.1 10G E LAN 10G E WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e FC800 FC1200 Client side MUX TD X ND2 DMUX MUX DMUX ND2 TDX G.694.1 10G E LAN 10G E WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e FC800 FC1200 Client side
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
The TN11TDX board supports the conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 optical signals and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals. The TN12TDX board supports the conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN52TDX board supports conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN53TDX board supports conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex electrical signals, and supports conversion between two channels of FC800 optical signals and two channels of ODUflex electrical signals.

The TDX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connections at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, see Table 15-80. Table 15-80 Functions and features of the TDX board Function and Feature Basic function Description TDX convert signal as follows: l TN11TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<>8xODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals l TN12TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192<>2xODU2/ODU2e l TN52TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e<->2xODU2/ODU2e l TN53TDX: 2x10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e/FC800/FC1200<->2xODU2/ODU2e, 2xFC800<>2xODUflex
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1096
Description STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s
NOTE The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same. Therefore, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000. Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services. Only the TN53TDX board supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. l TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TDX board and the crossconnect board using the backplane. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11TDX: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU1 signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot using the backplane. l TN12TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. l TN53TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/ ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board using the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11TDX: Supports the grooming of eight channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1097
Description l Maps each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2 signals at the ODU2 interface of the backplane. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43. l Supports PM functions for ODU2.
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-64/OC-192.
Test frame IEEE 1588v2
Supports the test frame of 10GE LAN services. Supports two channels of IEEE 1588v2 only when the TN53TDX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, or receives OTU2 services on its client side. Supports two channels of physical clock only when the TN53TDX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side. Supported by the TN52TDX/TN53TDX l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection (TN12TDX/TN52TDX/ TN53TDX).
Physical clock
Electrical-layer ASON Protection scheme
XFP Loopback
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1098
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1

The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-194, Figure 15-195 and Figure 15-196 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TDX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1099
Figure 15-194 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TDX board
Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
8 x ODU1
O/E
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module
Crossconnet module
Control Memory CPU Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1100
Figure 15-195 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
ODU2/ODU2e Client side
RX1 RX2 TX1 TX2
O/E
E/O
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1101
Figure 15-196 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TDX board
ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex Client side
RX1 RX2
O/E
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module FC encapsulation and mapping module Signal processing module OTN processing module
TX1 TX2
E/O
1588
Signal Flow
The client side of the TDX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l l l l 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals FC800 optical signals FC1200 optical signals
NOTE
Only the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board supports the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. Only the TN53TDX board supports FC800 and FC1200 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1102
In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX2 ports, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals to the backplane for grooming. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives eight channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 ports.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12TDX, TN52TDX and TN53TDX do not contain a crossconnect unit. This board, however, is always connected to the cross-connect board.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/SONET performance. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors 10GE LAN performance.
FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function.
NOTE
FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped into ODU2e payload area.
OTN processing module Frames ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals and processes overheads in ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals. l 1588v2 module According to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, the module transmits the clock information of the clock board to the next NE or extracts the clock information from the service board and then transmits the clock information to the clock board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
15.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board.

Appearance of the front panel of the TDX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1104
Figure 15-197 Front panel of the TN11TDX/TN53TDX board
TDX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
TDX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1105
Figure 15-198 Front panel of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
TDX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
TDX
Indicators
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board. Table 15-81 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 15-81 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDX board Interface TX1-TX2 RX1-RX2 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.7.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TDX board. Table 15-82 shows the valid slots for the TN11TDX board. Table 15-82 Valid slots for the TN11TDX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Table 15-83 shows the valid slots for the TN12TDX board. Table 15-83 Valid slots for the TN12TDX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-84 shows the valid slots for the TN52TDX and TN53TDX board. Table 15-84 Valid slots for the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1107


Table 15-85 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-85 Mapping between the physical ports on the TDX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 Port Number on the NMS 3 4
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP/ 151(imp1/imp1)-1 is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-199, Figure 15-200, Figure 15-201 show the port diagrams of the TDX board. Table 15-86 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-199 Port diagram of the TN11TDX
Other line/PID board
Backplane 8 x ODU1
151(imp1/imp1)-1 151(imp1/imp1)-2 151(imp1/imp1)-3 151(imp1/imp1)-4 152(imp2/imp2)-1 152(imp2/imp2)-2 152(imp2/imp2)-3 152(imp2/imp2)-4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1108
Figure 15-200 Port diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX

Backplane 2 x ODU2/ODU2e
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Figure 15-201 Port diagram of the TN53TDX

Other line/ PID board
Backplane 2 x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.
Table 15-86 Meaning of NMS port of the TDX board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2 imp1-imp2 ClientLP1-ClientLP2 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Inverse multiplexing ports. The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1109

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TDX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l TN11TDX: Configuration of cross-connection In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, configure the bandwidth binding of the imp port.
NOTE
The bandwidth of each imp port that accesses 10GE must be bound with 4 ODU1s. For bandwidth binding, each 10GE signal must be bound in order. For example, when the TN11TDX board works with the TN12NS2 board, imp1.1 must be bound to ODU1LP1.1, imp1.2 must be bound to ODU1LP1.2, and so on.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 level cross-connections between the imp port and the IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board (or the ODU1LP port of other board), realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 15-202. l TN12TDX/TN52TDX: Configuration of cross-connection In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of other board, as shown in Figure 15-203. l TN53TDX: Configuration of cross-connection Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of other board, as shown in Figure 15-203. Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODUflex level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODUflex port of other board, as shown in Figure 15-204.

NOTE
The TN53TDX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring cross-connections for the board, set ODUflex Timeslot to 7.
Figure 15-202 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX

WDM side
Other board a (standard mode)
Client side
151(imp1/imp1)-1 151(imp1/imp1)-2 151(imp1/imp1)-3 151(imp1/imp1)-4 152(imp2/imp2)-1 152(imp2/imp2)-2 152(imp2/imp2)-3 152(imp2/imp2)-4
TDX
The client side of the TDX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
TN53NS2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2 TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1111
Figure 15-203 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN53TDX

WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
Other board a (standard mode) Other board b (compatible mode)
Client side
TDX
TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 TN12TDX: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52TDX: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53TDX:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1112
Figure 15-204 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TDX

WDM side
Other board
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:2
Cross-connect mode Client side

TDX
Cross-connect mode
Other board
TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
15.7.9 TDX Loopbacks

Table 15-87 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TDX boards. Table 15-87 Loopbacks supported by TDX boards Board TN11TDX Loopback Type Client-side outloop Client-side inloop TN12TDX/ TN52TDX TN53TDX Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Description See Figure 15-205. See Figure 15-206. See Figure 15-207. See Figure 15-208. See Figure 15-209. See Figure 15-210.
Loopbacks Supported by TN11TDX

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-205, any N of two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services from the client side can be looped back to the client side and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1113
Figure 15-205 Client-side outloop on the TN11TDX board

ODU1 RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 RX2/TX2 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-206, eight ODU1 services from the backplane are converted into two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 service can be passed through. Figure 15-206 Client-side inloop on the TN11TDX board
ODU1 RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 RX2/TX2 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services Backplane
Loopbacks Supported by TN12TDX/TN52TDX

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-207, any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services from the client side can be looped back to the client side and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1114
Figure 15-207 Client-side outloop on the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192
ODU2/ODU2e
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e
Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-208, two ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane are converted into two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 service can be passed through. Figure 15-208 Client-side inloop on the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
RX1/TX1
ODU2/ODU2e
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
Loopbacks Supported by TN53TDX

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-209, any N of two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/ FC800/FC1200 services from the client side can be looped back and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1115
Figure 15-209 Client-side outloop on the TN53TDX board
RX1/TX1
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/FC800/FC1200
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-210, two ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex services from the backplane are converted into two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the two 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 service can be passed through. Figure 15-210 Client-side inloop on the TN53TDX board
RX1/TX1
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex

NOTE
Backplane
When receiving OTU2/OTU2e services, the TN52TDX/TN53TDX board supports client-side inloops and outloops.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1116

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TDX, refer to Table 15-88. Table 15-88 TDX parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
Service Type
l TN11TDX: 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN l TN12TDX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64 Default: None l TN52TDX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: None l TN53TDX: None, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64, FC800, FC1200 Default: None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1117
Field Port Mapping
Value l TN11TDX: doesn't support this parameter l TN12TDX/ TN52TDX/ TN53TDX: Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC transparent mapping (10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
NOTE For the TN12TDX: only the ClientLP1 port supports MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).
Description The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: Off
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.
NOTE Only the TN53TDX supports this parameter.
Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1118
Field Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Turn-On
Value 0s, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms, 700ms, 800ms, 900ms, 1s, 1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms, 1400ms, 1500ms, 1600ms, 1700ms, 1800ms, 1900ms, 2s Default: 0s
Description Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.
NOTE Only the TN53TDX supports this parameter.
LPT Enabled
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.
Service Mode
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. PAUSE Frame Flow Control Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled Determines whether to enable the switch of the flow control.
NOTE Only TN11TDX supports this parameter.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services.
NOTE For the TN52TDX and TN53TDX board, when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.
See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1119
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only TN52TDX/TN53TDX supports this parameter.
FEC Working State
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. FEC Mode FEC Default: FEC The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
PRBS Test Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1120
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.
Port Working Mode
ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port) Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2)
This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TDX.
15.7.11 Specifications of the TDX

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN11TD X/ TN12TD X/ TN52TD X TN53TD X Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZPIN-XFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1121

NOTE
NOTE

dBm
-1
-1.3
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1122
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 30 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 30 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 30
dB
30
G.691-compliant
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1123
Line code format
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN11TDX: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb) TN12TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb)

l l
TN52TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb) TN53TDX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 78.0 37.4 57.3 25.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 80.0 40.7 63.0 35.0
TN11TDX TN12TDX TN52TDX TN53TDX
15.8 THA
THA: 16 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

The available functional version of the THA board is TN54.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN54 THA OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 N
15.8.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the THA at the client side is 40 Gbit/s. The THA board has four scenarios. l l l l Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0). Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1). Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1). Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
The THA board supports two types of service package:

16*GE for ODU0 By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the sixteen client-side ports on the board to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the port service type GE at the same time.
16*STM-16/OC-48 for ODU1 By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the eight client-side ports on the board to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and the port service type to STM-16/OC-48 at the same time.
THA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 15-211. Figure 15-211 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
G.694.1 1 125Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 16 THA 16
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 THA 16
1 125Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 16
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, FDDI, GE, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI and ESCON services can be accessed. If all the sixteen client-side ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can apply the 16*GE for ODU0 service package to the board on the NMS.
THA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and 16 channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 15-212. Figure 15-212 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 2)
G.694.1 1 1.49Gbit/s 2.67Gbit/s 16 THA 16
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 THA 16
1 1.49Gbit/s 2.67Gbit/s 16
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1126
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express, and OTU1 services can be accessed. If all the sixteen client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can apply the 16*STM-16/OC-8 for ODU1 service package to the board on the NMS.
THA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1) The THA board performs conversion between 16 channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s and two to sixteen channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 15-213. The THA board converges multiple client-side services into two ODU1 electrical signals or maps one client-side service into one channel of electrical ODU1 electrical signals.
NOTE
The client signals received by the RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ports cannot be encapsulated together with the client signals received by the RX9/TX9RX16/TX16 ports.
Figure 15-213 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 3)

G.694.1 1 125Mbit/s 2.2Gbit/s 16 THA 16
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 THA 16
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the Any, FE, FDDI, GE, FC100, FC200, DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , FICON and FICON Express services can be accessed.
THA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). The THA board performs conversion between 16 OTU1 optical signals and 32 ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 15-214. Figure 15-214 Position of the THA in a WDM system (Scenario 4)
G.694.1 1 OTU1 16 THA 32
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 THA
1 OTU1
DMUX
MUX
32
4
16
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1127

The THA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-91. Table 15-91 Functions and features of the THA board Function and Feature Basic function Description THA convert signal as follows: l 16x125Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s<->16xODU0. l 16x1.49Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s<->16xODU1. l 16x125Mbit/s to 2.2Gbit/s<->1 to 16xODU1. l 16xOTU1<->32xODU0. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE The THA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Crossconnect capabilities OTN function
Cross-connects a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board. l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers, and the PM function at the ODU0 layer. l Supports the PM function at ODU1 layer, and the non-intrusive monitoring function at the TCM and ODU0 layers.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1128
Function and Feature ESC function FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. This function is supported only when the THA board receives FE or GE services on its client side. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1
Test frame
Supported
NOTE The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).
IEEE 1588v2
When receiving GE(GFP-T) and OTU1 services on the client side, the board can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
NOTE When receiving OTU1 services, the TX8/RX8 and TX16/RX16 optical ports cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
When receiving GE(TTT-AGMP) services, the board can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock signals. Physical clock Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Supported only when the THA board receives GE(GFP-T) services on its client side. Supported. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. eSFP Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1129
Function and Feature Loopback
Description Channel Loopback Inloop Outloop Supported

NOTE The Channel Loopback is supported only when port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1130

The THA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Signal flow
Figure 15-215 shows the block diagram of the functions of the THA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1131
Figure 15-215 Functional modules and signal flow of the THA board
16X ODU0/8X ODU1
16X ODU0/8X ODU1
O/E
E/O
Service OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module
Crossconnect module

O/E E/O
1588
OTN processing module Service encapsulation and mapping module Crossconnect module
SCC
NOTE
For more information regarding the type of signals received on the client side, see section 15.8.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the THA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the THA to the backplane of the THA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 16 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX16 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the 16 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1132
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 16 channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs 16 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX16 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the THA and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/ ODU1/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the 1588 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the 1588 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

15.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the THA board.

Figure 15-216 shows the front panel of the THA board. Figure 15-216 Front panel of the THA board
SM SFP WORK WITH G.657B FIBER ONLY G.657B
RX 1
2 TX
THA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
RX 1 TX 15 2 TX 16 RX
TX 15
16 RX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1134
Label
Label Description Supports single-mode optical module,and uses G.657A2 optical fibers.
SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY G.657A2
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 15-92 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 15-92 Types and functions of the interfaces on the THA board Interface RX1-RX16 TX1-TX16 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
Laser Hazard Level

15.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one THA board. Table 15-93 shows the valid slots for the THA board.
NOTE
Two THA boards cannot be housed in adjacent slots. To easy maintenance of fibers, do not house the THA board in the most left or right slot.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1135
Table 15-93 Valid slots for the THA board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid slots IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU33, IU36IU42, IU45-IU51, IU54-IU67 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU21-IU27, IU29IU35 IU2-IU8, IU11-IU17


Table 15-94 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-94 Mapping between the physical ports on the THA board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 TX9/RX9 TX10/RX10 TX11/RX11 TX12/RX12 TX13/RX13 TX14/RX14 TX15/RX15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1136
Physical Port TX16/RX16
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-217 to Figure 15-220 show the port diagrams for the THA. Table 15-95 to Table 15-98 describe the meaning of each port. The THA board's NM ports may work in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). Select a proper working mode on the NMS as required. Figure 15-217 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))
Backplane 16xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
18(RX16/TX16)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1137
Figure 15-218 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))
Backplane 16xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
16(RX14/TX14)-1 17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1
Figure 15-219 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1))
Backplane 1-16xODU1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1138
Figure 15-220 Port diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))
Backplane 32xODU0
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
17(RX15/TX15)-1 18(RX16/TX16)-1
Table 15-95 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2..
Table 15-96 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1139
Table 15-97 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.
Table 15-98 Meaning of NM port of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 ODU0LP1ODU0LP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the THA board is used to transmit services, set Port Working Mode in Configuration > Working Mode on the U2000. The valid values of the port working mode field are ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)

l l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0). Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
NOTE
If all the 16 clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can configure the 16 * GE->ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the service type to GE for the 16 ports.
l l
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 15-221.
2
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see in Figure 15-221.
1140
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Figure 15-221 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
WDM side
Other board
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 2
THA
16(TX14/RX14)-1
17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1
216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-2 Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Other board TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 a Other board TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/ b TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
NOTE
When the TOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the TOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the TOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the TOA board.

l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to .

Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
NOTE
If all the 16 client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can configure the 16 * STM-16/OC-48>ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and service type to STM-16/OC-48 for the 16 ports.
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see
2
in Figure 15-222.
Figure 15-222 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1))
WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 1
THA
16(TX14/RX14)-1
214(ClientLP14/ClientLP14)-1 215(ClientLP15/ClientLP15)-1 216(ClientLP16/ClientLP16)-1 Cross-connect module
17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Other board TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 a Other board TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/ b TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1142
Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1)

l l l l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any>ODU1). Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP port. For details, see 1 in Figure 15-223. Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP ports. For details, see
2
in Figure 15-223.
Figure 15-223 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n X Any->ODU1))
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Other board a 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
THA
17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1
208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-7 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8 Multiplexing module Cross-connect module
The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1143

NOTE
When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured on the first optical channel of each ClientLP. The first eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the first eight LP ports; the last eight client-side ports on the THA board can be configured with cross-connections only to the last eight LP ports.
Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

l l l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0). Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see
2
in Figure 15-224.
Figure 15-224 Cross-connection diagram of the THA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
WDM side
Other board a
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
17(TX15/RX15)-1 18(TX16/RX16)-1 THA
Multiplexing module
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the THA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Other board TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1144
Other board TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/ b TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
15.8.9 THA Loopbacks

Table 15-99 lists the types of loopbacks supported by THA boards. Table 15-99 Loopbacks supported by THA boards B oa rd T N 54 T H A Port Working Mode Loopback Type Description
ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0) ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1) ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1) ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)
Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel outloop Channel inloop
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-225, sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services are received on the client side. Any N of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1145
Figure 15-225 Client-side outloop

16
RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services
16
ODU0
RX8/TX8
125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services
ODU0
RX9/TX9
ODU0
RX16/TX16
ODU0
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-226, sixteen ODU0 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services. Any N of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1146

16
RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services
16
ODU0
RX8/TX8
ODU0
RX9/TX9
ODU0
RX16/TX16
ODU0
Backplane

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-227, sixteen 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services are received on the client side. When receiving STMsixteen/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side outloop: as shown in Figure 15-227 When receiving OTU1 services, Client-side outloop: as shown in Figure 15-227
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1147

16
RX1/TX1 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services
16
ODU1
RX8/TX8
1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services
ODU1
RX9/TX9
ODU1
RX16/TX16 Client-side
ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services at the ODU1 loopback points
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-228, sixteen ODU1 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into sixteen 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services. When receiving STMsixteen/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side inloop: as shown in Figure 15-228 . .
When receiving OTU1 services, Client-side inloop: as shown in Figure 15-228
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1148

16
RX1/TX1 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services
16
ODU1
RX8/TX8
ODU1
RX9/TX9
ODU1
RX16/TX16 Client-side
ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services at the ODU1 loopback points
ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-229, sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services are received on the client side. Any N of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1149

16 RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 1 - 8 xODU1 RX8/TX8 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services
RX9/TX9
125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 1 - 8 xODU1
RX16/TX16
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-230, two to sixteen ODU1 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services. Any N of the sixteen 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1150

16 RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 1 - 8 xODU1 RX8/TX8 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services
RX9/TX9
125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 1 - 8 xODU1
RX16/TX16
Backplane
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-231, sixteen OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped into sixteen ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the sixteen ODU1 services are deconverged into 32 ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1151

16
RX1/TX1 OTU1
16
ODU1
32
ODU0 ODU0
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
ODU0 RX16/TX16 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-232, 32 ODU0 services are received from the backplane. Any N of 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1152

16
RX1/TX1 OTU1
16
ODU1
32
ODU0 ODU0
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
Backplane
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 15-233, sixteen OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped into sixteen ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the sixteen ODU1 services are deconverged into 32 ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1153

16
RX1/TX1 OTU1
16
ODU1
32
ODU0 ODU0
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
Backplane
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 15-234, 32 ODU0 services are received from the backplane. Any N of 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1154

16
RX1/TX1 OTU1
16
ODU1
32
ODU0 ODU0
RX3/TX3
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
RX9/TX9
OTU1
ODU1
ODU0 ODU0
Backplane

TThis section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the THA, refer toTable 15-100. Table 15-100 THA parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1155
Description The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Query or set the path Loopback.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
Channel Loopback
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE(TTTAGMP), GE(GFP-T), OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None
The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTAGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTAGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-AGMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
The THA board's ports may work in any of four working modes and the type of the client-side services received by the ports varies with the working modes.
NOTE l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFPT), GE(TTT-AGMP), OC-3, OC-12, STM-1, and STM-4 services. l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, and GE(GFPT) services. l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICONExpress, OC-48, OTU-1, and STM-16 services. l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1156
Field Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)
Value l Channel 1 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 216 (ClientLP16/ ClientLP16): 125 2200 l Channels 28 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 216 (ClientLP16/ ClientLP16): 125 1250 Default: /
Description sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to Any.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
FEC Working State
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1157
Value 1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Description The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
PRBS Test Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1158
Value ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), NONE Mode (Not for port) Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0)
15.8.11 Specifications of the THA

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN54TH A Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module S-16.1 1000BASE-LX-10km (I-1310-LC)
NOTE

NOTE
S-16.1 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 15-101 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value S-16.1
km
NRZ 15
1159
Unit
Value S-16.1
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm dB 1260 to 1360 0 -5 8.2 1 30 G.959.1compliant
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 15-102 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value 1000BASE-LX-10km (I-1310-LC) NRZ SLM 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1160
Unit
Value 1000BASE-LX-10km (I-1310-LC)
nm dBm dBm dB -
1270 to 1355 -3 -9.5 9 IEEE802.3z compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm PIN 1260 to 1620 -20 -3
Power Consumption
TN54THA
15.9 TOA
TOA: 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board

The available functional version of the TOA board is TN54.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1161

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN54 TOA OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 N
15.9.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, The maximum access capacity of the TOA at the client side is 20 Gbit/s. The TOA board has four scenarios. l l l l l l Scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) Scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1) Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) 8*GE for ODU0 By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the eight client-side ports on the board to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the port service type GE at the same time. l 8*STM-16/OC-48 for ODU1 By applying this service package, users can set the working mode of the eight client-side ports on the board to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and the port service type to STM-16/OC-48 at the same time. TOA scenario 1: ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 15-235. Figure 15-235 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
G.694.1 1 125Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 8 TOA 8
4
The TOA board supports two types of service package:
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 TOA 8
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1162
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, FDDI, GE , STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, ESCON and SDI services can be accessed. If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can apply the 8*GE for ODU0 service package to the board on the NMS.
TOA scenario 2: ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s and eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, see Figure 15-236. Figure 15-236 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 2)
G.694.1 1 1.49Gbit/s 2.67Gbit/s 8 TOA 8
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 TOA 8
1 1.49Gbit/s 2.67Gbit/s 8
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the HD-SDI, STM16, OC-48, FC200, FICON Express and OTU1 services can be accessed. If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can apply the 8*STM-16/OC-8 for ODU1 service package to the board on the NMS.
TOA scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n * Any->ODU1) The TOA board performs conversion between eight channels of optical signals at any rate in the range of 125 Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s and one to eight channels of ODU1 electrical signals, as shown in Figure 15-237. In this scenario, the TOA board converges multiple client-side services into one ODU1 electrical signals or maps one client-side service into one channel of electrical ODU1 electrical signals. Figure 15-237 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 3)
G.694.1 1 125Mbit/s 2.2Gbit/s 8 TOA 8
4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 TOA 8
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1163
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the Any, FE, FDDI, GE , FC100, FC200, DVB-ASI, ESCON, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , SDI, HD-SDI, FICON and FICON Express services can be accessed.
TOA scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). The TOA board performs conversion between eight OTU1 optical signals and 16 ODU0 electrical signals, see Figure 15-238. Figure 15-238 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (Scenario 4)
G.694.1 1 OTU1 8 TOA 16

4
G.694.1
MUX DMUX
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 TOA 16
1 OTU1 8
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
WDM side
TOA scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex) The TOA board performs conversion between five 3G-SDI optical signals and five ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 15-239. Figure 15-239 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (3G-SDI<->ODUflex)
G.694.1 1 3G-SDI 5 TOA 4 5

4
G.694.1 MUX DMUX

4
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 5 TOA
1 3G-SDI 5
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
The TOA board performs conversion between four 3G-SDI optical signals and four ODUflex electrical signals, see Figure 15-240.
Figure 15-240 Position of the TOA in a WDM system (FC400<->ODUflex)
G.694.1 1 FC400 4 TOA 4 4

4
G.694.1 MUX DMUX

4
1 NQ2
1 NQ2 4 TOA
1 FC400 4
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
Only the TN53NQ2 board supports ODUflex.

The TOA board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-103. Table 15-103 Functions and features of the TOA board Function and Feature Basic function Description TOA convert signal as follows: l 8x125Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s<->8xODU0. l 8x1.49Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s<->8xODU1. l 8x125Mbit/s to 2.2Gbit/s<->1 to 8xODU1. l 8xOTU1<->16xODU0. l 5x3G-SDI<->5xODUflex l 4xFC400<->4xODUflex
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1165
Description FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FC400: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s 3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE The TOA board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Cross-connects a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals or 8 channels of ODU1 signals through the backplane bus and cross-connect board. Cross-connects a maximum of five channels of ODUflex signals by using buses on the backplane and the cross-connect board.
NOTE Only the 3G-SDI and FC400 services support the ODUflex signals.
OTN function
l The mapping process complies with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. The board supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the SM, TCM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers, and the PM function at the ODU0 layer. l Supports the PM function at ODU1 layer, and the non-intrusive monitoring function at the TCM and ODU0 layers. l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring function at the ODUflex layer.
ESC function FEC encoding
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1166
Description l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. This function is supported only when the TOA board receives FE or GE services on its client side. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, or OTU1.
IEEE 1588v2
When receiving GE(GFP-T) and OTU1 services on the client side, the board can process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
NOTE When receiving OTU1 services, the TX8/RX8 optical port cannot process IEEE 1588v2 clock signals.
When receiving GE(TTT-AGMP) services, the board can transparently transmit IEEE 1588v2 clock signals. Physical clock Electricallayer ASON Test frame Supported only when the TOA board receives GE(GFP-T) services on its client side. Supported Supported
NOTE The board supports the Test frame function only when the Service Type is GE(GFPT).
Protection scheme
l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client side. Channel Loopback Inloop Outloop Supported
NOTE The Channel Loopback is supported only when port working mode is ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1167
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1168

The TOA board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, 1588 module, and power supply module.
Signal flow
Figure 15-241 shows the block diagram of the functions of the TOA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1169
Figure 15-241 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOA board
Backplane (service crossconnection)
Client side
16xODU0/8xODU1/5xODUflex
O/E
E/O
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Crossconnect module
1588
Backplane SCC
NOTE
For more information regarding the type of signals received on the client side, see section 15.9.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the TOA board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOA to the backplane of the TOA, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the 8 channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out a maximum of 16 channels of ODU0 signals, or 8 channels of ODU1 or 5 channels of ODUflex signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0, or ODU1, or ODUflex framing, demapping
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs 8 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOA and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1, or ODU0, or ODUflex signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU0/ ODU1/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Processes overheads in OTN signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. l 1588 module The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the 1588 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the 1588 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
15.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOA board.

Figure 15-242 shows the front panel of the TOA board. Figure 15-242 Front panel of the TOA board
TOA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8
TOA
Indicators
Interfaces
There are sixteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOA board. Table 15-104 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1172
Table 15-104 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOA board Interface TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8 Type LC LC Function Transmits the service signal. Receives the service signal.
Laser Hazard Level

15.9.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TOA board. Table 15-105 shows the valid slots for the TOA board. Table 15-105 Valid slots for the TOA board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Table 15-106 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-106 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOA board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1173
Physical Port TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-243 to Figure 15-247 show the port diagrams for the TOA. Table 15-107 to Table 15-111 describe the meaning of each port. The TOA board's NM ports may work in ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), or ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex). Select a proper working mode on the NMS as required. Figure 15-243 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0))
Backplane 8xODU0 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1174
Figure 15-244 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1))
Backplane 8xODU1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1
Figure 15-245 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1))
Backplane
1-8xODU1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 6(RX4/TX4)-1 7(RX5/TX5)-1 8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1175
Figure 15-246 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0))
Backplane
16xODU0
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1
9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1
Figure 15-247 Port diagram of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex))
Other line board
Backplane 5xODUflex 3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1 5(RX3/TX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1
8(RX6/TX6)-1 9(RX7/TX7)-1 10(RX8/TX8)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1176
Table 15-107 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2..
Table 15-108 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Table 15-109 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.
Table 15-110 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1177
Port Name ODU0LP1ODU0LP8
Meaning Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.
Table 15-111 Meaning of NM port of the TOA board (ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex)) Port Name RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 ClientLP1ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TOA board is used to transmit services, set Port Working Mode in Configuration > Working Mode on the U2000. The valid values of the port working mode field are ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0), and ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex).

l l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0). Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
NOTE
If all the eight clientside ports are used to receive and transmit GE services, users can configure the 8 * GE->ODU0 service package for the board on the NMS. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0) and the service type to GE for the eight ports.
l l
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 15-248.
2
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU0LP ports. For details, see in Figure 15-248.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1178
Figure 15-248 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0))
WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 2
TOA 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 Cross-connect module
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
When the TOA board connects to a TOM board that uses optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port, a client-side optical port on the TOA board must be cross-connected to optical channel 2 on the ClientLP port of the TOA board. In other cases, configure cross-connections from optical channel 1 on the ClientLP port of the TOM board to the client-side ports on the TOA board.

l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
NOTE
If all the eight client-side ports are used to receive and transmit STM-16/OC-48 services, users can configure the 8 * STM-16/OC-48->ODU1 service package for the board. This simultaneously sets the working mode to ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1) and service type to STM-16/OC-48 for the eight ports.
On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards's ODU1LP ports. For details, see
1
in Figure 15-249.
Figure 15-249 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1))
WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 1
205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 Cross-connect module
TOA
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1180
Scenario 3: ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)

l l l l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1). Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. On the U2000, create cross-connections between the local RX/TX port and ClientLP port. For details, see For details, see
1
in Figure 15-250. in Figure 15-250.
Create cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODU1LP ports.
2
Figure 15-250 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1))
WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
202(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-7 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-8 Multiplexing module 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1
TOA
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1181
NOTE
When the rate of services received on the client side is greater than 1.25 Gbit/s, these services must be configured on the first optical channel of each ClientLP.
Scenario 4: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

l l l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0). Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ODU0LP port and other boards' ODU0LP ports. For details, see
2
in Figure 15-251.
Figure 15-251 Cross-connection diagram of the TOA board (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0))
WDM side
Other board a
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 (standard mode) 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
9(TX9/RX9)-1 10(TX10/RX10)-1 TOA
167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-1 167(ODU0LP7/ODU0LP7)-2 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1 168(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2 Multiplexing module Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The virtual path of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1182
Scenario 5: ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)

l l l On the U2000, set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex). Set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. On the U2000, create electrical cross-connections between the local ClientLP port and other boards' ODUflex ports. For details, see
NOTE
2
in Figure 15-251.
When configuring a cross-connection, set ODUflex Timeslot to 3 if the client service type is 3G-SDI, and set it to 4 if the client service type is FC400.
Figure 15-252 ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)

WDM side
Other board
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
TOA
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOA board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Other board TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
15.9.9 TOA Loopbacks

Table 15-112 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TOA boards.
Table 15-112 Loopbacks supported by TOA boards Boar d TN5 4TO A Port Working Mode ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0) ODU1 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU1) ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1) ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0) Loopback Type Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Channel outloop Channel inloop ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex) Client-side outloop Channel inloop Description See Figure 15-253. See Figure 15-254. See Figure 15-255. See Figure 15-256. See Figure 15-257. See Figure 15-258. See Figure 15-259. See Figure 15-260. See Figure 15-261. See Figure 15-262. See Figure 15-263. See Figure 15-264.

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-253, eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services are received on the client side. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 15-253 Client-side outloop
RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1184
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-254, eight ODU0 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 1.25 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 15-254 Client-side inloop
RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s -1.25 Gbit/s Client-side services ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 Backplane

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-255, eight 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services are received on the client side. When receiving HD-SDI/STM16/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side outloop: as shown in Figure 15-255 When receiving OTU1 services, Client-side outloop: as shown in Figure 15-255
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1185

RX1/TX1 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s -2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services ODU1
RX2/TX2
ODU1
RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5 RX6/TX6 RX7/TX7 RX8/TX8 Client-side
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services at the ODU1 loopback points
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-256, eight ODU1 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s services. When receiving HD-SDI/STM16/OC-48/FC200/FICON Express services, Client-side inloop: as shown in Figure 15-256 . .
When receiving OTU1 services, Client-side inloop: as shown in Figure 15-256 Figure 15-256 Client-side inloop
RX1/TX1 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services 1.49 Gbit/s - 2.67 Gbit/s Client-side services ODU1
ODU1
ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1
Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services at the ODU1 loopback points
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1186
ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-257, eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services are received on the client side. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 15-257 Client-side outloop
RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services 1 - 8 xODU1
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-258, one to eight ODU1 services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services. Any N of the eight 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1187

RX1/TX1 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services 125 Mbit/s - 2.2 Gbit/s Client-side services Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services 1 - 8 xODU1
ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-259, eight OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped into eight ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the eight ODU1 services are deconverged into 16 ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1188

RX1/TX1 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 RX2/TX2 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 RX3/TX3 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ODU0 Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services
RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1 ODU1
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8 Client-side
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-260, 16 ODU0 services are received from the backplane. Any N of 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1189

RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1 ODU1
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8 Client-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 15-261, eight OTU1 services received on the client side are demapped into eight ODU1 services after the OTU1 overhead is terminated. Then the eight ODU1 services are deconverged into 16 ODU0 services. Any N of the 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1190

RX1/TX1 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 RX2/TX2 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 RX3/TX3 OTU1 ODU1 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU0 ODU1 ODU0 Backplane
RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1 ODU1
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8 Client-side
Channel inloop As shown in Figure 15-262, 16 ODU0 services are received from the backplane. Any N of 16 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1191

RX4/TX4 RX5/TX5
OTU1
ODU1
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1 ODU1
RX6/TX6
RX7/TX7
OTU1 OTU1
ODU1
RX8/TX8
Client-side
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex)

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-263, five 3G-SDI services or four FC400 services are received on the client side. Any N of the services can be looped back to the client side. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 15-263 Client-side outloop
3G-SDI ODUflex
3G-SDI RX1/TX1 - RX8/TX8 (Any five of the eight ports)
ODUflex
3G-SDI 3G-SDI
ODUflex ODUflex ODUflex Backplane
3G-SDI Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1192
FC400
ODUflex
FC400
ODUflex
FC400 FC400 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services
ODUflex ODUflex Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-264, five ODUflex services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into five 3G-SDI services. Any N of the five 3GSDI services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through, or four ODUflex services received from the backplane is demapped, decoded, and decapsulated into four FC400 services. Any N of the four FC400 services can be looped back to the backplane. The remaining client side services can be passed through. Figure 15-264 Client-side inloop
3G-SDI ODUflex
3G-SDI RX1/TX1 - RX8/TX8 (Any five of the eight ports)
ODUflex
3G-SDI 3G-SDI
ODUflex ODUflex ODUflex Backplane
3G-SDI Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services

FC400
ODUflex
RX1/TX1- RX8/TX8 (Any four of the eight ports)
FC400
ODUflex
FC400 FC400 Client-side Pass-through services Loopbacked services
ODUflex ODUflex Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1193

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TOA, refer toTable 15-113. Table 15-113 TOA parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Query or set the path Loopback.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
Channel Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1194
Field Service Type
Value None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FC-400, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE (TTT-AGMP), GE (GFP-T), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, 3GSDI Default: None
NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE(TTTAGMP), the encapsulation format is TTTAGMP; when Service Type is GE(GFPT), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(TTT-AGMP) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format. NOTE The TOA board's ports may work in any of five working modes and the type of the client-side services received by the ports varies with the working modes. l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU0): Supports DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FDDI, FE, FICON, GE(GFPT), GE(TTT-AGMP), OC-3, OC-12, SDI, STM-1, and STM-4 services. l ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any>ODU1): Supports Any, DVB-ASI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12 , SDI, HDSDI, and GE(GFP-T) services. l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any>ODU1): Supports FC-200, FICONExpress, HDSDI, OC-48, OTU-1, and STM-16 services. l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0): Supports OTU1 services. l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any>ODUflex):Supports FC400, 3G-SDI services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1195
Value l Channel 1 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8): 125 2200 l Channels 28 at each of ports 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) to 208 (ClientLP8/ ClientLP8): 125 1250 Default: /
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to Any.
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
FEC Working State
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1196
Value 1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
Description The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
PRBS Test Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1197
Value ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU1), ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1), ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port) Default: ODU0 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU0)
15.9.11 Specifications of the TOA

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN54TO A Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1198

NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1199
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Table 15-115 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km NRZ 10 1000 BASELX-40 km NRZ 40 1000 BASEZX-80 km NRZ 80
km
NRZ 0.5
1200
Unit
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1201

NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1202
Unit
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1203
Unit
G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI signals.
Table 15-118 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDI services Item Optical Module Type Unit Value 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km km Gbit/s NRZ 10 3
Line code format Target distance Service rate
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm dBm dBm dB 1290 to 1330 0 -7 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1204
Unit
Value 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km
Maximum -20 dB spectral width
nm
3.0
Power Consumption
TN54TOA
15.10 TOG
TOG: 8 x GE service processing board

The available functional version of the TOG board is TN52.

Boar d TN52 TOG
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 Y
15.10.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TOG board implements conversion between 8 channels of GE optical signals or GE electrical signals and 4 channels of ODU1 electrical signals or 8 channels of ODU0 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-265 and Figure 15-266. Figure 15-265 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 8800)
1 GE 8 client side TOG 8 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 8 WDM side 1 TOG 8 client side 1 GE
Figure 15-266 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
1 GE 8 client side TOG 4 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX
MUX
DMUX G.694.1 NS2
1 TOG 4 WDM side
1 GE 8 client side

The TOG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-119.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1206
Table 15-119 Functions and features of the TOG board Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities Description
Converts between eight channels of GE optical signals or GE electrical signals and four channels of ODU1 electrical signals or eight channels of ODU0 electrical signals. GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OptiX OSN 8800: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the backplane. OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of eight channels of client-side service signals into four channels of ODU1 signals. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing defined in the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU1/ODU0.
Alarms and performance events monitoring PRBS function Test frame IEEE 1588v2 Physical clock ALS function
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. Not supported. Not supported. Supported. Supported. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. Supported l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.
Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1207
Function and Feature Loopback
Description
WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
IEEE 802.3z

The TOG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-267 or Figure 15-268 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1208
Signal Flow
Figure 15-267 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
8XODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Client-side optical module 8
Crossconnect module
1588
( Backplane controlled by SCC ) SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1209
Figure 15-268 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/ 3800)
4XODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Service Encapsulation and mapping module
Crossconnect module
1588
( Backplane controlled by SCC) SCC
The client side of the TOG board can access the following optical signals: l l GE optical signals. GE electrical signals.
In the signal flow of the TOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOG to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out 4 channels of ODU1 signals or 8 channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane for grooming. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 or ODU0 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 or ODU0 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out 8 channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1210
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and then outputs 8 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 8 channels of GE optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from 8 channels of the internal electrical signals to GE optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of a GE service encapsulation and mapping module and an OTN processing module. GE service encapsulation and mapping module It encapsulates multiple GE signals and maps the GE signals to the ODU1 or ODU0 payload area and performs the reverse of the preceding process. It supports the function of GE performance monitoring. OTN processing module Frames ODU1 or ODU0 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 or ODU0 signals. l Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOG and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals. l 1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
NOTE
Two channels IEEE 1588v2 signals are supported by the TOG.
15.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board.

Figure 15-269 shows the TOG front panel. Figure 15-269 Front panel of the TOG board
TOG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TOG
Indicators
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1212
Interfaces
There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board. Table 15-120 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-120 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOG board Interface TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.10.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TOG board. Table 15-121 shows the valid slots for the TOG board. Table 15-121 Valid slots for TOG board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1213
Table 15-122 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOG board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-270 shows the application model of the TOG board.Table 15-123 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-270 Port diagram of the TOG board
Other tributary/ PID board Backplane
8xODU0/4xODU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1 4(RX2/TX2)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1 Client Side
Crossconnect module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1214

Table 15-123 Meaning of NM port of the TOG board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 ClientLP1-ClientLP8 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU0 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU0LP port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-271. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU1LP port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-272.
Figure 15-271 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU0 level)

WDM side
Client side
TOG
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1215
Figure 15-272 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU1 level)

WDM side
IN/OUT-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
Client side
TOG
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/ TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3 /TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TOG, refer to Table 15-124. Table 15-124 TOG parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1216
Field Laser Status
Value Off, On Default: Off
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.
NOTE This parameter must be set to Auto-Negotiation when the PTP clock function is used.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable lock synchronization. Set the parameter to Enabled if clock synchronization is required. When this parameter is set to Enabled, service clocks are synchronized with NE clocks. When the parameter is set to Disabled, service clocks will not be synchronized with NE clocks.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1217
Field Synchronous/ Asynchronous Mode
Value Asychronous, Sychronous Default: Asychronous
Description Specifies a clock source, or determines whether to transparently transmit the upstream clock information or to trace the local clock. Set the parameter based on the network design. The default value is Asynchronous for the board to trace the local clock. The default value is recommended because the local clock has higher quality. When the parameter is set to Asynchronous, the board will terminate the clock information in the client-side services. Instead, it will trace the local clock and transmit the clock information to the downstream station. When the parameter is set to Synchronous, the board will extract the clock information from its client-side services and transparently transmit the clock information to the downstream station.
NOTE Value change of this parameter will cause service interruption.
15.10.10 Specifications of the TOG

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN52TO G Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1218

dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1219

NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1220
Power Consumption
TN52TOG
15.11 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board

The available functional versions of the TOM board are TN11 and TN52.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TOM TN52 TOM OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y

Function: l The TN52TOM board supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU0 electrical signals. The TN11TOM board does not support the conversion. For details, see 15.11.3 Function and Feature.
Specification: l The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use. For details, see 15.11.10 Specifications of the TOM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The TOM boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
15.11.2 Application
The TOM can be used in different application scenarios. In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces. The total service access rate of the eight pairs of client-side optical ports cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s. The TOM board has two working modes, that is, Cascading mode and Non-cascading mode. There are totally 5 scenarios of the TN11TOM. There are totally 12 scenarios of the TN52TOM. The scenarios of the TN11TOM: l In cascading mode, there are two scenarios. Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) l In non-cascading mode, there are three scenarios. Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1) The scenarios of the TN52TOM: l In cascading mode, there are four scenarios. Scenario 1: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 3: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) l In non-cascading mode, there are eight scenarios. Scenario 5: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1) Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1222

NOTE
In scenario 1 of the TN52TOM, the service mapping path in OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 are difference. The details are as follows: l l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0. For the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1.
In scenario 5 of the TN52TOM, the service mapping path in OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 are difference. The details are as follows: l l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0. For the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1.
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports scenario 11 of the TN52TOM, Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports scenario 12 of the TN52TOM,
The TN52TOM board supports six types of service package, see Table 15-134.
TN11TOM scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-273. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-312. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-329. Figure 15-273 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 8 Client side
NOTE
MUX TOM NS2 G.694.1 DMUX
DMUX G.694.1 NS2 MUX TOM
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 8
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
TN11TOM scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-274. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-313. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-330.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1223
Figure 15-274 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system

G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s MUX DMUX TOM MUX 6 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side DMUX 6 DMUX 1 MUX TOM 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2
MUX TOM
DMUX G.694.1/ G.694.2 TOM
7 Client side
DMUX
MUX
7 WDM side Client side
WDM side
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
TN11TOM scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-275. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-314. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-331. Figure 15-275 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 3)
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 8 Client side TOM 4 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 4 1 TOM 8 Client side 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1224

NOTE
In this application scenario, the client-side internal logical ports of the TOM are divided into four groups: ClientLP1-ClientLP2, ClientLP3-ClientLP4, ClientLP5-ClientLP6, and ClientLP7-ClientLP8. Any group of these internal logical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
TN11TOM scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in noncascading mode

Implements conversion between four optical signals at the rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-276. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-315. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-332. Figure 15-276 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4)
G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 1 MUX DMUX G.694.1/ G.694.2 1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM DMUX MUX
TOM
4 Client side
4 Client side
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as described in the system plan.
TN11TOM scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board)

Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-277. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-316. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-333.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1225
Figure 15-277 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5)

W DM side DMUX
4
W DM side TOM
4
MUX
G.694.1 MUX
4
G.694.1 TOM
4 DMUX
NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
TN52TOM scenario 1: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-278 and Figure 15-279. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-317. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-334. Figure 15-278 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0)
NOTE
1 TOM 8 NS2 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX G.694.1 NS2
1 TOM 8
DMUX WDM side
MUX WDM side
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1226
Figure 15-279 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0->ODU1)

NOTE
MUX TOM NS2 G.694.1 DMUX
DMUX G.694.1 NS2 MUX TOM
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 8
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
TN52TOM scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-280. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-318. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-335. Figure 15-280 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1227
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2
MUX TOM
DMUX G.694.1/ G.694.2 TOM
7 Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed. On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
TN52TOM scenario 3: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-281. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-319. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-336. Figure 15-281 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 3)
1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 8 Client side TOM NS2 G.694.1 DMUX MUX MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 TOM 8 WDM side Client side 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
WDM side
NOTE
TN52TOM scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-282. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-320. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-337.
Figure 15-282 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU)

1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s G.694.1/ G.694.2
MUX TOM
DMUX G.694.1/ G.694.2 TOM
7 Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
NOTE
On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. In this scenario, mapping of ODU0 services is not supported. This is different than the TN52TOM scenario 2.
TN52TOM scenario 5: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any Signals and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-283 and Figure 15-284. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-321. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-338.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1229
Figure 15-283 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0)

NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
Figure 15-284 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0->ODU1)

NOTE
1 TOM 4 NS2 G.694.1
MUX
DMUX G.694.1 NS2
1 TOM 4
DMUX WDM side
MUX WDM side
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
TN52TOM scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-285 or Figure 15-286. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-322. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-339.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1230
Figure 15-285 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: A)

G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s MUX TOM DMUX DMUX MUX TOM G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
The conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
Figure 15-286 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: B)

G.694.1 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s DMUX TOM MUX 4 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX WDM side Client side DMUX 4 DMUX MUX TOM G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
On the client side, each optical interface can access services at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s. On the client side, four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
TN52TOM scenario 7: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-287 or Figure 15-288. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-323. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-340.
NOTE
In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 8.
Figure 15-287 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: A)

The conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.
Figure 15-288 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: B)

1 OTU1 4 Client side TOM 4 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 4 1 TOM 4 Client side
1 OTU1
The conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
TN52TOM scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any reencapsulation. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-289. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-326. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-341.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1232
Figure 15-289 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 8)

1 OTU1 4 Client side TOM 4 1 NS2 G.694.1 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 4 1 TOM 4 Client side 1 OTU1
NOTE
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.
TN52TOM scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any reencapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-290. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-327. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-342. Figure 15-290 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 9)
G.694.1/ G.694.2
MUX DMUX DMUX MUX
G.694.1/ G.694.2
OTU1
TOM
MUX DMUX DMUX MUX WDM side
TOM
OTU1
Client side
NOTE
WDM side
Client side
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.
TN52TOM scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode

For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-291. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-328. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-343.
Figure 15-291 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 10) A: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
W DM side DMUX
4
W DM side TOM
4
MUX
G.694.1 MUX
4
G.694.1 TOM
4 DMUX
B: Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode. Implements conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s MUX TOM DMUX DMUX MUX TOM G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
G.694.1 MUX 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s DMUX TOM MUX 4 DMUX Client side WDM side MUX DMUX DMUX MUX
G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1234
TN52TOM scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in noncascading mode

Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-292. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-324. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-344. Figure 15-292 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 11)
1 OTU1 4 Client side TOM
1 NS2 G.694.1 8
MUX
DMUX G.694.1 NS2
1 TOM 8
1 OTU1 4 Client side
DMUX WDM side
MUX WDM side
NOTE
In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 12.
TN52TOM scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any reencapsulation. For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 15-293. For the port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-325. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 15-345. Figure 15-293 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 12)
1 OTU1 4 Client side TOM
1 NS2 G.694.1 8
MUX
DMUX G.694.1 NS2
1 TOM 8
1 OTU1 4 Client side
DMUX WDM side
MUX WDM side
NOTE
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services. In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI services can be accessed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1235
15.11.3 Function and Feature

The TOM board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-127.
NOTE
ODU0 is only supported by the TN52TOM in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1236
Table 15-127 Functions and features of the TOM board Function and Feature Basic function Description
TN11TOM: l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal. l Converts between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and converts the signals into a standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and converts the signals into a standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four ODU1 signals. l Converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four OTU1 signals, and converts the signals into a standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. l Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals. TN52TOM: l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal. l Converts between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal. l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal. l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals. l Converts between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. l Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals. l Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation. l Converts between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side. l Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1237
Description
The TN52TOM board supports six types of service package, see Table 15-134. Client-side service type FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE The TOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only, for detailed description of the configuration. see Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board in Configuration Guide. The TOM board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI electrical signals. When the TOM board accesses these electrical signals, the digital video O/E converter must be used for O/E or E/O conversion. For details, see 12.3 Digital Video O-E Converter. The access optical module on the client side requires the SDI access module. See Table 15-140.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1238
Description
OptiX OSN 8800: l TN52TOM Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals or eight ODU0 signals through the cross-connect bus on the backplane and the crossconnect board. OptiX OSN 6800: l TN11TOM Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Supports the transmission of maximum of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. l TN52TOM Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane. Supports the transmission of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane. OptiX OSN 3800: l TN11TOM Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight channels of GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. Supports the cross-connection of a maximum of eight signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l TN52TOM Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1239
Description
Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the GE crossconnection between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5. Supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the fourslot mesh group, that is, supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5. OTN function l The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709. Supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the SM and TCM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers on the WDM side. l Supports the PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions at the ODU1 layer. l Supports the SM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers. l TN52TOM supports the PM function at the ODU0 layer. WDM specification ESC function FEC encoding Alarm and performance event monitoring Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power. l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. ALS function The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
PRBS function
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1240
Function and Feature Test frame Opticallayer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Description
Supported Not supported Supported by the TN52TOM OptiX OSN 3800/OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. OptiX OSN 8800: l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection. l Supports OWSP protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
eSFP
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
NOTE When being used as tributary & line board, the TOM board only supports the loopback between ClientLP1ClientLP4.
Client side
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1241
Description
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1242
Description

The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. The signal flow of the board and the functional modules over which the signals travel vary with the application scenarios. Figure 15-294 to Figure 15-298 and Figure 15-299 to Figure 15-310 show the block diagram of the functions of the TOM board. The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1243
Signal flow
Figure 15-294 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1) in cascading mode)
Backplane (service cross-connection) 4 x 100 Mbit/s - 2.5 Gbit/s / 1 x ODU1 Client side
RX 1 RX 2 RX 8 TX 1 TX 2 TX 8
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
Backplane (controlled by SCC )
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal. On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU1 signals or eight channels of Any signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane.
For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module. For ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal flow
Figure 15-295 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
WDM side O/E Service CrossOTN encapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module Signal processing module E/O
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
O/E
Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal.
NOTE
In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six or seven channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical signals, and then output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX7-RX8 optical interfaces. After processing, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. After processing, the module outputs seven or six channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels or seven channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6 or TX1-TX7 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1246
Signal Flow
Figure 15-296 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
Backplane (service cross-connection) 4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 4X ODU1 Client side RX1 RX2 RX8 TX1 TX2 TX8 E/O
O/E 8
Service OTN encapsulation processing and mapping module module
Crossconnect module
SCC
Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals. On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane.
For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module. For ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-297 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
WDM side O/E Service OTN Crossprocessing connect encapsulation module module and mapping module Signal processing module E/O
TX5 TX6 TX7 TX8 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8
E/O
O/E
Converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four ITUT Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
NOTE
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations, such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the TX5- TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX5-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
In this application scenario, the client-side internal logical ports of the TOM are divided into four groups: ClientLP1-ClientLP2, ClientLP3-ClientLP4, ClientLP5-ClientLP6, and ClientLP7-ClientLP8. For client services at a rate greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI), any group of these internal logical ports can access only one channel.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-298 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (electrical regeneration board) Non-cascading mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1249

WDM side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 Client-side optical module

WDM side
TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 WDM-side optical module
Cross-connect O/E module
Service regeneration module
E/O
SCC
Cascading mode
WDM side WDM side
Cross-connect
RX7
O/E
module
Service regeneration module
E/O
TX7
SCC
The TOM board implements the regeneration of one/four channels of unidirectional optical signals.

NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces. In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the RX1RX4 interfaces and performs O/E conversion. The signal processing module performs service cross-connection, decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames. The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they have been encoded. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical signals are output through the TX1-TX4 interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-299 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1])in cascading mode) OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1251

2X ODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1252

1X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal or between eight Any signals and two ODU0 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations, such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out two channels of ODU0 signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-300 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
WDM side O/E Service OTN Crossencapsulation processing connect and mapping module module module Signal processing module E/O
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
O/E
Converts between six Any signals and one ODU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one ODU1 signal.
NOTE
On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s). On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
The transmit and receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six or seven channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX7-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs seven or six channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX7 or TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1255
Signal Flow
Figure 15-301 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1) in cascading mode)
1X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal.

NOTE
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-302 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
O/E
Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1.
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces.
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX7-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs seven or six channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX7 or TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-303 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1])in non-cascading mode) OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1258

8X ODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1259

4X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
Converts between eight Any Signals and eight ODU0 signals, or between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals or four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-304 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
O/E
Converts between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
On the client side, four or six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/ s. The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs two channels of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels or four channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels or four channels of the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs six or four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six or four channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels or four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1262
Signal Flow
Figure 15-305 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 mode (OTU1/ Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
4X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or converts between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The OTU1 service can be input through ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals or four OTU1 signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the eight channels or four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service crossIssue 01 (2011-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1263
connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals or four OTU1 to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals or ODU1 electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels or four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-306 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
4X ODU1
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
Converts between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1264

NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s. The OTU1 service can be input through ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four OTU1 signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, re-encapsulation and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping, re-encapsulation and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of OTU1 to the clientside optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of ODU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-307 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
TX7 TX8 RX7 RX8
E/O
O/E
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1265
Converts between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives two channels of the OTU1 optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, re-encapsulation, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs two channels of OTU1 signals. The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels or four channels of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, re-encapsulation and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of OTU1 signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1266
Signal Flow
Figure 15-308 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
WDM side O/E Service OTN Crossprocessing connect encapsulation module module and mapping module Signal processing module E/O
TX5 TX6 TX7 TX8 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8
E/O
O/E
Converts between OTU1 signal and OTU1 signal, or converts between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals.
NOTE
Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals or four channels of OTU1 from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, regeneration of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two or four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the TX1- TX8 optical interfaces.
Receive direction The WDM-side optical module receives two or four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1267
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals, performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four or six channels of electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 15-309 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
8X ODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals.

NOTE
This scenario is only supported in the OptiX OSN 8800. The OTU1 service can be input through ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1268
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four OTU1 signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of four OTU1 to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of ODU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1269
Signal Flow
Figure 15-310 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
8X ODU0
O/E
8
E/O
Crossconnect module
SCC
Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
NOTE
This scenario is only supported in the OptiX OSN 8800.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four OTU1 signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, re-encapsulation and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU0 framing, demapping, re-encapsulation and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of four OTU1 to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of ODU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l WDM-side optical module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard optical signals. WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to standard optical signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, OTN processing module, service processing module, and service regeneration module. Cross-connect module Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding. Service processing module Regenerates Any signals and monitors SDH and Any signals in two directions. Service regeneration module Implements the FEC decoding/encoding and overhead processing of OTU1 signals. Monitors the performance of WDM-side services. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

15.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board.

Figure 15-311 shows the front panel of the TOM board. Figure 15-311 Front panel of the TOM board
TOM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1272
Indicators
Interfaces
There are sixteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board. Table 15-128 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-128 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOM board Interface TX1-TX8 RX1-RX8 Type LC LC Function Transmits the service signal. Receives the service signal.
Laser Hazard Level

15.11.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TOM board. Table 15-129 shows the valid slots for the TN11TOM board. Table 15-130 shows the valid slots for the TN52TOM board. Table 15-129 Valid slots for the TN11TOM board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5
Table 15-130 Valid slots for the TN52TOM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68

1273
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5


Table 15-131 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. . Table 15-131 Mapping between the physical ports on the TOM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board.
Figure 15-312 to Figure 15-316 show the port diagrams of the TN11TOM board. Figure 15-317 to Figure 15-328 show the port diagrams of the TN52TOM board. Table 15-132 and Table 15-133 describe the meaning of each port. The TOM board has two working modes, that is, Cascading mode and Non-cascading mode. You can select a proper mode by using the U2000 according to the actual application requirements. The difference between the two modes lies in the ports of the board and the crossconnection routes. For the TN11TOM, in Cascading mode, there are two modes of the board. In non-cascading mode, there are four modes of the board. For the TN52TOM, in cascading mode, there are four modes of the board. In non-cascading mode, there are eight modes of the board. Figure 15-312 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any>ODU1))
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52NS2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 1(IN/OUT)
Figure 15-313 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1)) Converts between six Any signals and one ODU1 signal and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 10(RX8/TX8) 9(RX7/TX7)
8(RX6/TX6) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 : Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1275
Converts between seven Any signals and one ODU1 signal.

11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 10(RX8/TX8)
: Client-side services : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Figure 15-314 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1))
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2 1(IN/OUT) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 52NS2 51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
NOTE
In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a maximum of two services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1276
Figure 15-315 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1))
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)
Figure 15-316 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1))
11TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4)
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)
NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces. In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal. Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
Figure 15-317 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0 [->ODU1])) OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1277

52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 9(RX7/TX7) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8 10(RX8/TX8) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1

52NS2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 1(IN/OUT) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0

52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 9(RX7/TX7) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8 10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
1(IN/OUT)
Other board
163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.
Figure 15-318 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 10(RX8/TX8) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202 (ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time. In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1278
Figure 15-319 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1))
52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 10(RX8/TX8) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 52NS2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 1(IN/OUT)
Figure 15-320 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) : Client-side services : WDM-side services : Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS : Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 10(RX8/TX8) 9(RX7/TX7)
NOTE
In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
Figure 15-321 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1])) OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1279

52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)4 4(RX2/TX2) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 6(RX4/TX4) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)4 8(RX6/TX6) 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4 9(RX7/TX7) 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1

52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
10(RX8/TX8)
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1

52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 4(RX2/TX2) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 6(RX4/TX4) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 8(RX6/TX6) 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4 9(RX7/TX7) 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 1(IN/OUT) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52NS2
7(RX5/TX5)
10(RX8/TX8)
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule applies.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1280
Figure 15-322 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 4(RX2/TX2) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 6(RX4/TX4) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 10(RX8/TX8) 9(RX7/TX7) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 8(RX6/TX6) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5)
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule applies. The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as required.
Figure 15-323 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1)) OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800:
A 52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 1(IN/OUT) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 A 52NS2
: Client-side services : WDM-side services : Working service direction : Virtual channel
OptiX OSN 3800:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1281

52TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

52NS2
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 1(IN/OUT) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2
NOTE
Particularly, in the OptiX OSN 3800, inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2 boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the 52NS2 board, the ClientLP5-1 port on the 52TOM board is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on the 52NS2 board.
Figure 15-324 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1>ODU1->ODU0))
52TOM 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 1(IN/OUT) 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52NS2
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 9(RX7/TX7) 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan. The OTU1 signals are accessed on the client side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1282
Figure 15-325 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0))
52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-1 9(RX7/TX7) 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 1(IN/OUT) 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52NS2
NOTE
Figure 15-326 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1))
52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-1 9(RX7/TX7) 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 243(AnyLP11/AnyLP11)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 242(AnyLP10/AnyLP10)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-2 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 1(IN/OUT) 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52NS2
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1283
Figure 15-327 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 3(RX1/TX1) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 5(RX3/TX3) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 9(RX7/TX7) 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 10(RX8/TX8) 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 8(RX6/TX6)
NOTE
Figure 15-328 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)) OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 9(RX7/TX7) 10(RX8/TX8)
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 10(RX8/TX8) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 9(RX7/TX7)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1284

TOM 3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
7(RX5/TX5) 8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 10(RX8/TX8)
NOTE
Table 15-132 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode) Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a ClientLP1/ClientLP2 ODU1LP1 ODU0LP1 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.
a: In different application scenarios, RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as clientside interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.
Table 15-133 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode) Port Name RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a TN11TOM: l ClientLP1 l ClientLP3 TN52TOM: l ClientLP1 l ClientLP2 l ClientLP5 l ClientLP6 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1285
Port Name TN11TOM: l ClientLP2 l ClientLP4 TN52TOM: l ClientLP3 l ClientLP4 l ClientLP7 l ClientLP8 AnyLP1-AnyLP12 ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4
Meaning Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2.
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 2. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
a: In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.
NOTE
Only the display of NM port in cascading mode is different from that in non-cascading mode. The configuration in cascading mode is similar to the configuration in non-cascading mode.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS.
Configuration
If the TOM board is used to transmit services, set Board working Mode in Configuration > WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Cascading and Non-cascading. l Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 1 During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1 service is implemented through the cross-connect module in cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-329
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1286
Figure 15-329 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 1)

1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 Standard mode 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
WDM side
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
WDM side
2
TOM
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Other board (Compatible mode)
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Other board (Standard TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 mode)
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 2 During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-330

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3 2 TOM 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3 2 10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
TOM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1287
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 3 During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1 service is implemented through the cross-connect module in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-331.

WDM side
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 4 During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-332.

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1
TOM 1
WDM side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)
3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1288
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 5 (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 15-333.

Client side
TOM 1
WDM side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2) 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3) 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)
3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3) 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 1 (Cascading mode:ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN 8800, as shown (2) in Figure 15-334. Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU1 services in OptiX OSN 6800/3800, as shown (2) in Figure 15-334.
NOTE
When creating the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected. For Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports respectively must not be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type must not be configured.
Figure 15-334 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 1) OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1289
WDM side
Standard mode
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8
WDM side
TOM
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/ TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2

WDM side
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1 3 161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-2 2
WDM side
TOM Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards, which needs to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1290

Other board (Compatible mode) Other board (Standard mode)

TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 2 (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-335. Create OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/ TX8 of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 15-335.

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-5 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-6 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-7 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-8 161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1 3 161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-2 3 51(ODU1LP1/ ODU1LP1)-1 2 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
TOM Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1 3 161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-2 3
51(ODU1LP1/ ODU1LP1)-1
WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1 2
TOM Cross-connect module
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 3 (Cascading mode: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). Create the crossconnection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following cross-connections:
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1291
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-336. Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (2) in Figure 15-336. Figure 15-336 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 3)
WDM side
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
WDM side
2
TOM
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Other board TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2 (Standard mode)
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 4 (Cascading mode: ODU1 tributaryline mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1>OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-337. Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 15-337.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1292

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3 2 TOM 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-6 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 3 2 10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 5 (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then, create the following cross-connections, as shown in Figure 15-338. Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN 8800, as shown (3) in Figure 15-338. Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU1 services in OptiX OSN 6800/3800, as shown (4) in Figure 15-338.
NOTE
When configuring the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected. For Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1.
Figure 15-338 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 5) OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1293

WDM side
Standard mode
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
WDM side
TOM
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/ TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1294
Other board
WDM side
Compatible mode
Client side
TOM
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-2 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-3 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-4 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-1 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-2 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-3 206(ClientLP6/ClientLP6)-4 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-2 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-1 208(ClientLP8/ClientLP8)-2
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1 162(ODU0LP2 /ODU0LP2)-1
163(ODU0LP3 /ODU0LP3)-1
TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 6 (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-339. Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 15-339.
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of the optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the client-side or the WDM-side interfaces. If six Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output. If four Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output for dual transmitting and selective receiving.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1295

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-3 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2 3 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-2 162(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-1 162(ODU0LP1/ ODU0LP1)-2 52(ODU1LP2/ ODU1LP2)-1 3 51(ODU1LP1/ ODU1LP1)-1 2
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 7 (Non-cascading: ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-340. create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port on the TOM board and the ODU1LP port on the TN52NS2 boards to implement grooming of ODU1 services, defined as (2) in Figure 15-340.
NOTE
When the internal cross-connection of ODU1 signal is configured, only the first route can be selected. For example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Only ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7 can be used. Each ClientLP logical port can access a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1296

WDM side
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-3 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-4 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-2
WDM side
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 8 (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-341. Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board, as shown (3) in Figure 15-341. create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown (4) in Figure 15-341.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1297

WDM side
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
201(ClientLP1 /ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3 /ClientLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5 /ClientLP5)-1 203(ClientLP7 /ClientLP7)-1
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-2 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-4 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-5 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-6 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-7 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-2 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-3 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-4 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-5 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-6 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-7 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-4 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-5 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-6 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-7 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-2 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-3 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-4 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-5 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-6 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-7 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8
WDM side
4
TOM
236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-7 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8
244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 164(ODU0LP4 /ODU0LP4)-1
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 9 (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 reencapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-342. Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown (3) in Figure 15-342. Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown (4) in Figure 15-342.
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the client-side or the WDM-side interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1298

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1 /ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3 /ClientLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5 /ClientLP5)-1 207(ClientLP7 /ClientLP7)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-2 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-4 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-5 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-6 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-7 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-2 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-3 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-4 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-5 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-6 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-7 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-4 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-5 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-6 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-7 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-2 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-3 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-4 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-5 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-6 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-7 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-8
161(ODU0LP1 /ODU0LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1 /ODU1LP1)-1
WDM side
7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 4
2
9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 10 (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-343. Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM board, as shown (3) in Figure 15-343.
Figure 15-343 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 10) OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 TOM 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)-1 54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
WDM side
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
WDM side
9(TX7/RX7)-1 3 10(TX8/RX8)-1 TOM
Any->ODU1->OTU1 dual fed and selective receiving mode.


Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 4(TX2/RX2)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1

WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 3 7(TX5/RX5)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 10(TX8/RX8)-1 TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 11 (Non-cascading: ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1>ODU0). Then, create the following cross-connections: Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-344. Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU0 services, as shown (2) in Figure 15-344.

WDM side
Standard mode
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1 1
TOM
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1300
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 12 (Non-cascading: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)) During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board, as shown (1) in Figure 15-345. Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown (3) in Figure 15-345. Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the AnyLP port of the TOM board and ODU0LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU0 services, as shown (4) in Figure 15-345.

WDM side
Standard mode
Other board
Compatible mode
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 1 5(TX3/RX3)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 2 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-2 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-4 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-5 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-6 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-7 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-2 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-3 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-4 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-5 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-6 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-7 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-8 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-2 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-4 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-5 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-6 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-7 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-2 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-3 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-4 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-5 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-6 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-7 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-1 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8
WDM side
4
TOM
The TN52TOM board supports six types of service package, Service packages enable one-click configuration of typical services by issuing multiple configuration commands in batches, facilitating product deployment commissioning and reducing maintenance costs. The configuration commands include commands for configuring working modes, service types,
cross-connections, and port types. Table 15-134 lists the service packages for the TN52TOM board and the corresponding configuration contents. Table 15-134 Service packages for the TN52TOM board and the corresponding configuration contents Service Package Name Board Working Mode Port Working Mode Service Type Port Type CrossConnectio n Configurat ion Bidirectional ANY-level crossconnections are configured between ports from RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Tributary 4*STM-16/ OC48>4*ODU1
NonCascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 Mode (OTU1/ Any>ODU1) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Service Type is set to STM-16/ OC48 for channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1302
Service Package Name
Board Working Mode
Port Working Mode
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion l Bidirecti onal GElevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports RX1/ TX1, RX3/ TX3, RX5/ TX5, and RX7/ TX7 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP 1, ClientLP 3, ClientLP 5, and ClientLP 7. l Bidirecti onal GElevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports RX2/ TX2, RX4/ TX4, RX6/ TX6, and RX8/ TX8 and
Tributary 8*GE>8*ODU0
NonCascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 Mode (Any>ODU0[>ODU1]) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Service Type is set to GE for channel 1 of ports from ClientLP1 to ClientLP8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1303
Board Working Mode
Port Working Mode
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion channel 2 of ports ClientLP 2, ClientLP 4, ClientLP 6, and ClientLP 8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1304
Board Working Mode
Port Working Mode
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion l Bidirecti onal ANYlevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX1/ TX1 to RX7/ TX7 and channels 1 to 7 of port ClientLP 1. l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between port RX8/ TX8 and channel 1 of port ODU1LP 1.
Tributary line 7*STM-1/ OC3>ODU1
Cascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributaryline (OTU1/ Any>ODU1>OTU1) for port ClientLP1.
Service Type is set to STM-1/ OC3 for channels 1 to 4 of port ClientLP1.
Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for port RX8/TX8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1305
Board Working Mode
Port Working Mode
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion l Bidirecti onal ANYlevel crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX1/ TX1 to RX7/ TX7 and channels 1 to 4 of port ClientLP 1 and channels 5 to 7 of port ClientLP 2. l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between port RX8/ TX8 and channel 1 of port ODU1LP 1.
Tributary line 7*FE>ODU0
Cascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU0 tributaryline (Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1) for port ClientLP1.
l Service Type is set to FE for channels 1 to 4 of port ClientLP 1 and channels 5 to 7 for port ClientLP 2.
Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for port RX8/TX8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1306
Board Working Mode
Port Working Mode
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX1/ TX1 to RX4/ TX4 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP 1, ClientLP 3, ClientLP 5, and ClientLP 7. l Bidirecti onal OTU1level crossconnectio ns are configure d between ports from RX5/ TX5 to RX8/ TX8 and channel 1 of ports from ODU1LP
4*OTU1 REG
NonCascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU1 tributaryline (OTU1/ Any>ODU1>OTU1) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Service Type is set to OTU1 for channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Port Type is set to Line Side Color Optical Port for ports from RX5/TX5 to RX8/TX8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1307
Board Working Mode
Port Working Mode
Service Type
Port Type
CrossConnectio n Configurat ion 1 to ODU1LP 4.
Tributary 4*OTU1>ODU1 (reencapsulated into ODU0)
NonCascading mode
Port Working Mode is set to ODU1_AN Y_ODU0_O DU1 reencapsulati on tributaryline mode (OTU1>ODU1>Any>ODU0>ODU1>OTU1) for ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Service Type is set to OTU1 for channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.
Bidirectional OTU1-level crossconnections are configured between ports from RX1/TX1 to RX4/TX4 and channel 1 of ports ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, and ClientLP7.

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TOM, refer to Table 15-135. Table 15-135 TOM parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1308
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Query or set the path Loopback.
NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter.
Channel Loopback
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3, 0C-12, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 Default: None
100 - 2200 Default: /
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1309
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
LPT Enabled
Service Mode
FEC Working State
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1310
Description The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
PRBS Test Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1311
Description Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning. The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.
Board Mode
Cascading Mode, Noncascading Mode Default: Noncascading Mode
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Board Working mode Cascading, NonCascading Default: NonCascading The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.
NOTE Only the TN52TOM supports this parameter. Cascading: Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to six channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals. Non-Cascading: RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any signals into two channels of OTU1 signals.
Port Working Mode
In Non-Cascading mode, nine working modes are supported.a In Cascading mode, five working modes are supported.b
This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail. For the configuration methods of different application scenarios of the TOM board, see the Configuration Guide.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1312
Field
Value
Description
a: Working modes supported in Non-Cascading mode are as follows: l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) l ODU1_ODU0 mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) l Application 3 of ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) l ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1) l NONE Mode (Not for Port) b: Working modes supported in Cascading mode are as follows: l ODU0 mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) l ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) l ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) l NONE Mode (Not for Port)
15.11.10 Specifications of the TOM

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Bo ard Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASE-LX-10 km 1000 BASE-LX-40 km 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
TN 11T OM TN 52T OM
NOTE
NOTE

NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
1314
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1315
dBm
-2.5
-3
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1316

NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 9 6.5 1.0 30 IEEE802.3z-compliant 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
PIN 1270 to 1620
APD 1270 to 1620
1317
Unit
Value 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km -28 -9 -27
dBm dBm dB
-19 -3 -27
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1318
Unit
G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services)
Table 15-140 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDI services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance Service rate km Gbit/s Unit Value 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km NRZ 20 1.5
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating frequency range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm dBm dBm dB nm 1290 to 1330 0 -7 5 3
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm dBm
1260 to 1620 -22 0

1319
Unit
Value 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km
dB
-27

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1320
Table 15-142 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ 120
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1321
Table 15-143 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Unit Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
G.957-compliant
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1322
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11TOM: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.) TN52TOM: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 55 81 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 60 89.1
TN11TOM TN52TOM
15.12 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board

The available functional versions of the TQM board are TN11 and TN12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1323

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TQM TN12 TQM OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y

l Function: Only the TN12TQM supports the OTU1/HD-SDI/SDI/FDDI services, PRBS function, Test frame and Tributary SNCP protection. For details, see 15.12.3 Functions and Features. l Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 15.12.10 Specifications of the TQM.
Original Board TN11TQM Substitute Board TN12TQM Substitution Rules The TN12TQM can be created as TN11TQM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TQM functions as the TN11TQM. -
TN12TQM
None
15.12.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQM board converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection. For the position of the TQM board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-346.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1324
Figure 15-346 Position of the TQM board in the WDM system

G.694.1 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s 4 Client side WDM side TQM NS2 DMUX MUX WDM side MUX G.694.1 DMUX NS2 TQM 4 Client side 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NOTE

The TQM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-144. Table 15-144 Functions and features of the TQM board Function and Feature Basic function Description
Converts four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1325
Description
FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s STM-4/OC-12: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 622.08 Mbit/s STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FC200: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports SDI, HD-SDI, OTU1 and FDDI services. The TQM supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
OptiX OSN 6800: l Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/ s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots. l Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal or two GE signals between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. OptiX OSN 3800: l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s or one ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and multiplexed into ODU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.709. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1326
Function and Feature Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function
Description
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. TN11TQM: not supported. TN12TQM: supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
PRBS function
LPT function Test frame
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is FE or GE. TN11TQM: not supported TN12TQM: supported
Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
Not supported l Supports SW SNCP. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports MS SNCP protection. l Supports the Tributary SNCP protection (TN12TQM).
eSFP Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1327
Description
IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON)
NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports the following standards and protocols.
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1328
Description

The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-347 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1329
Figure 15-347 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM

4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1
O/E
Service OTN encapsulation and Processing Cross-connect module mapping module module
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and GE electrical signals.
NOTE
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding electrical signals. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only. The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals is considered as an example.
In the signal flow of the TQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQM to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then, If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of Any signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to Any optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals. Service encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
15.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board.

Figure 15-348 shows the front panel of the TQM board. Figure 15-348 Front panel of the TQM board
TQM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4
TQM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1332
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board. Table 15-145 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-145 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQM board Interface TX1-TX4 Type LC Function Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side equipment when the electrical module is used. RX1-RX4 LC Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment when the optical module is used. Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.
NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s. For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express, OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel. It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level

15.12.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TQM board. Table 15-146 shows the valid slots for the TQM board. Table 15-146 Valid slots for the TQM board Product OptiX OSN 6800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.

1333
Valid Slots IU2-IU5


Table 15-147 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-147 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQM board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-349 shows the application model of the TQM board. Table 15-148 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1334
Figure 15-349 Port diagram of the TQM board

Other line/ OTU board
Backplane 4 x GE/Any/OTU1 ODU1
Other tributary/ PID board
201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
Client Side
Crossconnect module Service processing module Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive GE/Any/OTU1/ODU1 signals from other boards
NOTE
TN11TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4. TN12TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/ ClientLP)-4.
Table 15-148 Meaning of NM port of the TQM board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Configuration Principle l l The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services. In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of the transmit end.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l l l
For each TQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed 16. For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can be configured only in channel 1 of the TQM board. Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required by each type of service is listed below. Service Type GE FE OTU1 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 FC100 FC200 FICON FICON Express HD-SDI DVB-ASI SDI ESCON FDDI Number of Timeslots 7 1 16 1 4 16 1 4 16 6 12 6 12 11 2 3 2 1

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level (GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can be created.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TQM board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by and in Figure 15-350. Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TQM board and the ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by 3 in Figure 15-350. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.) Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP port of the TQM board, as shown by 4 in Figure 15-350. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port. Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
Figure 15-350 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board

Client side
Other board
WDM side
Client side
4 2 1
TQM
The straight-through of the board The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the TQM board 1 2 3 4
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the board and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 15-351.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Figure 15-351 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board

IN/OUT-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:1 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 IN/OUT-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
WDM side
Client side
TQM
The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/ TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/ TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Other board b
According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and receive timeslots.

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TQM, refer to Table 15-149. Table 15-149 TQM parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1338
NOTE Only the TN12TQM supports Any, SDI, FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services. NOTE GE services can be encapsulated in two formats. When Service Type is GE, the encapsulation format is GFP-F; when Service Type is GE(GFP-T), the encapsulation format is GFP-T. The value GE(GFP-T) is recommended. The GE services at the transmit and receive ends must be encapsulated in the same format.
Service Type
None, Any, DVBASI,SDI, ESCON, FC-100, FC-200, FDDI, FE, FICON, FICON Express, GE, GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OTU-1 Default: None
100 - 2200 Default: 0
NOTE Only TN12TQM supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: Off The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1339
Field Service Mode
Value Client Mode, OTN Mode Default: Client Mode
Description The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information. The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet. See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only available for TN12TQM.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
NOTE Only available for the TN12TQM.
PRBS Test Status
15.12.10 Specifications of the TQM

Board TN11TQ M
TN12TQ M
N/A
NOTE
NOTE

NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1341
NRZ MLM 2
NRZ SLM 15
NRZ SLM 40
NRZ SLM 80
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1342
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
dBm dBm
-18 -3
-18 0
-27 -9
-28 -9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
1343
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km -3 1000 BASELX-40 km 0 1000 BASEZX-80 km 5
dBm
-2.5
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
dB
dBm dBm
-17 0
-19 -3
-20 -3
-22 -3
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1344
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1345

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload nm dBm dBm APD NA -28 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1346
Unit
dB
-27
Weight l l TN11TQM: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb.) TN12TQM: 1.1 kg (2.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 50.3 25 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 57.6 27.5
TN11TQM TN12TQM
15.13 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board

Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is, TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TQS OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1347
15.13.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQS board implements conversion between four STM-16/ OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals. For the position of the TQS board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-352. Figure 15-352 Position of the TQS board in the WDM system
G.694.1 1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 TQS 4 4 1 NS2 DMUX WDM side MUX WDM side MUX DMUX NS2 4 G.694.1 1 TQS 4 Client side 1 STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1
Client side

The TQS board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-154. Table 15-154 Functions and features of the TQS board Function and Feature Basic function Client-side service type Crossconnect capabilities Description Converts four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals into four ODU1 signals and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection. The reverse process is similar. STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TQS and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot. OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group. l Supports mapping each channel of 2.5G signals into the ODU1 signals at the ODU1 interface of the backplane. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l Supports PM functions for ODU1. ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.
OTN function
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1348
Function and Feature FEC encoding Alarms and performance events monitoring ALS function
Description Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975. l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
PRBS function LPT function Test frame Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
eSFP Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1349

The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-353 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1350
Figure 15-353 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Client-side OTN procssing module ODU1
O/E
E/O
Client-side Optical module
OTN Processing module
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQS board can access the following optical signals: l l l STM-16 optical signals OC-48 optical signals OTU1 optical signals
In the signal flow of the TQS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQS to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and FEC decoding with OTU1 signals, and performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing with STM-16/OC-48 signals. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane for grooming.
Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, framing of OTU1 signals, encoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/ OTU1 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals. OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. Client-side OTN processing module Implements the OTN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames ODU1/OTU1 signals, processes overheads in ODU1/OTU1 signals, and performs FEC encoding and decoding of the OTU1 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
15.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board.

Figure 15-354 shows the front panel of the TQS board. Figure 15-354 Front panel of the TQS board
TQS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TQS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1353
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board. Table 15-155 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 15-155 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQS board Interface TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.13.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TQS board. Table 15-156 shows the valid slots for the TQS board. Table 15-156 Valid slots for the TQS board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16. IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1354

Table 15-157 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-157 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQS board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-355 shows the application model of the TQS board. Table 15-158 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1355
Figure 15-355 Port diagram of the TQS board
Other tributary/ PID board

Backplane 4 x ODU1
3 (RX1/TX1)-1 4 (RX2/TX2)-1 5 (RX3/TX3)-1 6 (RX4/TX4)-1
201 (LP1/LP1)-1 202 (LP2/LP2)-1 203 (LP3/LP3)-1 204 (LP4/LP4)-1
Client Side
Crossconnect module Service processing module Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
Table 15-158 Meaning of NM port of the TQS board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 LP1-LP4 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical ports. All optical paths are numbered 1.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TQS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l l The corresponding channels of the four LP ports are respectively connected to the RX1/ TX1-RX4/TX4. There is no need for configuration on the U2000. During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1 cross-connection between the LP port of the TQS board and the optical channels of the
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ODU1LP port of other boards (or the IN/OUT port on the NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown Figure 15-356. Figure 15-356 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS board
WDM side
Other board a (compatible mode) Other board b (standard mode)
Client side
201(LP1/LP1)-1 201(LP1/LP1)-2 201(LP1/LP1)-3 201(LP1/LP1)-4 The client side of the TQS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
TQS
Other board a TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN12LQMS(NS1 Mode) Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
15.13.9 TQS Loopbacks

Table 15-159 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TQS boards. Table 15-159 Loopbacks supported by TQS boards Service type STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 Boar d TN11 TQS Loopback Type Client-side outloop Client-side inloop Description See Figure 15-357. See Figure 15-358.
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-357, four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services are received on the client side. One of the four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services is loopbacked to the client side and the other three STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services are passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1357
Figure 15-357 Client-side outloop on the TN11TQS board

RX1/TX1 STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 ODU1
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4 Client-side
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1 Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-358, four ODU1 services from the backplane are converted into four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. One of the four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services is loopbacked to the backplane and the other three STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 services are passed through. Figure 15-358 Client-side inloop on the TN11TQS board
RX1/TX1 STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 ODU1
RX2/TX2
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX3/TX3
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1
RX4/TX4 Client-side
STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
ODU1 Backplane
15.13.10 TQS Parameters

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TQS, refer to Table 15-160. Table 15-160 TQS parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1358
Field Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status
Description Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
Service Type
None, OC-48, OTU-1, STM-16 Default: OTU-1
Laser Status
FEC Working State
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1359
15.13.11 Specifications of the TQS

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN11TQ S Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
NOTE

NOTE
This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1 signals.
Table 15-161 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services Item Optical Module Type Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
1360
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
km
MLM 2
SLM 15
SLM 40
SLM 80
dBm
-3
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
nm
NA
dB
NA
30
30
30
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1361
Unit
Value I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
dBm
-3
-9
-9
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 signals. The specifications listed below apply to OTU1 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are STM-16, OC-48.
Table 15-162 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored wavelengths Item Optical Module Type Line code format Target distance km Unit Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km NRZ 80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central wavelength deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask nm dBm dBm dB nm nm dB 1471 to 1611 5 0 8.2 6.5 1.0 30 G.957-compliant G.959.1-compliant Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm
APD 1270 to 1620

1362
Item Optical Module Type Receiver sensitivity Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance
Unit
Value 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
dBm dBm dB
-28 -9 -27
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask THz GHz dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.00 12.5 3 0 8.5 1 30 2400 G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services) Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1363
Unit
nm dBm dBm dB
NA -28 -9 -27
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Power Consumption
TN11TQS
15.14 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

The available functional versions of the TQX board are TN11, TN52, TN53, TN55.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TQX OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1364
Boar d TN52 TQX TN53 TQX TN55 TQX
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y Y
OptiX OSN 6800 Y N Y
OptiX OSN 3800 N N N

Function: l The TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX board supports the conversion between the clientside signals and ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN55TQX board supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex electrical signals. Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board supports FC800 and FC1200 services. The TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX support the OTU2 and OTU2e services. Only the TN55TQX board supports four channels of IEEE 1588v2 function. Only the TN55TQX board supports four channels of physical clock function.
l l l l
For details, see 15.14.3 Functions and Features. Specification: l The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.14.11 Specifications of the TQX.
Table 15-164 Substitution rules of the TQX board Original Board TN11TQX Substitute Board TN52TQX, TN55TQX Substitution Rules The TN52TQX and TN55TQX can be created as TN11TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX/ TN52TQX functions as the TN11TQX. The TN53TQX and TN55TQX can be created as TN52TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TQX functions as the TN52TQX. The TN55TQX can be created as TN53TQX on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the TN53TQX.
1365
TN52TQX
TN53TQX, TN55TQX
TN53TQX
TN55TQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Original Board TN55TQX
Substitute Board None
Substitution Rules -
15.14.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQX board converts between four FC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and four ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TQX board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-361. Figure 15-359 Position of the TN11TQX board in the WDM system
G.694.1 4 10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 1 TQX 4
4 1
G.694.1 MUX DMUX 4

1
1 TQX
NQ2 4 DMUX WDM side MUX 4 WDM side
NQ2
4
10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192
Client side
Client side
Figure 15-360 Position of the TN52TQX board in the WDM system

G.694.1 10GE LAN 1 10GE WAN STM-64 TQX OC-192 OTU2 4 OTU2e Client side 4
1
G.694.1 MUX DMUX 4

1
1 TQX
NQ2
4
NQ2 4 DMUX WDM side MUX 4 WDM side

4
10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e
Client side
Figure 15-361 Position of the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board in the WDM system

G.694.1
10GE LAN 10GE WAN 1 STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e FC800 4 FC1200
G.694.1 MUX DMUX 4

1
4
1
1 TQX
TQX
4
NQ2 4 DMUX MUX 4 WDM side
NQ2
4
10GE LAN 10GE WAN STM-64 OC-192 OTU2 OTU2e FC800 FC1200
Client side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1366
NOTE
The TN11TQX board supports the conversion between four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN52TQX board supports the conversion between four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN53TQX board supports the conversion between four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The TN55TQX board supports the conversion between four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals, and supports conversion between four channels of FC800 optical signals and two channels of ODUflex electrical signals.

The TQX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-165. Table 15-165 Functions and features of the TQX board Function and Feature Basic function Description TQX convert signal as follows: l 4xFC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/ OTU2e<->4xODU2/ODU2e. l 4xFC800<->4xODUflex Client-side service type STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s FC800: SAN service at a rate of 8.5 Gbit/s FC1200: SAN service at a rate of 10.51 Gbit/s
NOTE Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports FC800 and FC1200 services. Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services. For the TN11TQX and TN52TQX, The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same. Therefore, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals between the TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.
NOTE The cross-connection of ODUflex signals is supported only by the TN55TQX board. Only the FC800 services support the ODUflex signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1367
Description l Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2/ODU2e signals at the ODU2/ODU2e interface of the backplane. l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43. l Supports PM function for ODU2. l Supports SM and TCM function when the TN52TQX , TN53TQX, TN55TQX receives OTN services.
Alarm and performance event monitoring ALS function
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures. l Monitors alarms and performance events of the OTN. l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service. The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
PRBS function
LPT function Test frame IEEE 1588v2
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. Supports the test frame of 10GE LAN services. Supports four channels of IEEE 1588v2 only when the TN55TQX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side, or receives OTU2 services on its client side. Supports four channels of physical clock only when the TN55TQX board receives 10GE LAN services and the port mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) on its client side. Supported by the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Physical clock Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme
XFP Loopback
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the client side. WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1368

The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-362 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TQX/TN11TQX. Figure 15-363 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TQX. Figure 15-364 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN55TQX.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1369
Figure 15-362 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TQX/TN11TQX

Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side ODU2/ODU2e
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4
O/E
TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1370
Figure 15-363 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TQX

Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side ODU2/ODU2e
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module E/O Client-side optical module FC encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4
O/E
TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1371
Figure 15-364 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN55TQX

Backplane(service cross-connection) Client side ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module E/O Client-side optical module FC encapsulation and mapping module OTN processing module
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4
O/E
1588
TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l l l l 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals FC800 optical signals FC1200 optical signals
NOTE
Only TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQXsupports the OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals. Only TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports the FC800/FC1200 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1372
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TQX board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQX to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 signals to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/ STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 optical signals. Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/ FC1200 optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. FC encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the ODU2/ ODU2e/ODUflex payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance monitoring function.

NOTE
FC800 services can be mapped into ODU2/ODUflex payload area and FC1200 services can be mapped into ODU2e payload area.
OTN processing module Frames ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex signals. l 1588 module According to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, the module transmits the clock information of the clock board to the next NE or extracts the clock information from the service board and then transmits the clock information to the clock board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
15.14.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board.

Figure 15-365 shows the front panel of the TQX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1374
Figure 15-365 Front panel of the TQX board

TQX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TQX
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board. Table 15-166 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1375
Table 15-166 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQX board Interface TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4 Type LC LC Function Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment. Receives service signals from the client-side equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.14.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TQX board. For the OptiX OSN 6800, if slots IU1, IU4, IU11, and IU14 house the TQX board, the TQX board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s. If any of the other slots houses the TQX board, the TQX board supports a maximum service capacity of 20 Gbit/s. For the OptiX OSN 8800: The TQX board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in any slot. Table 15-167 shows the valid slots for the TN11TQX board. Table 15-167 Valid slots for the TN11TQX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-168 shows the valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board. Table 15-168 Valid slots for the TN52TQX/TN55TQX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 15-169 shows the valid slots for the TN53TQX board.
Table 15-169 Valid slots for the TN53TQX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Table 15-170 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-170 Mapping between the physical ports on the TQX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ClientLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 15-366 shows the port diagrams of the TQX board. Table 15-171 describes the meaning of each port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1377
Figure 15-366 Port diagram of the TQX

Backplane 4x ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex
Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS.
NOTE
Only the TN55TQX board supports ODUflex.
Table 15-171 Meaning of NMS port of the TQX board Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP1-ClientLP4 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l TN11TQX/TN52QX/TN53TQX: Configuration of cross-connection Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. Step 1: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. Step 2: Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-367. l TN55TQX: Configuration of cross-connection Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through.
Step 1: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODU2 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU2->OTU2) Step 2: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. Step 3: Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-367. Create ODUflex cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service pass-through. Step 1: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > Working Mode to set the Port Working Mode. Set the Port Working Mode to ODUflex nonconvergence mode (Any->ODUflex) Step 2: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type. Step 3: Create the cross-connections of ODUflex level between the ClientLP port and the ODUflex port of the other boards, as shown in Figure 15-368.
NOTE
The TN55TQX board supports mapping of FC800 into ODUflex on the client side. When configuring cross-connections for the board, see ODUflex Timeslot to 7.
Figure 15-367 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX board

WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 2(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
Cross connect mode Client side

TQX Cross connect mode
The client side of the TQX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a
TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1379

Other board b TN11TQX:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 TN52TQX: TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/ TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53TQX: TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/ TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN55TQX:
Figure 15-368 Cross-connection diagram of the TN55TQX board

WDM side
Other board Cross connect mode Client side

TQX Cross connect mode
The client side of the TQX board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board
TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2
15.14.9 TQX Loopbacks

Table 15-172 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TQX boards. Table 15-172 Loopbacks supported by TQX boards Service type 10GE LAN/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board TN11TQ X/
Loopback Type Client-side outloop
1380
Service type 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ FC800/ FC1200
Board TN52TQ X/ TN53TQ X/ TN55TQ X
Loopback Type Client-side inloop
NOTE
The TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services. When receiving OTU2/OTU2e services, the TN52TQX board supports client-side outloop. When receiving OTU2/OTU2e services, the TN53TQX/TN55TQX board supports client-side outloop and client-side inloop. Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports FC800 and FC1200 services.
Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-369, any N of four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/ FC800/FC1200 services from the client side can be looped back to the client side and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services can be passed through.
Figure 15-369 Client-side outloop on the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX board

RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/FC800/FC1200 ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX3/TX3
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX4/TX4 Client-side
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-370, four ODU2/ODU2e services from the backplane are converted into four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. Any N of the four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1381
OC-192/FC800/FC1200 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192//FC800/FC1200 services can be passed through. Figure 15-370 Client-side inloop on the TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX board
RX1/TX1 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC192/FC800/FC1200 ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX2/TX2
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX3/TX3
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex
RX4/TX4 Client-side
ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex Backplane

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TQX, refer to Table 15-173. Table 15-173 TQX parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1382
Service Type
l TN11TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM-64 Default: None l TN52TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: None l TN53TQX/ TN55TQX: None, 10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64, FC800, FC1200 Default: None
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
NOTE For the TN11TQX: only the ClientLP1 and ClientLP3 ports support MAC transparent mapping (10.7G).
Laser Status
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.
Service Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1383
Value 9953.28, 10312.50 Default: /
NOTE Only the TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) for more information. Automatic Laser Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. Specifies the hold-off time for automatically disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service interruption to the point when ALS automatically shuts down the related lasers.
NOTE Only the TN55TQX supports this parameter.
Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Shutdown
Hold-off Time of Automatic Laser Turn-On
Specifies the hold-off time for automatically enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off time is a time period from the point when the system detects service recovery to the point when ALS automatically enables the related lasers.
NOTE Only the TN55TQX supports this parameter.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600 Default: 9600
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services.
NOTE For the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX, when Port Mapping is set to Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), Maximum Packet Length is unavailable on the U2000.
See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1384
NOTE This parameter is valid only when the client side accesses OTN services. Only the TN52TQX/TN53TQX/TN55TQX supports this parameter.
FEC Working State
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
LPT Enabled
PRBS Test Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1385
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN53TQX/TN55TQX.
Port Working Mode
ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2), ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex), NONE Mode(Not for port) Default: ODU2 nonconvergence mode (Any->ODU2>OTU2)
This parameter is used to set the working mode of the interface on the board according to the actual application scenario and service mapping trail.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by the TN55TQX
15.14.11 Specifications of the TQX

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN11TQ X Client-Side Fixed Optical Module N/A Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km TN52TQ X N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km TN53TQ X N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
Board TN55TQ X
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE
NOTE

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
dBm
-1
-1.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1387
Item Optical Module Type Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -1 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 0 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -7.3
dBm
-6
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1388
Unit
dB
-27
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1389
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11TQX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.) TN52TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN53TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.) TN55TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 65.0 91.5 45 45 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 71.2 100 50 50
TN11TQX TN52TQX TN53TQX TN55TQX
15.15 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board

The available functional versions of the TSXL board are TN11 and TN53.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TSXL TN53 TSXL OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y N OptiX OSN 3800 N N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1390

l Function: The TN11TSXL supports the cross-connections of ODU2 level. The TN53TSXL supports the cross-connections of ODU3 level. Only the TN53TSXL supports the OTU3 service. For details, see 15.15.2 Application and 15.15.3 Functions and Features. l Appearance: The TN53TSXL and TN11TSXL use different front panels with different dimensions. For details, see 15.15.5 Front Panel and 15.15.11 Specifications of the TSXL. l Specification: The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For details, see 15.15.11 Specifications of the TSXL.
The TSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
15.15.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TN11TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/ OC-768 optical signals and four channels of ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection. The TN53TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection. For the position of the TSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-371, and Figure 15-372. Figure 15-371 Position of the TN11TSXL board in the WDM system
G.694.1 NS2 STM-256 OC-768 TSXL 4 NS2 Client side 4 DMUX MUX 4 WDM side 4 MUX G.694.1 DMUX 4 NS2 4 NS2 TSXL STM-256 OC-768
WDM side
Client side
Figure 15-372 Position of the TN53TSXL board in the WDM system

G.694.1 MUX STM-256 OC-768 OTU3 TSXL NS3 DMUX MUX DMUX NS3 TSXL STM-256 OC-768 OTU3 G.694.1
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1391

NOTE
In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.

The TSXL board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 15-176. Table 15-176 Functions and features of the TSXL board Function and Feature Basic function Description l TN11TSXL: Maps one channel of STM-256/OC-768 signals on the client side into four ODU2 signals. Implements the transparent transmission of 40 Gbit/s services in a 10 Gbit/s WDM network. Implements the transparent transmission of client-side SDH/ SONET service clock and alarms. l TN53TSXL: Maps one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals on the client side into one channel of ODU3 signals. Implements the transparent transmission of client-side SDH/ SONET/OTN service clock and alarms. Client-side service type TN11TSXL: l STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s TN53TSXL: l STM-256/OC-768: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 39.81 Gbit/s l OTU3: OTN service at a rate of 43.02 Gbit/s Cross-connect capabilities Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU2 signals between the TN11TSXL and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of one channel of ODU3 signals between the TN53TSXL and the cross-connect board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1392
Description l TN11TSXL: Supports inversely multiplexing one channel of 40 Gbit/ s signals into four channels of ODU2 services. l TN53TSXL: Supports inversely multiplexing one channel of 40 Gbit/ s signals into one channel of ODU3 services. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. l TN11TSXL: Supports PM functions for ODU2. l TN53TSXL: Supports PM, TCM, SM functions for ODU3 when the client-side service type is OTU3. l Supports PM function for ODU3 when the client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is received on the backplane side. TN11TSXL: Not supported TN53TSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
PRBS function
LPT function Test frame Electrical-layer ASON Protection scheme
Not supported Not supported Supported by the TN53TSXL l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback
WDM side Client side Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1393

The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 15-373 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL. Figure 15-374 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1394
Figure 15-373 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL

4XODU2 Client side RX TX
O/E
E/O
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1395
Figure 15-374 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL

Backplane(service cross-connection) ODU3 Client side RX TX
O/E
E/O
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TSXL board can access the following optical signals: l l l STM-256 optical signals OC-768 optical signals OTU3 optical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSXL board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSXL to the backplane, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives one 40 Gbit/s service signal through the RX interface, and performs the O/E conversion. After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one channel of ODU3 electrical signals to the backplane for grooming. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one channel of ODU3 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk virtual concatenation, demapping processing. Then, the module sends out one channel of 40 Gbit/s service signal to the client-side optical module. The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one 40 Gbit/s service signal, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of STM-256/OC-768/ OTU3 optical signal. Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3 optical signal. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working state of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames ODU2, ODU3 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
15.15.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board.

Figure 15-375 shows the front panel of the TN11TSXL board. Figure 15-376 shows the front panel of the TN53TSXL board.
Figure 15-375 Front panel of the TN11TSXL board
TSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX
TSXL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1398
Figure 15-376 Front panel of the TN53TSXL board
TSXL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX RX
TSXL
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board. Table 15-177 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 15-177 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSXL board Interface RX TX Type LC LC Function Receives service signals from the client-side equipment. Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

15.15.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11TSXL board. One slot houses one TN53TSXL. Table 15-178 shows the valid slots for the TN11TSXL board. Table 15-178 Valid slots for the TN11TSXL board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector of the TN11TSXL board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11TSXL board, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 15-179 shows the valid slots for the TN53TSXL board. Table 15-179 Valid slots for the TN53TSXL board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18


Table 15-180 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 15-180 Mapping between the physical ports on the TSXL board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port RX/TX Port Number on the NMS 3
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. Figure 15-377 shows the application model of the TN11TSXL board. Figure 15-378 shows the application model of the TN53TSXL board. Table 15-181 describes the meaning of each port. Figure 15-377 Port diagram of the TN11TSXL board
Other line/ PID board

Backplane 4 x ODU2
3 (RX1/TX1)-1
151 (imp/imp)-1 151 (imp/imp)-2 151 (imp/imp)-3 151 (imp/imp)-4
Client Side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1401
Figure 15-378 Port diagram of the TN53TSXL board

Other line board
Backplane ODU3
3 (RX1/TX1)-1
201 (ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
Client Side
Crossconnect module Service processi ng module
Table 15-181 Meaning of NM port of the TSXL board Port Name RX/TX imp (inverse multiplexing port) ClientLP1 Meaning Corresponding to the client-side optical interfaces. The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. If the TSXL board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l TN11TSXL: During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU2 level between the imp port and the ODU2LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU2 services, as shown in Figure 15-379.
Figure 15-379 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TSXL board

WDM side
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1

IN1/OUT1-OCH:1 IN2/OUT2-OCH:2
Client side
151(imp/imp)-1 151(imp/imp)-2 151(imp/imp)-3 151(imp/imp)-4
TSXL
The client side of the TSXL board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board a TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN53NS2/ TN12NS2/TN52NS2/TN11NS3/TN52NS3 Other board b TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
TN53TSXL: During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU3 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU3LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU3 services, as shown in Figure 15-380.
Figure 15-380 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TSXL board

WDM side Other board
Client side
TSXL
The client side of the TSXL board is cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
Other board
TN54NS3
15.15.9 TSXL Loopbacks

Table 15-182 lists the types of loopbacks supported by TSXL boards.
Table 15-182 Loopbacks supported by TSXL boards Board TN11TSXL Loopback Type Client-side outloop Client-side inloop TN53TSXL Client-side outloop Description See Figure 15-381. See Figure 15-382. One STM-256/OC-768 service received on the Client side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-383. One OTU3 service received on the Client side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-384. Client-side inloop One STM-256/OC-768 service received on the Client side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-385. One OTU3 service received on the Client side is loopbacked, See Figure 15-386.
Loopbacks Supported by TN11TSXL

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-381, one STM256/OC-768 services from the client side can be looped back to the client side. Figure 15-381 Client-side outloop on the TN11TSXL
ODU2 RX/TX STM-256/OC-768 ODU2 ODU2 ODU2 Client-side Loopbacked services Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-382, four ODU2 services from the backplane are converted into one STM-256/OC-768 service after being framed, demapped, and decapsulated. One STM-256/OC-768 service can be looped back to the backplane. Figure 15-382 Client-side inloop on the TN11TSXL
ODU2 RX/TX STM-256/OC-768 ODU2 ODU2 ODU2 Client-side Loopbacked services Backplane
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1404
Loopbacks Supported by TN53TSXL

l Client-side outloop As shown in Figure 15-383, one STM256/OC-768 services from the client side can be looped back to the client side. Figure 15-383 Client-side outloop on the TN53TSXL (1)
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
Backplane
As shown in Figure 15-384, one OTU3 service received on the Client side is demapped into one ODU3 service after the OTU3 overhead is terminated, The one ODU3 service from the client side can be looped back to the client side. Figure 15-384 Client-side outloop on the TN53TSXL (2)
RX/TX
OTU3
ODU3
Backplane
Client-side inloop As shown in Figure 15-385, one ODU3 service from the backplane can be looped back to the backplane. Figure 15-385 Client-side inloop on the TN53TSXL (1)
RX/TX
STM-256/OC-768
ODU3
Backplane
As shown in Figure 15-386, one ODU3 service from the backplane can be looped back to the backplane.
Figure 15-386 Client-side inloop on the TN53TSXL (2)

OTU3 ODU3
RX/TX
Backplane

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of TSXL, refer to Table 15-183. Table 15-183 TSXL parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Set and query the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Type parameter sets the type of the service accessed at the optical interface on the client side.
NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports OTU-3 services.
Service Type
None, OC-768, STM-256, OTU3 Default: STM-256
Laser Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1406
Description The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface.
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU3.
FEC Working State
NOTE This parameter can be set only when Service Type is set to OTU3.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG Default: None The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NOTE Only the TN53TSXL supports this parameter.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1407
15.15.11 Specifications of the TSXL

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN11TS XL/ TN53TS XL Client-Side Fixed Optical Module 40G Transponder Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
NOTE
NOTE

Table 15-184 Specifications of client-side fixed optical module Item Optical Module Type Line code format Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
NRZ
nm dBm dBm dB dB ps/nm
1530 to 1565 3 0 8.2 35 40
nm dBm
PIN 1290 to 1570 -6

1408
Unit
dBm dB
3 -27
TN11TSXL: l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 lb.) Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN53TSXL:
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 90.2 75 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 96 83
TN11TSXL TN53TSXL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1409
16 PID Unit
16
About This Chapter
16.1 BMD4 BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz 16.2 BMD8 BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz 16.3 ELQX ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board 16.4 PTQX PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary 16.5 NPO2E NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended 16.6 NPO2 NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board 16.7 ENQ2 ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
PID Unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1410
16 PID Unit
16.1 BMD4
BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz

The available functional version of the BMD4 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 BMD 4 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
16.1.2 Application
The BMD4 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes signals. Figure 16-1 shows the position of the BMD4 in a WDM system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1411
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-1 Position of the BMD4 in a WDM system

4 4
ELQX 4
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
4 BMD4
OA
OA
4 BMD4
ELQX
4 4
OA
OA
ELQX 4
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
ELQX

The BMD4 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service spectrum detection. Table 16-1 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD4. Table 16-1 Functions and features of the BMD4 Function or Feature Basic function Description In a 40-channel system, the BMD4 board multiplexes and demultiplexes the optical signals. l Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz to four channels of signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. The reverse process is similar.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1412
16 PID Unit
Function or Feature In-service detection and monitoring of the spectrum
Description Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the services. Not supported
Optical-layer ASON

The BMD4 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 16-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4. Figure 16-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4
Optical module T01 T02 T03 T04 R01 R02 R03 R04 Interleaver IN
Splitter Coupler OUT MON
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1413
16 PID Unit
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally, the four channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces. The four channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01-R04 optical interfaces and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the four channels of multiplexed signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. Finally, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8wavelength multiplexed signals, and uses the coupler to couple the signals with a spacing of 200 GHz into one channel of 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
16.1.5 Front Panel

There is one indicator, 11 optical interfaces, and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD4.

Figure 16-3 shows the front panel of the BMD4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1414
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-3 Front panel of the BMD4
BMD4
STAT
CAUTION
MON OUT IN T01 R01 T02 R02 T03 R03 T04 R04
BMD4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 11 optical interfaces on the front panel of the BMD4. Table 16-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1415
16 PID Unit
Table 16-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD4 Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB. T01/R01 LC Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.80 THz to 196.00 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.70 THz to 195.90 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.20 THz to 193.60 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.10 THz to 193.50 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.
T02/R02
LC
T03/R03
LC
T04/R04
LC
Laser Hazard Level

The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
16.1.6 Valid Slots

The BMD4 occupies one slot. Table 16-3 shows the valid slots for the BMD4 board. Table 16-3 Valid slots for the BMD4 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1416
16 PID Unit
16.1.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4

The characteristic code of the BMD4 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. Table 16-4 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD4. Table 16-4 Characteristic code of the BMD4 Code The first character Indication Band Description Indicates the multiplexing scheme adopted by the board. The value C represents the C band. The value L represents the L band.
For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD4 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are in the C band.
16.1.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4

Each optical interface on the BMD4 accesses certain fixed wavelengths. Table 16-5 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD4 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths. Table 16-5 Optical interfaces on the BMD4 and relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths Interface T01/R01 Number of Wavelengths 12 Frequency (THz) 193.8 194.0 194.2 194.4 194.6 194.8 195.0 195.2 195.4 195.6 195.8 196.0 Wavelength (nm) 1546.917 1545.322 1543.730 1542.142 1540.557 1538.976 1537.397 1535.822 1534.250 1532.681 1531.116 1529.553
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1417
16 PID Unit
Interface T02/R02
Number of Wavelengths 12
Frequency (THz) 193.7 193.9 194.1 194.3 194.5 194.7 194.9 195.1 195.3 195.5 195.7 195.9
Wavelength (nm) 1547.715 1546.119 1544.526 1542.936 1541.349 1539.766 1538.186 1536.609 1535.036 1533.465 1531.898 1530.334 1559.794 1558.173 1556.555 1554.940 1553.329 1551.721 1550.116 1548.515 1560.606 1558.983 1557.363 1555.747 1554.134 1552.524 1550.918 1549.315
T03/R03
192.2 192.4 192.6 192.8 193.0 193.2 193.4 193.6
T04/R04
192.1 192.3 192.5 192.7 192.9 193.1 193.3 193.5

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For BMD4 parameters, refer to Table 16-6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1418
16 PID Unit
Table 16-6 BMD4 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Used to select the desired parity of the working band.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
All, Odd, Even Default: All
16.1.10 Specifications of the BMD4

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 16-7 Optical specifications of the BMD4 Item Operating wavelength range T0x/R0x channel spacinga IN/OUT channel spacing Insertion loss IN-T01 IN-T02 IN-T03 IN-T04 R01-OUT R02-OUT R03-OUT R04-OUT dB 6 Unit nm GHz GHz dB Value 1529 - 1561 200 100 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1419
16 PID Unit
Item Isolationb IN->T01/T03@T02/T04 IN->T02/T04@T01/T03 IN->T01@T03 IN->T03@T01 IN->T02@T04 IN->T04@T02 R01->OUT@R03 R03->OUT@R01 R02->OUT@R04 R04->OUT@R02 Optical return loss Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range
Unit dB
Value 25
13
dB dB dB dB dBm
40 45 0.5 0.5 23
a: T0x represents T01 to T04 ports. R0x represents R01 to R04 ports. b: In the case of T01/T03@T02/T04, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one of T01/T03 ports and any one of T02/T04 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item. T01/T02 ports are intended for blue band signals. T03/T04 ports are intended for red band signals.
Power Consumption
BMD4
16.2 BMD8
BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1420
16 PID Unit

Only one functional version of the BMD8 board is available, that is, TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 BMD 8 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
16.2.2 Application
The BMD8 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes signals. Figure 16-4 shows the position of the BMD8 in a WDM system. Figure 16-4 Position of the BMD8 in a WDM system
4 4
ELQX 4
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
8 BMD8
OA
OA
4 BMD8
ELQX
8 4
OA
OA
ELQX 4
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX 4
ELQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1421
16 PID Unit

The BMD8 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service spectrum detection. Table 16-8 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD8. Table 16-8 Functions and features of the BMD8 Function or Feature Basic function Description In an 80-channel system, the BMD8 board multiplexes and demultiplexes optical signals. l Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into four channels of oddwavelength signals and four channels of even-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, four channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. The reverse process is similar. Detection and monitoring of the online spectrum Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the services. Not supported
Optical-layer ASON

The BMD8 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 16-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1422
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8
Optical module T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08 R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08
Interleaver
IN
Splitter Interleaver OUT MON
SCC
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz. Finally, the four channels of oddwavelength multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces. After wavelength filtering, the four channels of even-wavelength multiplexed signals are output through the T05-T08 optical interfaces. The interleaver multiplexes the four channels of odd-wavelength signals input through the R01R04 optical interfaces and the four channels of even-wavelength signals input through the R05R08 optical interfaces to one channel of optical signals. Finally, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical module
16 PID Unit
Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz and uses the interleaver to couple the signals into one channel of 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
16.2.5 Front Panel

There is one indicator, 19 optical interfaces, and laser level label on the front panel of the BMD8.

Figure 16-6 shows the front panel of the BMD8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1424
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-6 Front panel of the BMD8
BMD8
STAT
CAUTION
OUT
BMD8
MON
IN
T01 R01 T02 R02 T03 R03 T04 R04
T05 R05 T06 R06 T07 R07 T08 R08
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 19 optical interfaces on the front panel of the BMD8. Table 16-9 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1425
16 PID Unit
Table 16-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD8 Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB. T01/R01 T02/R02 T03/R03 T04/R04 T05/R05 LC LC LC LC LC Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.850 THz to 196.050 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.800 THz to 196.000 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.750 THz to 195.950 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.700 THz to 195.900 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.250 THz to 193.650 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.200 THz to 193.600 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.150 THz to 193.550 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing. Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.100 THz to 193.500 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.
T06/R06
LC
T07/R07
LC
T08/R08
LC
Laser Hazard Level

16.2.6 Valid Slots

The BMD8 occupies two slots.
16 PID Unit
Table 16-10 shows the valid slots for the BMD8 board. Table 16-10 Valid slots for the BMD8 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU16
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the BMD8 occupies IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is IU1.
16.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8

The characteristic code of the BMD8 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. Table 16-11 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD8. Table 16-11 Characteristic code of the BMD8 Code The first character Indication Band Description Indicates the multiplexing scheme adopted by the board. The value C represents the C band.
For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD8 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are in the C band.
16.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8

Each optical interface on the BMD8 accesses certain fixed wavelengths. Table 16-12 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1427
16 PID Unit
Table 16-12 Optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths Interface T01/R01 Number of Wavelengths 12 Frequency (THz) 193.85 194.05 194.25 194.45 194.65 194.85 195.05 195.25 195.45 195.65 195.85 196.05 T02/R02 12 193.8 194.0 194.2 194.4 194.6 194.8 195.0 195.2 195.4 195.6 195.8 196.0 Wavelength (nm) 1546.52 1544.92 1543.33 1541.75 1540.16 1538.58 1537.00 1535.43 1533.86 1532.29 1530.72 1529.16 1546.917 1545.322 1543.730 1542.142 1540.557 1538.976 1537.397 1535.822 1534.250 1532.681 1531.116 1529.553
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1428
16 PID Unit
Interface T03/R03
Frequency (THz) 193.75 193.95 194.15 194.35 194.55 194.75 194.95 195.15 195.35 195.55 195.75 195.95
Wavelength (nm) 1547.32 1545.72 1544.13 1542.54 1540.95 1539.37 1537.79 1536.22 1534.64 1533.07 1531.51 1529.94 1547.715 1546.119 1544.526 1542.936 1541.349 1539.766 1538.186 1536.609 1535.036 1533.465 1531.898 1530.334 1559.39 1557.77 1556.15 1554.54 1552.93 1551.32 1549.72 1548.11
T04/R04
12
193.7 193.9 194.1 194.3 194.5 194.7 194.9 195.1 195.3 195.5 195.7 195.9
T05/R05
192.25 192.45 192.65 192.85 193.05 193.25 193.45 193.65
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1429
16 PID Unit
Interface T06/R06
Frequency (THz) 192.2 192.4 192.6 192.8 193.0 193.2 193.4 193.6
Wavelength (nm) 1559.794 1558.173 1556.555 1554.940 1553.329 1551.721 1550.116 1548.515 1560.20 1558.58 1556.96 1555.34 1553.73 1552.12 1550.52 1548.91 1560.606 1558.983 1557.363 1555.747 1554.134 1552.524 1550.918 1549.315
T07/R07
192.15 192.35 192.55 192.75 192.95 193.15 193.35 193.55
T08/R08
192.1 192.3 192.5 192.7 192.9 193.1 193.3 193.5

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For BMD8 parameters, refer to Table 16-13. Table 16-13 BMD8 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1430
16 PID Unit
Field Optical Interface Name
Value -
Description Sets and queries the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Used to select the desired parity of the working band.
Configure Band
C Default: C
16.2.10 Specifications of the BMD8

Table 16-14 Optical specifications of the BMD8 Item Operating wavelength range T0x/R0x channel spacinga IN/OUT channel spacing Insertion loss IN-T01 IN-T02 IN-T03 IN-T04 IN-T05 IN-T06 IN-T07 IN-T08 Unit nm GHz GHz dB Value 1529 - 1561 200 50 8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1431
16 PID Unit
Item R01-OUT R02-OUT R03-OUT R04-OUT R05-OUT R06-OUT R07-OUT R08-OUT Isolationb IN->T01/T05 @T02/T06/ T03/T07/T04/T08 IN->T02/T06 @T01/T05/ T03/T07/T04/T08 IN->T03/T07 @T01/T05/ T02/T06/T04/T08 IN->T04/T08 @T01/T05/ T02/T06/T03/T07 IN->T01@T05 IN->T05@T01 IN->T02@T06 IN->T06@T02 IN->T03@T07 IN->T07@T03 IN->T04@T08 IN->T08@T04 R01->OUT@R05 R05->OUT@R01 R02->OUT@R06 R06->OUT@R02 R03->OUT@R07 R07->OUT@R03 R04->OUT@R08 R08->OUT@R04 Optical return loss Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range
Unit dB
Value 9.5
dB
25
13
dB dB dB dB dBm
40 45 0.5 0.5 23
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1432
16 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Value
a: T0x represents T01 to T08 ports. R0x represents R01 to R08 ports. b: In the case of T01/T05@T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one of T01/T05 ports and any one of T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item. T01 to T04 ports are intended for blue band signals; the T05 to T08 ports are intended for red band signals.
Power Consumption
BMD8
16.3 ELQX
ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board

The available functional version of the ELQX board is TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN12 ELQ X OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
16.3.2 Application
The ELQX board converts four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e signals into four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals or converts four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16
16 PID Unit
ODU1 signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is similar. Figure 16-7 shows the position of the ELQX in a WDM system. Figure 16-7 Position of the ELQX in a WDM system
4 4
10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ 4 OTU2/ OTU2e

4
OA ELQX 4 PTQX
BMD4
OA
BMD4
PTQX 4
ELQX
10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ 4 OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e

4
ELQX 4
OA
OA
4
ELQX

The ELQX supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS. Table 16-15 provides the details about the functions and features of the ELQX.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals between the PTQX board and the cross-connect board.
Table 16-15 Functions and features of the ELQX Function or Feature Basic function Description l Converts between four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals from the client side and four OTU2/ OTU2e electrical signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the preceding services. The reverse process is similar. l Multiplexes 16 ODU1 signals or four ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services. The reverse process is similar. Client-side service type 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1434
16 PID Unit
Function or Feature OTN function
Description l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side signals into OTU2/OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G.709, and GDPS. l Supports the PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports the SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports the TCM function for ODU2.
Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function. The supervisory signal is transmitted within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received. Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Client side Not Supported Inloop Outloop Supported Supported
Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme XFP Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1435
16 PID Unit
Function or Feature Protocol or standard compliance

The ELQX board consists of the client-side optical module, the signal processing module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 16-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1436
16 PID Unit
Signal Flow
Figure 16-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
Client side 4ODU2(e)/16ODU1
4OTU2(e)
Backplane (service cross-connection)
O/E
The client side of the ELQX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l l 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals
In the signal flow of the ELQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELQX to the WDM side of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The clientside optical module can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backplane. The electrical signals converted from the client optical signals or the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. The signals of different types are transmitted to different encapsulation and mapping modules. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing
16 PID Unit
for the signals. Finally, four OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the PTQX board through the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the PTQX board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs four ODU2/ODU2e signals, 16 ODU1 signals, or four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals. The four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane, or the four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals are transmitted to the client-side optical module. The optical signals are converted into electrical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
The ELQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals. Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the client-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
NOTE
The signal processing module on the ELQX board has fixed cross-connections to the PTQX board.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/ SONET performance monitoring function. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations.
16 PID Unit
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
16.3.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators and eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELQX.

Figure 16-9 shows the front panel of the ELQX. Figure 16-9 Front panel of the ELQX
ELQX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
ELQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1439
16 PID Unit
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELQX. Table 16-16 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 16-16 Types and functions of the ELQX interfaces Interface TX1 - TX4 RX1 - RX4 Type LC LC Function Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the optical service signal from the client-side equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

16.3.6 Valid Slots

The ELQX occupies one slot. Table 16-17 shows the valid slots for the ELQX board. Table 16-17 Valid slots for the ELQX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU11, IU14

16 PID Unit

Table 16-18 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 16-18 Mapping between the physical ports on the ELQX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Port Number on the NMS 3 4 5 6
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 16-10, Figure 16-11 and Figure 16-12 describes the NM ports of the ELQX board. Table 16-19 lists the indication of each port. Figure 16-10 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (cross-connections of client-side services)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Service Processing Module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Service Processing Module
Service Processing Module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1441
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-11 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections)

Backplane
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
Crossconnect module
Figure 16-12 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections)

Backplane
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Table 16-19 Meaning of NM ports of the ELQX Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP1-ClientLP4 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4 Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site.
16 PID Unit
If the ELQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU2 cross-connection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board, as shown by (1) in Figure 16-13. If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown Figure 16-14. If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown by (2) Figure 16-13. The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX board and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-to-one cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the U2000. For details, see Figure 16-15.
Figure 16-13 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU2 level)

Client side
Cross-connection module 2
Other board
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
Cross-connection module
ELQX board
The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board
1 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1443
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-14 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU1 level)

Cross-connect module 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Client side
1 Other board
Client side
ELQX board
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1444
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-15 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX

Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Cross-connect module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1
ELQX board
WDM side
141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 2 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 PTQX baord
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Cross-connect module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
ELQX board
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group
1 2

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the ELQX, refer toTable 16-20.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1445
16 PID Unit
Table 16-20 ELQX parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries or sets the path Loopback.
Channel Loopback
Service Type
10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU-2, OTU2 2E, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Laser Status
1446
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
Field LPT Enabled
Description The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /
Queries the band type. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1447
16 PID Unit
Line Rate
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
16.3.10 Specifications of the ELQX

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1448
16 PID Unit
Board TN12PT QX
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE

dBm
-1
-1.3
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1449
16 PID Unit
Item Optical Module Type Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 8.2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 9 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 3
dB
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1450
16 PID Unit
Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1451
16 PID Unit
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 86.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 99.1
ELQX
16.4 PTQX
PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary

The available functional version of the PTQX board is TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN12 PTQ X OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
Type
One PID can use only certain wavelengths, as listed in Table 16-23. Table 16-24 lists the wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies. Table 16-23 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (ELQX+PTQX) Serial No. 1 2 3 4 5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Left) 33, 37, 41, 45 34, 38, 42, 46 35, 39, 43, 47 36, 40, 44, 48 -
Wavelength No. of the PTQX 1, 5, 9, 13 2, 6, 10, 14 3, 7, 11, 15 4, 8, 12, 16 49, 53, 57, 61
Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Right) 17, 21, 25, 29 18, 22, 26, 30 19, 23, 27, 31 20, 24, 28, 32 65, 69, 73, 77
PTQX Type
TN12PTQX01 TN12PTQX02 TN12PTQX03 TN12PTQX04 TN12PTQX05

1452
16 PID Unit
Serial No. 6 7 8
Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Left) -
Wavelength No. of the PTQX 50, 54, 58, 62 51, 55, 59, 63 52, 56, 60, 64
Wavelength No. of the ELQX (on the Right) 66, 70, 74, 78 67, 71, 75, 79 68, 72, 76, 80
PTQX Type
TN12PTQX06 TN12PTQX07 TN12PTQX08
NOTE For the wavelength groups indicated by serial numbers 5-8, only one PTQX board and one ELQX board are required and the ELQX board should be housed on the right of the PTQX board.
Table 16-24 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system Wavelengt h No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Frequency (THz) 196.05 196.00 195.95 195.90 195.85 195.80 195.75 195.70 195.65 195.60 195.55 195.50 195.45 195.40 195.35 195.30 195.25 195.20 195.15 195.10 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.55 1529.94 1530.33 1530.72 1531.12 1531.51 1531.90 1532.29 1532.68 1533.07 1533.47 1533.86 1534.25 1534.64 1535.04 1535.43 1535.82 1536.22 1536.61 Wavelengt h No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Frequency (THz) 194.05 194.00 193.95 193.90 193.85 193.80 193.75 193.70 193.65 193.60 193.55 193.50 193.45 193.40 193.35 193.30 193.25 193.20 193.15 193.10 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.32 1545.72 1546.12 1546.52 1546.92 1547.32 1547.72 1548.11 1548.51 1548.91 1549.32 1549.72 1550.12 1550.52 1550.92 1551.32 1551.72 1552.12 1552.52
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1453
16 PID Unit
Wavelengt h No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Frequency (THz) 195.05 195.00 194.95 194.90 194.85 194.80 194.75 194.70 194.65 194.60 194.55 194.50 194.45 194.40 194.35 194.30 194.25 194.20 194.15 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1537.00 1537.40 1537.79 1538.19 1538.58 1538.98 1539.37 1539.77 1540.16 1540.56 1540.95 1541.35 1541.75 1542.14 1542.54 1542.94 1543.33 1543.73 1544.13 1544.53
Wavelengt h No. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Frequency (THz) 193.05 193.00 192.95 192.90 192.85 192.80 192.75 192.70 192.65 192.60 192.55 192.50 192.45 192.40 192.35 192.30 192.25 192.20 192.15 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1552.93 1553.33 1553.73 1554.13 1554.54 1554.94 1555.34 1555.75 1556.15 1556.55 1556.96 1557.36 1557.77 1558.17 1558.58 1558.98 1559.39 1559.79 1560.20 1560.61
16.4.2 Application
The PTQX is an PID unit. The PTQX board can map four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals into four OTU2(e) signals, or map four ODU2(e) signals or 16 ODU1 signals from another board into four OTU2(e) signals. The PTQX also receives eight OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board and integrates the 12 OTU2(e) signals into one channel of optical signals for output. The reverse process is similar. For the position of the PTQX in a WDM system, see Figure 16-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1454
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-16 Position of the PTQX in a WDM system

4 4
10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ 4 OTU2/ OTU2e

4
OA ELQX 4 PTQX
BMD4
OA
BMD4
PTQX 4
ELQX
10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ 4 OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e

4
ELQX 4
OA
OA
4
ELQX

The PTQX provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS. Table 16-25 provides the details about the functions and features of the PTQX. Table 16-25 Functions and features of the PTQX Function and Feature Basic function Description l Accesses four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e client-side signals, maps the signals into OTU2(e) signals, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Hybrid transmission of the preceding signals is supported. l Accesses 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2(e) signals from the backplane, maps the signals into 4 x OTU2(e) signals, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Hybrid access of ODU1 or ODU2(e) is supported. l Accesses 8 x OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board through the backplane, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. l Integrates 12 x OTU2(e) signals into one channel of optical signals. Client-side service type 10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s 10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s STM-64/OC-192: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s OTU2: OTN service at a rate of 10.71 Gbit/s OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1455
16 PID Unit
Description l Maps a maximum of four channels of client-side signals to OTU2/ OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G. 7041, ITU-T G.709, and GDPS. l Supports the PM and TCM functions for ODU1. l Supports the SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. l Supports the TCM function for ODU2.
Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is 10GE LAN. l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Provides optical power detection and reports alarms and performance events of the board.
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received. Not supported Not supported l Supports client-side 1+1 protection. l Supports ODUk SNCP. Supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side. WDM side Inloop Outloop Client side Inloop Supported Supported Supported
Optical-layer ASON Electrical-layer ASON Protection scheme XFP Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1456
16 PID Unit
Description Outloop Supported
IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1 ITU-T G.694.1

The PTQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, PID module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 16-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1457
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
4xODU2(e)/16xODU1 Client side
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module 10GE-LAN encapsulation and mapping module
8OTU2(e)
Backplane (service cross-connection)
O/E
4
OUT
PID Module
IN
Signal Flow
The client side of the PTQX board can access the following optical signals: l l l l l l 10GE LAN optical signals 10GE WAN optical signals STM-64 optical signals OC-192 optical signals OTU2 optical signals OTU2e optical signals
In the signal flow of the PTQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the PTQX to the WDM side of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The PTQX can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from the backbone. The electrical signals converted from client optical signals or 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2/ ODU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Different types of signals
16 PID Unit
are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation, mapping, OTN framing, and FEC/AFEC encoding. Then, the module sends out four channels of OTU2(e) signals to the PID module. The four OTU2(e) signals and the eight OTU2(e) signals cross-connected through the backplane from the ELQX board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into 12 OTU2(e) signals. Eight of the 12 OTU2(e) signals are cross-connected through the backplane to the ELQX board, and the remaining four OTU2(e) signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2(e) framing, FEC/AFEC decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs four channels of electrical signals. The four channels of electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane or transmitted to the client-side optical modules. Then, the four channels of electrical signals are converted into four channels of optical signals that are output through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
The PTQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or from the backplane.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter. Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals. Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals. Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the client-side laser. l PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into 12 channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates 12 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module. SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
16 PID Unit
Encapsulates SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/SONET performance. 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and monitors 10GE LAN performance. OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
16.4.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators, 10 optical interfaces, and laser level label on the front panel of the PTQX.

Figure 16-18 shows the front panel of the PTQX.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1460
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-18 Front panel of the PTQX
PTQX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3
OUT IN
RX3 TX4 RX4
PTQX
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the PTQX. Table 16-26 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1461
16 PID Unit
Table 16-26 Types and functions of the PTQX interfaces Interface IN OUT TX1-TX4 RX1-RX4 Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives the line signal. Transmits the line signal. Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment. Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

16.4.6 Valid Slots

The PTQX occupies two slots. Table 16-27 shows the valid slots for the PTQX board. Table 16-27 Valid slots for the PTQX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU3, IU7, IU13
NOTE
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the PTQX board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the PTQX occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the PTQX displayed on the NM is IU3.
16.4.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX

The characteristic code for the PTQX consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 16-28.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1462
16 PID Unit
Table 16-28 Characteristic code for the PTQX Code The first three digits Meaning The frequency of optical signal Description The last three digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last three digits of the frequency value of the last channel of signals on the WDM side.
The last three digits
The frequency of optical signal
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12PTQX is 605385. l "605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 193.85 THz.


Table 16-29 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 16-29 Mapping between the physical ports on the PTQX board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 Port Number on the NMS 1 3 4 5 6
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1463
16 PID Unit
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. Figure 16-19, Figure 16-20, and Figure 16-21 show the NM ports on the PTQX board. Table 16-30 lists the indication of each port. Figure 16-19 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (cross-connections of client-side services)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1) 4(RX2/TX2) 5(RX3/TX3) 6(RX4/TX4) 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Service processing module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Figure 16-20 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU1-level cross-connections)

Backplane
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 WDM side
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1
134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1
1(IN/OUT)
140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1

Cross-connect module Service processing module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1464
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-21 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (backplane-side ODU2-level cross-connections)

Backplane
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 Cross-connect module
133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Table 16-30 Meaning of ports on the PTQX Port Name RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 ClientLP1-ClientLP4 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4 OCHLP1-OCHLP12 IN/OUT Meaning These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.

This section describes how to configure cross-connections on boards using the NMS. After the required cross-connections are configured, services can be added to or dropped from the WDM side, or can be passed through on the WDM side at the local site. If the PTQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the U2000: l During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board, as shown by (1) in Figure 16-22.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the PTQX board on the U2000, as shown in Figure 16-23. If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board on the U2000, as shown by (2) in Figure 16-22. The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-toone cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the U2000. For details, see Figure 16-24.
Figure 16-22 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU2 level)

Client side
Other board except ELQX
Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 Cross-connect module 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
WDM side 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
PTQX board
1 2
The internal cross-connection of the board The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1466
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-23 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board except ELQX
WDM side 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
PTQX board
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1467
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-24 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX

Client side
ELQX board
WDM side
140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 137(OCHLP5/OCHLP5)-1 136(OCHLP4/OCHLP4)-1 135(OCHLP3/OCHLP3)-1 2 134(OCHLP2/OCHLP2)-1 133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1
PTQX board
Client side
ELQX board
1
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the PTQX board in a PID group
16.4.10 PTQX Parameters

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the PTQX, refer toTable 16-31.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1468
16 PID Unit
Table 16-31 PTQX parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries or sets the path Loopback.
Channel Loopback
Service Type
10GE LAN, OC-192, OTU-2, OTU-2E, STM-64 Default: 10GE LAN
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G)
Laser Status
1469
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
Field LPT Enabled
Description The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT). See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more information. The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) Actual Band Type Tunable Wavelength Range Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
Queries the band type. Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. The Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board. See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength. See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.170 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1470
16 PID Unit
Line Rate
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information. The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
16.4.11 Specifications of the PTQX

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1471
16 PID Unit
Bo ard
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP
TN 12P TQ X
200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN
NOTE

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1472
16 PID Unit
Item Optical Module Type Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Eye pattern mask
Unit
Value 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km 4 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km -1.3
dBm
-1
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
dB
8.2
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
dB
30
30
30
30
G.691-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (multirate ) Receiver sensitivity (10GE LAN) Minimum receiver overload (10GE LAN) nm PIN 1260 to 1565 PIN 1260 to 1605 APD 1270 to 1600 PIN 840 to 860
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
dBm
0.5
-1
-7
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1473
16 PID Unit
Item Optical Module Type Minimum receiver overload (STM-64) Maximum reflectance
Unit
dBm
-1
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Line code format
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
nm dBm
PIN 1200 to 1650 -16
1474
16 PID Unit
Unit
Minimum receiver overload (FEC on) Maximum reflectance
dBm dB
0 -27

Table 16-34 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Maximum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 1 -7 6.5 5 0.8 30 200
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -10.5 0 -27
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1475
16 PID Unit
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 3 kg (7 lb.)
Power Consumption
PTQX
16.5 NPO2E
NPO2E: 10G PID line service processing board, 20channel extended

The available functional version of the NPO2E board is TN55.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN55 NPO2 E OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 N
Type
The TN55NPO2E board has two types: TN55NPO2EL02 and TN55NPO2EL04, which process different wavelengths. l l The TN55NPO2EL02 board processes wavelengths 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, and 30. The TN55NPO2EL04 board processes wavelengths 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, and 32.
A PID group that consists of the TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown in Table 16-35, Table 16-36 and Table 16-37. Table 16-38 lists the mappings between wavelength numbers, wavelengths, and frequencies.
16 PID Unit
Table 16-35 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2)(200G system) Wavelengt h Combinati on No. 1 2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E Wavelength No. for TN54ENQ2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
34, 38, 42, 46 36, 40, 44, 48
TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78 TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
Table 16-36 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2)(120G system) Waveleng th Combinat ion No. 1 2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E Wavelength No. for TN54ENQ2
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
34, 38, 42, 46 36, 40, 44, 48
Table 16-37 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E)(80G system) Wavelengt h Combinati on No. 1 2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
NOTE
The TN55NPO2EL02/TN55NPO2EL04 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4st, 8th, 12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should be installed on the TN55NPO2E, see 16.5.5 Front Panel. The TN54ENQ2 board should be housed on the left of the TN55NPO2E board. The TN55NPO2E board supports DCM-free transmission over long distance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1477
16 PID Unit
Table 16-38 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system Wavelengt h No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.05 196.00 195.95 195.90 195.85 195.80 195.75 195.70 195.65 195.60 195.55 195.50 195.45 195.40 195.35 195.30 195.25 195.20 195.15 195.10 195.05 195.00 194.95 194.90 194.85 194.80 194.75 194.70 194.65
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.55 1529.94 1530.33 1530.72 1531.12 1531.51 1531.90 1532.29 1532.68 1533.07 1533.47 1533.86 1534.25 1534.64 1535.04 1535.43 1535.82 1536.22 1536.61 1537.00 1537.40 1537.79 1538.19 1538.58 1538.98 1539.37 1539.77 1540.16
Wavelengt h No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
Frequency (THz) 194.05 194.00 193.95 193.90 193.85 193.80 193.75 193.70 193.65 193.60 193.55 193.50 193.45 193.40 193.35 193.30 193.25 193.20 193.15 193.10 193.05 193.00 192.95 192.90 192.85 192.80 192.75 192.70 192.65
Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.32 1545.72 1546.12 1546.52 1546.92 1547.32 1547.72 1548.11 1548.51 1548.91 1549.32 1549.72 1550.12 1550.52 1550.92 1551.32 1551.72 1552.12 1552.52 1552.93 1553.33 1553.73 1554.13 1554.54 1554.94 1555.34 1555.75 1556.15
1478
16 PID Unit
Wavelengt h No. 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Frequency (THz) 194.60 194.55 194.50 194.45 194.40 194.35 194.30 194.25 194.20 194.15 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1540.56 1540.95 1541.35 1541.75 1542.14 1542.54 1542.94 1543.33 1543.73 1544.13 1544.53
Wavelengt h No. 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Frequency (THz) 192.60 192.55 192.50 192.45 192.40 192.35 192.30 192.25 192.20 192.15 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1556.55 1556.96 1557.36 1557.77 1558.17 1558.58 1558.98 1559.39 1559.79 1560.20 1560.61
16.5.2 Application
As a PID board, the NPO2E board performs conversion between 64 x ODU0, 32 x ODU1, or 8 x ODU2 signals that are cross-connected through the backplane and 8 x OTU2 optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system, between 8 x ODU2e signals and 8 x OTU2e optical signals over standard wavelengths for a WDM system. The NPO2E board also receives 4 x OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from ENQ2 and converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals for output. Inside the NPO2E board, there is a red/blue band filter, which converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board and 8 x OTU2/ OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals for output. It also performs the reverse conversion. In addition, the NPO2E board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1479
16 PID Unit
Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the TN55NPO2E Board

Figure 16-25 200G system built with the TN55NPO2E board
64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ Tributary 8xODU2e board 64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e
Client-side service
Tributary board
Client-side service
Clientside service
Tributary board
32xODU0/ 16xODU1/ 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E 4xOTU2/ OTU2e TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN55 NPO2
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN55 NPO2
Tributary board
Clientside service
NOTE
The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board.

64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e 64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e
Clientside service
Tributary board
OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E TN55 NPO2E OBU 1P1
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1480
16 PID Unit

OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2E
Client-side service
Tributary board
Tributary board
Client-side service
NOTE
In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2E/TN55NPO2 board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2E/ TN55NPO2 board can process a maximum of 40G services. When the TN55NPO2E board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end.

The NPO2E provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 16-39 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2E. Table 16-39 Functions and features of the NPO2E Function and Feature Basic function Description l Accesses 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane, maps the signals into eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar, and hybrid access of ODU0, ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e is supported. l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals. l Converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by the local NPO2E board and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e signals output by another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals for output.
16 PID Unit
Function and Feature Cross-connect capabilities OTN function
Description Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2E board and the cross-connect board. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports the TCM function and SM function for ODU2 and ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1.
WDM specification ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding
Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and performance events monitoring IEEE 1588v2
The NPO2E board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.

NOTE The IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted through optical port 1.
Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electrical-layer ASON Protection scheme Loopback
The NPO2E board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. Not supported Not supported l Supports ODUk SNCP. Channel Loopback Client side Inloop Outloop Supported Supported -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1482
16 PID Unit
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1483
16 PID Unit

The NPO2E board consists of the signal processing module, PID optical module, control and communication module, IEEE 1588v2 module, red/blue band filter, and power supply module. Figure 16-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1484
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2E

Backplane (service cross-connection) 64XODU0/32XODU1/8X ODU2/8XODU2e 4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e 8 Crossconnection module 1588
PQ2 service processing sub-board
8
PID Module
OUT IN T01 R01
Red/blue band filter
TO RI T02 R02
Control Memory CPU Control and communication module Required voltage Communication
Power supply module

Fuse
SCC
Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the NPO2E board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2E to the WDM side of the NPO2E, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals to the PID module. The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. The red/blue band filter converges 12 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through the OUT port on the PID optical module and 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals output through
16 PID Unit
the OUT port on another NPO2 board into one channel of optical signals and outputs the signals through the TO port to the WDM side. l Receive direction The red/blue band filter receives one channel of multiplexed signals through the RI port and demultiplexes the signals into two channels of optical signals. It outputs 12 x OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals through the TO1 port to the IN port on the PID optical module and outputs 8 x OTU2/OTU2e optical signals through the TO2 port to the IN port on another NPO2 board. The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/ AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals. The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
NOTE
The NPO2E board can directly output a multiplexed signal through its OUT port to the WDM side and receive a multiplexed signal through its IN port from the WDM side.
Module Function
l Red/blue band filter In the transmit direction, it multiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by the NPO2E board and one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) that are output by another NPO2 board. In the receive direction, it demultiplexes one channel of multiplexed optical signals (20 wavelengths are multiplexed) from the WDM side and outputs one channel of multiplexed optical signals (12 wavelengths are multiplexed) to the NPO2E board and one channel of multiplexed optical signals (8 wavelengths are multiplexed) to another NPO2 board. l PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module
16 PID Unit
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2E and the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ ODU2/ODU2e signals OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. PQ2 service processing board Processes 40 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on the TN55NPO2E board.
NOTE
After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2E board that works in standard mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000. For details on how to create a logical PQ2 subboard, see Adding Boards in the Commissioning Guide.
1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
16.5.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front panel of the NPO2E.

Figure 16-29 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2E.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1487
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-29 Front panel of the TN55NPO2E

NPO2E
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
NPO2E
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
T02 R02 TO RI T01 R01
T02 R02 TO RI T01 R01
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
PQ2
STAT
NPO2E
NPO2E
PQ2 installed
NOTE
PQ2 not installed
The TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2EL04 can process only the 4st, 8th, 12th, and 16th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 20th, 24st, 28th, and 32th wavelengths. For details, see 16.5.1 Version Description.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the TN55NPO2E panel. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
There is one indicator on the PQ2 panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN55NPO2E. Table 16-40 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
16 PID Unit
Table 16-40 Types and functions of the TN55NPO2E interfaces Interface IN Type LC Function Receives 12 channels optical signals that are output by the red/blue band filter or line-side multiplexed optical signals. Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side or the red/blue band filter. Receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals from the OUT port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed). Transmits one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the IN port (12 wavelengths are multiplexed). Receives optical signals that are output by the OUT port on the NPO2 board. Sends one channel of multiplexed optical signals to the IN port on the NPO2 board (eight wavelengths are multiplexed). Receives multiplexed optical signals from the line side. Transmits multiplexed optical signals to the line side.
OUT R01 T01 R02 T02
LC LC LC LC LC
RI TO
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

16.5.6 Valid Slots

The NPO2E occupies two slots. Table 16-41 shows the valid slots for the NPO2E board. Table 16-41 Valid slots for the NPO2E board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU3, IU7, IU13, IU17, IU21, IU25, IU29, IU33, IU37, IU41, IU47, IU51, IU55, IU59, IU63, IU67 IU3, IU7, IU14, IU18, IU22, IU26, IU31, IU35 IU3, IU7, IU13, IU17
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1489

NOTE
16 PID Unit
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NPO2E board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the NPO2E occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2E displayed on the NM is IU3.
16.5.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2E

The characteristic code for the NPO2E consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 16-42. Table 16-42 Characteristic code for the NPO2E Code The first three digits Meaning The frequency of optical signal Description The last three digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side. The last three digits of the frequency value of the last channel of signals on the WDM side.
The last three digits
The frequency of optical signal
For example, the characteristic code for the TN55NPO2E is 600380. l "600380" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 196.00 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 193.80 THz.


Table 16-43 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 16-43 Mapping between the physical ports on the NPO2E board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT RI/TO
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1490
16 PID Unit
Physical Port RO1/TO1 RO2/TO2
NOTE
Logical Ports
The NPO2E board can work only in standard mode. Figure 16-30 shows the port diagram.
NOTE
For information about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
NOTE
l If any of the ODU2 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU1 and ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU1 and ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU2 channel cannot be configured with other services. l If any of the ODU1 channels has been configured with a service, the corresponding ODU0 channels cannot be configured with other services. On the opposite, if the ODU0 channels have been configured with services, the corresponding ODU1 channel cannot be configured with other services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1491
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-30 Diagram of ports on the NPO2E

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12) ODU2:1 12xODU2/ 12XODU2e
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH:1
Other tributary board/line board/PID board
48xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH:12 IN/OUT
ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 96xODU0 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH:1
ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH:12
NOTE
The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. The NPO2E board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the TN54PQ2 service processing board.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
1492
16 PID Unit
ODU0 mapping path Table 16-44 Meaning of ports on the NPO2E Port Name 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (14)-ODU0:(12) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (14) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112) Meaning Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU1 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2E signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the WDM-side port.
1(IN/OUT)

NOTE
In the cross-connection diagram, "ClientLP" and "ODUkLP" are internal logical ports on the board in compatible mode, and "IN1/OUT1-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2)" is the signal mapping path of the board in standard mode.
Figure 16-31 shows the created ODU0 cross-connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1493
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-31 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2E (ODU0 level)

Client side
Other board a

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
NPO2E board
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2


Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1494
16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1--ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
NPO2E board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-2 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E
TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:7 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
NPO2E board 2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 2(IN2/OUT2)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 3(IN3/OUT3)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 4(IN4/OUT4)-OCH:1-ODU2:1
Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the NPO2E
TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Cross-Connections Between the NPO2E and ENQ2

Figure 16-34 shows the created cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1496
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-34 Diagram of cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2

WDM side
ENQ2 board
(standard mode)
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9
NPO2E board
(standard mode)
The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

Figure 16-35 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board. One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. Figure 16-35 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2E board
ODU0
TOM TOM NS2
ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 NPO2E ODU1 ODU2/
TN55
IN/OUT
TDX/ ODU2e ND2
16.5.10 NPO2E Loopbacks

Table 16-45 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NPO2E board.
16 PID Unit
Table 16-45 Loopbacks supported by NPO2E board Cross-Connect Level ODU0 Board TN55N PO2E Loopback Type Channel inloop Channel outloop Channel inloop Channel outloop ODU2/ODU2e Channel inloop Channel outloop Description See Figure 16-36. See Figure 16-37. See Figure 16-38. See Figure 16-39. See Figure 16-40. See Figure 16-41.
ODU1
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2E When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU0

l Channel inloop Channel inloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-36 , 64 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 64 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-36 , 64 ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 32 ODU1 services, which are then converged into eight ODU2 services. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1498
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-36 Channel inloops on the TN55NPO2E board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1 WDM-side
Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services Pass-through services Loopbacked services
Channel outloop Channel outloops at ODU0 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-37 , eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 64 ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through. Channel outloop at ODU2 loopback points: as shown in Figure 16-37 , eight OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1499
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-37 Channel outloops on the TN55NPO2E board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
Backplane Pass-through services Loopbacked services Pass-through services Loopbacked services
WDM-side
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2E When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU1

l Channel inloops Channel inloops at ODU1 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-38, 32 ODU1 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. Channel inloops at ODU2 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-38, 32 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into eight ODU2 services. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1500
16 PID Unit

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
Channel outloop Channel outloop at ODU1 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-39, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 services is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through. Channel outloop at ODU2 loopback points: As shown in Figure 16-39, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1501
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-39 Channel outloops on the TN55NPO2E board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2E When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ ODU2e

l Channel inloops As shown in Figure 16-40, eight ODU2/ODU2e services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1502
16 PID Unit
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side
Channel outloops As shown in Figure 16-41, eight OTU2/OTU2e services received from the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through. Figure 16-41 Channel outloops on the TN55NPO2E board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NPO2E, refer to Table 16-46.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1503
16 PID Unit
Table 16-46 NPO2E parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries or sets path Loopback.
Channel Loopback
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
FEC Working State
FEC Mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1504
16 PID Unit
Value l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.10 0 l CWDM: 11/1471.00/208.17 0 to 18/1611.00/188.78 0 Default: /
NOTE Only C band is supported.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information. The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
Line Rate
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
16.5.12 Specifications of the NPO2E

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN55NP O2E WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km) WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1505

NOTE
16 PID Unit
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side

Table 16-47 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format Unit Value 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km) NRZ
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Maximum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm dBm dB GHz nm dB ps/nm 192.10 to 196.05 +2 -4.5 6 5 0.8 30 1500
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled) EOL Minimum receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 1200 to 1650 -12 3 -27
Table 16-48 Specifications of the red and blue band filters on the TN55NPO2E board Item Working wavelength in the C band Unit nm Value 1528 to 1561
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1506
16 PID Unit
Item Working wavelength in the blue band (T01/R01) Working wavelength in the red band (T02/R02) Demultiplexing loss (RI->T01, RI->T02) Multiplexing loss (R01>T0, R02->T0) Isolation between red and blue bands
Unit THz THz dB dB dB
Value 196.0 to 193.8 193.6 to 191.4 1 1 13
TN55NPO2E: l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.7 kg (3.75 lb.)
TN54PQ2: l l Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69 in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H)) Weight: 0.1 kg (0.22 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 143 1.1 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 157.3 1.2
TN55NPO2E TN54PQ2
16.6 NPO2
NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board

The available functional versions of the NPO2 board are TN54 and TN55.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1507
16 PID Unit

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN54 NPO2 TN55 NPO2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y Y OptiX OSN 6800 N N OptiX OSN 3800 N N

l Function: The TN54NPO2 board must work with a dispersion compensation module. The TN55NPO2S board supports 40 km applications without working with a dispersion compensation module. The TN55NPO2L board supports 80 km applications without working with a dispersion compensation module. l l Appearance: For the front panels of the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2, see 16.6.5 Front Panel. Specification: For the specification of each version, see 16.6.12 Specifications of the NPO2.
Original Board TN54NPO2 Substitute Board TN55NPO2 Substitution Rules The TN55NPO2 can be created as TN54NPO2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN55NPO2 functions as the TN54NPO2.
NOTE When you substitute a TN55NPO2 for a TN54NPO2 , configure a TN54PQ2, otherwise, the latter four wavelengths cannot be processed.
TN55NPO2
None
Type
A PID group that consists of the TN54NPO2, TN55NPO2E, TN54ENQ2, and TN55NPO2 boards, as shown in Table 16-49, Table 16-50, Table 16-51. Table 16-52 lists the wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies.
16 PID Unit
Table 16-49 Combinations of wavelengths for the PID group (NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2) (200G system) Wavelengt h Combinati on No. 1 2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2E Wavelength No. for TN54ENQ2 Wavelength No. for TN55NPO2
TN55NPO2EL02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN55NPO2EL04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
34, 38, 42, 46 36, 40, 44, 48
TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78 TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
Table 16-50 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2+ENQ2) (120G system) Wavelength Combination No. 1 2 3 4 Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/ TN55NPO2 TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29 TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/ TN55NPO2L02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31 TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/ TN55NPO2L04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 Wavelength No. of TN54ENQ2 33, 37, 41, 45 34, 38, 42, 46 35, 39, 43, 47 36, 40, 44, 48
Table 16-51 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (NPO2) (80G system) Wavelength Combination No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2
TN54NPO201/TN55NPO2S01: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29 TN54NPO202/TN55NPO2S02/TN55NPO2L02: 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30 TN54NPO203/TN55NPO2S03: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31 TN54NPO204/TN55NPO2S04/TN55NPO2L04: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32 TN54NPO205/TN55NPO2S05: 49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77 TN54NPO206/TN55NPO2S06/TN55NPO2L06: 50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1509
16 PID Unit
Wavelength Combination No. 7 8
Wavelength No. of TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2
TN54NPO207/TN55NPO2S07: 51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79 TN54NPO208/TN55NPO2S08/TN55NPO2L08: 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
NOTE
The ENQ2 board should be housed on the left of the NPO2 board. Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long distance. The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should be installed on the TN55NPO2, see 16.6.5 Front Panel.
Table 16-52 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system Wavelengt h No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Frequency (THz) 196.05 196.00 195.95 195.90 195.85 195.80 195.75 195.70 195.65 195.60 195.55 195.50 195.45 195.40 195.35 195.30 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.55 1529.94 1530.33 1530.72 1531.12 1531.51 1531.90 1532.29 1532.68 1533.07 1533.47 1533.86 1534.25 1534.64 1535.04 Wavelengt h No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Frequency (THz) 194.05 194.00 193.95 193.90 193.85 193.80 193.75 193.70 193.65 193.60 193.55 193.50 193.45 193.40 193.35 193.30 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.32 1545.72 1546.12 1546.52 1546.92 1547.32 1547.72 1548.11 1548.51 1548.91 1549.32 1549.72 1550.12 1550.52 1550.92
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1510
16 PID Unit
Wavelengt h No. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Frequency (THz) 195.25 195.20 195.15 195.10 195.05 195.00 194.95 194.90 194.85 194.80 194.75 194.70 194.65 194.60 194.55 194.50 194.45 194.40 194.35 194.30 194.25 194.20 194.15 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1535.43 1535.82 1536.22 1536.61 1537.00 1537.40 1537.79 1538.19 1538.58 1538.98 1539.37 1539.77 1540.16 1540.56 1540.95 1541.35 1541.75 1542.14 1542.54 1542.94 1543.33 1543.73 1544.13 1544.53
Wavelengt h No. 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Frequency (THz) 193.25 193.20 193.15 193.10 193.05 193.00 192.95 192.90 192.85 192.80 192.75 192.70 192.65 192.60 192.55 192.50 192.45 192.40 192.35 192.30 192.25 192.20 192.15 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1551.32 1551.72 1552.12 1552.52 1552.93 1553.33 1553.73 1554.13 1554.54 1554.94 1555.34 1555.75 1556.15 1556.55 1556.96 1557.36 1557.77 1558.17 1558.58 1558.98 1559.39 1559.79 1560.20 1560.61
16.6.2 Application
The NPO2 board is a PID unit. The NPO2 board converts 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32 channels of ODU1 signals, or 8 channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals into 8 channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2/OTU2e signals. In addition, the NPO2 board supports hybrid transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. Further, the NPO2 board receives 4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2, multiplexes 12 channels of OTU2/
16 PID Unit
OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the optical signals. The reverse process is similar.
Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the NPO2 Board

Figure 16-42 200G system built with the NPO2 board
Client-side service
Tributary board
Client-side service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN55 NPO2
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN55 NPO2
Tributary board
Clientside service
NOTE
When NPO2 boards are used to form a 200G system, the TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board.

Figure 16-43 120G system built with the TN55NPO2 board
Clientside service
Tributary board
OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2 TN55 NPO2 OBU 1P1
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1512
16 PID Unit

64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ Tributary 8xODU2e board 64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
OA TN54 NPO2
32xODU0/ 16xODU1/ 4xODU2/ 4xODU2e Tributary board
OA TN54 NPO2
OA
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
OA
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
Clientside service
TN54 ENQ2
TN54 ENQ2
Clientside service

Clientside service
OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2 OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2
Tributary board
Clientside service

OA TN54 NPO2 OA
OA TN54 NPO2 OA
Client-side service
Tributary board
Tributary board
Client-side service
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1513

NOTE
16 PID Unit
In the preceding application scenarios, the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is configured with the TN54PQ2 board. If the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board is not configured with the TN54PQ2 board, the TN55NPO2/ TN55NPO2E board can process a maximum of 40G services. When the TN55NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, whether OA boards are required or not depends on the fiber distance. If the fiber distance is shorter than 40 km, do not configure an OA board at either the transmit end or the receive end, or configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end; if the fiber distance ranges from 40 km to 80 km, do not configure an OA board at the transmit end but configure the TN12OBU1P1 board at the receive end. When the TN54NPO2 board is used in a WDM system, the single-wavelength incident optical power must be 2 dBm. It is recommended to use an OA board that outputs 2 dBm single-wavelength optical power, such as the TN12OAU100 board, or use an OA board that outputs 4 dBm single-wavelength optical power and a 2 dB attenuator.

The NPO2 provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 16-53 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2. Table 16-53 Functions and features of the NPO2 Function and Feature Basic function Description l Accesses 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane, maps the signals into eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar, and hybrid access of ODU0, ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e is supported. l Accesses four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals. l Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCMfree transmission over long distance. Cross-connect capabilities OTN function Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board and the cross-connect board. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports the TCM function and SM function for ODU2 and ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. WDM specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Supports the DWDM specifications.
1514
16 PID Unit
Function and Feature ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding
Description Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Alarms and performance events monitoring IEEE 1588v2
The TN55NPO2 board supports one channel of IEEE 1588v2 signals.

NOTE For the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2 boards (in compatible mode), the IEEE 1588v2 signal can be transmitted through any of the eight optical ports on the board. For the TN55NPO2 board (in standard mode), the IEEE 1588v2 signal must be transmitted through optical port 1.
Physical clock Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback
The TN55NPO2 board supports this feature only when ODU0 or ODU1 signals are cross-connected from the backplane. Not supported Not supported l Supports ODUk SNCP. WDM side Inloop Outloop Supported
NOTE The TN55NPO2 board supports WDM-side loopbacks only when working in compatible mode.
Channel Loopback
Inloop Outloop
Supported
NOTE The TN55NPO2 board supports ODU2 channel loopback only when working in standard mode.
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1515
16 PID Unit
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1516
16 PID Unit

The NPO2 board consists of the signal processing module, PID module, control and communication module, 1588 module, and power supply module. Figure 16-47 and Figure 16-48 show the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1517
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-47 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NPO2

64XODU0/32XODU1/ 8XODU2/8XODU2e 4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e Backplane (service cross-connection)
8 1588
OUT
PID Module
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1518
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-48 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN55NPO2

64XODU0/32XODU1 /8XODU2/8XODU2e 4XOTU2/4XOTU2e Backplane (service cross-connection)
Cross-connect module 1588 PQ2 service processing sub-board

8
PID Module
OUT
IN
Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the NPO2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2 to the WDM side of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals to the PID module. The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are finally output through the OUT optical interface. l Receive direction The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals. Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/ AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
16 PID Unit
The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
Module Function
l PID module The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter. WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals. WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface. Reports the working status of the WDM-side laser. l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module. Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e signals OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC coding and decoding. PQ2 service processing board Processes 40 Gbit/s signals that are carried by the last four wavelengths provided on the TN55NPO2 board.
NOTE
After installing a PQ2 service processing sub-board onto the TN55NPO2 board that works in standard mode, create the logical PQ2 sub-board on the U2000. For details on how to create a logical PQ2 subboard, see Adding Boards in the Commissioning Guide.
1588 module The 1588 module sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module of the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1520
16 PID Unit
16.6.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators, optical interfaces, laser level label, and PQ2 sub-board on the front panel of the NPO2.

Figure 16-49 shows the front panel of the TN54NPO2. Figure 16-50 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2. Figure 16-49 Front panel of the TN54NPO2
NPO2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
OUT
IN
NPO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1521
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-50 Front panel of the TN55NPO2

NPO2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
NPO2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
PQ2
STAT
NPO2
NPO2
PQ2 installed
NOTE
PQ2 not installed
The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For details, see 16.6.1 Version Description.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the NPO2 panel. l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
There is one indicator on the PQ2 panel.
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NPO2. Table 16-54 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
16 PID Unit
Table 16-54 Types and functions of the NPO2 interfaces Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives the line signal. Transmits the line signal.
Laser Hazard Level

16.6.6 Valid Slots

The NPO2 occupies two slots. Table 16-55 shows the valid slots for the NPO2 board. Table 16-55 Valid slots for the NPO2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU3, IU7, IU13, IU17, IU21, IU25, IU29, IU33, IU37, IU41, IU47, IU51, IU55, IU59, IU63, IU67 IU3, IU7, IU14, IU18, IU22, IU26, IU31, IU35 IU3, IU7, IU13, IU17
NOTE
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the NPO2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots. For example, if the NPO2 occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2 displayed on the NM is IU3.
16.6.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2

The characteristic code for the NPO2 consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 16-56. Table 16-56 Characteristic code for the NPO2 Code The first three digits Meaning The frequency of optical signal Description The last three digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side.
1523
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
Code The last three digits
Meaning The frequency of optical signal
Description The last three digits of the frequency value of the last channel of signals on the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN54NPO2 is 605385. l "605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 193.85 THz.


Table 16-57 lists the mapping between the physical ports on the board and the port numbers displayed on the NMS. Table 16-57 Serial numbers of the interfaces on the NPO2 displayed on the NMS Physical Port IN/OUT Port Number on the NMS 1
NOTE
Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, and the TN54NPO2 board can work only in compatible mode.
NOTE
l l
Figure 16-51 shows the board model of the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board in compatible mode. Table 16-58 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board. Figure 16-52 shows the board model of the T55NPO2 board in standard mode. Table 16-59 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-51 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode)

Other tributary board/line board/PID board Other tributary board/line board/PID board Other tributary board/line board/PID board Backplane
64 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 32 x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2 ODU2LP1)-1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 8 x ODU2/ODU2e
133(OCHLP1 /OCHLP1)-1
IN/OUT
58 ODU1 (ODU1LP8/ODU1LP8)-1 78 (ODU2LP8/ ODU2 ODU2LP8)-1 58 ODU1 (ODU1LP8/ODU1LP8)-4 140(OCHLP8 /OCHLP8)-1 141(OCHLP9 /OCHLP9)-1
144(OCHLP12 /OCHLP12)-1
NOTE
There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000.
ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
Automatic cross-connection, which does not need to be configured on the NMS. For example, if ODU0 signals are required, users only need to configure cross-connections from other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board using the NMS. The board's internal structure enables transmission of the multiplexed signal to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to configure a crossconnection for transmitting the multiplexed signal. Cross-connection that must be configured on the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other boards
ODU0 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1525
16 PID Unit
Table 16-58 Meaning of ports on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 (compatible mode) Port Name ODU0LP1-ODU0LP32 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP8 ODU2LP1-ODU2LP8 OCHLP1-OCHLP12 IN/OUT Meaning Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1. This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.
Figure 16-52 Diagram of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode)

1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12) ODU2:1 12xODU2/ 12XODU2e
OCH:1
ODU2:1
OCH:12
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH:1
48xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH:12 IN/OUT
ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 96xODU0 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(1-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH:1
ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 OCH:12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1526

NOTE
16 PID Unit
The OCH9 to OCH12 optical channels only receive the signals coming from the TN54ENQ2 board. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH: 1ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. The TN55NPO2 board's OCH5 to OCH8 optical channels are available only when the board works with the TN54PQ2 service processing board.
Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Service processing module ODU0 mapping path
ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
Table 16-59 Meaning of ports on the TN55NPO2 (standard mode) Port Name 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:(112)ODU1:(14)-ODU0:(12) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112)-ODU2:(112)ODU1:(14) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(112) Meaning Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU1 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2e signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the WDM-side port.
1(IN/OUT)

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1527
16 PID Unit
The TN55NPO2 board can work in standard or compatible mode, the TN54NPO2 board can work only in compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1528
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-53 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN55NPO2 (ODU0 level)

Client side
Other board a
compatible mode
TN55NPO2 board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1
standard mode
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1-ODU1:4-ODU0:2


Cross-connect module The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2
Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1529
16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board b
TN54NPO2 board (compatible mode)
2


Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NQ2/TN53NS2 /TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1530
16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
compatible mode
TN55NPO2 board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:4
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:2 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:3 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1-ODU1:4 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1
standard mode
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN55NPO2
Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1531

Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
TN54NPO2 board (compatible mode)
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the TN54NPO2
Other board a TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 /TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1532
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-57 and Figure 16-58 show the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 16-57 Diagram of cross-connections of the TN55NPO2 (ODU2 level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
compatible mode
TN55NPO2 board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:2-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:7-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8-ODU2:1 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1
standard mode
2
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12-ODU2:1
WDM side
Other board a TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1533
16 PID Unit

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
TN54NPO2 board
(compatible mode)
2
WDM side
Other board b (compatible mode) Other board c (standard mode)
Other board a TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX Other board b TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 Other board c TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Cross-Connections Between the NPO2 and ENQ2

Figure 16-59 and Figure 16-60 show the created cross-connections between the NPO2 and ENQ2.
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-59 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2

WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
standard mode
ENQ2 board
compatible mode
WDM side
144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 compatible mode 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1
TN55NPO2 board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
standard mode
The cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1535
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-60 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and ENQ2

WDM side
ENQ2 board compatible mode
Cross-connect module WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1
TN54NPO2 board compatible mode
141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 Cross-connect module

Figure 16-61 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board. One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals. Figure 16-61 Example of service cross-connections on the NPO2 board
ODU0
TOM TOM NS2
ODU0 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU2/ IN/OUT
NPO2
TDX/ ODU2e ND2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1536
16 PID Unit
16.6.10 NPO2 Loopbacks

Table 16-60 lists the types of loopbacks supported by NPO2 boards. Table 16-60 Loopbacks supported by NPO2 boards Cross-Connect Level ODU0 Board TN55NPO2/ TN54NPO2 Loopback Type Channel inloop Channel outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop ODU1 Channel inloop Channel outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop ODU2/ODU2e WDM-side outloop WDM-side inloop Description See Figure 16-62. See Figure 16-63. See Figure 16-64. See Figure 16-65. See Figure 16-66. See Figure 16-67. See Figure 16-68. See Figure 16-69. See Figure 16-70. See Figure 16-71.
NOTE The TN55NPO2 board supports only WDM-side loopbacks when working in compatible mode and only ODU2 channel loopbacks when working in the standard mode. The loopback points in the standard mode are the same as those in the compatible mode.
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU0

l Channel inloop As shown in Figure 16-62, 64 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 64 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1537
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-62 Channel inloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 16-63, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 64 ODU0 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1538
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-63 Channel outloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
Backplane
WDM-side
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 16-64, 64 ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 32 ODU1 services, which are then converged into eight ODU2 services. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1539
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-64 WDM-side inloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 16-65, eight OTU2 services received on the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1540
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-65 WDM-side outloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
WDM-side
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU1

l Channel inloops As shown in Figure 16-66, 32 ODU1 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1541
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-66 Channel inloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
WDM-side
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 16-67, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side is demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 services is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the WDM side at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1542
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-67 Channel outloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
WDM-side
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 16-68, 32 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into eight ODU2 services. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1543
16 PID Unit

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
WDM-side
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 16-69, eight OTU2 services received from the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2 services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1544
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-69 WDM-side outloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
IN/OUT
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
WDM-side
Loopbacks Supported by TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ODU2e

l WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 16-70, eight ODU2/ODU2e services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1545
16 PID Unit
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 16-71, eight OTU2/OTU2e services received from the WDM side are demapped into eight ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any N of the eight ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the WDM side and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through. Figure 16-71 WDM-side outloops on the TN55NPO2/TN54NPO2 board
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
IN/OUT
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the NPO2, refer to Table 16-61.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1546
16 PID Unit
Table 16-61 NPO2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Use Status Value Used, Unused Default: Used Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN55NPO2 only in the compatible mode.
See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information. Channel Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback Service Mode Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board.
NOTE The parameter is supported by the TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2 (compatible mode).
Queries or sets path Loopback.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Laser Status Off, On Default: On The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information.
FEC Working State
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1547
16 PID Unit
Field FEC Mode
Description The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information. OTN Overhead Transparent Transmission Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate. See D.24 Line Rate for more information.
Line Rate
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1548
16 PID Unit
Description The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to enable the special frame test before deployment. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends the test frame where the payload consists of only 0. This parameter is used in the deployment commissioning.
NULL Mapping Status
16.6.12 Specifications of the NPO2

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Board TN54NP O2 TN55NP O2 WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module 200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km) 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km) WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module N/A N/A
NOTE
NOTE

Table 16-62 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side Item Optical Module Type Line code format
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km) 1500 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (80 km) NRZ 200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN NRZ
NRZ
1549
16 PID Unit
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km) 1500 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (80 km) 200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Central frequency Maximum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum mean launched power (single wavelength) Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency deviation Maximum -20 dB spectral width Minimum side mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance THz dBm 192.10 to 196.05 +2 192.10 to 196.05 +2 192.10 to 196.05 -2
dBm
-4.5
-4.5
-6
dB GHz
6 5
6 5
6.5 5
nm
0.8
0.8
0.8
dB
30
30
30
ps/nm
800
1500
200
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity (FEC enabled) EOL Minimum receiver overload nm PIN 1200 to 1650 PIN 1200 to 1650 PIN 1200 to 1650
dBm
-13.5
-12
-12
dBm
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1550
16 PID Unit
Unit
Value 800 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (40 km) 1500 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN (80 km) -27 200 ps/nm-PIDNRZ-PIN -27
dB
-27
TN54NPO2: l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
TN55NPO2: l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.7 kg (3.7 lb.)
TN54PQ2: l l Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69 in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H)) Weight: 0.1 kg (0.22 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 134 143 1.1 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 147 157.3 1.2
TN54NPO2 TN55NPO2 TN54PQ2
16.7 ENQ2
ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board

The available functional version of the ENQ2 board is TN54.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1551
16 PID Unit

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN54 ENQ 2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 N
16.7.2 Application
The ENQ2 board converts 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is similar.
Application Scenario 1: 200G system Built with the ENQ2 Board

Figure 16-72 200G system built with the ENQ2 board
Client-side service
Tributary board
Client-side service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN55 NPO2
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
8xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN55 NPO2
Tributary board
Clientside service
NOTE
The TN55NPO2L06 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL02 board, or the TN55NPO2L08 board must work with the TN55NPO2EL04 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1552
16 PID Unit
Application Scenario 2: 120G system Built with the ENQ2 Board

Figure 16-73 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN55NPO2)
Clientside service
Tributary board
OBU 1P1 TN55 NPO2 TN55 NPO2 OBU 1P1
Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
Tributary board
TN54 ENQ2
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
TN54 ENQ2
Tributary board
Clientside service
Figure 16-74 120G system built with the ENQ2 board (TN54NPO2)
64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ Tributary 8xODU2e board 64xODU0/ 32xODU1/ 8xODU2/ 8xODU2e Tributary board
Clientside service
Clientside service
OA TN54 NPO2
OA TN54 NPO2
OA
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
OA
4xOTU2/ OTU2e
Clientside service
TN54 ENQ2
TN54 ENQ2
Clientside service

The ENQ2 supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC. Table 16-63 provides the details about the functions and features of the ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1553
16 PID Unit
Table 16-63 Functions and features of the ENQ2 Function or Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services. The reverse process is similar. Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 or 16 channels of ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board and the cross-connect board. l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. l Supports the PM function for ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2. l Supports the TCM function and SM function for ODU2 and ODU1. l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1. WDM specification ESC function PRBS function LPT function FEC encoding Supports the DWDM specifications. Supports the ESC function. The supervisory signal is transmitted within the service signal. Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side. Not supported l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G. 975. l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
Cross-connect capabilities OTN function
Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical-layer ASON Electricallayer ASON Protection scheme Loopback
Provides the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.
Not supported Not supported l Supports the ODUk SNCP. WDM side Inloop Outloop Supported
NOTE The TN54ENQ2 board supports WDM-side loopbacks only when working in compatible mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1554
16 PID Unit
Function or Feature
Description Channel Loopback Inloop Outloop Supported

NOTE The TN54ENQ2 board supports ODU2 channel loopback only when working in standard mode.
Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1555
16 PID Unit
Function or Feature Protocol or standard compliance
Description Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.3u IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3ae ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.782 ITU-T G.783 GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-PI) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH) NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2) SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection architecture (SBCON) ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC) ANSI X3.148 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY) ANSI X3.166 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1556
16 PID Unit
Function or Feature
Description Protocols or standards (performance monitoring) for processing services ITU-T G.805 ITU-T G.806 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.872 ITU-T G.7710 ITU-T G.798 ITU-T G.874 ITU-T M.3100 ITU-T G.874.1 ITU-T G.875 ITU-T G.808.1 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.8201 ITU-T G.873.1

The ENQ2 board consists of the signal processing module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 16-75 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1557
16 PID Unit
Signal Flow
Figure 16-75 Functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2
32XODU0/16XODU1/ 4XODU2/4XODU2e 4XOTU2/ 4XOTU2e Backplane (service cross-connection)
In the signal flow of the ENQ2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The transmit direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the ENQ2 to the WDM side of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction. l Transmit direction The ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing for the signals. Finally, four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the NPO2 board through the backplane. l Receive direction The signal processing module receives four channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the NPO2 board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals. The signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1558
16 PID Unit
Module Function
l Signal processing module The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module.
NOTE
The signal processing module on the ENQ2 board has fixed cross-connections to the NPO2 board.
Cross-connect module Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2 signals OTN processing module Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from the CPU. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage detection of each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
16.7.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators on the front panel of the ENQ2.

Figure 16-76 shows the front panel of the ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1559
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-76 Front panel of the ENQ2
ENQ2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
ENQ2
Indicators
16.7.6 Valid Slots

The ENQ2 occupies one slot. Table 16-64 shows the valid slots for the ENQ2 board.
16 PID Unit
Table 16-64 Valid slots for the ENQ2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15, IU19, IU23, IU27, IU31, IU35, IU39, IU45, IU49, IU53, IU57, IU61, IU65 IU1, IU5, IU12, IU16, IU20, IU24, IU29, IU33 IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15

Logical Ports
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections. For example, ODUkLP is a logical port of the board. The TN54ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode.
NOTE
l l
Figure 16-77 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in compatible mode. Table 16-65 lists the descriptions of the ports on the board. Figure 16-78 shows the port diagrams of the TN54ENQ2 board in standard mode. Table 16-66 Lists the descriptions of the ports on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1561
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-77 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode)

Other tributary board/ line board/PID board Other tributary board/ line board/PID board Other tributary board/ line board/PID board
Backplane
32 x ODU0 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 161 (ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2 16 x ODU1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 71 (ODU2LP1/ ODU2 ODU2LP1)-1 51 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4 4 x ODU2/ODU2e
54 ODU1 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1 74 (ODU2LP4/ ODU2 ODU2LP4)-1 54 ODU1 (ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
NOTE
There are cross-connections between ports 141 (OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 to 144 (OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 on the NPO2 board and ports 71 (ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 to 74 (ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1 on the ENQ2 board. You do not need to configure these cross-connections on the U2000. Cross-connect module Multiplexing module Service processing module ODU1 mapping path
ODU2 mapping path
ODU0 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1562
16 PID Unit
Table 16-65 Meaning of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (compatible mode) Port Name ODU0LP1-ODU0LP16 ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4 ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4 Meaning Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1 and 2. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4. Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.
Figure 16-78 port diagrams for the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode)

Backplane
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12) ODU2:1
4xODU2/ 4XODU2e
ODU2:1
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4) ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 16xODU1 ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4
NPO2/ NPO2E
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(9-12)-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) ODU0:1 ODU1:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 32xODU0 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU0:1 ODU0:2 ODU1:1 ODU2:1 ODU1:4 ODU1:4 ODU2:1
NOTE
Service cross-connections of the TN54ENQ2(standard mode) board are configured on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board (either in standard mode) using the NMS. If an ODUk channel has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on any other channels that correspond to the ODUk channel, regardless of the rate level. For example, if channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1-ODU1:1 has been used, cross-connections cannot be configured on channel 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9ODU2:1 or 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9-ODU2:1-ODU1:1-ODU0:1. Cross-connect module ODU1 mapping path
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1563

Multiplexing module Service processing module ODU0 mapping path ODU2 mapping path
16 PID Unit
Table 16-66 Meaning of ports on the TN54ENQ2 (standard mode) Port Name 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(912)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (14)-ODU0:(12) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(912)-ODU2:1-ODU1: (14) 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:(912) Meaning Indicates the mapping path for the ODU0 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU1 signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the mapping path for the ODU2/ ODU2e signals that are received through the backplane. Indicates the WDM-side port.
1(IN/OUT)

The ENQ2 board can work in standard or compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide. When the ENQ2 board works in standard mode, service cross-connections are configured on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board using the NMS. The ODUk services processed by the ENQ2 board are mapped onto OCH9-OCH12 optical channels on the TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board in standard mode. For details, see Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2) and Configuration of Cross-connection (NPO2E).
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1564
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-79 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU0 level)

Client side
Other board a
WDM side
ENQ2 board
2
WDM side
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2 The WDM side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1565
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-80 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU1 level)

Client side
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 203(ClientLP3ClientLP3)-1 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1
Other board a
WDM side
ENQ2 board
2
WDM side
TN52TOG/TN52TOM/TN54THA/TN54TOA TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2 / TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1566
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-81 shows the created ODU2 cross-connections. Figure 16-81 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU2 level)
Client side
Other board a
WDM side
ENQ2 board
WDM side
TN52TDX/TN53TDX/TN55TQX/TN52TQX/TN53TQX TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN53NS2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/ TN54NS3/TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2 TN53ND2/TN53NS2/TN53NQ2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E/TN54ENQ2
Cross-Connections Between the NPO2/NPO2E and ENQ2

Figure 16-82 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2. Figure 16-83 shows the cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2.
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-84 shows the cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2. Figure 16-82 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1 73(ODU2/LP3/ODU2LP3)-1 74(ODU2/LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
standard mode
ENQ2 board
compatible mode
WDM side
144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1 143(OCHLP11/OCHLP11)-1 142(OCHLP10/OCHLP10)-1 141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 compatible mode 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1
TN55NPO2 board
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:8 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:1
standard mode
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1568
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-83 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN54NPO2 and TN54ENQ2

WDM side
ENQ2 board compatible mode
Cross-connect module WDM side 144(OCHLP12/OCHLP12)-1
TN54NPO2 board compatible mode
141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1 140(OCHLP8/OCHLP8)-1 139(OCHLP7/OCHLP7)-1 138(OCHLP6/OCHLP6)-1 133(OCHLP1/OCHLP1)-1 Cross-connect module
Figure 16-84 Diagram of cross-connections between the TN55NPO2E and TN54ENQ2

WDM side
ENQ2 board
(standard mode)
1(IN/OUT)-OCH:9 1(IN/OUT)--OCH:10 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:11 1(IN/OUT)-OCH:12

NPO2E board
(standard mode)
The cross-connections between the NPO2E and ENQ2, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1569
16 PID Unit
16.7.9 ENQ2 Loopbacks

Table 16-67 lists the types of loopbacks supported by ENQ2 board. Table 16-67 Loopbacks supported by ENQ2 board Cross-Connect Level ODU0 Boar d TN54 ENQ 2 Loopback Type Channel inloop Channel outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop ODU1 Channel inloop Channel outloop WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop ODU2/ODU2e WDM-side inloop WDM-side outloop Description See Figure 16-85. See Figure 16-86. See Figure 16-87. See Figure 16-88. See Figure 16-89. See Figure 16-90. See Figure 16-91. See Figure 16-92. See Figure 16-93. See Figure 16-94.
NOTE The TN54ENQ2 board supports only WDM-side loopbacks when working in compatible mode and only ODU2 channel loopbacks when working in the standard mode. The loopback points in the standard mode are the same as those in the compatible mode.
NOTE
When an TN54ENQ2 board works in standard mode, channel loopback must be configured at the mapping NPO2/NPO2E board in standard mode; when an TN54ENQ2 board works in compatible mode, channel loopback must be configured at the mapping ENQ2 board, WDM-side loopback must be configured at the mapping NPO2 board in compatible mode.
Loopbacks Supported by TN54ENQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU0

l Channel inloop As shown in Figure 16-85, 32 ODU0 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the backplane at the ODU0 loopback points. The remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1570
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-85 Channel inloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 16-86, four OTU2 service received from the NPO2/NPO2E board is demapped into four ODU2 service after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services, each of which is then deconverged into two ODU0 services. Any N of the 32 ODU0 services can be looped back to the NPO2/ NPO2E board at the ODU0 loopback points and the remaining ODU0 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1571
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-86 Channel outloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 16-87, 32 ODU0 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 16 ODU1 services, which are then converged into four ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1572
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-87 WDM-side inloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 16-88, four OTU2 services received on the NPO2/NPO2E board are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1573
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-88 WDM-side outloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
Loopbacks Supported by TN54ENQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU1

l Channel inloops As shown in Figure 16-89, 16 ODU1 services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the 16 ODU1 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1574
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-89 Channel inloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
Channel outloop As shown in Figure 16-90, four OTU2 services received from the NPO2/NPO2E board is demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. The ODU2 service is deconverged into four ODU1 services. Any N of the ODU1 services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board at the ODU1 loopback points and the remaining ODU1 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1575
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-90 Channel outloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
WDM-side inloop As shown in Figure 16-91, 16 ODU1 services cross-connected from the backplane are converged into 4 ODU2 services. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1576
16 PID Unit

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
WDM-side outloop As shown in Figure 16-92, four OTU2 services received from the NPO2/NPO2E board are demapped into four ODU2 services after the OTU2 overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2 services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board and the remaining ODU2 services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1577
16 PID Unit
Figure 16-92 WDM-side outloops on the TN54ENQ2 board

ODU1
ODU1 ODU2 ODU1 OTU2
ODU1
NPO2/NPO2E
ODU1
ODU1
ODU2
OTU2
ODU1
ODU1
Loopbacks Supported by TN54ENQ2 When the Cross-Connect Level Is ODU2/ ODU2e

l WDM-side inloops As shown in Figure 16-93, four ODU2/ODU2e services are cross-connected from the backplane. Any N of the ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the backplane and the remaining ODU2/ODU2e services can be passed through.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1578
16 PID Unit

ODU2/ODU2e OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e NPO2/NPO2E
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
WDM-side outloops As shown in Figure 16-94, four OTU2/OTU2e services received from the NPO2/ NPO2E board are demapped into four ODU2/ODU2e services after the OTU2/OTU2e overhead is terminated. Any N of the four ODU2/ODU2e services can be looped back to the NPO2/NPO2E board and the remaining ODU2 service can be passed through. Figure 16-94 WDM-side outloops on the TN54ENQ2 board
ODU2/ODU2e OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e NPO2/NPO2E
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2/ODU2e
OTU2/OTU2e

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. Table 16-68 lists the parameters of the ENQ2 board working in compatible mode. For details about the standard and compatible modes of the board, see Board Model (Standard Mode and Compatible Mode) in the Configuration Guide.
16 PID Unit
Table 16-68 ENQ2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Channel Loopback Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: Non-Loopback Service Mode Automatic, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 Default: Automatic FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled The Service Mode parameter sets the service mode of a board. See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface. See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for more information. The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface. See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for more information. Determines whether to process GCC1 and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the processing is not required, set this parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled. Used to configure the line rate of OTN. Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries or sets the path Loopback.
FEC Mode
Line Rate
PRBS Test Status
NULL Mapping Status
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1580
16 PID Unit
16.7.11 Specifications of the ENQ2

The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 40 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 44
ENQ2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1581
17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Unit
17
Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Unit
About This Chapter

17.1 M40 M40: 40-channel multiplexing board 17.2 M40V M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA 17.3 D40 D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board 17.4 D40V D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA 17.5 DFIU DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board 17.6 FIU FIU: fiber interface unit 17.7 ITL ITL: interleaver board 17.8 SFIU SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1582
17.1 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing board

The available functional versions of the M40 board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 M40 TN12 M40 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 N N
Type
Unit TN11M4 0/ TN12M4 0 Type 01 02 Description Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Appearance: l The TN11M40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40 board. The TN11M40 board occupies three slots. The TN12M40 board occupies two slots. For details, see 17.1.5 Front Panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1583
Original Board TN11M40 Substitute Board TN12M40 Substitution Rules The TN12M40 can be created as TN11M40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12M40 functions as the TN11M40. -
TN12M40
None
17.1.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40 board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations. For the position of the M40 board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-1. Figure 17-1 Position of the M40 board in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 D40 40 OA OA M40 40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU

The M40 board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-1. Table 17-1 Functions and features of the M40 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals. l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1584
Function and Feature Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical-layer ASON
Description Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Supported

The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board. Figure 17-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board
Optical module Splitter OUT MON Temperature Temperature control detection Detection and temperature control module PIN
M01 M02 M40
Multiplexer
Backplane (Controlled by SCC) SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1585
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Detection and temperature control module Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
17.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board.

Figure 17-3 and Figure 17-4 show the front panel of the M40 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1586
Figure 17-3 Front panel of the TN11M40 board
M40
STAT ACT PROG SRV
M01 196.00 M11 195.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M07 195.40 M17 194.40 M08 195.30 M18 194.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10 M21 194.00 M22 193.90 M23 193.80 M24 193.70 M25 193.60 M26 193.50 M27 193.40 M28 193.30 M29 193.20 M30 193.10 M31 193.00 M32 192.90 M33 192.80 M34 192.70 M35 192.60 M36 192.50 M37 192.40 M38 192.30 M39 192.20 M40 192.10
MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12
M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26
M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40
M40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1587
Figure 17-4 Front panel of the TN12M40 board

M40
STAT ACT PROG SRV
MON OUT
M13
M01
M02
M27 M28
M11 M12 M26
M39 M40
M01 196.00 M11 195.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M07 195.40 M17 194.40 M08 195.30 M18 194.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10
M40
NOTE
A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board. Table 17-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 17-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40 board Interface M01-M40 OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs. Transmits multiplexed signals, when connected to an optical amplifying board or ITL. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum, when connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 input interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board. Table 17-3 and Table 17-4 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40 board. Table 17-3 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4001 board (C_EVEN) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56
Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35
Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55
1589
Interface M16 M17 M18 M19 M20
Frequency (THz) 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53
Frequency (THz) 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61
Table 17-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M4002 board (C_ODD) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1590
Laser Hazard Level

17.1.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one TN11M40 board and two slots house one TN12M40 board. Table 17-5 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40 board and Table 17-6 shows the valid slots for the TN12M40 board. Table 17-5 Valid slots for the TN11M40 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27-IU32, IU35IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU29-IU34 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU15
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40 board, the slot number of the TN11M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 17-6 Valid slots for the TN12M40 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40 board, the slot number of the TN12M40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40

The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-7. Table 17-7 Characteristic code for the M40 board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.
Second character
Odd/even wavelengths
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
17.1.8 Optical Interfaces


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-8. Table 17-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel OUT M01-M40 MON Interface on the NM 1 2-41 42

For M40 parameters, refer to Table 17-9. Table 17-9 M40 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Configure Band Value C Default: C Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity All, Odd, Even Default: / Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Sets the working band type of a board.
17.1.10 Specifications of the M40

Table 17-10 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board. Table 17-10 Optical specifications of the M40 board Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Polarization dependence loss Temperature characteristics Maximum channel insertion loss difference Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB nm/C dB Value 100 6.5 < -40 1529-1561 > 22 > 25 0.5 0.002 3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1593
l Dimensions of front panel: TN11M40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) TN12M40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN11M40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.) TN12M40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11M40 TN12M40
17.2 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA

The available functional versions of the M40V board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 M40 V TN12 M40 V OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1594
Type
Unit TN11M4 0V/ TN12M4 0V Type 01 02 Description Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.

Appearance: l The TN11M40V board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12M40V board. The TN11M40V board occupies three slots. The TN12M40V board occupies two slots. For details, see 17.2.5 Front Panel.
Original Board TN11M40V Substitute Board TN12M40 V Substitution Rules The TN12M40V can be created as TN11M40V on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12M40V functions as the TN11M40V. -
TN12M40V
None
17.2.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40V board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. For the position of the M40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-5. Figure 17-5 Position of the M40V board in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40V 40 1 D40 40 OA OA M40V 40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1595

The M40V board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, monitor alarms and performance events, and adjust optical power. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-11. Table 17-11 Functions and features of the M40V board Function and Feature Basic function Description Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one multiplexed signal and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path. Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Adjusts the optical power of each signal before multiplexing. Supported

The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1596
Figure 17-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board
Optical module Multiplexer VOA VOA
M01 M02 M40
VOA
Splitter OUT MON
VOA Temperature control control
Temperature detection
PIN
Detection and temperature control module
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals before multiplexing. Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Detection and temperature control module Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

17.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board.

Figure 17-7 and Figure 17-8 show the front panel of the M40V board. Figure 17-7 Front panel of the TN11M40V board
M40V
STAT ACT PROG SRV
M01 196.00 M11 195.00 M02 195.90 M12 194.90 M03 195.80 M13 194.80 M04 195.70 M14 194.70 M05 195.60 M15 194.60 M06 195.50 M16 194.50 M07 195.40 M17 194.40 M08 195.30 M18 194.30 M09 195.20 M19 194.20 M10 195.10 M20 194.10 M21 194.00 M22 193.90 M23 193.80 M24 193.70 M25 193.60 M26 193.50 M27 193.40 M28 193.30 M29 193.20 M30 193.10 M31193.00 M32192.90 M33192.80 M34192.70 M35192.60 M36192.50 M37192.40 M38192.30 M39192.20 M40192.10
MON OUT M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12
M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26
M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40
M40V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1598
Figure 17-8 Front panel of the TN12M40V board

M40V
STAT ACT PROG SRV
MON OUT
M13
M01
M02
M27 M28
M11 M12 M26
M39 M40
M40V
NOTE
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board. Table 17-12 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 17-12 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40V board Interface M01-M40 OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs. Transmits the multiplexed signals, when connected to an optical amplifier or ITL. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum, when connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 input interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board. Table 17-13 and Table 17-14 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency, and wavelengths of the M40V board. Table 17-13 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (even) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56
Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55
1600
Frequency (THz) 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53
Frequency (THz) 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61
Table 17-14 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (odd) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1601
Laser Hazard Level

17.2.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one TN11M40V board and two slots house one TN12M40V board. Table 17-15 shows the valid slots for the TN11M40V board and Table 17-16 shows the valid slots for the TN12M40V board. Table 17-15 Valid slots for the TN11M40V board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU29IU34 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU15
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN11M40V board, the slot number of the TN11M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 17-16 Valid slots for the TN12M40 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12M40V board, the slot number of the TN12M40V board displayed on the NM is IU1.
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V

The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-17. Table 17-17 Characteristic code for the M40V board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.
Second character
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-18. Table 17-18 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel OUT M01-M40 MON Interface on the NM 1 2-41 42

For M40V parameters, refer to Table 17-19. Table 17-19 M40V parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Configure Band C Default: C Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity All, Odd, Even Default: / Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Sets the working band type of a board.
17.2.10 Specifications of the M40V

Table 17-20 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board. Table 17-20 Optical specifications of the M40V board Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Attenuation range Loss accuracy Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB dB Value 100 8a < -40 1529-1561 > 22 > 25 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB) Polarization dependent loss Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB dB 0.5 3a
NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
l Dimensions of front panel: TN11M40V: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) TN12M40V: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN11M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.) TN12M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11M40V TN12M40V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1605
17.3 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board

The available functional versions of the D40 board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 D40 TN12 D40 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 N N
Type
Unit TN11D40/ TN12D40 Type 01 02 Description Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

Appearance: l The TN11D40 board uses a front panel different from that of the TN12D40 board. The TN11D40 board occupies three slots. The TN12D40 board occupies two slots. For details, see 17.3.5 Front Panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1606
Original Board TN11D40 Substitute Board TN12D40 Substitution Rules The TN12D40 can be created as TN11D40 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12D40 functions as the TN11D40. -
TN12D40
None
17.3.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexing unit. The D40 implements the demultiplexing of one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 17-9. Figure 17-9 Position of the D40 in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 D40 40 OA OA M40 40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU

The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-21. Table 17-21 Functions and features of the D40 Function and Feature Basic function Description Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of service. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1607
Function and Feature Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical-layer ASON

The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40. Figure 17-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40
Optical module Splitter
IN MON
Demultiplexer
D01 D02 D40
PIN
Temperature control
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1608
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l Optical module Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Detection and temperature control module Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
17.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the D40 front panel.

Figure 17-11 and Figure 17-12 show the front panel of the D40 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1609
Figure 17-11 TN11D40 front panel
D40
STAT ACT PROG SRV
D01 196.00 D02 195.90 D03 195.80 D04 195.70 D05 195.60 D06 195.50 D07 195.40 D08 195.30 D09 195.20 D10 195.10 D11 195.00 D12 194.90 D13 194.80 D14 194.70 D15 194.60 D16 194.50 D17 194.40 D18 194.30 D19 194.20 D20 194.10 D21 194.00 D22 193.90 D23 193.80 D24 193.70 D25 193.60 D26 193.50 D27 193.40 D28 193.30 D29 193.20 D30 193.10 D31 193.00 D32 192.90 D33 192.80 D34 192.70 D35 192.60 D36 192.50 D37 192.40 D38 192.30 D39 192.20 D40 192.10
MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26
D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
D40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1610
Figure 17-12 Front panel of the TN12D40 board

D40
STAT ACT PROG SRV
MON OUT D01 D02
D13
D27 D28
D11 D12 D26
D39 D40
D01 196.00 D11 195.00 D02 195.90 D12 194.90 D03 195.80 D13 194.80 D04 195.70 D14 194.70 D05 195.60 D15 194.60 D06 195.50 D16 194.50 D07 195.40 D17 194.40 D08 195.30 D18 194.30 D09 195.20 D19 194.20 D10 195.10 D20 194.10
D21 194.00 D22 193.90 D23 193.80 D24 193.70 D25 193.60 D26 193.50 D27 193.40 D28 193.30 D29 193.20 D30 193.10
D31 193.00 D32 192.90 D33 192.80 D34 192.70 D35 192.60 D36 192.50 D37 192.40 D38 192.30 D39 192.20 D40 192.10
D40
NOTE
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 17-22 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 17-22 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces Interface IN D01-D40 MON Type LC LC LC Function Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the signals to be demultiplexed. Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected "IN" interface of the OTUs. Connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 output interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 17-23 and Table 17-24 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40 board. Table 17-23 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4001 board (C_EVEN) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56
Interface D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35
Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55
1612
Interface D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
Frequency (THz) 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53
Interface D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
Frequency (THz) 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61
Table 17-24 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D4002 board (C_ODD) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13 Interface D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1613
Laser Hazard Level

17.3.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one TN11D40 board and two slots house one TN12D40 board. Table 17-25 shows the valid slots for the TN11D40 board and Table 17-26 shows the valid slots for the TN12D40 board. Table 17-25 Valid slots for the TN11D40 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU29IU34 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU15
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three occupied slots. For example, if the TN11D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TN11D40 displayed on the NM is IU1. Table 17-26 Valid slots for the TN12D40 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12D40 board, the slot number of the TN12D40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40

The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-27. Table 17-27 Characteristic code for the D40 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.
The second character
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-28. Table 17-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN D01-D40 MON Interface on the NM 1 2-41 42

For D40 parameters, refer to Table 17-29. Table 17-29 D40 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Configure Band
C Default: C
All, Odd, Even Default: /
17.3.10 Specifications of the D40

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Table 17-30 lists the optical specifications of the D40. Table 17-30 Optical specifications of the D40 Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit GHz dB dB
Value 100 6.5 < -40

1616
Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Polarization dependent loss Temperature characteristics Maximum channel insertion loss difference -1 dB bandwidth -20 dB bandwidth
Unit nm dB dB dB nm/C dB nm nm
Value 1529-1561 > 25 > 25 0.5 < 0.002 3 0.2 < 1.4
l Dimensions of front panel: TN11D40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) TN12D40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN11D40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.) TN12D40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11D40 TN12D40
17.4 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA

The available functional version of the D40V board is TN11.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1617

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 D40V OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
Type
Unit TN11D40V Type 01 02 Description Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
17.4.2 Application
As a type of optical demultiplexing unit, the D40V demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels of signals that comply with the related ITU-T Recommendations and adjusts the output optical power of each channel. For the position of the D40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-13. Figure 17-13 Position of the D40V board in the WDM system
OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 D40V 40 OA OA M40 40 OA OA D40V 40 1 1 OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU

The D40V board is mainly used to demultiplex signals, to monitor performance of optical signals, to monitor alarms and performance events, and to adjust optical power. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-31.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1618
Table 17-31 Functions and features of the D40V board Function and Feature Basic function Description Demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels of signals and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels. Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Adjusts the optical power of each channel of signals after demultiplexing. Not supported

The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1619
Figure 17-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board
Optical module Demultiplexer
VOA VOA
Splitter
IN MON PIN
VOA
D01 D02 D40
Temperature VOA control control
SCC
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the D01-D40 optical interfaces after the optical power adjustment by VOA.
Module Function
l Optical module Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals. Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals after demultiplexing. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Detection and temperature control module Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature. Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

17.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on front panel of the D40V board.

Figure 17-15 shows front panel of the D40V board. Figure 17-15 Front panel of the D40V board
D40V
STAT ACT PROG SRV
D01 196.00 D02 195.90 D03 195.80 D04 195.70 D05 195.60 D06 195.50 D07 195.40 D08 195.30 D09 195.20 D10 195.10 D11 195.00 D12 194.90 D13 194.80 D14 194.70 D15 194.60 D16 194.50 D17 194.40 D18 194.30 D19 194.20 D20 194.10 D21 194.00 D22 193.90 D23 193.80 D24 193.70 D25 193.60 D26 193.50 D27 193.40 D28 193.30 D29 193.20 D30 193.10 D31 193.00 D32 192.90 D33 192.80 D34 192.70 D35 192.60 D36 192.50 D37 192.40 D38 192.30 D39 192.20 D40 192.10
MON IN D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26
D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
D40V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1621
NOTE
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on front panel of the D40V board. Table 17-32 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the D40V board Interface IN D01-D40 MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives signals to be demultiplexed when connected to an optical amplifier or ITL. Transmits demultiplexed signals when connected to the "IN" interface of the OTUs. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum, when connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board. The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 output interfaces on front panel of the D40V board. Table 17-33 and Table 17-34 show the mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40V board. Table 17-33 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN) Interface D01 D02
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33
Interface D21 D22
Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90
Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12

1622
Interface D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
Frequency (THz) 195.80 195.70 195.60 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53
Interface D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
Frequency (THz) 193.80 193.70 193.60 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61
Table 17-34 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD) Interface D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 Interface D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1623
Interface D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
Frequency (THz) 195.35 195.25 195.15 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15
Wavelengt h (nm) 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13
Interface D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40
Frequency (THz) 193.35 193.25 193.15 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15
Wavelengt h (nm) 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
Laser Hazard Level

17.4.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one D40V board. Table 17-35 shows the valid slots for the D40V board. Table 17-35 Valid slots for the D40V board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU25, and IU29IU34 IU1-IU15
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1624
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the D40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the D40V board, the slot number of the D40 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
17.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V

The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-36. Table 17-36 Characteristic code for the D40V board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.
Second character
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-37. Table 17-37 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40V board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN D01-D40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM 1 2-41
1625
Interface on the Panel MON
Interface on the NM 42

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For D40V parameters, refer to Table 17-38. Table 17-38 D40V parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1626
Field Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Value -
Description The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Sets the working band type of a board.
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
17.4.10 Specifications of the D40V

Table 17-39 lists the optical specifications of the D40V board. Table 17-39 Optical specifications of the D40V board Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Attenuation range Loss accuracy Unit GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB dB Value 100 8a < -40 1529-1561 > 25 > 30 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB) Polarization dependent loss Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB dB 0.5 3a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1627
Item
Unit
Value
NOTE a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Power Consumption
D40V
17.5 DFIU
DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board

The available functional version of the DFIU board is TN21.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN21 DFIU OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 Y
17.5.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the DFIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes the signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel. For the position of the DFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-16.
Figure 17-16 Position of the DFIU board in the WDM system
OA DFIU SC2 DFIU
OA
NOTE
The DFIU board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DFIU boards actually refer to one physical board.

The DFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-40. Table 17-40 Functions and features of the DFIU board Function and Feature Basic function Optical-layer ASON Description Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals in two directions transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. Supported

The DFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1629
Figure 17-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board
Optical module
ERC ERM ETC ETM WRC WRM WTC WTM
Multiplexer
EOUT
Demultiplexer
EIN
Multiplexer
WOUT
Demultiplexer
WN
Backplane DC power supply from a backplane SCC
Signal Flow
l The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the WRC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the WRM optical interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the WOUT optical interface. The WIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the WTC and WTM optical interfaces The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the ERC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the ERM optical interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the EOUT optical interface. The EIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the ETC and ETM optical interfaces
Module Function
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical module
Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory channel signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
17.5.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board.

Figure 17-18 shows the front panel of the DFIU board. Figure 17-18 Front panel of the DFIU board
ETM ERM ETC ERC EIN EOUT WTMWRM WTC WRC WIN WOUT
DFIU
Interfaces
There are twelve optical interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board. Table 17-41 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 17-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DFIU board Interface WIN WOUT WTC WRC WTM WRM EIN EOUT ETC ERC ETM ERM Type LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the west line signal. Transmits the west line signal. Transmits the west main path signal. Receives the west main path signal. Transmits the west optical supervisory channel signal. Receives the west optical supervisory channel signal. Receives the east line signal. Transmits the east line signal. Transmits the east main path signal. Receives the east main path signal. Transmits the east optical supervisory channel signal. Receives the east optical supervisory channel signal.
Laser Hazard Level

17.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DFIU board. Table 17-42 shows the valid slots for the DFIU board. Table 17-42 Valid slots for DFIU board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1, IU8, IU11
17.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU

The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-43.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1632
Table 17-43 Characteristic code for the DFIU board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-44. Table 17-44 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DFIU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel WIN/WOUT WRM/WTM WRC/WTC EIN/EOUT ERM/ETM ERC/ETC Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For DFIU parameters, refer to Table 17-45.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1633
Table 17-45 DFIU parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Configure Band Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
C Default: C
Sets and queries the optical interface name. Sets the working band type of a board.
Actual Band Channel Number Mode
C80 Mode, C40 Mode, CWDM Mode Default: C80 Mode
Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the DFIU board.
Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km)) Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km))
All, Odd, Even Default: / 0-1 Default: 0.05 -15 - 30 Default: 0
Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber.
17.5.10 Specifications of the DFIU

Table 17-46 Optical specifications of the DFIU board Interface Item Operating wavelength range Unit nm Value 1529-1561
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1634
Interface -
Item Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel Optical return loss Insertion loss
Unit nm
Value 1500-1520
EIN-ETM ERM-EOUT WIN-WTM WRM-WOUT EIN-ETC ERC-EOUT WIN-WTC WRC-WOUT EIN-ETM WIN-WTM EIN-ETC WIN-WTC
dB dB
> 40 1.5
Insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
> 40
Isolation
dB
> 12
Polarization dependent loss
dB
< 0.2
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN21DFIU
17.6 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit

The available functional versions of the FIU board are TN11, TN12, TN13, and TN21.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 FIU TN12 FIU TN13 FIU TN21 FIU OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y Y N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y Y N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y Y N OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y Y N OptiX OSN 3800 N N Ya Y
a: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01.

l Function: The TN13FIU02 board supports high power input and works with the HBA board. The other versions of the FIU board do not support high power input. For details, see 17.6.2 Application. The TN11FIU and TN12FIU boards support reporting of input optical power, but the TN13FIU and TN21FIU boards do not. For details, see 17.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. l Appearance: The TN11 and TN12 versions use the same front panel. The TN13 version uses a different front panel from the preceding versions. The TN21 version uses a different front panel from the preceding versions and is applicable to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 17.6.5 Front Panel and 17.6.10 Specifications of the FIU.
Original Board TN11FIU Substitute Board TN12FIU Substitution Rules l Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1636
Original Board TN12FIU
Substitute Board TN13FIU
Substitution Rules l When the ASON function is not required. upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. l When the ASON function is required, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C03 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version.
TN13FIU TN21FIU
None None
17.6.2 Application
As an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel. For the position of the FIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-19 and Figure 17-20. Figure 17-19 Position of the FIU board in the WDM system (normal optical power)
OTU OTU MUX OA FIU FIU OA DMUX OTU OTU
SC1 OTU OTU
SC1 OTU OTU
DMUX
OA
OA
MUX
Figure 17-20 Position of the TN13FIU02 board in the WDM system (high optical power)
OTU OTU MUX HBA FIU FIU HBA DMUX OTU OTU
SC1 OTU OTU
SC1 OTU OTU
DMUX
HBA
HBA
MUX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1637

The FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals, and monitors performance of optical signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-47. Table 17-47 Functions and features of the FIU Function and Feature Basic function Online optical performance monitoring Optical-layer ASON Description Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Supported by the TN12FIU, TN13FIU and TN21FIU.

The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board and the TN12FIU board. Figure 17-22 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1638
Figure 17-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board and the TN12FIU board
Optical module
RC RM
Splitter
OUT MON
Multiplexer
TC TM
Demultiplexer PIN Optical power detection module
IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1639
Figure 17-22 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU board
Optical module
RC RM
Splitter
OUT MON
Multiplexer
TC TM
Demultiplexer
IN
Signal Flow
l The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the RC optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the RM optical interface into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the multiplexed signals through the OUT optical interface. The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the TC and TM optical interfaces
Module Function
l Optical module Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals. The splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and sends the signals to the MON interface for detection. l Optical power detection module Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.
NOTE
Only the TN11FIU and TN12FIU support the input optical power detection.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

17.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the FIU board.

Figure 17-23 shows the front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIUboard. Figure 17-24 and Figure 17-25 show the front panel of the TN13FIU board. Figure 17-26 shows the front panel of the TN21FIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1641
Figure 17-23 Front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU board
FIU
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
MON OUT IN TC RC TM RM
FIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1642
Figure 17-24 Front panel of the TN13FIU01 board
FIU
STAT
CAUTION
MON OUT IN TC RC TM RM
FIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1643
Figure 17-25 Front panel of the TN13FIU02 board
FIU
STAT
CAUTION
MON TM RM IN TC
RC OUT
FIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1644
Figure 17-26 Front panel of the TN21FIU board
TM RM TC RC IN OUT MON
FIU
Indicators
The TN11FIU board has four indicators on the front panel. l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) The TN12FIU board has four indicators on the front panel.
The TN13FIU board has one indicator on the front panel. The TN21FIU board has no indicator on the front panel. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU board. Table 17-48 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-48 Types and functions of the interfaces on the FIU board Interface IN OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Type LC LCa
Function Receives the line signal. Transmits the line signal.

1645
Interface TC RC TM RM MON
Type LC LCa LC LC LC
Function Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Transmits the 1510 nm optical supervisory channel signal. Receives the 1510 nm optical supervisory channel signal. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum when it is connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 10 dB).
a: the interface type of the "RC" and "OUT" of the TN13FIU02 are "LSH/APC".
Laser Hazard Level

NOTE
TN13FIU02: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
17.6.6 Valid Slots

One slots house one FIU board. Table 17-49 shows the valid slots for the TN11FIU board. Table 17-49 Valid slots for the TN11FIU board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17
Table 17-50 shows the valid slots for the TN12FIU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1646
Table 17-50 Valid slots for the TN12FIU board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17
Table 17-51 shows the valid slots for the TN13FIU board. Table 17-51 Valid slots for the TN13FIU board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2IU5, IU11
Table 17-52 shows the valid slots for the TN21FIU board. Table 17-52 Valid slots for the TN21FIU board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1, IU8, IU11
17.6.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU

The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the band adopted by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-53.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1647
Table 17-53 Characteristic code for the FIU board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-54. Table 17-54 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT RM/TM RC/TC MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For FIU parameters, refer to Table 17-55. Table 17-55 FIU parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value -
1648
Field Optical Interface Name Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
Value -
Description Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
NOTE This parameter is supported only by TN11FIU and TN12FIU .
See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Configure Band C Default: C Actual Band Channel Number Mode C80 Mode, C40 Mode, CWDM Mode Default: C80 Mode Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km)) Fiber Type All, Odd, Even Default: / 0-1 Default: 0.05 G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber Default: G652 Fiber Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km)) -15 - 30 Default: 0 This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Specifies the type of a fiber. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the FIU board. Sets the working band type of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1649
Field Send DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm) Receive DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm)
Value 0.0 - 6553.5 Default: 0
Description Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the transmit end.
0.0 - 6553.5 Default: 0
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the receive end.
17.6.10 Specifications of the FIU

Table 17-56 Optical specifications of the FIU board Interface Item Operating wavelength range Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel Optical return loss Insertion loss Unit nm nm Value 1529-1561 1500-1520
IN-TM RM-OUT IN-TC RC-OUT IN-TM IN-TC -
dB dB
> 40 1.5
Insertion loss
dB
1 > 40 > 12 < 0.2
Isolation Isolation Polarization dependent loss
dB dB dB
TN11/TN12/TN13FIU: l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Weight: 2.2 lb. (1.0 kg)
TN21FIU: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220.0 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11/TN12FIU TN13/TN21FIU
17.7 ITL
ITL: interleaver board

The available functional versions of the ITL board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 ITL TN12 ITL OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 N N
Type
Unit TN11ITL Type 01 Description The optical module of the ITL01 board consists of one interleaver and one coupler. The interleaver is used for demultiplexing, and the coupler is used for multiplexing.
1651
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit
Type 04
Description The optical module of the ITL04 board consists of two interleavers. The interleaver is used for both demultiplexing and multiplexing.

l Function: The optical module on the TN11ITL04 board consists of two interleavers which are used to multiplex/demultiplex optical signals. This board is mainly used in a system in which the rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s. The optical module on the ITL board of other versions consists of an interleaver and a coupler. The interleaver is used to demultiplex optical signals, and the coupler is used to multiplex optical signals. For details, see 17.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. The TN12ITL board supports the VOA modea, but the ITL board of other versions does not. For details, see 17.6.9 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS. l Appearance: The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 17.7.5 Front Panel. l Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 17.7.10 Specifications of the ITL.
Original Board TN11ITL Substitute Board TN12ITL Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version or update the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or later version. The TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board only in one application scenario: multiplexing/demultiplexing between the signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz.
TN12ITL
TN11ITL
17.7.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the ITL board implements multiplexing/demultiplexing between the optical signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. The TN11ITL04 board is mainly used in systems where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s. For the position of the ITL board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-27.
Figure 17-27 Position of the ITL board in the WDM system

OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU 1 M40 40 1 M40 40 1 D40 40 1 D40 40 C_ODD OA C_EVEN ITL C_EVEN OA OA C_EVEN D40 40 1 M40 40 1 M40 40 C_ODD C_ODD 1 D40 40 1 OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU
WMU
ITL
WMU
OA
C_ODD
C_EVEN
NOTE
The WMU board must be used when the 10G OTU with fixed wavelengths is used in the system. In other cases, the WMU board is optional.

The ITL board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals, and to detect online optical spectrum. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-57. Table 17-57 Functions and features of the ITL board Function and Feature Basic function Detection and monitoring of the online spectrum Optical-layer ASON Description Multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals between C_ODD signals and C_EVEN signals. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Supported by TN11ITL.

The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-28 and Figure 17-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ITL board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1653
Figure 17-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL01/TN12ITL board
Optical module
TO TE RO RE
Interleaver Coupler Splitter
IN OUT MON
SCC
Figure 17-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL04 board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1654
Signal Flow
TN11ITL01: l The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.
TN11ITL04: l The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. The interleaver multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.
TN12ITL: l The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the interleaver. Then according to the requirement, get the signals all passed through the TE interface or split the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Performs the transformation between C band optical signals in 100 GHz spacing and C band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
17.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ITL board.

Figure 17-30 and Figure 17-31 show the front panel of the ITL board. Figure 17-30 Front panel of the TN11ITL board
ITL
STAT
CAUTION
MON OUT IN TO RO TE RE
ITL
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1656
Figure 17-31 Front panel of the TN12ITL board
ITL
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
MON OUT IN TO RO TE RE
ITL
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of TN11ITL board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
There are four indicators on the front panel of TN12ITL board. l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1657
Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the ITL board. Table 17-58 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-58 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ITL board Interface IN OUT TE RE TO RO MON Type LC LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals). Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals). Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals). Connects to the input port on the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board so that the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service. The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (90/10) = 10 dB.
Laser Hazard Level

17.7.6 Valid Slots

One slots house one ITL board. Table 17-59 shows the valid slots for the ITL board. Table 17-59 Valid slots for the ITL board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1658
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Valid Slots TN11ITL: IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 TN12ITL: IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36
IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17
17.7.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL

The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-60. Table 17-60 Characteristic code for the ITL board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band.
For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-61. Table 17-61 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT RE/TE RO/TO MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1659

NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For ITL parameters, refer to Table 17-62. Table 17-62 ITL parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Board Mode Value ITL Mode, VOA Mode Default: ITL Mode Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Sets the working mode of a board. l ITL Mode: Split the multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface into two channels of signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces respectively. l VOA Mode: The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface all passed through the TE interface.
NOTE VOA Mode can be configured only when the services are less than 40 channels. NOTE Only for TN12ITL.
Configure Band
C Default: C
17.7.10 Specifications of the ITL

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1660
Table 17-63 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01 Item Input channel spacinga Output channel spacinga Insertion loss RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Isolation IN-TE IN-TO Maximum reflectance Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range dB dB ps dB dBm -40 > 45 < 0.5 < 0.5 26 dB dB <1 > 25 dB < 2.5 Unit GHz GHz dB Value 100 50 < 4.5
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.
Table 17-64 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04 Item Input channel spacinga Output channel spacinga Insertion loss RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Isolation IN-TE IN-TO Maximum reflectance dB -40 dB dB <1 > 25 dB <3 Unit GHz GHz dB Value 100 50 <3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1661
Item Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range -
Unit dB ps dB dBm
Value > 45 < 0.5 < 0.5 26
Table 17-65 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL Item Input channel spacinga Output channel spacinga Insertion loss RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Isolation IN-TE IN-TO Maximum reflectance Directivity PMD Polarization dependent loss Input optical power range dB dB ps dB dBm -40 > 45 < 0.5 < 0.5 23 dB dB <1 > 22 dB < 3.5 Unit GHz GHz dB Value 100 50 < 4.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1662
Power Consumption
Board The typical power consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 0.2 10.0 The maximum power consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 0.3 11.5
TN11ITL TN12ITL
17.8 SFIU
SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing

Only one functional version of the SFIU board is available, that is, TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 SFIU OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
17.8.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the SFIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel (OSC). For the position of the SFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-32. Figure 17-32 Position of the SFIU board in the WDM system
OA
SYS1
LINE1
LINE1
SYS1
SYS1
LINE1
LINE1
SYS1
OA
OSC2
OA
OSC2 OSC1
SCC
ST2
OSC1 SYS2
S F I U
LINE2 LINE2
S F I U
OSC2 OSC1
ST2
SCC
SYS2
S F I U
LINE2 LINE2
S F I U
OSC2
ST2
OSC1 SYS2
SCC
OA
OA
SYS2
OA
NE1
NE2
NE3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1663
NOTE
Of all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board. A Raman board cannot be configured between two NEs that are interconnected through SFIU boards.

The SFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 17-66. Table 17-66 Functions and features of the SFIU Function and Feature Basic function Optical-layer ASON Description Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. Not supported

The SFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 17-33 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11SFIU board. Figure 17-33 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11SFIU board
SYS1 OSC1 OSC2 SYS2 Optical module
LINE1
LINE2
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC) DC power supply from a backplane SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1664
Signal Flow
The LINE1 optical interface receives or transmits the OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path. However, it cannot receive the OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path and transmit OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path at the same time. The SYS1, SYS2, and LINE2 optical interface receive or transmit the signals of the main optical path. However, each port cannot receive the signals of the main optical path and transmit the signals of the main optical path at the same time. The OSC1 and OSC2 optical interfaces can receive or transmit the OSC signals. One optical interface, however, cannot receive the OSC signals and transmit OSC signals at the same time. That is, if the OSC1 or OSC2 optical interface is used to receive the OSC signals, the other optical interface must be used to transmit OSC signals. The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU when the OSC1 optical interface receives the OSC signals and the OSC2 optical interface transmits OSC signals. l l The OSC signals received through the OSC1 optical interface is output through the LINE1 optical interface. The OSC signals received through the LINE1 optical interface are output through the OSC2 optical interface. And the signals of the main optical path received through the LINE1 optical interface are output through the SYS1 optical interface. The signals in the main optical path received through the SYS2 optical interface are output through the LINE2 optical interface.
The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU when the OSC2 optical interface receives the OSC signals and the OSC1 optical interface transmits OSC signals. l l The OSC signals received through the LINE1 optical interface are output through the OSC1 optical interface. The optical module multiplexes the signals of the main optical path received through the SYS1 optical interface and the OSC signals received through the OSC2 optical interface into one channel of optical signals. Then, the one channel of optical signals is output through the LINE1 optical interface. The signals in the main optical path received through the LINE2 optical interface are output through the SYS2 optical interface.
Module Function
l l Optical module Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals. Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

17.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the SFIU board.

Figure 17-34 shows the front panel of the TN11SFIU board. Figure 17-34 Front panel of the TN11SFIU board
SFIU
STAT
CAUTION
HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE LASERRADIATION DO NOTVIEW DIRECTLY WITH NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
LINE1 LINE2 SYS1 SYS2 OSC1 OSC2
SFIU
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the SFIU board. Table 17-67 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 17-67 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SFIU board Interface LINE1 Type LC Function The LINE1 optical interface is located on the line side. It sends and receives OSC signals in addition to transmitting main optical path signals. The LINE2 optical interface is located on the line side. It transmits the signals of the main optical path. The SYS1 optical interface transmits the signals in the main optical path. The SYS2 optical interface transmits the signals in the main optical path. The OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC signals. The OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC signals.
LINE2
LC
SYS1 SYS2 OSC1 OSC2
LC LC LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

17.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SFIU board. Table 17-68 shows the valid slots for the SFIU board. Table 17-68 Valid slots for the SFIU board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU1, IU8, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1667
17.8.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU

The characteristic code for the SFIU board consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 17-69. Table 17-69 Characteristic code for the SFIU board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 17-70. Table 17-70 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFIU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel LINE1/LINE2 OSC1/OSC2 SYS1/SYS2 Interface on the NM 1 2 3
NOTE
17.8.9 SFIU Parameters

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For SFIU parameters, refer to Table 17-71.
Table 17-71 SFIU parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the working band type of a board.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Channel Number Mode
Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the board.
Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT(km)) Fiber Type
All, Odd, Even Default: All 0-1 Default: 0.05 G651 Fiber, G652 Fiber, G655 Fiber Default: /
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Sets the fiber type of the board.
Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km)) Send DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm)

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
-15 - 30 Default: 0
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of the transmitting direction.
1669
Field Receiving DCM Dispersion Compensation Value(ps/nm)
Value -
Description Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of the receiving direction.
17.8.10 Specifications of the SFIU

Table 17-72 Optical specifications of the SFIU board Interface LINE1SYS1 LINE2SYS2 LINE1OSC1 LINE1OSC2 LINE1OSC1 @c LINE1OSC2 @c OSC1SYS1 SYS1OSC1 OSC1OSC2 OSC2OSC1 Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Operating wavelength range (C band) Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel Insertion loss
Uni t nm nm dB
Value 1528-1561 1480 to 1520 1.0
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
Isolation Isolation Directivity
dB dB dB
65 40 45
Directivity
dB
55
Optical return loss

dB
> 40
1670
Interface -
Item Polarization dependent loss C band OSC channel
Uni t dB dB
Value < 0.1 < 0.15
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F)(W) 0.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F)(W) 0.3
TN11SFIU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1671
18 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
18
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
About This Chapter

18.1 CMR1 CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.2 CMR2 CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.3 CMR4 CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.4 DMR1 DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board 18.5 MR2 MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.6 MR4 MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.7 MR8 MR8: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit 18.8 MR8V MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA 18.9 SBM2 SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1672
18.1 CMR1
CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

The available functional version of the CMR1 board is TN21.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN21 CMR 1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 Y
18.1.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals. For the position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-1. Figure 18-1 Position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system
Client side OTU Client side OTU
CMR1
CMR1

The CMR1 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-1.
Table 18-1 Functions and features of the CMR1 Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascade interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the CWDM specification. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported

The CMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board. Figure 18-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board
D MO MI A
IN
Drop optical module OADM optical module Control Memory CPU
Add optical module
OUT
Communication
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1674
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates one wavelength from the signals and this wavelength is transmitted to the OTU board or integrated client-side equipment through the D interface. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with one wavelength added through the A interface by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
18.1.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board.

Figure 18-3 shows the front panel of the CMR1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1675
Figure 18-3 Front panel of the CMR1 board
IN D MO MI A OUT
CMR1
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board. Table 18-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR1 board Interface A D IN OUT MI MO Type LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
Laser Hazard Level

18.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses on CMR1 board. Table 18-3 shows the valid slots for the CMR1 board. Table 18-3 Valid slots for CMR1 board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1, IU8, and IU11
18.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1

The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that carries the signals processed by the board. Table 18-4 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1. Table 18-4 Characteristic code for the CMR1 Code First four digits Meaning Wavelength that carries optical signals Description Indicates the wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength that carries the signals is 1471 nm.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-5. Table 18-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A/D MI/MO IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1 2 3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1677

NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CMR1 parameters, refer to Table 18-6. Table 18-6 CMR1 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type. Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.
11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default:/ CWDM Default: CWDM
18.1.10 Specifications of the CMR1

Table 18-7 lists the optical specifications of the CMR1 board. Table 18-7 Optical specifications of the CMR1 board Correspondi ng interfaces IN-D Item Operating wavelength range Drop channel insertion loss Isolation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit nm dB dB
Value 1260-1360 1 > 40

1678
Correspondi ng interfaces A-OUT IN-MO MI-OUT -
Item Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Reflectance
Unit dB dB dB dB
Value 1 0.8 25 < -40
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The CMR1 adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
Power Consumption
TN21CMR1
18.2 CMR2

The available functional versions of the CMR2 board are TN11 and TN21.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1679
Boar d TN11 CMR 2 TN21 CMR 2
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 Y

l Appearance: The TN11 and TN21 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 18.2.5 Front Panel and 18.2.10 Specifications of the CMR2. l Specification: The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.2.10 Specifications of the CMR2.
The CMR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.2.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. For the position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-4. Figure 18-4 Position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system
Client side OTU OTU Client side OTU OTU
CMR2
CMR2

The CMR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-8.
Table 18-8 Functions and features of the CMR2 board Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascading interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the CWDM specifications. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported

The CMR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2 board. Figure 18-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2 board
D1 D2 MO MI A1 A2
IN
Add optical module
OUT
Communication
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1681
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
18.2.5 Front Panel

There are one indicator and eight interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board.

Figure 18-6 shows the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. Figure 18-7 shows the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1682
Figure 18-6 Front panel of the TN11CMR2 board
CMR2
STAT
CAUTION
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2
CMR2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1683
IN D1 D2 MO MI A2 A1 OUT
CMR2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board. Table 18-9 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR2 board Interface A1-A2 D1-D2 IN OUT MI Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1684
Interface MO
Type LC
Function Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
Laser Hazard Level

18.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one CMR2 board. Table 18-10 shows the valid slots for the TN11CMR2 board. Table 18-11 shows the valid slots for the TN21CMR2 board. Table 18-10 Slots for the TN11CMR2 Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5
Table 18-11 Slots for the TN21CMR2 Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slots IU1, IU8, and IU11

The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-12.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1685
Table 18-12 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board Code First four digits Meaning First wavelength that carries optical signals Second wavelength that carries optical signals Description Indicates the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
Last four digits
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571. l l "1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-13. Table 18-13 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 MI/MO IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CMR2 parameters, refer to Table 18-14.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1686
Table 18-14 CMR2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type. Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.
11/1471.00/208.170 to 18/1611.00/188.780 Default: / CWDM Default: CWDM

Table 18-15 lists the optical specifications of the CMR2 board. Table 18-15 Optical specifications of the CMR2 board Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 0.5 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit nm nm nm dB dB dB
Value 1271-1611 20 6.5 1.5 > 25 > 35
1687
Correspondin g interfaces A1-OUT A2-OUT
Item 0.5 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance
Unit nm dB dB dB dB
Value 6.5 1.5 1.0 13 -40
IN-MO MI-OUT -
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to corresponding third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.

The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows. l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR2 are as follows. l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
CMR2
18.3 CMR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1688

The available functional versions of the CMR4 board are TN11 and TN21.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 CMR 4 TN21 CMR 4 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y

l Appearance: The TN11 and TN21 versions have different front panels that have different dimensions. See 18.3.5 Front Panel and 18.3.10 Specifications of the CMR4. l Specification: The mechanical specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 18.3.10 Specifications of the CMR4.
The CMR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.3.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. For the position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-8. Figure 18-8 Position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system
Client side OTU 4 OTU Client side OTU 4 OTU
CMR4
CMR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1689

The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes signals, queries wavelengths, and provides a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-16. Table 18-16 Functions and features of the CMR4 board Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascading interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/Drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the CWDM specifications. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported

The CMR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1690
Figure 18-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4 board
D1 D4 MO MI A1 A4
IN
Add optical module
OUT
Communication
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
18.3.5 Front Panel

There are one indicator and 12 interfaces on the front panel of CMR4 board.

Figure 18-10 show the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. Figure 18-11 show the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board. Figure 18-10 Front panel of the TN11CMR4 board
CMR4
STAT
CAUTION
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4
CMR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1692
IN D1 D2 D3 D4 MO MI A4 A3 A2 A1 OUT
CMR4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR4 board. Table 18-17 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-17 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR4 board Interface A1-A4 D1-D4 IN OUT MI Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1693
Interface MO
Type LC
Laser Hazard Level

18.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one CMR4 board. Table 18-18 shows the valid slots for the TN11CMR4 board. Table 18-19 shows the valid slots for the TN21CMR4 board. Table 18-18 Slots for the TN11CMR4 Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5
Table 18-19 Slots for the TN21CMR4 Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slots IU1, IU8, and IU11

The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-20.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1694
Table 18-20 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board Code First and second digits Meaning First wavelength that carries optical signals Description Indicates the middle two digits of the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the middle two digits of the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the middle two digits of the third wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
Third and fourth digits
Second wavelength that carries optical signals
Fifth and sixth digits
Third wavelength that carries optical signals
Seventh and eighth digits
Fourth wavelength that carries optical signals
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961. l l l l "47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm. "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm. "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-21. Table 18-21 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM 1 2 3
1695
Interface on the Panel A4/D4 MI/MO IN/OUT
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CMR4 parameters, refer to Table 18-22. Table 18-22 CMR4 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type. Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.

Table 18-23 lists the optical specifications of the CMR4 board.
Table 18-23 Optical specifications of the CMR4 board Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 0.5 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT IN-MO MI-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance Unit nm nm nm dB dB dB nm dB Value 1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded) 20 6.5 2 > 25 > 35 6.5 2
dB dB dB
1.5 13 -40
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to corresponding third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are four wavelength groups. Table 18-24 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board Group Wavelength (nm) A1/D1 1 2 3 4 1291 1391 1471 1511 A2/D2 1311 1411 1491 1531 A3/D3 1331 1431 1591 1551 A4/D4 1351 1451 1611 1571
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1697
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR4 board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR4 board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
CMR4
18.4 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board

The available functional versions of the DMR1 board are TN11 and TN21.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 DMR 1 TN21 DMR 1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1698

l Appearance: The TN11 and TN21 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 18.4.5 Front Panel and 18.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1. l Specification: The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1.
The DMR1 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.4.2 Application
The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions. For the position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-12. Figure 18-12 Position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system
1310nm WD WIN
OTU
OTU
1310nm EA
D M R 1
WMO
O A D M
O A D M
WOUT
D M R EMO 1
ED
EMI
EOUT
WMI WA
EIN
1310nm
1310nm
NOTE
The DMR1 board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DMR1 boards are actually one physical board. In the figure, the OADM boards are actually the CMR2 or CMR4 boards. The OADM board in the figure supports wavelengths ranging from 1471 nm to 1611 nm.

The DMR1 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to concatenate ports, and to query wavelengths. Table 18-25 provides the detailed features and functions of the DMR1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1699
Table 18-25 Functions and features of the DMR1 board Functions and Features Basic functions WDM specification Port concatenation Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions. Supports the CWDM specifications. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported

The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board. Figure 18-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board
WD ED WMO EMO EMI WMI EA WA
WIN EIN
Drop optical module
Add optical module
EOUT WOUT
OADM optical module Control Memory CPU Communication
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1700
Signal Flow
WIN receives signals from the west main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. EIN receives signals from the east main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through EMO. Local 1310 nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT. Similarly, Local 1310 nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through WMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to west main path by WOUT.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Performs the add/drop multiplexing of 1310nm signals and other signals. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
18.4.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.

Figure 18-14 shows the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. Figure 18-15 shows the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1701
Figure 18-14 Front panel of the TN11DMR1 board
DMR1
STAT
CAUTION
WOUT WIN EOUT EIN WMO WMI EMO EMI WD WA ED EA
DMR1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1702
Figure 18-15 Front panel of the TN21DMR1 board
WIN WD WMO WMI WA WOUT EIN ED EMO EMI EA EOUT
DMR1
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the DMR1 board. Table 18-26 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DMR1 board Interface EA/WA ED/WD EIN/WIN EOUT/WOUT EMI/WMI Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the 1310 nm optical signals that west and east client-side equipment transmits. Transmits 1310 nm optical signals to west and east client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main paths. Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main paths. Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It connects to the output interfaces on other boards.
1703
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface EMO/WMO
Type LC
Function Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It connects to the input interfaces on other boards.
Laser Hazard Level

18.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DMR1 board. Table 18-27 shows the valid slots for the TN11DMR1 board. Table 18-28 shows the valid slots for the TN21DMR1 board. Table 18-27 Slots for the TN11DMR1 Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5
Table 18-28 Slots for the TN21DMR1 Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slots IU1, IU8, and IU11
18.4.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1

The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. Table 18-29 provides the details on the characteristics code.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1704
Table 18-29 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board Barcode First to fourth digits Meaning Optical signal frequency Description Frequency of the optical signals processed by the board
For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.

Interface Display
Table 18-30 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board. Table 18-30 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board Interface on Front Panel WA/WD EA/ED WMI/WMO WIN/WOUT EMI/EMO EIN/EOUT Number on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DMR1, refer to Table 18-31. Table 18-31 DMR1 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value -

1705
Field Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type
Value -
Description Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Queries the band type. Used to configure the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Used to configure the band type.
C+L Default: C+L
18.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1

Table 18-32 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board Correspondin g interfaces EA/ED/WA/ WD EIN-ED WIN-WD Item Operating wavelength range Drop channel insertion loss Isolation EA-EOUT WA-WOUT EIN-EMO WIN-WMO EMI-EOUT WMI-WOUT Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 1260-1360 1 > 40 1 0.8 25 0.8 15 -40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1706

The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west directions from the multiplexed signals.
Mechanical specifications of the TN11DMR1 board: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.7 kg (1.5 lb.)
Mechanical specifications of the TN21DMR1 board: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
DMR1
18.5 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

The available functional versions of the MR2 board are TN11 and TN21.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 MR2 TN21 MR2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y N OptiX OSN 6800 Y N OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1707

l Appearance: The TN11 and TN21 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 18.5.5 Front Panel and 18.5.10 Specifications of the MR2. l Specification: The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.5.10 Specifications of the MR2.
The MR2 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.5.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. For the position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-16. Figure 18-16 Position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system
OA MR2 OA MR2
OA OA

The MR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-33. Table 18-33 Functions and features of the MR2 board Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the DWDM specifications.
1708
Function and Feature Cascading interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON
Description Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported

The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board. Figure 18-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board
D1 D2 MO MI A1 A2
IN
Add optical module
OUT
Communication
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
18.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR2 board.

Figure 18-18 shows the front panel of the TN11MR2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1710
Figure 18-18 Front panel of the TN11MR2 board
MR2
STAT
CAUTION
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2
MR2
Figure 18-19 shows the front panel of the TN21MR2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1711
IN D1 D2 MO MI A2 A1 OUT
MR2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR2 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21MR2 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR2 board. Table 18-34 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-34 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR2 board Interface A1-A2 D1-D2 IN OUT MO Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1712
Interface MI
Type LC
Function Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.
Laser Hazard Level

18.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one MR2 board. Table 18-35 and Table 18-36 shows the valid slots for the MR2 board. Table 18-35 Valid slots for the TN11MR2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5
Table 18-36 Valid slots for the TN21MR2 board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU1, IU8, and IU11
18.5.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2

The characteristic code for the MR2 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-37.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1713
Table 18-37 Characteristic code for the MR2 board Code First four digits Meaning Description
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal. Frequency of the second optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the second optical signal.
Last four digits
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370. l l "9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz. "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-38. Table 18-38 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 MI/MO IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
NOTE
18.5.9 MR2 Parameters

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For MR2 parameters, refer to Table 18-39.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1714
Table 18-39 MR2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type. Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.
1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 Default: / C Default: C
18.5.10 Specifications of the MR2

Table 18-40 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board. Table 18-40 Optical specifications of the MR2 board Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing -1dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit nm GHz nm dB dB dB
Value 1529-1561 100 0.2 1.5 > 25 > 35
1715
Correspondin g interfaces A1-OUT A2-OUT
Item -1dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Polarization dependence loss Maximum reflectance
Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB
Value 0.2 1.5 1.0 > 13 < 0.2 -40
IN-MO MI-OUT -

The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping wavelengths.
The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21MR2 are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 128.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 5 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 1 in. (W) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
MR2
18.6 MR4

The available functional versions of the MR4 board are TN11 and TN21.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 MR4 TN21 MR4 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y N OptiX OSN 6800 Y N OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y

l Appearance: The TN11 and TN21 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 18.6.5 Front Panel and 18.6.10 Specifications of the MR4. l Specification: The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 18.6.10 Specifications of the MR4.
The MR4 boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
18.6.2 Application
As a type of optical add/drop multiplexing unit, the MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. For the position of the MR4 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-20. Figure 18-20 Position of the MR4 board in the DWDM system
OA MR4 OA MR4
OA OA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1717

The MR4 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-41. Table 18-41 Functions and features of the MR4 board Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascading interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/ from the multiplexed signals. Supports the DWDM specifications. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported

The MR4 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR4 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1718
Figure 18-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR4 board
D1 D4 MO MI A1 A4
IN
Add optical module
OUT
Communication
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals. Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
18.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR4 board.

Figure 18-22 shows the front panel of the TN11MR4 board. Figure 18-22 Front panel of the TN11MR4 board
MR4
STAT
CAUTION
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4
MR4
Figure 18-23 shows the front panels of the TN21MR4 boards respectively.
IN D1 D2 D3 D4 MO MI A4 A3 A2 A1 OUT
MR4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR4 board. There is no indicator on the front panel of the TN21MR4 board. l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - green
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR4 board. Table 18-42 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR4 board Interface A1-A4 D1-D4 IN OUT MI Type LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1721
Interface MO
Type LC
Laser Hazard Level

18.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot house one MR4 board. Table 18-43 and Table 18-44 shows the valid slots for the MR4 board. Table 18-43 Valid slots for the TN11MR4 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-U17 IU2-IU5
Table 18-44 Valid slots for the TN21MR4 board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU1, IU8, and IU11

The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-45.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1722
Table 18-45 Characteristic code for the MR4 board Code First four digits Meaning Frequency of first optical signal Description Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the fourth optical signal processed by the board.
Last four digits
Frequency of forth optical signal
For example, the characteristic code for the MR4 board is 92109240. l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can be inferred that: l l The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-46. Table 18-46 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 MI/MO IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1723

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For MR4 parameters, refer to Table 18-47. Table 18-47 MR4 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type. Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.

Table 18-48 lists the optical specifications of the MR4 board. Table 18-48 Optical specifications of the MR4 board Interface IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing -1dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss
Unit nm GHz nm dB
Value 1529-1561 100 0.2 2.2
1724
Interface
Item Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation
Unit dB dB nm dB
Value > 25 > 35 0.2 2.2
A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT IN-MO MI-OUT -
-1dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance
dB dB dB
1.5 > 13 -40
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths. Table 18-49 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board G ro u p A1/D1 Wa vel en gth No. Wav elen gth (nm) Fre que ncy (TH z) A2/D2 W av el e n gt h N o. 78 70 62 54 46 Wav elen gth (nm ) Fre que ncy (T Hz) A3/D3 W av ele ng th No . Wav elen gth (nm ) Freq uenc y (TH z) A4/D4 W av el en gt h N o. 74 66 58 50 42 Wave lengt h (nm) Frequ ency (THz)
1 2 3 4 5
80 72 64 56 48
1560. 61 1557. 36 1554. 13 1550. 92 1547. 72
192. 10 192. 50 192. 90 193. 30 193. 70
1559 .79 1556 .55 1553 .33 1550 .12 1546 .92
192. 20 192. 60 193. 00 193. 40 193. 80
76 68 60 52 44
1558 .98 1555 .75 1552 .52 1549 .32 1546 .12
192. 30 192. 70 193. 10 193. 50 193. 90
1558.1 7 1554.9 4 1551.7 2 1548.5 1 1545.3 2
192.4 0 192.8 0 193.2 0 193.6 0 194.0 0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1725
G ro u p
A1/D1 Wa vel en gth No. Wav elen gth (nm) Fre que ncy (TH z)
A2/D2 W av el e n gt h N o. 38 30 22 14 6 Wav elen gth (nm ) Fre que ncy (T Hz)
A3/D3 W av ele ng th No . Wav elen gth (nm ) Freq uenc y (TH z)
A4/D4 W av el en gt h N o. 34 26 18 10 2 Wave lengt h (nm) Frequ ency (THz)
6 7 8 9 10
40 32 24 16 8
1544. 53 1541. 35 1538. 19 1535. 04 1531. 90
194. 10 194. 50 194. 90 195. 30 195. 70
1543 .73 1540 .56 1537 .40 1534 .25 1531 .12
194. 20 194. 60 195. 00 195. 40 195. 80
36 28 20 12 4
1542 .94 1539 .77 1536 .61 1533 .47 1530 .33
194. 30 194. 70 195. 10 195. 50 195. 90
1542.1 4 1538.9 8 1535.8 2 1532.6 8 1529.5 5
194.4 0 194.8 0 195.2 0 195.6 0 196.0 0
Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.)
Mechanical specifications of TN21MR4 board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 128.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 5 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 1 in. (W) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
MR4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1726
18.7 MR8

The available functional version of the MR8 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 MR8 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
18.7.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR8 boar adds/drops and multiplex eight channels of signals. For the position of the MR8 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-24. Figure 18-24 Position of the MR8 board in the DWDM system
OA MR8 OA MR8
OA OA

The MR8 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-50.
Table 18-50 Functions and features of the MR8 board Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification Cascading interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON Description Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. Supports the DWDM specifications. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported

The MR8 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-25 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8 board. Figure 18-25 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8 board
D1 D8 MO MI A1 A8
IN
Drop optical module
Add optical module
OUT
OADM optical module Control Memory CPU Communication
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1728
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
18.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8 board.

Figure 18-26 shows the front panel of the MR8 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1729
Figure 18-26 Front panel of the MR8 board
MR8
STAT
CAUTION
D4
MR8
IN OUT MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3
A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 D8 A8
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 20 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR8 board. Table 18-51 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1730
Table 18-51 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8 board Interface A1-A8 D1-D8 IN OUT MI MO Type LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signals. Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.
Laser Hazard Level

18.7.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MR8 board. Table 18-52 shows the valid slots for the MR8 board. Table 18-52 Valid slots for the MR8 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 Slot IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35 IU1-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is IU1.

The characteristic code for the MR8 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-53. Table 18-53 Characteristic code for the MR8 board Code First four digits Meaning Description
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Frequency of the eighth optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board.
Last four digits
For example, the characteristic code for the MR8 board is 92109280. l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l l l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-54. Table 18-54 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 A5/D5 A6/D6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6
1732
Interface on the Panel A7/D7 A8/D8 MI/MO IN/OUT
Interface on the NM 7 8 9 10
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For MR8 parameters, refer to Table 18-55. Table 18-55 MR8 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type. Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.

Table 18-56 lists the optical specifications of the MR8 board.
Table 18-56 Optical specifications of the MR8 board Interface IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 IN-D5 IN-D6 IN-D7 IN-D8 A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT A5-OUT A6-OUT A7-OUT A8-OUT IN-MRO MRI-OUT Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing -1dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation -1dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Unit nm GHz nm dB dB dB Value 1529-1561 100 0.2 4 > 25 > 35
nm dB
0.2 4
Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance
dB dB dB
3.5 > 13 -40

The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths. Table 18-57 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8 Group A1/D1 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) 1 80 1560.61 192.10 2 64 1554.13 192.90 3 48 1547.72 193.70 4 32 1541.35 194.50 5 16 1535.04 195.30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1734
Group A2/D2 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A3/D3 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A4/D4 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A5/D5 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A6/D6 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A7/D7 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A8/D8 Waveleng th No.
1 78 1559.79 192.20 76 1558.98 192.30 74 1558.17 192.40 72 1557.36 192.50 70 1556.55 192.60 68 1555.75 192.70 66
2 62 1553.33 193.00 60 1552.52 193.10 58 1551.72 193.20 56 1550.92 193.30 54 1550.12 193.40 52 1549.32 193.50 50
3 46 1546.92 193.80 44 1546.12 193.90 42 1545.32 194.00 40 1544.53 194.10 38 1543.73 194.20 36 1542.94 194.30 34
4 30 1540.56 194.60 28 1539.77 194.70 26 1538.98 194.80 24 1538.19 194.90 22 1537.40 195.00 20 1536.61 195.10 18
5 14 1534.25 195.40 12 1533.47 195.50 10 1532.68 195.60 8 1531.90 195.70 6 1531.12 195.80 4 1530.33 195.90 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1735
Group Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz)
1 1554.94 192.80
2 1548.51 193.60
3 1542.14 194.40
4 1535.82 195.20
5 1529.55 196.00
Power Consumption
MR8
18.8 MR8V
MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

The available functional version of the MR8V board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 MR8 V OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
18.8.2 Application
The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals, and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel.
For the position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system, see Figure 18-27. Figure 18-27 Position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system
Client side Client side
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OA MR8V OA MR8V
OA OA

The MR8V board is mainly used to add/drop signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-58. Table 18-58 Functions and features of the MR8V board Function and Feature Basic function Description Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel. Supports the DWDM specifications. Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve expansion. Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals. Not supported
WDM specification Cascading interface Wavelength query Optical-layer ASON

The MR8V board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1737
Figure 18-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board
D1 D8 MO MI A1 A2 A8
VOA
VOA
VOA
IN VO VI
V O A
Add optical module
OUT
Communication
Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN or MI interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals. The IN or MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
NOTE
l The OTM station receives the multiplexed signals through the IN interface and transmits the multiplexed signals through the VO interface. l The OADM station receives the multiplexed signals through the MI interface and transmits the multiplexed signals through the VO interface. By default, the VO interface is connected to the IN interface on the VOA. The connection on the VOA can be changed manually.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1738
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals. Adjusts the input optical power of eight channels. Adjusts the input optical power of pass-through wavelengths. Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
18.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8V board.

Figure 18-29 shows the front panel of the MR8V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1739
Figure 18-29 Front panel of the MR8V board
MR8V
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
MR8V
OUT IN MO MI D1 A1 D2 A2 D3 A3
D4 A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 D8 A8 VO VI
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 22 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR8V board. Table 18-59 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1740
Table 18-59 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8V board Interface A1-A8 D1-D8 IN Type LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side when the IN interface is not connected to the VO interface on the same MR8V board. Receives the adjusted multiplexed signal from the VO interface when the IN interface is connected to the VO interface on the same MR8V board by a fiber. OUT MI MO VI VO LC LC LC LC LC Transmits the multiplexed signals. Cascading input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board. Cascading output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board. Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side. Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface.
Laser Hazard Level

18.8.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MR8V board. Table 18-60 shows the valid slots for the MR8V board. Table 18-60 Valid slots for the MR8V board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Slot IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1741

NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is IU1.
18.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V

The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 18-61. Table 18-61 Characteristic code for the MR8V board Code First four digits Meaning Description
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Frequency of the eighth optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board. Indicates that the board adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Last four digits
"V"
Adjustment of the input optical power of each channel
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V. l l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz. "V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l l l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-62.
Table 18-62 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8V board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 A5/D5 A6/D6 A7/D7 A8/D8 MI/MO IN/OUT VI VO Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For MR8V parameters, refer to Table 18-63. Table 18-63 MR8V parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1743
Field Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type
Value 1/1529.16/196.050 to 80/1560.61/192.100 Default: / C Default: C
Description Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.
Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default:Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information.
Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
18.8.10 Specifications of the MR8V

Table 18-64 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1744
Table 18-64 Optical specifications of the MR8V board Correspondin g interfaces IN-D1 IN-D2 IN-D3 IN-D4 IN-D5 IN-D6 IN-D7 IN-D8 A1-OUT A2-OUT A3-OUT A4-OUT A5-OUT A6-OUT A7-OUT A8-OUT VI-VO IN-MRO MRI-OUT Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing 1 dB spectral width Drop channel insertion loss Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation 1 dB spectral width Add channel insertion loss Attenuation range Adjustment accuracy Unit nm GHz nm dB dB dB Value 1529-1561 100 0.2 4 > 25 > 35
nm dB dB dB
0.2 6 0-20 1 (attenuation 10 dB) 1.5 (attenuation 15 dB) 1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)
Insertion loss Isolation Maximum reflectance
dB dB dB
3.5 > 13 -40

The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths. Table 18-65 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V Group A1/D1 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) 1 80 1560.61 2 64 1554.13 3 48 1547.72 4 32 1541.35 5 16 1535.04
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1745
Group Frequenc y (THz) A2/D2 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A3/D3 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A4/D4 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A5/D5 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A6/D6 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz) A7/D7 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz)
1 192.10 78 1559.79 192.20 76 1558.98 192.30 74 1558.17 192.40 72 1557.36 192.50 70 1556.55 192.60 68 1555.75 192.70
2 192.90 62 1553.33 193.00 60 1552.52 193.10 58 1551.72 193.20 56 1550.92 193.30 54 1550.12 193.40 52 1549.32 193.50
3 193.70 46 1546.92 193.80 44 1546.12 193.90 42 1545.32 194.00 40 1544.53 194.10 38 1543.73 194.20 36 1542.94 194.30
4 194.50 30 1540.56 194.60 28 1539.77 194.70 26 1538.98 194.80 24 1538.19 194.90 22 1537.40 195.00 20 1536.61 195.10
5 195.30 14 1534.25 195.40 12 1533.47 195.50 10 1532.68 195.60 8 1531.90 195.70 6 1531.12 195.80 4 1530.33 195.90
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1746
Group A8/D8 Waveleng th No. Waveleng th (nm) Frequenc y (THz)
1 66 1554.94 192.80
2 50 1548.51 193.60
3 34 1542.14 194.40
4 18 1535.82 195.20
5 2 1529.55 196.00
Power Consumption
MR8V
18.9 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board

The available functional versions of the SBM2 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 SBM 2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1747
18.9.2 Application
The SBM2 board adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. For the position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 18-30. Figure 18-30 Position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system
SBM2
SBM2

The SBM2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, and to provide a cascading interface. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 18-66. Table 18-66 Functions and features of the SBM2 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals. The added and dropped optical signals must be of different wavelengths. Supports only the single-fiber dual fed CWDM system. Provides a cascading optical interface to cascade other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards. Not supported
WDM specification Cascading interface Optical-layer ASON

The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 18-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1748
Figure 18-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board
D1 D2 A1 A2
LINE
Add optical module
EXT
Communication
SCC
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module processes the multiplexed signals, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two wavelengths of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment. The board also receives two wavelengths of optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces, couples them to the multiplexed signals and outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface. The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed signals.
Module Function
l OADM optical module Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
18.9.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board.

Figure 18-32 shows the front panel of the SBM2 board. Figure 18-32 Front panel of the SBM2 board
SBM2
STAT
CAUTION
EXT LINE D1 A1 D2 A2
SBM2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1750
Indicators
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board. Table 18-67 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 18-67 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SBM2 board Interface A1/A2 D1/D2 LINE EXT Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment. Receives and transmits multiplexed signals. Cascading interface, transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed signals.
Laser Hazard Level

18.9.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SBM2 board. Table 18-68 shows the valid slots for the SBM2 board. Table 18-68 Valid slots for the SBM2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1751


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 18-69. Table 18-69 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel A1 D1 A2 D2 LINE EXT Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For SBM2 parameters, refer to Table 18-70. Table 18-70 SBM2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Wavelength No./ Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Actual Band Type Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength ( nm ) / Frequency ( THz ) Configure Band Type Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Queries the band type. Sets the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board. Sets the band type.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1752
18.9.9 Specifications of the SBM2

Table 18-71 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2 board. Table 18-71 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board Interface LINE-D1 LINE-D2 A1-LINE A2-LINE Optical return loss Pass-through loss Item Operating wavelength range Drop channel insertion loss Isolation Add channel insertion loss Isolation CWDM Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 1271 to 1611 3 30 3 30 > 40 1.5
Power Consumption
SMB2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1753
19 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
19
Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
About This Chapter

19.1 RDU9 RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band) 19.2 RMU9 RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board 19.3 ROAM ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board 19.4 WSD9 WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board 19.5 WSM9 WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board 19.6 WSMD2 WSMD2: 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 19.7 WSMD4 WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board 19.8 WSMD9 WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1754
19.1 RDU9
RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)

The available functional version of the RDU9 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 RDU 9 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
19.1.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RDU9 board is used with the WSM9 board to implement the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1755
Figure 19-1 Position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system

Client-side O T U O O T T U U O T U Client-side O O T T U U MUX 8 WSM9 OA O T U
DMUX DCM OA 8
DMUX
RDU9
OA
WSM9 8 MUX
RDU9 8 DMUX DMUX
OA DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
O O T T U U Client-side
O T U
Client-side
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.
NOTE
The RDU9 board broadcasts services and the uses the same wavelength for all of its optical ports to drop services. If the RDU9 only needs to receive a single wavelength, it can be directly connected to an OTU board. In most situations, however, the RDU9 needs to receive multiplexed wavelengths and must be connected to a D40 board for wavelength demultiplexing.

The RDU9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-1. Table 19-1 Functions and features of the RDU9 board Function and Feature Basic function WDM specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Broadcasts the signals received from the main optical path in nine directions at the same time. Supports the DWDM specification.
1756
Function and Feature Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical-layer ASON

The RDU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9. Figure 19-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9 board
DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8
Optical demultiplexer module ROA TOA IN Optical module MONI MONO EXPO
Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Backplane (controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1757
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface. The optical signals from the IN optical interface are divided into two channels of signals based on the optical power by the optical splitter. The main path optical signals are output through the EXPO interface and other signals are output through the TOA interface. The RDU9 board can be cascaded to the optical amplifier unit (OAU) through the TOA interface. If no cascade is required, the signals from the TOA interface should be input to the ROA interface directly. The optical wavelength signal from the ROA interface is split equally into different channels of optical signals, and the signals are then output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces. A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and are then output through the MONO interface for performance detection. A few signals are extracted from the optical signals that are from the ROA interface and are output through the MONI interface for performance detection.
Module Function
l Optical module Broadcasts signals in nine directions. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
19.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board

Figure 19-3 shows the front panel of the RDU9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1758
Figure 19-3 Front panel of the RDU9 board
RDU9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
MONO MONI EXPO IN TOA ROA DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8
RDU9
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board. Table 19-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 19-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RDU9 board Interface DM1-DM8 Type LC Function Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the optical spectrum for the input through the ROA interface. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the ROA port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Proa (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for the signals output through the EXPO interface. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Used as the cascade output interface. Used as the cascade input interface.
IN EXPO MONI
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
TOA ROA
LC LC
NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.
Laser Hazard Level

19.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one RDU9 board. Table 19-3 shows the valid slots for the RDU9 board. Table 19-3 Valid slots for the RDU9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1760
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-4. Table 19-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RDU9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN EXPO DM1-DM8 TOA/ROA MONI MONO Interface on the NM 1 2 3-10 11 12 13

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For RDU9 parameters, refer to Table 19-5. Table 19-5 RDU9 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Configure Band Value C Default: C
Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. Sets the working band type of a board.
Field Actual Band Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
Value -
Description Queries the actual working band of the board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity
19.1.9 Specifications of the RDU9

Table 19-6 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board Item Operating wavelength range Insertion loss IN-Drop (DM1-DM8) ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8) IN-EXPO IN-TOA Consistency of the insertion loss of each channel Reflectance Polarization dependence loss Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 1529-1561 12.5 11.5 12.5 1 1.2 < -40 0.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11RDU9
19.2 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board

The available functional version of the RMU9 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 RMU 9 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
Type
Table 19-7 lists the types of the RMU9 board. Table 19-7 Type description of the RMU9 board Board TN11RMU 9 TN11RMU 9 Type 01 02 Description Processes the odd and even wavelengths of C-band. Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band and supports the port blocking function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1763
19.2.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RMU9 board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The RMU9 board can add eight single-wavelength signal or multi-channel signals to the main path. Being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port. As for the single channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port by the optical transponder units. For the position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-4. Figure 19-4 Position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system
Client-side O O T T U U O O T T U U Client-side O O O T T T U U U MUX 8 RMU9 OA O T U
DMUX DCM 8 OA WSD9
OA
RMU9 8 MUX
WSD9 8 DMUX
OA DCM
O T U
O O T T U U
O T U
O O T T U U
O O T T U U
Client-side
Client-side
NOTE

The RMU9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1764
Table 19-8 Functions and features of the RMU9 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Adds eight single-wavelength signals or multi-channel signals to the main path. Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9 board implements the dynamic input of eight channel signals. Supports the DWDM specifications. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Blocks all input wavelengths at one of the AM1 to AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE Only the TN11RMU902 board supports this function.
WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring Port blocking
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1765
Figure 19-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board
AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
Optical multiplexer module

TOA ROA EXPI MONO OUT MONI
Optical module PIN optical power detection module
Signal Flow
The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE
l The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted. l The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface. The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical amplifier board. If no cascading is required, the optical signals are directly input to the ROA optical interface.
After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added on the board through the ROA optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface. A small number of optical signals that are input through the EXPI interface are separated from the main path and then output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance detection. A small number of optical signals are separated from those that are output through the TOA interface and then sent to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance detection.
Module Function
l Optical module Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the board. Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection. l l Optical power detection module Detects in real time the optical power of TOA and EXPI interface. Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
19.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board.

Figure 19-6 shows the front panel of the RMU9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1767
Figure 19-6 Front panel of the RMU9 board
RMU9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
MONO MONI OUT EXPI TOA ROA AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
RMU9
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board. Table 19-9 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 19-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RMU9 board Interface AM1-AM8 Type LC Function Receive the single-wavelength signals or multichannel signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the optical spectrum for the input signals transmitted by the main optical path. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for the signals output through the TOA interface. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the TOA port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Ptoa (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB). Used as the cascade output interface. Used as the cascade input interface.
OUT EXPI MONI
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
TOA ROA
LC LC
NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.
Laser Hazard Level

19.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one RMU9 board. Table 19-10 shows the valid slots for the RMU9 board. Table 19-10 Valid slots for the RMU9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1769
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-11. Table 19-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel EXPI OUT AM1-AM8 TOA/ROA MONI MONO Interface on the NM 1 2 3-10 11 12 13

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For RMU9 parameters, refer to Table 19-12. Table 19-12 RMU9 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1770
Field Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Description The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information.
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
Queries the actual working band of the board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1771
Field Block Port
Description Before wavelengths are added to the AM interface of the RMU9, set this parameter to Enabled. After configurations of wavelengths and services on the OTU are complete, set this parameter to Disabled. Before the OTU where wavelengths are added is replaced, set this parameter to Enabled. After the OTU is replaced, and wavelengths and services are configured, set this parameter to Disabled.
19.2.9 Specifications of the RMU9

Table 19-13 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board. Table 19-13 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board Item Operating wavelength range Insertion loss EXPI-OUT AMxa-TOA ROA-OUT Reflectance Attenuation range Attenuation precision Unit nm dB dB dB dB dB dB Value 1529-1561 8.5 12.5b 1.5 < -40 0-15 < 1 (0 to 10 dB) < 1.5 (> 10 dB) VOA attenuation under channel blocking functionc Polarization dependence loss dB dB > 42 0.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1772
Item
NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
Unit
Value
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB. c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 7.7 8.2 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 8.6 9
TN11RMU901 TN11RMU902
19.3 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board

The available functional version of the ROAM board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 ROA M OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
Type
Table 19-14 lists the types of the ROAM board.
Table 19-14 Type description of the ROAM board Board TN11ROAM Type 01 02 Description Processes the even wavelengths in C band. Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.
19.3.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM board is used with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-7. Figure 19-7 Position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system
OA ROAM OA ROAM OA OA
DMUX O O T T U U
40
40
DMUX O O O T T T U U U Client-side O T U
O O T T U U
O T U
O T U
Client-side
NOTE

The ROAM board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, achieve built-in power equilibrium, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-15.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1774
Table 19-15 Functions and features of the ROAM board Function and Feature Basic function Description Implements dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of a maximum of 40 wavelengths with the demultiplexing board as well as dynamic grooming of wavelengths for services on the ring network. Supports the DWDM specification. Implements the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Not supported
WDM specification Power equilibrium Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical-layer ASON

The ROAM board consists of the planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ROAM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1775
Figure 19-8 Functions and features of the ROAM board

M01 M02 M40
VOA
OUT
VOA
VOA
EXPI
Optical multiplexer module Splitter
IN
EXPO DM
PLC optical module
SCC
Signal Flow
The main path signals are received through the IN interface. The splitter divides the main path signals into two channels of the same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface. The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01-M40 interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and then output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l PLC optical module Multiplexes forty wavelengths added on the board. The PLC optical module contains the VOA modules that implement the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station and adjusts the optical power of other signals. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

19.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ROAM board.

Figure 19-9 shows the front panel of the ROAM board. Figure 19-9 Front panel of the ROAM board
ROAM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
M01 196.00 M02 195.90 M03 195.80 M04 195.70 M05 195.60 M06 195.50 M07 195.40 M08 195.30 M09 195.20 M10 195.10
M11 195.00 M12 194.90 M13 194.80 M14 194.70 M15 194.60 M16 194.50 M17 194.40 M18 194.30 M19 194.20 M20 194.10
M21 194.00 M22 193.90 M23 193.80 M24 193.70 M25 193.60 M26 193.50 M27 193.40 M28 193.30 M29 193.20 M30 193.10
M31193.00 M32192.90 M33192.80 M34192.70 M35192.60 M36192.50 M37192.40 M38192.30 M39192.20 M40192.10
EXPO
OUT IN M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10
EXPI
DM
ROAM
M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20
M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30
M31 M32 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1777
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 45 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 19-16 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 19-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ROAM board Interface M01-M40 DM OUT IN EXPO EXPI Type LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Add channels from the local station. Drops channels to the local station. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Used as the cascade interface to transmit the passthrough signal. Used as the cascade interface to receive the passthrough signal.
There are 40 output interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 19-17 and Table 19-18 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM board. Table 19-17 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (even) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Frequency (THz) 196.00 195.90 195.80 195.70 195.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.55 1530.33 1531.12 1531.90 1532.68
Frequency (THz) 194.00 193.90 193.80 193.70 193.60
Wavelengt h (nm) 1545.32 1546.12 1546.92 1547.72 1548.51

1778
Frequency (THz) 195.50 195.40 195.30 195.20 195.10 195.00 194.90 194.80 194.70 194.60 194.50 194.40 194.30 194.20 194.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1533.47 1534.25 1535.04 1535.82 1536.61 1537.40 1538.19 1538.98 1539.77 1540.56 1541.35 1542.14 1542.94 1543.73 1544.53
Frequency (THz) 193.50 193.40 193.30 193.20 193.10 193.00 192.90 192.80 192.70 192.60 192.50 192.40 192.30 192.20 192.10
Wavelengt h (nm) 1549.32 1550.12 1550.92 1551.72 1552.52 1553.33 1554.13 1554.94 1555.75 1556.55 1557.36 1558.17 1558.98 1559.79 1560.61
Table 19-18 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (odd) Interface M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 Frequency (THz) 196.05 195.95 195.85 195.75 195.65 195.55 195.45 195.35 195.25 195.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1529.16 1529.94 1530.72 1531.51 1532.29 1533.07 1533.86 1534.64 1535.43 1536.22 Interface M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 Frequency (THz) 194.05 193.95 193.85 193.75 193.65 193.55 193.45 193.35 193.25 193.15 Wavelengt h (nm) 1544.92 1545.72 1546.52 1547.32 1548.11 1548.91 1549.72 1550.52 1551.32 1552.12
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1779
Interface M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20
Frequency (THz) 195.05 194.95 194.85 194.75 194.65 194.55 194.45 194.35 194.25 194.15
Wavelengt h (nm) 1537.00 1537.79 1538.58 1539.37 1540.16 1540.95 1541.75 1542.54 1543.33 1544.13
Interface M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40
Frequency (THz) 193.05 192.95 192.85 192.75 192.65 192.55 192.45 192.35 192.25 192.15
Wavelengt h (nm) 1552.93 1553.73 1554.54 1555.34 1556.15 1556.96 1557.77 1558.58 1559.39 1560.20
Laser Hazard Level

19.3.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one ROAM board. Table 19-19 shows the valid slots for the ROAM board. Table 19-19 Valid slots for the ROAM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU29IU34 IU1-IU15
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the ROAM board, the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1780


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-20. Table 19-20 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN EXPO EXPI OUT DM A01-A40
NOTE The A01A40 interfaces correspond to the M01 M40 interfaces on the physical front panel.
Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6-45

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For ROAM parameters, refer to Table 19-21. Table 19-21 ROAM parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Configure Band Value C Default: C Actual Band Queries the actual working band of the board. Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. Sets the working band type of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1781
Field Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
Value -
Description The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Applies to the ROAM board only and is used to set the single wavelength target output optical power after add wavelengths are multiplexed.
All, Odd, Even Default: Even
Wavelength Target -32 to 8 Output Power (dBm) Default: /
19.3.9 Specifications of the ROAM

Table 19-22 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM board. Table 19-22 Optical specifications of the ROAM board Item Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss Mxa-OUT IN-DM EXPI-OUT IN-EXPO Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Unit GHz dB dB dB dB nm dB dB Value 100 9b 7 14b 3 1529 - 1561 > 22 > 25
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1782
Item Attenuation range Attenuation precision
Unit dB dB
Value 0 to 20 < 1 (0 to 10 dB) < 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Module switch time Extinction ratio -0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength -0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through wavelength
NOTE a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface.
ms dB nm nm
50 30 > 0.3 > 0.2
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Power Consumption
TN11ROAM
19.4 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

The available functional versions of the WSD9 board are TN11, TN12, and TN13.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1783
Boar d TN11 WSD 9 TN12 WSD 9 TN13 WSD 9
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 N

l Appearance: The TN13WSD9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSD9 board of other versions. The TN13WSD9 board occupies three slots. The TN12WSD9 and TN11WSD9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 19.4.5 Front Panel and 19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9. l Specification: The wavelength of the TN13WSD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The wavelength of the TN12WSD9 and TN11WSD9 boards are separated at 100 GHz channel spacing. For details, see 19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9. The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9.
Original Board TN11WSD 9 TN12WSD 9 TN13WSD 9 Substitute Board TN12WSD 9 None None Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version. -
19.4.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSD9 board is used with the WSM9 or RMU9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the interfaces of the WSD9 board based on the configuration. If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit for demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the client-side equipment at the local station. If the dropped signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is sent directly to the OTU at the local station. For the position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-10. Figure 19-10 Position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system
Client-side O O T T U U O O T T U U Client-side O O O T T T U U U MUX 8 WSM9 OA O T U
DMUX DCM OA 8 WSD9
OA
WSM9 8 MUX
WSD9 8 DMUX
OA DCM
O T U
O O T T U U
O T U
O O T T U U
O O T T U U
Client-side
Client-side
NOTE

The WSD9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-23.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1785
Table 19-23 Functions and features of the WSD9 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can output any wavelength combination to any interface to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel. Supported
WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON

The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1786
Figure 19-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board
DM1 DM2 DM8
Splitter
IN MONI
Splitter WSS optical module

EXPO MONO
Optical module PIN Temperature detection
Temperature and optical power deteciton module
Signal Flow
The main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-wavelength or multichannel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces based on the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the EXPO interface.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module can combine any wavelengths and transmit the signals through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO interfaces. The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection.
Temperature and optical power detection module Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.
19.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSD9 board.

Figure 19-12 shows the front panel of the WSD9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1788
Figure 19-12 Front panel of the WSD9 board
WSD9
STAT ACT PROG SRV STAT ACT PROG SRV
WSD9
CAUTION
CAUTION
MONO MONI
MONO MONI EXPO IN DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8
EXPO IN DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM7 DM8
WSD9
WSD9
TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSD9 board. Table 19-24 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 19-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSD9 board Interface DM1-DM8 Type LC Function Transmits the single-wavelength or multi-channel signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
EXPO IN MONI
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
Laser Hazard Level

19.4.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSD9 board. Table 19-25, Table 19-26 and Table 19-27 show the valid slots for the WSD9 boards. Table 19-25 Valid slots for the TN11WSD9 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1790
Table 19-26 Valid slots for the TN12WSD9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35 IU1-IU16
Table 19-27 Valid slots for the TN13WSD9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66 IU1-IU6, IU12-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU29IU34 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU1-IU15
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 6800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1791
Table 19-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN EXPO DM1-DM8 MONI MONO Interface on the NM 1 2 3-10 11 12

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the WSD9 board, refer to Table 19-29. Table 19-29 WSD9 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range.
Default: Value of You can obtain the value range of this Max. Attenuation parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Rate (dB) Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1792
Value -
Configure Band
C Default: C
Queries the actual working band of the board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
All, Odd, Even Default: l TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9: Even l TN13WSD9: All
19.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9

Table 19-30 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board Item Type Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit GHz
Value TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9 40 100 TN13WSD9 80 50

1793
Item Type Insertion loss IN-DMxa IN-EXPO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Operating wavelength range -1dB spectral width Port isolation Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Maximum reflectance Directivity Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of dropping wavelengths Attenuation precision of each of dropping wavelengths
Unit dB
Value TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9 8b TN13WSD9 8b
dB nm nm dB dB dB dB s dB dB dB dB dB
1.5 1529-1561 > 0.32 > 25 > 25 > 30 35 3 -40 35 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB)
1.5 1529-1561 > 0.16 > 25 > 25 > 30 35 3 -40 35 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Dimensions of front panel: l l l TN11WSD9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN12WSD9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN13WSD9: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)
Weight: l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN11WSD9: 2.2 kg (4.9 lb.)

l l
TN12WSD9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.) TN13WSD9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17.0 25.4 25.4 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 18.7 28.5 28.5
TN11WSD9 TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9
19.5 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

The available functional versions of the WSM9 board are TN11, TN12, TN13.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 WSM 9 TN12 WSM 9 TN13 WSM 9 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N

l Appearance: The TN13WSM9 board uses a front panel different from that of the WSM9 board of other versions. The TN13WSM9 board occupies three slots. The TN12WSM9 and
TN11WSM9 boards occupy two slots. For details, see 19.5.5 Front Panel and 19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9. l Specification: The wavelength of the TN13WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing. The wavelength of the TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards are separated at 100 GHz channel spacing. For details, see 19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9. The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary according to versions. For details, see19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9.
Original Board TN11WSM 9 TN12WSM 9 TN13WSM 9 Substitute Board TN12WSM 9 None None Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version. -
19.5.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9 board is used with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be added to the main path are input through the interfaces of WSM9 board. If the added signal is a multiplexed signal, it is received after being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit. If the added signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is directly received after being converted by the OTU. For the position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-13.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1796
Figure 19-13 Position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system

Client-side O O T T U U O O T T U U Client-side O O O T T T U U U MUX 8 WSM9 OA O T U
DMUX DCM OA 8 WSD9
OA
WSM9 8 MUX
WSD9 8 DMUX
OA DCM
O T U
O O T T U U
O T U
O O T T U U
O O T T U U
Client-side
NOTE
Client-side

The WSM9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-31. Table 19-31 Functions and features of the WSM9 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any interfaces to achieve the dynamic wavelength allocation. Supports the DWDM specifications. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption.
WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1797
Function and Feature Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON
Description Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel. Supported by the TN12WSM9 and TN13WSM9.

The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board. Figure 19-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board
AM1 AM2 AM8
Splitter
EXPI MONI
Splitter WSS optical module

OUT MONO
Optical module Temperature detection Temperature and optical power deteciton module PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1798
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. l l If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface. If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.
After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l Optical module Selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs them through AM1-AM8 or EXPI. The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains a VOA module, which implements the optical power adjustment on a wavelength level. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MONI/MONO interface for detection. l Temperature and optical power detection module Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
19.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSM9 board.

Figure 19-15 shows the front panel of the WSM9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1799
Figure 19-15 Front panel of the WSM9 board
WSM9
STAT ACT PROG SRV STAT ACT PROG SRV
WSM9
CAUTION
MONO MONI
MONO MONI OUT EXPI AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
OUT EXPI AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8
WSM9
WSM9
TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSM9 board. Table 19-32 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 19-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board Interface AM1-AM8 OUT EXPI MONI Type LC LC LC LC Function Receive the single-wavelength or multi-wavelength signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC
Laser Safety Level

TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9: The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW). TN13WSM9: The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
19.5.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSM9 board. Table 19-33, Table 19-34 and Table 19-35 show the valid slots for the WSM9 boards. Table 19-33 Valid slots for the TN11WSM9 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU16
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1801
Table 19-34 Valid slots for the TN12WSM9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35 IU1-IU16
Table 19-35 Valid slots for the TN13WSM9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27IU32, IU35-IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66 IU1-IU6, IU12-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU29IU34 IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16 IU1-IU15
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. OptiX OSN 6800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSM9 or TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1802
Table 19-36 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel EXPI OUT AM1-AM8 MONI MONO Interface on the NM 1 2 3-10 11 12

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSM9 parameters, refer to Table 19-37. Table 19-37 WSM9 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1803
Value -
Configure Band
C Default: C
Sets the working band of a board.
19.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9

Table 19-38 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board Item Type Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss AMxa-OUT EXPI-OUT dB nm nm dB dB dB 1.5 1529-1561 > 0.32 > 25 > 25 > 30 1.5 1529-1561 > 0.16 > 25 > 25 > 30
1804
Unit GHz dB
Value TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9 40 100 8b TN13WSM9 80 50 8b
Maximum channel insertion loss difference Operating wavelength range -1 dB spectral width Port isolation Adjacent channel isolation Non-adjacent channel isolation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Item Type Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Directivity Maximum reflectance Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of adding wavelengths Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelengths
Unit dB s dB dB dB dB dB
Value TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9 35 3 35 -40 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB) TN13WSM9 35 3 35 -40 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Dimensions of front panel: l l l TN11WSM9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN12WSM9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN13WSM9: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN11WSM9: 2.2 kg (4.84 lb.) TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.) TN13WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Weight: l l l
Power Consumption
TN11WSM9 TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1805
19.6 WSMD2
WSMD2: 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board

The available functional version of the WSMD2 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 WSM D2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
19.6.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD2 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1806
Figure 19-16 Position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system

O T U O T U O T U O T U
Client-side
DMUX DCM OA WSMD2 OA
MUX
OA WSMD2 OA DCM MUX DMUX O T U
O T U
Client-side
O T U
O T U

The WSMD2 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-39. Table 19-39 Functions and features of the WSMD2 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as two channels of the same signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to the AM port. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption.
WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1807
Function and Feature Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON
Description Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station. Not supported

The WSMD2 board consists of the WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2. Figure 19-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2
DM EXPO AM EXPI
Splitter
IN MONI
Splitter
OUT
Coupler
WSS optical module Optical module Temperature detection PIN
MONO
PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1808
Signal flow
The optical signals of the main path are accessed through the IN interface. The signals are broadcast into two same optical signals through the coupler. Then, the board drops one channel of optical signals at the local station through the DM optical interface. The other channel of optical signals is output through the EXPO optical interface to other directions. Optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input to WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly input to the WSMD2 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM interface. Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD2 board through the EXPI optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the wavelengths added at the local station. The multiplexed signals are finally output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l Optical module The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through the following optical interface: EXPI and AM. The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The Coupler optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through DM. It implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to two ports. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. l Temperature and optical power detection module Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
19.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSMD2 board.

Figure 19-18 shows the front panel of the WSMD2 board.
Figure 19-18 Front panel of the WSMD2 board
WSMD2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
MONO MONI OUT IN EXPO EXPI DM AM
WSMD2
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD2 board. Table 19-40 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 19-40 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD2 board Interface IN OUT DM Type LC LC LC Function Receives the main path signal. Transmits the main path signal. Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit. Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path. Functions as a cascade output optical interface. Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPO optical interfaces. Functions as a cascade input optical interface. Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPI optical interfaces. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, monitors the optical performance of the transmitted main path signal online. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
AM
LC
EXPO
LC
EXPI
LC
MONI
LC
MONO
LC
Laser Hazard Level

19.6.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one WSMD2 board. Table 19-41 shows the valid slots for the WSMD2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1811
Table 19-41 Valid slots for the WSMD2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, and IU29IU35 IU1-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD2 board, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-42. Table 19-42 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN DM AM OUT EXPO EXPI MONO MONI Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

For WSMD2 parameters, refer to Table 19-43. Table 19-43 WSMD2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Configure Band C Default: C Actual Band Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the working band type of a board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1813
Value -
Description The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
19.6.9 Specifications of the WSMD2

Table 19-44 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD2 board. Table 19-44 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board Item Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing Operating wavelength range -1 dB spectral width Insertion loss AM-OUT EXPI-OUT IN-DM IN-EXPO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Port isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit GHz nm nm dB
Value 40 100 1529-1561 > 0.32 8a 4.5a
dB dB dB s
1.5 > 25 35 3
1814
Item Maximum reflectance Directivity Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of adding wavelength Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelength
Unit dB dB dB dB dB
Value -40 35 1 0-15 1 (0 dB to 10 dB) 1.5 (> 10 dB)
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Power Consumption
TN11WSMD2
19.7 WSMD4
WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board

The available functional versions of the WSMD4 board are TN11 and TN12

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1815
Boar d TN11 WSM D4 TN12 WSM D4
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 N
Type
Table 19-45 lists the version description of the WSMD4 board. Table 19-45 Version description of the WSMD4 board Board TN11WSMD4 Type 01 02 TN12WSMD4 01 Description Processes the even wavelengths in C band. Processes the odd wavelengths in C band. Processes the even wavelengths and odd wavelengths in C band.

l Function: The TN11WSMD4 processes 40 wavelengths in C band. The TN12WSMD4 processes 80 wavelengths in C band. For details, see Table 19-45. l Specification: The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 19.7.9 Specifications of the WSMD4.
The TN12WSMD4 board and TN11WSMD4 board are not interchangeable.
19.7.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD4 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD4 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-19.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1816

West client side East client side
West ODF
F I U
WSMD4
WSMD4
F I U
East ODF
South ODF
F I U
WSMD4
WSMD4
F I U
North ODF
South client side
North client side

The WSMD4 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-46. Table 19-46 Functions and features of the WSMD4 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as four channels of the same signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to any port. Supports the DWDM specification. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board.
WDM specification Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1817
Function and Feature Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON
Description Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station. Supported by the TN11WSMD401 and TN12WSMD4.

The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board. Figure 19-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board
D D D D M M M M 1 2 3 4 A A A A M M M M 1 2 3 4
Splitter
IN MONI
Splitter
OUT
RDU optical WSS optical module module Optical module PIN Temperature detection PIN
MONO
Signal flow
The optical signals on the main path are accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcast into four same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The four channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM4 optical interfaces separately. According to the network
planning, the WSMD4 board drops one channel locally and outputs the other three channels to other directions. The optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input to the WSMD4 board through one of the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces. Assume that the optical signals are input through the AM1 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board through the AM1 optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly input to the WSMD4 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM1 interface. Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD4 board through the AM2AM4 optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local station. The multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l Optical module The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4. The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The RDU optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through DM1-DM4. Implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to four ports. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. l Temperature and optical power detection module Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature. Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
19.7.5 Front Panel


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1819
WSMD4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
MONO MONI OUT IN DM1 AM1 DM2 AM2 DM3 AM3 DM4 AM4
WSMD4
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 19-47 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD4 board Interface AM1-AM4 Type LC Function Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
DM1-DM4
LC
OUT IN MONI
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
Laser Hazard Level

19.7.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one WSMD4 board. Table 19-48 shows the valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board. Table 19-48 Valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67
1821
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, and IU29IU35 IU1-IU16
Table 19-49 shows the valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board. Table 19-49 Valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, and IU29IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD4 board, the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-50. Table 19-50 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN DM1 AM1 OUT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
1822
Interface on the Panel DM2-DM4 AM2-AM4 MONO MONI
Interface on the NM 5 to 7 8 to 10 11 12

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSMD4 parameters, refer to Table 19-51. Table 19-51 WSMD4 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1823
Value -
Configure Band
C Default: C
Queries the actual working band of the board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.

Table 19-52 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 board Item Unit Value TN11WSMD4 Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing Operating wavelength range -1dB spectral width
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN12WSMD4 80 50 1529-1561 > 0.16

1824
GHz nm nm
40 100 1529-1561 > 0.32
Item
Unit
Value TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4 8b 8 1.5 > 25 35 3 -40 35 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (> 10 dB) 4
Insertion loss
AMxa-OUT IN-DMxa
dB
8b 8
Maximum channel insertion loss difference Port isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Maximum reflectance Directivity Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of adding wavelength Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelength Dimension
dB dB dB s dB dB dB dB dB
1.5 > 25 35 3 -40 35 1 0-15 1 (0 to 10 dB) 1.5 (> 10 dB)
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11WSMD4: 3.2 kg (7.1 lb.) TN12WSMD4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17 12 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 18.7 15
TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1825
19.8 WSMD9
WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board

The available functional version of the WSMD9 board is TN11. This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 WSM D9 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
19.8.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD9 board is used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network. For the position of the WSMD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 19-22.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1826

Client side O T U O T U Client side O T U MUX
AM1 EXPO EXPI SIN OUT LOUT
O T U
DCM
LIN IN SOUT
DMUX
DM1
DCM
DAS1
SIN LOUT OUT
WSMD9
EXPO EXPI AM1
WSMD9
IN SOUT DM1
DAS1
LIN
DCM
MUX
DMUX
DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
Client side
Client side
NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions.

The WSMD9 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 19-53. Table 19-53 Functions and features of the WSMD9 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as nine channels of the same signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to any port. Supports the DWDM specification. The wavelength of the TN11WSMD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing.
WDM specification
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1827
Function and Feature Online optical performance monitoring Alarm and performance event monitoring Optical power adjustment Optical-layer ASON
Description Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the board. Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station. Supported

The WSMD9 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 19-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board. Figure 19-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board
DDDDDDDD MMMMMMMM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXPO EXPI A A A A A A A A MMMMMMMM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Splitter IN MONI
Optical demultiplexer module Splitter
Splitter OUT
WSS optical module
RDU optical module
Optical module PIN PIN

MONO
Optical power deteciton module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1828
Signal flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface. It is broadcast into nine same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The nine channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately. One channel of the signals is dropped locally through the multiplexer board and the other eight channels of signals are scheduled to other eight directions. A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and are then output through the MONI interface for performance detection. The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces. After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l Optical module The RDU optical module broadcasts signals in nine directions. The nine channels of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately. The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1 - AM8 and EXPI. The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to MONI/MONO for detection. l l Optical power detection module Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals. Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
19.8.5 Front Panel


WSMD9
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
H A Z A R DL E V E L 1MIN V IS IB L E L A S E RR A D IA T IO N D ON O TV IE WD IR E C T L YW IT H N O N-A T T E N U A T IN GO P T IC A LIN S T R U M E N T S
DM1 AM1 DM2 AM2 DM3 AM3 DM4 AM4 DM5 AM5
WSMD9
MONO MONI OUT IN EXPO EXPI
DM6 AM6 DM7 AM7 DM8 AM8
Indicators
Interfaces
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1830
Table 19-54 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD9 board Interface AM1-AM8 Type LC Function Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path. Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit. Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal. Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal. The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal. The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB). Transmits the main path signal. Receives the main path signal.
DM1-DM8
LC
OUT IN MONI
LC LC LC
MONO
LC
EXPO EXPI
LC LC
Laser Hazard Level

19.8.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one WSMD9 board. Table 19-55 shows the valid slots for the WSMD9 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1831
Table 19-55 Valid slots for the WSMD9 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD9 board, the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 19-56. Table 19-56 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN EXPO EXPI OUT DM1-DM8 AM1-AM8 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5-12 13-20
19.8.8 WSMD9 Parameters

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WSMD9 Parameters, refer to Table 19-57.
Table 19-57 WSMD9 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Configure Band C Default: C Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity All, Odd, Even Default: All Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1833
Value -
Description The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.

Table 19-58 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD9 board Item Optical channels Adjacent channel spacing Insertion loss AMxa/EXPI-OUT IN-DMxa/EXPO Maximum channel insertion loss difference Operating wavelength range -1dB spectral width Port isolation Extinction ratio Reconfiguration time Maximum reflectance Directivity Polarization dependence loss Attenuation range of each of adding wavelength dB nm nm dB dB s dB dB dB dB Unit GHz dB Value 80 50 8b 12 1.5 1529-1561 > 0.16 > 25 35 3 -40 35 1 0 to 15
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1834
Item Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelength Dimension
Unit dB
Value < 1 (0 to 10 dB) < 1.5 (> 10 dB)
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface. b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
Power Consumption
TN11WSMD9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1835
20 Optical Amplifier Unit
20
About This Chapter
20.2 DAS1 DAS1: optical amplifier unit
Optical Amplifier Unit
20.1 CRPC CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band
20.3 HBA HBA: high-power booster amplifier board 20.4 OAU1 OAU1: optical amplifier unit 20.5 OBU1 OBU1: optical booster unit 20.6 OBU2 OBU2: optical booster unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1836
20.1 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band

The available functional version of the CRPC board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 CRP C OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
Type
Table 20-1 lists the types of the CRPC board. Table 20-1 Type description of the CRPC board Board CRPC Type 01 03 Description Adopts the backward pumping technology. Adopts the forward pumping technology.
20.1.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the CRPC board adopts backward pumping technology. It supports transmission over ultra-long distance and application of the 40G OTU, and can generate multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC board must be used with the EDFA.
CAUTION
Always turn off the pump laser of the CRPC board before removing or inserting the fiber to the CRPC. For the position of the CRPC board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-1 and Figure 20-2.
Figure 20-1 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (backward pump)
OTU OTU OTU OTU
Client side
M U X D M U X
OBU1
F I U F I U
CRPC
F I U F I U
OAU1
D M U X M U X
OTU OTU OTU OTU
Client side
Client side
OAU1
CRPC
OBU1
Client side
Figure 20-2 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (forward pump)
Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU M U X D M U X OBU1 F I U F I U CRPC F I U F I U OAU1 D M U X M U X OTU OTU OTU OTU Client side
Client side
OAU1
CRPC
OBU1
Client side

The main function and feature supported by the CRPC board is online optical performance monitoring. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-2. Table 20-2 Functions and features of the CRPC board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber. l Implements the distributed online amplification of signals over long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise. Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring Optical-layer ASON Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. Detects the optical power of the pump laser, temperature control current, pump current, and back facet current. Supports return loss detection. Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1838

The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. The CRPC board is used at the receive end and the transmit end of the system, making use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect to amplify the optical signals during transmission. The CRPC board is located before the receiver. The pump light travels in the reverse direction of the signal light. Figure 20-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC. The CRPC board is located after the transmit end. The pump light travels in the same direction of the signal light. Figure 20-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC. Figure 20-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (backward pump)
Signal
Pump light
Splitter Raman pump optical module

PIN Detection for temperature
LINE
Signal
SYS MON
Pump source
Pumping current and temperature control
Detection for pump light power and current
Driving and detection module
Backplane (controlled by SCC) DC power supply from PDU SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1839
Figure 20-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (forward pump)
Signal
Pump light
Splitter Raman pump optical module

PIN Detection for temperature
LINE
Signal
SYS MON
Pump source
Pumping current and temperature control
Detection for pump light power and current
Backplane (controlled by SCC) SCC DC power supply from PDU
Signal Flow
l Backward pump The pump source of the CRPC board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed amplification are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two, among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring. For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32/: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC. l Forward pump The signal light is input through the SYS interface and output to the optical line through the LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online
optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated by the CRPC board is output to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same direction as the signal light, to implement the distributed amplification of the optical signal. For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32/: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the communication with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.
Module Function
l Raman pump optical module The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission. The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising. l Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module. Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
20.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the CRPC board.

Figure 20-5 shows the front panel of the CRPC board.
Figure 20-5 Front panel of the CRPC board

MON
SYS
LINE
CAUTION
CRPC
!
ALM
RUN
WARNING: FIBERS MUST BE CONNECTED SEFORE POWER UP
RS232-1
RS232-2
LAN
Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel. l l Running status indicator (RUN) - green Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the CRPC board. Table 20-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CRPC board Interface LINE SYS MON Type LSH/APC LC LC Function Receives the line optical signal. Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors performance online. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Psys (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). LAN RJ-45 For OptiX OSN 6800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUX interface or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC. For OptiX OSN 8800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ ETH3 of the EFI2 board for the communications with the SCC. RS232-1/ RS232-2 RS232 communication interface
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1842
Laser Hazard Level

After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.1.6 Valid Slots

The CRPC board is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is installed outside the cabinet and not inside the subrack. Table 20-4 shows the valid slots for the CRPC board. Table 20-4 Valid slots for the CRPC board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Supported Logical Slots 120-123 120-123 120-123 Non-extended slot numbering mode: 28-31 Extended slot numbering mode: 120-123
20.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper

There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and J4. Figure 20-6 shows the number of each jumper. Figure 20-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board
CRPC J4
10 1 9
J3
2 10
CPU
Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers. For OptiX OSN 6800:
l l l l l l l l l l
Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Non-extended slot numbering mode) Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Extended slot numbering mode) Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4. Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4. Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4. Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are jumper setting regulations in the non-extended slot numbering mode: When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU28. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU29. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU30. When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU31. The following are jumper setting regulations in the extended slot numbering mode: When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU121. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU122. When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.
For OptiX OSN 8800: l l l l l l l l l Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3. Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4. Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4. Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4. Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are jumper setting regulations: When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU120. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board slot is IU121. When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board slot is IU122. When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU123.
20.1.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC

The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-5. Table 20-5 Characteristic code for the CRPC board Code First character Two digits Meaning Gain Description Is always G. Indicate the gain value.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-6. Table 20-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel LINE SYS MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For CRPC parameters, refer to Table 20-7. Table 20-7 CRPC parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value -
Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name.
1845
Field Board Work Type
Value C, C + L, L Default: C
Description Sets the working mode of a board. According to the board working mode, you can specify the type of the band from which the optical signals are accessed. Queries the actual working band of the board. Sets the working band type of a board.
Actual Band Configure Band
C Default: C
Laser Status
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter sets or queries the output optical power of an optical amplifier board. See D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the minimum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value is smaller than the minimum value, the board might work abnormally. See D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the maximum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value is larger than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally. See D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1846
20.1.11 Specifications of the CRPC

Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.
Table 20-8 Optical specifications of the CRPC board Item Un it nm nm dB m dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Value CRPC01 1400-1500 1529-1561 29 > 10 NA > 12 > 13 0 NA -1 -1.5 0.5 LSH/APC, LC/PC CRPC03 1400-1500 1529-1561 29.5 > 10 > 16 NA NA NA NA NA NA 0.5 LSH/APC, LC/PC
Pump wavelength range Operating wavelength range Maximum pump power Channel gain on G.652 fiber Channel gain on G.653 fiber Channel gain on LEAF fiber Channel gain on TWRS fiber Effective noise figure on G.652 fiber Effective noise figure on G.653 fiber Effective noise figure on LEAF fiber Effective noise figure on TWRS fiber Polarization dependence loss Output connector type
l Dimensions of board: 345.0 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 76.0 mm (W) or 13.8 in. (H) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.0 in. (W) CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.) CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)
Weight l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1847
Power Consumption
CRPC01 CRPC03
20.2 DAS1
DAS1: optical amplifier unit

The available functional version of the DAS1 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 DAS1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
20.2.2 Application
The DAS1 board is used to amplify optical signals, multiplex and demultiplex the optical supervisory channel and main optical channel, and process optical supervisory signals in one direction. The DAS1 board can be used at either the transmit end or the receive end. For the position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-7.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1848
Figure 20-7 Position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system

Client side O T U O T U Client side O T U MUX
AM1 EXPO EXPI SIN OUT LOUT
O T U
DCM
LIN IN SOUT
DMUX
DM1
DCM
DAS1
SIN LOUT OUT
WSMD9
EXPO EXPI AM1
WSMD9
IN SOUT DM1
DAS1
LIN
DCM
MUX
DMUX
DCM
O T U
O T U
O T U
O T U
Client side
Client side
NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards in other dimensions. It is recommended that the DAS1 board be used at a ROADM station. The DAS1 board cannot be used at an OLA station.

The DAS1 board integrates the functions of an optical amplifier unit, an FIU board (used to multiplexes the main optical channel and supervisory channel or demultiplexes the supervisory channel from the main channel signal), and an optical supervisory board. It supports gain adjustment, in-service monitoring of optical performance, gain locking, and transient state control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-9.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1849
Table 20-9 Functions and features of the DAS1 board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. l Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and optical supervisory channel. l Processes one channel of optical supervisory signals. l Supports transparent transmission of one channel of FE electrical signals. Gain adjustment Online optical performance monitoring The DAS1 board continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power. Provides the online monitoring interface. A small number of EDFAamplified optical signals is output through this interface to the optical spectrum analysis board. In this manner, the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signal are monitored without interrupting the services. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion. l Detects and reports the optical power. l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. The DAS1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added. 1511nm
Gain lock function
Transient control function
OSC signal regeneration
Operating wavelength for OSC signals Optical-layer ASON eSFP
Supported The RX/TX optical port supports pluggable optical modules.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1850

The DAS1 board consists of the multiplexer, VOA, EDFA module, demultiplexer, OSC optical module, service processing module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board. Figure 20-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board
RTDC RRDC MONR
LIN TM
Demultiplexer
RVI
VOA
RPAIN
EDFA module
Splitter
SOUT
RX TX
O/E E/O OSC optical module

Splitter
TBA OUT
FE signal processing module Supervisory signal processing module Service processing module
WSC
RM
LOUT MONT TRDC TTDC
Multiplexer
EDFA module
TBA IN
VOA
SIN
PIN
PIN
Control and communication module Required voltage
Power supply module

Fuse Backplane (controlledby SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1851
Signal Flow
Signal flow in the main optical channel l In the transmit direction: The board receives line optical signals through the LIN optical interfaces and sends the signals to the demultiplexer module. The demultiplexer splits OSC signals from main optical channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs OSC signals through the TM optical interface and sends the main optical channel signals to the VOA. The VOA adjusts optical power of the main optical channel signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board through the RTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the RRDC optical interface. Then, the EDFA module outputs the amplified signals through the SOUT optical interface. l In the receive direction: The board receives multiplexed signals through the SIN optical interface and sends the signals to the VOA. The VOA adjusts optical power of the signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board through the TTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the TRDC optical interface. The EDFA optical module sends the amplified multiplexed signals to the multiplexer module. The multiplexer multiplexes the amplified multiplexed signals and OSC signals input through the RM optical interface as line optical signals, and outputs the signals through the LOUT optical interface. Signal flow in the OSC l l l l l The board receives OSC signals through the TM optical interface, and sends the OSC signals to the optical receiver module through the RX optical interface. The optical receiver module converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the service processing module. The service processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals and sends the overhead bytes to the SCC board. This module also processes FE electrical signals. The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board are sent to the optical receiver module and then are converted into OSC signals by the optical receiver module. The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board. After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs.
Signal flow in the FE l In the transmit direction: The DAS1 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the DAS1 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal through its TX port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local board. After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC signals to other NEs. l In the receive direction: The DAS1 board receives an optical signal from the upstream board through its LIN port. The demultiplexer splits FE optical signal from main optical channel signals. The demultiplexer outputs FE signal through the TM optical interface and sends it to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation through the RX optical interface. Then, the DAS1 board drops it through its WSC port.
Module Function
l l l l Multiplexer Multiplexes main optical channel signals and OSC signals as line optical signals. Demultiplexer Demultiplexes line optical signals into main optical channel signals and OSC signals. VOA Adjusts optical power of optical signals according to system requirements. EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Service processing module FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals. Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding. l l OSC optical module Performs O/E and E/O conversion for one channel of OSC signals. Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Power supply module

20.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the DAS1 board.

Figure 20-9 shows the front panel of the DAS1 board. Figure 20-9 Front panel of the DAS1 board
DAS1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
WSC
TX RX TM RM MONT MONR LOUT LIN SOUT SIN TTDC TRDC RTDC RRDC
DAS1
Indicators
l l l l
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces and one FE electrical interface on the front panel of the DAS1 board. Table 20-10 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 20-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DAS1 board Interface WSC TX RX TM RM MONT MONR Type RJ45 LC LC LC LC LC LC Function Transmits/Receives the FE electrical signals. Transmits the supervisory signal. Receives the supervisory signal. Transmits the supervisory signal. Receives the supervisory signal. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MONT port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the LOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Plout (dBm) Pmont (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). The MONR port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Psout (dBm) Pmonr (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). Transmits the amplified signal (including the supervisory signal). Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (including the supervisory signal). Transmits the amplified signal(not including the supervisory signal). Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (not including the supervisory signal). Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion compensation.
LOUT LIN SOUT SIN TTDC/TRDC RTDC/RRDC
LC LC LC LC LC LC
Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC interface on the DAS1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1855
Laser Hazard Level

20.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot house one DAS1 board. Table 20-11 shows the valid slots for the DAS1 board. Table 20-11 Valid slots for the DAS1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16 IU2-IU5


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-12. Table 20-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DAS1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel LIN/LOUT RM/TM RX/TX RVIa RPAINa RRDC SOUT RTDC MONR
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Interface on the NM 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11
1856
Interface on the Panel SIN TPAINa TRDC TBAOUTa TTDC MONT a: Virtual port
Interface on the NM 12 13 15 16 17 18
20.2.8 DAS1 Parameters

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DAS1, refer to Table 20-13. Table 20-13 DAS1 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1857
Value -
Actual Band Configure Band
C Default: C
Queries the actual working band of the board. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Optical Interface Loopback
All, Odd, Even Default: All Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
Gain (dB)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1858
Field Nominal Gain (dB)
Value Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: The specific value is related to the module.
Description The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried. See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Channel Number Mode
Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the FIU board.
DEG Threshold
0 to 10167 Default: 190
Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An alarm is reported when error codes detected in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than the value of this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1859
Field DEG Monitoring Time(s)
Value 2 to 10 Default: 7
Description Sets the signal monitoring time. If the number of bit errors in the signal exceeds DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm is reported. Sets error codes thresholds for signals before FEC.
Degrade Threshold Before FEC
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9, 1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12, Default: 1E-4
Rated Optical Power (dBm)
-30 - 30 Default: The specific value is related to the board.
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
PMD Coefficient(ps/ SQRT(km))
0-1 Default: 0.05
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Specifies the type of a fiber.
Fiber Type
G652 Fiber, G653 Fiber, LEAF Fiber, TWRS Fiber, TWC Fiber, TWPLUS Fiber, SMFLS Fiber, G654B Fiber Default: G652 Fiber
Chromatic Dispersion Coefficient(ps/ (nm*km)) Send DCM Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm) Receive DCM Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm)
-15 - 30 Default: 0
This parameter is available only in the ASON system. Set the parameter according to the fiber type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber. Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the transmit end.
0.0 - 6553.5 Default: 0
0.0 - 6553.5 Default: 0
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for the DCM at the receive end.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1860
20.2.9 Specifications of the DAS1

Table 20-14 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board Item Specifica tions of OA Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels Nominal singlewavelength input optical power 40 channels 80 channels Uni t nm dB dB m dB m dB m dB m dB m dB ms dB dB dB/ dB dB dB dB m dB dB dB m Value 1529-1561 20 -32 to 0 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19 8.5 < 10 20 to 31 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 1529-1561 26 -32 to -6 -32 to -22 -32 to -25 -22 -25 5.5 < 10 1529-1561 31 -32 to -11 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30 5.5 < 10
Noise figure (NF)a Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1861
Item Polarization dependent loss Input VOA inherent insertion loss Input VOA dynamic attenuation range Input VOA adjustment accuracy Specifica tions of demultipl exer and multiplex er Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel Optical return loss Insert loss of optical supervisory channel Insert loss of C-band Polarization dependent loss Specifica tions of OSC optical module Operating wavelength range Signal rate Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload LIN-TM RMLOUT
Uni t dB dB dB dB nm dB dB
Value 0.5 1.5 20 1 1480 to 1520 > 40 1.5 0.5 0.5
dB dB nm Mbi t/s dB m dB m dB m
1 < 0.2 1504.5 to 1517.5 155.52 0.5 to 5 -41 -10
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1862
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 22 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 28.6
TN11DAS1
20.3 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board

The available functional version of the HBA board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 HBA OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
20.3.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the HBA board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end. For the position of the HBA board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-10. Figure 20-10 Position of the HBA board in the WDM system
Client side Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX OTU MUX HBA FIU OAU1 FIU HBA MUX OAU1 DMUX OTU OTU OTU Client side Client side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1863

The HBA board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-15. Table 20-15 Functions and features of the HBA board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Only applied on the transmit edge of the OTM station in the system that covers a long fiber span transmission. l The HBA can amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. Typical gain Online optical performance monitoring Gain lock function The typical gain of the HBA is 29 dB. Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path to implement smooth upgrade and expansion. l Detects and reports the optical power. l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. Supported
Optical-layer ASON

The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1864
Figure 20-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board
Splitter
IN OUT
EDFA optical module Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature
MON
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
20.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the HBA board.

Figure 20-12 shows the front panel of the HBA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1866
Figure 20-12 Front panel of the HBA board
HBA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
MON IN OUT
HBA
Indicators
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the HBA board. Table 20-16 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 20-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HBA board Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LSH/APC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8, monitors performance online. The MON port is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (999/1) = 30 dB).
Laser Hazard Level

After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.3.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one HBA board. Table 20-17 shows the valid slots for the HBA board. Table 20-17 Valid slots for the HBA board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU7, IU12-IU17, IU20-IU25, IU28IU33, IU36-IU41, IU46-IU51, IU54-IU59, IU62-IU67 IU2-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU21-IU26, IU30IU35 IU2-IU7, IU12-IU17 IU2-IU16
NOTE
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the number of the middle slot. l For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the HBA board, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is IU2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1868
20.3.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA

The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-18. Table 20-18 Characteristic code for the HBA board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. The second character is always G. The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value. The fifth character is always I. Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.
Second character Third to the fourth digits Fifth character Sixth and seventh digits
Gain Maximum nominal input optical power
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-19. Table 20-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1869

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For HBA parameters, refer to Table 20-20. Table 20-20 HBA parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Actual Band Configure Band Value C Default: C Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. Queries the actual working band of the board. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Gain (dB) The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1870
Value Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: 29
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1871
Field Rated Optical Power (dBm)
Value -30 - 30 Default: l IN: -19 l OUT: 4
Description The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
20.3.10 Specifications of the HBA

Table 20-21 Optical specifications of the HBA board Item Type Channel allocation Nominal input power range Typical input power of a single wavelength Unit nm dBm dBm Value TN11HBA 1529 - 1561 -25 to -3 80-channel system: -22 40-channel system: -19 10-channel system: -13 Noise figure (NF) Input reflectance Output reflectance Maximum total output power Gain response time on adding/dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Polarization dependent loss dB dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB <8 < -45 < -45 26 < 10 291 2.5 < 0.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1872
Power Consumption
HBA
20.4 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifier unit

The available functional versions of the OAU1 board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 OAU 1 TN12 OAU 1 TN13 OAU 1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Type
Table 20-22 lists the types of the OAU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1873
Table 20-22 Type description of the OAU1 board Unit TN11OAU1 Type 01 02 03 05 TN12OAU1 00 01 02 03 05 TN13OAU1 01 03 05 Description Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Gain Range 20 dB to 31 dB 20 dB to 31 dB 24 dB to 36 dB 23 dB to 34 dB 16 dB to 25.5 dB 20 dB to 31 dB 20 dB to 31 dB 24 dB to 36 dB 23 dB to 34 dB 20 dB to 31 dB 24 dB to 36 dB 23 dB to 34 dB

l Function: The TN11OAU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power, whereas the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 board supports. For details, see 20.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. l Appearance: The TN11, TN12 and TN13 versions have different front panels. For details, see 20.4.5 Front Panel. l Specification: For the power consumption of each version, see 20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1.
Original Board TN11OAU1 Substitute Board TN12OAU 1, TN13OAU 1 Substitution Rules The TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 can be created as TN11OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 function as the TN11OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1874
Original Board TN12OAU1
Substitute Board TN13OAU 1
Substitution Rules The TN13OAU1 can be created as TN12OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter at tpye 01,03,05, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OAU1 functions as the TN12OAU1. -
TN13OAU1
None
20.4.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OAU1 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end or receive end. For the position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-13. Figure 20-13 Position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system
Client side Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX MUX MUX OBU1 OAU1 DMUX OTU OTU OTU OTU Client side Client side
OAU1
OBU1

The OAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-23. Table 20-23 Functions and features of the OAU1 board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1875
Function and Feature Gain adjustment
Description The OAU100 continuously adjusts the gain from 16 dB to 25.5 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU101/OAU102 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU103 continuously adjusts the gain from 24 dB to 36 dB based on the input optical power. The OAU105 continuously adjusts the gain from 23 dB to 34 dB based on the input optical power.
NOTE 20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1 only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.
Online optical performance monitoring Gain lock function
Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion. l Detects and reports the optical power. l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. Supported
Optical-layer ASON

The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 board. Figure 20-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1876
Figure 20-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1

TDC RDC MON
PAOUT
IN
BAIN
OUT
EDFA optical module Driving current PIN
Splitter Detection for pump current and temperature
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1877
Figure 20-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1
TDC RDC MON
PAOUT
IN VO VI
BAIN
OUT
EDFA optical module

VOA
Splitter Detection for pump current and temperature
Driving current
PIN
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then, the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
20.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OAU1 board.

Figure 20-16, Figure 20-17 and Figure 20-18 show the front panel of the OAU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1879
Figure 20-16 Front panel of the TN11OAU1 board

OAU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
H A Z A R DL E V E L1MIN V IS IB L E L A S E RR A D IA T IO N D ON O TV IE WD IR E C T L YW IT H N O N-A T T E N U A T IN GO P T IC A LIN S T R U M E N T S
OAU1
MON OUT IN TDC RDC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1880

OAU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
H A Z A R DL E V E L1MIN V IS IB L E L A S E RR A D IA T IO N D ON O TV IE WD IR E C T L YW IT H N O N -A T T E N U A T IN GO P T IC A LIN S T R U M E N T S
OAU1
MON OUT IN TDC RDC VO VI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1881

OAU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
H A Z A R DL E V E L1MIN V IS IB L E L A S E RR A D IA T IO N D ON O TV IE WD IR E C T L YW IT H N O N -A T T E N U A T IN GO P T IC A LIN S T R U M E N T S
OAU1
MON OUT IN TDC RDC VO VI
Indicators
Interfaces
There are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OAU1. There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1. Table 20-24 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1882
Table 20-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OAU1 board Interface IN OUT TDC/RDC MON Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion compensation. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB). VIa VOa LC LC Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side. Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface.
a: Only the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 boards support the interfaces.
Laser Hazard Level

OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103: The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW). OAU105: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.4.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11OAU1 board or TN12OAU1 board, and one slot houses one TN13OAU1 board. Table 20-25 shows the valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board. Table 20-25 Valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30IU36
1883
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Table 20-26 shows the valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board. Table 20-26 Valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30IU36 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18 IU2-IU17 IU2-IU4, IU11
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 displayed on the NM is IU2.
Table 20-27 shows the valid slots for the TN13OAU1 board. Table 20-27 Valid slots for the TN13OAU1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1884
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
20.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1

The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-28. Table 20-28 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board Code First character Second to fifth digits Meaning Gain range Description Is always G. Indicates the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted. Is always I. Indicates the maximum nominal input optical power.
Sixth character Seventh and eighth digits
Maximum nominal input optical power
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-29 and Table 20-30. Table 20-29 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OAU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1885
Interface on the Panel PAOUTa BAINa OUT RDC/TDC MON a: Virtual port
Interface on the NM 2 3 4 5 6
Table 20-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN PAOUTa BAINa OUT RDC/TDC MON VI VO a: Virtual port Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OAU1, refer to Table 20-31. Table 20-31 OAU1 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1886
Field Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Description This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
NOTE Only the TN12OAU1/TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Actual Band Configure Band C Default: C Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Queries the actual working band of the board. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1887
Field Laser Status
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Gain (dB)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: The specific value is related to the module.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1888
Field Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Upper Threshold of Actual Gain (dB)
Value All, Odd, Even Default: All -
Description Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Displays the upper threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit.
NOTE Only the TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
Lower Threshold of Actual Gain (dB)
Displays the lower threshold of the actual gain of the optical amplifier unit.
NOTE Only the TN13OAU1 supports this parameter.
Rated Optical Power (dBm)
-30 - 30 Default: The specific value is related to the board.
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
20.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1

Table 20-32 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm Value 1529-1561 16 -20 to 2 -32 to -14 -32 to -17 1529-1561 22 -26 to -4 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 1529-1561 25.5 -32 to -7.5 -32 to -23.5 -32 to -26.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1889
Item Nominal singlewavelength input optical power Noise figure (NF)a Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss VI-VO Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy 40 channels 80 channels
Unit dBm dBm dB ms dB dB dB/dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB dB
Value -14 -17 8 < 10 16 to 25.5 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 18 0.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 18 0.5 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 18 0.5 -20 -23 5.5 < 10 -23.5 -26.5 5.5 < 10
dB
20
dB
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
Table 20-33 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Unit nm dB dBm Value 1529-1561 20 -32 to 0 1529-1561 26 -32 to -6 1529-1561 31 -32 to -11
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1890
Item Input power range per channel Nominal singlewavelength input optical power Noise figure (NF)a 40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels
Unit dBm dBm dBm dBm dB
Value -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19 8.5 (TN11OAU101, TN12OAU101) 7.5 (TN13OAU101) -32 to -22 -32 to -25 -22 -25 5.5 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30 5.5
Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss VI-VOb Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracyb
ms dB dB dB/dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB dB
< 10 20 to 31 2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5 1.5
< 10
< 10
2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5
2.0 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5
dB
20
dB
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1891
Table 20-34 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel Nominal singlewavelength input optical power Noise figure (NF)a Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss VI-VOb Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracyb 40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB ms dB dB dB/dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB dB Value 1529-1561 20 -32 to -3 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22 7.5 < 10 20 to 31 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 17 0.5 1.5 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 17 0.5 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 17 0.5 1529-1561 26 -32 to -9 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28 5.5 < 10 1529-1561 31 -32 to -14 -32 to -30 -32 -30 -32 5.5 < 10
dB
20
dB
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value. b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1892
Table 20-35 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU103/TN12OAU103/TN13OAU103 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels Nominal singlewavelength input optical power 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB Value 1529-1561 24 -32 to -4 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23 7.5 (TN11OAU103, TN12OAU103) 6.5 (TN13OAU103) Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss ms dB dB dB/dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB < 10 24 to 36 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 0.5 < 10 < 10 1529-1561 29 -32 to -9 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28 5.5 1529-1561 36 -32 to -16 -32 -32 -32 -32 5.5
Noise figure (NF)a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1893
Item VI-VOb Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracyb
Unit dB
Value 1.5
dB
20
dB
Table 20-36 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU105/TN12OAU105/TN13OAU105 board Item Operating wavelength range Nominal gain Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels Nominal singlewavelength input optical power 40 channels 80 channels Unit nm dB dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB ms dB dB dB/dB dB dB dBm Value 1529-1561 23 -32 to 0 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19 < 8.5 < 10 23 to 34 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 2 2 < -40 < -40 < -30 2 2 < -40 <-40 < -30 1529-1561 30 -32 to -7 -32 to -23 -32 to -26 -23 -26 <6 < 10 1529-1561 34 -32 to -11 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30 <6 < 10
Noise figure (NF)a Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain slope Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1894
Item Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Polarization dependent loss VI-VOb Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracyb
Unit dB dB dBm dB dB
Value -27 -27 23 0.5 1.5 -27 -27 23 0.5 -27 -27 23 0.5
dB
20
dB
l Dimensions of front panel: TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) TN13OAU1: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 1.8 kg (4.0 lb.) TN13OAU1: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 18.0 14.0 18.0 22.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 24.0 18.0 24.0 29.0
1895
TN11OAU101 TN11OAU102 TN11OAU103 TN11OAU105

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) 11.0 12.0 10.0 12.0 15.0 12.0 12.0 15.0
Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) 14.0 15.0 13.0 15.0 21.0 15.0 15.0 21.0
TN12OAU100 TN12OAU101 TN12OAU102 TN12OAU103 TN12OAU105 TN13OAU101 TN13OAU103 TN13OAU105
20.5 OBU1
OBU1: optical booster unit

The available functional versions of the OBU1 board are TN11, TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 OBU 1 TN12 OBU 1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Type
Table 20-37 lists the types of the TN11OBU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1896
Table 20-37 Type description of the TN11OBU1 board Unit TN11OBU1 Type 01 03 04 Description Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Gain Range 201.5 dB 231.5 dB 171.5 dB
Table 20-38lists the types of the TN12OBU1 board. Table 20-38 Type description of the TN12OBU1 board Unit TN12OBU1 Type 01 03 04 P1 Description Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The TN12BOU1P1 board is an OA board intended for PID Gain Range 201.5 dB 231.5 dB 171.5 dB -

l Function: The TN11OBU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical power of a wavelength, whereas the TN12OBU1 board supports. For details, see 20.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. l Appearance: The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 20.5.5 Front Panel. l Specification: For the power consumption of each version, see 20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1.
Original Board TN11OBU1 Substitute Board TN12OBU 1 Substitution Rules The TN12OBU1 can be created as TN11OBU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU1 functions as the TN11OBU1. -
TN12OBU1
None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1897
20.5.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals. For the position of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-19. Figure 20-19 Position of the OBU1 board in the WDM system
Client side
OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX OBU1 OBU1 MUX OTU OTU OTU OTU
MUX
OBU1
OBU1
DMUX
Client side
Client side
Client side
For the position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-20. Figure 20-20 Position of the OBU1P1 board in the WDM system
Client side
Tributary board
NPO2 + ENQ2
OBU1P1 OBU1P1
NPO2 + ENQ2
Tributary board
Client side
NOTE
The TN12BOU1P1 board, configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used together with the TN55NPO2 board. In a PID-featured NE with separated optical and electrical subracks, the TN12OBU1P1 board is configured on the OptiX OSN 6800, and the TN55NPO2 and TN54ENQ2 boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 8800.

The OBU1 board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-39. Table 20-39 Functions and features of the OBU1 board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.
Function and Feature Typical gain
Description l The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB. l The typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB. l The typical gain of the OBU104 is 17 dB.
NOTE 20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1 only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.
Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion. l Detects and reports the optical power. l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. Supported
Optical-layer ASON

The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board. Figure 20-22 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1899
Figure 20-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board
Splitter IN EDFA optical module Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature OUT MON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1900
Splitter IN EDFA optical module VO Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature OUT MON
VOA
VI
Backplane (Controlled by SCC ) SCC
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
NOTE
On a network where PID boards are used, optical signals are input through the TN12OBU1P1 board's VI port and are transmitted over the fiber connection between its VO and IN ports.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection.
Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals. Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.
20.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU1 board.

Figure 20-23 and Figure 20-24 show the front panel of the OBU1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1902
Figure 20-23 Front panel of the TN11OBU1 board
OBU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
MON OUT IN
OBU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1903
OBU1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
MON OUT IN VO VI
OBU1
Indicators
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OBU1 board. And there are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN121OBU1 board. Table 20-40 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 20-40 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU1 board Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). VIa VOa LC LC Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side. Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface.
a: Only the TN12OBU1 board supports the interfaces.
Laser Hazard Level

20.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one OBU1 board. Table 20-41 shows the valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board. Table 20-41 Valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 20-42 shows the valid slots for the TN12OBU1 board. Table 20-42 Valid slots for the TN12OBU1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

1905
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
NOTE
The TN12OBU1P1 can be installed only in an OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
20.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1

The characteristic code for the OBU1 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-43. Table 20-43 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board Code First character Second and third digits Fourth character Fifth and sixth digits Meaning Gain Maximum nominal input optical power Description The first character is always G. The second and the third digits indicate the gain value. The fourth character is always I. The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-44 and Table 20-45.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1906
Table 20-44 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3
Table 20-45 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OBU1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON VI VO Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OBU1, refer to Table 20-46. Table 20-46 OBU1 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
NOTE Only the TN12OBU1/TN12OBU103/ TN12OBU104 support this parameter.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1907
Field Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Value -
Description The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Actual Band Configure Band C Default: C Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Queries the actual working band of the board. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Gain (dB) The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1908
Value Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: l OBU101: 20dB l OBU103: 23dB l OBU104: 17dB
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1909
Field Rated Optical Power (dBm)
Value -30 - 30 Default: The specific value is related to the board
Description The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
20.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1

Table 20-47 Optical specifications of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board Item Unit Value TN11OBU10 1/ TN12OBU10 1 Operating wavelength range Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels dB dB ms dBm nm dBm dBm 1529-1561 -32 to -4 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23 5.5 20 < 10 TN11OBU10 3/ TN12OBU10 3 1529-1561 -32 to -3 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22 6.0 23 < 10 TN11OBU10 4/ TN12OBU10 4 1529-1561 -32 to -1 -32 to -17 -32 to -20 -17 -20 5.5 17 < 10
Nominal singlewavelength input optical power Noise figure (NF) Nominal gain
Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1910
Item
Unit
Value TN11OBU10 1/ TN12OBU10 1 TN11OBU10 3/ TN12OBU10 3 231.5 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 20 2.0 0.5 TN11OBU10 4/ TN12OBU10 4 171.5 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 16 2.0 0.5
Channel gain Gain flatness Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss VI-VOa Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuatio n range Adjustment accuracya
dB dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB dB dB
201.5 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 16 2.0 0.5 1.5
dB
20
dB
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU1.
Table 20-48 Optical specifications of the OBU1P1 board Item Operating wavelength range Total input power range at the VI optical port Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Unit nm dBm dB dB dBm Value 1529 to 1561 -30 to 7 < -40 < -40 < -30
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1911
Item Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss
Unit dB dB dBm dB/dB dB
Value -27 -27 9 2.0 0.5
l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 1b.) TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 11.0 13.0 12.0 10.0 11.0 10.0 10.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 13.0 15.0 14.0 11.0 12.1 12.0 11.0
TN11OBU101 TN11OBU103 TN11OBU104 TN12OBU101 TN12OBU103 TN12OBU104 TN12OBU1P1
20.6 OBU2
OBU2: optical booster unit

The available functional versions of the OBU2 board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 OBU 2 TN12 OBU 2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Type
The OBU2 board is available only in one type, that is, OBU205.

l Function: The TN11OBU2 board does not support adjustment of input optical power of a wavelength, whereas the TN12OBU2 board supports. For details, see 20.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. l Appearance: The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details, see 20.6.5 Front Panel. l Specification: For the power consumption of each version, see 20.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2.
Original Board TN11OBU2 Substitute Board TN12OBU 2 Substitution Rules The TN12OBU2 can be created as TN11OBU2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU2 functions as the TN11OBU2. -
TN12OBU2
None
20.6.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU2 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end or receive end.
For the position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-25. Figure 20-25 Position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system
Client side Client side OTU OTU OTU OTU DMUX MUX OBU2 OBU2 DMUX OTU OTU OTU OTU Client side Client side
OBU2
OBU2
MUX

The OBU2 is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 20-49. Table 20-49 Functions and features of the OBU2 board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration. Typical gain The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB.
NOTE 20.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2 only provides the value of nominal gain. Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.
Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption. The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth upgrading and expansion.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1914
Description l Detects and reports the optical power. l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board. Supported
Optical-layer ASON

The OBU2 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 20-26 and Figure 20-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2 board. Figure 20-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU2 board
Splitter
IN
EDFA optical module Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature
OUT MON
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1915
Splitter IN EDFA optical module VO Driving current PIN Detection for pump current and temperature OUT MON
VOA
VI
Backplane (Controlled by SCC ) SCC
Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface. The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
Module Function
l EDFA optical module Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power detection. The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to the MON interface for detection. l Driving and detection module Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA. Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module. Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
20.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU2 board.

Figure 20-28 and Figure 20-29 show the front panel of the OBU2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1917
OBU2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
OBU2
MON OUT IN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1918
OBU2
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
OBU2
MON OUT IN VO VI
Indicators
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OBU2 board. There are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN12OBU2 board. Table 20-50 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 20-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU2 board Interface IN OUT MON Type LC LC LC Function Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring. The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB). VOa VIa LC LC Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN interface. Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side.
a: Only the TN12OBU2 board supports the interfaces.
Laser Hazard Level

After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
20.6.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one OBU2 board. Table 20-51 shows the valid slots for the TN11OBU2 board. Table 20-51 Valid slots for the TN11OBU2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30IU36 IU2-IU17 IU2-IU4, IU11
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
Table 20-52 shows the valid slots for the TN12OBU2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1920
Table 20-52 Valid slots for the TN12OBU2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU28IU34, IU36-IU42, IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU19, IU21-IU27, IU30IU36 IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18 IU2-IU17 IU2-IU4, IU11
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 6800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is IU2. For OptiX OSN 3800: l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots. l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed on the NM is IU2.
20.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2

The characteristic code for the OBU2 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 20-53. Table 20-53 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board Code First character Second and third digits Fourth character Meaning Gain Description The first character is always G. The second and the third digits indicate the gain value. The fourth character is always I.
1921
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Code Fifth and sixth digits
Meaning Maximum nominal input optical power
Description The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 20-54 and Table 20-55. Table 20-54 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON Interface on the NM 1 2 3
Table 20-55 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OBU2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT MON VI VO Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OBU2, refer to Table 20-56.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1922
Table 20-56 OBU2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. This parameter provides an option to set the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the input signals power of the board is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
NOTE Only the TN12OBU2 supports this parameter.
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Actual Band Configure Band C Default: C Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Queries the actual working band of the board. Used to configure type of the working band of a board. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1923
Field Laser Status
Description The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information.
Gain (dB)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm). See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameters. See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) Default: 23dB
Actual Working Band Parity
Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1924
Field Configure Working Band Parity Rated Optical Power (dBm)
Value All, Odd, Even Default: All -30 - 30 Default: The specific value is related to the board
Description Selects the desired parity of the working band.
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried. See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
20.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2

Table 20-57 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board Item Unit Value OBU205 Operating wavelength range Nominal input power range Input power range per channel 40 Channels 80 Channels Nominal singlewavelength input optical power 40 Channels 80 Channels dB dB ms dBm nm dBm dBm 1529-1561 -24 to 0 -24 to -16 -24 to -19 -16 -19 7.0 23 < 10
Noise figure (NF) Nominal gain Gain response time on adding/ dropping of channels
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1925
Item
Unit
Value OBU205
Channel gain Gain flatness Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at input Maximum reflectance tolerance at output Maximum total output optical power Multi-channel gain slope Polarization dependent loss VI-VOa Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuatio n range Adjustment accuracya
dB dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm dB/dB dB dB
231.5 2.0 < -40 < -40 < -30 -27 -27 23 2.0 0.5 1.5
dB
20
dB
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU2.
l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.) TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
1926
TN11OBU205
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 14
Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 19
TN12OBU205
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1927
21 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit
21
Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit
About This Chapter

21.1 SXM SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 21.2 SXH SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 21.3 TN52XCH TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board 21.4 TN16XCH TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board 21.5 XCM XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross) 21.6 XCS XCS: centralized cross connect board 21.7 XCT XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board 21.8 SCC SCC: system control and communication unit 21.9 AUX AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1928
21.1 SXM
SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

The available functional versions of the SXM board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXM board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TNK 2SX M TNK 4SX M OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 N

The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.1.7 Specifications of the SXM.
Table 21-1 Substitution rules of the SXM board Original Board TNK2SXM Substitute Board TNK4SXM Substitution Rules The TNK4SXM can be created as TNK2SXM on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4SXM functions as the TNK2SXM. None
TNK4SXM
None
21.1.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXM cross-connects services.
For the position of the SXM board in the system, see Figure 21-1 and Figure 21-2.
Independent use of the SXM board

Figure 21-1 Position of the SXM board in the OCS system
1
STM-16
SLQ64 SLO16 SXM SLQ64
SLQ64 SXM SLQ64 SLO16
1
STM-16
Joint use of the SXM board and the XCT board

Figure 21-2 Position of the SXM board in the WDM system
G.694.1 NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM XCT SXM 4 NS2 4 DMUX MUX 4 4 MUX G.694.1 DMUX 4 NS2 4 NS2 client side SXM XCT TOM 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
client side
WDM side
WDM side

The SXM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-2. Table 21-2 Functions and features of the SXM board Function and Feature Basic function Cross-connect function Description Grooms services. Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 80 Gbit/s lower-order VC-12 and VC-3 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk cross-connect grooming when the SXM board is jointly used with the XCT board. Protection scheme l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection. l provides 1+1 hot backup. l provides 1+1 warm backup.
Function and Feature Switching mode
Description Supports manual switching and auto switching. Supports non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer ASON
Supported

The SXM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board. Figure 21-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board
VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e/ODUflex
SCC
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3, flex) service,
and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
21.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the SXM board.

Figure 21-4 shows the front panel of the SXM board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1932
Figure 21-4 Front panel of the SXM board

SXM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SXM
Indicators
Interfaces
The SXM board does not provide external interfaces.
21.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SXM board. Table 21-3 shows the valid slots for the SXM board. Table 21-3 Valid slots for the SXM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU10, IU44
21.1.7 Specifications of the SXM

Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
TNK2SXM: l l l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 3.74 kg (8.2lb.) Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 3.00 kg (6.59b.)
TNK4SXM:
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 190 97 173 114 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 209 107 190 125 Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 5303.6 x (64 n) 1881.2 x (64 n) 3782.5 x (64 n) 3242.5 x (64 n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 5833.6 x (64 n) 2071.32 x (64 n) 4162.5 x (64 n) 3562.5 x (64 n)
TNK2SXM +TNK2XCT TNK4SXM +TNK4XCT TNK2SXM +TNK4XCT TNK4SXM +TNK2XCT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1934
Board
Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W)
Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W)
Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W)
Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W)
NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM and XCT must be configured. n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
21.2 SXH
SXH: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

The available functional versions of the SXH board are TNK2 and TNK4. The SXH board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TNK 2SXH TNK 4SXH OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N OptiX OSN 6800 N N OptiX OSN 3800 N N

The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.2.7 Specifications of the SXH.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1935
Original Board TNK2SXH Substitute Board TNK4SXH Substitution Rules The TNK4SXH can be created as TNK2SXH on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4SXH functions as the TNK2SXH. None
TNK4SXH
None
21.2.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXH cross-connects services. For the position of the SXH board in the system, see Figure 21-5 and Figure 21-6.
Independent use of the SXH board

Figure 21-5 Position of the SXH board in the OCS system
1
STM-16
SLQ64 SLO16 SXH SLQ64
SLQ64 SXH SLQ64 SLO16
1
STM-16
Joint use of the SXH board and the XCT board

Figure 21-6 Position of the SXH board in the WDM system
G.694.1 NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM XCT SXH 4 NS2 4 DMUX MUX 4 4 MUX G.694.1 DMUX 4 NS2 4 NS2 client side SXH XCT TOM 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
client side
WDM side
WDM side

The SXH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-4.
Table 21-4 Functions and features of the SXH board Function and Feature Basic function Cross-connect function Description Grooms services. Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming. Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk cross-connect grooming when the SXH board is jointly used with the XCT board. l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection. l provides 1+1 hot backup. l provides 1+1 warm backup. Switching mode Supports manual switching and auto switching. Supports non-revertive switching. Electrical-layer ASON Supported
Protection scheme

The SXH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-7 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1937
Figure 21-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXH board
VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e/ODUflex Backplane(service cross-connection)
SCC
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
21.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the SXH board.

Figure 21-8 shows the front panel of the SXH board. Figure 21-8 Front panel of the SXH board
SXH
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SXH
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel. l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
The SXH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SXH board. Table 21-5 shows the valid slots for the SXH board. Table 21-5 Valid slots for the SXH board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU10, IU44
21.2.7 Specifications of the SXH

TNK2SXH: l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 3.74 kg (8.1lb.)
TNK4SXH: l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 2.68 kg (5.8Ib.)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 130 95 113 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 143 105 124 Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 4703.6 x (64 n) 1691.2 x (64 n) 3182.5 x (64n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 5173.6 x (64 n) 1861.32 x (64 n) 3502.5 x (64n)
1940
TNK2SXH +TNK2XCT TNK4SXH +TNK4XCT TNK2SXH +TNK4XCT

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 112
Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 123
Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 3212.5 x (64n)
Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 3532.5 x (64n)
TNK4SXH +TNK2XCT
NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXH and XCT must be configured. n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
21.3 TN52XCH
TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board

The available functional version of the TN52XCH board is TN52.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN52 XCH OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 N
21.3.2 Application
The XCH cross-connects services. For the position of the XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-9. Figure 21-9 Position of the XCH board in the WDM system
G.694.1 NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM XCH 4 NS2 4 DMUX MUX 4 WDM side 4 MUX G.694.1 DMUX 4 NS2 4 NS2 Client side XCH TOM 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1941

The XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-6. Table 21-6 Functions and features of the XCH board Function and Feature Basic function Cross-connect function Protection scheme Description Implements grooming of services. Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 1.28 Tbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2 or 3) signals or VC-4. Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot backup. Supports warm backup. Supports the manual switching and auto switching. Supports the non-revertive switching. Electrical-layer ASON Supported
Switching mode

The XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1942
Figure 21-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ ODUflex/ODU3/ODU3e/VC-4 Backplane(service cross-connection)
SCC
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Clock processing module The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter, clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module. Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source. Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
21.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCH board.

Figure 21-11 shows the front panel of the XCH board. Figure 21-11 Front panel of the XCH board
XCH
STAT ACT PROG SRV
XCH
Indicators
l l l l
Interfaces
The XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCH board. Table 21-7 shows the valid slots for the XCH board. Table 21-7 Valid slots for the XCH board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU9, IU10
21.3.7 Specifications of the XCH

l l Dimensions of the front panel: 27.9 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H) Weight: 3.40 kg (7.49 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 65 43 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 72 47.3 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 243 - 3.6 x (32 n) 101 - 1.12 x (32 - n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 267.3 - 3.6 x (32 - n) 111 - 1.12 x (32 - n)
TN52XCH01 TN52XCH02
NOTE n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1945
21.4 TN16XCH
TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board

TThe available functional version of the TN16XCH board is TN16.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN16 XCH OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 N
21.4.2 Application
The TN16XCH, a cross-connect and system control board, implements communication between equipment, synchronizes physical clocks and PTP clocks on the entire NE, implements service cross-connections, and manages each board on the equipment with the U2000. For the position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-12. Figure 21-12 Position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system
External clock External clock
TN16ATE
G.694.1 MUX DMUX 4 NQ2 4 Client side DMUX MUX 4 WDM side 4
TN16ATE
G.694.1 4 4 TQX 4 TN16 XCH 4 NQ2
TN16 4 XCH
TQX
WDM side
Client side

The TN16XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system control function and clock function.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-8. Table 21-8 Functions and features of the TN16XCH board Function and Feature Cross-connect function System control function Description Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 640 Gbit/s ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2 or 3) signals. l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16XCH. l Supports IP over DCC. l Implements communication between NEs when used with the TN16AUX by using DCC bytes. l Supports subrack cascading. The functions of the TN16XCH are different when it is housed in the master and slave subracks. The TN16XCH in the slave subrack processes overheads of the slave subrack. The TN16XCH in the master subrack processes overheads and alarms of the master and slave subracks, sends configurations to the slave subrack, and communicates with the U2000. Clock function l Basic function: Locks the reference clock source. Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals. Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system. l Clock source selection function: Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the system. l Time synchronization function: Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE. Protection scheme Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot backup. Supports warm backup.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1947
Function and Feature Switching mode
Description Supports the manual switching and auto switching. Supports the non-revertive switching.
Supported

The TN16XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board. Figure 21-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board
Time signals/ Clock signals Service cross-connection from backplane (ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflex/ODU3/ODU3e)
Clock processing module
CPU and control module
Monitoring module
Overhead processing module
Communication module
DC power supply from a backplane Other boards
Backplane
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) service, and then sends
the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Clock procession module Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides the board and system with a synchronization clock source. Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the requirements of data setup time and holdoff time. l CPU and control module Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the board. l Overhead processing module Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes. In the TN16XCH board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board. l l Monitoring module Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000. Communication module Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000. Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000. Transmits urgent data through the RS485. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
21.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16XCH board.

Figure 21-14 shows the front panel of the TN16XCH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1949
Figure 21-14 Front panel of the TN16XCH board
XCH
STAT ACT PROG SRV
RESET
XCH
Indicators
Interfaces
The TN16XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
21.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TN16XCH board. Table 21-9 shows the valid slots for the TN16XCH board. Table 21-9 Valid slots for the TN16XCH board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU9, IU10
21.4.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the TN16XCH board. It switches the power supplied by the battery on the board on or off. The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Figure 21-15 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN16XCH board. Figure 21-15 Position of the battery jumper on the TN16XCH board
J1
CPU
Battery Jumper
321
CF Card
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1951
Figure 21-16 shows the power jumper. Figure 21-16 battery jumper
When battery is required When battery is not required
21.4.8 Specifications of the TN16XCH

l l Dimensions of the front panel: 54.5 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H) Weight: 4.0 lb. (1.8 kg)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 40 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 48 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 731.4 x (16n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 88.81.4 x (16 n)
TN16XCH
21.5 XCM
XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)

Only one functional version of the XCM board is available, that is TN52.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1952

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Board TN52X CM OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 6800 N OptiX OSN 3800 N
21.5.2 Application
The XCM is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCM implements the cross-connection of services. For the position of the XCM in the OCS system, see Figure 21-17. Figure 21-17 Position of the XCM in the OCS system
1
STM-16
SLQ64 SLO16 XCM SLQ64
SLQ64 XCM SLQ64 SLO16
1
STM-16

The main function and feature of the XCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-10. Table 21-10 Functions and features of the XCM Function and Feature Basic function Cross-connect functions Description Grooms services. l Supports the centralized electrical-layer grooming of transmitted ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, or ODU3/ODU3e signals. l Supports the VC-4 higher-order cross-connection and VC-3 and VC-12 lower-order cross-connection. l Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s higher-order cross-connect capacity. l Supports a maximum of 80 Gbit/s lower-order cross-connect capacity.
Function and Feature Protection scheme Switching mode
Description Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot backup. Supports the manual switching and auto switching. Supports the non-revertive switching.
Supported

The XCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCM. Figure 21-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCM
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODUflexODU3/ODU3e VC-4/VC-3/VC-12
Backplane (for service cross-connection)
Control Storage CPU communication
Control and communication module Voltages for boards Power module Fuse
DC power provided by the backplane
SCC
Backplane (for SCC control)
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 3 or flex) signals or VC-4/
VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service board to complete service cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
21.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the XCM front panel.

Figure 21-19 shows the XCM front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1955
Figure 21-19 XCM front panel

XCM
STAT ACT PROG SRV
XCM
Indicators
Interfaces
The XCM does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1956
21.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCM board. Table 21-11 shows the valid slots for the XCM board. Table 21-11 Valid slots for the XCM board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU9, IU10
21.5.7 Specifications of the XCM

l l Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H) Weight: 3.84 kg (8.45 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 125 67 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 138 73.7 Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 339 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m 124 - 1.12 x (32 - n) -23 x m Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 368 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m 136.4 - 1.12 x (32 - n) -23 x m
TN52XCM01 TN52XCM02
NOTE n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack. l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, m is equal to 0. l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, m is equal to 1.
21.6 XCS
XCS: centralized cross connect board

The available functional versions of the XCS board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 XCS TN12 XCS OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N N OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 N N

l Function: The cross-connection capacities vary according to versions. For details, see 21.6.3 Functions and Features. l Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.6.7 Specifications of the XCS.
Table 21-12 Substitution rules of the XCS board Original Board TN11XCS TN12XCS Substitute Board TN12XCS None Substitution Rules Upgrade NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version.
21.6.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCS board cross-connects services. For the position of the XCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-20. Figure 21-20 Position of the XCS board in the WDM system
OTU XCS OTU OTU XCS OTU 40 40 1 D40 OA OA M40 40 1 M40 OA OA D40 40 1 1 OTU XCS OTU OTU XCS OTU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1958

The XCS board cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-13. Table 21-13 Functions and features of the XCS board Function and Feature Basic function Cross-connect function Description Implements grooming of services. TN11XCS: l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals or GE services. l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE services. TN12XCS: l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals or GE services. l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 360 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE services. Active/standby backup Protection scheme Switching mode Provides the 1+1 hot backup. Supports cross-connect board 1+1 protection. Supports the manual switching and auto switching. Supports the non-revertive switching. Electrical-layer ASON Supported by the TN12XCS02.

The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1959
Figure 21-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board
SCC
Module Function
l Cross-connect module Receives the data from each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals at the electrical layer, then sends the signals to each service board and implements the cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
21.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCS board.

Figure 21-22 shows the front panel of the XCS board.
Figure 21-22 Front panel of the XCS board
XCS
STAT ACT PROG SRV
XCS
Indicators
Interfaces
The XCS board does not provide external interfaces.
21.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCS board.
Table 21-14 shows the valid slots for the XCS board. Table 21-14 Valid slots for the XCS board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU9, IU10
21.6.7 Specifications of the XCS

Weight l l TN11XCS: 2.20 lb (1.0 kg) TN12XCS: 2.65 lb (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
TN11XCS TN12XCS
21.7 XCT
XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board

The available functional versions of the XCT board are TNK2 and TNK4. The XCT board is only used on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1962
Boar d TNK 2XCT TNK 4XCT
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y
OptiX OSN 6800 N N
OptiX OSN 3800 N N

The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 21.7.7 Specifications of the XCT.
Original Board TNK2XCT Substitute Board TNK4XCT Substitution Rules The TNK4XCT can be created as TNK2XCT on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TNK4XCT functions as the TNK2XCT. None
TNK4XCT
None
21.7.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCT cross-connects services. For the position of the XCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 21-23. Figure 21-23 Position of the XCT board in the WDM system
G.694.1 NS2 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM XCT SXH / SXM 4 NS2 4 DMUX MUX 4 4 MUX G.694.1 DMUX 4 NS2 4 NS2 client side SXH XCT / SXM TOM 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
client side
WDM side
WDM side

The XCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 21-15.
Table 21-15 Functions and features of the XCT board Function and Feature Basic function Cross-connect function Protection scheme Description Grooms services. Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk cross-connect grooming when the XCT board is jointly used with the SXM/SXH board. l Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection. l provides 1+1 hot backup. l provides 1+1 warm backup. Switching mode Supports manual switching and auto switching. Supports non-revertive switching. Electrical-layer ASON Supported

The XCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board. Figure 21-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e/ODUflex Backplane(service cross-connection)
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1964
Module Function
l Cross-connect module The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane, performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3, flex) service, and then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service cross-connection. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
21.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCT board.

Figure 21-25 shows the front panel of the XCT board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1965
Figure 21-25 Front panel of the XCT board

XCT
STAT ACT PROG SRV
XCT
Indicators
Interfaces
The XCT board does not provide external interfaces.
21.7.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCT board. Table 21-16 shows the valid slots for the XCT board. Table 21-16 Valid slots for the XCT board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU9, IU43
21.7.7 Specifications of the XCT

TNK2XCT: l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
TNK4XCT: l l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H) Weight: 2.9 kg (6.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 190 130 97 95 173 Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 209 143 107 105 190 Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 5303.6 x (64 n) 4703.6 x (64 n) 1881.2 x (64 n) 1691.2 x (64 n) 3782.5 x (64 n) Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 5833.6 x (64 n) 5173.6 x (64 n) 2071.32 x (64 n) 1861.32 x (64 n) 4162.5 x (64 n)
1967
TNK2SXM +TNK2XCT TNK2SXH +TNK2XCT TNK4SXM +TNK4XCT TNK4SXH +TNK4XCT TNK2SXM +TNK4XCT
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board
Power Consumption at Warm Backup (25C, 77F) (W) 114 113 112
Power Consumption at Warm Backup (55C, 131F) (W) 125 124 123
Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 3242.5 x (64 n) 3182.5 x (64n) 3212.5 x (64n)
Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 3562.5 x (64 n) 3502.5 x (64n) 3532.5 x (64n)
TNK4SXM +TNK2XCT TNK2SXH +TNK4XCT TNK4SXH +TNK2XCT
NOTE When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM/ SXH and XCT must be configured. n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
21.8 SCC
SCC: system control and communication unit

The available functional versions of the SCC board are TN11, TN16, TN21, TN22, TN51, TN52, and TNK2.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 SCC TN16 SCC TN21 SCC TN22 SCC TN51 SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N N N N N
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N N N N Y
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y N N N
OptiX OSN 6800 Y N N N Y
OptiX OSN 3800 N N Y Y N
1968
Boar d TN52 SCC TNK 2SCC
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y N
OptiX OSN 6800 Y N
OptiX OSN 3800 N N

l Function: The TN21SCC and TN22SCC boards do not support SCC data backup, IP over DCC, subrack cascading, and power supply backup. The other versions support these functions. For details, see 21.8.3 Functions and Features. l Appearance: The TN11, TN51, and TN52 versions use the same front panel; the TN21 and TN22 versions use the same front panel; the TNK2 and TN16 version use a front panel different from that of other versions. The TN21 and TN22 versions are applicable to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 21.8.5 Front Panel and 21.8.8 Specifications of the SCC. l Specification: The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see 21.8.8 Specifications of the SCC.
Original Board TN11SCC Substitute Board TN51SCC Substitution Rules l When the ASON function is not used, or only the opticallayer ASON function instead of the electrical-layer ASON function is used, the TN51SCC can be used to replace the TN11SCC. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. l When the electrical-layer ASON function is used, the TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN11SCC. TN52SCC TN16SCC TN51SCC TN52SCC TNK2SCC TN21SCC TN22SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Software upgrade is required for the replacement. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. Software upgrade is required for the replacement. 1969
None TN52SCC None None TN22SCC None
Original Board
Substitute Board
Substitution Rules
NOTE If a subrack/chassis uses two SCC boards (one is active and the other is standby), the versions of the two SCC boards must be the same.
21.8.2 Application
The SCC board is a system control and communication unit that works with the network management system to manage each board and implements inter-equipment communication.

The SCC board is used for DCC communication, subrack cascading, power supply backup and clock. Table 21-17 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/ TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board. Table 21-18 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN16SCC. Table 21-19 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board. Table 21-17 Functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board Function and Feature Basic function Description Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up the database. The NE data (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID, and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card. Backing up data to the CF means that you do not need to reconfigure the NE after replacing the SCC. l Supports IP over DCC. DCC communication Active/Standby backup Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network management. Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby board automatically becomes active.
1970
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Function and Feature Clock function Subrack cascading
Description Provides clock source for the system communications. Supports subrack cascading. The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.
Optical-layer ASON Electrical-layer ASON
Supported Supported
Table 21-18 Functions and features of the TN16SCC board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack. l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes, the real-time database backup function immediately saves the changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered off. This improves the reliability of the NE. l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs not to be re-configured after the replacement of the SCC. l Supports IP over DCC. DCC communication Active/Standby backup Implements communication between NEs when used with the TN16AUX by using DCC bytes. Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby board automatically becomes active.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1971
Function and Feature Clock function
Description l Basic function: Locks the reference clock source. Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals. Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system. l Clock source selection function: Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the system. l Time synchronization function: Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.
Subrack cascading
Supports subrack cascading. The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
Table 21-19 Functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board Function and Feature Basic function DCC communication Active/standby backup Description Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a chassis. Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network management. Supported: In DC-powered systems, the two SCCs are used to provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active SCC fails, the standby SCC becomes active automatically. Not supported: Active/standby backup configuration is not supported in AC-powered systems. Clock function Optical-layer ASON Provides clock source for the system communications. Supported by the TN22SCC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1972
Function and Feature Electrical-layer ASON
Description Supported by the TN22SCC.

The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module, communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module. Figure 21-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCC. Figure 21-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC board
Clock module
Required voltage Power supply module Fuse Monitorin g module Overhead processing module Communication
Backplane DC power supply from a backplane Other boards
Module Function
l CPU and control module Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the board. l Overhead processing module Receives overhead signals from the service board and processes the overhead bytes. In the TN11SCC board, the 360 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. In the TN51SCC board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. In the TN52SCC board, the 1024 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module.
In the TNK2SCC board, the 1024 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. In the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board, the 40 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. In the TN16SCC board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module. Sends the overhead signals to the service board. l l Monitoring module Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000. Clock module Provides the clock source for the system. TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC/TN21SCC/TN22SCC: Receives the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station, and ensures that the local clock of the local board is synchronized with the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station. Sends a local clock to the downstream station through the OSC board. TN16SCC: Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides the board and system with a synchronization clock source. Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the requirements of data setup time and holdoff time. l Communication module Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000. Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000. Transmits urgent data through the RS485. l Power supply module TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 6800/8800 provides the entire system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. In addition, it provides power backup to the boards of which the total power consumption is less than 60W. TN21SCC/TN22SCC: The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 3800 converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module of the board. TN16SCC: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board, and provides the system with 10W backup power.
21.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, and an LED indicator on the front panel.

Figure 21-27 shows the front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board. Figure 21-28 shows the front panel of the TN16SCC board. Figure 21-29 shows the front panel of the TNK2SCC board. Figure 21-30 shows the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.
Figure 21-27 Front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board
SCC
SubRACK_ID
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1975
Figure 21-28 Front panel of the TN116SCC board

SCC
STAT ACT PROG SRV
RESET
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1976
Figure 21-29 Front panel of the TNK2SCC board
SCC
STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRC ALMC
SubRACK_ID
RESET LAMP TEST ALM CUT
Figure 21-30 Front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board
RESET LAMP TEST ALM CUT PWR CRI MAJ MIN
SCC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1977
Indicators
There are eight indicators on the front panel. l l l l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) System power supply indicator (PWRA)- dual-colored (red, green) System power supply indicator (PWRB)- dual-colored (red, green) Protection power indicator (PWRC)- dual-colored (red, green) Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow
NOTE
The TNK2SCC/TN16SCC board does not have PWRA and PWRB. The TN16SCC board does not have ALMC.
There are also four chassis indicators on the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board. l l l l Chassis power supply indicator (PWR) - green Minor alarm indicator (MIN) - yellow Major alarm indicator (MAJ) - orange Critical alarm indicator (CRI) - red
Buttons
There are three buttons on the front panel. Table 21-20 lists the function of each button. Table 21-20 Functions of the buttons on the SCC board Button RESET ALM CUT LAMP TEST Function Used to reset the SCC. Used to clear an audible alarm. Used to test all of the indicators.
NOTE
The TN16SCC board does not have ALM CUT and LAMP TEST.
LED
There is an LED indicator on the front panel. Table 21-21 shows its function.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1978
Table 21-21 Function of the LED indicator on the SCC board LED indicator SubRack_ID Function The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a master or slave subrack when master/slave subrack mode is used. "0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-31. For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Figure 21-31 LED
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Error
Interfaces
The SCC board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1979
21.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SCC board. Table 21-22 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCC board. Table 21-23 shows the valid slots for the TN16SCC board. Table 21-24 shows the valid slots for the TN51SCC/TN52SCC board. Table 21-25 shows the valid slots for the TNK2SCC board. Table 21-26 shows the valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board. Table 21-22 Valid slots for the TN11SCC board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU17, IU18
Table 21-23 Valid slots for the TN16SCC board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Valid Slots IU9, IU10
Table 21-24 Valid slots for the TN51SCC/TN52SCC board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU11, IU28 IU17, IU18
Table 21-25 Valid slots for the TNK2SCC board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU74, IU85
Table 21-26 Valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU8, IU9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1980
21.8.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC board. It switches the power supplied by the battery on the board on or off. The battery on the SCC helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of the SCC. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper. Figure 21-32 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN11SCC board. Figure 21-32 Position of the battery jumper on the TN11SCC board
CPU
CF Card
Battery jumper
1 2 3 Battery jumper
Figure 21-33 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN16SCC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1981
Figure 21-33 Position of the battery jumper on the TN16SCC board
J1
CPU
Battery jumper
321
CF Card
Figure 21-34 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC board. Figure 21-34 Position of the battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC board
CPU
Battery jumper
3 2 1 Battery jumper
Figure 21-35 shows the battery jumper on the TN51SCC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1982
Figure 21-35 Position of the battery jumper on the TN51SCC board
J42
Battery Supply
U45
J1
CPU
J12
U42
Battery Jumper
321
CF Card
Figure 21-36 shows the power jumper on the TN52SCC board. Figure 21-36 Position of the battery jumper on the TN52SCC board
Battery Supply
321
Battery Jumper
CPU
J1
U33
U18
CF Card
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1983
Figure 21-37 shows the power jumper on the TNK2SCC board. Figure 21-37 Position of the battery jumper on the TNK2SCC board
Battery Jumper 3 2 1
J44
CPU
Figure 21-38 shows the power jumper. Figure 21-38 battery jumper
When battery is required When battery is not required
Battery Supply
CF
21.8.8 Specifications of the SCC

Dimensions of front panel: l l TN11SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN16SCC: 54.5 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l l l l l
TN21SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H) TN22SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H) TN51SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TN52SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H) TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4 in. (H)
Weight: l l l l l l l TN11SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.) TN16SCC: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.) TN21SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN22SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.) TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.) TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 27.0 32.0 14.0 10.0 18.0 23.0 26.7 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 30.0 35.0 16.0 13.0 20.0 25.1 29.3
TN11SCC TN16SCC TN21SCC TN22SCC TN51SCC TN52SCC TNK2SCC
21.9 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit

TN16, The available functional versions of the AUX board are TN11, TN16, TN21, TN22, and TN51.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 AUX TN16 AUX TN21 AUX TN22 AUX TN51 AUX OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N N N N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N N N N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y N N N OptiX OSN 6800 Y N N N N OptiX OSN 3800 N N Y Y N
Type
The system provides two types of the TN11AUX. Table 21-27 lists the types of the TN11AUX. Table 21-27 Type description of the AUX Board TN11AUX Type TN11AUX01 Description Provides three jumpers to set subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to 7. Provides eight jumpers to set subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to 31.
TN11AUX02

l Function: The TN16AUX does not provide external interfaces. It provides the inter-subrack management function. For details, see 21.9.3 Functions and Features and 21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. The TN51AUX board does not provide external interfaces. For detail, see 21.9.3 Functions and Features and 21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. The TN11AUX board provides various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces. For detail, see 21.9.3 Functions and Features and 21.9.4 Working Principle and
Signal Flow. There are three jumpers inside the TN11AUX board, which are used to set the subrack ID. For detail, see 21.9.7 Jumper. The TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards are mainly used to provide backup power supply, various auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces. For detail, see 21.9.3 Functions and Features and 21.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. There are three jumpers inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN22AUX board. For detail, see 21.9.7 Jumper. l Appearance: The appearance and dimensions of front panels of different hardware versions are different. The TN51/TN16 board does not provide external interfaces. The TN21 and TN22 boards are applied to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 21.9.5 Front Panel and 21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX. The board software status indicators of the TN21 and TN22 are different. For details, see 21.9.5 Front Panel. l Specification: The power consumption of the boards of different versions is different. For details, see 21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX.
Original Board TN11AUX TN21AUX TN22AUX TN51AUX TN16AUX Substitute Board None TN22AUX None None None Substitution Rules If the SCC is the TN22SCC, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version. -
21.9.2 Application
The TN51AUX board is a system control and communication unit that does not provide external interfaces. The TN16AUX, a system control and communication board, provides the intrasubrack management function but does not provide external interfaces. The TN11AUX board is a system control and communication unit that provides various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces. The TN21AUX board and the TN22AUX board are system control and communication units that provide backup power supply and various auxiliary and management interfaces.

The TN51AUX board is a system control and communication unit that does not provide external interfaces. The TN11AUX board is a system control and communication unit that provides various auxiliary and management interfaces. The TN21AUX board and the TN22AUX board
are system control and communication units that provide various auxiliary and management interfaces. For detailed functions and features of the TN51AUX board, refer to Table 21-28. Table 21-28 Functions and features of the TN51AUX board Function and Feature Basic function Interface Description Implements communications between boards or subracks. Does not provide external interfaces.
For detailed functions and features of the TN16AUX board, refer to Table 21-29. Table 21-29 Functions and features of the TN16AUX board Function and Feature Basic function Description Implements communication between boards or subracks and intersburack management. Whether the subrack is configured with a TN16XCH affects the intersubrack management function of the TN16AUX. l If the subrack is configured with a TN16XCH, the TN16AUX collects overhead information about other boards and sends the information to the TN16XCH. After processing overhead information, the TN16XCH sends the processed information to the TN16AUX. Then, the TN16AUX sends the information to the other boards. l If the subrack is not configured with a TN16XCH, the TN16AUX collects and processes overhead information about other boards and sends the processed information to the other boards. Interface Does not provide external interfaces.
For detailed functions and features of the TN11AUX board, refer to Table 21-30. Table 21-30 Functions and features of the TN11AUX board Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1988
Function and Feature Interface
Description Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface. Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communications interfaces
Setting of subrack ID
Sets the subrack ID that contains six bits.
For detailed functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board, refer to Table 21-31. Table 21-31 Functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board Function and Feature Basic function Interface Description Provides the system with backup power supplies as well as various auxiliary and management interfaces. Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface. Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance. Provides the alarm channel for chassis indicators. Power supply backup Alarm function Provides the entire system with the 3.3 V integrated power supply backup. Provides alarms on the failure of 3.3 V integrated backup power supply, including over-voltage and under-voltage alarms.

The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power supply module. Figure 21-39 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN51AUX/TN11AUX/ TN22AUX/TN21AUX board. Figure 21-40 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1989
Figure 21-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51AUX/TN11AUX/TN22AUX/ TN21AUX board
Power supply module Fuse Required voltage Communication module
Backplane DC power supply from a backplane Other boards
Figure 21-40 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board
Monitoring module
DC power supply from a backplane Other boards
Backplane
Module Function
l CPU and control module The CPU module implements the control, monitoring and management of the communication module and detects the power supply at the same time. TN11AUX: The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. TN21/TN22AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. TN51AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information.
TN16AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information. l Communication module
NOTE
The TN51AUX board is connected to the EFI1 and EFI2 boards through the backplane. The interfaces as follows are provided on the EFI1 and EFI2 boards. The TN16AUX board is connected to the EFI board through the backplane. The interfaces as follows are provided on the EFI board.
Provides the inter-board communication interface to connect the service boards and the SCC. Implements the data communication between boards. Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that connect the AUX and the NM terminal. TN11AUX: Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communication network interfaces. TN21/TN22AUX: Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance. l Power supply module TN11AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board. TN21/TN22AUX: Supplies power for the AUX. It also provides the entire OptiX OSN 3800 system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system. TN16AUX/TN51AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
21.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the AUX board.

Figure 21-41 shows the front panel of the TN51AUX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1991
Figure 21-41 Front panel of the TN51AUX board

AUX
STAT ACT PROG SRV
Figure 21-42 shows the front panel of the TN16AUX board. Figure 21-42 Front panel of the TN16AUX board
AUX
STAT ACT PROG SRV ALMC
SubRACK-ID
RESET
LAMP TEST ALM CUT
Figure 21-43 shows the front panel of the TN11AUX board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1992
Figure 21-43 Front panel of the TN11AUX board
STAT PROG
AUX
Figure 21-44 shows the front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board. Figure 21-44 Front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board
STAT PROG
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 EXT
AUX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel of the TN51AUX board. There are five indicators on the front panel of the TN16AUX board.
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Service active status indicator (ACT) - green Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow) Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow
Interfaces
The TN51AUX board provides no external interfaces. The TN16AUX board provides no external interfaces. There are four interfaces on the front panel of the TN11AUX board. Table 21-32 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 21-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11AUX board Interface NM_ETH1 Type RJ-45 Function l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs. NM_ETH2 RJ-45 l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs. ETH1 RJ-45 Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other subracks for communication between the master subrack and slave subracks. Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/ ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other subracks for communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.
ETH2
RJ-45
There are three interfaces on the front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board. Table 21-33 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1994
Table 21-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN21/TN22AUX board Interface NM_ETH1 Type RJ-45 Function l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 3800 to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 3800. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs. NM_ETH2 RJ-45 l Using a network cable, the port connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 3800 to the U2000 server to enable the management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 3800. l Using a network cable, the port connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE to another NE for communication between NEs. EXT DB64 Provides the alarm input/output interface, cascading interface, commissioning network interface and management serial interface.
Buttons
Buttons are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the buttons, see Table 21-34. Table 21-34 Functions of the buttons on the TN16AUX board Button RESET ALM CUT LAMP TEST Function Used to reset the TN16AUX board. Used to clear an audible alarm. Used to test all of the indicators.
LED
LED indicators are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the LED indicators, see Table 21-35.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1995
Table 21-35 Function of the LED indicator on the TN16AUX board LED indicator SubRack-ID Function The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a master or slave subrack in the case of master/slave subrack mode. "0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 21-45. For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Figure 21-45 LED
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Error
21.9.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one AUX board. Table 21-36 shows the valid slots for the TN51AUX board.
Table 21-36 Valid slots for the TN51AUX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Slot IU41 IU72, IU83
Table 21-37 shows the valid slots for the TN16AUX board. Table 21-37 Valid slots for the TN16AUX board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Slot IU21, IU22
Table 21-38 shows the valid slots for the TN11AUX board. Table 21-38 Valid slots for the TN11AUX board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Slot IU21
Table 21-39 shows the valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board. Table 21-39 Valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board Product OptiX OSN 3800 Slot IU10
21.9.7 Jumper
There are three jumpers inside the TN11AUX01 board, and eight jumpers inside the TN11AUX02 board. These jumpers are used to set the subrack ID. There are three jumpers inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN22AUX board. There is no jumper inside the TN51AUX/TN16AUX// board.
Jumper of TN11AUX
The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel. The TN11AUX01 board has three jumpers, the jumpers are numbered 3 to 1 from the side close to CPU, and the jumpers are numbered 1 to 3 from the most significant bit to the lest significant
bit. The default value of the four jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks shows the jumpers on the board. Figure 21-46 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01 board
jumpers
3 CPU
The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the TN11AUX02 board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 21-47 shows the jumpers on the board. Figure 21-47 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board
Jumpers
J4 J17
J3 J16
J2 J15
J18
J14
CPU
When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins are not placed with any jumper cap, it represents the value 1. When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure, it represents the value 0. In Figure 21-48 the value represented by the three jumpers is 001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is "1". The value is "0" by default.
Figure 21-48 Jumper

jumper cap
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
TN11AUX01
1 jumper cap
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
TN11AUX02
J16
J15
J4
J3
J2
NOTE
The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed over the two pins.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service interruption. For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Jumper of TN21/TN22AUX
The TN21AUX has 3 jumpers. Figure 21-49 shows the jumpers. The TN22AUX has 8 jumpers. Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the J4 jumper is the same as that shown in Figure 21-50.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
1999
Figure 21-49 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX
CPU
Jumper
Figure 21-50 Position of the jumper on the TN22AUX
Jumper
Jumper cap
8 (J4)
21.9.8 Specifications of the AUX

l Dimensions of the front panel: TN51AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H)) TN11AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) TN21AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
TN22AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)) l Weight: TN51AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.) TN11AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.) TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 17.5 26.5 12.0 11.7 15.0 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 17.5 29.2 17.0 13.0 17.0
TN51AUX TN16AUX TN11AUX TN21AUX TN22AUX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2001
22 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
22
Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
About This Chapter

22.1 HSC1 HSC1: High power unidirectional/bi-directional optical supervisory channel board 22.2 SC1 SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board 22.3 SC2 SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit 22.4 ST2 ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2002
22.1 HSC1
HSC1: High power unidirectional/bi-directional optical supervisory channel board

The available functional version of the HSC1 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 HSC1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
22.1.2 Application
As a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the HSC1 board processes one channel of supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-1. Figure 22-1 Position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system
OAU F I U F I U OAU HSC1 HSC1 F I U F I U OAU
SCC
HSC1
HSC1
SCC
SCC OAU
OAU
OAU
NE1
NE2
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-1, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU.
The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

The HSC1 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-1. Table 22-1 Functions and features of the HSC1 board Function and Feature Basic function Technical features Description
The HSC1 board is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory signal. The HSC1 board supports a maximum of 53 dB span transmission. The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The HSC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the HSC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.
Regenerati on function Operating wavelengt h Loopback
The HSC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added. The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported

The HSC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2004
Figure 22-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board
RM
O/E
CMI decoding module
CMI encoding module
E/O
Optical transmitting module
TM
Optical receiving module
Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical transmitting module.
Frame Structure of the OSC Signals

Figure 22-3 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32 timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31. Figure 22-3 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0 1 2 3
...
14
15
16
...
31
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2005
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 22-2. Table 22-2 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number 1 2 3-13, 15 Name E1 byte F1 byte D1-D12 bytes Function Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface. DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performance events. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing. 14 17 ALC byte F2 byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
18
F3 byte
19 21-23
E2 byte Optical layer overhea d bytes Reserve d
Other
Module Function
l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal. Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal. CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 2 Mbit/s signal. Overhead processing module
Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to the optical transmitting module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
22.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the HSC1 board.

Figure 22-4 shows the front panel of the HSC1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2007
Figure 22-4 Front panel of the HSC1 board
HSC1
STAT ACT PROG SRV EOW
TM RM
HSC1
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the HSC1 board. Table 22-3 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2008
Table 22-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HSC1 board Interface TM RM EOW Type LC LC Function Transmits the supervisory signal. Receives the supervisory signal. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to implement orderwire communication between NEs.
Laser Hazard Level

22.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one HSC1 board. Table 22-4 shows the valid slots for the HSC1 board. Table 22-4 Valid slots for the HSC1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5 and IU11
22.1.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1

The characteristic code for the HSC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and numbers of optical interface. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-5. Table 22-5 Characteristic code for the HSC1 board Code First character Meaning Description The first character is always W.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2009
Code Second to tenth characters
Meaning Optical signal wavelength range
Description The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board. The eleventh character is always P. The number of the optical interface is one.
Eleventh character Twelfth character
Numbers of optical interface
For example, the characteristic code for the HSC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical interface is one.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-6. Table 22-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HSC1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel RM/TM Interface on the NM 1
NOTE
22.1.9 HSC1 Parameters

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For HSC1 Parameters, refer to Table 22-7. Table 22-7 HSC1 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2010
Field Optical Interface Name Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Optical Interface Loopback
Value 240/1510.00/198.540
Description Sets and displays the optical interface name. This parameter is queriable only.
SMC Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback
This parameter is queriable only. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. See D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) for more information.
NOTE When setting this parameter, ensure that the automatic loopback release function is enabled.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
22.1.10 Specifications of the HSC1

NOTE
Table 22-8 lists the optical specifications of the HSC1 board. Table 22-8 Optical specifications of the HSC1 board Item Signal rate Operating wavelength range Signal coding
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit Mbit/s nm -
Value 4.096 1500 to 1520 CMI

2011
Item Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload
Unit dBm dBm dBm
Value 5 to 10 -48 -3
Power Consumption
HSC1
22.2 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board

The available functional versions of the SC1 board are TN11, TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 SC1 TN12 SC1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y

None
Original Board TN11SC1 Substitute Board TN12SC1 Substitution Rules The TN12SC1 can be created as TN11SC1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC1 functions as the TN11SC1. -
TN12SC1
None
22.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC1 board processes one channel of supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the SC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-5. Figure 22-5 Position of the SC1 board in the WDM system
OA F I U F I U
OA SC2 SCC OA F I U F I U
OA
SCC
SC1
SC1
SCC
OA
OA
NE1
NE2
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-5, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. When configured as described above, the entire network can be managed. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

The SC1 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-9.
Table 22-9 Functions and features of the SC1 board Function and Feature Basic function Technical features Description
The SC1 board receives, processes, and transmits one optical supervisory signal. The SC1 supports a maximum of 48 dB span transmission. The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the optical supervisory channel (OSC). The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC1 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.
The SC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also performs the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be received and new supervisory signals are added. The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported

The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, CMI encoding module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2014
Figure 22-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board
RM
O/E
CMI decoding module
CMI encoding module
E/O
TM
Signal Flow

0 1 2 3
...
14
15
16
...
31
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2015
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 22-10. Table 22-10 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number 1 2 3-13, 15 Name E1 byte F1 byte D1-D12 bytes Function Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface. DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing. 14 17 ALC byte F2 byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
18
F3 byte
19 21-23
Other
Module Function
l l l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal. Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal. CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

22.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC1 board.

Figure 22-8 shows the front panel of the SC1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2017
Figure 22-8 Front panel of the SC1 board
SC1
TM RM
SC1
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the SC1 board. Table 22-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 22-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC1 board Interface TM RM EOW Type LC LC Function Transmits the supervisory signal. Receives the supervisory signal. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to implement orderwire communication between NEs.
Laser Hazard Level

22.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SC1 board. Table 22-12 shows the valid slots for the TN11SC1 board. Table 22-12 Valid slots for the TN11SC1 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 22-13 shows the valid slots for the TN12SC1 board. Table 22-13 Valid slots for the TN12SC1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
22.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1

The characteristic code for the SC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and optical interface number.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-14. Table 22-14 Characteristic code for the SC1 board Code First character Second to the tenth characters Meaning Optical signal wavelength range Description The first character is always W. The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board. The eleventh character is always P. The number of the optical interface is one.
For example, the characteristic code for the SC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical interface is one.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-15. Table 22-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel RM/TM Interface on the NM 1
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the SC1, refer to Table 22-16.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2020
Table 22-16 SC1 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Optical Interface Loopback Value 240/1510.00/198.540 Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. This parameter is queriable only.
This parameter is queriable only. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
22.2.10 Specifications of the SC1

Table 22-17 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board. Table 22-17 Optical specifications of the SC1 board Item Signal ratea Operating wavelength range Signal coding Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Unit Mbit/s nm dBm dBm dBm Value 16.896 1500 to 1520 CMI -4 to 0 -46 -3 -48 4.096
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2021
Item
Unit
Value
a: The SC1 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
Power Consumption
SC1
22.3 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit

Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 SC2 TN12 SC2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y

None
Original Board TN11SC2 Substitute Board TN12SC2 Substitution Rules The TN12SC2 can be created as TN11SC2 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC2 functions as the TN11SC2. -
TN12SC2
None
22.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC2 board processes two channels of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. For the position of the SC2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-9. Figure 22-9 Position of the SC2 board in the WDM system
OA F I U F I U OA SC2 SCC OA F I U F I U OA
SCC
SC1
SC1
SCC
OA
OA
NE1
NE2
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 22-9, you can manage NE1 directly by logging in to it through the Ethernet. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment that you can manage through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. By logging in to NE1 and managing NE2 and NE3 through the supervisory channel, the entire network can be managed. The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

The SC2 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-18.
Table 22-18 Functions and features of the SC2 board Function and Feature Basic function Technical features Description
The SC2 board receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals. The SC2 board supports a maximum of 48 dB span transmission. The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the OSC. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The SC2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.
The SC2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also provides the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be received and new supervisory signals are added. The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Inloop Outloop
Supported Supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported

The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2024
Figure 22-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board
RM1
O/E O/E Optical receiving module CMI decoding module Overhead processing module CMI encoding module
E/O E/O Optical transmitting module
TM1 TM2
RM2
Signal Flow

0 1 2 3
...
14
15
16
...
31
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2025
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table 22-19. Table 22-19 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC Timeslot Number 1 2 3-13, 15 Name E1 byte F1 byte D1-D12 bytes Function Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface. DCC channel Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and performances. The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the SCC for processing. 14 17 ALC byte F2 byte Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol byte. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of specific maintenance. Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes. Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
18
F3 byte
19 21-23
Other
Module Function
l l l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals. Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals. CMI encoding/decoding module Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s signal. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

22.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC2 board.

Figure 22-12 shows the front panel of the SC2 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2027
Figure 22-12 Front panel of the SC2 board
SC2
TM1 RM1 TM2 RM2
SC2
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the SC2 board. Table 22-20 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 22-20 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC2 board Interface TM1/TM2 RM1/RM2 EOW Type LC LC Function Transmits the first/second supervisory signal. Receives the first/second supervisory signal. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to realize orderwire communication between NEs.
Laser Hazard Level

22.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SC2 board. Table 22-21 shows the valid slots for the TN11SC2 board. Table 22-21 Valid slots for the TN11SC2 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 22-22 shows the valid slots for the TN12SC2 board. Table 22-22 Valid slots for the TN12SC2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
22.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2

The characteristic code for the SC2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and optical interface number.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-23. Table 22-23 Characteristic code for the SC2 board Code First character Second to tenth characters Meaning Optical signal wavelength range Description The first character is always W. The optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm processed by the board. The eleventh character is always P. The numbers of optical interface are two.
For example, the characteristic code for the SC2 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical interface are two.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-24. Table 22-24 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel RM1/TM1 RM2/TM2 Interface on the NM 1 2
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the SC2, refer to Table 22-25.
Table 22-25 SC2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type Optical Interface Loopback Value 240/1510.00/198.540 Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. This parameter is queriable only.
This parameter is queriable only. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
22.3.10 Specifications of the SC2

Table 22-26 lists the optical specifications of the SC2. Table 22-26 Optical specifications of the SC2 board Item Signal ratea Operating wavelength range Signal coding Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Unit Mbit/s nm dBm dBm dBm Value 16.896 1500 to 1520 CMI -4 to 0 -46 -3 -48 4.096
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2031
Item
Unit
Value
a: The SC2 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
Power Consumption
SC2
22.4 ST2
ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit

The available functional versions of the ST2 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 ST2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
22.4.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the ST2 board processes two channels of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. In addition, the ST2 board can process the IEEE 1588v2 protocol for time synchronization. The ST2 board also supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical signals.
For the position of the ST2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 22-13. Figure 22-13 Position of the ST2 board in the WDM system
OA
SCC
ST2
OA
S F I U / F I U
S F I U / F I U
OA
ST2 scc
OA
S F I U / F I U
S F I U / F I U
OA
ST2
SCC
OA
NE1
NE2
NE3
Transmits and receives two channels of optical supervisory signals in the west and east directions. In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. You can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage it directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment that you can manage remotely through the supervisory channel if there is no data line connected. In the scenario described above, you can manage the entire network. The SCC of NE1 sends network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the SFIU/FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The SFIU/FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.
Performs IEEE 1588v2 clock synchronization. Extracts clock signals and provides the clock signals for clock synchronization on an NE. The extracted clock signals can also function as a clock source for the clock board on this NE. Sends clock signals of an NE to the downstream NE. Passes through west and east IEEE 1588v2 packets and service clock signals. Reports the time information to a clock board for time synchronization on an NE where the clock board is located.
Transparently transmit two channels of FE electrical signals. NE1: In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM2 port. In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives an FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. NE2: FE optical signals are directly passed at this NE. The ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and send it to the downstream board through its TM2 port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2033
NE3: In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM1 board and drops it through its WSC1 port. Or the ST2 board receives the FE optical signal through its RM2 board and drops it through its WSC2 port. In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM1 port. Or the ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the downstream board through its TM2 port.

The ST2 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. In addition, the ST2 board supports the IEEE 1588v2 function. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 22-27. Table 22-27 Functions and features of the ST2 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals. Supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical signals. Supports IEEE 1588 V2 function. Supports physical clock function. Supports a maximum of 40 dB transmission. Supports outloops. Technical features The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC. The ST2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not properly installed, the ST2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations. Regeneration function The ST2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added. When the ST2 board works with the SFIU board, the signal wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM1/TM1 is 1511 nm, and the signal wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM2/TM2 is 1491 nm. When the ST2 board works with the FIU board, the supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1511 nm. Optical-layer ASON eSFP Supported The board supports pluggable optical modules that use 1511 nm and 1491 nm wavelengths.
Operating wavelength
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)

The ST2 board consists of the optical receiving module, service processing module, 1588 module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 22-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board. Figure 22-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board
WSC1
FE signal processing module Supervisory signal processing module
WSC2
RM1 RM2
O/E O/E
E/O E/O
TM1 TM2
1588 module
Control Memory
CPU
Communication
Control and communication module Power supply module Fuse Required Voltage
Signal Flow
l The optical supervisory signal from the FIU/SFIU board is converted into an electrical signal by the O/E module. After the conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the service processing module. The service processing module extracts the supervisory information from the electrical signal and sends the supervisory information to the SCC board for processing. In addition, the service processing module extracts a clock signal and sends the clock signal to the STG board for processing. The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board, and the clock signal and time information processed by the STG board are sent to the E/O module, where they are converted into an optical supervisory signal.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The FE signals are processed separately in the transmit and receive directions. l In the transmit direction: The ST2 board receives a local FE electrical signal through its WSC1 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board through its TM1 port. The ST2 board receives another local FE electrical signal through its WSC2 port and sends it to the FE signal processing module for encapsulation. Then, the ST2 board transmits it together with the optical supervisory signal to the downstream board through its TM2 port. In the receive direction: The ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal and an FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM1 board and sends the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2 board drops it through its WSC1 port. In addition, the ST2 board receives the optical supervisory signal and another FE optical signal from the upstream board through its RM2 board and sends the FE optical signal to the FE signal processing module for decapsulation. Then, the ST2 board drops it through its WSC2 port.
Module Function
l l l Optical receiving module Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals. Optical transmitting module Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals. Service processing module FE signal processing module: Encapsulates and decapsulates FE signals. Supervisory signal processing module: Encapsulates electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames, processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding. 1588 module Sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol, or extracts the clock signal from the optical supervisory signals according to the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then sends the clock signal to the STG board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
22.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board.

Figure 22-15 shows the front panel of the ST2 board.
Figure 22-15 Front panel of the ST2 board

ST2
WSC1
WSC2
TM1 RM1 TM2 RM2
ST2
Indicators
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces, one orderwire phone interface and two FE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board. Table 22-28 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2037
Table 22-28 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ST2 board Interface TM1/TM2 RM1/RM2 WSC1/WSC2a EOW Type LC LC RJ45 Function Transmits the first/second supervisory signal. Receives the first/second supervisory signal. Transmits/Receives the first/second channel of FE electrical signals. Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires to implement orderwire communication between NEs.
a: Connect a shielded network cable without protection boot to the WSC1 or WSC2 interface on the TN11ST2 board.
Laser Hazard Level

22.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one ST2 board. Table 22-29 shows the valid slots for the ST2 board. Table 22-29 Valid slots for the ST2 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU8, IU11IU16 IU2-IU5
22.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2

The characteristic code for the ST2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the wavelength range and optical interface number. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 22-30.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2038
Table 22-30 Characteristic code for the ST2 board Code First character Second to tenth characters Meaning Optical signal wavelength range Description The first character is always W. The optical signal wavelength range is 1484.5 nm to 1517.5 nm processed by the board. The eleventh character is always P. The numbers of optical interface are two.
For example, the characteristic code for the ST2 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical interface are two.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 22-31. Table 22-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ST2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel RM1/TM1 RM2/TM2 Interface on the NM 1 2
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the ST2, refer to Table 22-32.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2039
Table 22-32 ST2 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Loopback Value Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default: NonLoopback Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
NOTE Only support Non-Loopback and Outloop. When setting this parameter, ensure that the automatic loopback release function is enabled.
Laser Status
Off, On Default: On
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board. See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more information. This parameter is queriable only.
Band Type/ Wavelength No./ Wavelength (nm)/ Frequency (THz) Band Type DEG Threshold
0 to 10167 Default: 190
This parameter is queriable only. Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An alarm is reported when error codes detected in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than the value of this parameter. Sets the signal monitoring time. If the number of bit errors in the signal exceeds DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm is reported. Sets error codes thresholds for signals before FEC.
DEG Monitoring Time(s)
2 to 10 Default: 7
Degrade Threshold Before FEC
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9, 1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12, Default: 1E-4
22.4.10 Specifications of the ST2

Table 22-33 lists the optical specifications of the ST2.
Table 22-33 Optical specifications of the ST2 board Item Signal rate Operating wavelength range Unit Mbit/s nm Value 155.52 1504.5 to 1517.5 1484.5 to 1497.5 Launched optical power Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload dBm dBm dBm 0.5 to 5 -41 -10
Power Consumption
ST2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2041
23 Optical Protection Unit
23
About This Chapter
23.2 OLP OLP: optical line protection unit
Optical Protection Unit
23.1 DCP DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
23.3 SCS SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2042
23.1 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit

The available functional versions of the DCP board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 DCP TN12 DCP OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y
Type
Board TN11DCP Type 01 02 TN12DCP 01 Description Supports the single-mode optical module. Supports the multi-mode optical module. Supports the single-mode optical module.

l Function: The TN11DCP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules. The TN12DCP supports single-mode optical module. l Specification: The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 23.1.10 Specifications of the DCP.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2043
Original Board TN11DCP Substitute Board TN12DCP Substitution Rules In the case of single mode, the TN12DCP can substitute for the TN11DCP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version. -
TN12DCP
None
23.1.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the DCP board implements intra-board 1+1 protection, optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection) and client-side 1+1 protection. For the position of the DCP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-1, Figure 23-2 and Figure 23-3. Figure 23-1 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO11 TO21 MUX TI1 RO1 RI1 1
DMUX RI21 FIU FIU

TO11 RO1 TI1 OTU
OTU
RI11 RI21 DMUX
MUX TO21
RI12
DCP TO12
TI2
DCP
RO2 TI2
OTU RO2
TO22 MUX RI12 RI22 DMUX
DMUX RI22 FIU FIU

TO12
OTU
MUX TO22
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP board does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2044
Figure 23-2 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (OWSP protection)
OTU1 OTU2 2 1 OADM (West) 2 1 (West) 2 1 OADM (East) 1 2 OTU1 OTU2
2/1
1/2 2 x DCP
2/1 2 x DCP
1/2
FIU
FIU
OADM 2/1 (East) 1/2 (East) FIU
OADM 2/1 (West) 1/2 FIU
FIU OADM 1/2 (West) 2/1 2 x DCP 2/1 1/2
FIU 2/1 OADM 1/2 (East)
2 1 OADM (East) 1 2
FIU
FIU
2 1 OADM (West) 1 2
2 x DCP
2/1 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 OTU1
1/2
: Working signal
: Protection signal
: Optical signal
Figure 23-3 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TI1 RO1 TO21 RI21 TO11 RI11
MUX OTU (W) FIU DMUX MUX FIU DMUX FIU FIU
DMUX MUX DMUX
RI11 TO11
Client-side
RO1 TI1
OTU RI21 (W)
TO21 RI12 TO12
DCP
TI2 RO2
TO12 RI12
DCP
RO2 TI2
OTU TO22 (P)

RI22
OTU (P) RI22 MUX
TO22
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the DCP board can be used for client-side protection.

The DCP board provides intra-board 1+1 protection, OWSP protection and client-side 1+1 protection.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-1. Table 23-1 Functions and features of the DCP board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU, which has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two signals to implement 1+1 protection. l Provides client-side 1+1 protection, using a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services. l Provides the OWSP protection, make use of two different channels to achieve the protection of one channel of service between all stations. Protection scheme The intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection: l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and singleended switching. l If the performance of the working fiber declines, the system automatically switches the service from the working path to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is not needed.
NOTE The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-ended switching for GE services.
The OWSP protection: l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and dualended switching. l When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system automatically switches the service from the working path to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is needed. Optical-layer ASON Supported

The DCP board contains the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2046
Figure 23-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board
TI1 TI2 RO1 TO11 TO12 TO21 TO22 RI11 RI12 RI21 RI22
Optical switch Optical switch
RO2
Optical power detecting module Optical module
Signal Flow
One DCP board supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals. The DCP board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals. l Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11 and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts. Signal dual-fed part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. Signal selection part Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
23.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board.

Figure 23-5 shows the front panel of the DCP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2048
Figure 23-5 Front panel of the DCP board
DCP
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TO11 RI11 TO12 RI12 TO21 RI21 TO22 RI22 RO1 TI1 RO2 TI2
DCP
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board. Table 23-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 23-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCP board Interface TI1 Type LC Function Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (clientside 1+1 protection) Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP protection) TI2 LC Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection) RO1 LC Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU board. (OWSP protection) RO2 LC Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection) Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection) TO11 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection) TO12 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2050
Interface TO21
Type LC
Function Transmits the second channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board in the same station by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
TO22
LC
Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
RI11/RI12
LC
Receives the first channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the working route and protection route, respectively. (OWSP protection)
RI21/RI22
LC
Receives the second channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intraboard 1+1 protection) Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
Laser Hazard Level

23.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DCP board. Table 23-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11DCP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2051
Table 23-3 Valid slots for the TN11DCP board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IIU1-IU17 IU11, IU2-IU5
Table 23-4 shows the valid slots for the TN12DCP board. Table 23-4 Valid slots for the TN12DCP board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IIU1-IU17 IU11, IU2-IU5
23.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP

The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 23-5. Table 23-5 Characteristic code for the DCP board Code First character Second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-6. Table 23-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TO11/RI11 TO12/RI12 TO21/RI21 TO22/RI22 TI1/RO1 TI2/RO2 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DCP, refer to Table 23-7. Table 23-7 DCP parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Value -35 - -10 Default: -35 Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2053
Field Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Value -10 - 10 Default: 0
Description The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. See D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. See D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
3-8 Default: 5
23.1.10 Specifications of the DCP

Table 23-8 Optical specifications of the DCP on the OptiX OSN 8800 Interface Item Unit Value TN11DCPa TI1-TO11 TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22 RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
TN12DCPb 4 -
Insertion loss at the transmit end
Single-mode multimode
dB dB
4.5
Insertion loss at the receive end
Single-mode Multi-mode
dB dB
1.5 -
2054
Interface
Item
Unit
Value TN11DCPa TN12DCPb -35 to 7 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 5 3 to 8
Range of the input optical power Operating wavelength range
Single-mode Multi-mode Single-mode
dBmdBm nm
-35 to 0 -
Multi-mode Switching threshold of optical power difference Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference
nm dB dB
830 to 870 5 3 to 8
a: TN11DCP has no single-mode optical module. b: TN12DCP has no multi-mode optical module.
Table 23-9 Optical specifications of the DCP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 Interface Item Unit Value TN11DCP TI1-TO11 TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22 RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2 Insertion loss at the transmit end Single-mode Multi-mode dB dB 4 4.5 TN12DCPa 4 -
Insertion loss at the receive end
dB dB
1.5 2
1.5 -
Range of the input optical power Operating wavelength range
Single-mode Multi-mode Single-mode
dBm dBm nm
-35 to 7 -35 to 0 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 830 to 870 5
-35 to 7 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 5
Multi-mode Switching threshold of optical power difference
nm dB
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2055
Interface
Item
Unit
Value TN11DCP TN12DCPa 3 to 8
Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference
dB
3 to 8
a: TN12DCP board has no multi-mode optical module.
Power Consumption
DCP
23.2 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit

The available functional versions of the OLP board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 OLP TN12 OLP OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2056
Type
Table 23-10 lists the type description of the TN11OLP board. Table 23-10 Type description of the TN11OLP board Board TN11OLP TN11OLP Type 01 02 Description Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection. Supports multi-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection.
Table 23-11 lists the type description of the TN12OLP board. Table 23-11 Type description of the TN12OLP board Board TN12OLP Type 01 Description Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal power application; supports client 1+1 protection and intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for high power application; supports optical line protection.
03

l Function: The TN11OLP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical modules. It supports only normal power application. The TN12OLP supports single mode optical modules. It supports not only normal power application but also high power application. l Specification: The power consumption varies according to versions. For details, see 23.2.10 Specifications of the OLP.
Original Board TN11OLP Substitute Board TN12OLP Substitution Rules In single mode, the TN12OLP can substitute for the TN11OLP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00 or a later version.
2057
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Original Board TN12OLP
Substitute Board None
Substitution Rules -
23.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the OLP board provides the optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection, and client-side 1+1 protection. For the position of the OLP board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-6, Figure 23-7, Figure 23-8 and Figure 23-9. Figure 23-6 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, application 1)
OTU OTU MUX
TI TO1 RI1 RI1 TO1 RO
DMUX
OTU OTU
FIU OTU OTU

RO
OLP
TO2 RI2 TO2 RI2
OLP
TI
FIU OTU OTU
DMUX
MUX
NOTE
Figure 23-7 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, application 2)
OTU OTU MUX OA OA OLP OA OTU OTU DMUX OA FIU FIU FIU FIU OA OA MUX OTU OTU FIU FIU FIU FIU OA OA OLP DMUX OTU OTU
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2058
Figure 23-8 Position of the TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO1
MUX FIU
DMUX
DMUX
RI1 TO1
RI1
FIU MUX
OTU
TI RO OLP
TO2 RI2
MUX FIU
DMUX
DMUX
RI2
OLP
RO TI OTU
FIU MUX
TO2
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
Figure 23-9 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN11OLP02/TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TO1 RI1 RO OLP TO2 OTU RI2 (P) TI
Cient-side OTU (W) MUX FIU

DMUX DMUX
FIU MUX
OTU RI1 (W) TO1 OLP

RO TI
MUX FIU
DMUX
DMUX
FIU MUX
OTU RI2 (P) TO2
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the OLP board can be used for client-side protection.

The OLP board provides optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-12. Table 23-12 Functions and features of the OLP board Function and Feature Basic function Description Provides the optical line protection to ensure the normal receiving of signals when the line fiber fails. Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Provides client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.
Function and Feature Protection scheme
Description The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-ended switching.
NOTE The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-ended switching for GE services.
Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is not required. Optical-layer ASON Supported

The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board. Figure 23-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board
TI TO1 TO2 RI1 RI2 Optical power detecting module
Optical switch
RO
Optical module
SCC
Signal Flow
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Transmit direction
The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO optical interface. The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part. Signal dual-fed part Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. Signal selection part Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
23.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OLP board.

Figure 23-11 shows the front panel of the OLP board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2061
Figure 23-11 Front panel of the OLP board
OLP
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
TO1 RI1 TO2 RI2 RO TI
OLP
Indicators
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the OLP board. Table 23-13 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 23-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OLP board Interface TI Type LC Function Receives the line signal from the FIU board. (optical line protection) Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection) RO LC Transmits the line signal to the FIU board. (optical line protection) Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection) TO1/TO2 LC Transmits the working and the protection signals to the line side. (optical line protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Transmits signals to the working and the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection) RI1/RI2 LC Receives the working or the protection signal from the line side. (optical line protection) Receives the signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection) Receives the signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Laser Hazard Level

23.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one OLP board. Table 23-14 shows the valid slots for the TN11OLP board. Table 23-14 Valid slots for the TN11OLP board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2063
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IIU1-IU17 IU11, IU2-IU5
Table 23-15 shows the valid slots for the TN12OLP board. Table 23-15 Valid slots for the TN12OLP board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IIU1-IU17 IU11, IU2-IU5
23.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP

The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 23-16. Table 23-16 Characteristic code for the OLP board Code First character Second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2064

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-17. Table 23-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TO1/RI1 TO2/RI2 TI/RO Interface on the NM 1 2 3
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OLP, refer to Table 23-18. Table 23-18 OLP parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) Value -35 to -10 Default: -35 for more information. Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2065
Field Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Value -10 to 10 Default: 0
Description The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. See D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. See D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
3 to 8 Default: 5
23.2.10 Specifications of the OLP

Table 23-19 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 8800 Interfa ce TI-TO1 TI-TO2 Item Unit Value TN11OLPa Insertio n loss at the transmit end Insertio n loss at the receive end single mode multimo de single mode multimo de dB dB dB dB 4.5 2 TN12OLP01b 4 TN12OLP03b 4 -
RI1-RO RI2-RO
1.5 -
1.5 -
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2066
Interfa ce
Item
Unit
Value TN11OLPa TN12OLP01b -35 to 7 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 5 3 to 8 TN12OLP03b -30 to 23 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 5 3 to 8
Range of the input optical power
single mode multimo de
dBm dBm nm nm dB dB
-35 to 0 830 to 870 5 3 to 8
Operating wavelength range
single mode multimo de
Switching threshold of optical power difference Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference
a: TN11OLP has no single mode optical module. b: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.
Table 23-20 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800 Interfa ce TI-TO1 TI-TO2 Item Unit Value TN11OLP Insertio n loss at the transmit end Insertio n loss at the receive end single mode multimo de single mode multimo de single mode multimo de Operating wavelength range single mode dB dB dB dB dBm dBm nm 4 4.5 1.5 2 -35 to 7 -35 to 0 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 TN12OLP01a 4 TN12OLP03a 4 -
RI1-RO RI2-RO
1.5 -35 to 7 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567
1.5 -30 to 23 1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567
Range of the input optical power
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2067
Interfa ce
Item
Unit
Value TN11OLP TN12OLP01a 5 3 to 8 TN12OLP03a 5 3 to 8
multimo de Switching threshold of optical power difference Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power difference
nm dB dB
830 to 870 5 3 to 8
a: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.
Weight l l TN11OLP: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.) TN12OLP: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11OLP TN12OLP
23.3 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit

The available functional versions of the SCS board is TN11.

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2068
Boar d TN11 SCS
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Type
Board SCS Type 01 02 Description Supports single-mode optical module. Supports multi-mode optical module.
23.3.2 Application
As a type of optical protection unit, the SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and boardlevel protection (extended mode). For the position of the SCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 23-12 and Figure 23-13. Figure 23-12 Position of the SCS board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TI1 RO1 TO11 RI11
MUX FIU
DMUX
OTU TO21 (W)

RI21
DMUX
FIU MUX
DMUX
OTU (W) RI21
RI11 TO11
Client-side
RO1 TI1
TO21 RI12 TO12
SCS
TI2 RO2
TO12 RI12
SCS
RO2 TI2
OTU TO22 (P)

RI22
MUX FIU
DMUX
FIU MUX
OTU (P) RI22
TO22
Figure 23-13 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended mode)
TBE1 TBE2 TBE1 TBE2 O A D M O A D M
TBE1 TBE2 TBE1 TBE2
R1
S C S
L 4 G
F I U
F I U
L 4 G
S C S
R1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2069

The SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and board-level protection (extended mode). For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 23-21. Table 23-21 Functions and features of the SCS board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and implements client-side 1+1 protection. l Receives signals from the working and the protection TBE and implements board-level protection (extended mode). Protection scheme The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need protocol support. Instead, the channel protection executes switching by detecting SD and SF events of the channel. Not supported
Optical-layer ASON

The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 23-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2070
Figure 23-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board
Optical module
TI1 TI2 RO1 RO2
Splitter Splitter Coupler Coupler
TO11 TO12 TO21 TO22 RI11 RI12 RI21 RI22
SCC
Signal Flow
One SCS board supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The SCS board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals. l Transmit direction The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces. l Receive direction The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the coupler. The system activates one of the two channels of optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of path optical signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface. Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection OTU is standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching. The system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module consists of the splitters and couplers.
Splitter Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels. Coupler Receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system selects one channel of optical signals based on the service quality. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
23.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board.

Figure 23-15 shows the front panel of the SCS board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2072
Figure 23-15 Front panel of the SCS board
SCS
STAT
TO11 RI11 TO12 RI12 TO21 RI21 TO22 RI22 RO1 TI1 RO2 TI2
SCS
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board. Table 23-22 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 23-22 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SCS board Interface TI1/TI2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Type LC
Function Receives the first/second channel of client-side signals.

2073
Interface RO1/RO2 TO11/TO12 TO21/TO22 RI11/RI12 RI21/RI22
Type LC LC LC LC LC
Function Transmits the first/second channel of client-side signals. Transmits the first channel of signals to the working and protection OTU. Transmits the second channel of signals to the working and the protection OTU. Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU.
Laser Hazard Level

23.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SCS board. Table 23-23 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCS board. Table 23-23 Valid slots for the TN11SCS board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IIU1-IU17 IU11, IU2-IU5
23.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS

The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 23-24.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2074
Table 23-24 Characteristic code for the SCS board Code First character Second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 23-25. Table 23-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TI1/RO1 TO11/RI11 TO12/RI12 TI2/RO2 TO21/RI21 TO22/RI22 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the SCS, refer to Table 23-26.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2075
Table 23-26 SCS parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and queries the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value.
23.3.10 Specifications of the SCS

Table 23-27 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board. Table 23-27 Optical specifications of the SCS board Interface TI1-TO11 TI1-TO12 TI2-TO21 TI2-TO22 RI11-RO1 RI12-RO1 RI21-RO2 RI22-RO2 Item Splitting insertion loss Single-mode Multi-mode Unit dB dB Value 4 4.5
Coupling insertion loss
dB dB
4 4.5
Operating wavelength range
nm nm
1270 to 1350, 1528 to 1567 830 to 870
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2076
Power Consumption
SCS
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2077
24 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
24
About This Chapter
Spectrum Analyzer Unit
24.1 MCA4 MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit 24.2 MCA8 MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit 24.3 OPM8 OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board 24.4 WMU WMU: wavelength monitored unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2078
24.1 MCA4
MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

The available functional versions of the MCA4 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 MCA 4 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Type
Table 24-1 lists the types of the MCA4 board. Table 24-1 Type description of the MCA4 board Board TN11MCA 4 Type 01 02 Description Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals. Detects optical power of 40 Gbit/s or lower signals. Detects OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
NOTE In a 40G/10G hybrid system, if the spacing between channels carrying 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s signals is 50 GHz, OSNR of all signals cannot be detected.
24.1.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA4 board supports spectral analysis for four channels. For the position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2079
Figure 24-1 Position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system

OTU OTU
MCA4 MCA4
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU OTU OTU OTU
OTU OTU
DMUX
OAU
OAU
MUX
NOTE
The MCA4 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and transmit ends, you can configure the MCA4 boards at both ends for supervision.

The MCA4 board is mainly used for spectral analysis, APE and power detection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-2. Table 24-2 Functions and features of the MCA4 board Function and Feature Basic function Detection function Description Provides the spectral analysis for four channels. Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC board. The following information can be displayed on the U2000. l Optical power of the channel l Central wavelength l Optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR)
NOTE The board only detects the OSNRs of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals. In a 40G/10G hybrid system, if the spacing between channels carrying 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s signals is 50 GHz, OSNR of all signals cannot be detected.
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path APE function Implements the APE function in cooperation with other boards. Detects the optical power of each channel. Optical-layer ASON Supported

The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board.
Figure 24-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board
IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04 1 4
Spectrum analysis module
optical switch Control signal Driving signal Driving and control module Data signal
Signal Flow
The 1x4 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
l 1x4 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed four channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Spectrum analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths. l Driving and control module Drives and controls spectrum. Controls the 1x4 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Control and communication module Controls board operations.
24.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board.

Figure 24-3 shows the front panel of the MCA4 board. Figure 24-3 Front panel of the MCA4 board
MCA4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
MCA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2082
Indicators
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board. Table 24-3 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA4 board Interface IN1-IN4 Type LC Function Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same time.
24.1.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MCA4 board. Table 24-4 shows the valid slots for the MCA4 board. Table 24-4 Valid slots for the MCA4 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16 IU2-IU5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2083

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
24.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4

The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-5. Table 24-5 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-6. Table 24-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1-IN4 Interface on the NM 1-4

For parameters of the MCA4, refer to Table 24-7. Table 24-7 MCA4 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Monitoring Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. Sets the optical interface monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface. Sets the working band types of a board.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band Actual Working Band Parity Configure Working Band Parity Port Band Wavelength Monitor Status
All, Odd, Even Default: All No Monitor, Monitor Default: No Monitor
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Displays port name and wavelength frequency. Displays the current band. Sets whether to monitor the current wavelength. It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor. Displays the board name. The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA). See D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) for more information. parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status. See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Board Optical Switch No.
Monitor Interval (min.)
5 - 49995 Default: 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2085
Field WDM type
Value Default, 100-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 50-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 100-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps, 50-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps Default: Default
Description -
24.1.10 Specifications of the MCA4

Table 24-8 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board. Table 24-8 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board Item Operating wavelength range Detect range for single channel optical power Detect accuracy for optical power Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.) Detect accuracy for central wavelength Numbers of optical interface Unit nm dBm dB dB Value 1529-1561 -30 to -10 1.5 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) 2 (OSNR: 19 to 23) 0.1 4
nm pcs
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77 F) (W) 8.0
Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 8.5

2086
MCA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
24.2 MCA8
MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit

The available functional versions of the MCA8 board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 MCA 8 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
Type
Table 24-9 lists the types of the MCA8 board. Table 24-9 Type description of the MCA8 board Board TN11MCA 8 Type 01 02 Description Detects optical power and OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals. Detects optical power of 40 Gbit/s or lower signals. Detects OSNR of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
NOTE In a 40G/10G hybrid system, if the spacing between channels carrying 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s signals is 50 GHz, OSNR of all signals cannot be detected.
24.2.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA8 board supports spectral analysis for eight channels. For the position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-4.
Figure 24-4 Position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system

OTU OTU
MCA8 MCA8
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU OTU OTU OTU
OTU OTU
DMUX
OAU
OAU
MUX
NOTE
The MCA8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and transmit ends, you can configure one MCA8 board at each end to provide supervision.

The MCA8 board provides spectral analysis, automatic power equilibrium (APE) and detection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-10. Table 24-10 Functions and features of the MCA8 Function and Feature Basic function Detection function Description Provides spectral analysis for eight channels. Detects the: l Optical power of the channel l Central wavelength l Optical signal-to-noise ratio
NOTE The board only detects the OSNRs of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals. In a 40G/10G hybrid system, if the spacing between channels carrying 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s signals is 50 GHz, OSNR of all signals cannot be detected.
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path The MCA8 reports the detected data to the SCC. The U2000 can display the detected information. APE function Implements the APE function when the board is used with other required boards. Detects the optical power of each channel. Optical-layer ASON Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2088

The MCA8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board. Figure 24-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board
IN01 IN02 IN03 IN04
Spectrum analysis module optical switch Control signal Driving signal Driving and control module Data signal
1 8
Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and transmits the channel to the spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The U2000 reports the final spectrum analysis results.
Module Function
l 1x8 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Spectrum analysis module Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of wavelengths. l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Driving and control module

Drives and controls spectrum. Controls the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
24.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA8 board.

Figure 24-6 shows the front panel of the MCA8 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2090
Figure 24-6 Front panel of the MCA8 board
MCA8
STAT ACT PROG SRV
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8
MCA8
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA8 board. Table 24-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2091
Table 24-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA8 board Interface IN1-IN8 Type LC Function Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same time.
24.2.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MCA8 board. Table 24-12 shows the valid slots for the MCA8 board. Table 24-12 Valid slots for the MCA8 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU18, IU20-IU26, and IU29IU35 IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17 IU1-IU16 IU2-IU5
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For the OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU1. For the OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of the two slots in the chassis. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is IU2.
24.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8

The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-13.
Table 24-13 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card processes optical signals in the C band.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-14. Table 24-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1-IN8 Interface on the NM 1-8

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the MCA8, refer to Table 24-15. Table 24-15 MCA8 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Monitoring Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. Sets the optical interface monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface.
2093
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Field Configure Band
Value C Default: C
Description Sets the working band type of a board.
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Displays port name and wavelength frequency. Displays the current band. Sets whether to monitor the current wavelength. It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor. Displays the board name. The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA). See D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) for more information. parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status. See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) for more information. -
Monitor Interval (min.)
5 - 49995 Default: 10
WDM type
Default, 100-GHz Spacing with CRZ, 50GHz Spacing with CRZ, 100-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps, 50-GHz Spacing with 40Gbps Default: Default
24.2.10 Specifications of the MCA8

Table 24-16 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board. Table 24-16 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board Item Operating wavelength range Detect range for single channel optical power Detect accuracy for optical power Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.) Detect accuracy for central wavelength Numbers of optical interface Unit nm dBm dBm dB Value 1529-1561 -30 to -10 1.5 1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19) 2 (OSNR: 19 to 23) 0.1 8
nm pcs
Power Consumption
MCA8
24.3 OPM8
OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board

Only one functional version of the OPM8 board is available, that is, TN11.

Boar d TN11 OPM 8
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 Y
24.3.2 Application
The OPM8 board monitors the optical power for eight channels. For the position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-7. Figure 24-7 Position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system
OTU OTU
OPM8 OPM8
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU OTU OTU OTU
OTU OTU
DMUX
OAU
OAU
MUX
NOTE
The OPM8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and transmit ends, you can configure the OPM8 boards at each end for supervision.

The OPM8 board is mainly used for optical power monitoring and APE. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-17. Table 24-17 Functions and features of the OPM8 Function and Feature Basic function Monitoring function Description Provides the spectral analysis for eight channels. Detects optical power of channels and reports the central wavelength and optical power to the SCC board. The results are reported to the SCC and can be displayed on the U2000. APE function Implements the APE function when the board is used with other required boards. Monitors the optical power of each channel.
Function and Feature Optical-layer ASON
Description Supported

The OPM8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, optical power monitor module, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OPM8 board. Figure 24-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the OPM8 board
1 8 optical switch Control signal
Optical power monitor module Driving signal Driving and control module Data signal
Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals from the board it is connected to, and sends the channel to the optical power monitor module. After being analyzed and converted, the optical power value is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module reports the value to the SCC board and the U2000. The final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2097
Module Function
l 1x8 optical switch Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals for optical. l Optical power monitor module Monitors channel optical power and wavelength information and reports the data to the driving and control module. l Driving and control module Drives and scans spectrum. Instructs the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum analysis. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
24.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board.

Figure 24-9 shows the front panel of the OPM8 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2098
Figure 24-9 Front panel of the OPM8 board
OPM8
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OPM8
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board. Table 24-18 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2099
Table 24-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OPM8 board Interface IN1-IN8 Type LC Function Connects to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to "MON" interfaces of other boards at the same time.
24.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one OPM8 board. Table 24-19 shows the valid slots for the OPM8 board. Table 24-19 Valid slots for the OPM8 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
24.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8

The characteristic code for the OPM8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 24-20. Table 24-20 Characteristic code for the OPM8 board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OPM8 board is C, indicating C band.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2100

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the OPM8, refer to Table 24-21. Table 24-21 OPM8 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Monitoring Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. Sets the optical interface monitoring state. When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface. Sets the working band type of a board.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Queries the actual working band of the board. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band. Displays port name and wavelength frequency. Displays the current band. Sets whether to monitor the current wavelength. It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor. Displays the board name. The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA). See D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) for more information.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2101
Field Monitor Interval (min.)
Value 5 - 49995 Default: 10
Description parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status. See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) for more information.
24.3.9 Specifications of the OPM8

Table 24-22 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board. Table 24-22 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board Item Operating wavelength range Detect range for single channel optical power Detected accuracy for optical power Channel spacing Numbers of optical interface Unit nm dBm dB GHz pcs Value 1529-1561 -30 to -10 1.5 50/100 8
Power Consumption
TN11OPM8
24.4 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit

The available functional version of the WMU board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 WM U OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 N
24.4.2 Application
The WMU board monitors the wavelengths at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing in the system. For the position of the WMU board in the WDM system, see Figure 24-10. Figure 24-10 Position of the WMU board in the WDM system
OSC DMUX OA DMUX FIU ITL WMU OA MUX DMUX OA ITL MUX MUX OA WMU FIU
MUX
DMUX
O O O O T T T T U U U U
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2103

NOTE
One WMU board can implement the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions. Figure 24-10 shows the two WMU boards, which, however, refer to the same WMU board.

The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths at a channel spacing of 50 GHz/100 GHz on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 24-23. Table 24-23 Functions and features of the WMU board Function and Feature Basic function Description The board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, and performs centralized monitoring of the fixed-wavelengths on the OTU at the transmit end in a transmission system. In addition, the board can monitor the wavelengths in two different optical transmit directions. The optical switch is used to select the optical signals from the desired transmission direction to monitor. Supported
Optical switch Optical-layer ASON

The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength and power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 24-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WMU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2104
Figure 24-11 Functional block diagram of the WMU board
IN1 IN2
1X2 optical switch Control signal
Optical wavelength and power detection module Driving signal Control Data signal
Memory
CPU
Communication
Signal Flow
The 1x2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical wavelength and power detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, the wavelength and optical power information is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further reports the results to the SCC board and the U2000. The final results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
l 1x2 optical switch Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for optical wavelength and power detection. l Optical wavelength and power detection module Detects each single-wavelength optical signals from the optical channel selection module, and reports the wavelength and optical power information to the SCC board. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board.
24.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board.

Figure 24-12 shows the front panel of the WMU board. Figure 24-12 Front panel of the WMU board
WMU
STAT ACT PROG SRV
IN1 IN2
WMU
Indicators
l l l l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board. Table 24-24 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 24-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WMU board Interface IN1/IN2 Type LC Function Connects to the MON optical interface on the optical amplifier boards in two different transmit directions, respectively, for centralized wavelength monitoring.
24.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses on WMU board.
Valid Slots
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 24-25. Table 24-25 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2107
Interface on the Panel IN2

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For WMU parameters, refer to Table 24-26. Table 24-26 WMU parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value.
24.4.9 Specifications of the WMU

Table 24-27 Optical specifications of the WMU board Item Operating wavelength range Adjacent channel spacing Per-channel input optical power range Detect accuracy for central wavelength Detect accuracy for single channel optical power Detect range for Central wavelength offset Unit nm GHz dBm GHz dB GHz Value 1529-1561 50/100 -36 to -16 <2.5 <2 -10 to 10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Weight: 1.0 kg (2.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 12 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 15
TN11WMU
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2109
25 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
25
Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
About This Chapter

25.1 VA1 VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit 25.2 VA4 VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2110
25.1 VA1
VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

The available functional versions of the VA1 board are TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 VA1 TN12 VA1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y

l Specification: For the specification of each version, see 25.1.10 Specifications of the VA1.
Original Board TN11VA1 Substitute Board TN12VA1 Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R003 or a later version. -
TN12VA1
None
25.1.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA1 board implements the power adjustment for one signal. For the position of the VA1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-1.
Figure 25-1 Position of the VA1 board in the WDM system

OTU OTU VA1 VA1 VA1 OA MR2 OA VA1 MR2 OA VA1 OTU OTU VA1 VA1 VA1 OA

The VA1 board adjusts optical power and provides power-off protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-1. Table 25-1 Functions and features of the VA1 board Function and Feature Basic function Power-off protection Description Queries the attenuation and adjusts the optical power of one optical signal according to the control command sent by the SCC. Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages to the corresponding optical receiver due to high optical power when the power supply recovers. TN11VA1: When there is no power supplied to the VA1, the attenuation of the VA1 changes to its maximum value automatically. Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA1 still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time. TN12VA1: When there is no power supplied to the VA1, the attenuation of the VA1 keeps the original value or changes to its maximum value automatically. When being the maximum value, shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA1 still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time. Attenuation range The variable attenuation range is between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.
NOTE The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA1 is 1.5 dB.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2112

The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA1. Figure 25-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1
IN
Variable optical attenuator
OUT
SCC
Signal Flow
According to commands sent by the SCC board, the VA1 board adjusts the power of the input optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l l Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals. Driving and control module Detects the input and output optical power of the VA1 board. Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
25.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA1 board.

Figure 25-3 shows the front panel of the VA1 board. Figure 25-3 Front panel of the VA1 board
VA1
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
OUT IN
VA1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2114
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA1 board. Table 25-2 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 25-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA1 board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives the optical signals to be adjusted. Transmits the adjusted optical signals.
Laser Hazard Level

25.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one VA1.
Valid Slots
Table 25-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA1 board. Table 25-3 Valid slots for the TN11VA1 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 25-4 shows the valid slots for the TN12VA1 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2115
Table 25-4 Valid slots for the TN12VA1 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
25.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1

The characteristic code for the VA1 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 25-5. Table 25-5 Characteristic code for the VA1 board Code Digits 1 through 3 Meaning Attenuation value Description Indicate the maximum attenuation.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 25-6. Table 25-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1
NOTE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2116

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the VA1, refer to Table 25-7. Table 25-7 VA1 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the working band type of a board.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Actual Band
Queries the actual working band of the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2117
Description The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
25.1.10 Specifications of the VA1

TN11VA1 Optical Specifications

Table 25-8 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board. Table 25-8 Optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board Item IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy Unit dB dB dB Value 1.5 20 1

Table 25-9 lists the optical specifications of the TN12VA1 board. Table 25-9 Optical specifications of the TN12VA1 board Item IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy Unit dB dB dB Value 1.5 20 1 (attenuation10dB) 1.5 (attenuation15dB) 1.8 (attenuation>15dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2118
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Type Typical Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W) 6.5 Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W) 7.2
VA1
25.2 VA4
VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

The available functional versions of the VA4 board areare TN11 and TN12.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 VA4 TN12 VA4 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y Y

l Specification: For the specification of each version, see 25.2.10 Specifications of the VA4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2119
Original Board TN11VA4 Substitute Board TN12VA4 Substitution Rules Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R003 or a later version. -
TN12VA4
None
25.2.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA4 board adjusts optical power for four optical signals. For the position of the VA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 25-4. Figure 25-4 Position of the VA4 board in the WDM system
OTU OTU VA4 VA4 OA MR2 OA VA4 VA4 MR2 OA VA4 OTU OTU VA4 VA4 OA

The VA4 board is mainly used to adjust optical power and provide power-off protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 25-10. Table 25-10 Functions and features of the VA4 board Function and Feature Basic function Description Queries the attenuation and adjust the optical power of four optical signals respectively according to the control command sent by the SCC.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2120
Function and Feature Power-off protection
Description Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding optical receiver caused by too-high optical power when the power supply recovers. TN11VA1: When there is no power supplied to the VA4, the attenuation of the VA4 changes to its maximum value automatically. Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4 still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time. TN12VA4: When there is no power supplied to the VA4, the attenuation of the VA4 keeps the original value or changes to its maximum value automatically. When at the maximum value, shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4 still remains at its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set the previous time.
Attenuation range
The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.
NOTE The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA4 is 1.5 dB.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The VA4 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 25-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA4.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2121
Figure 25-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
Variable optical attenuator Variable optical attenuator Variable optical attenuator Variable optical attenuator
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
SCC
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA4 board adjusts the power of four channels of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l l Variable optical attenuator Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals. Driving and control module Detects the input and output optical power of the VA4 board. Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board.
25.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA4 board.

Figure 25-6 shows the front panel of the VA4 board. Figure 25-6 Front panel of the VA4 board
VA4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CAUTION
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
VA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2123
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA4 board. Table 25-11 lists the type and function of each interface. Table 25-11 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA4 board Interface IN1-IN4 OUT1-OUT4 Type LC LC Function Receives the optical signals to be adjusted. Transmits the adjusted optical signals.
Laser Hazard Level

25.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one VA4 board.
Valid Slots
Table 25-12 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA4 board. Table 25-12 Valid slots for TN11VA4 board Product OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 25-13 shows the valid slots for the TN12VA4 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2124
Table 25-13 Valid slots for TN12VA4 board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
25.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4

The characteristic code for the VA4 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 25-14. Table 25-14 Characteristic code for the VA4 board Code First to third digits Meaning Attenuation value Description Indicate the maximum attenuation.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 25-15. Table 25-15 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 IN3/OUT3 IN4/OUT4 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2125

NOTE

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For VA4 Parameters, refer to Table 25-16. Table 25-16 VA4 parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) Value Value of Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) to Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Default: Value of Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range. You can obtain the value range of this parameter by querying the corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters. See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more information. Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board. See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) for more information. Sets the working band type of a board.
Configure Band
C Default: C
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2126
Field Actual Band Channel Use Status
Description Queries the actual working band of the board. The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for more information. The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. See D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more information. Queries the parity of the actual working band of the board. Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm)
25.2.10 Specifications of the VA4


Table 25-17 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA4 board. Table 25-17 Optical specifications of the TN11VA4 board Item IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy Unit dB dB dB Value 1.5 20 1

Table 25-18 lists the optical specifications of the TN12VA4 board.
Table 25-18 Optical specifications of the TN12VA4 board Item IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss Dynamic attenuation range Adjustment accuracy Unit dB dB dB Value 1.5 20 1 (attenuation10 dB) 1.5 (attenuation15 dB) 1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)
Power Consumption
VA4
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2128
26 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
26
About This Chapter
Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
26.1 DCU DCU: dispersion compensation unit 26.2 TDC TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2129
26.1 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit

The available functional version of the DCU board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 DCU OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Y OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Y OptiX OSN 6800 Y OptiX OSN 3800 Y
26.1.2 Application
As a kind of dispersion compensation board, the DCU board is used at the transmit or receive end in the transmission system to compensate for the dispersion that is accumulated in an optical transmission system. For the position of the DCU board in the WDM system, see Figure 26-1. Figure 26-1 Position of the DCU board in the WDM system
DCU OTU OTU OTU OTU DCU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU OTU MUX DMUX OTU OTU OTU OTU
OBU
OAU
DMUX
OAU
OBU
MUX
MUX
DCU
OBU
OAU
DMUX
DMUX
OAU
OBU
DCU
MUX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2130

The DCU board compensates for the dispersion that is accumulated in the fiber during transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals to be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board, the DCU board can implement long haul optical transmission. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 26-1. Table 26-1 Functions and features of the DCU board Function and Feature Basic function Dispersion compensation method Long haul transmission with optical regeneration Optical-layer ASON Description Provides dispersion compensation for different transmission distance. Compensates for the dispersion accumulated in an optical transmission system, and compresses the optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals to be restored at the output end. Implements long haul transmission when used together with an optical amplifier board. Supported

The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication module, and power supply module. Figure 26-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2131
Figure 26-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board
IN
Dispersion compensation EDFA optical module module Control Memory CPU Communication
OUT
Signal Flow
The dispersion compensation module (DCM) performs the dispersion compensation with the main path optical signals received through the IN optical interface. Then, the signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l The dispersion compensation module After the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. This severely affects the system transmission performance. The DCM employs the negative dispersion borne with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) to offset the positive dispersion in the transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2132
26.1.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board.

Figure 26-3 shows the front panel of the DCU board. Figure 26-3 Front panel of the DCU board
DCU
OUT IN
DCU
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board. Table 26-2 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2133
Table 26-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCU board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in terms of dispersion. Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been compensated in terms of dispersion.
Laser Hazard Level

26.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DCU board. Table 26-3 shows the valid slots for the DCU board. Table 26-3 Valid slots for the DCU board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN 3800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17 IU2-IU5, IU11
26.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU

The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 26-4. Table 26-4 Characteristic code for the DCU board Code Character before hyphen (-) Character after hyphen (-) Meaning Fiber type Dispersion compensation distance Description Type of the fiber that the DCU board works with The transmission distance achieved through dispersion compensation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2134
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 26-5. Table 26-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN OUT Interface on the NM 1 2

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the DCU, refer to Table 26-6. Table 26-6 DCU parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value.
26.1.10 Specifications of the DCU

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2135
Table 26-7 Optical specifications of the DCU board (1) Item Unit Value DC U0 1 Typical dispersion compensation distance Maximum insertion loss Dispersion compensation slope Polarization mode dispersion Polarization-dependent loss Maximum input power a Operating wavelength range Dispersion compensating fiber type km dB ps dB dBm nm 20 3.3 DC U0 2 40 4.7 DC U0 3 60 6.4 DC U0 4 80 8 DC U0 5 100 9 DC U06 120 9.8 D CU 07 5 2.3 DCU0 8 10 2.8
90%-110% 0.4 0.1 20 0.5 0.1 20 0.6 0.1 20 0.7 0.1 20 0.8 0.1 20 0.8 0.1 20 0.3 0.1 20 0.3 0.1 20
1528-1568 G.652 fiber
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
Table 26-8 Optical specifications of the DCU board (2) Item Unit Value DCU 11 Typical dispersion compensation distance Maximum insertion loss Dispersion compensation slope Polarization mode dispersion Polarization-dependent loss
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
DCU 12 40 5
DCU 13 60 5.9
DCU 14 80 6.9
DCU1 5 100 7.8
DCU1 6 120 8.8
km dB ps dB
20 4
90%-110% 0.4 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.8 0.3 0.9 0.3 1.0 0.3
2136
Item
Unit
Value DCU 11 DCU 12 20 DCU 13 20 DCU 14 20 DCU1 5 20 DCU1 6 20
Maximum input power a Operating wavelength range Dispersion compensating fiber type
dBm nm -
20
1528-1568 G.655 fiber
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
TN11DCU
26.2 TDC
TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board

The available hardware version of the TDC board is TN11.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 TDC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
OptiX OSN 6800 Y
OptiX OSN 3800 N
2137
Type
Table 26-9 lists the types of the TDC board. Table 26-9 Type description of the TDC board Board TN11TDC Type 01 02 Description Compensates for dispersion of DQPSK and ODB optical modules. Compensates for dispersion of DRZ optical modules.
26.2.2 Application
The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in one channel. If a 40 Gbit/s OTU board is configured with intra-board 1+1 protection, the TDC board must be configured on the protection path at the receive end. For the application of the board in a WDM system, see Figure 26-4. Figure 26-4 Application of the TDC board in a WDM system
M40 M40 OA OA OA OA D40 D40 TDC
O T U
O L P
O L P
O T U
D40 TDC D40
OA OA
OA OA
M40 M40

The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in a single channel and reports information. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 26-10.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2138
Table 26-10 Functions and features of the TDC board Function and Feature Basic function Description The TDC board is used for C-band optical signals. Compensates for the dispersion in the single channel. The dispersion is adjustable. Information report Optical-layer ASON Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information about the board. Supported by TN11TDC01.

The TDC board consists of the optical module, the driving and detection module, the control and communication module, and the power supply module. Figure 26-5 is the functional block diagram of the TDC board. Figure 26-5 Functional block diagram of the TDC board
Optical module
IN
Tunable dispersion compensation module

Data signal
OUT
Driving signal
Power supply module

Fuse Required voltage
SCC
Back plane (Controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2139
Signal Flow
The TDC reports hardware information and alarm events to the SCC through the communication module. One single wavelength optical signal is input through the IN interface. After the dispersion is compensated for by the compensation module, the signal is output through the OUT.
Module Function
l Optical module The optical module of the TDC board contains a tunable dispersion compensation module. The system can adjust for the dispersion of the compensation module. l Driving and detection module Drives and controls the TDC module, and reports the detected dispersion to the control and communication module. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
26.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicator and interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board.

Figure 26-6 shows the front panel of the TDC board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2140
Figure 26-6 Front panel of the TDC board
TDC
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT IN
TDC
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board. Table 26-11 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 26-11 Types and functions of the TDC interfaces Interface IN OUT Connector Type LC LC Description Connected to the optical demultiplexer to input a single signal that is to be equalized. Connected to the OTU to output the equalized a single signal.
Laser Hazard Level

26.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TDC board. Table 26-12 shows the valid slots for the TDC board. Table 26-12 Valid slots for the TDC board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36 IU1-IU18 IU1-IU17
26.2.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC

The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 26-13. Table 26-13 Characteristic code for the TDC board Code Character before hyphen (-) Character after hyphen (-) Meaning Fiber type Dispersion compensation distance Description Fiber type that the TDC board is compatible with The transmission distance achieved through dispersion compensation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2142
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is tunable.

This section introduces information such as slots, interfaces and parameters for the TDC configuration in an NM system.

Table 26-14 shows the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical interface on the panel of the board. Table 26-14 Display of the optical interfaces on the TDC board Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1
NOTE
An optical interface displayed on the NM denotes a pair of actual optical interfaces, one of which serves to receive signals and the other of which serves to transmit signals.

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NMS. For parameters of the TDC, refer to Table 26-15. Table 26-15 TDC parameters Field Optical Interface/ Channel Optical Interface Name Value Description Displays the position of the optical interface. Sets and displays the optical interface name. It is recommended to use the default value.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2143
Description Sets Receive Wavelength of a board. The value of the Receive Wavelength is as follows: l When the receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board, use the default value, which indicates keeping the receive wavelength the same as the transmit wavelength of the local board automatically. l When the receive wavelength of the board is different from the transmit wavelength of the local board, the value of this parameter must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board; otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE For ASON services, this parameter must be set to the default value. Only C band is supported.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for more information.
26.2.10 Specifications of the TDC

Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and power consumption.
Table 26-16 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board. Table 26-16 Optical specifications of the TDC board Parameter Optical channels Dispersion tuning range
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Unit ps/nm
Value 80 400
2144
Parameter Dispersion tuning resolution Input power range Dispersion accuracy Output optical power
Unit sec dBm ps/nm dBm
Value <15 -13 to 0 10 The output optical power should be close to the input power, with an error range of 1.5 dB.
The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows: l l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) Weight: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
TN11TDC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2145
27 Clock Unit
27
About This Chapter
27.1 STG STG: Centralized Clock Board
Clock Unit
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2146
27 Clock Unit
27.1 STG
STG: Centralized Clock Board

The available functional versions of the STG board are TN11, TN52, TNK2.

This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office. Boar d TN11 STG TN52 STG TNK 2STG OptiX OSN 8800 T64 N N Y OptiX OSN 8800 T32 N Y N OptiX OSN 8800 T16 N N N OptiX OSN 6800 Y N N OptiX OSN 3800 N N N

l Appearance: The TN11, TN52 and TNK2 versions use different front panels with different dimensions. See 27.1.5 Front Panel and 27.1.8 Specifications of the STG. l Specification: The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 27.1.8 Specifications of the STG.
The STG boards of different versions cannot replace each other.
27.1.2 Application
The STG board is a type of clock board, which locks the reference clock source and provides clock signals and frame signals to the system. The clock signals comply with ITU-T G.813 and ITU-T G.823. For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, see Figure 27-1. For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, see Figure 27-2. For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 6800, see Figure 27-3.
27 Clock Unit
Figure 27-1 Position of the TNK2STG in OptiX OSN 8800 T64

external clock
STI
external clock
STI
STG Clock signals & Frame signals 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM 4 Client side NS2 WDM side DMUX MUX NS2 WDM side NS2 G.694.1 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2
STG Clock signals & Frame signals 1 TOM 4 Client side 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.
Figure 27-2 Position of the TN52STG in OptiX 8800 T32

external clock
STI
external clock
STI
STG Clock signals & Frame signals 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM 4 Client side NS2 WDM side DMUX MUX NS2 WDM side NS2 G.694.1 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2
STG Clock signals & Frame signals 1 TOM 4 Client side 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.
Figure 27-3 Position of the TN11STG in OptiX OSN 6800

external clock STG Clock signals & Frame signals 1 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s TOM 4 Client side NS2 WDM side DMUX MUX NS2 WDM side 4 Client side NS2 G.694.1 MUX DMUX G.694.1 NS2 1 TOM 100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s external clock STG Clock signals & Frame signals
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2148

NOTE
27 Clock Unit
When the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, the external clock is input on the STG board.

The STG board is mainly used to lock the reference clock source and provide signal signals and frame signals to the system. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 27-1. Table 27-1 Functions and features of the STG board Function and Feature Basic function Description l Locks the reference clock source. l Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G. 813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals. l Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream system. Active/standby switching function In the OptiX OSN 8800, the STG board uses a 1+1 hot backup scheme. The two STGs serve as mutual backups. When both of them are normal, one of them functions as the active board, and the other functions as the standby board. Service boards select the clock source according to the status of the two STGs. When the active STG is faulty, an active/standby switching occurs. Then, the standby STG becomes active, and the services boards select the clock from the current active STG according to the status of the two STGs. Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the system. Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.
Clock source selection function Time synchronization function

The STG board consists of a control and communication module and a clock processing module. Figure 27-4 shows the functional block diagram of the STG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2149
27 Clock Unit
Figure 27-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the STG board
Time signals/ Clock signals Clock signals/Frame signals
Clock processing module
Module Function
l Clock processing module The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter, clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module. Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source. Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE. l Control and communication module Controls board operations. Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions. Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage detection from each functional module on the board. Communicates with the SCC board. l Power supply module Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2150
27 Clock Unit
27.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the STG board.

Figure 27-5 shows the front panel of the TNK2STG board. Figure 27-6 shows the front panel of the TN52STG board. Figure 27-7 shows the front panel of the TN11STG board. Figure 27-5 Front panel of the TNK2STG board
STG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
Figure 27-6 Front panel of the TN52STG board

STG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2151
27 Clock Unit
Figure 27-7 Front panel of the TN11STG board
STG
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TOD
CLK
IN
OUT
STG
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 27-2 lists details on the interfaces of the TN11STG board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2152
27 Clock Unit
Table 27-2 Interface description of the STG board Interface IN OUT CLK TOD Connector SMB SMB RJ-45 RJ-45 Function Clock signal input interface Clock signal output interface Clock signal input and output interface Time signal input and output interface
NOTE The CLK port and the IN/OUT port cannot be used as the input or output port at the same time. If the CLK port is used to input or output clock signals, the IN/OUT port cannot be used to input/output clock signals. If the IN/OUT port is used to input/output clock signals, the CLK port cannot be used to input or output clock signals.
27.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one STG board. Table 27-3 shows the valid slots for the TN11STG board. Table 27-3 Valid slots for the TN11STG board Product OptiX OSN 6800 Valid Slots IU15, IU16
Table 27-4 shows the valid slots for the TN52STG board. Table 27-4 Valid slots for the TN52STG board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Valid Slots IU42, IU44
Table 27-5 shows the valid slots for the TNK2STG board. Table 27-5 Valid slots for the TNK2STG board Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Valid Slots IU75, IU86
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2153
27 Clock Unit
27.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG

None
27.1.8 Specifications of the STG

l Dimensions of the front panel: TNK2STG: 50.3mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) TN52STG: 28.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2 in. (H)) TN11STG: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H)) l Weight: TN52STG/TNK2STG: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) TN11STG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
TNK2STG TN52STG TN11STG
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2154
28 OCS System Unit
28
About This Chapter
28.1 BPA BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board
OCS System Unit
28.2 EAS2 EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board 28.3 EGSH EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board 28.4 SF64 SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 28.5 SF64A SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 28.6 SFD64 SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function 28.7 SL64 SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board 28.8 SLD64 SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board 28.9 SLH41 SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board 28.10 SLO16 SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board 28.11 SLQ16 SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board 28.12 SLQ64 SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2155
28 OCS System Unit
28.1 BPA
BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board

Only one functional version of the BPA board is available, that is, N4.
28.1.2 Application
The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA board provides a BA and a PA, which are respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN 8800. Figure 28-1 shows the position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system. Figure 28-1 Position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system
Tx
BA
Rx
Tx
PA
Rx

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high. Therefore, the BA and PA are required to ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal optical signals. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-1. Table 28-1 Functions and features of the BPA board Function and Feature Basic functions Description Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 13 15 dBm. As a result, when the G.652 optical fiber with a loss of 0.275 dB/km is used, the transmission distance can be 120 km or above.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2156
28 OCS System Unit
Function and Feature Pre-amplification function
Description Provides the PA module to pre-amplify the received optical signals. Increases the power of the small-volume optical signals by 2233 dB so that the sensitivity of the receiver increases to 37 dBm. l Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module. l Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output optical power of the EDFA module and query of the optical power of the EDFA module. l Supports the protection function of the EDFA module. When no optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned off. When optical signals are received, the laser is automatically turned on.
EDFA
Performance events and alarms monitoring Software upgrade
Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the laser. Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Supports the software upgrade without interrupting services.

The BPA board consists of the optical part, driving and detecting part, and data processing and communication part. Figure 28-2 shows the function modules and signal flow of the BPA board. Figure 28-2 Function modules and signal flow of the BPA board
Optical input Optical output Optical input Optical output
EDFA optical module
Optical part
Pump current check
Drive module
Module temperature control
Input/output power check
Pump Drive current module check
Module temperature control
Input/output power check
Driving and detecting part
A/D or D/A conversion Data processing and communication part
SCC
Control module
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2157
28 OCS System Unit
Optical Part
The BPA board has one EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module magnifies the optical power.
Driving and Detecting Part

The driving and detecting part provides the EDFA optical module with the driving current. It also checks the working status of each part in the EDFA optical module. In addition, it predicts and handles possible faults. The driving and detecting part performs the following functions: checking the pump current, driving the optical module, controlling the temperature of the optical module, and checking the input and output optical power.
Data Processing and Communication Part

The data processing and communication part consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. The data processing and communication part analyzes the test result of the tested circuit. Then, it adjusts the driving circuit based on the analysis result so that the gain or output optical power of the EDFA optical module remains in the range of the rated value. It also classifies the abnormal states represented by the measured values and reports the abnormal states to the NMS.
28.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the BPA board.

Figure 28-3 shows the front panel of the BPA board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2158
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-3 Front panel of the BPA board
BPA
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LASER RADIATION
BOUT BIN POUT PIN
BPA
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board: l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Interfaces
There are two LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BPA board. Table 28-2 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2159
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BPA board Interface BIN BOUT PIN POUT Type LC LC LC LC Function Receives one channel of optical signals for amplification. Transmits one channel of amplified optical signals. Receives one channel of optical signals for preamplification. Transmits one channel of pre-amplified optical signals.
28.1.6 Valid Slots

The BPA board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on the subrack. Otherwise, the board does not function. Valid slots for the BPA board are as follows: l l IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36 on the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68 on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
28.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA

The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the BPA board indicates the output optical power of the optical interfaces. Table 28-3 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical power. Table 28-3 Relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical power Board SSN4BPA01 Characteristic Code 01 Description The receiver sensitivity of the PA module is 37 dBm. The output optical power of the BA module is 14 dBm.

28 OCS System Unit
Display of Optical Interfaces on the NMS

Table 28-4 lists the displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the board on the NMS. Table 28-4 Displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the BPA board on the NMS Optical interface BOUT BIN POUT PIN Displayed serial number on the NMS 1 2 3 4
28.1.9 Specifications of the BPA

Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
Table 28-5 lists the optical specifications of the BPA board. Table 28-5 Optical specifications of the BPA board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Line code pattern Input wavelength (nm) Value 2488320 kbit/s or 9953280 kbit/s V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, and U-64.2 NRZ BA: 1530 to 1565 PA: 1550.12 Input optical power (dBm) BA: -6 to +3 PA: -28 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at the rate of 10 Gbit/s) PA: -38 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at the rate less than 10 Gbit/s) Output optical power (dBm) Sensitivity (dBm) Noise figure (dB) 13 to 15 (BA) PA: -37 BA: < 6.5 PA: < 6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2161

NOTE
28 OCS System Unit
When you perform a loopback on the PA module of the BPA board, prevent the damage caused by high input optical power to the optical module.
Laser Safety Class

The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1M, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW).
The mechanical specifications of the BPA board are as follows: l l Dimensions (mm): 25.4 (W) x 220 (D) x 262.05 (H) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 11 W
28.2 EAS2
EAS2: 2-port 10xGE switching and processing board

The EAS2 is available in the following functional version: N3.
28.2.2 Application
The EAS2 is used to access Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services. Figure 28-4 shows the typical networking and application of the Ethernet switching board. The Ethernet switching board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/demapping for data. The Ethernet switching board can be interconnected with the bandwidth access equipment and the data communication equipment at the same time, thus to provide a network-level solution.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2162
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-4 Networking and application of the Ethernet switching board
NMS
User A2 PORT 1 VLAN 100 NE2
NE1
MSP ring NE3
NE4
PORT 2 VLAN 100
PORT 2 User B2 Service flow Line board Data board Cross-connect and timing board User A1 VLAN 100 PORT 1 VLAN 100 User B1

The EAS2 supports the access of 10 GE Ethernet services, LCAS, and test frame functions. Table 28-6 provides the functions and features of the EAS2. Table 28-6 Functions and features of the EAS2 Funct ion and Featu re Basic functi ons Interfa ce types Description
Receives/Transmits 2x10 GE Ethernet services.
The optical interfaces are 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-LW Ethernet optical interfaces, which comply with IEEE 802.3ae.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2163
28 OCS System Unit
Funct ion and Featu re Functi ons when being used with an interfa ce board Interfa ce charac teristic s
Description
Provides interfaces on the front panel.
Working modes Flow control at ports
10GE full-duplex Auto-negotiation mode Non-autonegotiation mode Not supported Supported
Query/ Supported Setting of port status Query of interface types RMON measure ment Supported
Supported
Setting of Not supported optical power threshold s Hot optical module swapping Servic e catego ries EPL service Supports hot swapping of SFP+ optical modules.
Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2164
28 OCS System Unit
Funct ion and Featu re
Description
EVPL service
l Supports EVPL services based on PORT+VLAN. l Supports EVPL services based on VCTRUNK+VLAN. l Supports QinQ-based EVPL services. l Supports a maximum of 4096 links.
EPLAN service
l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. The maximum number of supported VBs is 1. l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. l Supports the setting and query of the aging time of the MAC address
EVPLA N service Servic e specifi cation s Formats of Ethernet data frames Maximu m frame length MTU
l Supports EVPLAN services that use the stack VLAN encapsulation. l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. IEEE 802.3 Ethernet II IEEE 802.1q TAG Supported Supported Supported
l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes. l Supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes. Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter the IP ports is restricted by the pre-set MTU. 128xVC-4
Bound bandwidt h Mapping granularit ies Encapsul ation formats
Supports VC-4-Xv (X 64), and VC-4-4c/16c/64c contiguous concatenation services. HDLC LAPS GFP-F Not supported Not supported Supported
MPLS technolo gy
Supports tunnel-based MPLS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2165
28 OCS System Unit
Funct ion and Featu re
Description
VLAN technolo gy Maximu m uplink bandwidt h VCTRU NK specificat ions
Supports a total number of 4095 VLANs, which comply with IEEE 802.1q/p. 20 Gbit/s
Number of VCTRUNKs: 34 Configuration principles are as follows: l VCTRUNKs 1 and 18 can be bound with a maximum of 64 VC-4 paths. The other VCTRUNKs can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4 paths. Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the P2P LPT and P2MP LPT. Supports the broadcast packet suppression and RSTP, which comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports MSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1s. Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation. Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Protec tion schem es
TPS BPS PPS DLAG LCAS LPT STP/ RSTP MSTP LAG
ERPS
Supports ERPS, which complies with ITU-T G.8032.

NOTE ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges: l IEEE 802.1d bridges l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode
Clock synchr onizati on
Synchron ous Ethernet IEEE 1588v2
Supported
Not supported
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2166
28 OCS System Unit
Funct ion and Featu re Maint enanc e featur es
Description
ETHOAM
l Supports multicast continuity check (CC), unicast loopback (LB), link trace (LT), and associated alarms, and complies with IEEE 802.1ag. l Supports OAM automatic discovery and loopback at the remote end, and complies with IEEE 802.3ah.
Test frame Response to ping Port mirroring Loopbac k capabilit y
Supports test frames in ETH and GFP bearer modes. Not supported Supported PHY layer at Ethernet ports MAC layer at Ethernet ports VC-4 level VC-3 level VC-12 level Inloops Inloops Not supported Not supported Not supported
Ethernet performa nce monitori ng (RMON) Alarms and performa nce events QoS
l Supports the Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level. l Supports the query of the rate of a port. l Supports the detection of alarms indicating that the traffic at a port exceeds the threshold.
Provides various alarm and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
l Supports traffic classification that is based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT +VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, MPLS label, or MPLS label+EXP. l Supports CAR with a granularity of 64 kbit/s. l Supports eight levels of priority queues at each port. l Supports port- and queue-based traffic shaping.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2167
28 OCS System Unit
Funct ion and Featu re IGMP snoopi ng
Description
l Supports the enabling of the IGMP snooping protocol. Supports a maximum of 1024 multicast groups. l Supports the query of the enabling status of the IGMP snooping protocol. l Supports the setting and query of the IGMP snooping protocol parameters. l Supports a maximum of 1024 static multicast groups.
Flow contro l functi on SDH ASON
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Supported

The EAS2 consists of the interface processing module, mapping module, interface converting module, logic and control module, clock module, and power module. Figure 28-5 shows the functional block diagram of the EAS2 by describing how to process 1x10 GE signals. Figure 28-5 Functional block diagram of the EAS2
Backplane Encapsulation module Digital encapsulation module Mapping module Virtual concatenation processing module Cross-connect unit
10GE
Interface processing module
Interface converting module
Cross-connect unit
Laser shutdown
LOS Communication Clock reference and frame delimitation SCC unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V
Logic and control module
+3.3 V Clock module Power module
Power module
Fuse
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2168
28 OCS System Unit
In the Transmit Direction

The encapsulation or conversion module demaps and decapsulates the signals received from the cross-connect unit. Then, the interface converting module performs the interface converting operations and transmits the signals to the service processing module. The service processing module implements the functions of the Layer 2 switching and private line service. After the interface processing module converts parallel signals to serial signals and encodes the serial signals, the Ethernet interface module transmits the serial signals.
In the Receive Direction

The SFP+ optical module performs O/E conversion on the 10 GE Ethernet signals, and then transmits the signals to the Ethernet interface module. The Ethernet interface module transmits the parallel signals to the service processing module to realize the functions of the Layer 2 switching and private line service. The encapsulation module encapsulates and maps the Ethernet GFP-F frames, and then transmits the signals to the cross-connect unit.
Logic and Control Module

The logic and control module provides the communication, control, and service configuration functions of the board.
Clock Module
The clock module traces the system reference clock, and generates the required clock signals when the board is working.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board require.
28.2.5 Front Panel

The front panel of the EAS2 has indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label.
Diagram of the Front Panel

Figure 28-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EAS2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2169
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-6 Front panel of the EAS2
EAS2
STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
EAS2
Indicators
The front panel of the board has the following indicators: l l l l l l Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green) Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green) Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow) Connection status indicator (LINK) one color (green) Data receiving and transmission indicator (ACT) one color (orange)
Interfaces
The front panel of the EAS2 has two 10 GE interfaces. Table 28-7 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the EAS2.
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-7 Interfaces of the EAS2 Interface IN1IN2 OUT1OUT2 Type of Interface LC LC Usage Receives 10 GE signals. Transmits 10 GE signals.
28.2.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches

The EAS2 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.2.7 Valid Slots

The EAS2 must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the EAS2 fails to work properly. The EAS2 occupies one slot in the subrack. The EAS2 can be installed in slots IU1 to IU8, IU12 to IU27, and IU29 to IU36 on the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-8. Table 28-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EAS2 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 Interface on the NM 1 2
NOTE
28.2.9 Configuring the Board Functions

The EAS2 supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching, LCAS, and LAG. Configure the functions according to actual requirements. You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the EAS2 by using the U2000: l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
LCAS LPT
28 OCS System Unit
l l l l l l
LAG DLAG ETH-OAM Test Frame STP/RSTP IGMP Snooping

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EAS2 board. On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EAS2 board provides parameters classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 28-9 lists the tab pages in the parameter configuration window. Table 28-9 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on the EAS2 board Port External Port Tab Basic Attributes Flow Control TAG Attributes Network Attributes Advanced Attributes Internal Port TAG Attributes Network Attributes Encapsulation/Mapping LCAS Bound Path
Each parameter of the EAS2 on each tab page is described as follows. l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-10. Table 28-10 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port) Field Port Value Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board.
2172
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
28 OCS System Unit
Field Name
Value For example, PORT-1
Description Specifies the name of a PORT port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese. The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled. See D.8 Enabled/Disabled to obtain the details.
Enabled/Disabled
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN(SONET mode)
Specifies the working mode of the Ethernet port on a board. This parameter determines the maximum transmission rate and communication mode of the Ethernet port. When setting this parameter, you must ensure the working modes of the interconnected ports are the same. Otherwise, the services are not available. Specifies the maximum frame length supported by the Ethernet port. Displays the actual working state of a port. The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.29 MAC Loopback to obtain the details.
Maximum Frame Length
1518-9600 Default: 1522
Port Physical Parameters MAC Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2173
28 OCS System Unit
Field PHY Loopback
Description The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.44 PHY Loopback to obtain the details.
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in Table 28-11. Table 28-11 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port) Field Port Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Value Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only Default: Disable Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-autonegotiation mode. See D.41 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to obtain the details.
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-12. Table 28-12 Parameters on the TAG tab page (external port) Field Port Value Description Displays the type of a VCTRUNK port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2174
28 OCS System Unit
Field TAG
Value Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Default: Tag Aware
Description Specifies the type of a data packet that a port processes. This parameter is available only when the network attribute of the port is PE or UNI. The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier. See D.11 Entry Detection to obtain the details.
Default VLAN ID
VLAN Priority
Entry Detection
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-13. Table 28-13 Parameters on the TAG tab page (internal port) Field Port Value Description Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk. Specifies the name of a VCTRUNK port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese. Specifies the type of a data packet that a port processes. This parameter is available only when the network attribute of the port is PE or UNI.
Name
For example, VCTRUNK-3
TAG
Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Default: Tag Aware
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2175
28 OCS System Unit
Field Default VLAN ID
Value -
Description The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier. See D.11 Entry Detection to obtain the details.
VLAN Priority
Entry Detection
The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-14. Table 28-14 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page Field Port Value Description Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk. Specifies the position of the port in the network. Different port attributes support different types of packets.
Port Attributes
UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware, NNI Default: UNI
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-15. Table 28-15 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port) Field Port Broadcast Packet Suppression Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. The Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2176
28 OCS System Unit
Field Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
Value 10%-100% Default: 30%
Description The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded. See D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold to obtain the details.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are listed in Table 28-16. Table 28-16 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port) Field Port Mapping Protocol Value GFP Default: GFP Scramble Unscrambled, Scrambling mode[X43+1], Scrambling mode[X48+1] Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1] Set Inverse Value for CRC Description Displays the VCTRUNK ports. Specifies the mapping protocol adopted by the VCTRUNK port. Specifies whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol and which scramble mode is adopted. Specifies whether to set an inverse value for the CRC field of the HDLC or LAPS protocol. You can set this parameter only when the mapping protocol is HDLC or LAPS. Check Field Length FCS32, No Default: FCS32 FCS Calculated Bit Sequence Big endian, Little endian Default: Big endian Specifies the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol. Specifies the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2177
28 OCS System Unit
Field Extension Header Option
Value Yes, No Default: No
Description Specifies whether the GFP encapsulation protocol supports the extension header.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table 28-17. Table 28-17 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port) Field Port Value VCTRUNKn Description Indicates the VCTRUNK port. The letter n indicates the number of the VCTRUNK port. The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is automatically increased if the member recovers. The LCAS Mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and Rs_Ack messages received from the source end. The Hold off Time(ms) (LCAS) parameter is also called HO Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies HO Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. If the LCAS coexists with another network-level protection scheme (for example, MSP or SNCP), you can set this parameter to postpone the LCAS switching.
Enabling LCAS
LCAS Mode
Huawei Mode, Standard Mode Default: Huawei Mode
Hold off Time(ms)
0-10000 Default: 2000
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2178
28 OCS System Unit
Field WTR Time(s)
Value 0-720 Default: 300
Description The WTR Time(s) parameter is also called WTR Procedure Timer Duration. It specifies WTR Procedure Timer Duration of the LCAS protocol. Set this parameter to avoid impact caused by the alarm jitter on the link status. The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member. When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min. Members - Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in the transmit direction.
TSD
Min. Members - Transmit Direction
2-256 Default: 256
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2179
28 OCS System Unit
Field Min. Members - Receive Direction
Description Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. If the LCAS is enabled and the number of valid members is less than the specified value, an alarm is reported.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table 28-18. Table 28-18 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port) Field VCTRUNCK Port Level Service Direction Bound Path Value Description Displays the number of the VCTRUNK port. Specifies the level of the VCTRUNK bound path. Specifies the direction of the Ethernet service. Specifies the number of the bound path, including the VC4 path number and VC3 path number. Displays the number of the bound VCTRUNK ports. Displays the channels in use. Displays whether the path is active.
Bound Path Count Used Channel Activation Status
28.2.11 Specifications of the EAS2

The technical specifications of the EAS2 include the parameters specified for optical interfaces, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces

Table 28-19 lists the parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2180
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-19 Parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the EAS2 Parameter Transmission rate Processing capability Type of optical interface Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Transmission distance (km) Maximum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum mean launched power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Connector type Value 10.3125 Gbit/s or 9.953 Gbit/s 2x10GE signals 10GBASE-LR/LW Single-mode LC 1290 to 1330 10 0.5 -8.2 -12.6 3.5 LC
Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on the board is Class 1. The maximum launched optical power of the optical interfaces is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Ethernet Performance Specifications

Figure 28-7 shows the connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case of overloading, latency specifications, and back-to-back specifications of the EAS2. Figure 28-7 Connection for testing the throughput specifications, packet loss ratio in the case of overloading and latency specifications
Tested equipment 1 Tested equipment 2
Port 1 Data network performance analyzer
Port 2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2181
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-20 lists the throughput specifications of the EAS2. Table 28-21 lists the packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2. Table 28-22 lists the latency specifications of the EAS2.
NOTE
The specifications vary according to the configuration and networking of the test environment and the VC services bound on the VCG side. The specifications that are obtained in the actual environment are used. The specifications in the following tables are obtained in the following scenario: EPL services are configured and 64 VC-4s are bound on the 10xGE port. The data network performance is measured by using the SmartBits. The specification values in the following tables are obtained by using the SmartFlow software of the SmartBits analyzer. The specific test results depend on the settings on the SmartFlow. The values listed in the following tables are the values displayed on the SmartBits analyzer. In the following tables, the value such as (01,01,01) indicates the equipment No., slot No., and port No. "(01,01,01) to (01,01,02)" and "(01,01,02) to (01,01,01)", however, indicate the forward and reverse tests values, respectively.
l l l l
Table 28-20 Throughput specifications of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518 Passed Rate (%) 100.00000 98.00000 98.00000 98.00000 97.00000 97.00000 97.00000 Tx Frames (pks/ sec) 14880952 8278145 4432624 2302025 1161710 932835 788146 Rx Frames (pks/ sec) 14880952 8278145 4432624 2286453 1156436 927296 783050 Total (%) 100.00000 100.00000 100.00000 99.32000 99.55000 99.41000 99.35000
Table 28-21 Packet loss ratio in the case of overloading of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518 Rate Tested (%) 100.00000 100.00000 99.00000 98.00000 97.00000 97.00000 97.00000 Tx Frames (pks/ sec) 14880952 8445945 4480286 2302025 1161710 932835 788146 Rx Frames (pks/ sec) 14880952 8445945 4470526 2286453 1156469 927323 783073 Total (%) 0.00 0.00 0.21 0.67 0.45 0.59 0.64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2182
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-22 Latency specifications of the EAS2 Frame Size (byte) 64 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518 Rate Tested (%) 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 96.00000 Tx Frames (pks/sec) 14204544 8116883 4340277 2256317 1148897 923190 780274 Rx Frames (pks/sec) 14204544 8116883 4340277 2256317 1148897 923190 780274 Min Latency (us) 24.4 24.6 25 25.9 27.7 28.6 29.4 Ave Latency (us) 25.681 25.944 26.322 27.176 28.949 29.802 30.562 Max Latency (us) 27.9 28.1 28.5 29.3 31.2 32 32.8
The mechanical specifications of the EAS2 board are as follows: l l Dimensions (mm): 25.4 (W) x 220 (D) x 254.1 (H) Weight (kg): 1.1
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption of the EAS2 at room temperature (25C) is 78 W. The maximum power consumption of the EAS2 at high temperature (55C) is 91 W.
28.3 EGSH
EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board

Only one functional version of the EGSH board is available, that is, N1.
28.3.2 Application
The EGSH board is used in telecommunication domains such as Ethernet service access, bandwidth management, and Ethernet service L2 switching. Figure 28-8 shows the typical networking of the EGSH board. The board provides the following functions: receives and converges Ethernet services; performs L2 switching of Ethernet data; isolates Ethernet data ports; classifies the traffic; controls the data traffic; manages the VLAN; configures data attributes such as the priority; encapsulates and decapsulates data; forms virtual concatenation; maps and demaps SDH signals. In addition, the board can be interconnected with the broadband access equipment and data communication equipment to provide a networkwide solution.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-8 Networking and application of the EGSH board
U2000
User A2 PORT 1 VLAN 100 NE2
NE1 MSP ring NE3 VLAN 100 PORT 2 User B2 Service flow OCS line board OCS data board Cross-connect and timing board User A1 VLAN 100 PORT 1 VLAN 100 User B1
NE4
PORT 2

The EGSH board accesses multiple types of Ethernet services and provides various functions and features such as the MPLS function, VLAN multicast function, QinQ function, and interboard link aggregation function. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-23. Table 28-23 Functions and features of the EGSH board Function and Feature Basic functions Description
The board processes 16xGE services. It provides functions such as O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing, mapping, Layer 2 (L2) switching, and overhead and pointer processing of the service signals. The board is connected to the active and standby cross-connect boards through the backplane. In this manner, data is exchanged and services are groomed. Accesses 16 channels of Ethernet signals by providing interfaces on the front panel.
Functions when being used with the interface board
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2184
28 OCS System Unit
Function and Feature Specificatio ns of the interface
Description
l Supports the 1000BASE-LX and 1000BASE-SX optical interface. l Port 6 and port 8 can work as the 1000BASE-T electrical interface at the same time. l All the sixteen interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3z.
Format of service frames Maximum uplink bandwidth VCTRUNK s
l Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats. l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes and supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes. The maximum uplink bandwidth of the EGSH is 10 Gbit/s.
l The number of supported VCTRUNKs is 24. l One VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or 24 VC-3s. Supports VC-4, VC-3, VC-4-Xv (X8), and VC-3-Xv (X24) granularities. Supports the GFP-F encapsulation. Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission. Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN. l Supports the L2 convergence and point-to-multipoint (P2MP) convergence. l Supports the L2 forwarding function. l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides. l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the MAC address table is 32k. The aging time of the MAC address can be set and queried. l Supports the configuration of the static MAC route. l Supports the query of the dynamic MAC address. l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. Only one VB is supported. The maximum number of logical ports for one VB is 40. l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN. l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB +VLAN or VB+LP. l The services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge are referred to as EPLAN services.
Mapping granularities Encapsulatio n format EPL services EVPL services EPLAN services
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2185
28 OCS System Unit
Function and Feature EVPLAN services
Description
l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN. l Supports 4095 VLANs. l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Bridge or IEEE 802.1ad Provider Bridge.
MTU
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter or exit the IP ports is limited. Supports the MPLS. Supports a maximum of 4000 VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) that comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports the LAG function. Supports the DLAG protection.
MPLS VLAN STP Link aggregation Distributed link aggregation Multicast function ETH-OAM function CAR
Supports the multicast function. Supports continuity check (CC) for the multicast service, loopback (LB) test for the unicast service, link trace (LT) test, loop detection (LD), autonegotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection. Supports the CAR. The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
QoS flow classificatio n LCAS function LPT function Flow control function Highprecision time Test frames
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT +VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, Label Flow, or Label Exp Flow. Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042. Supports the point-to-point (P2P) LPT and P2MP LPT. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 V2 clock at ports 2 and 4. The synchronous Ethernet realizes frequency synchronization, and the IEEE 1588 V2 clock realizes time synchronization. Receives and transmits Ethernet test frames.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2186
28 OCS System Unit
Function and Feature Loopback function Protection schemes
Description
Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer). Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet service layer: l STP/RSTP l LCAS l LPT l LAG l DLAG l ERPS
NOTE ERPS cannot be used on the following bridges: l IEEE 802.1d bridges l IEEE 802.1ad bridges in SVL/Ingress filter disable mode
Ethernet performance monitoring Alarms and performance events Protocol or standard compliance
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment. Protocols or standards (non-performance monitoring) with which transparently transmitted services comply IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1d IEEE 802.1w IEEE 802.1s STP RSTP MSTP All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2187
28 OCS System Unit
Description
IEEE 802.3z interface IEEE 802.3x pause frame IEEE 802.3ad LACP IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1d IEEE 802.1w IEEE 802.1s STP RSTP MSTP
SDH ASON
Supported

The EGSH board consists of the interface module, 1588 clock processing module, L2 service processing module, SDH encapsulation and mapping module, active/standby interface converting module, logic control module, clock module, and power module. The processing of 1xGE signal is considered as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EGSH board. Figure 28-9 shows the function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board. Figure 28-9 Function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board
Backplane GE GE Active/ standby interface converting module
O/E conversion E/O conversion
1588 clock processing module
L2 service processing module
SDH encapsulation and mapping module
Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit
Interface module Laser shutdown LOS
Logic and control module
Communication Reference clock and frame header +3.3V Clock module 66 25 125 155 MHz MHz MHz MHz Power module Power Fuse module
SCC unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2188

NOTE
28 OCS System Unit
Among the 16 ports of the board, only ports 2 and 4 support the 1588 clock processing module.
In the Receive Direction

The interface module receives the series signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router), decodes the signals, and converts the signals into parallel signals. Then, the service processing module delimits the frames, strips the preamble code, terminates the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet performance. The service processing module also classifies the traffic according to the service type and configuration requirements (the packets in the formats of MPLS, L2 MPLS VPN, and Ethernet/ VLAN are supported). In addition, the service processing module adds the tunnel and VC tags to the services according to the service configuration for mapping and forwarding the services. At last, the encapsulation module encapsulates the Ethernet frames in the GFP-F format, and sends the frames to the mapping module where the frames are mapped and are sent to the crossconnect unit on the backplane through the active/standby interface converting module.
In the Transmit Direction

The cross-connect unit sends parallel signals to the encapsulation and mapping module through the active/standby interface converting module for demapping and decapsulation. Then, the service processing module determines a route for the signals according to the level of the equipment on the network, and performs L2 processing of the data services according to the service type and configuration requirements. The service processing module also delimits the frames, adds the preamble code, computes the CRC code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet performance. At last, the interface module converts the parallel signals into serial signals, encodes the serial signals, and outputs the serial signals through the Ethernet interface.
Interface Module
In the receive direction, the interface module converts the optical signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router) into electrical signals, and sends the electrical signals to the L2 service processing module. In the transmit direction, the interface module converts the electrical signals from the L2 service processing module into optical signals.
1588 Clock Processing Module

The board supports the synchronization protocol for two 1588 clocks. On the uplink, the 1588 clock processing module extracts service packets from the Ethernet data signals that it receives, processes the packets, and transparently transmits the Ethernet data signals to the L2 service processing module. The signal flow on the downlink reverses that on the uplink.
L2 Service Processing Module

This module provides functions such as L2 switching of the received and transmitted Ethernet data services, port isolation, traffic classification, data traffic control, VLAN management, and priority configuration.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2189
28 OCS System Unit
SDH Encapsulation and Mapping Module

This module encapsulates the received data services in the GFP format, decapsulates the transmitted data services in the GFP format, and maps and demaps the VC-3/4 service granules in the SDH format.
Active/Standby Interface Converting Module

The active/standby interface module sends the encapsulated SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4 level to the active and standby cross-connect boards, and selects the SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4 level sent from the active and standby cross-connect boards.
Logic Control Module

The logic control module controls the modules on the board and configures services for these modules. In addition, the logic control module selects and traces the clock and header signal sent from the active and standby clock boards.
Clock Module
The clock module traces the system reference clock and generates the clock signals required for each chip. The clock frequency can be 66 MHz, 25 MHz, 125 MHz, or 155 MHz.
Power Supply Module

The power supply module provides the DC voltage required by each module on the board.
28.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a bar code on the front panel of the EGSH board.

Figure 28-10 shows the front panel of the EGSH board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2190
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-10 Front panel of the EGSH board

SM SFP WORK WITH G.657A2 FIBER ONLY G.657A2
EGSH
STAT ACT PROG SRV
RX 1 TX 15 2 TX 16 RX
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the EGSH board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2191
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-24 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 28-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EGSH board Interface RX1RX16 TX1TX16 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.
NOTE
When the 1000BASE-LX optical interface board is used, the G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 28-11 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
Figure 28-11 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper
58.25 50.75
G.657A2 fiber jumper
50.5
28.3.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers

No DIP switch or fiber jumper for setting the board is equipped on the EGSH board.
28.3.7 Valid Slots

The EGSH board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally..
28 OCS System Unit
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the EGSH board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the EGSH board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.3.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH

The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the EGSH board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-25 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH board. Table 28-25 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH board Board SSN1EGSH10 SSN1EGSH11 SSN1EGSH12 SSN1EGSH13 Characteristic Code 10 11 12 13 Optical Interface Type 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 1000BASE-T & 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)a 1000BASE-T & 1000BASE-LX (10 km)b
a: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces, and the other interfaces on the board are 1000BASE-SX optical interfaces. b: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces, and the other interfaces on the board are 1000BASE-LX optical interfaces. The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over the 1000BASE-LX optical interface.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-26. Table 28-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EGSH board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2193
28 OCS System Unit
Interface on the Panel TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 TX9/RX9 TX10/RX10 TX11/RX11 TX12/RX12 TX13/RX13 TX14/RX14 TX15/RX15 TX16/RX16
Interface on the NM 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOTE
28.3.10 Board Protection

The EGSH board supports the distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection. The DLAG protection is a board-level port protection technology. Figure 28-12 shows the slot configuration for the working and protection EGSH boards in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2194
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-12 Slot configuration for the working EGSH board of a DLAG protection group
FAN A S U T X G A U X S T G
EFI2
EF I1
PIU
PIU
PIU
PIU
STI
ATE
IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27
IU28 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU35 IU36
S C C X C H / X C M
IU7 IU8
Fiber routing
X C H / X C M
Fiber routing
IU9 IU10 IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18 IU19
E G S H (A)
E G S H (B)
S C C
E G S H (A)
E G S H (B)
FAN (A): Active (B): Standby
In Table 28-27, the board in slot 5 protects the board in slot 3, and the board in slot 17 protects the board in slot 14. DLAG protection is of board level and protects the services between the ports configured in a protection group on the working and protection boards. Table 28-27 Slot assignment for the EGSH board Board EGSH (protection board) EGSH (working board) Protection Group 1 Slot 5 Slot 3 Protection Group 2 Slot 17 Slot 14
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2195
28 OCS System Unit

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EGSH board. On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EGSH board provides parameters classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 28-28 lists the tab pages in the parameter configuration window. Table 28-28 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on the EGSH board Port External Port Tab Basic Attributes Flow Control TAG Attributes Network Attributes Advanced Attributes Internal Port TAG Attributes Network Attributes Encapsulation/Mapping LCAS Bound Path Advanced Attributes
Each parameter of the EGSH on each tab page is described as follows. l In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-29. Table 28-29 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port) Field Port Name Value For example, PORT-1 Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. Specifies the name of a port. The name can contain up to 32 characters in English or 16 characters in Chinese.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2196
28 OCS System Unit
Field Enabled/Disabled
Description The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled. See D.8 Enabled/Disabled to obtain the details.
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half-Duplex, 10M FullDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, 1000M HalfDuplex, 1000M FullDuplex, 10GE Full-Duplex LAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN, 10GE Full-Duplex WAN(SONET mode) 1518-65535 Default: 1522
Set the Working Mode parameter to set the working mode of the Ethernet port on the board. The Working Mode parameter indicates the maximum transmission rate and communication mode of a port. Specifies the maximum frame length supported by the Ethernet port. Displays the actual working state of a port. The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.29 MAC Loopback to obtain the details.
Maximum Frame Length
Port Physical Parameters MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop Default: Non-Loopback
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2197
28 OCS System Unit
Field PHY Loopback
Value Non-Loopback, Inloop Default: Non-Loopback
Description The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path. See D.44 PHY Loopback to obtain the details. Displays the type of the physical port. Displays the type of the logical port.
Physical Type Logic Type
/ SDH-OPPORT Default: SDH-OPPORT
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in Table 28-30. Table 28-30 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port) Field Port Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Value Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only Default: Disable Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in non-autonegotiation mode. See D.41 NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to obtain the details. Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control, Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control Default: Disabled Specifies the flow control mode adopted when an Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode.
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The parameters on the TAG Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-31.
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-31 Parameters on the TAG tab page Field Port Value Description Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk. Specifies the type of a data packet that a port processes. This parameter is available only when the network attribute of the port is PE or UNI. Specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets. Specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port. The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier. See D.11 Entry Detection to obtain the details. l The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-32. Table 28-32 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page Field Port Value Description Displays the type of port, either PORT or VCTRUNk. Specifies the position of the port in the network. Different port attributes support different types of packets.
TAG
Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Default: Tag Aware
Default VLAN ID
VLAN Priority Entry Detection
Port Attributes
UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware Default: UNI
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-33.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2199
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-33 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port) Field Port Broadcast Packet Suppression Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold Value Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100% Default: 30% Description Displays all ports available on the Ethernet board. Determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets. The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded. Specifies the function of reporting the self-loop alarms. The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is set to disable the self-loop port after a self-loop port is detected if the loop port shutdown function is enabled. After the self-loop port is shut down, the self-loop port only transmits or receives the self-loop detection packets rather than any other packets. If the port is not a self-loop port, it starts to work again.
Loop Detection
Loop Port Shutdown
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are listed in Table 28-34. Table 28-34 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port) Field Port Mapping Protocol Value GFP Default: GFP Description Displays the VCTRUNK ports. Specifies the mapping protocol adopted by the VCTRUNK port.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2200
28 OCS System Unit
Field Scramble
Value Unscrambled, Scrambling mode[X43+1], Scrambling mode[X48+1] Default: Scrambling Mode [X43+1]
Description Specifies whether to scramble the payload area of the encapsulation protocol and which scramble mode is adopted. Specifies whether to set an inverse value for the CRC field of the HDLC or LAPS protocol. Specifies the length of the CRC field of the mapping protocol. Specifies the sequence of storing the bits in the CRC field in the FCS frame of the mapping protocol. Specifies whether the GFP encapsulation protocol supports the extension header.
Set Inverse Value for CRC
Check Field Length
FCS32, No, FCS16 Default: FCS32
FCS Calculated Bit Sequence
Big endian, Little endian Default: Big endian
Extension Header Option
Yes, No Default: No
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table 28-35. Table 28-35 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port) Field Port Enabling LCAS Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays the VCTRUNK ports. The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is automatically increased if the member recovers. See D.10 Enabling LCAS to obtain the details.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2201
28 OCS System Unit
Field LCAS Mode
Value Huawei mode, Standard mode Default: Huawei mode
Description The LCAS mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and Rs_Ack messages received from the source end. See D.23 LCAS Mode to obtain the details.
Hold-off Time(ms)
0, 2000-10000 Default: 2000
Specifies the duration of the HO (Hold Off) Procedure timer of the LCAS protocol. When the LCAS and other network-level protection schemes (such as the MSP and SNCP) coexist, a proper value of the hold-off time can be set to delay the LCAS switching. Specifies the duration of the Wait To Restore (WTR) Procedure timer of the LCAS protocol. A proper value of the WTR time can be set to prevent an alarm jitter from affecting the link status. The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled, and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member. See D.54 TSD to obtain the details.
WTR Time(s)
0-720 Default: 300
TSD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2202
28 OCS System Unit
Field Min. Members-Transmit Direction
Description When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min. Members-Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in the transmit direction. See D.35 Min. MembersTransmit Direction to obtain the details.
Min. Members-Receive Direction
2-256 Default: 256
Specifies the minimum number of members in the receive direction. When the LCAS is enabled and the number of valid members is smaller than this value, an alarm is reported .
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table 28-36. Table 28-36 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port) Field VCTRUNCK Port Level Service Direction Bound Path Value Description Displays the number of the VCTRUNK port. Specifies the level of the VCTRUNK bound path. Specifies the direction of the Ethernet service. Specifies the number of the bound path, including the VC4 path number and VC3 path number. Displays the number of the bound VCTRUNK ports. Displays the channels in use.
Bound Path Count Used Channel
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2203
28 OCS System Unit
Field Activation Status
Value -
Description Displays the activation status of the VCTRUNK.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed in Table 28-37. Table 28-37 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port) Field Port Loop Detection Value Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays the VCTRUNK ports. The Loop Detection parameter specifies the function of reporting the self-loop alarms after one of the following loopback cases is detected. See D.25 Loop Detection to obtain the details. Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Default: Enabled The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is set to disable the self-loop port after a self-loop port is detected if the loop port shutdown function is enabled. After the self-loop port is shut down, the self-loop port only transmits or receives the self-loop detection packets rather than any other packets. If the port is not a self-loop port, it starts to work again. See D.26 Loop Port Shutdown to obtain the details.
28.3.12 Specifications of the EGSH

Specifications include optical specifications, electrical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
Table 28-38 lists the optical specifications of the EGSH board.
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-38 Optical specifications of the EGSH board Item Type of optical interface Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 1000BASE-LX (10 km) Single-mode LC 1270 to 1355 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) Multi-mode LC 770 to 860
9 to 3 20 3 9
9.5 to 3.5 18 0 9
Electrical Specifications
Table 28-39 lists the electrical specifications of the EGSH board. Table 28-39 Electrical specifications of the EGSH board Type of Interface 1000BASE-T, RJ-45 Code Pattern 4D-PAM5
NOTE
Only port 6 and port 8 of the EGSH board can work as the GE electrical interface.
Laser Safety Class

The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1, indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
The mechanical specifications of the EGSH board are as follows: l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
28 OCS System Unit
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 89.3 W
28.4 SF64
SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

Only one functional version of the SF64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.4.2 Application
The SF64 board is a line board. The SF64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SF64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-13 shows the application of the SF64 board. The SF64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 28-13 Networking and application of the SF64 board
NE1 NE2 MSP ring NE4
NE3
Service flow OCS line board Cross-connect board

The SF64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-40.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2206
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-40 Functions and features of the SF64 board Functio n and Feature Basic functions Specificat ions of the optical interface Description
l Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals. l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function. l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei. l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment. l Supports the XFP wavelength-tunable optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services. l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Specificat ions of the optical module Service processin g Overhead processin g
Alarms and performa nce events Specificat ions of the REG Protectio n schemes
Reports various alarms and performance events.
Does not support the REG.
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. l Supports the fiber-shared MSP.
NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64 board supports a maximum of two MSP rings.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2207
28 OCS System Unit
Functio n and Feature Maintena nce features
Description
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocol or standard complian ce
ITU-T G.774.7
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.709 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.774.1 ITU-T G.774.2 ITU-T G.774.3 ITU-T G.774.4 ITU-T G.774.5 ITU-T G.774.6 ITU-T G.774.9 ITU-T G.774.10 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.825 ITU-T G.829
SDH ASON
Supported

The SF64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 28-14 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2208
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-14 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board
Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s 10.71 Gbit/s SPI 10.71 Gbit/s E/O O/E converting module 10.71 Gbit/s MUX MUX/ DEMUX IIC LOS Laser shutdown 669 MHz PLL DEMU X 4x2.67G bit/s 4x2.5G bit/s 622 MHz PLL Reference clock Clock unit
K1 and K2 insertion/extraction
K1 and K2 High-speed bus
SCC unit Cross-connect unit A Cross-connect unit B SCC unit
O/E
4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G bit/s bit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed bus DCC
SDH overhead processing module Frame header Communication Fuse
Logic and control module +3.3 V Power module Power module
Clock unit SCC unit -48 V/-60 V -48 V/-60 V
PLL: phase-locked loop RST: regenerator section termination
SPI: SDH physical interface
SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation -
HPT: higher order path termination -
O/E Converting Module

l l l In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical signals. In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals and sends the SDH optical signals to fibers for transmission. Detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l l In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time. In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
SDH Overhead Processing Module

This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the inloop and outloop functions. l RST sub-module In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte.
28 OCS System Unit
In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.

l l l l l l Manages and configures the other modules of the board. Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface. Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units. Controls the laser. Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units. Controls the indicators on the board.
Power Module
28.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SF64 board.

Figure 28-15 shows the front panel of the SF64 board.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-15 Front panel of the SF64 board
SF64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF64
Indicators
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64 board. Table 28-41 lists the type and function of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2211
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-41 Type and function of the interface on the SF64 board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.

The SF64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.4.7 Valid Slots

The SF64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SF64 board cannot work normally. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SF64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12 IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SF64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11 IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64

The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SF64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-42 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 28-42 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of optical interface Board SSN4SF6401M01 SSN4SF6401 Characteristic Code 01M01 01 Type of Optical Interface Fixed-wavelength optical interface Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e


28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64 board. Table 28-44 lists all the parameters of the SF64 board. Table 28-44 Parameters of the SF64 board Field Port VC3 Path Optical Interface Name Overhead Transfer Mode MSP Sharing Value For example, SDH-1 DCC Mode, GCC Mode Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays all ports available on the line board. Displays all available VC3 paths. Specifies the name of an optical interface. Sets overhead transfer mode of the optical interface. The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface. See D.37 MSP Sharing to obtain the details. Laser Switch Off, On Default: On Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2213
28 OCS System Unit
Field Laser Transmission Distance (m)
Value /
Description The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback
VC4 Path VC4 Loopback
VC12 Channel
28.4.11 Specifications of the SF64

Table 28-45 lists the optical specifications of the SF64 board. Table 28-45 Optical specifications of the SF64 board Item Nominal bit rate Application codea Value 10.709 Gbit/s Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2214
28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)+ OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + MR2 OBU101 (-31 dBm to -34 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU08 (10) + MR2 OBU101 (-34 dBm to -37 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2 OBU101 (-37 dBm to -40 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2
Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm)c Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Single-mode LC 1550.12
1 to +2
-19
10.5
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example, "OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101 is -28 dBm to -31 dBm. b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used. c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not provided.
Table 28-46 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board. Table 28-46 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SF64 board Item Type of optical module Line code format Value 1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable NRZ - 80 channels tunable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2215
28 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Central wavelength (THz) Central wavelength deviation (GHz) Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm) Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB) Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) 3
-1
9 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35
1600
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum reflectance (dB) APD 1260 to 1600
-24
-7 -27
Table 28-47 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2216
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-47 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/ nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 10.709 Gbit/s 40 -1 to 2 -19 0 800 10
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SF64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.7 kg (1.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
28.5 SF64A
SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

Only one functional version of the SF64A board is available, that is, N1.
28.5.2 Application
The SF64A optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64A board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SF64A board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-16 shows the application of the SF64A board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 28-16 Networking and application of the SF64A board
NE3

The SF64A board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-48. Table 28-48 Functions and features of the SF64A board Functio n and Feature Basic functions Specificat ions of the optical interface Description
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals. l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei. l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment. l Supports adjustable wavelengths in DWDM applications.
Specificat ions of the optical module Service processin g

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
28 OCS System Unit
Functio n and Feature Overhead processin g
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication.
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and maintenance.
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64A supports a maximum of two MSP protection rings.
Maintena nce features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2219
28 OCS System Unit
Functio n and Feature
Description
SDH ASON
Supported

The SF64A board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 28-17 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2220
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-17 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board
622MHz 622MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s 10.71 Gbit/s 10.71 Gbit/s DEMUX 16x669 Mbit/s 16x622 Mbit/s 622MHz PLL Reference clock Backplane Clock unit
O/E
K1 and K2 insertion/ extraction
K1 and K2 Highspeed bus
S P I
E/O
10.71 Gbit/s
MUX MUX/ DEMUX module
16x669 FEC 16x622 Mbit/s Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
Highspeed bus DCC
O/E converting module
SDH overhead processing module 669MHzPLL Logic and control module +3.3V Power module Power module Frame header Communication Fuse
IIC LOS Laser shutdown
Clock unit SCC unit -48V/-60V -48V/-60V
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit
The function modules are described as follows:

MUX/DEMUX Module

This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the inloop and outloop functions. l RST sub-module In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes
28 OCS System Unit
except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.

Power Module
28.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SF64A board.

Figure 28-18 shows the front panel of the SF64A board.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-18 Front panel of the SF64A board
SF64A
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT
IN
SF64A
Indicators
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64A board. Table 28-49 lists the type and function of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2223
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-49 Type and function of the optical interface on the SF64A board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.

The SF64A board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.5.7 Valid Slots

The SF64A board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SF64A board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SF64A board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A

The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SF64A board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-50 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SF64A board. Table 28-50 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SF64A board Board SSN1SF64A01 Characteristic Code 01 Optical Interface Type Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e


Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2224
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-51 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64A board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64A board. Table 28-52 lists all the parameters of the SF64A board. Table 28-52 Parameters of the SF64A board Field Port VC3 Path Optical Interface Name Overhead Transfer Mode MSP Sharing Value For example, SDH-1 DCC Mode, GCC Mode Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays all ports available on the line board. Displays all available VC3 paths. Specifies the name of an optical interface. Sets overhead transfer mode of the optical interface. The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface. See D.37 MSP Sharing to obtain the details. Laser Switch Off, On Default: On Laser Transmission Distance (m) / Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. Specifies the valid distance over which a laser transmits optical signals. See D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m) to obtain the details.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2225
28 OCS System Unit
Field Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback
Description Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
28.5.11 Specifications of the SF64A

Table 28-53 lists the optical specifications of the SF64A board. Table 28-53 Optical specifications of the SF64A board Item Nominal bit rate Application codea Value 10.709 Gbit/s Ue-64.2c OBU101 (-29 dBm to -26 dBm) + OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2 Single-mode LC 1550.12 Ue-64.2d OBU103 (-28 dBm to -25 dBm) + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2 Ue-64.2e OBU101 (-34.6 dBm to -32 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) + MR2 OBU101 (-37.9 dBm to -34.9 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU04 (80) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2
Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2226
28 OCS System Unit
Item Launched optical power range (dBm)c Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 1 to +2
-19
10.5
Table 28-54 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A board. Table 28-54 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/ nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 10.709 Gbit/s 40 3 to 2 19 0 800 13.5
Laser Safety Class

28 OCS System Unit
The mechanical specifications of the SF64A board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
28.6 SFD64
SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function

Only one functional version of the SFD64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.6.2 Application
The SFD64 board is a line board. The SFD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SFD64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SFD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-19 shows the application of the SFD64 board. The SFD64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system. Figure 28-19 Networking and application of the SFD64 board
NE3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2228
28 OCS System Unit

The SFD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-55. Table 28-55 Functions and features of the SFD64 board Functio n and Feature Basic functions Specificat ions of the optical interface Description
l Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals. l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function. l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with the standards defined by Huawei. l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment. l Supports the XFP wavelength-tunable optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services. l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports two channels of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Specificat ions of the optical module Service processin g Overhead processin g
Alarms and performa nce events Specificat ions of the REG
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2229
28 OCS System Unit
Functio n and Feature Protectio n schemes
Description
NOTE Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SFD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings.
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2230
28 OCS System Unit
Functio n and Feature SDH ASON
Description
Supported

The SFD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 28-20 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board. Figure 28-20 Function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board
Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL 10.71 Gbit/s 10.71 Gbit/s SPI 10.71 Gbit/s E/O O/E converting module 10.71 Gbit/s MUX MUX/ DEMUX IIC LOS Laser shutdown 669 MHz PLL 4x2.67G DEMU bit/s X 4x2.5G bit/s 622 MHz PLL Reference clock Clock unit
K1 and K2 insertion/extraction
O/E
4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G bit/s bit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed bus DCC

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2231
28 OCS System Unit
MUX/DEMUX Module

This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the inloop and outloop functions. l RST sub-module In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.

l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Manages and configures the other modules of the board. Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface. Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units. Controls the laser. Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units.
28 OCS System Unit
Controls the indicators on the board.
Power Module
28.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SFD64 board.

Figure 28-21 shows the front panel of the SFD64 board. Figure 28-21 Front panel of the SFD64 board
SFD64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
SFD64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2233
28 OCS System Unit
Indicators
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SFD64 board. Table 28-56 lists the type and function of the optical interface. Table 28-56 Type and function of the interface on the SFD64 board Interface RX1RX2 TX1TX2 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.

The SFD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.6.7 Valid Slots

The SFD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SFD64 board cannot work normally. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SFD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SFD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64

The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SFD64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-57 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2234
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-57 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of optical interface Board SSN4SFD6401M01 SSN4SFD6401 Characteristic Code 01M01 01 Type of Optical Interface Fixed-wavelength optical interface Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-58. Table 28-58 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFD64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 Interface on the NM 1 2
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SFD64 board. Table 28-59 lists all the parameters of the SFD64 board. Table 28-59 Parameters of the SFD64 board Field Port VC3 Path Optical Interface Name Value For example, SDH-1 Description Displays all ports available on the line board. Displays all available VC3 paths. Specifies the name of an optical interface.
2235
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
28 OCS System Unit
Field Overhead Transfer Mode Laser Switch
Value DCC Mode, GCC Mode Off, On Default: On
Description Sets overhead transfer mode of the optical interface. Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
Laser Transmission Distance (m)
VC12 Channel
28.6.11 Specifications of the SFD64

Table 28-60 lists the optical specifications of the SFD64 board. Table 28-60 Optical specifications of the SFD64 board Item Nominal bit rate Value 10.709Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2236
28 OCS System Unit
Item Application codea
Value Ue-64.2c OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)+ OAU103b + DCU03 (60) + MR2 Ue-64.2d OBU101 (-31 dBm to -34 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU03 (60) + DCU08 (10) + MR2 Ue-64.2e OBU101 (-34 dBm to -37 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + MR2 OBU101 (-37 dBm to -40 dBm) + CRPC + OAU103 + DCU03 (60) + DCU04 (80) + DCU08 (10) + MR2
Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm)c Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
1 to +2
-19
10.5
Table 28-61 lists the specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board. Table 28-61 Specifications of the tunable XFP optical interfaces of the SFD64 board Item Type of optical module Value 1600 ps/nm - NRZ - tunable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2237
28 OCS System Unit
Item Line code format
Value NRZ - 80 channels tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum mean launched power (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Central wavelength (THz) Central wavelength deviation (GHz) Maximum -20 dB spectral width (nm) Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB) Dispersion tolerance (ps/nm) 3
-1
9 192.10 to 196.05 5 0.3 35
1600
Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum reflectance (dB) APD 1260 to 1600
-24
-7 -27
Table 28-62 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2238
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-62 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/ nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 10.709 Gbit/s 40 -1 to 2 -19 0 800 10
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SFD64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
Power Consumption
28.7 SL64
SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board

Only one functional version of the SL64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.7.2 Application
The SL64 board is a line board. The SL64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SL64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SL64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-22 shows the application of the SL64 board. The SL64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-22 Networking and application of the SL64 board
NE3

The SL64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-63. Table 28-63 Functions and features of the SL64 board Function and Feature Basic functions Specificati ons of the optical interface Description
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals. l The N4SL64 board supports the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, P1L1-2D2, and V-64.2b optical interfaces. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691. The characteristics of the optical interface of the P1L1-2D2 type comply with ITU-T G.959. l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.
Specificati ons of the optical module Service processing
l Supports the XFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2240
28 OCS System Unit
Function and Feature Overhead processing
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports one channel of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performan ce events Specificati ons of the REG Protection schemes
NOTE Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SL64 supports a maximum of two MSP rings.
Maintenan ce features
Protocol or standard complianc e
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2241
28 OCS System Unit
Description
SDH ASON
Supported

The SL64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 28-23 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2242
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-23 Function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board
Backplane 622 MHz 622 MHz PLL K1 and K2 insertion/extraction Reference clock Clock unit
9.953 Gbit/s
O/E SPI
9.953 Gbit/s
DEMU X
16x622 Mbit/s
9.953 Gbit/s
E/O O/E converting module
9.953 Gbit/s
MUX MUX/ DEMUX
16x622 Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed bus DCC

MUX/DEMUX Module

28 OCS System Unit

Power Module
28.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label on the front panel of the SL64 board.

Figure 28-24 shows the front panel of the SL64 board.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-24 Appearance of the front panel of the SL64 board
SL64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT
IN
SL64
Indicators
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SL64 board. Table 28-64 lists the type and function of the optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2245
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-64 Type and function of the interface on the SL64 board Interface IN OUT Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.

The SL64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.7.7 Valid Slots

The SL64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SL64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12 IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SL64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11 IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64

The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SL64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-65 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 28-65 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of optical interface Board SSN4SL6401M01 SSN4SL6401 SSN4SL6402 SSN4SL6403 SSN4SL6404 SSN4SL6405 Characteristic Code 01M01 01 02 03 04 05 Type of Optical Interface Fixed-wavelength optical interface I-64.1 S-64.2b P1L1-2D2 V-64.2b Le-64.2

28 OCS System Unit

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-66. Table 28-66 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SL64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN/OUT Interface on the NM 1
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SL64 board. Table 28-67 lists all the parameters of the SL64 board. Table 28-67 Parameters of the SL64 board Field Port VC3 Path Optical Interface Name MSP Sharing Value For example, SDH-1 Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays all ports available on the line board. Displays all available VC3 paths. Specifies the name of an optical interface. The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface. See D.37 MSP Sharing to obtain the details. Laser Switch Off, On Default: On Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2247
28 OCS System Unit
Value /
VC12 Channel
28.7.11 Specifications of the SL64

Table 28-68 lists the optical specifications of the SL64 board. Table 28-68 Optical specifications of the SL64 board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Value 9953280 kbit/s I-64.1 S-64.2b P1L1-2D2 Le-64.2 V-64.2b (OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2)a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2248
28 OCS System Unit
Item Transmissio n distance (km) Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dBm)
Value 0 to 2 2 to 40 40 to 80 35 to 60 80 to 120
Single-mode LC 1290 to 1330
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to +4
+2 to +4
-1 to 2 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2) 16 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-11
-14
-24
-21
-17 (without the OBU, DCU, or MR2) -26 (with the OBU, DCU, or MR2)
Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
-1
-1
-7
-8
-1
8.2
8.2
10.5
a: "OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical interface are measured when the OBU, DCU, and MR2 are used.
Table 28-69 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SL64 board. Table 28-69 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value 9953280 kbit/s 40 -1 to 2 -17

2249
28 OCS System Unit
Item Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/ nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value -1 800 10.5
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SL64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.6 kg (1.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
28.8 SLD64
SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board

Only one functional version of the SLD64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.8.2 Application
The SLD64 board is a line board. The SLD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SLD64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-25 shows the application of the SLD64 board. The SLD64 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2250
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-25 Networking and application of the SLD64 board
NE3

The SLD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-70. Table 28-70 Functions and features of the SLD64 board Functio n and Feature Basic functions Specificat ions of the optical interface Specificat ions of the optical module Service processin g Description
Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 optical signals. Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.
l Supports the XFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2251
28 OCS System Unit
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports two channels of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
NOTE Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of K bytes. One SLD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2252
28 OCS System Unit
Description
SDH ASON
Supported

The SLD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 28-26 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2253
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-26 Function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board
9.953 Gbit/s
SPI 9.953 E/O Gbit/s
O/E
DEMUX 16x622 Mbit/s 16x622 Mbit/s
. . . .
9.953 Gbit/s
O/E SPI E/ O O/E converting module
9.953 Gbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
MUX MUX/ DEMUX
High-speed bus DCC

MUX/DEMUX Module

28 OCS System Unit

Power Module
28.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLD64 board.

Figure 28-27 shows the front panel of the SLD64 board.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-27 Front panel of the SLD64 board
SLD64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
SLD64
Indicators
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLD64 board. Table 28-71 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2256
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-71 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLD64 board Interface RX1RX2 TX1TX2 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.

The SLD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.8.7 Valid Slots

The SLD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLD64 board cannot work normally. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64

The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SLD64 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-72 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of optical interface. Table 28-72 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of optical interface Board SSN4SLD6401 SSN4SLD6402 Characteristic Code 01 02 Type of Optical Interface I-64.1 S-64.2b


28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-73 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLD64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 Interface on the NM 1 2
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLD64 board. Table 28-74 lists all the parameters of the SLD64 board. Table 28-74 Parameters of the SLD64 board Field Port VC3 Path Optical Interface Name MSP Sharing Value For example, SDH-1 Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays all ports available on the line board. Displays all available VC3 paths. Specifies the name of an optical interface. The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface. See D.37 MSP Sharing to obtain the details. Laser Switch Off, On Default: On Laser Transmission Distance (m) / Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module.
2258
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
28 OCS System Unit
Field Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback
Description Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
28.8.11 Specifications of the SLD64

Table 28-75 lists the optical specifications of the SLD64 board. Table 28-75 Optical specifications of the SLD64 board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Mean launched optical power (dBm) Value 9953280 kbit/s I-64.1 0 to 2 Single-mode LC 1290 to 1330 S-64.2b 2 to 40 Single-mode LC 1530 to 1565
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2259
28 OCS System Unit
Item Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value -11 -14
-1
-1
8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLD64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
28.9 SLH41
SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical/electrical interface board

Only one functional version of the SLH41 board is available, that is, N3.
28.9.2 Application
The SLH41 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLH41 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLH41 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-28 shows the application of the SLH41 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-28 Networking and application of the SLH41 board
NE1 NE2 SNCP ring NE4
NE3
Service flow OCS line board Cross-connect and timing board

The SLH41 board transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals or 16xSTM-1 electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-76. Table 28-76 Functions and features of the SLH41 board Function and Feature Basic functions Specificati ons of the optical interface Description
Transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals, or 16xSTM-1 electrical signals. l The 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical module can be used. When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957. When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the optical interface of the S-4.1 type. The characteristics of the optical interface of the S-4.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957. The optical interfaces are adaptive. The SLH41 board supports hybrid configuration of STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces. l The 16xSTM-1 electrical module can be used.
Specificati ons of the optical module
l Supports the SFP optical/electrical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
28 OCS System Unit
Function and Feature Service processing
Description
l When the STM-1 optical/electrical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services. l When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
Overhead processing
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals or STM-4 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports sixteen channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to port 8 support the ECC communication by using bytes D1D12. Port 9 to port 16 support the ECC communication by using bytes D4D12. l Only interfaces 1-4 supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performan ce events Protection schemes
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP in the case of STM-4 interfaces. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP.
Maintenan ce features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical/electrical interfaces. l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths. l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services. l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board. l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA. l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services. l Supports the PRBS function. l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocol or standard complianc e
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2262
28 OCS System Unit
Description
SDH ASON
Supported

The SLH41 board consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. This topic describes the working principle and signal flow of the SLH41 board by describing how to process STM-1/STM-4 signals. Figure 28-29 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2263
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-29 Function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board
155MHz PLL K1 and K2 insertion/ extraction Reference Backplane clock Clock unit
STM-1/ STM-4
O/E E/O
S P I
CDR
K1 and K2 Highspeed bus Highspeed bus DCC
STM-1/ STM-4
O/E E/O
O/E converting module IIC LOS Laser shutdown
The function modules of the STM-1/STM-4 units are described as follows:
. . . .
S P I
CDR
MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation CDR: clock and data recovery
. . . .
Power module
RST MST MSA HPT
SDH overhead processing module Logic and control module +3.3V Power module Frame header Communication Fuse

CDR Module
This module restores the data signal and the clock signal.

28 OCS System Unit

Power Module
28.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLH41 board.

Figure 28-30 shows the front panel of the SLH41 board.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-30 Front panel of the SLH41 board (considering optical interfaces as an example)
SM SFP WORK WITH G.657B FIBER ONLY G.657B
SLH41
STAT ACT PROG SRV
RX 1 TX 15 2 TX 16 RX
Indicators
Interfaces
There are 16 optical/electrical interfaces on the front panel of the SLH41 board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2266
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-77 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 28-77 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLH41 board Interface RX1RX16 TX1TX16 Type LC/SAA-75J4Y LC/SAA-75J4Y Function Receives optical/electrical signals. Transmits optical/electrical signals.
NOTE
The G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 28-31 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
Figure 28-31 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper
58.25 50.75
G.657A2 fiber jumper
50.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2267
28 OCS System Unit

The SLH41 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.9.7 Valid Slots

The SLH41 board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLH41 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLH41 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41

The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SLH41 board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-78 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLH41 board. Table 28-78 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLH41 board Board SSN3SLH4102 SSN3SLH4103 SSN3SLH4105 Characteristic Code 02 03 05 Optical Interface Type 8S-1.1, 8S-4.1 16S-1.1 16S-4.1
The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over the interface.


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-79. Table 28-79 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLH41 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel TX1/RX1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2268
28 OCS System Unit
Interface on the Panel TX2/RX2 TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4 TX5/RX5 TX6/RX6 TX7/RX7 TX8/RX8 TX9/RX9 TX10/RX10 TX11/RX11 TX12/RX12 TX13/RX13 TX14/RX14 TX15/RX15 TX16/RX16
Interface on the NM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLH41 board. Table 28-80 lists all the parameters of the SLH41 board. Table 28-80 Parameters of the SLH41 board Field Port VC3 Path Optical Interface Name Value For example, SDH-1 Description Displays all ports available on the line board. Displays all available VC3 paths. Specifies the name of an optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2269
28 OCS System Unit
Field Laser Switch
Description Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
28.9.11 Specifications of the SLH41

Table 28-81 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used. Table 28-81 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used Item Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Application code Transmission distance (km)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value 155520 kbit/s NRZ S-1.1 0 to 15

2270
28 OCS System Unit
Item Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Overload optical power (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value Single-mode LC 1261 to 1360 15 to 8 28 8 8.2
Table 28-82 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used. Table 28-82 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used Item Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Application code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Type of fiber Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 622080 kbit/s NRZ S-4.1 0 to 15 1274 to 1356 Single-mode LC 15 to 8 28 8 8.2
Electrical Specifications
Table 28-83 lists the electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is used. Table 28-83 Electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is used Item Type of interface Value 139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2271
28 OCS System Unit
Item Code pattern Bit rate of the output signal Permitted frequency deviation on the input interface Permitted attenuation on the input interface
Value CMI Compliant with G.703
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLH41 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
28.10 SLO16
SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board

Only one functional version of the SLO16 board is available, that is, N4.
28.10.2 Application
The SLO16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLO16 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLO16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-32 shows the application of the SLO16 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2272
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-32 Networking and application of the SLO16 board
NE3

The SLO16 board receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-84. Table 28-84 Functions and features of the SLO16 board Functio n and Feature Basic functions Specifica tions of the optical interface Specifica tions of the optical module Service processin g Description
Transmits and receives 8xSTM-16 optical signals. Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITUT G.957.
l Supports the SFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2273
28 OCS System Unit
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals. l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports eight channels of ECC communication. l Support the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performa nce events Specifica tions of the REG Protectio n schemes
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection
NOTE One SLO16 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2274
28 OCS System Unit
Description
SDH ASON
Supported

The SLO16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 28-33 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board by describing how to process 1xSTM-16 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2275
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-33 Function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board
155MHz O/E 2.488 Gbit/s E/O S P I 155MHzPLL K1 and K2 insertion/ extraction Reference clock Backplane Clock unit
2.488 Gbit/s
DEMUX
16x155 Mbit/s
K1 and K2 Highspeed bus
2.488 Gbit/s
O/E E/O

. . . .
S P I 2.488 Gbit/s MUX MUX/ DEMUX module 16x155 Mbit/s RST MST MSA HPT SDH overhead processing module IIC LOS Laser shutdown Logic and control module +3.3V Power module Power module
Highspeed bus DCC
Frame header Communication Fuse
MUX/DEMUX Module

28 OCS System Unit

Power Module
28.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLO16 board.

Figure 28-34 shows the front panel of the SLO16 board.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-34 Front panel of the SLO16 board
SLO16
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SLO16
Indicators
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLO16 board. Table 28-85 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2278
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-85 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLO16 board Interface RX1RX8 TX1TX8 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.

The SLO16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.10.7 Valid Slots

The SLO16 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLO16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLO16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16

The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SLO16 board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-86 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLO16 board. Table 28-86 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLO16 board Board SSN4SLO1601 SSN4SLO1602 SSN4SLO1603 SSN4SLO1604 Characteristic Code 01 02 03 04 Optical Interface Type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2


28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-87 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLO16 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 IN3/OUT3 IN4/OUT4 IN5/OUT5 IN6/OUT6 IN7/OUT7 IN8/OUT8 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLO16 board. Table 28-88 lists all the parameters of the SLO16 board. Table 28-88 Parameters of the SLO16 board Field Port VC3 Path Optical Interface Name Laser Switch Value For example, SDH-1 Off, On Default: On Description Displays all ports available on the line board. Displays all available VC3 paths. Specifies the name of an optical interface. Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2280
28 OCS System Unit
Value /
VC12 Channel
28.10.11 Specifications of the SLO16

Table 28-89 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board. Table 28-89 Optical specifications of the SLO16 board Item Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Application code Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Value 2488320 kbit/s NRZ I-16 0 to 2 Single-mode LC S-16.1 2 to 15 Single-mode LC L-16.1 25 to 40 Single-mode LC L-16.2 50 to 80 Single-mode LC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2281
28 OCS System Unit
Item Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 1266 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
10 to 3 18 3 8.2
5 to 0 18 0 8.2
2 to +3 27 9 8.2
2 to +3 28 9 8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLO16 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8 lb.)
Power Consumption
28.11 SLQ16
SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board

Only one functional version of the SLQ16 board is available, that is, N4.
28.11.2 Application
The SLQ16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLQ16 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLQ16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-35 shows the application of the SLQ16 board. The SLQ16 boards can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-35 Networking and application of the SLQ16 board
NE3

The SLQ16 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-90. Table 28-90 Functions and features of the SLQ16 board Functio n and Feature Basic functions Specifica tions of the optical interface Specifica tions of the optical module Service processin g Description
Transmits and receives 4xSTM-16 optical signals. Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITUT G.957.
l Supports the SFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2283
28 OCS System Unit
Description
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-16 signals. l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports four channels of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performa nce events Specifica tions of the REG Protectio n schemes
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP. l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection
NOTE One SLQ16 board supports a maximum of four MSP protection rings.
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2284
28 OCS System Unit
Description
SDH ASON
Supported

The SLQ16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module. Figure 28-36 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board by describing how to process 1xSTM-16 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2285
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-36 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board
2.488 Gbit/s
O/E SP E/O I
2.488 Gbit/s
DEMU 16x155 X Mbit/s 16x155 Mbit/s
2.488 O/E SP Gbit/s E/O I O/E converting module

. . . .
2.488 Gbit/s MUX MUX/ DEMUX
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed bus DCC
MUX/DEMUX Module

28 OCS System Unit

Power Module
28.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLQ16 board.

Figure 28-37 shows the front panel of the N4SLQ16 board.
28 OCS System Unit
Figure 28-37 Front panel of the N4SLQ16 board
SLQ16
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SLQ16
Indicators
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-91 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2288
28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-91 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ16 board Interface RX1RX4 TX1TX4 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.

The SLQ16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.11.7 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SLQ16 board vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLQ16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLQ16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68.
28.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16

The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the board. The characteristic code for the SLQ16 board indicates the type of optical interface. Table 28-92 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type of optical interface. Table 28-92 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type of optical interface Board SSN4SLQ1601 SSN4SLQ1602 SSN4SLQ1603 SSN4SLQ1604 Characteristic Code 01 02 03 04 Type of Optical Interface I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2


28 OCS System Unit
Table 28-93 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ16 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel IN1/OUT1 IN2/OUT2 IN3/OUT3 IN4/OUT4 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-94 lists all the parameters of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-94 Parameters of the SLQ16 board Field Port VC3 Path Optical Interface Name Laser Switch Value For example, SDH-1 Off, On Default: On Laser Transmission Distance (m) / Description Displays all ports available on the line board. Displays all available VC3 paths. Specifies the name of an optical interface. Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2290
28 OCS System Unit
Field VC4 Path VC4 Loopback
Description Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
28.11.11 Specifications of the SLQ16

Table 28-95 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board. Table 28-95 Optical specifications of the SLQ16 board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 2488320 kbit/s I-16 0 to 2 Single-mode LC 1266 to 1360 S-16.1 2 to 15 Single-mode LC 1260 to 1360 L-16.1 25 to 40 Single-mode LC 1280 to 1335 L-16.2 50 to 80 Single-mode LC 1500 to 1580
-10 to -3 -18 -3 8.2
-5 to 0 -18 0 8.2
-2 to +3 -27 -9 8.2
-2 to +3 -28 -9 8.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2291
28 OCS System Unit
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLQ16 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 0.7 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
28.12 SLQ64
SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board

Only one functional version of the SLQ64 board is available, that is, N4.
28.12.2 Application
The SLQ64 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800 to receive and transmit STM-64 optical signals. The SLQ64 board converts the received optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the SLQ64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and transmits the optical signals. Figure 28-38 shows the application of the SLQ64 board. The board supports the ring and chain networking modes. Figure 28-38 Networking and application of the SLQ64 board
NE3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2292
28 OCS System Unit

The SLQ64 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes, and performs the MSP protection. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 28-96. Table 28-96 Functions and features of the SLQ64 board Functio n and Feature Basic functions Specificat ions of the optical interface Specificat ions of the optical module Service processin g Overhead processin g Description
Transmits and receives 4xSTM-64 optical signals. Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.
l Supports the XFP optical module. l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module. l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the on/off state of a laser. Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c concatenation services. l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals. l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads. l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Supports four channels of ECC communication. l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms and performa nce events Specificat ions of the REG
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and maintenance.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2293
28 OCS System Unit
Functio n and Feature Protectio n schemes
Description
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP. l Supports the linear MSP. l Supports the SNCP l Supports the SNCTP. l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE A single optical interface supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SLQ64 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
ITU-T G.774.7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2294
28 OCS System Unit
Functio n and Feature SDH ASON
Description
Supported

The SLQ64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules. Figure 28-39 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board. Figure 28-39 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board
622MHz 622MHzPLL K1 and K2 insertion/ extraction Reference clock Backplane Clock unit
9.953 Gbit/s
O/E
S P I
9.953 Gbit/s
DEMUX
16x622 Mbit/s
K1 and K2 Highspeed bus SCC unit Cross-connect unit A Cross-connect unit B SCC unit
9.953 Gbit/s
E/O
9.953 Gbit/s
MUX MUX/ DEMUX module
16x622 Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
Highspeed bus DCC
SDH overhead processing module Frame header Logic and control module +3.3V Power module Power module Communication
Clock unit SCC unit
Fuse
-48V/-60V -48V/-60V

l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical signals. In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals and sends the SDH optical signals to fibers for transmission. The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
28 OCS System Unit
MUX/DEMUX Module

This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the inloop and outloop functions. l RST sub-module In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1 byte. In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH. l MST sub-module In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after checking the B2 byte. In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and writes the B2 byte. l MSA sub-module In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer justifications. In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving. l HPT sub-module In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte. In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.

l l l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Manages and configures the other modules of the board. Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface. Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units. Controls the laser. Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units.
28 OCS System Unit
Controls the indicators on the board.
Power Module
28.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, the bar code, and the laser safety class label on the front panel of the SLQ64 board.

Figure 28-40 shows the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Figure 28-40 Front panel of the SLQ64 board
SLQ64
STAT ACT PROG SRV
SLQ64
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2297
28 OCS System Unit
Indicators
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-97 lists the type and function of each optical interface. Table 28-97 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ64 board Interface RX1RX4 TX1TX4 Type LC LC Function Receives optical signals. Transmits optical signals.

The SLQ64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
28.12.7 Valid Slots

The SLQ64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board cannot work normally. On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLQ64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36.
28.12.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64

The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board. The characteristic code of the SLQ64 board indicates the optical interface type of the board. Table 28-98 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-98 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLQ64 board Board SSN4SLQ6401 SSN4SLQ6402 Characteristic Code 01 02 Optical Interface Type I-64.1 S-64.2b
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2298
28 OCS System Unit


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 28-99. Table 28-99 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ64 board displayed on the NM Interface on the Panel RX1/TX1 RX2/TX2 RX3/TX3 RX4/TX4 Interface on the NM 1 2 3 4
NOTE

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-100 lists all the parameters of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-100 Parameters of the SLQ64 board Field Port VC3 Path Optical Interface Name MSP Sharing Value For example, SDH-1 Enabled, Disabled Default: Disabled Description Displays all ports available on the line board. Displays all available VC3 paths. Specifies the name of an optical interface. The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface. See D.37 MSP Sharing to obtain the details.
28 OCS System Unit
Field Laser Switch
Description Specifies the laser state of the line board. In general, the parameter is set to On. The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module. Specifies the loopback state of an SDH interface. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC4 paths. Specifies the VC4 loopback state on the line board. In general, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Displays all available VC12 channels.
VC12 Channel
28.12.11 Specifications of the SLQ64

Table 28-101 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ64 board. Table 28-101 Optical specifications of the SLQ64 board Item Nominal bit rate Application code Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Value 9953280 kbit/s I-64.1 0 to 10 Single-mode LC

S-64.2b 10 to 40 Single-mode LC
2300
28 OCS System Unit
Item Operating wavelength range (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 1290 to 1330 6 to 1 11 1 6 1530 to 1565 1 to +2 14 1 8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLQ64 board are as follows: l l Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H) Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2301
29 Cables
29
About This Chapter
Cables
29.1 Power Cables and Ground Cables The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables. 29.2 Optical Fibers Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC. 29.3 Ground Cables The equipment has ground cables, including cabinet door ground cables and a PDU ground cable. 29.4 Alarm Cables Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/ inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable. 29.5 Management Cables Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and straight-through network cables. 29.6 Clock/Time Cable Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal connections, cables for testing equipment connections.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2302
29 Cables
29.1 Power Cables and Ground Cables

The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables.
29.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables

The -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top.
Structure
l l l When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800: Figure 29-1 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable. When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800: Figure 29-2 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable. Figure 29-3 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable for the OptiX OSN 8800 and the OptiX OSN 6800.
Figure 29-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800)
1 W1 X1 2 W W1 W2 W2 X2
0.8m L
1m
1. JG two-hole naked crimping connector
2. Heat-shrink tube
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2303
29 Cables
Figure 29-2 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800)
1 2
1. Cord end terminal
2. OT single-hole naked crimping connector
3. Cable clip
Figure 29-3 Structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable

3 2 4 5
1. OT single-hole naked crimping connector 4. Heat shrink tube
2. Cable clip 3. JG two-hole naked crimping connector 5. Cable
Pin Assignment
None
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2304
29 Cables
Technical Parameters
Table 29-1 Technical parameters of the PGND cables and the -48V/BGND power cables (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800) Cable Cabin et power cable -48 V power cable Usage Accesses -48 V DC to the cabinet. Wire Used -48 V DC power cable (blue) l If the required length of the power cable is less than 20 m, use the 16 mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 20 m to 35 m, use the 25mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 35 m to 50 m, use the 35mm2 cable. BGND cable Accesses the BGND to a cabinet. Battery grounding cable (black) l If the required length of the power cable is less than 20 m, use the 16 mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 20 m to 35 m, use the 25mm2 cable. l If the required length of the power cable ranges from 35 m to 50 m, use the 35mm2 cable. If copper Plates is used on the PDU, the 25m-35 mm2 power cable must be used.
NOTE If the intended power cable is longer than 25 m, contact a cable engineer of Huawei for tailoring.
Connector If copper Plates is used on the PDU, the 25m-35 mm2 power cable must be used.
NOTE If the intended power cable is longer than 25 m, contact a cable engineer of Huawei for tailoring.
OT naked crimping connector
OT naked crimping connector
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2305
29 Cables
Table 29-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (16 mm2) (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800) Item Cabinet -48 V power cable Connector 1 Description Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green OT naked crimping connector-16 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-16mm2-Blue-85 A Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green OT naked crimping connector-16 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-16mm2-Black-85 A
Connector 2 Type of the cable
Cabinet BGND grounding cable
Connector 1
Table 29-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm2) (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800) Item Cabinet -48 V power cable Connector 1 Description Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75 A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown OT naked crimping connector-25 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-25 mm2-Blue-110 A Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown Naked crimping connectorOT type-25 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-450 V/ 750 V-25 mm2-Black-110 A
Connector 2 Type of the cable Cabinet BGND grounding cable Connector 1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2306
29 Cables
Table 29-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm2) (when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800) Item Cabinet -48 V power cable Connector 1 Description Cord end terminal-35mm2 -0.03m-105A-Insertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-750V/ 450V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-35mm2-Blue-135 A Cord end terminal-35mm2 -0.03m-105A-Insertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-750V/ 450V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-35mm2-Black-135 A
Cabinet BGND grounding cable
Connector 1
Table 29-5 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables Item Cabinet PGND grounding cable Connector 1 Connector 2 Type of the cable Description OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 OT naked crimping connector-35 mm2-M8 Electric power cable-750V/ 450V-227 IEC 02 (RV)-35mm2-Yellow and green-135 A
29.1.2 Subrack Power Cables

The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the power interface in the subrack interface area, and lead the -48 V power supply from the top of the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables are correctly connected before delivery.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2307
29 Cables
Structure (OptiX OSN 8800)

Figure 29-4 shows the subrack power cable. Figure 29-4 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN 8800
1 W1 X1 W2 X2 W2 W1
1. OT naked crimping connector
Structure (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)

Figure 29-5 shows the subrack power cable. Figure 29-5 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN6800/3800
1 A A3 A2 A1 A X1 W1 W2 X3 X2 2 3
500
1. Cable connector
2. Cable clip
3. Naked crimping connector
Pin Assignment (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)

For the pin assignment of subrack power cables, refer to Table 29-6.
29 Cables
Table 29-6 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables Cable W2 W1 Cable Connector X1.A1 X1.A3 Cord End Terminal X2 X3 Connection A1 connects to X2. A3 connects to X3. Core Color Blue (-48 V power) Black (power ground)
Technical Parameters (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)

The technical parameters of subrack power cables are listed in Table 29-7. Table 29-7 Technical parameters of subrack power cables Item Cable connector X1 Description Cable connector-D type-3PIN-FemaleSolder injection molding type-No middle contact Common terminal-Conductor Cross Section-6 mm2-Length 20 mm-30 AInsertion depth 12 mm-Black Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2Blue-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2Black-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable
Cord end terminals X2, X3
Type of the cable W2 Type of the cable W1
29.2 Optical Fibers

Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC.
29.2.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are determined according to the site survey that is conducted before installation. The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 29-8.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2309
29 Cables
Table 29-8 Classification of optical fibers Type of Connectors at Both Ends LC/PC-LC/PC Fiber Type 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) singlemode fiber 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multimode fiber LC/PC-FC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) singlemode fiber 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multimode fiber LC/PC-SC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) singlemode fiber 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) multimode fiber LSH/APC-FC/UPC LSH/APC-LSH/APC 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) singlemode fiber 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) singlemode fiber B1 fiber G.652 fiber G.657A2 fiber G.657A2 fiber G.657A2 fiber
NOTE
The G.657 optical fibers provided by Huawei are named G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 optical fibers. The G.657B optical fibers are short-jacket optical fibers defined in ITU-T G.657 (12/2006). According to ITU-T G. 657 (11/2009), these fibers are classified into G.657A1, G.657A2, G.657B2, and G.657B3 optical fibers. The G.657B optical fibers provided by Huawei and the G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible and can be interconnected. In addition, the G.657B and G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible with G.652D optical fibers. However, the compatibility between customer-purchased G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 and G. 652D optical fibers needs to be verified.
29.2.2 Connectors
Connectors of all optical interfaces on the front panel of the boards are of the LC/PC type. LC/ PC fiber connectors are used with these boards. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the equipment room are generally of the FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are used with them. Table 29-9 lists details on classification of fiber connectors. Table 29-9 Classification of fiber connectors Type of Fiber Connectors LC/PC FC/PC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Description Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished Round fiber connector/protruding polished
2310
29 Cables
Type of Fiber Connectors SC/PC LSH/APC
Description Square fiber connector/protruding polished Fiber connector with a cap that provides automatic protection against dust/eightdegree radian surface/protruding polished
The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 29-6, Figure 29-7, Figure 29-8 and Figure 29-9. Figure 29-6 LC/PC fiber connector
The axial operation instead of rotation is required to insert or remove an LC/PC fiber connector. To insert a fiber jumper that uses an LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface and apply proper force. To remove the fiber jumper, first, press the clip, then, slightly push the fiber connector inward, and finally, pull out the connector.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2311
29 Cables
Figure 29-7 FC/PC fiber connector
Figure 29-8 SC/PC fiber connector
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2312
29 Cables
Figure 29-9 LSH/APC fiber connector
Cover the optical interfaces of the replaced boards with protective caps in time. Store them in proper packages to keep the optical interfaces clean. The protective caps recommended are shown in Figure 29-10, and the protective caps not recommended are shown in Figure 29-11. Figure 29-10 Protective caps recommended
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2313
29 Cables
Figure 29-11 Protective caps not recommended
NOTE
The air filter caps made of soft rubber are not recommended, which tends to collect dust and sundries. This type of caps provides poor dustproof function.
29.3 Ground Cables

The equipment has ground cables, including cabinet door ground cables and a PDU ground cable.
29.3.1 Cabinet Door Ground Cables

The cabinet door ground cables ground the front door, rear door, and side doors. The cabinet door ground cables are correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 29-12 shows the structure of the cabinet door ground cables.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2314
29 Cables
Figure 29-12 Structure of the cabinet door ground cable

1
X1 L
X2
Pin Assignment
None
The technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables are listed in Table 29-10. Table 29-10 Technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cables Item Connector X1/X2 Description Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.01 in. 2)-M6-Tin plating-Insulated ring terminal-12-10AWG Electric power cable-600V-UL1015-0 mm2-10AWG-Yellow/Green-50 A-105 core strand
Type of the cable
29.3.2 PDU Ground Cable

One end of the PDU ground cable is connected to a protection ground screw of the power distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection ground screw on the top of the cabinet. The PDU ground cable is correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 29-13 shows the structure of the PDU ground cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2315
29 Cables
Figure 29-13 Structure of the PDU ground cable

1 2
X1
X2
2. Heat-shrink tube
Pin Assignment
None
The technical parameters of the PDU ground cable are listed in Table 29-11. Table 29-11 Technical parameters of the PDU ground cable Item Connector X1/X2 Type of the cable Description Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6 Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02 (RV)-10 mm2 (0.02 in.2)-Yellow/Green-62 A
29.4 Alarm Cables

Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/ inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.
29.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to cascade the signals of the indicators at different subracks in the same cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of one subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another subrack.
Structure
The structure of the cable indicator alarm cable is shown in Figure 29-14.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2316
29 Cables
Figure 29-14 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable

1 View A 8 1 3 2 X2 X3 X1 A X4 X5 B 4 View B 1 2
1. Network interface connector
2. Heat-shrink tube
3. Common plug
4. Ordinary connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable, refer to Table 29-12. Table 29-12 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable Connector X1 X1.4 X1.5 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 Connectors X2, X3, X4, X5 X2.2 X2.1 X3.2 X3.1 X4.2 X4.1 X5.2 X5.1 Color White Green White Blue White Brown White Orange Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
The technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable are listed in Table 29-13.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2317
29 Cables
Table 29-13 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable Item Connector X1 Description Network interface connector-8PIN-single row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Twisted pair cable -100SEYPVPV-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairs-black 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Connector X2/X3/X4/X5 Type of the cable
Number of cores Core diameter
29.4.2 Alarm Output Interface Cable

An alarm output interface cable is used to output and concatenate alarm signals. There are RJ45 connectors at both ends of the cable. During alarm signal output concatenation, both ends of the cable are connected to the ALMO alarm interfaces in different subracks. During alarm signal output, one end of the cable is connected to the ALMO alarm interface, and the other end of the cable is connected to a power distribution cabinet or another set of equipment. In this case, alarms are displayed in a centralized manner.
Structure
Figure 29-15 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable. Figure 29-15 Alarm output interface cable
1 View A 8 6 3 1
X1 L
X2
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm output interface cable, refer to Table 29-14.
29 Cables
Table 29-14 Pin assignment of X1/X2 Connector X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7 Color Orange White-orange Green White-green Blue White-blue Brown White-brown Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
The technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 29-15. Table 29-15 Technical parameters of the alarm output interface cable Item Connector X1/X2 Description Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitunshielded-RJ-45 connector-uniconductor flat cable Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100UTPCAT5E-0.5 mm (0.02 in.)-24AWG-4 pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and halogen-free cable 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Type of the cable W1
Number of cores Core diameter
29.4.3 Alarm Input Interface Cable

An alarm input interface cable is used to input alarms of external equipment. One end of the cable is connected to the ALMI interface in a subrack and the other end is connected to the external equipment under monitoring.
Structure
Figure 29-16 shows the structure of the cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2319
29 Cables
Figure 29-16 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable

8 1 1 8 1
X1
1. Network interface connector-RJ-45
X2
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 29-16. Table 29-16 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable Connector X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7 Color Orange White-orange Green White-green Blue White-blue Brown White-brown Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
For the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 29-17.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2320
29 Cables
Table 29-17 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable Item Connector X1/X2 Type of the cable Number of cores Core diameter Description Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitcrystal model connector Communication cable-8 cores category-5 twisted pair-24AWG 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
29.5 Management Cables

Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and straight-through network cables.
29.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface in OptiX OSN 6800/8800.
Structure
Figure 29-17 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable. Figure 29-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable
1. DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 29-18.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2321
29 Cables
Table 29-18 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port Connector X1 X1.1 X1.5 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X1.9 Connector X2 X2.1 X2.5 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 X2.9 Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
The technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 29-19. Table 29-19 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable Item Connector X1, X2 Type Description Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable welding type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100ohmSEYVP-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairsBlack 4 pairs 10.0m (393.7 in.), 20.0m (787.4 in.)
Number of cores Length
29.5.2 AUX Signal Cable

The AUX signal cable accesses external signals through the serial port used for NM communications and the management port. The AUX signal cable does not process external signals in the OptiX OSN 3800.
Structure
Figure 29-18 shows the structure of the AUX signal cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2322
29 Cables
Figure 29-18 Structure of the AUX signal cable

1 Pos.64 View A Pos.1
W8 W7 W6
Delander
2 B
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3
View B 1 8
W5 W1 X1 W4 W3
L1
View C
Pos.9
W2
C
X2
Pos.1
L2 L3 L4 L5
1. DB64 cable connector
3. DB9 cable connector
For the relationship between the connectors X2 to X8X5 and interface types, refer to Table 29-20. Table 29-20 Relationship between connectors and interface types Connector X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 Interface Type Serial ALMI1 ALMI2 ALMO LAMP1 LAMP2 ETH
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the W2 to W8, refer to Table 29-21, Table 29-22, Table 29-23, Table 29-24, Table 29-25, Table 29-26 and Table 29-27.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2323
29 Cables
Table 29-21 Pin assignment of the W2 Connector X1 X1.3 X1.7 X1.4 X1.1 X1.6 X1.8 X1.5 X1.2 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.6 X2.7 X2.8 X2.9 Pair Pair Pair Relationship Pair
Table 29-23 Pin assignment of the W4 Connector X1 X1.14 X1.16 X1.18 X1.20 Connector X4 X4.1 X4.2 X4.3 X4.6 X4.4 X4.5 Pair Relationship Pair
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2324
29 Cables
Connector X1 -
Connector X4 X4.7 X4.8
Relationship -
Table 29-26 Pin assignment of the W7 Connector X1 X1.34 Connector X7 X7.1 Relationship Pair
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2325
29 Cables
Connector X1 X1.36 X1.42 X1.44 X1.38 X1.40 X1.46 X1.48
Connector X7 X7.2 X7.3 X7.6 X7.4 X7.5 X7.7 X7.8
Relationship
Pair
Pair
Pair
Table 29-27 Pin assignment of the W8 Connector X1 X1.61 X1.57 X1.53 X1.49 Connector X8 X8.1 X8.2 X8.3 X8.6 X8.4 X8.5 X8.7 X8.8 Pair Relationship Pair
The technical parameters of the AUX signal cable are listed in Table 29-28. Table 29-28 Technical parameters of the AUX signal cable Item Connector X1 Description Cable connector-D type-64 PIN-8 bit-straight through connector Cable connector-D type-9PIN Network interface connector-8 bit-8PINShielded
2326
Connector X2 Connectors X3-X8
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
29 Cables
Item Type of the cable W1
Description Communication cable-26AWGPANTONE430U-Sheilded Communication cable-24AWG-8 coresPANTONE445U 8
W2-W8
Number of cores
29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable

The straight-through network cable connects the equipment and the network management computer. RJ-45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network cable, connected to the equipment at two ends.
Structure
Figure 29-19 shows the structure of the straight-through network cable. Figure 29-19 Structure of the straight-through network cable
8 1 RJ-45 8 1
X1
X2
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the straight-through network cable, refer to Table 29-29. Table 29-29 Pin assignment of the straight-through network cable Connector X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.6
Color Orange White-orange Green
Relationship Pair
Pair
2327
29 Cables
Connector X1 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7
Connector X2 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7
Color White-green Blue White-blue Brown White-brown
Relationship
Pair
Pair
The technical parameters of the straight-through network cable are listed in Table 29-30. Table 29-30 Technical parameters of the straight-through network cable Item Connector X1/X2 Type of the cable Number of cores Core diameter Description Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bitCrystal model connector Communication cable-8-core category-5 twisted pair-24AWG 8 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
29.6 Clock/Time Cable

Clock/Time Cable includes cables for other equipment connections, cables for internal connections, cables for testing equipment connections.
29.6.1 Cables for other equipment Connections

The cables for other equipment connections are used to connect to BITS/PTN or OptiX OSN devices. The cables applicable to these ports are available in four types, as listed in Table 29-31.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2328
29 Cables
Table 29-31 Cables for connecting BITS/PTN device to OptiX OSN devices External interface of board TOD(time) Port Type of OptiX OSN Device RJ-45(time) Port Type of BITS or other Device RJ-45(time) Cable Type Description
Straight through network cables Special cables
For details, see StraightThrough Network Cable.
CLK/IN / OUT(clock)
RJ-45 (clock)
SMB (clock)
Single Conversion Cable to connect RJ45 port and SMB port and coaxial cables use SMB connectors at both ends.For details, see Special Cables and SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. Cables made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with 120ohm,75ohm Converter Box. For details, see Special Cables.
SMB (clock)
SMB (clock)
SMBSMB Coaxial cables Cascadi ng network cable
Coaxial cables use SMB connectors at both ends. For details, see SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. For details, see Cascading Network Cables .
RJ-45 (clock)
RJ-45 (clock)
NOTE
The TN52STI board of an OptiX OSN 8800 device has four 120-ohm RJ45 ports: CLK1, CLK2, TOD1, and TOD2. The CLK1 and CLK2 ports are used to receive or output clock signals. The TOD1 and TOD2 ports are used to receive or output time signals.
NOTE
The TN11STG board of an OptiX OSN 6800 device has two 120-ohm RJ45 (CLK and OUT) and two 75ohm SMB ports (IN and OUT). Users can use the CLK port or the IN and OUT ports to receive and transmit clock signals. The CLK port can also be used to output clock signals.
Straight-Through Network Cable

The straight-through network cable connects the OptiX OSN equipment and the network management computer. RJ-45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network cable, connected to the equipment at two ends. For details, see 29.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable.
29 Cables
Special Cables
Special cables are used to connect BITS devices to OptiX OSN devices or OptiX PTN devices. Each special cable has one SMB connector at one end and an RJ45 connector at the other end.
Structure
Single Cable, Conversion Cable The single cable uses one RJ45 port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. The length of such a cable is only 3 meters. Figure 29-20 shows the structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable. Figure 29-20 Structure of a Single Cable, Conversion Cable
1: Coaxial Connector,SMB Socket 2: 75 ohm<->120 ohm PCB 3: Network Interface Connector X1: RJ45 port X2: SMB port X3: SMB port Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box Cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables together with 120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. A convertor box is usually used in three scenarios: l When an OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a BITS device for clock synchronization, users need to connect the SMB connectors to the BITS device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45 connector to the OptiX OSN device using a straight-through network cable. When the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to a OptiX PTN device, users need to connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device using two coaxial cables and the RJ45 connector to the OptiX PTN device using a straight-through cable. If the OptiX OSN device needs to connect to an clock tester, users need to make two cables at the field, each with one SMB connector at one end and a BNC connector at the other end. Then connect the SMB connectors to the OptiX OSN device and the BNC connector to the clock tester.
Figure 29-21 shows a converter box, which provides two SMB ports (IN and OUT) on one side and an RJ45 port on the other side.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2330
29 Cables
Figure 29-21 Structure of SMB-SMB Coaxial cable
Pin Assignment
Table 29-32 provides the pin assignment of the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box. Table 29-32 Pin assignment when the 120ohm to 75ohm converter box is used Cable Straight-through network cable Coaxial cable Converter Box RJ-45 SMB Port on OptiX OSN Device RJ-45 SMB
NOTE
The connectors on the converter box and on the OptiX OSN device are male and the connectors at the two ends of the coaxial cable are female.
Table 29-33 provides the parameters of an Special Cables. Table 29-33 Parameters of an Special Cables Cable Single Cable, Conversion Cable Description Single Cable, Conversion Cable, 3m, 2*SMB75SM-IV, 120CC2P0.4P430U(S) +2*SYFVZ75-1/0.25, MP8-II, Expert 2.0 (BOM:04040582)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2331
29 Cables
Cable Single Cable,120ohm,75ohm Converter Box
Description 1. Coaxial Connector, SMB Socket, 75ohm/ Angle/Male, PCB Welding Type, Installation Hole D1.3mm, Installation Holes Spacing 5.1mm 2. A8010 Refiner, AS21TCTA, A8010 Refiner Twisted Pair Cable, Coaxial Cable Impedance Transforming Board, 3*3 Assembled Board 3. Box Body, Twisted Pair, Coaxial Cable Conversion Box (SMB Angle Male) 4. For more information of the parameters of SMB-BNC coaxial cable, see SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables. 5. For more information of the parameters of Straight-through network cable, see Straight-Through Network Cable.
SMB-SMB Coaxial Cables

The SMB-SMB Coaxial cables connect to SMB ports on BITS devices at one end and to SMB ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end. Each coaxial cable uses an SMB connector at each end.
Structure
Figure 29-22 shows the structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable. Figure 29-22 Structure of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable
Pin Assignment
Table 29-34 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2332
29 Cables
Table 29-34 Pin assignment of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable One End SMB-core SMB-ground Other End SMB-core SMB-ground
Table 29-35 provides the parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable. Table 29-35 Parameters of an SMB-SMB coaxial cable Cable Cable type Description l Trunk Cable, 10.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4368 l Trunk Cable, 2.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4362 l Trunk Cable, 20.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, SMB75SF-V, HONET, DL4370 Cable length 2m, 10m, 20m
29.6.2 Cables for Internal Connections

The type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices are mainly two scenarios: connecting NEs on an OptiX OSN network and cascading master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE. Table 29-36lists the type of cables for internal connections of OptiX OSN devices. Table 29-36 Type of cables for internal connections Connection type connecting NEs signal Type clock Cables Type Cascading network cable Description Cascading network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need to be connected or when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be cascaded for clock synchronization. For more information, see Cascading Network Cables .
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2333
29 Cables
Connection type
signal Type time
Cables Type Straightthrough network cable Cascading network cable
Description Straight-through network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 time ports need to be connected for time synchronization. For more information,see Straight-Through Network Cable. ascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for clock synchronization. For more information, see Cascading Network Cables . Cascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for time synchronization. For more information, see Cascading Network Cables .
cascading master and slave subracks
clock
time
Cascading network cable
Cascading Network Cables

Cascading network cables must be used when OptiX OSN NEs that use RJ45 clock ports need to be connected or when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE need to be cascaded for clock synchronization. Cascading networks must be used when master and slave subracks on an OptiX OSN NE needs to be cascaded for time synchronization.
Structure
Figure 29-23 shows the structure of a cascading network cable. Figure 29-23 Structure of a clock/time cascading network cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends
Pin Assignment
Table 29-37 provides the pin assignment of a cascading network cable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2334
29 Cables
Table 29-37 Pin assignment of a cascading network cable Connector X1 X1.1 (White-orange) X1.2 (Orange) X1.3 (White-green) X1.4 (Blue) X1.5 (White-blue) X1.6 (Green) X1.7 (White-brown) X1.8 (Brown) Connector X2 X2.4 (Blue) X2.5 (White-blue) X2.7 (White-brown) X2.1 (White-orange) X2.2 (Orange) X2.8 (Brown) X2.3 (White-green) X2.6 (Green) Twisted Twisted Twisted Relationship Twisted
Table 29-38 provides the parameters of cascading network cables. Table 29-38 Parameters of cascading network cables Item Connector X1/X2 Description l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector, 24-26AWG,Leads Single Solid Cable, For OEM Matching 25050057 l Network Interface Connector,8Bit 8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014 Cable type Number of wires Communication cable-8-core class 5 twisted pair-24 AWG 8
29.6.3 Cables for Testing equipment Connections

Clock signal testing cables are used to connect test instruments to OptiX OSN devices. Table 29-39 lists the main clock signal testing cables.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2335
29 Cables
Table 29-39 Cables for Testing equipment Connections Connecti on relationsh ip Connection to Clock test instrument Port Type of Test Instrument BNC(clock) Port Type of OptiX OSN Device SMB(clock) Cable Type Description
SMBBNCCoaxia l cables
The coaxial cables use a BNC port at one end and an SMB port at the other end. For more information, see SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables. These testing cables can be made using coaxial cables and straight-through network cables are together with 120ohm to 75ohm Converter Box. For more information, see Special Cables, Straight-Through Network Cable, SMBBNC Coaxial Cables. For more information, see Time Signal Testing Cables.
BNC (clock)
RJ-45 (clock)
Clock signal testing cables
Connection to Time test instrument
BNC(time)
RJ45(time)
Time signal testing cables
SMB-BNC Coaxial Cables

The SMB-BNC Coaxial cables connect to SMB ports on clock test instrument at one end and to BNC ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end.The SMB-BNC coaxial cable use a BNC port at one end and an SMB port at the other end.
Structure
Figure 29-24 shows the structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Figure 29-24 Structure of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2336
29 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 29-40 provides the pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Table 29-40 Pin assignment of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable One End SMB-core SMB-ground Other End BNC-core BNC-ground
Table 29-41 provides the parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable. Table 29-41 Parameters of an SMB-BNC coaxial cable Cable Cable type Description Trunk Cable,10.00m, 75ohm, 2.2mm, SMB75SF-V, SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25, BNC75AM-II, C, DL2521 10m
Cable length
Time Signal Testing Cables

The time signal testing cables connect to BNC ports on clock test instrument at one end and to RJ45 ports on OptiX OSN devices at the other end.
Structure
Figure 29-25 shows the structure of a time signal testing cables. Figure 29-25 Structures of the BNC coaxial cable and cable connector
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2337
29 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 29-42 provides the pin assignment of the time signal testing cables. Table 29-42 Pin assignment of a time signal testing cable Connector X1 (BNC) Core Connector X2 (RJ-45) 6(green) Description Pin 6 on the RJ45 connector on the OptiX OSN device must be connected to the BNC port on the time test instrument. Pin 1 on the RJ45 connector on the OptiX OSN device must be connected to the ground of the BNC connector on the time test instrument.
Ground(Metal shielding)
1(blue)
Table 29-43provides the parameters of time signal testing cables. Table 29-43 Parameters of time signal testing cables Cable RJ45 Description l Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model Connector, 24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cable, For OEM Matching 25050057 l Network Interface Connector,8Bit 8Pin,Crystal Plug,Matching 25050014 BNC Coaxial Connector,BNC,75ohm,Straight Plug, Male, Matching SYFVZ-75-1-1, With Heat Shrink Tube With Itself-For Agintrust Trunk Cable,RSP0/PV4 Plate To DDF, 30m, 75ohm, 2E1, 2.2mm, DIN4X8, 4*SYFVZ75-1.2/0.25
Trunk Cable
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2338
30 Optical Attenuator
30
About This Chapter
Optical Attenuator
Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators (VOAs). 30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB. 30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator A MVOA (mechanical variable optical attenuator) can adjust the optical power on an optical path in a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of a VOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2339
30 Optical Attenuator
30.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator

A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB. Figure 30-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator. Figure 30-1 Appearance of a fixed optical attenuator
30.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator

A MVOA (mechanical variable optical attenuator) can adjust the optical power on an optical path in a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of a VOA is 2 dB to 30 dB. Figure 30-2 shows the appearance of a common VOA. Figure 30-2 Appearance of a VOA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2340
31 Filler Panels
31
About This Chapter
A filler panel is used to fill in a vacant slot. 31.2 Front Panel There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel. 31.3 Valid Slots This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
Filler Panels
31.1 Functions and Features This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
31.4 Technical Specifications This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2341
31 Filler Panels
31.1 Functions and Features

This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel. A filler panel has the following functions: l l l l Prevents exposure of people to hazardous voltage and current in the subrack. Prevents foreign matter from entering the subrack. Maintains electromagnetic interference (EMI) compliance. Maintains proper air flow through the subrack.
31.2 Front Panel

There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel. Figure 31-1 shows the appearance of a filler panel.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2342
31 Filler Panels
Figure 31-1 Appearance of a filler panel

21136047 21135823 21136389 21132664 21134882 21135716 21135491 21135492 21135493 21136046
31.3 Valid Slots

This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel. Table 31-1 lists the valid slots for a filler panel. Table 31-1 Valid slots for a filler panel Part Number 21132664 21132664 21132664 21132664
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Product OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 OptiX OSN 6800
Valid Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 IU1-IU18
2343
31 Filler Panels
Part Number 21132664 21134882 21135491 21135492 21135492 21135493 21135493 21135716 21135716
Product OptiX OSN 3800 OptiX OSN 3800 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Valid Slots IU11, IU2-IU5 IU1, IU6-IU11 IU42, IU44 IU76, IU77 IU38 IU69-IU71, IU78-IU82, IU87-IU89 IU37, IU39, IU40, IU45-IU48 IU41, IU43 IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84, IU75, IU86
NOTE Either slot IU75 or IU86 must be filled by two filler panels.
21135823 21136046 21136047 21136389
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU9, IU10 IU74, IU85 IU9, IU10, IU43, IU44 IU9, IU10
NOTE l When slot IU9 or IU10 is used to house a board except the TN16XCH board, this filler panel must be inserted before the board is inserted. l When slot IU9 or IU10 is empty, it must be covered with this filler panel and then with a filler panel identified as 21132664.

This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel. Table 31-2 lists the technical specifications of a filler panel. Table 31-2 Technical specifications of a filler panel Part Number 21132664 21134882 21135491 Mechanical Specifications 25.4 mm (W) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 10.4 in. (H)) 25.4 mm (W) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H)) 28.8 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2344
31 Filler Panels
Part Number 21135492 21135493 21135716 21135823 21136046 21136047 21136389
Mechanical Specifications 25.4 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H)) 50.8 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H)) 25.4 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H)) 27.2 mm (W) x 581.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 22.9 in. (H)) 110.0 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (4.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W)) 34.1 mm (W) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 23.7 in. (H)) 54.5 mm (W) x 350.3 mm (H) (2.1 in. (W) x 13.8 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2345
A Indicators
Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. A.2 Subrack Indicator There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are in the following colors: red, orange, yellow and green. A.3 Chassis Indicators There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red. A.4 Board Indicators On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running status of the board. A.5 Fan Indicator There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN. A.6 PIU Indicator There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2346
A Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-1. Table A-1 Meanings of cabinet indicators Indicator power Name Power indicator Status On (green) Off critical Critical alarm indicator Major alarm indicator Minor alarm indicator On (red) Off On (Orange) Off On (Yellow) Off Meaning The cabinet is powered on. The cabinet is not powered on. There is a critical alarm. There is no critical alarm. There is a major alarm. There is no major alarm. There is a minor alarm. There is no minor alarm.
major
minor
A.2 Subrack Indicator

There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are in the following colors: red, orange, yellow and green. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-2.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 subrack indicators are on the panel of the fan tray assembly.
Table A-2 Meanings of subrack indicators Indicator PWR Name Power indicator Status On (Green) Off OptiX OSN 6800: CRI
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Meaning The subrack works normally. The subrack does not work. There is a critical alarm.
Critical alarm indicator
On (Red)
2347
A Indicators
Indicator OptiX OSN 8800: CRIT MAJ
Name
Status Off
Meaning There is no critical alarm.
Major alarm indicator Minor alarm indicator
On (Orange) Off On (Yellow) Off
There is a major alarm. There is no major alarm. There is a minor alarm. There is no minor alarm.
MIN
A.3 Chassis Indicators

There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-3. Table A-3 Meanings of chassis indicators Indicator PWR Name Chassis power supply indicator Status On (green) Off MIN Minor alarm indicator On (yellow) Off MAJ Major alarm indicator On (orange) Off CRI Critical alarm indicator On (red) Off Meaning The chassis is powered on. The chassis is not powered on. There is a minor alarm. There is no minor alarm. There is a major alarm. There is no major alarm. There is a critical alarm. There is no critical alarm.
A.4 Board Indicators

On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running status of the board. The meanings of the board indicators are listed in Table A-4,Table A-5 and Table A-6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2348
A Indicators
Table A-4 Meanings of board indicators Indicato r STAT Name Board hardware indicator Status On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off PROG Board software indicator On (red) Meaning The board works normally. A critical/major alarm occurs on the board. A minor alarm occurs on the board. The board is not powered on. The memory check fails. Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The board software is lost. Blinking (red) Blinking quickly (green) Blinking slowly (green) On (green) On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails. On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress. On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress. The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. The service is normal with any service alarm. A critical or major service alarm occurs. A minor or remote service alarm occurs. No service is configured. The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode. Off The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode. Blinking quickly (green) On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress.
SRV
Service alarm indicator
On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off
ACT
Service activation indicator
On (green)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2349
A Indicators
Indicato r LINK/ ACTn
Name Data port connection/data transceive indicator
Status On (green) Off
Meaning The data port connection is normal. The data port connection is abnormal.
NOTE The STAT indicators for the TN13FIU, TN11ITL, TN11SFIU, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4, TN11DMR1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11MR8, and TN11SBM2 boards are green. The STAT indicators are lit when the boards are powered on and are unlit when the boards are powered off.
Table A-5 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 sub-board Indicato r STAT Name Board hardware indicator Status On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off Meaning The PQ2 sub-board works normally. The PQ2 sub-board is abnormal. Logical sub-board is not configured. The PQ2 sub-board is not powered on.
Table A-6 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board Indicato r STAT Name Board hardware indicator Status On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off PROG Board software indicator On (red) Meaning The board is working normally. A critical alarm occurs on the board. A minor alarm occurs on the board. The board is not powered on. The memory check fails. Loading the board software fails. The FPGA file is lost. The NE software is lost. Blinking (red) On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: The BOOTROM check fails.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2350
A Indicators
Indicato r
Name
Status Blinking quickly (green) Blinking slowly (green) On (green)
Meaning On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Writing the flash memory is in progress. On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms: The BIOS booting is in progress. The board software or FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully. The service is normal with any service alarm. A critical or major service alarm occurs. A minor or remote service alarm occurs. No service is configured. The board is in the working mode. The board is in the active mode.
SRV
Service alarm indicator
On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off
ACT
Service activation indicator
On (green)
Off
The board is not in the working mode. The board is in the standby mode.
Blinking quickly (green) PWRA Indicator for system power supply On (green) On (red) Off PWRB Indicator for system power supply On (green) On (red) Off PWRC Indicator for protection power supply On (green) On (red)
On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms: Backing up the system database in batches is in progress. -48 V power supply A is normal. -48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed). No power is input. -48 V power supply B is normal. -48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed). No power is input. The +3.3 V protection power is normal. The +3.3 V protection power is lost.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2351
A Indicators
Indicato r ALMC
Name Alarm cut-off indicator
Status On (yellow) Off
Meaning There is no audible or visual warning in case of an alarm. Audible warning is generated in case of an alarm.
A.5 Fan Indicator

There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN. The corresponding meanings of the Fan indicator are listed in Table A-7. Table A-7 Meanings of the FAN indicator Indicator OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: STAT OptiX OSN 8800: FAN Name Fan indicator Status On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off Meaning The fan is normal. A major alarm occurs or two or more fans are faulty. A minor alarm occurs or one fan is faulty. The fan is not powered on, is absent, or the software is not loaded.
A.6 PIU Indicator

There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status. The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-8. Table A-8 Meanings of the PIU indicator Indicator OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: RUN OptiX OSN 8800: PWR Name Running status indicator Status On (green) Off Meaning Indicates that the power is accessed normally. Indicates that the power is not accessed.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2352
B Bar Code for Boards
Bar Code for Boards
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code. B.1 Overview There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs. B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules. B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board. B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection switching time. B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA
The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with, the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2354
B.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on. The information about a bar code can be queried on the U2000, for details refer to Supporting Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from that on the bar code.
Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules. Figure B-3 and Figure B-4 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules. Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG

BOM Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board name Characteristic code
Figure B-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)

2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT

BOM Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board Tunable Characteristic name code
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2355

Delivery information Board version Board name (TN12)
2103070768107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01

BOM Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board model number
First four numbers of the BOM
Delivery information
Board version Board name (TN12)
03OHFY 108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01

Environmental friendliness flag (Y: Environmentally friendly) Board model number
The complete BOM should be 0303OHFY. "03" are taken out in the BOM above.
The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical module. Table B-1 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2356
Table B-1 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for OTN boards Board Configuration First Four Numbers in the board BOM 0303 Description First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module 3406 or 0303 (client side)
The board is installed with a wavelength tunable optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected as required for the board. The board is not installed with any optical module. WDMand client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is installed with a fixed optical module on its WDM side. Client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is not installed with any optical module. WDMand client-side optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. Optical modules are installed on the client and WDM sides of the board.
0303
0307
3406 or 0303 (client side)
0302
0231
NA
Of the OCS boards, the SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41 boards are delivered as follows: l l For the SSN1SF64A board, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0303, indicating that the board is delivered with optical modules installed. For the SSN3SLH41 board,
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2357
The first four numbers are 0303 when the board is delivered with optical modules not installed. The first four numbers in the BOMs of the optical modules required by the board are 3406. When the board is delivered with optical modules installed, the first four numbers in the BOM are 0305. Table B-2 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for of other OCS boards. Table B-2 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOM for an OCS board (excluding SSN1SF64A and SSN3SLH41) Board Configuration First Four Numbers in the board BOM 0302 Description First Four Numbers in the BOM of the Required Optical Module 3406
The board is not installed with any optical module. Optical modules need to be selected for the board as required. The board is installed optical modules.
0305
NA
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs

The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs

The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-3. Table B-3 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU Code The first five digit Meaning The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module Description Indicate the frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module. The value can be A or P. A represents APD. P represents PIN.
The sixth character
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2358
Code The seventh character
Meaning The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module
Description The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-4.
NOTE
In the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LQMD board, the characteristic code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side are indicated.
The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-4. Table B-4 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules Character A Dispersion (1550 nm) 1600ps/nm 3200ps/nm 800ps/nm 3200ps/nm B 1500ps/nm 1600ps/nm 3200ps/nm C 800ps/nm 12800ps/nm 6500ps/nm D E G H 12800ps/nm 6500ps/nm 800ps/nm >600ps/nm >600ps/nm K 800ps/nm 1800ps/nm L 12800ps/nm 12800ps/nm 1500ps/nm
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Distance 80km 170km 40km 160km 80km 80km 170km 40km 640km 320km 640km 320km 40km >30km >30km 40km 90km 640km 640km 80km
Rate 2.5G 2.5G 10.66G 2.5G 10.66G 10.66G 2.5G 10.66G 2.5G 2.5G 2.5G 2.5G 10.71G 10.71G 10.66G 10.66G 2.66G 2.66G 2.5G 10.66G
2359
Character M
Dispersion (1550 nm) >600ps/nm >600ps/nm 6400ps/nm 6400ps/nm 1500ps/nm 3400ps/nm
Distance >30km >30km 320km 320km 80km 170km 40km >30km
Rate 10.66G 10.71G 4.9-5.4G 10.66G 10.71G 4.9-5.4G 10.71G 10.71G
Z U
800ps/nm >600ps/nm
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is 19210AG. This code indicates the following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz; APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is G. For details, refer to Table B-4.
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs

The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-5. Table B-5 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU Code The first character Meaning Wavelength-tunable Description T is the abbreviation for Tunable, indicating that the wavelength is tunable. The value can be A or P. A represents APD. P represents PIN. The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-6.
The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module
The third character
The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-6.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2360
Table B-6 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules Character T Dispersion (1550 nm) 1200ps/nm 12800ps/nm 12800ps/nm 3400ps/nm -1000 to 1100ps/nm 4800ps/nm Distance 60km 640km 640km 170km 60km 240km Rate 10.71G 2.66G 2.67G 5.33G 10.71G 11.3G
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is TPT. This code indicates the following features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer to Table B-6.
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs

The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and type of the optical module in the OTU. Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-7. Table B-7 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU Code The first four digits Meaning The wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module The type of the CWDM-side receiving optical module The type of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module Description Indicate the wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module. The value can be A or P. A represents APD. P represents PIN. The value can be L or S. L represents long haul. S represents short haul.
The fifth character
The sixth character
NOTE
As for the LWX2 board, only information about the first wavelength is indicated.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN13LQM is 1531AS. This code indicates the following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; APD is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission (80 km).
B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit

The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules. The line unit shares the same characteristic code with the WDM-side DWDM optical module of the wavelength tunable unit. For details, refer to B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs and B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs.
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM

The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1

The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that carries the signals processed by the board. Table B-8 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1. Table B-8 Characteristic code for the CMR1 Code First four digits Meaning Wavelength that carries optical signals Description Indicates the wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength that carries the signals is 1471 nm.

The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-9. Table B-9 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board Code First four digits Meaning First wavelength that carries optical signals Description Indicates the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2362
Code Last four digits
Meaning Second wavelength that carries optical signals
Description Indicates the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571. l l "1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.

The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-10. Table B-10 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board Code First and second digits Meaning First wavelength that carries optical signals Description Indicates the middle two digits of the first wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the middle two digits of the second wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the middle two digits of the third wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board. Indicates the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that carries the optical signals processed by the board.
Third and fourth digits
Second wavelength that carries optical signals
Fifth and sixth digits
Third wavelength that carries optical signals
Seventh and eighth digits
Fourth wavelength that carries optical signals
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961. l l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
"47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm. "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
"61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1

The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of the optical signals processed by the board. Table B-11 provides the details on the characteristics code. Table B-11 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board Barcode First to fourth digits Meaning Optical signal frequency Description Frequency of the optical signals processed by the board
For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2

The characteristic code for the MR2 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-12. Table B-12 Characteristic code for the MR2 board Code First four digits Meaning Description
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal. Frequency of the second optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the second optical signal.
Last four digits
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370. l l "9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz. "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.

The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-13.
Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MR4 board Code First four digits Meaning Frequency of first optical signal Description Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the fourth optical signal processed by the board.
Last four digits
Frequency of forth optical signal
For example, the characteristic code for the MR4 board is 92109240. l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can be inferred that: l l The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.

The characteristic code for the MR8 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-14. Table B-14 Characteristic code for the MR8 board Code First four digits Meaning Description
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Frequency of the eighth optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board.
Last four digits
For example, the characteristic code for the MR8 board is 92109280. l l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l l l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V

The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-15. Table B-15 Characteristic code for the MR8V board Code First four digits Meaning Description
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits signal of the frequency that carries the first optical signal processed by the board. Frequency of the eighth optical signal Indicates the last four digits of the frequency that carries the eighth optical signal processed by the board. Indicates that the board adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Last four digits
"V"
Adjustment of the input optical power of each channel
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V. l l l "9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz. "V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can be inferred that: l l l The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA

The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4

The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-16. Table B-16 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.
B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8

The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-17. Table B-17 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card processes optical signals in the C band.
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU

The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA

The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-18. Table B-18 Characteristic code for the HBA board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. The second character is always G. The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value. The fifth character is always I. Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.
Second character Third to the fourth digits Fifth character Sixth and seventh digits
Gain Maximum nominal input optical power
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1

The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-19. Table B-19 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board Code First character Second to fifth digits Meaning Gain range Description Is always G. Indicates the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted. Is always I. Indicates the maximum nominal input optical power.
Sixth character Seventh and eighth digits
Maximum nominal input optical power
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1

The characteristic code for the OBU1 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-20. Table B-20 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board Code First character Second and third digits Fourth character Fifth and sixth digits Meaning Gain Maximum nominal input optical power Description The first character is always G. The second and the third digits indicate the gain value. The fourth character is always I. The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.
B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2

The characteristic code for the OBU2 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-21. Table B-21 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board Code First character Second and third digits Fourth character Fifth and sixth digits Meaning Gain Maximum nominal input optical power Description The first character is always G. The second and the third digits indicate the gain value. The fourth character is always I. The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
B.6.5 Characteristic Code for the CRPC

The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-22. Table B-22 Characteristic code for the CRPC board Code First character Two digits Meaning Gain Description Is always G. Indicate the gain value.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit

The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40

The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-23. Table B-23 Characteristic code for the D40 Code The first character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2370
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V

The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-24. Table B-24 Characteristic code for the D40V board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.
Second character
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU

The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-25. Table B-25 Characteristic code for the DFIU board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.
B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU

The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the band adopted by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-26. Table B-26 Characteristic code for the FIU board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL

The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-27. Table B-27 Characteristic code for the ITL board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band.
For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40

The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-28.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2372
Table B-28 Characteristic code for the M40 board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.
Second character
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V

The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-29. Table B-29 Characteristic code for the M40V board Code First character Meaning Band Description Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band. Indicates whether the wavelengths that carry signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.
Second character
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2373
B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit

The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection switching time.
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP

The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-30. Table B-30 Characteristic code for the DCP board Code First character Second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP

The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-31. Table B-31 Characteristic code for the OLP board Code First character Second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS

The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the maximum protection switching time.
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-32. Table B-32 Characteristic code for the SCS board Code First character Second and third digits Meaning Maximum protection switching time Description The first character is always P. Indicate the maximum protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA

The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1

The characteristic code for the VA1 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-33. Table B-33 Characteristic code for the VA1 board Code Digits 1 through 3 Meaning Attenuation value Description Indicate the maximum attenuation.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4

The characteristic code for the VA4 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-34.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2375
Table B-34 Characteristic code for the VA4 board Code First to third digits Meaning Attenuation value Description Indicate the maximum attenuation.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA4 board is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit

The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with, the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU

The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-35. Table B-35 Characteristic code for the DCU board Code Character before hyphen (-) Character after hyphen (-) Meaning Fiber type Dispersion compensation distance Description Type of the fiber that the DCU board works with The transmission distance achieved through dispersion compensation
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to separate each distance.
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU

The characteristic code for the GFU board contains two characters and two digits, indicating the gradient of optical signals processed by the board. The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-36.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2376
Table B-36 Characteristic code for the GFU board Code First and second characters Third and fourth digits Meaning Gradient Description The first and second characters are always GF. Indicate the gradient of optical signals.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11GFU board is GF10. This code indicates that the gradient of optical signals processed by the board is 10.
B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC

The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance. Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-37. Table B-37 Characteristic code for the TDC board Code Character before hyphen (-) Character after hyphen (-) Meaning Fiber type Dispersion compensation distance Description Fiber type that the TDC board is compatible with The transmission distance achieved through dispersion compensation
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is tunable.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2377
C Quick Reference Table of the Units
Quick Reference Table of the Units
Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards. C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. C.3 Other Unit Specification The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board. C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different types of loopback. C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function. C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2378
C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification

The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
C.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side

The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. Table C-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name Access Service Type Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm) Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) TN11ECOM FE 100 BASEFX-10 km 100 BASEFX-40 km 100 BASEFX-80 km -3 0 5
Minim um (dBm) -11.5 -4.5 -2 0 -19 -20 -22 -19 -3 -3 -3 -3 eSFP CWDM eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11L4G GE 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km -2.5 -3 0 5
-28
-9
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22
0 -3 -3 -3
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2379
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Receiver Sensitivi ty (dBm) Minim um Overloa d Point (dBm)
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11LDGD GE 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km -2.5 -3 0 5
Minim um (dBm) 0 -19 -3 eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 0
-17 -19 -20 -22 -19
0 -3 -3 -3 -3
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11LDGS GE 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km -2.5 -3 0 5
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 0
-17 -19 -20 -22 -19
0 -3 -3 -3 -3
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2380
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN12LDM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
Minim um (dBm) 0 -28 -9
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2381
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LDMD FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 3 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
Minim um (dBm) 0 -28 -9 eSFP DWDM
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2382
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LDMS FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
3 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2383
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN12LDX OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ OTU2e 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24.0
-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN) -1
XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2384
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP TN11LEM24 FE/GE 1000BASESX, I-850-LC 1000BASELX, I-1310-LC 10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) TN11LEX4 10GE WAN/ 10GE LAN 10GBASE-SR (SFP+) 10GBASE-LR (SFP+) 10GBASE-ER/ EW (SFP+) TN11LOA FC200/GE/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/FE GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 2
Minim um (dBm) -3 16 0
-2.5 -3 -1 0.5 4 -1 0.5 4 -2.5
-9.5 -9.5 -7.3 -8.2 -4.7 -7.3 -8.2 -4.7 -9.5
-17 -20 -11.1 -14.4 -14.1 -11.1 -14.4 -14.1 -17
0 -3 -1 0.5 -1 -1 0.5 -1 0
eSFP
SFP+
SFP+
eSFP
1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km
-3 0
-11.5 -4.5
-19 -20
-3 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2385
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE SDI/HD-SDI/ 3G-SDI 1000 BASEZX-80 km I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 5 -3 0 3 3
Minim um (dBm) -2 -10 -5 -2 -2 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km
-7
-16
GE/FC100/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ FDDI/FICON/ FE/DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2386
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/FDDI/ FICON/ FICON Express/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE FC400 FC800 3 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
Multirate 1600-M5E-SNI (SFP+) 1600-M5E-SNI (SFP+)
0 -1 -1 -2.5 -3 0 5
-7 -7 -6 -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 0
-15 -7.5 -14.4 -17 -19 -20 -22 -19
0 -1 0.5 0 -3 -3 -3 -3
SFP+
TN11LOG TN12LOG
GE
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11LOM TN12LOM GE 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate -2.5
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
-9.5
-17
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2387
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km FC 100/ FC 200/ FC 400/ FICON/ FICON Express FC400/ FICON4G Module (Multimode) FC400/ FICON4G Module (Single mode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module (Multimode) FC100/FC200/ FICON/FICON Express Module (Single mode) GE/ FC 100/ FC 200 -3 0 5 -1
Minim um (dBm) -11.5 -4.5 -2 -9 -19 -20 -22 -14 -3 -3 -3 0
-2
-8
-16
-2.5
-9.5
-17
-3
-10
-18
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
TN11LQG
GE
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km
-2.5 -3
-9.5 -11.5
-17 -19
0 -3
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2388
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km 0 5
Minim um (dBm) -4.5 -2 0 -20 -22 -19 -3 -3 -3 eSFP CWDM
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN13LQM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
-28
-9
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2389
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LQMD TN12LQMD FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2390
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LQMS TN12LQMS FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9
eSFP
OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2391
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LSQ STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3 OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ FC1200a L-16.2 3
Minim um (dBm) -2 -28 -9
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
40G Transponder 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km
-6
TN11LSX TN12LSX
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN)
-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN) -1
XFP
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2392
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km TN13LSX OC-192/ STM-64/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ OTU2/ FC1200a 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km -1.3 4
Minim um (dBm) -7.3 0 -7.5 -24.0 -1 -7
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24.0
-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN) -1
XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP TN11LSXL TN12LSXL STM-256/ OC-768 STM-256/ OC-768/ OTU3 FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE 40G Transponder 40G Transponder 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
-3
16
3 3
0 0
-6 -6
3 3
TN11LWX2
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2393
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LWXD FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2 -3 0 3
Minim um (dBm) -10 -5 -2 -18 -18 -28 -3 0 -9
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
-2.5 -3 0 3
-9.5 -10 -5 -2
-17 -18 -18 -28
0 -3 0 -9
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2394
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11LWXS TN12LWXS FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE ETR/ CLOc/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE ETR/ CLO/ GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2
-2.5 -3 0 3
-9.5 -10 -5 -2
-17 -18 -18 -28
0 -3 0 -9
eSFP
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2395
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE ETR/ CLO/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN11TMX TN12TMX STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 (without FEC) 5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
-3 0 3 3
-10 -5 -2 -2 0
-18 -18 -27 -28 -28
-3 0 -9 -9 -9
eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s 3 Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km TN11TBE FE 100 BASEFX-10 km 100 BASEFX-80 km GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate -3 5 -2.5
eSFP CWDM eSFP DWDM
-28
-9
-11.5 -2 -9.5
-19 -22 -17
-3 -3 0
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2396
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km -3 0 5 -1
Minim um (dBm) -11.5 -4.5 -2 -6 -19 -20 -22 -11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24 -3 -3 -3 -1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN) -1 XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km FE/ GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
TN11TDG
GE
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km
-2.5 -3 0
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5
-17 -19 -20
0 -3 -3
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2397
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 1000 BASEZX-80 km 5
Minim um (dBm) -2 0 -22 -19 -3 -3 eSFP CWDM
1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11TDX TN12TDX TN52TDX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/OTU2e 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km -1
-28
-9
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24
-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN) -1
XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km TN53TDX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ OTU2e/ FC800/ FC1200/ CBR_10G 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5
-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN) -1
XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km
-1.3
-7.3
-1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2398
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP TN54THA OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI TN54TOA OTU1/ STM-16/ OC-48/FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ OC-12/ ESCON/ STM-1/OC-3/ DVB-ASI/FE FC200/FC100/ FE/GE GE/FC100/ STM-4/ S-16.1 4
-3
-16
-5
-18
eSFP
1000BASELX-10km (I-1310-LC)
-3
-9.5
-20
-3
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
-3 0 3 3
-10 -5 -2 -2
-18 -18 -27 -28
-3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km
-2.5 -3
-9.5 -11.5
-17 -19
0 -3
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2399
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km 0 5
Minim um (dBm) -4.5 -2 0 -20 -22 -19 -3 -3 -3 eSFP CWDM
GE/FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/FC100/ GE/STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/DVBASI/FE SDI/HD-SDI
-28
-9
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km
-7
-16
Video eSFP
TN52TOG
GE
-2.5 -3 0 5
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22
0 -3 -3 -3
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2400
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 1.25 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11TOM TN52TOM FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 -2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
-28
-9
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2401
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE SDI 3 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video eSFP)-20 km 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate 1000 BASELX-10 km 1000 BASELX-40 km 1000 BASEZX-80 km
-7
-22
eSFP
TN11TQM TN12TQM
FC200/GE/ FC100/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI
-2.5 -3 0 5 -3 0 3 3
-9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2 -10 -5 -2 -2
-17 -19 -20 -22 -18 -18 -27 -28
0 -3 -3 -3 -3 0 -9 -9
eSFP
OTU1b/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
-19
-3
eSFP CWDM
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2402
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE TN12TQM OTU1/ STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 5 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
-28
-9
eSFP DWDM
TN11TQS
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
-3 0 3 3
-10 -5 -2 -2 0
-18 -18 -27 -28 -28
-3 0 -9 -9 -9
eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 2.67 Gbit/s 3 Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km TN11TQX TN52TQX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km -1
eSFP CWDM eSFP DWDM
-28
-9
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN)
-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN)
XFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2403
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) 10 Gbit/s Multirate -40 km 2
Minim um (dBm) -1 -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24 -1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km TN53TQX TN55TQX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/OTU2 /CBR_10G/ FC800/ FC1200 10 Gbit/s Multirate -10 km
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
-1
-6
-11 (multirate )/-14.4 (10GE LAN) -14 (multirate )/-15.8 (10GE LAN) -7.5 -24
-1 (STM64 )/0.5 (10GE LAN) -1
XFP
-1
10 Gbit/s Single Rate -0.3 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate -80 km 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)Fixed WavelengthNRZ-PIN-XFP TN11TSXL STM-256/ OC-768 40G Transponder
-1.3 4
-7.3 0
-1 -7
-3
-16
-6
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2404
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Type
Maximu m (dBm) TN53TSXL STM-256/ OC-768/OTU3 40G Transponder 3
Minim um (dBm) 0 -6 3 -
a: Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX supports FC1200 service. b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service. c: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.
C.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side

The main WDM-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type. Table C-2 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name Access Service Type Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) TN11L4 G OTU 5G 3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 3400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD TN11LD GD STM-16/ OTU1 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 2 2 -4 -4 0 0 Minimu m (dBm) -2 -3 -8 -8 -5 -5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9 -9 0 -9 0 -9
-25 -25 -18 -28 -18 -28
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2405
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 0 Minimu m (dBm) -5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9
-28
-5
-28
-9
TN11LD GS
STM-16/ OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-1 -1 3 3 3
-5 -5 -2 -2 -2
-18 -28 -18 -28 -28
0 -9 0 -9 -9
-2
-28
-9
TN12LD M TN11LD MD
OTU1 OTU1
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
3 -4 0
0 -8 -5
-28 -28 -28
-9 -9 -9
-5
-28
-9
TN11LD MS
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD
-1 3
-5 -2
-28 -28
-9 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2406
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable) 3 Minimu m (dBm) -2 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9
-28
TN12LD X
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
-3
-16
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LE M24
OTU2
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LE X4
OTU2
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LO A
OTU2
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LO G
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD
2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3
-16 -16 -26 -26
0 0 -9 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2407
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 2 2 2 2 Minimu m (dBm) -3 -3 -3 -3 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0 0 0 0
-16 -16 -16 -16
TN12LO G
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11LO M
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
-16 -16 -26 -26 -16 -16 -16 -16
0 0 -9 -9 0 0 0 0
TN12LO M
OTU2
2 2
-3 -2
-16 -25
0 -9
TN11LQ G
FEC 5G/ OTU5G
3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2408
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 3400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 2 3 -4 -4 0 0 0 Minimu m (dBm) -3 0 -8 -8 -5 -5 -5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9 -9 0 -9 0 -9 -9
-25 -28 -18 -28 -18 -28 -28
TN13LQ M TN11LQ MD
OTU1 OTU1
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-5
-28
-9
TN12LQ MD
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-4 0
-8 -5
-28 -28
-9 -9
-5
-28
-9
TN11LQ MS
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-1 -1 3 3
-5 -5 -2 -2
-18 -28 -18 -28
0 -9 0 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2409
Board Name
Access Service Type
-28
-2
-28
-9
TN12LQ MS
OTU1
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-1 3
-5 -2
-28 -28
-9 -9
-2
-28
-9
TN11LS Q
OTU3
0 0 2
-5 -5 -3
-16 -16 -16
0 0 0
TN11LS X TN12LS X
OTU2/ OTU2e
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
-16 -16 -26 -26 -16 -16 -16
0 0 -9 -9 0 0 0
TN13LS X
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2410
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP 2 Minimu m (dBm) -3 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0
-16
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
-3 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -3
-16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16 -16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TN11LS XL
OTU3
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
TN12LS XL
OTU3
TN11LS XLR
OTU3
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN 400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
TN12LS XLR
OTU3/ OTU3e
TN11LS XR
OTU2/ OTU2e
2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3
-16 -16 -26 -26 -16
0 0 -9 -9 0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2411
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) Minimu m (dBm) -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0 9 0 -10 -9
TN11LW X2
STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PINa 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APDa 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-1 -1 3 3 3
-18 -28 -18 -26 -28
TN11LW XD
STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PINa 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APDa 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD 12800 ps/nm-C BandTunable Wavelength-NRZAPD 6400 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four Channels-Tunable)
-4 -4 0 0 0
-8 -8 -5 -5 -5
-18 -28 -18 -26 -28
0 -9 0 -10 -9
-5
-28
-9
TN11LW XS TN12LW XSb
STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE/ ETR/ CLO
12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PINa 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APDa 6500 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 3200 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-1 -1 3 3
-5 -5 -2 -2
-18 -28 -18 -26
0 -9 0 -10
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2412
Board Name
Access Service Type
-28
-2
-28
-9
TN11TM X
OTU2
-3
-16
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
-16 -16 -26 -26 -16 -16 -16 -16
0 0 -9 -9 0 0 0 0
TN12TM X
OTU2
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN11ND 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2413
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) Minimu m (dBm) -3 -3 -3 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0 0 0
TN12ND 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
2 2 2
-16 -16 -16
2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3
-16 -16 -16 -16
0 0 0 0
TN52ND 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
TN53ND 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
2 2
-3 -3
-16 -16
0 0
TN51NQ 2/ TN52NQ 2/ TN53NQ 2/ TN54NQ 2 TN11NS 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
-3
-16
OTU2
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD
-3
-16
2 2 2
-3 -3 -3
-16 -16 -26
0 0 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2414
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 2 2 2 Minimu m (dBm) -3 -3 -3 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) -9 0 0
-26 -16 -16
TN12NS 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-APD 4800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-APD 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
2 2 2 2 2 2
-3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
-16 -26 -26 -16 -16 -16
0 -9 -9 0 0 0
TN52NS 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
2 2 2
-3 -3 -3
-16 -16 -16
0 0 0
TN53NS 2
OTU2/ OTU2e
2 0 0 0
-3 -5 -5 -5
-16 -16 -16 -16
0 0 0 0
TN11NS 3/ TN52NS 3 TN54NS 3
OTU3/ OTU3e
OTU3/ OTU3e
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-PIN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2415
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN 0 Minimu m (dBm) -5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Receiver Overload (dBm) 0
-16
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode. b: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/ CLO services.
Table C-3 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards Board Name Access Service Type Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) TN11EC OM GE 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km TN11LD GD TN11LD GS TN12LD M TN11LQ G STM-16/ OTU1 STM-16/ OTU1 OTU1 FEC 5G/ OTU5G 1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-50 km 5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-70 km TN13LQ M TN11LQ MD OTU1 OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-80 km 1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD 5 5 2 Minimum (dBm) 0 0 -0.5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -3 -9 -9
-19 -28 -28
2.5
-28
-9
5 5 5 5 2
0 2 2 0 -0.5
-28 -18 -28 -28 -28
-9 0 -9 -9 -9
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2416
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) Minimum (dBm) 2.5 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimum Overload Point (dBm) -9
TN11LQ MS TN11LW X2
OTU1
1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD 1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD
-28
STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ SDI/ FE/ ETR/ CLO
2.5
-28
-9
TN11LW XD
1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD
-0.5
-28
-9
TN11LW XS TN12LW XSa
1600 ps/nm-CWDM BandFixed Wavelength-NRZAPD
2.5
-28
-9
a: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/ CLO services.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2417
Table C-4 Quick reference table for specifications of WDM-side gray optical modules on OTU boards Board Name Access Service Type Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) TN11LE M24 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN11LE X4 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN11LO A TN12LO G OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN12TM X OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN12ND 2 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN53ND 2 TN51NQ 2 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km TN52NQ 2/ TN53NQ 2/ TN54NQ 2 OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km -1 2 4 -1 2 4 -1 2 -1 2 4 -1 2 4 -1 2 4 -1 2 -1 2 4 -1 2 Minimum (dBm) -6 -1 0 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 -6 -1 0 -6 -1 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimu m Overload Point (dBm) -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1 -1 -1 -7 -1 -1
-11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14 -11 -14 -24 -11 -14
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2418
Board Name
Access Service Type
Optical Module Optical Interface Type Supported Mean Launched Optical Power Maximu m (dBm) Minimum (dBm) -6 -1 Receiver Sensitivit y (dBm) Minimu m Overload Point (dBm) -1 -1
TN53NS2
OTU2
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
-1 2
-11 -14
C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification

The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength. Table C-5 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit Board Name Channel Gain (dB) Nomin al Chann el Gain (dB) 16 22 25.5 DAS1/ OAU101 20 to 31 20 26 31 OAU102 20 to 31 20 26 31 OAU103 24 to 36 24 29 36 OAU105 23 to 34 23 30 34
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Input Power Range per Channel (dBm) 40 channels -32 to -14 -32 to -20 -32 to -23.5 -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27 -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30 -32 to -20 -32 to -25 -32 -32 to -16 -32 to -23 -32 to -27 80 channels -32 to -17 -32 to -23 -32 to -27.5 -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30 -32 to -22 -32 to -28 -32 -32 to -23 -32 to -28 -32 -32 to -19 -32 to -26 -32 to -30
Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 40 channels -14 -20 -23.5 -16 -22 -27 -19 -25 -30 -20 -25 -32 -16 -23 -27 80 channels -17 -23 -27.5 -19 -25 -30 -22 -28 -32 -23 -28 -32 -19 -26 -30
2419
OAU100
16 to 25.5
Board Name
Channel Gain (dB)
Nomin al Chann el Gain (dB) 20 23 17 23
Input Power Range per Channel (dBm) 40 channels -32 to -20 -32 to -19 -32 to -17 -24 to -16 80 channels -32 to -23 -32 to -22 -32 to -20 -24 to -19
Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 40 channels -20 -19 -17 -16 80 channels -23 -22 -20 -19
OBU101 OBU103 OBU104 OBU205
201.5 231.5 171.5 231.5
Table C-6 Quick reference table for TN12OBU1P1 Board Name TN12OBU1P1 Total input power range at the VI optical port(dBm) -30 to 7 Maximum total output optical power(dBm) 9
Table C-7 Quick reference table for CRPC Board Name Channel Gain (dB) G.652 fiber CRPC01 CRPC03 10 >10 LEAF fiber 12 NA Maximum Pump Power (dBm) 29 29.5
Table C-8 Quick reference table for HBA Board Name Channel Gain (dB) Typical Input Power of a Single Wavelength (dBm) 80 channels HBA 291 -22 40 channels -19 10 channels -13 Nominal Input Power Range (dBm) -25 to -3 Channel Allocation (nm)
1529 to 1561
C.3 Other Unit Specification

The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2420
Table C-9 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards Board Name TN11MR2/TN21MR2 Insertion Loss (dB) IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11MR4/TN21MR4 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11MR8 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11MR8V IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN21CMR1 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4 IN-MO MI-OUT Add/drop channel TN11DMR1/ TN21DMR1 EIN-EMO EMI-EOUT WIN-WMO WMI-WOUT Add/drop channel TN11SBM2 TN11D40/TN12D40 TN11D40V Add/drop channel 6.5 8a 1 3 2 0.8 1.5 1.0 4.5 0.8 1 1.0 4 3 2.2 3.5 1.5 1.5 1.0
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2421
Board Name TN21DFIU
Insertion Loss (dB) EIN-ETM ERM-EOUT WIN-WTM WRM-WOUT EIN-ETC ERC-EOUT WIN-WTC WRC-WOUT 1 1.5
TN11FIU/TN12FIU/ TN13FIU/TN21FIU
IN-TM RM-OUT IN-TC RC-OUT
1.5
TN11SFIU
LINE1-SYS1 LINE2-SYS2 LINE1-OSC1 LINE1-OSC2
1.0
1.5
TN11ITL01
RE-OUT RO-OUT IN-TE IN-TO
<4.5
<2.5
TN11ITL04
<3
<3
TN12ITL
<4.5
<3.5
TN11M40/TN12M40 TN11M40V/TN12M40V TN11DCP
6.5 8a Transmit-end insertion loss Single mode 4 Multimode 4.5
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2422
Board Name
Insertion Loss (dB) Receive-end insertion loss Single mode 1.5 Multimode 2
TN12DCP
Transmit-end insertion loss Receive-end insertion loss
Single mode 4 Single mode 1.5 Single mode 4 Multimode 4.5 Single mode 1.5 Multimode 2
TN11OLP
TN12OLP
Single mode Multimode Single mode Multimode Single mode Multimode
4 1.5 4 4.5 4 4.5 12.5 11.5 12.5 1 8.5 12.5a 1.5 9a 7 14a 3 8a
TN11SCS
Wavelength dropping insertion loss Wavelength adding insertion loss
TN11RDU9
IN-Drop(DM1-DM8) ROA-Drop(DM1-DM8) IN-EXPO IN-TOA
TN11RMU9
EXPI-OUT AMxb-TOA ROA-OUT
TN11ROAM
Mxc-OUT IN-DM EXPI-OUT IN-EXPO
TN11WSD9/ TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9 TN11WSM9/ TN12WSM9/ TN13WSM9
IN-DMxd IN-EXPO AMxb-OUT EXPI-OUT
8a
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2423
Board Name TN11WSMD2
Insertion Loss (dB) AMxb-OUT IN-DMxd 8a 4.5 8a
TN11WSMD4/ TN12WSMD4 TN11WSMD9
AMxb-OUT IN-DMxd AMxb/EXPI-OUT IN-DMxd/EXPO
8a 12
a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB. b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8. c: Mx denotes M1-M40. d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8.
C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio

Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals. Table C-10 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board. Table C-10 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board Board Name CRPC D40 D40V DAS1 FIU HBA ITL M40 M40V OAU1 OBU1 Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB) "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB) "MONR"/"SOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path "MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20 dB) "MONT"/"LOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30 dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2424
Board Name OBU2 RDU9 RMU9 WSD9 WSM9 WSMD2 WSMD4 WSMD9
Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC. For detailed functions and features, refer to Table C-11. Table C-11 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name Tun able Wav elen gth Fun ctio n N Y Y Y N Y ESC Func tion ALS Func tion OTN Func tion FEC Encoding WDM Specificatio n AFE C-2 DW DM CW DM Opti cal Mod ule PRB S on the Clie nt Side PRB S on the WD M Side
FEC
AFE C
TN11EC OM TN11L4G TN11LD GD TN11LD GS TN11LD M TN11LD MD
N Y Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N N N
N N N N N N
N Y Y Y Y Y
Y N Y Y Y N
eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP
N N N N Y Y
N N N N Y Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2425
Board Name
Tun able Wav elen gth Fun ctio n Y Y N N Y
ESC Func tion
ALS Func tion
OTN Func tion
FEC Encoding
WDM Specificatio n AFE C-2 DW DM CW DM
FEC
AFE C
Opti cal Mod ule
PRB S on the Clie nt Side
PRB S on the WD M Side
TN11LD MS TN12LD X TN11LE M24 TN11LEX 4 TN11LO A TN11LO G TN12LO G TN11LO M TN12LO M TN11LQ G TN13LQ M TN11LQ MD TN12LQ MD TN11LQ MS TN12LQ MS TN11LSQ
Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N N
N Y N N Y
Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N Y
eSFP XFP XFP/ SFP+ XFP/ SFP+ eSFP /SFP + eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP N
Y Y N N Y
Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y N Y N N N N N N N N
N Y N Y N N N N N N Y
N N N N N Y Y N Y N N
N N N N N Y N Y N Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2426
Board Name
Tun able Wav elen gth Fun ctio n Y
ESC Func tion
ALS Func tion
OTN Func tion
FEC Encoding
FEC
AFE C
Opti cal Mod ule
TN11LSX TN12LSX TN13LSX TN11LSX L TN12LSX L TN11LSX LR TN12LSX LR TN11LSX R TN11LW X2 TN11LW XD TN11LW XS TN12LW XS TN11TM X TN12TM X TN11ND2 TN12ND2 TN52ND2 TN53ND2 TN51NQ2 TN52NQ2
XFP
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y
Y N N N
Y Y Y Y
N N N N
XFP N N N
Y N Y N
Y N N N
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
Y N N N
Y N N N
Y N N N
N N N N
Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y
XFP eSFP eSFP eSFP
N N N N
N N N N
Y Y Y Y Y Y N N
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y N N N N N N
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y N Y Y Y N N N
N Y N Y Y Y N Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N N N N N
eSFP eSFP N XFP N XFP XFP XFP
Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2427
Board Name
Tun able Wav elen gth Fun ctio n Y N Y
ESC Func tion
ALS Func tion
OTN Func tion
FEC Encoding
FEC
AFE C
Opti cal Mod ule
TN53NQ2 TN54NQ2 TN11NS2 TN12NS2 TN52NS2 TN53NS2 TN11NS3 TN52NS3 TN54NS3 TN11TBE TN11TD G TN11TD X TN12TD X TN52TD X TN53TD X TN54TH A TN54TO A TN11TO M TN52TO M TN11TQ M
Y Y Y
N N N
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
N N Y
Y Y N
Y Y Y
N N N
XFP XFP N
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
N N N
Y Y Y
Y Y Y
N N Y
Y Y N
Y Y Y
N N N
N XFP N
Y Y Y
Y N N N
Y N N N
N Y Y Y
Y N N N
Y N N N
N N N N
Y N N N
Y N N N
N N N N
N eSFP XFP eSFP eSFP
N N Y
N N N N
Y N N Y
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
N Y Y Y
N N N N
N N N N
N N N Y
N N N Y
XFP eSFP eSFP eSFP
Y Y Y Y
eSFP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2428
Board Name
Tun able Wav elen gth Fun ctio n N N N
ESC Func tion
ALS Func tion
OTN Func tion
FEC Encoding
FEC
AFE C
Opti cal Mod ule
TN12TQ M TN11TQS TN11TQ X TN52TQ X TN53TQ X TN55TQ X TN11TSX L TN53TSX L TN52TO G

NOTE
N Y N
Y Y Y
N Y Y
N Y N
N N N
N N N
N N N
N N N
eSFP eSFP XFP
Y N Y
N N N N
Y N N N
Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y
N N N N
N N N N
N N N N
N N N N
N N N N
XFP N N eSFP
Y N Y N
l "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information about the modules can be obtained through a query on the U2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface. l The boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other.
C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different types of loopback. Table C-12 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name ECOM Client-Side Inloop Y Client-Side Outloop Y WDM-Side Inloop Y WDM-Side Outloop N Channel loopback N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2429
Board Name LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD LDMS LDX LOA LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSQ LSX TN11LSXL TN12LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX ND2 NQ2 NS2 NS3 TDG TDX
Client-Side Inloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
Client-Side Outloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
WDM-Side Inloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N
WDM-Side Outloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N
Channel loopback N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2430
Board Name THA TOA TOG TN11TOM TN52TOM TQM TQS TQX TSXL
Client-Side Inloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Client-Side Outloop Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
WDM-Side Inloop N N N Y Y N N N N
WDM-Side Outloop N N N Y Y N N N N
Channel loopback Y Y N N Y N N N N
NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function. For detailed protection mode, refer to Table C-13. Table C-13 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards Board Name Protection Mode SW SNC P VLA N SNC P OD Uk SNC P Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion OWS P Prote ction OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n N N N N N N Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion N N N N N N DB PS DL AG MS SNCP Tribut ary SNCP
ECOM L4G LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD
N Y Y Y N N
N Y N N N N
N N N N N N
N Y Y Y Y Y
N Y Y N Y Y
N Y N Y Y N
N N N N N N
N N N N N N
N Y N N N N
N N N N N N
2431
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Board Name
Protection Mode SW SNC P VLA N SNC P OD Uk SNC P Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion OWS P Prote ction OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y DB PS DL AG MS SNCP Tribut ary SNCP
LDMS LDX LEM24 LEX4 LOA LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSQ LSX LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX ND2 NQ2 NS2 NS3 TBE
N N N N N Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N
Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y
N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Ya N N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y N
Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y N N
N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N N N N Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
N N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2432
Board Name
Protection Mode SW SNC P VLA N SNC P OD Uk SNC P Clie ntSide 1+1 Prote ction IntraBoard 1+1 Protec tion OWS P Prote ction OD Uk SPRi ng Prot ectio n N N N N N N N N N N N Bo ard Le vel Pro tect ion N N N N N N N N N N N DB PS DL AG MS SNCP Tribut ary SNCP
TDG TDX TEM28 THA TOA TOG TOM TQM TQS TQX TSXL
Y N N N N N Y Y N N N
N N N N N N N N N N N
Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
N N N N N N Y N N N N
N N N N N N Y N N N N
Y N Y N N N Y Y N N N
N Y N Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y
NOTE a: The TN11LSXL does not support intra-board 1+1 protection. NOTE "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection. For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table C-14, Table C-15 and Table C-16. Table C-14 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 8800 Board Name LDM LDMD Electrical Cross-Connection N N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2433
Board Name LDMS LDX LEM24 LEX4 LOA LOG LOM LQM LQMD LQMS LSQ LSX LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWXS TMX ND2
Electrical Cross-Connection N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e

NOTE Only the TN53ND2 supports ODUflex.
NQ2
32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/8 x ODUflex//4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

NOTE Only the TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex.
NS2
8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1/2 x ODUflex/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e

NOTE Only the TN53NS2 supports ODUflex.
NS3
32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/1 x ODU3/1 x ODU3e

NOTE Only the TN54NS3 supports ODU3/ODU3e.
TDX
2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e/2x ODUflex

NOTE Only the TN53TDX supports ODUflex.
THA TOA
32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2434
Board Name TOM TQX
Electrical Cross-Connection 8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/4 x ODUflex

NOTE Only the TN55TQX supports ODUflex.
TOG TSXL
8 x ODU0 1 x ODU3
"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Table C-15 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 6800 Board Name Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection ECOM L4G LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD LDMS LDX LEM24 LEX4 LOA LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSQ LSX 1 x GE 4 x GE 2 x GE 2 x GE N N N N 2 x 10GE 2 x 10GE N 8 x GE N 4 x GE 4 x GE 4 x GE 4 x GE/1 x ODU1 N N Distributed Cross-Connection 1 x GE 4 x GE 2 x GE 2 x GE N N N N N N N 8 x GE N 4 x GE 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1 N N
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2435
Board Name
Electrical Cross-Connection Integrated Cross-Connection Distributed Cross-Connection N N N N x N N N N 4 x ODU1

NOTE It is supported by TN11NS2.
LSXL LSXLR LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX ND2 NQ2 NS2
N N N N N N N 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e 16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e 4 x ODU1/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e
NS3 TBE TDG TDX TOG TN11TOM TN52TOM TQM TQS TQX TSXL
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e 16 x GE 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e 4 x ODU1 8 x GE/4 x ODU1 4 x ODU1 4 x GE/1 x ODU1 4 x ODU1 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
N N 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 8 x ODU1 4 x ODU1/ 8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1 8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any 4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1 4 x ODU1 N N
Table C-16 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 3800 Board Name ECOM L4G Electrical Cross-Connection 1 x GE 4 x GE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2436
Board Name LDGD LDGS LDM LDMD LDMS LDX LOA LOG LOM LQG LQM LQMD LQMS LSX LSXR LWX2 LWXD LWXS TMX NS2 TBE TDG TDX TOG TOM TQM TQS
Electrical Cross-Connection 2 x GE 2 x GE N N N N N 8 x GE N 4 x GE 4 x Any/4 x GE 4 x Any/4 x GE 4 x Any/4 x GE N N N N N N 4 x ODU1 16 x GE 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 8 x ODU1 4 x ODU1 8 x GE/8 x Any/4 x ODU1 4 x Any/1 x ODU1 4 x ODU1
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2437
D Parameter Reference
D
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface) D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) D.7 Default VLAN ID D.8 Enabled/Disabled D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression D.10 Enabling LCAS D.11 Entry Detection
Parameter Reference
D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface) D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)
D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface) D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface) D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) D.18 Hardware REG Enabled D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m) D.22 Laser-in-Position Status D.23 LCAS Mode
D.24 Line Rate D.25 Loop Detection D.26 Loop Port Shutdown D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface) D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) D.29 MAC Loopback D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface) D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.35 Min. Members-Transmit Direction D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface) D.37 MSP Sharing D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface) D.44 PHY Loopback D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface) D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface) D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface) D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface) D.54 TSD D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface) D.56 VLAN Priority
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2440
D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)

Description
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the laser after the signals received by a board are lost. This parameter is applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.
Impact on the System

If the automatic laser shutdown function is enabled, the services of the optical interface may be interrupted.
Values
OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800 Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for WDM-side optical interfaces.
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Description After the received signal is lost, the laser is automatically shut down and stops emitting optical signals. This can prolong the life span of the laser and avoid injuries to relevant personnel. l If automatic laser shutdown is enabled for a transmitting port on the client side of an OTU board, the laser on the transmitting port will be automatically shut down when the corresponding port on the WDM side of the board receives no signal or detects SF. In addition, the laser on the transmitting port of the local OTU board will be automatically shut down when the corresponding receiving port on the opposite OTU board receives no signal. Disabled After the received signal is lost, the laser is not shut down automatically. The parameter is usually set to Disabled during commissioning.
Configuration Guidelines
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
In the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800:
Only the LWX2, LWXD and LWXS support the Automatic Laser Shutdown function of the WDM side.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 doesn't support the LWX2 and LWXD boards.
Relationship with Other Parameters

None.
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The Board Mode parameter is used to set the board mode of a board depending on the service application scenario.

The signal flow, work mode, and functions of a board vary with the board mode. Therefore, switching between different board modes interrupts the active services.
Values
The following table lists the work modes of the ECOM board. Value Range Service Mode, HUB Mode Default Value HUB Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the ECOM board. Parameter Value Service Mode HUB Mode Remarks Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x GE service. Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x FE service.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN12LQMS board. Value Range NS1 Mode, LQM Mode Default Value LQM Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12LQMS board.
Parameter Value NS1 Mode LQM Mode
Remarks As a line board, this board adds and drops OTU1 signals in conjunction with another tributary board. As a tributary/line integrated board, this board converges four channels of Any signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.
NOTE
The NS1 Mode field is valid only when the TN12LQMS board is housed in an OptiX OSN 6800 subrack or OptiX OSN 3800 subrack.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN11TOM. Value Range Cascading Mode, Non-cascading Mode Default Value Non-cascading Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11TOM. Parameter Value Cascading Mode Remarks Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to six channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals. RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any signals into two channels of OTU1 signals.
Non-cascading Mode
The following table lists the work modes of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/TN12LSXLR. Value Range Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default Value Electrical Relay Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/ TN12LSXLR. Parameter Value Electrical Relay Mode Optical Relay Mode Remarks In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2443
The following table lists the work modes of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/TN53NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN54NS3. Value Range Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode Default Value Line Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN53ND2/ TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3. Parameter Value Line Mode Electrical Relay Mode Optical Relay Mode Remarks The board works as a line board. The board works as a wavelength conversion relay unit. In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Select the board mode according to the actual service application scenario.

None.
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

Description
The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded.

After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the flow of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.
Values
Value Range 10%-100% Default Value 30%
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2444
Value 10% Description Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 10% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 20% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 30% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 40% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 50% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 60% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 70% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 80% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 90% of the bandwidth of a port. Indicates that the broadcast packets can account for a maximum of 100% of the bandwidth of a port.
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%

This parameter is available only when Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2445
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)

Description
The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board. The value can be set. Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.

When it is set to Unused, no alarm on the optical interface is reported.
Values
Value Range Used, Unused Default Value Used
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Used Unused Description Indicates that the current channel is used. Indicates that the current channel is not used.
l l l This parameter is set to Used by default. Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment. When a channel is not used, you need to disable the laser of the channel. Otherwise, the laser forcibly enabled alarm may be reported.
D.5 Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Client Service Bearer Rate (Mbit/s)sets the rate of the accessed service at the optical interface on the client side of a board. This parameter applies to the client side of the optical transponder board.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2446

A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value.
Values
Value Range The specific value range is related to the board. Default Value The specific value is related to the board. Unit Mbit/s
The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services.

None.
D.6 Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Current Bearer Rate(Mbit/s) parameter provides an option to query the rate of services accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate. Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range 16-2500 Default Value / Unit Mbit/s
None.

None.
D.7 Default VLAN ID

Description
The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID for a port that transmits untagged packets.

The default VLAN ID of a packet will be stripped when it traverses a HYBRID port.
Values
Value Range 1-4095 Default Value 1
None.

None.
D.8 Enabled/Disabled
Description
The Enabled/Disabled parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to Disabled.

The attributes of a port take effect only after the port is enabled. If a port is disabled, the attributes of the port will be invalid and the service at this port will be interrupted.
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value.

Value Enabled Disabled
Description Enables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the port take effect. Disables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the port becomes invalid and the service at the port is interrupted.
None.

None.
D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression

Description
The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the traffic of broadcast packets.

After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.
Values
Value Range Disabled, Enabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates that the traffic of broadcast packets is not limited. Indicates that excess broadcast packets will be discarded if the traffic of broadcast packets exceeds the specified threshold.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2449
Set this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.

Suppression of broadcast packets is implemented only when this parameter is set to Enabled.
D.10 Enabling LCAS

Description
The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is automatically increased if the member recovers.

As a bidirectional protocol, the LCAS can work normally only when some bandwidth is available in the bidirectional physical paths. If the bandwidth is available in the unidirectional physical paths only, the LCAS may fail to correctly adjust the bandwidth.
Values
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Disabled Enabled Description Disables the LCAS protocol. Enables the LCAS protocol.
You can set Enabling LCAS as required.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2450
D.11 Entry Detection

Description
The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

None.
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Enables a port to detect packets by tag identifier. Disables a port to detect packets by tag identifier. In this case, all packets can traverse the port.
None.

The entry detection states at the ingress and egress ports of a service must be the same.
D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2451
Values
Value Range Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex Default Value Vary with different boards
l l l This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to Ethernet service. The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services of the customer. If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the active and standby ports.

None.
D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface)

Description
A flow control mechanism is applied between FC service client-side equipment and between two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching function of FC services, which ensures that the bandwidth does not decrease during long haul transmission of FC services. The FC Distance Extension parameter indicates whether the FC distance extension function is enabled.

None.
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value -
The following table lists the description of each value. Parameter Value Enabled Disabled Remarks Indicates the FC distance extension function is enabled. Indicates the FC distance extension function is disabled.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2452
If the distance between the transmit and receive ends of FC services exceeds the maximum transmission distance that the FC switch supports, the value of the parameter must be set to Enabled.

This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to FC services.
D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.

Different FEC modes have different capabilities of enhancing the SNR of the optical signal at the receive end and support different extended distances of the repeater section.
Values
Value Range FEC, AFEC Default Value Vary with different boards
Value FEC AFEC
Description Indicates a technology of coding error correction. It can correct bit errors generated in signal transmission. Indicates a new technology of coding error correction. It is suitable for correcting burst bit errors. The AFEC coding technology has stronger error correction capabilities than the FEC.
FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same. According to the network design, set FEC Mode to a proper value. In the case of expansion of an existing network or proper OSNR, FEC is recommended; in the case of comparatively poor network performance and high OSNR requirement, AFEC is recommended.

This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled. For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800, this parameter is automatically set to AFEC when you set Service Type to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface)

Description

Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance.
Values
Value Range Enabled, Disabled Default Value The specific value is related to the board.
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates enabling the FEC function of a board. Indicates disabling the FEC function of a board.
The FEC Working State parameter on the transmit end must be consistent with that on the receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.
NOTE
Two OTUs with different FEC working states can be interconnected.
D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter sets or queries the output optical power of an optical amplifier board.

Changing the value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) directly influences the optical power of each wavelength on the line.
Values
Value Range 5 dBm-30 dBm (continuously tunable) Default Value None.
Normally, the fixed pump optical power of the CRPC and ROP board should be larger than 23 dBm. The value is related to the system specifications.

Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) must be set within a range between Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) and Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm). If the fixed pump optical power value is beyond the range, the board might work abnormally.
D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm).

None.
Values
Value Range 20.0-40.0 Default Value None Unit dB
None.

This parameter is different from the Nominal Gain parameter. The Nominal Gain parameter indicates the gain of the signal optical power, excluding the noise power. The Gain parameter, however, is only related to the power and includes the noise power. Therefore, if the noise power
occupies a large ratio and the input optical power is low, the gain queried exceeds the nominal gain of the board.
D.18 Hardware REG Enabled

Description
The Hardware REG Enabled parameter provides an option for enabling or disabling the hardware regeneration function.

After the hardware regeneration function is enabled, the service at an optical interface is affected.
Values
Valid Value Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Description Optical signals are regenerated after being received by the input optical interface, and then they are directly sent to the downstream board. This is similar to an outloop of the signals between the input and output optical interfaces. After receiving optical signals, an optical interface processes the optical signals in a usual way, like regenerating the signals and processing the SDH overhead.
Disabled
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2456
D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary and secondary input optical interfaces of a board. The value can be set.

l In the OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800, this parameter functions as the SD switching threshold reference value for optical line protection (OLP), OTU + OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection. During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between the primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, SD switching occurs. The initial variance value is an important factor in calculating the optical power variance and affects the service switching.
Values
Value Range -10.0 to 10.0 Default Value 0 Unit dB
After the optical power of the system is commissioned and is normal, set this parameter according to the primary and secondary input optical power and the following formula: Initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power = Initial input optical power of the primary optical interface - Initial input optical power of the secondary optical interface

l The setting of the initial variance affects the calculation of the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power. The formula for calculating the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power is as follows: Variance between current primary and secondary input optical power = current input power of the primary optical interface - current input power of the secondary optical interface initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power If the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power exceeds the value of the Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter, the protection switching occurs.
D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)

Description
The Laser Status parameter sets the laser status of a board.

This parameter directly determines whether the corresponding optical interface outputs optical signals. If this parameter is set to Off, services are interrupted.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range On, Off Default Value For OTU boards: l WDM side: On l Client side: Off For amplifier board: On
The following table lists the description of each value. Value On Off Description Indicates enabling the laser. Indicates disabling the laser.
l Optical wavelength conversion unit The normal service requires that the lasers on both WDM side and client side should be opened. When installing and commissioning OTUs, you must set the Laser Status parameter to Off to protect the downstream boards. In the case of the OTUs configured with intra-board 1 + 1 optical channel protection or client-side 1 + 1 protection, whether to enable or disable the laser on the board client side is controlled by the NE software automatically. No manual setting is required. l Optical amplifier board In the case of the CRPC board, you can set optical interface parameters only when the laser is disabled.
NOTE
After the commissioning, you must set the Laser Status parameter to On.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2458

NOTE
In the case of the inter-board 1+1 protection and client-side protection realized by the SCS board, the lasers on the active and standby OTUs on the client side are open and closed respectively in the case of normal operation. You must not enable the disabled laser manually. Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
NOTE
The parameter value of Laser Status is not restored automatically by the U2000. That is, after the board is replaced, the parameter value is set to the default value.

To forcibly enable the laser on the U2000 during commissioning, you need to set the Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter to Disabled.
D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m)

Description
The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module.

This parameter has no impact on the system operation.
Values
Valid Value 2000, 10000, 15000, 40000, 80000 Default Value -
The value of this parameter is subject to the type of the optical module. The following table lists the values of this parameter for different types of optical modules. Optical Module Type I-64.1 S-64.2b I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 Value 10000 40000 2000 15000 40000 80000
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2459
None.

None.
D.22 Laser-in-Position Status

Description
The Laser-in-Position Status parameter indicates whether the physical laser on the line board is installed.

Values
Valid Value In-Position, Not-in-Position Default Value -
The following table lists the description of each value. Value In-Position Not-in-Position Description Indicates that the physical laser on the line board is installed. Indicates that the physical laser on the line board is not installed.
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2460
D.23 LCAS Mode

Description
The LCAS mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and Rs_Ack messages received from the source end.

The system operation is not affected.
Values
Value Range Huawei mode, Standard mode Default Value Huawei mode
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Huawei mode Standard mode Description Inverts the RS_Ack message, and then transmits the MST message. Transmits the MST message, and then Inverts the RS_Ack message.
To set the LCAS mode, follow the principles: l l If the interconnected equipment at the two ends is Huawei equipment, select Huawei Mode. If Huawei equipment is interconnected to a third-party equipment, set the interconnected equipment to the same mode according to the mode supported by the third-party equipment.

None.
D.24 Line Rate

Description
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate.

If the values of the Line Rate parameter for the transmit and receive boards are different, services are unavailable.
Values
Value Range Standard Mode, Speedup Mode Default Value Vary with different boards
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Speedup Mode Description Set Line Rate for a board on the line to Speedup Mode when the following conditions are satisfied. l An OTU or a tributary board on the line transmits/ receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the board is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). l Line Rate for another board on the line is set to Speedup Mode. Standard Mode Set Line Rate for a board on the line to Standard Mode when the following conditions are satisfied. l The conditions for setting Line Rate to Speedup Mode and Speedup Mode 11.3G are not satisfied. l Line Rate for another line board on the line is set to Standard Mode.
l l l l This parameter should be set according to the actual service mapping mode and the optical signal rate on the network. This parameter must be set to the same value at the transmit and receive ends. The values of the Line Rate parameter for the upstream and downstream boards must be the same. In the case of the LSXLR, LSXR, TN12ND2(Relay Mode), TN52ND2(Relay Mode), TN54NQ2(Relay Mode), and TN54NS3(Relay Mode) boards, it is recommended that you set Enable Auto-Sensing to Enabled. In this case, the system supports the FEC Type and Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is required.
Configuration examples: l Example 1: As shown in Figure D-1, the 52ND2 works as a regeneration board.
When the 12LSX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode. In other cases, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure D-1 Example 1
M U X D M U X M U X M U X D M U X M U X
12LSX
D M U X
52ND2
D M U X
12LSX
Example 2: As shown in Figure D-2, the 52ND2(1) and 52ND2(3) work as line boards, and the 52ND2 (2) works as a regeneration board. When the 52TDX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode. In other cases, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure D-2 Example 2
52TDX
52ND2 (1)
D M U X
52ND2 (2)
D M U X
52ND2 (3)
52TDX
Example 3: As shown in Figure D-3, the 54NS3(1) and 54NS3(3) work as line boards, and the 54NS3 (2) works as a regeneration board. When the 52TQX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Speedup Mode. In other cases, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Standard Mode. Figure D-3 Example 3
52TQX
54NS3 (1)
D M U X
54NS3 (2)
D M U X
54NS3 (3)
52TQX
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2463

l l LSXLR and LSXR: This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Enabled. TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3: This parameter can be set only when Board Mode is set to Relay Mode and Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled.
D.25 Loop Detection

Description
The Loop Detection parameter specifies the function of reporting the self-loop alarms after one of the following loopback cases is detected. l l l l For the external physical interface of the board, the transmit direction is connected to the receive direction by a fiber. The two external physical ports on the board are cross-connected to each other through fibers. The cross-connection is created on the same VCTRUNK of the board. The cross-connection is created between different VCTRUNKs of the board.

After the self-loop check function is enabled for a port, the specified self-loop check packets are transmitted from the port. One packet is transmitted each second.
Values
Valid Values Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
To check the self-loop port, select Enabled.

The loop port shut-down function takes effect only after the loop check function is enabled.
D.26 Loop Port Shutdown

Description
The Loop Port Shutdown parameter is set to disable the self-loop port after a self-loop port is detected if the loop port shutdown function is enabled. After the self-loop port is shut down, the self-loop port only transmits or receives the self-loop detection packets rather than any other packets. If the port is not a self-loop port, it starts to work again.

If a port enables the loop port shut-down function, the IEEE 802.3ah protocol blocks the port once the port is detected to be a self-loop port. In this case, the services at the port are interrupted. All the packets based on the upper-level protocol are discarded.
Values
Valid Values Enabled, Disabled Default Value Enabled
To block a self-loop port, select Enabled. Otherwise, select Disabled.

The loop port shutdown function takes effect only after the IEEE 802.3ah protocol and the loop detection function are enabled.
D.27 Optical Interface Loopback (WDM Interface)

Description
The Optical Interface Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board. The value can be set. For optical wavelength conversion unit, WDM side/client side availability: WDM side, client side

When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or Outloop, services are interrupted.
Values
Value Range Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Default Value Non-Loopback

Value Non-Loopback Inloop
Description Indicates that the equipment is normal. Optical interface loopback is not required when the equipment runs normally. Loops the signals to be output from the output optical interface back to the input optical interface of the same equipment at the local end. Inloop is used to test whether the signal processing on the board is normal. Directly loops the accessed signals of the local equipment back to the corresponding output optical interface before signal processing on the premise that the signal structure is not changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors.
Outloop
Loopback is usually used for equipment commissioning and troubleshooting. Before adding services to the equipment, you must check whether loopback is set for the optical interfaces. If the loopback exists, release it immediately. Outloop indicates a mode where the unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment are directly looped back to the corresponding output interface with the signal structure unchanged. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors The following figure shows the outloop configuration. Type Client-side outloop of the OTU Illustration
Outloop OTU
Client side
WDM side
WDM-side outloop of the OTU
OTU Outloop
Client side
WDM side
Inloop indicates that the processed signal is transmitted from the transmit port at the local end and then looped back to the receive port at the local end. Inloop is used to test whether the signal processing on the board is normal. The following figure shows the inloop configuration.
Type Client-side inloop of the OTU
Illustration
Inloop OTU
Client side
WDM side
WDM-side inloop of the OTU
OTU Client side
Inloop
WDM side

None.
D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface)

Description
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT).

Enabling the LPT does not affect system running but makes it impossible to configure ALS function.
Values
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Description Indicates that the link_err alarm of the upstream station is transparently transmitted to the downstream station.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2467
Value Disabled
Description Indicates that the link_err alarm of the upstream station is not transmitted to the downstream station.
l Enabling the LPT can support the system to transparently transmit link status. In this way, the downstream station can determine the running status of the upstream station according to whether the link_err alarm occurs, and thus adopts the corresponding working status. Therefore, whether to enable the LPT depends on the actual network situation. Before enabling the LPT, ensure the following: The board to be configured is an Ethernet service (such as the GE service) board. The services carried on the board are normal. The services carried on the board are not configured with ALS function.
D.29 MAC Loopback

Description
The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

A MAC loopback is used for fault locating but can interrupt services. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the PHY Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the PHY Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to NonLoopback.
Values
Value Range Non-Loopback, Inloop Default Value Non-Loopback
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Non-Loopback Inloop Description Indicates that no loopback is configured. Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. In this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2468
l l l l For a GE optical port, GE electrical port, FE optical port, and FE electrical port, an MAC loopback can be set to only inloop. For a 10GE optical port, an MAC loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop. An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port. By default a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five minutes.

This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.
D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description

None.
Values
The value can be queried through the system.
None.

None.
D.31 Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Maxmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the maximum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value is larger than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally.

None.
Values
Value Range 5 dBm-30 dBm Default Value l ROP: 28 dBm l CRPC: 26 dBm
None.

If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is larger than the value of Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.
D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)

Description
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services. Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 l A board may transparently transmit FE, GE, or 10GE services by encapsulating them in GFP-T format. when the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, this data packet will still be transparently transmitted. In case of transmission of GE or 10GE services in the GFP-F format, when the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, the data packet is discarded.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range 1518-9600 Default Value 9600
None.

When Service Type is GE or Port Mapping is MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), and the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, the data packet is discarded. When Service Type is GE(GFP-T) or Port Mapping is Bit Transparent Mapping(11.1G), and the length of a data packet is greater than the preset Max. Packet Length, this data packet will still be transparently transmitted.
D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by the current optical interface of a board.

None.
Values
None.

None.
D.34 Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Minmun Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the minimum pump optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value is smaller than the minimum value, the board might work abnormally.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2471
Values
Value Range 5 dBm-30 dBm Default Value 20 dBm
None.

If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is smaller than the value of Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.
D.35 Min. Members-Transmit Direction

Description
When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Min. Members-Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the valid members in the transmit direction.

When the LCAS is enabled, failure of certain paths does not affect the service in the case of sufficient bandwidths. The user can set this parameter to enable the reporting of the LCAS_PLCT alarm only when the number of the valid members in the transmit direction is smaller than a certain value.
Values
Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user.
D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Monitor Interval (min.) parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status.

None.
Values
Value Range 5 to 49995 Default Value 10 Unit min
The default value is recommended.

None.
D.37 MSP Sharing

Description
The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface.

Values
Valid Value Enabled, Disabled Default Value Disabled
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Description Indicates that multiple MS protection groups can be configured at the same optical interface. Indicates that only one MS protection group can be configured at the same optical interface.
Disabled
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2473
Currently, an optical interface supports a maximum of two MS protection groups.

None.
D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power.

Modifying this parameter directly affects the output power of all wavelengths passing through the amplifier board.
Values
l OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800 Value Range HBA: 29dB OAU101: 20dB to 31dB, continuously tunable OAU102: 20dB to 31dB, continuously tunable OAU103: 24dB to 36dB, continuously tunable OAU105: 23dB to 34dB, continuously tunable OBU101: 20dB OBU103: 23dB OBU104: 17dB OBU205: 23dB Default Value The specific value is related to the module.
l Huawei provides many types of OAU boards. The different gain ranges of an OAU board of the same type are applicable to different application scenarios. For example, the gain range of the OAU101/02 is 20 dB to 31 dB. The gain range from 20 dB to 26 dB is applicable to the application scenarios with the dispersion compensation module (DCM). The gain range from 26 dB to 31 dB is applicable to the application scenarios without the DCM.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
The gain range of the OAU103 is 24 dB to 36 dB and is mainly used in long-span links. The gain range from 24 dB to 30 dB is used when the DCM is accessed. The gain range from 31 dB to 36 dB is not recommended when the DCM is accessed. Nominal gain of a board = Maximum gain of a board - Insertion loss between the TDC and RDC. The range of the nominal gain is related to the input optical power. If the intermediate insertion loss exceeds the maximum intermediate insertion loss of a board, the board gain may not reach the nominal gain. In this case, the board locks the gain according to the intermediate insertion loss.
l l

The gain queried on the U2000 namely, the actually amplified signal optical power by the optical amplifier board, or the actual gain measured through a meter may be different from the configured nominal gain, because it is affected by device performance. This is because the optical amplifier board actually locks the per-channel power instead of the total power. Noises are generated when the power is amplified by the EDFA and the noise power is at a certain level. In the case of high input power, the impact from the noise is small and the gain of the total power is close to the per-channel gain. In the case of low input power, however, the impact from the noise cannot be neglected. The total output power equals the sum of the signal optical power and the noise power. The noise power and signal optical power can be assimilated because of an increase in total gain. This is normal. In the case of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, you can obtain the value range of the Nominal Gain parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Upper Nominal Gain Threshold (dB) and Lower Nominal Gain Threshold (dB) parameters.
D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit. This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried.

None.
Values
Queriable only.
None.

None.
D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends on the optical module type. The value can be queried.

None.
Values
Queriable only.
None.

None.
D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Description
Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in nonautonegotiation mode.

Non-autonegotiation flow control cannot take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.
Values
Value Range Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow Control, Send Only, Receive Only Default Value Disable

Value Disabled Enable Symmetric Flow Control Send Only Receive Only
Description Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive ends. Enables symmetric flow control frames (allows transmission and receiving) in non-autonegotiation mode. Enables only transmission of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode. Enables only receiving of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.
Set this parameter properly according to actual service configurations.

This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Nonautonegotiation mode.
D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)

Description
The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the preset range.

None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range Min. Attenuation Ratio Max. Attenuation Ratio Default Value Max. Attenuation Ratio Unit dB
l
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit

Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be preset. l Other board The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large. It should be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within 0.5 dB compared with the original attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted.

You can obtain the value range of this parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface)

Description
The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical interface of the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA).

None.
Values
Value Range 1-8 Default Value None.
l l The MCA supports 8-optical interface detection or 4-optical interface detection, depending on the type of the MCA. Before setting the MCA to monitor wavelengths, you are recommended to query this parameter to confirm that the optical interfaces is available on the MCA.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2478
D.44 PHY Loopback

Description
The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

A PHY loopback is used for fault locating but interrupts services. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the MAC Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the MAC Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback.
Values
Value Range Non-Loopback, Inloop Default Value Non-Loopback
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Non-Loopback Inloop Description Indicates that no loopback is configured. Indicates that an internal loopback is configured for a port. In this case, the port receives packets sent by itself.
l l l l l For a GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for a GE electrical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop. For a 10GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop. For an FE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for an FE electrical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop. An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port. By default, a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five minutes.

This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2479
D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)

Description
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.

The configured logical band must be consistent with the actual physical band. Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.
Values
Value Range C, CWDM Default Value -
The following table lists the description of each value. Value C CWDM Description Indicates that the current working band is C band. Indicates that the current working band is CWDM band.
None.

None.
D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side of a board.

If the wavelength is incorrectly set, the downstream services may not be normally received.
Values
C band Value Range 192.10 to 1196.05 (wavelength spacing: 50 GHz) Default Value Unit THz
CWDM band Value Range 1271 to 1611(wavelength spacing: 20 nm) Default Value Unit nm
l l l l l l l l l In the case of the OTUs with a fixed wavelength, set the actual wavelength of the wavelength conversion board. In the case of the OTUs with a variable wavelength, set the wavelength according to network wavelength planning. The same wavelength must be used for a service in the receive and the transmit directions. If a service travels through multiple regeneration stations, it is recommended that these regeneration sections use the same wavelength. It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same wavelength when the inter-board channel protection or client-side path protection is configured. The configured logical wavelength must be consistent with the actual physical wavelength. Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported. In the case of the optical tunable transponders, this parameter directly changes the physical wavelength but cannot change the band. In the case of the optical untunable transponders, this parameter can change the logical wavelength only. For the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800: Table D-1 lists the wavelengths available for the CWDM system. Table D-1 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system Wavelengt h No. 11 12 13
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
Wavelength (nm) 1471 1491 1511
Wavelength No. 15 16 17
Wavelength (nm) 1551 1571 1591

2481
Wavelengt h No. 14
Wavelength (nm) 1531
Wavelength No. 18
Wavelength (nm) 1611

None.
D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)

Description
The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service. Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Encapsulated to FEC5G, Encapsulated to OTU5G Default Value Vary with different boards
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) Description Supports transparent bit (11.1 G) transport for 10GE LAN signals. In this port mapping mode, transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, the bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2482
Value MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)
Description In this port mapping mode, 10GE LAN signals are encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then are mapped into standard OTU frames. This mode supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the signals are encapsulated in standard OTU2 frames and the bit rate of the signals is 10.71 Gbit/s. In addition, the FEC/ AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services. Supports transparent bit (10.7 G) transport for 10GE LAN signals. In this mapping mode, certain AFEC fields are used for transmission of signals. In this mode, the bit rate of signals is 10.71 Gbit/s. Thus, for the signals that adopt AFEC, the encoding gain of AFEC is low and the correction capability of AFEC is comparatively poor.
Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 l l Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port mapping mode. The port mapping mode of 10GE LAN services can be configured as "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)", "MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" or "Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)". Users can select a proper mapping mode according to the service transmission requirements. "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" and "Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" meet customer requirement for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals. If a 10GE LAN signal is directly mapped into an OTU frame by means of bit transparent mapping, the 10GE LAN signal will overflow the OTU frame. Thus, to solve this problem, certain AFEC fields are occupied by the 10GE LAN signal. This is why the AFEC encoding gain is low and AFEC correction capability is comparatively poor for the signals in the AFEC field. In the "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" mode, transmission of signals are achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this mode, however, the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals. "MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)" is specific to transparent transmission of 10GE MAC frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE LAN signal is encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard OTU frame. This mode supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services. The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.

For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l l l
Set the Line Rate parameter to Standard Mode when the value of this parameter is MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). Set the Line Rate parameter to Speedup Mode when the value of this parameter is Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). When the parameter value is changed from MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode automatically changes to AFEC. When the parameter value is changed from Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) or MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode remains unchanged.
D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)

Description
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status of a board. Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.

The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted.
Values
The following table lists the description of each value. Value Enabled Disabled Description Indicates enabling the PRBS test. Indicates disabling the PRBS test.
The PRBS test is only used for deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Enabled during network-wide commissioning and to Disabled after the deployment.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2484

Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the PRBS test.
D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available for the optical amplifier unit. The value can be set or queried.

When the automatic adjustment of the optical power is enabled, this parameter affects the budget of the optical power on the optical channel of the system.
Values
Value Range -30.0-30.0 Default Value The specific value is related to the board Unit dBm
l The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifier unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifier unit runs normally.

None.
D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)

Description
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which this OTU board resides. Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

After this parameter is set, set SD Trigger Condition of the protection group in which the OTU resides to Enabled. When the OTU receives alarms such as B1_SD, the system regards the received alarms of the OTU as the switching trigger condition of the protection group. As a result, switching occurs in the protection group.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Value Range B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, None Default Value None
The following table lists the description of each value. Parameter Value B1_SD OTUk_DEG ODUk_PM_DEG None Remarks Regeneration section (B1) signal degrade. OTUk signal degrade. ODUk_PM signal degrade. No condition is configured for SD switching.
When SD switching is used against a small number of bit errors, the switching is rapidly performed. Select the proper alarms as the switching trigger conditions depending on the service status. The alarms, which can be selected as switching trigger conditions, at certain optical interfaces and channels of a board vary with the board type. If one optical interface supports various services, all the three alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. When the service type is changed, the board automatically counts the corresponding bit errors and reports an SD alarm according to the actual service type.

None..
D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface)

Description

None.
Values
For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG Value Range OTN, SDH Default Value OTN
For the ND2, NQ2, NS2 Value Range ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Automatic Default Value Automatic
For the NS3 Value Range ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Mix, Automatic Default Value Automatic
For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM Value Range Client Mode, OTN Mode Default Value Client Mode
l In the case of the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: The mode of line-side services of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. When a local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the mode of line-side services should be set to SDH. In the case of the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, THA, TOA, LOA and TQM boards: When the client side accesses OTN services, set this parameter to OTN Mode. When the client side accesses other services, set this parameter to Client Mode.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2487
D.52 Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Input Power Loss Threshold (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm. The alarm can be queried.

This parameter is used to determine whether the input optical power is lost for the protection board, optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit. If the optical power is lost, the relevant alarm is reported. This facilitates fault diagnosis. When the optical amplifier boards work in the gain locking mode, this parameter triggers the boards to report the MUT_LOS alarm if the optical power is lost.
Values
Optical protection unit Value Range -35.0 to -10.0 Default Value Unit dBm
Optical supervisory channel unit Value Range -46.0 to -23.0 Default Value Unit dBm
For optical multiplexer unit, optical demultiplexer unit and amplifier board, the value can be queried through the system.
l Protection board The default value is usually recommended, namely, -35 dB. In special cases, you can set this parameter to any value within the allowed range according to the actual situation.

None.
D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (R_LOS) alarm.

This parameter triggers a board to report an R_LOS alarm.
Values
None.

None.
D.54 TSD
Description
The TSD parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled, and if a VCTRUNK member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member.

The system running is not affected.
Values
You can set whether to enable the TSD as required.

This parameter is valid only when Enabling LCAS is set to Enabled.
D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB) parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD) occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The configured value can be queried. The value can be set or queried.

l In the OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800, this parameter functions as the SD switching threshold reference value for optical line protection (OLP), OTU + OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection. During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, the SD switching occurs. This parameter is used to ensure the service quality and enable services to work in the channels with better signals. If the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the value of this parameter, the POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is generated. After the threshold is modified, the corresponding alarm threshold also changes.
Values
Value Range 3.0 - 8.0 Default Value 5 Unit dB
l l l It is recommended to set the threshold to 5 dB. In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted according to the actual situation. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power reaches 5 dB, you can properly increase the threshold if the services in the channel with lower optical power are still normal. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power is far lower than 5 dB, you need to decrease the threshold properly if SD occurs.

None.
D.56 VLAN Priority

Description
The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.

None.
Values
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2491
E Glossary
E
A
AC access control list ACK acknowledgement See alternating current See acknowledgement
Glossary
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource. A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information. Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (using voltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicate successful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels. See access control list Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/ or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in the OADM equipment. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address. See add/drop multiplexer The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. See asymmetric digital subscriber line See automatic gain control
ACL add/drop multiplexer
Add/drop wavelength Address Resolution Protocol
ADM administrative unit
Administrator ADSL AGC
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2492
E Glossary
AID AIS alarm
access identifier See alarm indication signal A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared. The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms. The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault cause is the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that is representative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem. On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
alarm cable alarm cascading alarm cause
alarm indication
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. alarm mask On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting the conditions. The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning. A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following: Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarm indication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indication related with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipment Environment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usually generated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security See automatic level control A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils optical power control on the line that contains the link. The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit, variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node work together to achieve the ALC function. See automatic laser shutdown Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to a frequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.
alarm severity
alarm suppression
alarm type
ALC ALC link
ALC node
ALS alternating current
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2493
E Glossary
American National Standard Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange ANSI antistatic floor APD APE APID application-specific integrated circuit
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocol standards. American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system for representing letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique number between 0 and 127. See American National Standard Institute A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to prevent accumulated static electricity See avalanche photodiode automatic power equilibrium access point identifier A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function. By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for many needs. See automatic protection switching See Address Resolution Protocol A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiple wavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing (DWDM) system. See American Standard Code for Information Interchange amplified spontaneous emission See application-specific integrated circuit See automatically switched optical network A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice) information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from 512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps. A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode. autonomously generated correlation tag See Asynchronous Transfer Mode See administrative unit An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.
APS ARP arrayed waveguide grating ASCII ASE ASIC ASON asymmetric digital subscriber line
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATAG ATM AU auto-negotiation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2494
E Glossary
automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level. automatic laser shutdown A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signal conditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain range and controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics. automatic protection switching Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatically switched A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transport optical network services. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but also other transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections. avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics. See arrayed waveguide grating
AWG
B
background block error ratio backup The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs. A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. See broadband access server A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer. A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables. background block error See background block error ratio See boundary clock Backward Defect Indication backward error indication See bit error rate backward incoming alignment error
bandwidth
BAS basic input/output system bayonet-neillconcelman BBE BBER BC BDI BEI BER BIAE
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2495
E Glossary
bill of material
Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly. It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are a variety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/ planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG]. See basic input/output system See bit-interleaved parity See bit interleaved parity order 8 An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network. A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0. A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X. See building integrated timing supply best master clock See bayonet-neill-concelman See bill of material A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths. See bridge protocol data unit board-level protection switching The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels simultaneously. A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocation and authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuring effective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.
BIOS BIP BIP-8 bit error bit error rate bit interleaved parity order 8 bit-interleaved parity
BITS BMC BNC BOM boundary clock BPDU BPS bridge protocol data unit
bridging broadband access server broadcast
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2496
E Glossary
broadcast service building integrated timing supply
The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks. In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS. Backbone WDM System
BWS
C
cable tie capex capital expenditure The tape used to bind the cables. See capital expenditure Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. A capital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assets or to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond the taxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets such as equipment, property, or industrial buildings. See committed access rate See committed burst size See connectivity check connection control interface See continuity check message chromatic dispersion See Code Division Multiple Access See customer edge See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
CAR CBS CC CCI CCM CD CDMA CE CENELEC
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computers main data-transfer path, the bus. centralized alarm system CF CGMP channel The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console. See compact flash Cisco Group Management Protocol A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s), and Tb/s (1012 bit/s). The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels in a WDM device. See committed information rate
channel spacing CIR
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2497
E Glossary
CIST CLEI CLNP CLNS clock synchronization
Common and Internal Spanning Tree common language equipment identification connectionless network protocol connectionless network service Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.
clock synchronization A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588 compliant with V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control precision time protocol system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds. clock tracing CM CMEP CMI coarse wavelength division multiplexing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. See configuration management connection monitoring end point coded mark inversion A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
Code Division Multiple A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequency Access expansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use different code sequences for multi-address connection. committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
committed burst size
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket. Common Object Request Broker Architecture A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP, object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented. Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
compact flash
concatenation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2498
E Glossary
Configuration Data
A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can collaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factor for normal running of an entire network. 1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization (ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software. 2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configuration information of all nodes in the network.
configuration management
configure congestion connecting plate connection point
To set the basic parameters of an operation object. An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service efficiency. A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets. A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically. CCM is used to detect the link status. 1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or several channels of required signals. 2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
connectivity check continuity check message convergence
convergence service CORBA corrugated pipe CPLD CPU CRC CSA CSES CSMA CST current alarm current performance data
A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for the specific requirements of the convergence service user. See Common Object Request Broker Architecture Used to protect optical fibers. Complex Programmable Logical Device See central processing unit See cyclic redundancy check Canadian Standards Association consecutive severely errored second carrier sense multiple access Common Spanning Tree An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled. Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers, namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of a performance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data only in the specified monitoring period.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2499
E Glossary
customer edge CWDM cyclic redundancy check
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. See coarse wavelength division multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DAPI Data backup data communication network data communications channel destination access point identifiers A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss in the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area. A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF). The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. distribute board protect system See data communications channel See dispersion compensation fiber See dispersion compensation module A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module). See data communication network See digital distribution frame See digital data network A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmission over a communications channel as a single signal. Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber. A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into different device sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If an operation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authority over all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making it unnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately. It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, device type, or another criterion. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DBPS DCC DCF DCM DCM frame DCN DDF DDN demultiplexer dense wavelength division multiplexing device set
DHCP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
diamond-shaped nut digital data network
A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet. A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques. A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the dispersion of transmitting fiber. An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports. See distributed link aggregation group See demultiplexer Dual Node Interconnection A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled. dynamic random database differential phase return to zero Differentiated Services Code Point dispersion slope compensation rate See digital subscriber line access multiplexer Digital Signal Processing Data Terminal Equipment See dual tone multiple frequency data terminal ready In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations of two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used. A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected entity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure. Digital Video Broadcasting
digital distribution frame digital subscriber line access multiplexer dispersion compensation fiber dispersion compensation module Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol distributed link aggregation group
DLAG DMUX; DEMUX DNI domain DRDB DRZ DSCP DSCR DSLAM DSP DTE DTMF DTR dual tone multiple frequency dual-ended switching DVB
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2501
E Glossary
DVMRP DWDM
See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol See dense wavelength division multiplexing
Dynamic Host Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. Configuration Protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
E
E2E EAPE EBS ECC EDFA eDQPSK EFM ejector lever electric supervisory channel electromagnetic compatibility End to End enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium See excess burst size See embedded control channel See erbium doped fiber amplifier enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying See Ethernet in the first mile A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis. A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits the monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals. Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type of network elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NE individually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the network management system (NMS). A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. See electromagnetic compatibility See electromagnetic interference See element management system A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s. See Ethernet private line See Ethernet private LAN service
electromagnetic interference electrostatic discharge element management system
embedded control channel EMC EMI EMS enterprise system connection EPL EPLAN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
erbium doped fiber amplifier
An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range. See electric supervisory channel See enterprise system connection See electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. enhanced small form-factor pluggable A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.. Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the advantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In addition, it meets the users requirements on high definition television system (HDTV) and Video On Demand (VOD). An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. European Telecommunication Standards European Telecommunications Standards Institute A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the ETSI. The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976 in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims to reduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems and services. electrical variable optical attenuator See Ethernet virtual private line See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
ESC ESCON ESD ESD jack eSFP Ethernet
Ethernet in the first mile
Ethernet private LAN service Ethernet private line Ethernet virtual private LAN service Ethernet virtual private line ETS ETSI ETSI 300mm cabinet European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization EVOA EVPL EVPLAN
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2503
E Glossary
excess burst size
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE. The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals. An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitude versus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.
Extended ID External cable eye pattern
F
F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources and intentional settings. fiber Bragg grating See fiber channel flash database See fiber distributed data interface See fast Ethernet See forward error correction A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services. A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for highspeed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network.
fast Ethernet
fault
FBG FC FDB FDDI FE FEC fiber channel
fiber distributed data interface
fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2504
E Glossary
fiber patch cord fiber spool Fiber trough fiber/cable
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers. The trough that is used for routing fibers. Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user information and network management information) and perform transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. See First in First out A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked. An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port. See fiber management tray fixed optical add/drop multiplexer fixed optical attenuator For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interaction of two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves, called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths. See field programmable gate array
field programmable gate array
FIFO File Transfer Protocol
First in First out Flow
FMT FOADM FOAs Forced switch
forward error correction four-wave mixing
FPGA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2505
E Glossary
frame
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.
frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupying the same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain frame alignment. FTP full-duplex See File Transfer Protocol A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with one lane for each direction.
G
gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB. Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flatten or smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequal signal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/or Raman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that the amplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the output spectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier. When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the network and one IP address of the Ethernet port. A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See gigabit general communication channel See GMPLS control plan See gigabit Ethernet The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. It owns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use the network resource more effectively. A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15. See gain flattening filter See generic framing procedure
gain flattening filter
Gateway IP
gateway network element Gb GCC GCP GE GE ADM
generic framing procedure GFF GFP

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
gigabit
In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9) bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a second between two telecommunication points. GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users. generalized multiprotocol label switching The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the ASON features. See gateway network element See Global Positioning System
gigabit Ethernet
Global Positioning System GMPLS GMPLS control plan
GNE GPS
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. grounding GSSP GUI The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called the ground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit. General Snooping and Selection Protocol See graphical user interface
H
Hardware loopback HCS HDB HDLC hierarchical cell structure high level data link control History alarm History Performance Data A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback. See hierarchical cell structure high density bipolar code See high level data link control This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment. That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cell reselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations. The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by adding a trailer and a header. The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories. The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported and stored in the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2507
E Glossary
I
IAE IC ICC ICMP ID identity Idle resource optical NE incoming alignment error See integrated circuit ITU carrier code See Internet Control Message Protocol See identity The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively recognizable or known. When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayed on the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to other optical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDM subracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-click the NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network. See Internet Explorer See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers See Internet Engineering Task Force See Internet Group Management Protocol The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters. A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function. A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for the voice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on a small number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensive transmission service. A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, the performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well. Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the slice of broken fiber. The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces within the cabinet. A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
IE IEC IEEE IETF IGMP Input jitter tolerance
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers integrated circuit integrated services digital network
intelligent power adjustment
Internal cable internal spanning tree
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2508
E Glossary
International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization International Telecommunication Union International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector Internet Control Message Protocol
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards. An international association that works to establish global standards for communications and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers connected by communications networks. A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R). An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the X series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions of Internet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience on the Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791. See Internet Protocol A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identify the host itself. The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication. See intelligent power adjustment
Internet Engineering Task Force
Internet Explorer
Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol
IP IP address
IP over DCC
IPA
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
IPG ISDN ISO IST ITU ITU-T
inter-packet gap See integrated services digital network See International Organization for Standardization See internal spanning tree See International Telecommunication Union See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
J
Jitter Jitter transfer Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability. The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearing at the output port.
L
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration. See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See local area network link access procedure on the D channel link access protocol-SDH A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information. See loopback See link capacity adjustment scheme See liquid crystal display local communication network local craft terminal See light emitting diode long hop
LACP LAG LAN LAPD LAPS Laser
layer
LB LCAS LCD LCN LCT LED LHP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2510
E Glossary
light emitting diode
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical mice and laser-class printers. A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems. In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes, configures, and tests data-link Internet connections. The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the condition of the link. The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP is called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2. For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is called Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus 1. A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure, sandwiched between two transparent electrodes. See logical link control link management protocol loss of clock A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN). A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.
Link Control Protocol link state advertisement linktrace message
linktrace reply
liquid crystal display LLC LMP LOC local area network
Locked switching
logical link control
logical port
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2511
E Glossary
loopback LOP LOS loss of pointer
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. See loss of pointer See Loss Of Signal Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. See logical port link-state pass through See link state advertisement See label switched path linktrace See linktrace message See linktrace reply
Loss Of Signal Lower subrack LP LPT LSA LSP LT LTM LTR
M
MA MAC MADM main distribution frame main path interface at the transmitter main topology Maintenance Associations See media access control multiple add/drop multiplexer A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated. A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector. A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. See metropolitan area network The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that may be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receive port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, and regenerator section.
maintenance domain maintenance point MAN managed object
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2512
E Glossary
Management information management information base manual switch
The information that is used for network management in a transport network. A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal. A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of an SDH network. A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation holes for the cabinet. See maintenance domain Memory Database See main distribution frame message dispatch process message distribution service software maintenance entities The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by the transmitter. The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system. A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. maintenance end point A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN). The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network. See multiframe alignment signal See management information base maintenance intermediate point See multicast listener discovery
Mapping marking-off template MD MDB MDF MDP MDS ME mean launched power Mean Time Between Failures media access control
MEP metropolitan area network
MFAS MIB MIP MLD
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2513
E Glossary
MLM laser MO mother board mounting ear MP MPI MPI-R MPI-S MPLS MS MSA MSI MSOH MSP MSPP MST MSTI MSTP MTA MTBF MTU multi-longitudinal mode laser multicast listener discovery
See multi-longitudinal mode laser See managed object A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronic modules. A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components. See maintenance point main path interface main path interface at the receiver See main path interface at the transmitter See Multiprotocol Label Switching Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Adaptation multi-frame structure identifier See multiplex section overhead See multiplex section protection multi-service provisioning platform See multiplex section termination See multiple spanning tree instance See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Mail Transfer Agent See Mean Time Between Failures Maximum Transmission Unit An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes. The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly connected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network. A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiframe alignment signal
multiple spanning tree Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP instance within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2514
E Glossary
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH definition. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction. Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed. A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. See multiplexer mechanical variable optical attenuator
multiplex section overhead multiplex section protection multiplex section termination multiplexer
Multiplexing
Multiprotocol Label Switching
MUX MVOA
N
NA NCP NE NE database No Acknowledgment See Network Control Protocol See network element There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following: (1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery; (2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM; (3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM. In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB to FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is restored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the main control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to the exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2515
E Glossary
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis. An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID. A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE. The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NEside data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is stored on the NMS side. Network Equipment Building System See network element function This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implements path control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link. A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC board. A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicates with the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled. The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity. ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management, accounting management, configuration management, security management and performance management.
NE ID NE Panel
NE-side data
NEBS NEF Network Control Protocol network element
network element function network management
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. System network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node. network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point access OSI network services. Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client. NM NMS NNI NOC Noise figure NSAP NTP See network management See Network Management System See network node interface network operation center An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing a system. See network service access point See Network Time Protocol
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2516
E Glossary
O
OA OADM OADM frame OAM OC OCI OCP OD ODB ODF ODUk OEQ OFC OLA OLP OM OMS ONE Online Help OOF OPA See optical amplifier See optical add/drop multiplexer A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards. See operation, administration and maintenance See optical coupler open connection indication See optical channel protection optical demultiplexing optical duobinary See optical distribution frame optical channel data unit-k optical equalizer open fiber control See optical line amplifier See optical line protection optical multiplexing optical multiplexing section See optical network element The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions for using their features when so requested by the user. See out of frame optical power adjust
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area. Open Systems Interconnection A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. operation expenditure optical physical section
operation, administration and maintenance
OpEx; OPEX OPS

Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
optic fiber connector
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector).+ A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel. Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium. A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator. A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system. In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical channel protection is configured. A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternating optical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness of each layer is a fraction of the light wavelength. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input optical signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA is the EDFA amplifier. A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and singleended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibers forms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line is normal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carries line signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large. A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/drop multiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The types of ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE is equivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like a common NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consists of different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered like a sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks that form the NE to display the board layout. The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/ noise power. A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved. Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems. A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm). A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects, or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.
optical add/drop multiplexer optical amplifier optical attenuator
optical channel optical channel protection optical coupler
optical distribution frame optical line amplifier
optical line protection
optical network element
optical signal-to-noise ratio optical spectrum analyzer optical supervisory channel Optical switch
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
optical time domain reflectometer optical transmission section optical transponder unit optical transport network optical wavelength shared protection
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault. Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between NEs. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2compliant WDM wavelength. A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection between different stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelength sharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelength shared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured with distributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network where services are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then, two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one service among stations. optical channel payload unit optical channel payload unit-k A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses a component made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of the second company under its own brand. See optical spectrum analyzer See optical supervisory channel See Open Systems Interconnection optical switch node See optical signal-to-noise ratio See open shortest path first See optical time domain reflectometer optical terminal multiplexer See optical transport network See optical transmission section See optical transponder unit optical channel transport unit-k An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specified number of consecutive frame bit positions. The ranger of optical energy level of output signals. Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet. See optical wavelength shared protection
OPU OPUk orderwire original equipment manufacturer OSA OSC OSI OSN OSNR OSPF OTDR OTM OTN OTS OTU OTUk out of frame Output optical power overhead cabling OWSP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2519
E Glossary
P
PA packet over SDH/ SONET packet switched network Packing case Paired slots pass-through PBS PCB PCC PCC PCS PDH PDL PDU PE peak burst size pre-amplifier A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN. A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode. A case which is used for packing the board or subrack. Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane. The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given direction of transmission. See peak burst size See printed circuit board protection communication channel See policy and charging control See physical coding sublayer See plesiochronous digital hierarchy See polarization dependent loss Protocol Data Unit Provider Edge A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics. protection ground A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or referencefrequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency. See physical sublayer & physical layer
peak information rate Performance register
PGND phase-locked loop
PHY
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2520
E Glossary
physical coding sublayer physical sublayer & physical layer PID PIM-DM PIM-SM PIN PIR plesiochronous digital hierarchy PLL PMD PMI POH point to multipoint
The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet after having been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Each sublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications. 1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer: In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical medium that connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC photonics integrated device protocol independent multicast-dense mode See protocol independent multicast sparse mode See Positive Intrinsic Negative See peak information rate A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. See phase-locked loop polarization mode dispersion payload missing indication path overhead A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations (from one to many).
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. Point-to-Point Protocol PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating over Ethernet PPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standard PPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression. Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
polarization dependent The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a component loss when stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units. policy and charging control POS Positive Intrinsic Negative Power box Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCC provides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearer network. See packet over SDH/SONET Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers. A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to various components, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devices from current overload. PPP PPPoE See Point-to-Point Protocol See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2521
E Glossary
PRBS PRC PRI primary rate interface printed circuit board
See pseudo random binary sequence primary reference clock See primary rate interface An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line, or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line. A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate. A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protection policies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode given the priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above, the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connection protection. A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.
protection ground cable Protection path Protection policy
Protection service protocol independent multicast sparse mode
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. PSI PSN PSTN PT PTMP PTN PTP public switched telephone network payload structure identifier See packet switched network See public switched telephone network payload type See point to multipoint packet transport network Point-To-Point A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes called POTS.
Q
QA QoS quality of service Q adaptation See quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2522
E Glossary
R
radio network controller RAI RAM An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources. remote alarm indication See random access memory
random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit (CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order. Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannot be written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatile memory that can be written to as well as read. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Receiver Sensitivity An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).
reconfiguration optical The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/ add/drop multiplexer drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block status of any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel. This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADM is used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can be modified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reduces maintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power, which equalizes the optical power at the channel level. Reed Solomon Code reference clock Reflectance REG Regeneration REI Resource Reservation Protocol A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and Gustave Solomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications. A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference. The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power. A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals. The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits. Remote Error Indication The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). Radio Frequency Requirement for Comments remote failure indication A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway for signals. See Routing Information Protocol
RF RFC RFI ring network RIP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2523
E Glossary
RMON RNC ROADM route Routing Information Protocol
remote network monitoring See radio network controller See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. See Reed Solomon Code In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s. See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol return to zero code
RS Code RS232
RSTP RSVP RZ
S
S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol. The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement, which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off, IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, the IPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm. See storage area network service access point source access point identifiers stimulated Brillouin scattering See square connector See signal degrade SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform a switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network management system. See synchronous digital hierarchy
Safe control switch
SAN SAP SAPI SBS SC SD SD trigger flag
SDH
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
E Glossary
SDI SDP Search domain
See Serial Digital Interface serious disturbance period Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IP addresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example, 10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category B address (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is 129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255. 255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all 192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), which is reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Netid 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address. A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH. Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time. Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection function with a known IP address.
Secure File Transfer Protocol Self-healing
Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals. Serial Line Interface Protocol
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization (source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement as a whole or partially. Service protection SES SETS settings A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end. See severely errored second See synchronous equipment timing source Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Time interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio greater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) . SF SFP SFTP shock-proof reinforce shortcut menu side door See signal fail See small form-factor pluggable See Secure File Transfer Protocol A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipment room so that the cabinet stands stably. A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an objects name or icon. This is also referred to a context menu. The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet against unexpected touch and environment impact.
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2525
E Glossary
side mode suppression The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total ratio source spectrum to the second largest peak. side trough signal cable signal degrade signal fail signal to noise ratio The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet. Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (e.g., dDEG) condition is active. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Simple Network Management Protocol
single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectional failure. single-mode fiber A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wave length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10 microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance. See service level agreement See Serial Line Interface Protocol single longitudinal mode section monitoring A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See single-mode fiber See side mode suppression ratio See subnetwork connection protection See subnetwork connection tunnel protection See Simple Network Management Protocol See signal to noise ratio An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPC includes different classes of services (CoS). See synchronous optical network
SLA SLIP SLM SM small form-factor pluggable SMF SMSR SNCP SNCTP SNMP SNR soft permanent connections SONET
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2526
E Glossary
span
The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies according to transmission system type.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SPC SPM SQL square connector SRLG SRS SSM SSMB SSU STM STM-1 STM-4 storage area network See soft permanent connections self phase modulation See structured query language Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style". Shared Risk Link Group stimulated Raman scattering See Synchronization Status Message synchronization status message byte synchronization supply unit Synchronous Transfer Mode See synchronous transport mode 1 Synchronous Transport Module of order 4 An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers, tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system the devices appear as locally attached devices. See Spanning Tree Protocol A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying, updating, and managing data in relational database systems. Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management. A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A subnetwork ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. An oderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address.
STP structured query language sub-network
sub-network number
subnet mask
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
E Glossary
subnetwork connection SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty, tunnel protection the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel. support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steel plates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling. Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under the supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfy the insulation requirements. An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not occur even when the alarm conditions are met. There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.
Suppression state
Switching priority
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. synchronize NE time synchronous digital hierarchy To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so as to synchronize all NEs with the server. A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure. The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of multiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock. A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).
synchronous equipment timing source synchronous optical network
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s. mode 1
T
TCM TCP TDM TE Tandem Connection Monitoring See Transmission Control Protocol See time division multiplexing See traffic engineering
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2528
E Glossary
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals. See Trivial File Transfer Protocol trace identifier mismatch A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able to interconnect. Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals keeps consistent with the UTC time. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. See Transaction Language 1 Type/Length/Value See terminal multiplexer See Telecommunication Management Network traffic Policing A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by unbalanced loads.
TFTP TIM time division multiplexing
Time Slot Time Synchronization
time to live
TL1 TLV TM TMN TP traffic engineering
Transaction Language Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol. 1 TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1 facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlying management systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (or NE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSS component. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1 (TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is a cross-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manage optical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined in GR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2529
E Glossary
Transmission Control Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices. One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VCn payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed to increase flexibility of the transport network A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines. Two Rate Three Color Marker trail trace identifier See time to live tributary unit See tributary unit group
tray tributary unit group
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
trTCM TTI TTL TU TUG
U
UAS UAT UDP unavailable second See unavailable time event See User Datagram Protocol
unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutive seconds. UNI universal time coordinated Unprotected See user network interface The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide. Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side. The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation rights of a user in the NMS.
upload
Upper subrack User
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2530
E Glossary
User Datagram Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches). UTC See universal time coordinated
V
VB VC VCG VCI virtual channel identifier virtual concatenation group virtual container virtual bridge See virtual container See virtual concatenation group See virtual channel identifier A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 s or 500 s. A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.
virtual local area network virtual path identifier
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities. VLAN VOA voice over IP See virtual local area network Variable Optical Attenuator An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). See voice over IP See virtual path identifier See virtual private network Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
VoIP VPI VPN VRRP
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2531
E Glossary
W
WAN wavelength division multiplexing See wide area network A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
Wavelength protection The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection group structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. WDM WEEE wide area network See wavelength division multiplexing waste electrical and electronic equipment A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic. A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working. weighted round Robin wavelength selective switching Wait To Restore wavelength cross-connection protection The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a type of channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receiving principle and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching between working and protection channels.
Working path Working service WRR WSS WTR WXCP WXCP service
X
XFP XPM 10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable cross-phase modulation
Issue 01 (2011-07-30)
2532

Osn 6800 PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Osn 6800 PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C01

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

About This Document

Indicates an electrical module.

All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

About This Document

Convention Boldface >

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

About This Document

Update 15.8 THA

Added the descriptions of configuring service packages.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

About This Document

Update 31 Filler Panels

Description Introduction to filler panels is added.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

3 Fiber Management Frame..........................................................................................................11 4 DC PDU.........................................................................................................................................16

5 UPM................................................................................................................................................22 6 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack...........................................................................................................29

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

7 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category..............................................................................................95 8 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.........................................................................................................106

9 OptiX OSN 6800 Board Category............................................................................................134 10 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis........................................................................................................140

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

11 OptiX OSN 3800 Board Category..........................................................................................160 12 Frame..........................................................................................................................................164

14 Optical Transponder Unit......................................................................................................182

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

15 Tributary Unit and Line Unit................................................................................................796

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

17 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Unit................................................................1582

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description

18 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit........................................................................1672